Pending: 32009L0075

3.10.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 261/40
(1) Council Directive 79/622/EEC of 25 June 1979 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 79/622/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards their roll-over protection structure (static testing). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States, to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
(a) clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b) fixed or minimum adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c) possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d) mass of 800 kg or more, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as referred to in point 2.1,1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.
ANNEX I Conditions for EC component type-approval
ANNEX II Conditions for testing the strength of the protection structures and of their attachment to tractors
ANNEX III Test procedures
ANNEX IV Figures
ANNEX V Test report model relating to the EC component type-approval test of a protection structure (safety frame or cab) with regard to its strength as well as the strength of its attachment to the tractor (static testing)
ANNEX VI Marks
ANNEX VII Model of EC component type-approval certificate
ANNEX VIII Conditions for EC type-approval
ANNEX IX Annex to the EC type-approval certificate for a tractor type with regard to the strength of the protection structures (safety cab or frame) and of their attachment to the tractor (static testing)
ANNEX X Part A: Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendmentsPart B: List of time limits for transposition into national law
ANNEX XI Correlation table
1.1. ‘Roll-over protection structure’ (safety cab or frame), hereinafter called ‘protection structure’, means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that during the tests prescribed in Annexes II and III they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.
2.1. Every protection structure and its attachment to a tractor must be so designed and constructed as to fulfil the essential purpose laid down in point 1.
2.2. This condition is considered to be fulfilled if the requirements of Annexes II and III are complied with.
3.1. The application for EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a protection structure and the strength of its attachment to a tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by the manufacturer of the protection structure or by their respective authorised representatives.
3.2. The application for EC component type-approval shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars:—general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,—photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,—brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,—details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V). — general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components, — photographs from side and rear showing mounting details, — brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation, — details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
— general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
— photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
— brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
— details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
— general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
— photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
— brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
— details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
3.3. A tractor representative of the tractor type for which the protection structure to be approved is intended shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the component type-approval tests. This tractor shall be fitted with the protection structure.
3.4. The holder of EC component type-approval may request its extension to other tractor types. The competent authority which has granted the original EC component type-approval shall grant the extension if the approved protection structure and the type(s) of tractor for which the extension is requested comply with the following conditions:—the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,—the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,—any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical,—the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests. — the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test, — the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical, — any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical, — the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests.
— the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
— the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
— any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical,
— the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests.
— the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
— the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
— any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical,
— the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests.
4.1. Every protection structure conforming to the approved type shall bear the following markings:4.1.1.the trade mark or name;4.1.2.a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;4.1.3.serial number of the protection structure;4.1.4.make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended. 4.1.1. the trade mark or name; 4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI; 4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure; 4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.2. All these particulars must appear on a small plate.
4.3. These markings must be visible, legible and indelible.
— at start of test, under zero load: ± 2°,
— during test, under load: 10° above and 20° below the horizontal. These variations shall as far as possible be kept to a minimum.
3.1.1.1.1. Longitudinal loading (Annex III, point 1.2)For tractors with at least 50 % of the mass as defined in point 1.3 on the rear wheels the longitudinal loading shall be applied from the rear (case 1). For other tractors the longitudinal loading shall be applied from the front (case 2).
3.1.1.1.2. First crushing testThe first crushing test shall be applied at the same end of the protection structure as the longitudinal loading, i.e.:—at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or—at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6). — at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or — at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6).
— at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or
— at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6).
— at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or
— at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6).
3.1.1.1.3. Loading from the side (Annex III, point 1.3)
3.1.1.1.4. Second crushing testThe second crushing test shall be applied at the opposite end of the protection structure to the longitudinal loading, i.e.:—at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or—at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5). — at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or — at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5).
— at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or
— at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5).
— at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or
— at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5).
3.1.1.1.5. Second longitudinal loading (Annex III, point 1.7)A second longitudinal loading shall be applied to tractors fitted with a protection structure designed to be tilted when the direction of application of the longitudinal loading (see point 3.1.1.1.1) would not have tilted the protection structure.
4.1.1. No part of the zone of clearance as described in point 3.2 of Annex III has been entered by, or has been outside the protection of, the protection structure during the tests specified in points 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6 and, where appropriate, point 1.7 of Annex III.If an overload test has been carried out, the force applied when the specified energy is absorbed shall be greater than 0,8 of the maximum force occurring during both the main test and the overload test concerned (see figures 4b and 4c of Annex IV).
4.1.2. During the tests the protection structure must not impose any constraint on the seat structure.
4.1.3. At the point when the required energy level is attained in each of the specified horizontal loading tests, the force shall exceed 0,8 Fmax.
5.1.1. A general description of the protection structure’s shape and construction (see Annex V for the obligatory dimensions), including the provisions for normal entry, exit and escape; the provisions for the heating and ventilation system, and other accessories where these are available and where they could affect the zone of clearance or might create a hazard.
5.1.2. Details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor.
5.1.3. A brief description of any interior padding.
5.1.4. A statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted and of any EC or other approval marking incorporated.
mt = reference tractor mass (kg), as defined in point 1.3.
D = deflection (mm) of structure at the point of and in line with the load application.
D’ = deflection (mm) of structure for the calculated energy required.
F = static load force (N) (newtons).
Fmax = maximum static load force occurring during loading, (N) with the exception of the overload.
F’ = force for the calculated energy required.
F-D = force/deflection curve.
Eis = energy input to be absorbed during side loading (J) (joules).
Eil 1 = energy input to be absorbed during longitudinal loading (J).
Eil 2 = energy input to be absorbed during application of the second longitudinal load (J).
Fr = applied force at rear in the crushing test (N).
Ff = applied force at front in the crushing test (N).
(a) the strain energy absorbed by the protection structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eil 1(where Eil 1= 1,4 mt);
(b) the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.
(a) the strain energy absorbed by the protection structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eis(where Eis= 1,75 mt); or
(b) the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.
(a) the strain energy absorbed by the structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eil 2(where Eil 2= 0,35 mt); or
(b) the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.
2.3.4.1. where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible, the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;
2.3.4.2. where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible, the joint (B) is fixed at a height which is 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest.
Figure 1 : Point of application of lateral load
Figure 2 : Point of application of longitudinal rear load
Figure 3 : Example of an arrangement for crushing test
Figure 4a : Force/deflection curve — overload test not necessary
Figure 4b : Force/deflection curve — overload test necessary
Figure 4c : Force/deflection curve — overload test to be continued
Figure 5 : Illustration of the terms ‘permanent deflection’, ‘elastic deflection’ and ‘total deflection’
Figure 6a : Side view of zone of clearance
Figure 6b : Front/rear view of zone of clearance
Figure 6c : Isometric view
Figure 7 : Apparatus for determination of seat reference point
Figure 8 : Method of determining seat reference point
1. The application for EC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength of a protection structure and the strength of its attachment to the tractor, shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorised representative.
2. A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a protection structure and its attachment, duly approved, are mounted, shall be submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests.
3. The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests shall check whether the approved type of protection structure is intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the type-approval is requested. In particular, it shall ascertain that the attachment of the protection structure corresponds to that which was tested when the EC component type-approval was granted.
4. The holder of the EC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of protection structures.
5. The competent authorities shall grant such extension on the following conditions:5.1.the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;5.2.it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;5.3.the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted. 5.1. the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval; 5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested; 5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
6. A certificate, of which a model is shown in Annex IX, shall be annexed to the EC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused.
7. If the application for EC type-approval for a type of tractor is introduced at the same time as the request for EC component type-approval for a type of protection structure intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which EC type-approval is requested, the checks laid down in points 2 and 3 shall not be made.
Council Directive 79/622/EEC(OJ L 179, 17.7.1979, p. 1)
Commission Directive 82/953/EEC(OJ L 386, 31.12.1982, p. 31)
Point IX.A.15.(h) of Annex I to the 1985 Act of Accession(OJ L 302, 15.11.1985, p. 213)
Council Directive 87/354/EEC(OJ L 192, 11.7.1987, p. 43) Only as regards references made to Directive 79/622/EEC in Article 1 and point 9(h) of the Annex
Commission Directive 88/413/EEC(OJ L 200, 26.7.1988, p. 32)
Point XI.C.II.4 of Annex I to the 1994 Act of Accession(OJ C 241, 29.8.1994, p. 206)
Commission Directive 1999/40/EC(OJ L 124, 18.5.1999, p. 11)
Point 1.A.29 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 61)
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) Only as regards references made to Directive 79/622/EEC in Article 1 and point A.28 of the Annex
Directive Time limit for transposition
79/622/EEC 27 December 1980
82/953/EEC 30 September 1983(1)
87/354/EEC 31 December 1987
88/413/EEC 30 September 1988(2)
1999/40/EC 30 June 2000(3)
2006/96/EC 31 December 2006
— refuse to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the documents referred to in the last indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— shall no longer issue the document referred to in the last indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor on which the roll-over protection structure does not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on which the rollover protection structure does not comply with the provisions of this Directive.
— refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, or
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— shall not issue the document referred to in Article 10(1) final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor, the roll-over protection device of which does not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor, the roll-over protection structure of which does not comply with the provisions of this Directive.’.
— refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— shall no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by this Directive.’.
Directive 79/622/EEC Directive 1999/40/EC This Directive
Articles 1 and 2 Articles 2 and 3
Article 3(1) Article 4, first paragraph
Article 3(2) Article 4, second and third paragraphs
Articles 4 and 5 Articles 5 and 6
Article 6, first sentence Article 7, first paragraph
Article 6, second sentence Article 7, second paragraph
Article 2 Article 8
Article 8 Article 9
Article 9, introductory wording Article 1, introductory wording
Article 9, first indent Article 1, point (a)
Article 9, second indent Article 1, point (b)
Article 9, third indent Article 1, point (c)
Article 9, fourth indent Article 1, point (d)
Articles 10 and 11 Articles 10 and 11
Article 12(1) —
Article 12(2) Article 12
— Articles 13 and 14
Article 13 Article 15
Annexes I to IX Annexes I to IX
— Annex X
— Annex XI
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 79/622/EEC of 25 June 1979 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 79/622/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards their roll-over protection structure (static testing). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States, to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
This Directive shall apply to tractors as defined in Article 2(j) of Directive 2003/37/EC, having the following characteristics:
(a)
clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b)
fixed or minimum adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c)
possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d)
mass of 800 kg or more, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as referred to in point 2.1,1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.

Article 2
1. Each Member State shall grant EC component type-approval for any type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes I to V.
2. A Member State which has granted EC component type-approval shall take the measures required to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks.

Article 3
Member States shall, for each type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which they approve pursuant to Article 2, issue to the manufacturer of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure, or to their respective authorised representatives, an EC component type-approval mark conforming to the model shown in Annex VI.
Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between roll-over protection structures which have been component type-approved pursuant to Article 2 and other devices.

Article 4
No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures or their tractor attachments on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EC component type-approval mark.
Nevertheless, a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures bearing the EC component type-approval mark which consistently fail to conform to the approved type.
That Member State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision.

Article 5
The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States copies of the component EC type-approval certificates, a model of which is shown in Annex VII, completed for each type of roll-over protection structure which they approve or refuse to approve.

Article 6
1. If the Member State which has granted EC component type-approval finds that a number of roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments bearing the same EC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type.
The competent authorities of that Member State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken which may, if necessary, where there is a serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of the EC component type-approval.
Those authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform.
2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall within one month inform each other of any withdrawal of EC component type-approval and of the reasons for any such measure.

Article 7
Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw component EC type-approval for roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments, or to prohibit their placing on the market or their use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based.
Such decision shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies.

Article 8
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures, if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
2. Member States may not issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.

Article 9
No Member State may refuse to register or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of any tractor on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.

Article 10
For the purposes of EC type-approval, any tractor to which Article 1 refers must be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV.
However, the tractors defined in Article 1 of Directive 2009/57/EC of 13 July 2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council on roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(6)may, for the purposes of EC type-approval, be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV of that Directive.

Article 11
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to IX shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 12
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 13
Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex X, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XI.

Article 14
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 15
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 79/622/EEC of 25 June 1979 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors (static testing)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 79/622/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards their roll-over protection structure (static testing). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States, to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
This Directive shall apply to tractors as defined in Article 2(j) of Directive 2003/37/EC, having the following characteristics:
(a)
clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b)
fixed or minimum adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c)
possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d)
mass of 800 kg or more, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as referred to in point 2.1,1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Each Member State shall grant EC component type-approval for any type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes I to V.
2. A Member State which has granted EC component type-approval shall take the measures required to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks.
Member States shall, for each type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which they approve pursuant to Article 2, issue to the manufacturer of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure, or to their respective authorised representatives, an EC component type-approval mark conforming to the model shown in Annex VI.
Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between roll-over protection structures which have been component type-approved pursuant to Article 2 and other devices.
No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures or their tractor attachments on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EC component type-approval mark.
Nevertheless, a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures bearing the EC component type-approval mark which consistently fail to conform to the approved type.
That Member State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision.
The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States copies of the component EC type-approval certificates, a model of which is shown in Annex VII, completed for each type of roll-over protection structure which they approve or refuse to approve.
1. If the Member State which has granted EC component type-approval finds that a number of roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments bearing the same EC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type.
The competent authorities of that Member State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken which may, if necessary, where there is a serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of the EC component type-approval.
Those authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform.
2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall within one month inform each other of any withdrawal of EC component type-approval and of the reasons for any such measure.
Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw component EC type-approval for roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments, or to prohibit their placing on the market or their use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based.
Such decision shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies.
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures, if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
2. Member States may not issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
No Member State may refuse to register or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of any tractor on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
For the purposes of EC type-approval, any tractor to which Article 1 refers must be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV.
However, the tractors defined in Article 1 of Directive 2009/57/EC of 13 July 2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council on roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(6)may, for the purposes of EC type-approval, be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV of that Directive.
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to IX shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex X, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XI.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

Conditions for EC component type-approval

ANNEX I1. DEFINITION
| 1.1. | ‘Roll-over protection structure’ (safety cab or frame), hereinafter called ‘protection structure’, means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
| 1.2. | The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that during the tests prescribed in Annexes II and III they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
| 2.1. | Every protection structure and its attachment to a tractor must be so designed and constructed as to fulfil the essential purpose laid down in point 1.
| 2.2. | This condition is considered to be fulfilled if the requirements of Annexes II and III are complied with.3. APPLICATION FOR EC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
| 3.1. | The application for EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a protection structure and the strength of its attachment to a tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by the manufacturer of the protection structure or by their respective authorised representatives.
| 3.2. | The application for EC component type-approval shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars:—general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,—photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,—brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,—details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V). | — | general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components, | — | photographs from side and rear showing mounting details, | — | brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation, | — | details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
— | general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
— | photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
— | brief description of the protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
— | details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
| 3.3. | A tractor representative of the tractor type for which the protection structure to be approved is intended shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the component type-approval tests. This tractor shall be fitted with the protection structure.
| 3.4. | The holder of EC component type-approval may request its extension to other tractor types. The competent authority which has granted the original EC component type-approval shall grant the extension if the approved protection structure and the type(s) of tractor for which the extension is requested comply with the following conditions:—the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,—the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,—any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical,—the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests. | — | the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test, | — | the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical, | — | any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical, | — | the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests.
— | the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
— | the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
— | any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the protection structure are identical,
— | the position and critical dimensions of the seat in the protection structure and the relative positions of the protection structure and the tractor shall be such that the zone of clearance would have remained within the protection of the deflected structure throughout all tests.4. MARKINGS
| 4.1. | Every protection structure conforming to the approved type shall bear the following markings:4.1.1.the trade mark or name;4.1.2.a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;4.1.3.serial number of the protection structure;4.1.4.make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended. | 4.1.1. | the trade mark or name; | 4.1.2. | a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI; | 4.1.3. | serial number of the protection structure; | 4.1.4. | make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. | the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. | a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. | serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. | make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
| 4.2. | All these particulars must appear on a small plate.
| 4.3. | These markings must be visible, legible and indelible.

Conditions for testing the strength of the protection structures and of their attachment to tractors

ANNEX II1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1.1. Test purposesTests made using special rigs are intended to simulate such loads as are imposed on a protection structure, when the tractor overturns. These tests, described in Annex III, enable observations to be made on the strength of the protection structure and any brackets attaching it to the tractor and any parts of the tractor which transmit the test force.
1.2. Preparation for test1.2.1. The protection structure must conform to the series production specifications. It shall be attached in accordance with the manufacturer’s declared method of attachment to one of the tractors for which it is designed. A complete tractor is not required for the test; however, the protection structure and parts of the tractor on which it is attached for the tests shall represent an operating installation, hereinafter referred to as ‘the assembly’.
1.2.2. The assembly shall be secured to the bedplate so that the members connecting the assembly and the bedplate do not deflect significantly in relation to the protection structure under loading. The method of attachment of the assembly to the bedplate must not of itself modify the strength of the assembly.
1.2.3. The assembly must be supported and secured or modified so that all the test energy is absorbed by the protection structure and its attachment to the rigid components of the tractor.
1.2.3.1. To comply with the requirements of point 1.2.3, the modification shall lock any tractor ride suspension system so as to ensure that it does not absorb any of the test energy.
1.2.4. For the tests the tractor must be fitted with all structural components of the series production which may influence the strength of the protection structure or which may be necessary for the strength test.
Components which may create a hazard in the zone of clearance must also be fitted so that they may be examined to see whether the requirements of point 4 have been fulfilled.
All components that the driver could himself remove shall be removed for the tests. If it is possible to keep the doors and windows open or to remove them when the tractor is in use, they must be kept open or removed during the tests, so as not to increase the strength of the roll-over protection structure. If, in this position, they constitute a danger for the driver should the tractor roll over, the test report must refer to this fact.
1.3. Tractor massThe reference mass mt, used in the formulae (see Annex III) to calculate the energies and the crushing force, shall be at least that defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC (i.e. excluding optional accessories but including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and driver) plus the protection structure and less 75 kg.
Not included are optional front or rear weights, tyre ballast, mounted implements, mounted equipment or any specialised components.
2. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT2.1. Horizontal loading tests (side and longitudinal)2.1.1. Material, equipment and tie-down means adequate to ensure that the assembly is firmly fixed to the bedplate, independently of tyres if present.
2.1.2. Means of applying a horizontal force on the protection structure by a stiff beam as shown in figures 1 and 2 of Annex IV.
2.1.2.1. The stiff beam shall have a vertical face dimension of 150 mm.
2.1.2.2. Provision must be made so that the load can be uniformly distributed normal to the direction of loading and along a beam having a length of one of the exact multiples of 50 between 250 and 700 mm.
2.1.2.3. The edges of the beam in contact with the protection structure shall be curved with a maximum radius of 50 mm.
2.1.2.4. Universal joints — or the equivalent — shall be incorporated to ensure that the loading device does not constrain the structure in rotation or translation in any direction other than the direction of loading.
2.1.2.5. Where the horizontal length of the protection structure to which the load is to be applied does not constitute a straight line normal to the direction of application of the load, the space shall be packed so as to distribute the load over this length.
2.1.3. Equipment for measuring as far as is technically possible the energy absorbed by the protection structure and the rigid parts of the tractor to which it is attached, for example by measuring the force applied along its direction of application and the corresponding deflection relative to a point on the tractor chassis.
2.1.4. Means for proving that the zone of clearance has not been entered during the test. A rig according to figures 6a, 6b and 6c of Annex IV can be used.
2.2. Crushing tests (rear and front)2.2.1. Material, equipment and tie-down means adequate to ensure that the tractor is firmly fixed to the bedplate, independently of tyres.
2.2.2. Means for applying a vertical force on the protection structure, such as shown in figure 3 of Annex IV, including a stiff crushing beam with a width of 250 mm.
2.2.3. Equipment for measuring the total vertical force applied.
2.2.4. Means for proving that the zone of clearance has not been entered during the test. A rig according to figures 6a, 6b and 6c of Annex IV can be used.
2.3. Measurement tolerances2.3.1. Dimensions: ± 3 mm.
2.3.2. Deflection: ± 3 mm.
2.3.3. Tractor mass: ± 20 kg.
2.3.4. Loads and forces: ± 2 %.
2.3.5. Direction of loading: deviation from horizontal and vertical directions specified in Annex III:

— | at start of test, under zero load: ± 2°,
— | during test, under load: 10° above and 20° below the horizontal. These variations shall as far as possible be kept to a minimum.3. TESTS3.1. General requirements3.1.1. Sequence of tests3.1.1.1. The sequence of tests shall be as follows:

3.1.1.1.1. | Longitudinal loading (Annex III, point 1.2)For tractors with at least 50 % of the mass as defined in point 1.3 on the rear wheels the longitudinal loading shall be applied from the rear (case 1). For other tractors the longitudinal loading shall be applied from the front (case 2).
3.1.1.1.2. | First crushing testThe first crushing test shall be applied at the same end of the protection structure as the longitudinal loading, i.e.:—at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or—at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6). | — | at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or | — | at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6).
— | at the rear in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.5), or
— | at the front in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.6).
3.1.1.1.3. | Loading from the side (Annex III, point 1.3)
3.1.1.1.4. | Second crushing testThe second crushing test shall be applied at the opposite end of the protection structure to the longitudinal loading, i.e.:—at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or—at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5). | — | at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or | — | at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5).
— | at the front in case 1 (Annex III, point 1.6), or
— | at the rear in case 2 (Annex III, point 1.5).
3.1.1.1.5. | Second longitudinal loading (Annex III, point 1.7)A second longitudinal loading shall be applied to tractors fitted with a protection structure designed to be tilted when the direction of application of the longitudinal loading (see point 3.1.1.1.1) would not have tilted the protection structure.3.1.1.2. If, during the test, any part of the restraining equipment breaks or moves, the test shall be re-started.
3.1.1.3. No repairs or adjustments to the tractor or protection structure may be carried out during the tests.
3.1.2. Wheel track widthThe wheels shall be removed or set at a track width setting which ensures that no interference can occur with the protection structure during the tests.
3.1.3. Removal of non-hazard creating componentsAll components of the tractor and protection structure which, as complete units, constitute protection for the driver — including weather protection — shall be supplied complete on a tractor for inspection.
The protection structure to be tested need not be fitted with front, side or rear windows of safety glass or similar material, or with any detachable panels, fittings and accessories, which have no function of structural strength and which cannot create a hazard in the event of overturning.
3.1.4. InstrumentationThe protection structure shall be instrumented with the necessary equipment to obtain the data required to draw the force-deflection diagram (see figure 4 of Annex IV). Total and permanent protection structure deflection shall be measured and noted for each stage of the test (see figure 5 of Annex IV).
3.1.5. Direction of loadingIn the case of a tractor whose seat is not on the median plane of the tractor and/or non-symmetrical strength of the structure, the side loading shall be on the side most likely to lead to infringement of the zone of clearance during the tests (see also Annex III, point 1.3).
4. ACCEPTANCE CONDITIONS4.1. A protection structure submitted for EC component type-approval shall be considered as having satisfied the strength requirements if after the tests it fulfils the following conditions:

4.1.1. | No part of the zone of clearance as described in point 3.2 of Annex III has been entered by, or has been outside the protection of, the protection structure during the tests specified in points 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6 and, where appropriate, point 1.7 of Annex III.If an overload test has been carried out, the force applied when the specified energy is absorbed shall be greater than 0,8 of the maximum force occurring during both the main test and the overload test concerned (see figures 4b and 4c of Annex IV).
4.1.2. | During the tests the protection structure must not impose any constraint on the seat structure.
4.1.3. | At the point when the required energy level is attained in each of the specified horizontal loading tests, the force shall exceed 0,8 Fmax.4.2. In addition there shall be no other feature presenting a particular hazard to the driver, for example insufficient padding inside the roof or anywhere else where the driver’s head may strike.
5. TEST REPORT5.1. The test report shall be attached to the EC component type-approval certificate referred to in Annex VII. The presentation of the report shall be as shown in Annex V. It shall include:

5.1.1. | A general description of the protection structure’s shape and construction (see Annex V for the obligatory dimensions), including the provisions for normal entry, exit and escape; the provisions for the heating and ventilation system, and other accessories where these are available and where they could affect the zone of clearance or might create a hazard.
5.1.2. | Details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor.
5.1.3. | A brief description of any interior padding.
5.1.4. | A statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted and of any EC or other approval marking incorporated.5.2. If EC component type-approval is being extended for other tractor types, the report must include the exact reference of the report of the original EC component type-approval as well as precise indications regarding the requirements laid down in point 3.4 of Annex I.
5.3. The report must identify clearly the tractor type (make, type and commercial description, etc.) used for testing and the types for which the protection structure is intended.
6. SYMBOLS
mt | = | reference tractor mass (kg), as defined in point 1.3.
D | = | deflection (mm) of structure at the point of and in line with the load application.
D’ | = | deflection (mm) of structure for the calculated energy required.
F | = | static load force (N) (newtons).
Fmax | = | maximum static load force occurring during loading, (N) with the exception of the overload.
F’ | = | force for the calculated energy required.
F-D | = | force/deflection curve.
Eis | = | energy input to be absorbed during side loading (J) (joules).
Eil 1 | = | energy input to be absorbed during longitudinal loading (J).
Eil 2 | = | energy input to be absorbed during application of the second longitudinal load (J).
Fr | = | applied force at rear in the crushing test (N).
Ff | = | applied force at front in the crushing test (N).

TEST PROCEDURE

ANNEX III1. HORIZONTAL LOADING AND CRUSHING TESTS1.1. General provisions for horizontal loading tests1.1.1. The loads applied to the protection structure shall be distributed by means of a stiff beam, complying with the specifications laid down in point 2.1.2 of Annex II, located normal to the direction of load application; the stiff beam may be equipped with a means of preventing its being displaced sideways. The rate of deflection under loading shall not be greater than 5 mm/s. As the load is applied, the values F and D shall be recorded simultaneously at deflection increments of 15 mm or less, to ensure accuracy. Once the initial application has commenced, the load shall not be reduced until the test has been completed; but it is permitted to cease increasing the load if desired, for example to record measurements.
1.1.2. If the structural member to which the load is to be applied is curved, the specifications laid down in point 2.1.2.5 of Annex II must be complied with. The application of a load must, however, comply with the requirements of point 1.1.1 above and point 2.1.2 of Annex II.
1.1.3. If no structural cross member exists at the point of application, a substitute test beam which does not add strength to the structure may be utilised for the test procedure.
1.1.4. The structure shall be inspected visually when the load is removed after each loading test has been completed. If cracks or tears have occurred during loading, the overload test specified in point 1.4 below shall be carried out before proceeding to the next loading in the sequence given in point 3.1.1.1 of Annex II.
1.2. Longitudinal loading (see figure 2 of Annex IV)Load application shall be horizontal and parallel to the vertical median plane of the tractor.
For tractors with at least 50 % of their mass, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, on the rear wheels, the longitudinal rear load and the lateral load shall be applied on different sides of the median longitudinal plane of the protection structure. For tractors with at least 50 % of their mass on the front wheels, the longitudinal front load shall be on the same side of the median longitudinal plane of the protection structure as the lateral load.
It shall be applied to the uppermost transverse structural member of the protection structure (i.e. the part which would be likely to strike the ground first in an overturning incident).
The point of application of the load shall be located one-sixth of the width of the top of the protection structure inwards from the outside corner. The width of the protection structure shall be taken as the distance between two lines parallel to the vertical median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremities of the protection structure in the horizontal plane touching the top of the uppermost transverse structural members.
The length of the beam shall be not less than one-third of the width of the protection structure (as previously described) and not more than 49 mm greater than this minimum.
The longitudinal loading is applied from the rear or front, as defined in point 3.1.1.1 of Annex II.
The test shall be stopped whenever:

(a) | the strain energy absorbed by the protection structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eil 1(where Eil 1= 1,4 mt);
(b) | the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.1.3. Loading from the side (see figure 1 of Annex IV)The loading shall be applied horizontally at 90° to the vertical median plane of the tractor. It shall be applied to the upper extremity of the protection structure at a point 300 mm forward of the seat reference point with the seat in its rearmost position (see point 2.3.1). If the protection structure has any projection on the side which would be certain to contact the ground first during a sideways overturn, the loading shall be applied at that point. In the case of a tractor with a reversible position, the load shall be applied to the upper extremity of the roll-over protection structure half-way between the two seat reference points.
The beam shall be as long as practicable, but no more than 700 mm in length.
The test shall be stopped whenever:

(a) | the strain energy absorbed by the protection structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eis(where Eis= 1,75 mt); or
(b) | the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.1.4. Overload test (see figures 4a, 4b and 4c in Annex IV)1.4.1. The overload test must be carried out if the force decreases by more than 3 % during the last 5 % of the deflection achieved, where the energy required is absorbed by the structure (see figure 4b).
1.4.2. The overload test involves the gradual increase of the horizontal load by increments of 5 % of the initial energy requirement up to a maximum of 20 % of energy added (see figure 4c).
1.4.2.1. The overload test is satisfactory if, after each increase by 5 %, 10 % or 15 % in the energy required, the force decreases by less than 3 % for a 5 % increment and remains more than 0,8 Fmax.
1.4.2.2. The overload test is satisfactory if, after the structure has absorbed 20 % of the added energy, the force exceeds 0,8 Fmax.
1.4.2.3. Additional cracks or tears and/or entry into or lack of protection of the zone of clearance due to elastic deformation are permitted during the overload test. However, after the removal of the load, the structure shall not enter the zone of clearance, which shall be completely protected.
1.5. Crushing at the rearThe beam shall be positioned over the rear uppermost structural members and the resultant of crushing forces shall be located in the vertical longitudinal reference plane. A force Fr= 20 mtshall be applied.
Where the rear part of the protection structure roof will not sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the protection structure with that part of the rear of the tractor capable of supporting the vehicle’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed, and the tractor or loading force repositioned so that the beam is over that point of the protection structure which would then support the tractor when completely overturned. The force Frshall then be applied.
The force Frshall be applied for a minimum of five seconds following the cessation of the visually detectable deflection.
The test shall be stopped if the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.
1.6. Crushing at the frontThe beam shall be positioned across the front uppermost structural members and the resultant of crushing forces shall be located in the vertical longitudinal reference plane. A force Ff= 20 mtshall be applied.
Where the front part of the protection structure roof will not sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the protection structure with that part of the front of the tractor capable of supporting the vehicle’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed, and the tractor or loading force repositioned so that the beam is over that point of the protection structure which would then support the tractor when completely overturned. The force Ffshall then be applied.
The force Ffshall be applied for a minimum of five seconds following the cessation of the visually detectable deflection.
The test shall be stopped if the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.
1.7. Second longitudinal loadingLoad application shall be horizontal parallel to the vertical median plane of the tractor.
The second longitudinal loading is applied from the rear or front as defined in point 3.1.1.1 of Annex II.
It shall be applied in the opposite direction to and at the corner furthest from the longitudinal loading in point 1.2.
It shall be applied to the uppermost transverse structural member of the protection structure (i.e. that part which would be likely to strike the ground in an overturning incident).
The point of application of the load shall be located one sixth of the width of the top of the protection structure inwards from the outside corner. The width of the protection structure shall be taken as the distance between two lines parallel to the vertical median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremities of the protection structure in the horizontal plane touching the top of the uppermost transverse structural members.
The length of the beam shall be not less than one third of the width of the protection structure (as previously described) and not more than 49 mm more than this minimum.
The test shall be stopped whenever:

(a) | the strain energy absorbed by the structure is equal to or greater than the required energy input Eil 2(where Eil 2= 0,35 mt); or
(b) | the structure infringes the zone of clearance or leaves the zone of clearance unprotected.2. ZONE OF CLEARANCE2.1. The zone of clearance is illustrated in figure 6 of Annex IV and is defined in relation to a vertical reference plane generally longitudinal to the tractor and passing through a seat reference point, described in point 2.3, and the centre of the steering wheel. The reference plane shall be assumed to move horizontally with the seat and steering wheel during application of the load but to remain perpendicular to the floor of the tractor or of the protection structure if this is resiliently mounted.
Where the steering wheel is adjustable, its position shall be that for normal seated driving.
2.2. The boundaries of the zone shall be taken as:2.2.1. vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;
2.2.2. parallel planes extending from the upper edge of the planes referred to in point 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side loading is applied is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;
2.2.3. a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;
2.2.4. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat backrest;
2.2.5. a surface, if necessary curved, with a series of straight lines perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rearmost point of the seat in contact with the seat backrest throughout its length;
2.2.6. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes referred to in points 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;
2.2.7. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to the plane referred to in point 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;
2.2.8. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface referred to in point 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to the surface referred to in point 2.2.7;
2.2.9. a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;
2.2.10. a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;
2.2.11. in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position, the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined for the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;
2.2.12. in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined seat-reference-point clearance for all available seat options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;
2.2.13. where a new seat option is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation shall be made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the clearance previously established. If this is not the case, a new test shall be required.
2.3. Seat location and seat reference point2.3.1. For the purpose of defining the zone of clearance in point 2.1 the seat shall be at the rearmost point of any horizontal adjustment range. It shall be set at the highest point of the vertical adjustment range where this is independent of adjustment of its horizontal position.
The reference point shall be established using the apparatus illustrated in figures 7 and 8 of Annex IV to simulate loading by a human occupant. The apparatus shall consist of a seat pan board and backrest boards. The lower backrest board shall be jointed in the region of the ischium humps (A) and loin (B), the joint (B) being adjustable in height.
2.3.2. The reference point is defined as the point in the median longitudinal plane of the seat where the tangential plane of the lower backrest and a horizontal plane intersect. This horizontal plane cuts the lower surface of the seat pan board 150 mm in front of the abovementioned tangent.
2.3.3. Where a seat incorporates a free sprung suspension travel, whether or not this can be adjusted for the weight of the driver, the seat shall be set at the mid-point of this travel.
The apparatus shall be positioned on the seat. It shall then be loaded with a force of 550 N at a point 50 mm in front of joint (A), and the two parts of the backrest board shall be lightly pressed tangentially against the backrest.
2.3.4. If it is not possible to determine definite tangents to each area of the backrest (below and above lumbar region) the following shall be done:

2.3.4.1. | where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible, the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;
2.3.4.2. | where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible, the joint (B) is fixed at a height which is 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest.3. CONTROLS AND MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE3.1. Zone of clearanceDuring each test the protection structure shall be examined to see whether any part of the protection structure has entered a zone of clearance round the driving seat as defined in point 2.1. In addition, the protection structure shall be examined to determine whether any part of the zone of clearance is outside the protection of the protection structure. For this purpose, it shall be considered to be outside the protection of the protection structure if any part of it would have come into contact with flat ground if the tractor had overturned towards the direction from which the loading was applied. For this purpose, the tyre and track setting shall be assumed to be the smallest specified by the manufacturer.
3.2. Final permanent deflectionAfter the tests, the final permanent deflection of the protection structure shall be recorded. For this purpose, before the start of the test, the position of the main protection structure members in relation to the seat reference point shall be recorded.

FIGURES

ANNEX IV
Figure 1 | : | Point of application of lateral load
Figure 2 | : | Point of application of longitudinal rear load
Figure 3 | : | Example of an arrangement for crushing test
Figure 4a | : | Force/deflection curve — overload test not necessary
Figure 4b | : | Force/deflection curve — overload test necessary
Figure 4c | : | Force/deflection curve — overload test to be continued
Figure 5 | : | Illustration of the terms ‘permanent deflection’, ‘elastic deflection’ and ‘total deflection’
Figure 6a | : | Side view of zone of clearance
Figure 6b | : | Front/rear view of zone of clearance
Figure 6c | : | Isometric view
Figure 7 | : | Apparatus for determination of seat reference point
Figure 8 | : | Method of determining seat reference point
ANNEX V

MODEL
Report relating to the EC component type-approval test of a protection structure (safety frame or cab) with regard to its strength as well as to the strength of its attachment to the tractor
(static testing)
Protection structure
Make
Type
Tractor make
Tractor type
Identification of test station
EC component type-approval No … 1. Trade mark or name of protection structure … 2. Name and address of manufacturer of protection structure and/or tractor … 3. If applicable, name and address of protection structure and/or tractor manufacturer’s authorised representative … 4. Specifications of tractor on which the tests are carried out
4.1. Trade mark or name …
4.2. Type and commercial description …
4.3. Serial number …
4.4. Mass of unballasted tractor with protection structure fitted, without driver … kg
Tyre sizes: front …
rear … 5. Extension(s) of EC component type-approval for other tractor (1) 5.1. Trade mark or name …
(1) These details to be repeated for each extension.

5.2. Type and commercial description …
5.3. Mass of unballasted tractor, with protection structure fitted, without driver … kg
Tyre sizes: front …
rear … 6. Specifications of protection structure
6.1. General arrangement drawing of both the protection structure and its attachment to the tractor
6.2. Photographs from side and rear showing mounting details
6.3. Brief description of protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding, features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation
6.4. Dimensions
6.4.1. Height of roof members above the seat reference point … mm
6.4.2. Height of roof members above the tractor foot platform … mm
6.4.3. Interior width of the protection structure at 900 mm above the seat reference point … mm
6.4.4. Interior width of the protection structure at a point above the seat at the height of the centre of the steering wheel … mm
6.4.5. Distance from the centre of the steering wheel to the right-hand side of the protection structure … mm
6.4.6. Distance from the centre of the steering wheel to the left-hand side of the protection structure … mm
6.4.7. Minimum distance from the steering wheel rim to the protection structure … mm
6.4.8. Width of the doorways:
at the top … mm
in the middle … mm
at the bottom … mm
6.4.9. Height of the doorways:
above foot platform … mm
above highest mounting step … mm
above lowest mounting step … mm

6.4.10. Overall height of the tractor with the protection structure fitted … mm
6.4.11. Overall width of the protection structure (excluding the wings) … mm
6.4.12. Horizontal distance to the rear of the protection strurture from the seat reference point at a height of 900 mm … mm
6.5. Details and quality of materials used, standards used …
Main frame … (material and dimensions)
Mountings … (material and dimensions)
Cladding … (material and dimensions)
Roof … (material and dimensions)
Interior padding … (material and dimensions)
Assembly and mounting bolts … (grade and dimensions)
Type of windscreen and glazing and details of marking … 7. Test results
7.1. Loading and crushing tests
Loading tests were made to the left/right hand (1) rear and to the right/left hand (1) front and right/left hand side (1) 7.2. The reference mass used for calculating energy input and crushing forces was … kg
7.3. The requirements concerning cracks or tears and the protection of the zone of clearance were fulfilled
7.4. Loading energies:
rear/front (1) … kJ
side … kJ
Crushing force … kN
A second longitudinal loading test was made to the right/left hand front/rear (1) … kJ
7.5. Final permanent deflection measured after the tests:
rear: forwards/backwards (1) left hand … mm
right hand … mm
front: forwards/backwards (1) left hand … mm
right hand … mm
(1) Delete where inapplicable.

side sideways:
front … mm
rear … mm
top downwards/upwards (1):
front … mm
rear … mm 8. Report number … 9. Report date … 10. Signature …
(1) Delete where inapplicable.

MARKS

ANNEX VIThe EC component type-approval mark shall consist of a rectangle surrounding the lowercase letter ‘e’, followed by the distinguishing number of the Member State which has granted the component type-approval:
1.for Germany
2.for France
3.for Italy
4.for the Netherlands
5.for Sweden
6.for Belgium
7.for Hungary
8.for the Czech Republic
9.for Spain
11.for the United Kingdom
12.for Austria
13.for Luxembourg
17.for Finland
18.for Denmark
19.for Romania
20.for Poland
21.for Portugal
23.for Greece
24.for Ireland
26.for Slovenia
27.for Slovakia
29.for Estonia
32.for Latvia
34.for Bulgaria
36.for Lithuania
49.for Cyprus
50.for Malta
It must also include in the vicinity of the rectangle the EC component type-approval number which corresponds to the number of the EC component type-approval certificate issued with regard to the strength of the type of protection structure and its attachment to the tractor.

Example of an EC component type-approval mark
The EC component type-approval mark shall be supplemented by an additional symbol ‘S’

ANNEX VII

MODEL
EC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
Name of competent authority
Notification concerning the granting, refusal, withdrawal or extension of EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a protection structure (safety cab or frame) and to the strength of its attachment to the tractor
(static testing)
EC component type-approval No …
… extension (1) 1. Trade name or mark of protection structure … 2. Name and address of manufacturer of protection structure … 3. If applicable, name and address of authorised representative of manufacturer of protection structure … 4. Trade mark or name, type and commercial description of tractor for which protection structure is intended … 5. Extension of EC component type-approval for the following tractor type(s) …
5.1. The mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in 1.3 of Annex II, exceeds/does not exceed (2) the reference mass used for the test by more than 5 %.
5.2. The method of attachment and points of attachment are/are not (2) identical.
5.3. All the components likely to serve as supports for the protection structure are/are not (2) identical.
5.4. The requirements of the fourth indent of point 3.4 of Annex I are/are not (2) fulfilled. 6. Submitted for EC component type-approval on … 7. Test station … 8. Date and number of the report of the test station … 9. Date of granting/refusal/withdrawal of EC component type-approval (2) … 10. Date of granting/refusal/withdrawal of the extension of EC component type-approval (2) … 11. Place … 12. Date … 13. The following documents, bearing the EC component type-approval number shown above, are annexed to this certificate (e.g. report of the test station) … 14. Remarks, if any … 15. Signature …
(1) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EC component type-approval.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

Conditions for EC type-approval

ANNEX VIII
| 1. | The application for EC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength of a protection structure and the strength of its attachment to the tractor, shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorised representative.
| 2. | A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a protection structure and its attachment, duly approved, are mounted, shall be submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests.
| 3. | The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests shall check whether the approved type of protection structure is intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the type-approval is requested. In particular, it shall ascertain that the attachment of the protection structure corresponds to that which was tested when the EC component type-approval was granted.
| 4. | The holder of the EC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of protection structures.
| 5. | The competent authorities shall grant such extension on the following conditions:5.1.the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;5.2.it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;5.3.the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted. | 5.1. | the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval; | 5.2. | it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested; | 5.3. | the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. | the new type of protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. | it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. | the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
| 6. | A certificate, of which a model is shown in Annex IX, shall be annexed to the EC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused.
| 7. | If the application for EC type-approval for a type of tractor is introduced at the same time as the request for EC component type-approval for a type of protection structure intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which EC type-approval is requested, the checks laid down in points 2 and 3 shall not be made.
ANNEX IX

MODEL
Name of competent authority
ANNEX TO THE EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE STRENGTH OF PROTECTION STRUCTURES (SAFETY CAB OR FRAME) AND THE STRENGTH OF THEIR ATTACHMENT TO THE TRACTOR
(static testing)
(Article 4(2) of Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units and repealing Directive 74/150/EEC)
EC component type-approval No …
… extension (1) 1. Trade name or mark of tractor … 2. Tractor type … 3. Name and address of tractor manufacturer … 4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer’s authorised representative … 5. Trade name or mark of protection structure … 6. Extension of EC type-approval for the following type(s) of protection structure … 7. Tractor submitted for EC type-approval on … 8. Technical service responsible for EC type-approval conformity control … 9. Date of report issued by that service … 10. Number of report issued by that service … 11. EC type-approval with regard to the strength of the protection structures and the strength of their attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (2) … 12. The extension of the EC type-approval with regard to the strength of the protection structures and the strength of their attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (2) … 13. Place … 14. Date … 15. Signature …
(1) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EC component type-approval.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

PART A

ANNEX X
Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
(referred to in Article 13)
Council Directive 79/622/EEC(OJ L 179, 17.7.1979, p. 1) |
Commission Directive 82/953/EEC(OJ L 386, 31.12.1982, p. 31) |
Point IX.A.15.(h) of Annex I to the 1985 Act of Accession(OJ L 302, 15.11.1985, p. 213) |
Council Directive 87/354/EEC(OJ L 192, 11.7.1987, p. 43) | Only as regards references made to Directive 79/622/EEC in Article 1 and point 9(h) of the Annex
Commission Directive 88/413/EEC(OJ L 200, 26.7.1988, p. 32) |
Point XI.C.II.4 of Annex I to the 1994 Act of Accession(OJ C 241, 29.8.1994, p. 206) |
Commission Directive 1999/40/EC(OJ L 124, 18.5.1999, p. 11) |
Point 1.A.29 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 61) |
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) | Only as regards references made to Directive 79/622/EEC in Article 1 and point A.28 of the AnnexPART B
List of time limits for transposition into national law
(referred to in Article 13)
Directive | Time limit for transposition
79/622/EEC | 27 December 1980
82/953/EEC | 30 September 1983(1)
87/354/EEC | 31 December 1987
88/413/EEC | 30 September 1988(2)
1999/40/EC | 30 June 2000(3)
2006/96/EC | 31 December 2006
(1) In accordance with Article 2 of Directive 82/953/EEC:
‘1. With effect from 1 October 1983, no Member State may:
—
refuse to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the documents referred to in the last indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the roll-over protection structure for this type of tractor or these tractors complies with the provisions of this Directive. 2. With effect from 1 October 1984, a Member State:
—
shall no longer issue the document referred to in the last indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor on which the roll-over protection structure does not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on which the rollover protection structure does not comply with the provisions of this Directive. 3. With effect from 1 October 1985, Member States may prohibit the entry into service of tractors on which the roll-over protection structure does not comply with the provisions of this Directive. 4. The provisions of paragraphs 1 to 3 shall be without prejudice to the provisions of Directive 77/536/EEC.’.

(2) In accordance with Article 2 of Directive 88/413/EEC:
‘1. From 1 October 1988 no Member State may:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, or
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the roll-over protection structures of this type of tractor or tractors comply with the provisions of this Directive. 2. From 1 October 1989 Member States:
—
shall not issue the document referred to in Article 10(1) final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor, the roll-over protection device of which does not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor, the roll-over protection structure of which does not comply with the provisions of this Directive.’.

(3) In accordance with Article 2 of Directive 1999/40/EC:
‘1. From 1 July 2000, Member States may not:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the tractors in question meet the requirements of Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by this Directive. 2. From 1 January 2001, Member States:
—
shall no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 79/622/EEC, as amended by this Directive.’.

ANNEX XI
CORRELATION TABLE

Directive 79/622/EEC | Directive 1999/40/EC | This Directive
Articles 1 and 2 | | Articles 2 and 3
Article 3(1) | | Article 4, first paragraph
Article 3(2) | | Article 4, second and third paragraphs
Articles 4 and 5 | | Articles 5 and 6
Article 6, first sentence | | Article 7, first paragraph
Article 6, second sentence | | Article 7, second paragraph
| Article 2 | Article 8
Article 8 | | Article 9
Article 9, introductory wording | | Article 1, introductory wording
Article 9, first indent | | Article 1, point (a)
Article 9, second indent | | Article 1, point (b)
Article 9, third indent | | Article 1, point (c)
Article 9, fourth indent | | Article 1, point (d)
Articles 10 and 11 | | Articles 10 and 11
Article 12(1) | | —
Article 12(2) | | Article 12
— | | Articles 13 and 14
Article 13 | | Article 15
Annexes I to IX | | Annexes I to IX
— | | Annex X
— | | Annex XI

Pending: 32009L0072

14.8.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 211/55
(1) The internal market in electricity, which has been progressively implemented throughout the Community since 1999, aims to deliver real choice for all consumers of the European Union, be they citizens or businesses, new business opportunities and more cross-border trade, so as to achieve efficiency gains, competitive prices, and higher standards of service, and to contribute to security of supply and sustainability.
(2) Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(4)has made a significant contribution towards the creation of such an internal market in electricity.
(3) The freedoms which the Treaty guarantees the citizens of the Union — inter alia, the free movement of goods, the freedom of establishment and the freedom to provide services — are achievable only in a fully open market, which enables all consumers freely to choose their suppliers and all suppliers freely to deliver to their customers.
(4) However, at present, there are obstacles to the sale of electricity on equal terms and without discrimination or disadvantages in the Community. In particular, non-discriminatory network access and an equally effective level of regulatory supervision in each Member State do not yet exist.
(5) A secure supply of electricity is of vital importance for the development of European society, the implementation of a sustainable climate change policy, and the fostering of competitiveness within the internal market. To that end, cross-border interconnections should be further developed in order to secure the supply of all energy sources at the most competitive prices to consumers and industry within the Community.
(6) A well-functioning internal market in electricity should provide producers with the appropriate incentives for investing in new power generation, including in electricity from renewable energy sources, paying special attention to the most isolated countries and regions in the Community’s energy market. A well-functioning market should also provide consumers with adequate measures to promote the more efficient use of energy for which a secure supply of energy is a precondition.
(7) The Communication of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘An Energy Policy for Europe’ highlighted the importance of completing the internal market in electricity and of creating a level playing field for all electricity undertakings established in the Community. The Communications of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Prospects for the internal gas and electricity market’ and ‘Inquiry pursuant to Article 17 of Regulation (EC) No 1/2003 into the European gas and electricity sectors (Final Report)’ showed that the present rules and measures do not provide the necessary framework for achieving the objective of a well-functioning internal market.
(8) In order to secure competition and the supply of electricity at the most competitive price, Member States and national regulatory authorities should facilitate cross-border access for new suppliers of electricity from different energy sources as well as for new providers of power generation.
(9) Without effective separation of networks from activities of generation and supply (effective unbundling), there is an inherent risk of discrimination not only in the operation of the network but also in the incentives for vertically integrated undertakings to invest adequately in their networks.
(10) The rules on legal and functional unbundling as provided for in Directive 2003/54/EC have not, however, led to effective unbundling of the transmission system operators. At its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council therefore invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals for the ‘effective separation of supply and generation activities from network operations’.
(11) Only the removal of the incentive for vertically integrated undertakings to discriminate against competitors as regards network access and investment can ensure effective unbundling. Ownership unbundling, which implies the appointment of the network owner as the system operator and its independence from any supply and production interests, is clearly an effective and stable way to solve the inherent conflict of interests and to ensure security of supply. For that reason, the European Parliament, in its resolution of 10 July 2007 on prospects for the internal gas and electricity market(5)referred to ownership unbundling at transmission level as the most effective tool by which to promote investments in infrastructure in a non-discriminatory way, fair access to the network for new entrants and transparency in the market. Under ownership unbundling, Member States should therefore be required to ensure that the same person or persons are not entitled to exercise control over a generation or supply undertaking and, at the same time, exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator or transmission system. Conversely, control over a transmission system or transmission system operator should preclude the possibility of exercising control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking. Within those limits, a generation or supply undertaking should be able to have a minority shareholding in a transmission system operator or transmission system.
(12) Any system for unbundling should be effective in removing any conflict of interests between producers, suppliers and transmission system operators, in order to create incentives for the necessary investments and guarantee the access of new market entrants under a transparent and efficient regulatory regime and should not create an overly onerous regulatory regime for national regulatory authorities.
(13) The definition of the term ‘control’ is taken from Council Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 of 20 January 2004 on the control of concentrations between undertakings (the EC Merger Regulation)(6).
(14) Since ownership unbundling requires, in some instances, the restructuring of undertakings, Member States that decide to implement ownership unbundling should be granted additional time to apply the relevant provisions. In view of the vertical links between the electricity and gas sectors, the unbundling provisions should apply across the two sectors.
(15) Under ownership unbundling, to ensure full independence of network operation from supply and generation interests and to prevent exchanges of any confidential information, the same person should not be a member of the managing boards of both a transmission system operator or a transmission system and an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply. For the same reason, the same person should not be entitled to appoint members of the managing boards of a transmission system operator or a transmission system and to exercise control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking.
(16) The setting up of a system operator or a transmission operator that is independent from supply and generation interests should enable a vertically integrated undertaking to maintain its ownership of network assets whilst ensuring effective separation of interests, provided that such independent system operator or such independent transmission operator performs all the functions of a system operator and detailed regulation and extensive regulatory control mechanisms are put in place.
(17) Where, on 3 September 2009, an undertaking owning a transmission system is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, Member States should therefore be given a choice between ownership unbundling and setting up a system operator or transmission operator which is independent from supply and generation interests.
(18) To preserve fully the interests of the shareholders of vertically integrated undertakings, Member States should have the choice of implementing ownership unbundling either by direct divestiture or by splitting the shares of the integrated undertaking into shares of the network undertaking and shares of the remaining supply and generation undertaking, provided that the requirements resulting from ownership unbundling are complied with.
(19) The full effectiveness of the independent system operator or independent transmission operator solutions should be ensured by way of specific additional rules. The rules on the independent transmission operator provide an appropriate regulatory framework to guarantee fair competition, sufficient investment, access for new market entrants and the integration of electricity markets. Effective unbundling through the independent transmission operator provisions should be based on a pillar of organisational measures and measures relating to the governance of transmission system operators and on a pillar of measures relating to investment, connecting new production capacities to the network and market integration through regional cooperation. The independence of the transmission operator should also, inter alia, be ensured through certain ‘cooling-off’ periods during which no management or other relevant activity giving access to the same information as could have been obtained in a managerial position is exercised in the vertically integrated undertaking. The independent transmission operator model of effective unbundling is in line with the requirements laid down by the European Council at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007.
(20) In order to develop competition in the internal market in electricity, large non-household customers should be able to choose their suppliers and enter into contracts with several suppliers to secure their electricity requirements. Such customers should be protected against exclusivity clauses the effect of which is to exclude competing or complementary offers.
(21) A Member State has the right to opt for full ownership unbundling in its territory. Where a Member State has exercised that right, an undertaking does not have the right to set up an independent system operator or an independent transmission operator. Furthermore, an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply cannot directly or indirectly exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator from a Member State that has opted for full ownership unbundling.
(22) Under this Directive different types of market organisation will exist in the internal market in electricity. The measures that Member States could take in order to ensure a level playing field should be based on overriding requirements of general interest. The Commission should be consulted on the compatibility of the measures with the Treaty and Community law.
(23) The implementation of effective unbundling should respect the principle of non-discrimination between the public and private sectors. To that end, the same person should not be able to exercise control or any right, in violation of the rules of ownership unbundling or the independent system operator option, solely or jointly, over the composition, voting or decision of the bodies of both the transmission system operators or the transmission systems and the generation or supply undertakings. With regard to ownership unbundling and the independent system operator solution, provided that the Member State in question is able to demonstrate that the requirement is complied with, two separate public bodies should be able to control generation and supply activities on the one hand and transmission activities on the other.
(24) Fully effective separation of network activities from supply and generation activities should apply throughout the Community to both Community and non-Community undertakings. To ensure that network activities and supply and generation activities throughout the Community remain independent from each other, regulatory authorities should be empowered to refuse certification to transmission system operators that do not comply with the unbundling rules. To ensure the consistent application of those rules across the Community, the regulatory authorities should take utmost account of the Commission’s opinion when the former take decisions on certification. To ensure, in addition, respect for the international obligations of the Community, and solidarity and energy security within the Community, the Commission should have the right to give an opinion on certification in relation to a transmission system owner or a transmission system operator which is controlled by a person or persons from a third country or third countries.
(25) The security of energy supply is an essential element of public security and is therefore inherently connected to the efficient functioning of the internal market in electricity and the integration of the isolated electricity markets of Member States. Electricity can reach the citizens of the Union only through the network. Functioning electricity markets and, in particular, the networks and other assets associated with electricity supply are essential for public security, for the competitiveness of the economy and for the well-being of the citizens of the Union. Persons from third countries should therefore be allowed to control a transmission system or a transmission system operator only if they comply with the requirements of effective separation that apply inside the Community. Without prejudice to the international obligations of the Community, the Community considers that the electricity transmission system sector is of high importance to the Community and therefore additional safeguards are necessary regarding the preservation of the security of supply of energy to the Community to avoid any threats to public order and public security in the Community and the welfare of the citizens of the Union. The security of supply of energy to the Community requires, in particular, an assessment of the independence of network operation, the level of the Community’s and individual Member States’ dependence on energy supply from third countries, and the treatment of both domestic and foreign trade and investment in energy in a particular third country. Security of supply should therefore be assessed in the light of the factual circumstances of each case as well as the rights and obligations arising under international law, in particular the international agreements between the Community and the third country concerned. Where appropriate the Commission is encouraged to submit recommendations to negotiate relevant agreements with third countries addressing the security of supply of energy to the Community or to include the necessary issues in other negotiations with those third countries.
(26) Non-discriminatory access to the distribution network determines downstream access to customers at retail level. The scope for discrimination as regards third-party access and investment, however, is less significant at distribution level than at transmission level where congestion and the influence of generation or supply interests are generally greater than at distribution level. Moreover, legal and functional unbundling of distribution system operators was required, pursuant to Directive 2003/54/EC, only from 1 July 2007 and its effects on the internal market in electricity still need to be evaluated. The rules on legal and functional unbundling currently in place can lead to effective unbundling provided they are more clearly defined, properly implemented and closely monitored. To create a level playing field at retail level, the activities of distribution system operators should therefore be monitored so that they are prevented from taking advantage of their vertical integration as regards their competitive position on the market, in particular in relation to household and small non-household customers.
(27) Member States should encourage the modernisation of distribution networks, such as through the introduction of smart grids, which should be built in a way that encourages decentralised generation and energy efficiency.
(28) In the case of small systems it may be necessary that the provision of ancillary services is ensured by transmission system operators interconnected with small systems.
(29) To avoid imposing a disproportionate financial and administrative burden on small distribution system operators, Member States should be able, where necessary, to exempt the undertakings concerned from the legal distribution unbundling requirements.
(30) Where a closed distribution system is used to ensure the optimal efficiency of an integrated energy supply requiring specific operational standards, or a closed distribution system is maintained primarily for the use of the owner of the system, it should be possible to exempt the distribution system operator from obligations which would constitute an unnecessary administrative burden because of the particular nature of the relationship between the distribution system operator and the users of the system. Industrial, commercial or shared services sites such as train station buildings, airports, hospitals, large camping sites with integrated facilities or chemical industry sites can include closed distribution systems because of the specialised nature of their operations.
(31) Authorisation procedures should not lead to an administrative burden disproportionate to the size and potential impact of electricity producers. Unduly lengthy authorisation procedures may constitute a barrier to access for new market entrants.
(32) Further measures should be taken in order to ensure transparent and non-discriminatory tariffs for access to networks. Those tariffs should be applicable to all system users on a non-discriminatory basis.
(33) Directive 2003/54/EC introduced a requirement for Member States to establish regulators with specific competences. However, experience shows that the effectiveness of regulation is frequently hampered through a lack of independence of regulators from government, and insufficient powers and discretion. For that reason, at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals providing for further harmonisation of the powers and strengthening of the independence of national energy regulators. It should be possible for those national regulatory authorities to cover both the electricity and the gas sectors.
(34) Energy regulators need to be able to take decisions in relation to all relevant regulatory issues if the internal market in electricity is to function properly, and to be fully independent from any other public or private interests. This precludes neither judicial review nor parliamentary supervision in accordance with the constitutional laws of the Member States. In addition, approval of the budget of the regulator by the national legislator does not constitute an obstacle to budgetary autonomy. The provisions relating to the autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget of the regulatory authority should be implemented in the framework defined by national budgetary law and rules. While contributing to the independence of the national regulatory authority from any political or economic interest through an appropriate rotation scheme, it should be possible for Member States to take due account of the availability of human resources and of the size of the board.
(35) In order to ensure effective market access for all market players, including new entrants, non-discriminatory and cost-reflective balancing mechanisms are necessary. As soon as the electricity market is sufficiently liquid, this should be achieved through the setting up of transparent market-based mechanisms for the supply and purchase of electricity, needed in the framework of balancing requirements. In the absence of such a liquid market, national regulatory authorities should play an active role to ensure that balancing tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective. At the same time, appropriate incentives should be provided to balance the in-put and off-take of electricity and not to endanger the system. Transmission system operators should facilitate participation of final customers and final customers’ aggregators in reserve and balancing markets.
(36) National regulatory authorities should be able to fix or approve tariffs, or the methodologies underlying the calculation of the tariffs, on the basis of a proposal by the transmission system operator or distribution system operator(s), or on the basis of a proposal agreed between those operator(s) and the users of the network. In carrying out those tasks, national regulatory authorities should ensure that transmission and distribution tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective, and should take account of the long-term, marginal, avoided network costs from distributed generation and demand-side management measures.
(37) Energy regulators should have the power to issue binding decisions in relation to electricity undertakings and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings which fail to comply with their obligations or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties on them. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to decide, irrespective of the application of competition rules, on appropriate measures ensuring customer benefits through the promotion of effective competition necessary for the proper functioning of the internal market in electricity. The establishment of virtual power plants — electricity release programmes whereby electricity undertakings are obliged to sell or to make available a certain volume of electricity or to grant access to part of their generation capacity to interested suppliers for a certain period of time — is one of the possible measures that can be used to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to contribute to ensuring high standards of universal and public service in compliance with market opening, to the protection of vulnerable customers, and to the full effectiveness of consumer protection measures. Those provisions should be without prejudice to both the Commission’s powers concerning the application of competition rules including the examination of mergers with a Community dimension, and the rules on the internal market such as the free movement of capital. The independent body to which a party affected by the decision of a national regulator has a right to appeal could be a court or other tribunal empowered to conduct a judicial review.
(38) Any harmonisation of the powers of national regulatory authorities should include the powers to provide incentives to electricity undertakings, and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. Moreover, regulatory authorities should have the power to request relevant information from electricity undertakings, make appropriate and sufficient investigations and settle disputes.
(39) The internal market in electricity suffers from a lack of liquidity and transparency hindering the efficient allocation of resources, risk hedging and new entry. There is a need for enhancement of competition and security of supply through facilitated integration of new power plants into the electricity network in all Member States, in particular encouraging new market entrants. Trust in the market, its liquidity and the number of market participants needs to increase, and, therefore, regulatory oversight of undertakings active in the supply of electricity needs to be increased. Such requirements should be without prejudice to, and compatible with, existing Community law in relation to the financial markets. Energy regulators and financial market regulators need to cooperate in order to enable each other to have an overview over the markets concerned.
(40) Prior to the adoption by the Commission of Guidelines defining further the record-keeping requirements, the Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators established by Regulation (EC) No 713/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 establishing an Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators(7)(the ‘Agency’), and the Committee of European Securities Regulators (the ‘CESR’), established by Commission Decision 2009/77/EC(8), should confer and advise the Commission in regard to their content. The Agency and the CESR should also cooperate to investigate further and advise on whether transactions in electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives should be subject to pre- or post-trade transparency requirements and, if so, what the content of those requirements should be.
(41) Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authority, should encourage the development of interruptible supply contracts.
(42) All Community industry and commerce, including small and medium-sized enterprises, and all citizens of the Union that enjoy the economic benefits of the internal market should also be able to enjoy high levels of consumer protection, and in particular household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises should also be able to enjoy public service guarantees, in particular with regard to security of supply and reasonable tariffs, for reasons of fairness, competitiveness and, indirectly, to create employment. Those customers should also have access to choice, fairness, representation and dispute settlement mechanisms.
(43) Nearly all Member States have chosen to ensure competition in the electricity generation market through a transparent authorisation procedure. However, Member States should ensure the possibility to contribute to security of supply through the launching of a tendering procedure or an equivalent procedure in the event that sufficient electricity generation capacity is not built on the basis of the authorisation procedure. Member States should have the possibility, in the interests of environmental protection and the promotion of new infant technologies, of tendering for new capacity on the basis of published criteria. Such new capacity includes, inter alia, electricity from renewable energy sources and combined heat and power.
(44) In the interests of security of supply, the balance between supply and demand in individual Member States should be monitored, and such monitoring should be followed by a report on the situation at Community level, taking account of interconnection capacity between areas. Such monitoring should be carried out sufficiently early to enable appropriate measures to be taken if security of supply is compromised. The construction and maintenance of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity, should contribute to ensuring a stable electricity supply. The maintenance and construction of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity and decentralised electricity generation, are important elements in ensuring a stable electricity supply.
(45) Member States should ensure that household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, enjoy the right to be supplied with electricity of a specified quality at clearly comparable, transparent and reasonable prices. In order to ensure the maintenance of the high standards of public service in the Community, all measures taken by Member States to achieve the objective of this Directive should be regularly notified to the Commission. The Commission should regularly publish a report analysing measures taken at national level to achieve public service objectives and comparing their effectiveness, with a view to making recommendations as regards measures to be taken at national level to achieve high public service standards. Member States should take the necessary measures to protect vulnerable customers in the context of the internal market in electricity. Such measures may differ according to the particular circumstances in the Member States in question and may include specific measures relating to the payment of electricity bills, or more general measures taken in the social security system. Where universal service is also provided to small enterprises, measures to ensure that such universal service is provided may differ according to whether they are aimed at household customers or small enterprises.
(46) Respect for the public service requirements is a fundamental requirement of this Directive, and it is important that common minimum standards, respected by all Member States, are specified in this Directive, which take into account the objectives of consumer protection, security of supply, environmental protection and equivalent levels of competition in all Member States. It is important that the public service requirements can be interpreted on a national basis, taking into account national circumstances and subject to the respect of Community law.
(47) It should be possible for Member States to appoint a supplier of last resort. That supplier may be the sales division of a vertically integrated undertaking, which also performs the functions of distribution, provided that it meets the unbundling requirements of this Directive.
(48) It should be possible for measures implemented by Member States to achieve the objectives of social and economic cohesion to include, in particular, the provision of adequate economic incentives, using, where appropriate, all existing national and Community tools. Such tools may include liability mechanisms to guarantee the necessary investment.
(49) To the extent to which measures taken by Member States to fulfil public service obligations constitute State aid under Article 87(1) of the Treaty, there is an obligation under Article 88(3) of the Treaty to notify them to the Commission.
(50) The public service requirements, including as regards the universal service, and the common minimum standards that follow from them need to be further strengthened to make sure that all consumers, especially vulnerable ones, are able to benefit from competition and fair prices. The public service requirements should be defined at national level, taking into account national circumstances; Community law should, however, be respected by the Member States. The citizens of the Union and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, should be able to enjoy public service obligations, in particular with regard to security of supply, and reasonable prices. A key aspect of supplying customers is access to objective and transparent consumption data. Thus, consumers should have access to their consumption data and associated prices and services costs so that they can invite competitors to make an offer based on those data. Consumers should also have the right to be properly informed about their energy consumption. Prepayments should reflect the likely consumption of electricity and different payment systems should be non-discriminatory. Information on energy costs provided to consumers frequently enough will create incentives for energy savings because it will give customers direct feedback on the effects of investment in energy efficiency and change of behaviour. In this respect, full implementation of Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(9)will help consumers to reduce their energy costs.
(51) Consumer interests should be at the heart of this Directive and quality of service should be a central responsibility of electricity undertakings. Existing rights of consumers need to be strengthened and guaranteed, and should include greater transparency. Consumer protection should ensure that all consumers in the wider remit of the Community benefit from a competitive market. Consumer rights should be enforced by Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authorities.
(52) Clear and comprehensible information should be made available to consumers concerning their rights in relation to the energy sector. The Commission should establish, after consulting relevant stakeholders including Member States, national regulatory authorities, consumer organisations and electricity undertakings, an accessible, user-friendly energy consumer checklist providing consumers with practical information about their rights. That checklist should be provided to all consumers and should be made publicly available.
(53) Energy poverty is a growing problem in the Community. Member States which are affected and which have not yet done so should therefore develop national action plans or other appropriate frameworks to tackle energy poverty, aiming at decreasing the number of people suffering such situation. In any event, Member States should ensure the necessary energy supply for vulnerable customers. In doing so, an integrated approach, such as in the framework of social policy, could be used and measures could include social policies or energy efficiency improvements for housing. At the very least, this Directive should allow national policies in favour of vulnerable customers.
(54) Greater consumer protection is guaranteed by the availability of effective means of dispute settlement for all consumers. Member States should introduce speedy and effective complaint handling procedures.
(55) It should be possible to base the introduction of intelligent metering systems on an economic assessment. Should that assessment conclude that the introduction of such metering systems is economically reasonable and cost-effective only for consumers with a certain amount of electricity consumption, Member States should be able to take this into account when implementing intelligent metering systems.
(56) Market prices should give the right incentives for the development of the network and for investing in new electricity generation.
(57) Promoting fair competition and easy access for different suppliers and fostering capacity for new electricity generation should be of the utmost importance for Member States in order to allow consumers to take full advantage of the opportunities of a liberalised internal market in electricity.
(58) With a view to creating an internal market in electricity, Member States should foster the integration of their national markets and the cooperation of system operators at Community and regional level, also incorporating isolated systems forming electricity islands that persist in the Community.
(59) The development of a true internal market in electricity, through a network connected across the Community, should be one of the main goals of this Directive and regulatory issues on cross-border interconnections and regional markets should, therefore, be one of the main tasks of the regulatory authorities, in close cooperation with the Agency where relevant.
(60) Securing common rules for a true internal market and a broad supply of electricity accessible to all should also be one of the main goals of this Directive. To that end, undistorted market prices would provide an incentive for cross-border interconnections and for investments in new power generation while leading, in the long term, to price convergence.
(61) Regulatory authorities should also provide information on the market to permit the Commission to exercise its role of observing and monitoring the internal market in electricity and its short, medium and long-term evolution, including aspects such as generation capacity, different sources of electricity generation, transmission and distribution infrastructure, quality of service, cross-border trade, congestion management, investments, wholesale and consumer prices, market liquidity and environmental and efficiency improvements. National regulatory authorities should report to the competition authorities and the Commission those Member States in which prices impair competition and proper functioning of the market.
(62) Since the objective of this Directive, namely the creation of a fully operational internal electricity market, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve that objective.
(63) Under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on conditions for access to the network for cross-border exchanges in electricity(10), the Commission may adopt Guidelines to achieve the necessary degree of harmonisation. Such Guidelines, which constitute binding implementing measures, are, also with regard to certain provisions of this Directive, a useful tool which can be adapted quickly where necessary.
(64) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(11).
(65) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adopt the Guidelines necessary for providing the minimum degree of harmonisation required to achieve the aim of this Directive. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(66) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional Agreement on better law-making(12), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables, illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures, and to make them public.
(67) Given the scope of the amendments made to Directive 2003/54/EC herein, it is desirable, for reasons of clarity and rationalisation, that the provisions in question should be recast by bringing them all together in a single text in a new Directive.
(68) This Directive respects the fundamental rights, and observes the principles, recognised in particular by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union,
1. ‘generation’ means the production of electricity;
2. ‘producer’ means a natural or legal person generating electricity;
3. ‘transmission’ means the transport of electricity on the extra high-voltage and high-voltage interconnected system with a view to its delivery to final customers or to distributors, but does not include supply;
4. ‘transmission system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the transmission system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems, and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity;
5. ‘distribution’ means the transport of electricity on high-voltage, medium-voltage and low-voltage distribution systems with a view to its delivery to customers, but does not include supply;
6. ‘distribution system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the distribution system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the distribution of electricity;
7. ‘customer’ means a wholesale or final customer of electricity;
8. ‘wholesale customer’ means a natural or legal person purchasing electricity for the purpose of resale inside or outside the system where he is established;
9. ‘final customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own use;
10. ‘household customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own household consumption, excluding commercial or professional activities;
11. ‘non-household customer’ means a natural or legal persons purchasing electricity which is not for their own household use and includes producers and wholesale customers;
12. ‘eligible customer’ means a customer who is free to purchase electricity from the supplier of his choice within the meaning of Article 33;
13. ‘interconnector’ means equipment used to link electricity systems;
14. ‘interconnected system’ means a number of transmission and distribution systems linked together by means of one or more interconnectors;
15. ‘direct line’ means either an electricity line linking an isolated generation site with an isolated customer or an electricity line linking an electricity producer and an electricity supply undertaking to supply directly their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers;
16. ‘economic precedence’ means the ranking of sources of electricity supply in accordance with economic criteria;
17. ‘ancillary service’ means a service necessary for the operation of a transmission or distribution system;
18. ‘system user’ means a natural or legal person supplying to, or being supplied by, a transmission or distribution system;
19. ‘supply’ means the sale, including resale, of electricity to customers;
20. ‘integrated electricity undertaking’ means a vertically or horizontally integrated undertaking;
21. ‘vertically integrated undertaking’ means an electricity undertaking or a group of electricity undertakings where the same person or the same persons are entitled, directly or indirectly, to exercise control, and where the undertaking or group of undertakings perform at least one of the functions of transmission or distribution, and at least one of the functions of generation or supply of electricity;
22. ‘related undertaking’ means affiliated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 41 of the Seventh Council Directive 83/349/EEC of 13 June 1983 based on Article 44(2)(g)(*1)of the Treaty on consolidated accounts(13), and/or associated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 33(1) of that Directive, and/or undertakings which belong to the same shareholders;
23. ‘horizontally integrated undertaking’ means an undertaking performing at least one of the functions of generation for sale, or transmission, or distribution, or supply of electricity, and another non-electricity activity;
24. ‘tendering procedure’ means the procedure through which planned additional requirements and replacement capacity are covered by supplies from new or existing generating capacity;
25. ‘long-term planning’ means the planning of the need for investment in generation and transmission and distribution capacity on a long-term basis, with a view to meeting the demand of the system for electricity and securing supplies to customers;
26. ‘small isolated system’ means any system with consumption of less than 3 000 GWh in the year 1996, where less than 5 % of annual consumption is obtained through interconnection with other systems;
27. ‘micro isolated system’ means any system with consumption less than 500 GWh in the year 1996, where there is no connection with other systems;
28. ‘security’ means both security of supply and provision of electricity, and technical safety;
29. ‘energy efficiency/demand-side management’ means a global or integrated approach aimed at influencing the amount and timing of electricity consumption in order to reduce primary energy consumption and peak loads by giving precedence to investments in energy efficiency measures, or other measures, such as interruptible supply contracts, over investments to increase generation capacity, if the former are the most effective and economical option, taking into account the positive environmental impact of reduced energy consumption and the security of supply and distribution cost aspects related to it;
30. ‘renewable energy sources’ means renewable non-fossil energy sources (wind, solar, geothermal, wave, tidal, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases);
31. ‘distributed generation’ means generation plants connected to the distribution system;
32. ‘electricity supply contract’ means a contract for the supply of electricity, but does not include an electricity derivative;
33. ‘electricity derivative’ means a financial instrument specified in points 5, 6 or 7 of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2004/39/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on markets in financial instruments(14), where that instrument relates to electricity;
34. ‘control’ means rights, contracts or any other means which, either separately or in combination and having regard to the considerations of fact or law involved, confer the possibility of exercising decisive influence on an undertaking, in particular by:(a)ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking;(b)rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking; (a) ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking; (b) rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking;
(a) ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking;
(b) rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking;
(a) ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking;
(b) rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking;
35. ‘electricity undertaking’ means any natural or legal person carrying out at least one of the following functions: generation, transmission, distribution, supply, or purchase of electricity, which is responsible for the commercial, technical or maintenance tasks related to those functions, but does not include final customers.
(a) where a customer, while respecting contractual conditions, wishes to change supplier, the change is effected by the operator(s) concerned within three weeks; and
(b) customers are entitled to receive all relevant consumption data.
(a) the contribution of each energy source to the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year in a comprehensible and, at a national level, clearly comparable manner;
(b) at least the reference to existing reference sources, such as web pages, where information on the environmental impact, in terms of at least CO2emissions and the radioactive waste resulting from the electricity produced by the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year is publicly available;
(c) information concerning their rights as regards the means of dispute settlement available to them in the event of a dispute.
(a) the safety and security of the electricity system, installations and associated equipment;
(b) the protection of public health and safety;
(c) the protection of the environment;
(d) land use and siting;
(e) the use of public ground;
(f) energy efficiency;
(g) the nature of the primary sources;
(h) the characteristics particular to the applicant, such as technical, economic and financial capabilities;
(i) compliance with measures adopted pursuant to Article 3;
(j) the contribution of the generating capacity to meeting the overall Community target of at least a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy in 2020 referred to in Article 3(1) of Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources(16); and
(k) the contribution of generating capacity to reducing emissions.
(a) each undertaking which owns a transmission system acts as a transmission system operator;
(b) the same person or persons are entitled neither:(i)directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor(ii)directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply; (i) directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor (ii) directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply;
(i) directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor
(ii) directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply;
(i) directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor
(ii) directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply;
(c) the same person or persons are not entitled to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of a transmission system operator or a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply; and
(d) the same person is not entitled to be a member of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of both an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply and a transmission system operator or a transmission system.
(a) the power to exercise voting rights;
(b) the power to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking; or
(c) the holding of a majority share.
(a) designate an independent system operator in accordance with Article 13; or
(b) comply with the provisions of Chapter V.
(a) upon notification by the transmission system operator pursuant to paragraph 3;
(b) on their own initiative where they have knowledge that a planned change in rights or influence over transmission system owners or transmission system operators may lead to an infringement of Article 9, or where they have reason to believe that such an infringement may have occurred; or
(c) upon a reasoned request from the Commission.
(a) that the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b) to the regulatory authority or to another competent authority designated by the Member State that granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply of the Member State and the Community. In considering that question the regulatory authority or other competent authority so designated shall take into account:(i)the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply;(ii)the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and(iii)other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned. (i) the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply; (ii) the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and (iii) other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned.
(i) the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply;
(ii) the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and
(iii) other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned.
(i) the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply;
(ii) the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and
(iii) other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned.
(a) the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b) granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply to the Community.
(a) the specific facts of the case and the third country or third countries concerned; and
(b) the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country or third countries arising under international law, including an agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of supply.
(a) ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity, operating, maintaining and developing under economic conditions secure, reliable and efficient transmission systems with due regard to the environment;
(b) ensuring adequate means to meet service obligations;
(c) contributing to security of supply through adequate transmission capacity and system reliability;
(d) managing electricity flows on the system, taking into account exchanges with other interconnected systems. To that end, the transmission system operator shall be responsible for ensuring a secure, reliable and efficient electricity system and, in that context, for ensuring the availability of all necessary ancillary services, including those provided by demand response, insofar as such availability is independent from any other transmission system with which its system is interconnected;
(e) providing to the operator of any other system with which its system is interconnected sufficient information to ensure the secure and efficient operation, coordinated development and interoperability of the interconnected system;
(f) ensuring non-discrimination as between system users or classes of system users, particularly in favour of its related undertakings;
(g) providing system users with the information they need for efficient access to the system; and
(h) collecting congestion rents and payments under the inter-transmission system operator compensation mechanism, in compliance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, granting and managing third-party access and giving reasoned explanations when it denies such access, which shall be monitored by the national regulatory authorities; in carrying out their tasks under this Article transmission system operators shall primarily facilitate market integration.
(a) the candidate operator has demonstrated that it complies with the requirements of Article 9(1)(b), (c) and (d);
(b) the candidate operator has demonstrated that it has at its disposal the required financial, technical, physical and human resources to carry out its tasks under Article 12;
(c) the candidate operator has undertaken to comply with a ten-year network development plan monitored by the regulatory authority;
(d) the transmission system owner has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under paragraph 5. To that end, it shall provide all the draft contractual arrangements with the candidate undertaking and any other relevant entity; and
(e) the candidate operator has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 including the cooperation of transmission system operators at European and regional level.
(a) provide all the relevant cooperation and support to the independent system operator for the fulfilment of its tasks, including in particular all relevant information;
(b) finance the investments decided by the independent system operator and approved by the regulatory authority, or give its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator. The relevant financing arrangements shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Prior to such approval, the regulatory authority shall consult the transmission system owner together with the other interested parties;
(c) provide for the coverage of liability relating to the network assets, excluding the liability relating to the tasks of the independent system operator; and
(d) provide guarantees to facilitate financing any network expansions with the exception of those investments where, pursuant to point (b), it has given its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator.
(a) persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner shall not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, distribution and supply of electricity;
(b) appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that the professional interests of persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently; and
(c) the transmission system owner shall establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet those objectives. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme to the regulatory authority and shall be published.
(a) assets that are necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the transmission system, shall be owned by the transmission system operator;
(b) personnel, necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the performance of all corporate tasks, shall be employed by the transmission system operator;
(c) leasing of personnel and rendering of services, to and from any other parts of the vertically integrated undertaking shall be prohibited. A transmission system operator may, however, render services to the vertically integrated undertaking as long as:(i)the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and(ii)the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority; (i) the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and (ii) the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority;
(i) the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and
(ii) the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority;
(i) the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and
(ii) the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority;
(d) without prejudice to the decisions of the Supervisory Body under Article 20, appropriate financial resources for future investment projects and/or for the replacement of existing assets shall be made available to the transmission system operator in due time by the vertically integrated undertaking following an appropriate request from the transmission system operator.
(a) the representation of the transmission system operator and contacts to third parties and the regulatory authorities;
(b) the representation of the transmission system operator within the European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity (ENTSO for Electricity);
(c) granting and managing third-party access on a non-discriminatory basis between system users or classes of system users;
(d) the collection of all the transmission system related charges including access charges, balancing charges for ancillary services such as purchasing of services (balancing costs, energy for losses);
(e) the operation, maintenance and development of a secure, efficient and economic transmission system;
(f) investment planning ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demand and guaranteeing security of supply;
(g) the setting up of appropriate joint ventures, including with one or more transmission system operators, power exchanges, and the other relevant actors pursuing the objectives to develop the creation of regional markets or to facilitate the liberalisation process; and
(h) all corporate services, including legal services, accountancy and IT services.
(a) effective decision-making rights, independent from the vertically integrated undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the transmission system; and
(b) the power to raise money on the capital market in particular through borrowing and capital increase.
(a) doubts arise as to the professional independence of a nominated person responsible for the management and/or member of the administrative bodies; or
(b) in the case of premature termination of a term of office, doubts exist regarding the justification of such premature termination.
(a) monitoring the implementation of the compliance programme;
(b) elaborating an annual report, setting out the measures taken in order to implement the compliance programme and submitting it to the regulatory authority;
(c) reporting to the Supervisory Body and issuing recommendations on the compliance programme and its implementation;
(d) notifying the regulatory authority on any substantial breaches with regard to the implementation of the compliance programme; and
(e) reporting to the regulatory authority on any commercial and financial relations between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator.
(a) conditions for access to the network, as defined in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, in particular regarding tariffs, third party access services, capacity allocation and congestion management, transparency, balancing and secondary markets;
(b) projects undertaken in order to operate, maintain and develop the transmission system, including interconnection and connection investments;
(c) energy purchases or sales necessary for the operation of the transmission system.
(a) indicate to market participants the main transmission infrastructure that needs to be built or upgraded over the next ten years;
(b) contain all the investments already decided and identify new investments which have to be executed in the next three years; and
(c) provide for a time frame for all investment projects.
(a) to require the transmission system operator to execute the investments in question;
(b) to organise a tender procedure open to any investors for the investment in question; or
(c) to oblige the transmission system operator to accept a capital increase to finance the necessary investments and allow independent investors to participate in the capital.
(a) financing by any third party;
(b) construction by any third party;
(c) building the new assets concerned itself;
(d) operating the new asset concerned itself.
(a) those persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator must not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, transmission or supply of electricity;
(b) appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that the professional interests of the persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently;
(c) the distribution system operator must have effective decision-making rights, independent from the integrated electricity undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the network. In order to fulfil those tasks, the distribution system operator shall have at its disposal the necessary resources including human, technical, physical and financial resources. This should not prevent the existence of appropriate coordination mechanisms to ensure that the economic and management supervision rights of the parent company in respect of return on assets, regulated indirectly in accordance with Article 37(6), in a subsidiary are protected. In particular, this shall enable the parent company to approve the annual financial plan, or any equivalent instrument, of the distribution system operator and to set global limits on the levels of indebtedness of its subsidiary. It shall not permit the parent company to give instructions regarding day-to-day operations, nor with respect to individual decisions concerning the construction or upgrading of distribution lines, that do not exceed the terms of the approved financial plan, or any equivalent instrument; and
(d) the distribution system operator must establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet that objective. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme, the compliance officer of the distribution system operator, to the regulatory authority referred to in Article 35(1) and shall be published. The compliance officer of the distribution system operator shall be fully independent and shall have access to all the necessary information of the distribution system operator and any affiliated undertaking to fulfil his task.
(a) for specific technical or safety reasons, the operations or the production process of the users of that system are integrated; or
(b) that system distributes electricity primarily to the owner or operator of the system or their related undertakings.
(a) the requirement under Article 25(5) to procure the energy it uses to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in its system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market based procedures;
(b) the requirement under Article 32(1) that tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, are approved prior to their entry into force in accordance with Article 37.
(a) until 1 July 2004, the eligible customers as specified in Article 19(1) to (3) of Directive 96/92/EC. Member States shall publish by 31 January each year the criteria for the definition of those eligible customers;
(b) from 1 July 2004, all non-household customers;
(c) from 1 July 2007, all customers.
(a) contracts for the supply of electricity with an eligible customer in the system of another Member State shall not be prohibited if the customer is considered as eligible in both systems involved; and
(b) where transactions as described in point (a) are refused because the customer is eligible in only one of the two systems, the Commission may, taking into account the situation in the market and the common interest, oblige the refusing party to execute the requested supply at the request of the Member State where the eligible customer is located.
(a) all electricity producers and electricity supply undertakings established within their territory to supply their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers through a direct line; and
(b) all eligible customers within their territory to be supplied through a direct line by a producer and supply undertakings.
(a) is legally distinct and functionally independent from any other public or private entity;
(b) ensures that its staff and the persons responsible for its management:(i)act independently from any market interest; and(ii)do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37. (i) act independently from any market interest; and (ii) do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37.
(i) act independently from any market interest; and
(ii) do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37.
(i) act independently from any market interest; and
(ii) do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37.
(a) the regulatory authority can take autonomous decisions, independently from any political body, and has separate annual budget allocations, with autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget, and adequate human and financial resources to carry out its duties; and
(b) the members of the board of the regulatory authority or, in the absence of a board, the regulatory authority’s top management are appointed for a fixed term of five up to seven years, renewable once.
(a) promoting, in close cooperation with the Agency, regulatory authorities of other Member States and the Commission, a competitive, secure and environmentally sustainable internal market in electricity within the Community, and effective market opening for all customers and suppliers in the Community and ensuring appropriate conditions for the effective and reliable operation of electricity networks, taking into account long-term objectives;
(b) developing competitive and properly functioning regional markets within the Community in view of the achievement of the objectives referred to in point (a);
(c) eliminating restrictions on trade in electricity between Member States, including developing appropriate cross-border transmission capacities to meet demand and enhancing the integration of national markets which may facilitate electricity flows across the Community;
(d) helping to achieve, in the most cost-effective way, the development of secure, reliable and efficient non-discriminatory systems that are consumer oriented, and promoting system adequacy and, in line with general energy policy objectives, energy efficiency as well as the integration of large and small-scale production of electricity from renewable energy sources and distributed generation in both transmission and distribution networks;
(e) facilitating access to the network for new generation capacity, in particular removing barriers that could prevent access for new market entrants and of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(f) ensuring that system operators and system users are granted appropriate incentives, in both the short and the long term, to increase efficiencies in system performance and foster market integration;
(g) ensuring that customers benefit through the efficient functioning of their national market, promoting effective competition and helping to ensure consumer protection;
(h) helping to achieve high standards of universal and public service in electricity supply, contributing to the protection of vulnerable customers and contributing to the compatibility of necessary data exchange processes for customer switching.
(a) fixing or approving, in accordance with transparent criteria, transmission or distribution tariffs or their methodologies;
(b) ensuring compliance of transmission and distribution system operators and, where relevant, system owners, as well as of any electricity undertakings, with their obligations under this Directive and other relevant Community legislation, including as regards cross-border issues;
(c) cooperating in regard to cross-border issues with the regulatory authority or authorities of the Member States concerned and with the Agency;
(d) complying with, and implementing, any relevant legally binding decisions of the Agency and of the Commission;
(e) reporting annually on its activity and the fulfilment of its duties to the relevant authorities of the Member States, the Agency and the Commission. Such reports shall cover the steps taken and the results obtained as regards each of the tasks listed in this Article;
(f) ensuring that there are no cross-subsidies between transmission, distribution, and supply activities;
(g) monitoring investment plans of the transmission system operators, and providing in its annual report an assessment of the investment plans of the transmission system operators as regards their consistency with the Community-wide network development plan referred to in Article 8(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009; such assessment may include recommendations to amend those investment plans;
(h) monitoring compliance with and reviewing the past performance of network security and reliability rules and setting or approving standards and requirements for quality of service and supply or contributing thereto together with other competent authorities;
(i) monitoring the level of transparency, including of wholesale prices, and ensuring compliance of electricity undertakings with transparency obligations;
(j) monitoring the level and effectiveness of market opening and competition at wholesale and retail levels, including on electricity exchanges, prices for household customers including prepayment systems, switching rates, disconnection rates, charges for and the execution of maintenance services, and complaints by household customers, as well as any distortion or restriction of competition, including providing any relevant information, and bringing any relevant cases to the relevant competition authorities;
(k) monitoring the occurrence of restrictive contractual practices, including exclusivity clauses which may prevent large non-household customers from contracting simultaneously with more than one supplier or restrict their choice to do so, and, where appropriate, informing the national competition authorities of such practices;
(l) respecting contractual freedom with regard to interruptible supply contracts and with regard to long-term contracts provided that they are compatible with Community law and consistent with Community policies;
(m) monitoring the time taken by transmission and distribution system operators to make connections and repairs;
(n) helping to ensure, together with other relevant authorities, that the consumer protection measures, including those set out in Annex I, are effective and enforced;
(o) publishing recommendations, at least annually, in relation to compliance of supply prices with Article 3, and providing these to the competition authorities, where appropriate;
(p) ensuring access to customer consumption data, the provision, for optional use, of an easily understandable harmonised format at national level for consumption data, and prompt access for all customers to such data under point (h) of Annex I;
(q) monitoring the implementation of rules relating to the roles and responsibilities of transmission system operators, distribution system operators, suppliers and customers and other market parties pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 714/2009;
(r) monitoring investment in generation capacities in relation to security of supply;
(s) monitoring technical cooperation between Community and third-country transmission system operators;
(t) monitoring the implementation of safeguards measures as referred to in Article 42; and
(u) contributing to the compatibility of data exchange processes for the most important market processes at regional level.
(a) monitor the transmission system owner’s and the independent system operator’s compliance with their obligations under this Article, and issue penalties for non-compliance in accordance with paragraph 4(d);
(b) monitor the relations and communications between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner so as to ensure compliance of the independent system operator with its obligations, and in particular approve contracts and act as a dispute settlement authority between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner in respect of any complaint submitted by either party pursuant to paragraph 11;
(c) without prejudice to the procedure under Article 13(2)(c), for the first ten-year network development plan, approve the investments planning and the multi-annual network development plan presented annually by the independent system operator;
(d) ensure that network access tariffs collected by the independent system operator include remuneration for the network owner or network owners, which provides for adequate remuneration of the network assets and of any new investments made therein, provided they are economically and efficiently incurred;
(e) have the powers to carry out inspections, including unannounced inspections, at the premises of transmission system owner and independent system operator; and
(f) monitor the use of congestion charges collected by the independent system operator in accordance with Article 16(6) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
(a) to issue binding decisions on electricity undertakings;
(b) to carry out investigations into the functioning of the electricity markets, and to decide upon and impose any necessary and proportionate measures to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Where appropriate, the regulatory authority shall also have the power to cooperate with the national competition authority and the financial market regulators or the Commission in conducting an investigation relating to competition law;
(c) to require any information from electricity undertakings relevant for the fulfilment of its tasks, including the justification for any refusal to grant third-party access, and any information on measures necessary to reinforce the network;
(d) to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings not complying with their obligations under this Directive or any relevant legally binding decisions of the regulatory authority or of the Agency, or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. This shall include the power to impose or propose the imposition of penalties of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the transmission system operator on the transmission system operator or of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the vertically integrated undertaking on the vertically integrated undertaking, as the case may be, for non-compliance with their respective obligations pursuant to this Directive; and
(e) appropriate rights of investigations and relevant powers of instructions for dispute settlement under paragraphs 11 and 12.
(a) to issue penalties in accordance with paragraph 4(d) for discriminatory behaviour in favour of the vertically integrated undertaking;
(b) to monitor communications between the transmission system operator and the vertically integrated undertaking so as to ensure compliance of the transmission system operator with its obligations;
(c) to act as dispute settlement authority between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator in respect of any complaint submitted pursuant to paragraph 11;
(d) to monitor commercial and financial relations including loans between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator;
(e) to approve all commercial and financial agreements between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator on the condition that they comply with market conditions;
(f) to request justification from the vertically integrated undertaking when notified by the compliance officer in accordance with Article 21(4). Such justification shall, in particular, include evidence to the end that no discriminatory behaviour to the advantage of the vertically integrated undertaking has occurred;
(g) to carry out inspections, including unannounced ones, on the premises of the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator; and
(h) to assign all or specific tasks of the transmission system operator to an independent system operator appointed in accordance with Article 13 in case of a persistent breach by the transmission system operator of its obligations under this Directive, in particular in case of repeated discriminatory behaviour to the benefit of the vertically integrated undertaking.
(a) connection and access to national networks, including transmission and distribution tariffs or their methodologies. Those tariffs or methodologies shall allow the necessary investments in the networks to be carried out in a manner allowing those investments to ensure the viability of the networks;
(b) the provision of balancing services which shall be performed in the most economic manner possible and provide appropriate incentives for network users to balance their input and off-takes. The balancing services shall be provided in a fair and non-discriminatory manner and be based on objective criteria; and
(c) access to cross-border infrastructures, including the procedures for the allocation of capacity and congestion management.
(a) foster the creation of operational arrangements in order to enable an optimal management of the network, promote joint electricity exchanges and the allocation of cross-border capacity, and to enable an adequate level of interconnection capacity, including through new interconnection, within the region and between regions to allow for development of effective competition and improvement of security of supply, without discriminating between supply undertakings in different Member States;
(b) coordinate the development of all network codes for the relevant transmission system operators and other market actors; and
(c) coordinate the development of the rules governing the management of congestion.
(a) not to raise objections against the decision of the regulatory authority; or
(b) to require the regulatory authority concerned to withdraw its decision on the basis that that the Guidelines have not been complied with.
(a) the experience gained and progress made in creating a complete and fully operational internal market in electricity and the obstacles that remain in this respect, including aspects of market dominance, concentration in the market, predatory or anti-competitive behaviour and the effect thereof in terms of market distortion;
(b) the extent to which the unbundling and tarification requirements contained in this Directive have been successful in ensuring fair and non-discriminatory access to the Community’s electricity system and equivalent levels of competition, as well as the economic, environmental and social consequences of the opening of the electricity market to customers;
(c) an examination of issues relating to system capacity levels and security of supply of electricity in the Community, and in particular the existing and projected balance between demand and supply, taking into account the physical capacity for exchanges between areas;
(d) special attention will be given to measures taken in Member States to cover peak demand and to deal with shortfalls of one or more suppliers;
(e) the implementation of the derogation provided under Article 26(4) with a view to a possible revision of the threshold;
(f) a general assessment of the progress achieved with regard to bilateral relations with third countries which produce and export or transport electricity, including progress in market integration, the social and environmental consequences of the trade in electricity and access to the networks of such third countries;
(g) the need for possible harmonisation requirements that are not linked to the provisions of this Directive; and
(h) the manner in which Member States have implemented in practice the requirements regarding energy labelling contained in Article 3(9), and the manner in which any Commission recommendations on that issue have been taken into account.
— the existence of non-discriminatory network access,
— effective regulation,
— the development of interconnection infrastructure and the security of supply situation in the Community,
— the extent to which the full benefits of the opening of markets are accruing to small enterprises and household customers, notably with respect to public service and universal service standards,
— the extent to which markets are in practice open to effective competition, including aspects of market dominance, market concentration and predatory or anti-competitive behaviour,
— the extent to which customers are actually switching suppliers and renegotiating tariffs,
— price developments, including supply prices, in relation to the degree of the opening of markets; and,
— the experience gained in the application of this Directive as far as the effective independence of system operators in vertically integrated undertakings is concerned and whether other measures in addition to functional independence and separation of accounts have been developed which have effects equivalent to legal unbundling.
(a) have a right to a contract with their electricity service provider that specifies:—the identity and address of the supplier,—the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection,—the types of maintenance service offered,—the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained,—the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted,—any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing,—the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f),—information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,Conditions shall be fair and well-known in advance. In any case, this information should be provided prior to the conclusion or confirmation of the contract. Where contracts are concluded through intermediaries, the information relating to the matters set out in this point shall also be provided prior to the conclusion of the contract; — the identity and address of the supplier, — the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection, — the types of maintenance service offered, — the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained, — the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted, — any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing, — the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f), — information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,
— the identity and address of the supplier,
— the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection,
— the types of maintenance service offered,
— the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained,
— the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted,
— any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing,
— the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f),
— information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,
— the identity and address of the supplier,
— the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection,
— the types of maintenance service offered,
— the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained,
— the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted,
— any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing,
— the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f),
— information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,
(b) are given adequate notice of any intention to modify contractual conditions and are informed about their right of withdrawal when the notice is given. Service providers shall notify their subscribers directly of any increase in charges, at an appropriate time no later than one normal billing period after the increase comes into effect in a transparent and comprehensible manner. Member States shall ensure that customers are free to withdraw from contracts if they do not accept the new conditions notified to them by their electricity service provider;
(c) receive transparent information on applicable prices and tariffs and on standard terms and conditions, in respect of access to and use of electricity services;
(d) are offered a wide choice of payment methods, which do not unduly discriminate between customers. Prepayment systems shall be fair and adequately reflect likely consumption. Any difference in terms and conditions shall reflect the costs to the supplier of the different payment systems. General terms and conditions shall be fair and transparent. They shall be given in clear and comprehensible language and shall not include non-contractual barriers to the exercise of customers’ rights, for example excessive contractual documentation. Customers shall be protected against unfair or misleading selling methods;
(e) are not charged for changing supplier;
(f) benefit from transparent, simple and inexpensive procedures for dealing with their complaints. In particular, all consumers shall have the right to a good standard of service and complaint handling by their electricity service provider. Such out-of-court dispute settlements procedures shall enable disputes to be settled fairly and promptly, preferably within three months, with provision, where warranted, for a system of reimbursement and/or compensation. They should, wherever possible, be in line with the principles set out in Commission Recommendation 98/257/EC of 30 March 1998 on the principles applicable to the bodies responsible for out-of-court settlement of consumer disputes(3);
(g) when having access to universal service under the provisions adopted by Member States pursuant to Article 3(3), are informed about their rights regarding universal service;
(h) have at their disposal their consumption data, and shall be able to, by explicit agreement and free of charge, give any registered supply undertaking access to its metering data. The party responsible for data management shall be obliged to give those data to the undertaking. Member States shall define a format for the data and a procedure for suppliers and consumers to have access to the data. No additional costs shall be charged to the consumer for that service;
(i) are properly informed of actual electricity consumption and costs frequently enough to enable them to regulate their own electricity consumption. That information shall be given by using a sufficient time frame, which takes account of the capability of customer’s metering equipment and the electricity product in question. Due account shall be taken of the cost-efficiency of such measures. No additional costs shall be charged to the consumer for that service;
(j) receive a final closure account following any change of electricity supplier no later than six weeks after the change of supplier has taken place.
Directive 2003/54/EC This Directive
Article 1 Article 1
Article 2 Article 2
Article 3 Article 3
Article 4 Article 4
Article 5 Article 5
— Article 6
Article 6 Article 7
Article 7 Article 8
Article 10 Article 9
Article 8 Article 10
— Article 11
Article 9 Article 12
— Article 13
— Article 14
Article 11 Article 15
Article 12 Article 16
— Article 17
— Article 18
— Article 19
— Article 20
— Article 21
— Article 22
— Article 23
Article 13 Article 24
Article 14 Article 25
Article 15 Article 26
Article 16 Article 27
Article 17 Article 29
Article 18 Article 30
Article 19 Article 31
Article 20 Article 32
Article 21 Article 33
Article 22 Article 34
Article 23(1) (first and second sentence) Article 35
— Article 36
Article 23 (rest) Article 37
— Article 38
— Article 39
— Article 40
— Article 41
Article 24 Article 42
— Article 43
Article 25 —
Article 26 Article 44
Article 27 Article 45
— Article 46
Article 28 Article 47
Article 29 Article 48
Article 30 Article 49
Article 31 Article 50
Article 32 Article 51
Annex A Annex I
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 47(2) and Articles 55 and 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions(2),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(3),
(1) The internal market in electricity, which has been progressively implemented throughout the Community since 1999, aims to deliver real choice for all consumers of the European Union, be they citizens or businesses, new business opportunities and more cross-border trade, so as to achieve efficiency gains, competitive prices, and higher standards of service, and to contribute to security of supply and sustainability.
(2) Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(4)has made a significant contribution towards the creation of such an internal market in electricity.
(3) The freedoms which the Treaty guarantees the citizens of the Union — inter alia, the free movement of goods, the freedom of establishment and the freedom to provide services — are achievable only in a fully open market, which enables all consumers freely to choose their suppliers and all suppliers freely to deliver to their customers.
(4) However, at present, there are obstacles to the sale of electricity on equal terms and without discrimination or disadvantages in the Community. In particular, non-discriminatory network access and an equally effective level of regulatory supervision in each Member State do not yet exist.
(5) A secure supply of electricity is of vital importance for the development of European society, the implementation of a sustainable climate change policy, and the fostering of competitiveness within the internal market. To that end, cross-border interconnections should be further developed in order to secure the supply of all energy sources at the most competitive prices to consumers and industry within the Community.
(6) A well-functioning internal market in electricity should provide producers with the appropriate incentives for investing in new power generation, including in electricity from renewable energy sources, paying special attention to the most isolated countries and regions in the Community’s energy market. A well-functioning market should also provide consumers with adequate measures to promote the more efficient use of energy for which a secure supply of energy is a precondition.
(7) The Communication of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘An Energy Policy for Europe’ highlighted the importance of completing the internal market in electricity and of creating a level playing field for all electricity undertakings established in the Community. The Communications of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Prospects for the internal gas and electricity market’ and ‘Inquiry pursuant to Article 17 of Regulation (EC) No 1/2003 into the European gas and electricity sectors (Final Report)’ showed that the present rules and measures do not provide the necessary framework for achieving the objective of a well-functioning internal market.
(8) In order to secure competition and the supply of electricity at the most competitive price, Member States and national regulatory authorities should facilitate cross-border access for new suppliers of electricity from different energy sources as well as for new providers of power generation.
(9) Without effective separation of networks from activities of generation and supply (effective unbundling), there is an inherent risk of discrimination not only in the operation of the network but also in the incentives for vertically integrated undertakings to invest adequately in their networks.
(10) The rules on legal and functional unbundling as provided for in Directive 2003/54/EC have not, however, led to effective unbundling of the transmission system operators. At its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council therefore invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals for the ‘effective separation of supply and generation activities from network operations’.
(11) Only the removal of the incentive for vertically integrated undertakings to discriminate against competitors as regards network access and investment can ensure effective unbundling. Ownership unbundling, which implies the appointment of the network owner as the system operator and its independence from any supply and production interests, is clearly an effective and stable way to solve the inherent conflict of interests and to ensure security of supply. For that reason, the European Parliament, in its resolution of 10 July 2007 on prospects for the internal gas and electricity market(5)referred to ownership unbundling at transmission level as the most effective tool by which to promote investments in infrastructure in a non-discriminatory way, fair access to the network for new entrants and transparency in the market. Under ownership unbundling, Member States should therefore be required to ensure that the same person or persons are not entitled to exercise control over a generation or supply undertaking and, at the same time, exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator or transmission system. Conversely, control over a transmission system or transmission system operator should preclude the possibility of exercising control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking. Within those limits, a generation or supply undertaking should be able to have a minority shareholding in a transmission system operator or transmission system.
(12) Any system for unbundling should be effective in removing any conflict of interests between producers, suppliers and transmission system operators, in order to create incentives for the necessary investments and guarantee the access of new market entrants under a transparent and efficient regulatory regime and should not create an overly onerous regulatory regime for national regulatory authorities.
(13) The definition of the term ‘control’ is taken from Council Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 of 20 January 2004 on the control of concentrations between undertakings (the EC Merger Regulation)(6).
(14) Since ownership unbundling requires, in some instances, the restructuring of undertakings, Member States that decide to implement ownership unbundling should be granted additional time to apply the relevant provisions. In view of the vertical links between the electricity and gas sectors, the unbundling provisions should apply across the two sectors.
(15) Under ownership unbundling, to ensure full independence of network operation from supply and generation interests and to prevent exchanges of any confidential information, the same person should not be a member of the managing boards of both a transmission system operator or a transmission system and an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply. For the same reason, the same person should not be entitled to appoint members of the managing boards of a transmission system operator or a transmission system and to exercise control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking.
(16) The setting up of a system operator or a transmission operator that is independent from supply and generation interests should enable a vertically integrated undertaking to maintain its ownership of network assets whilst ensuring effective separation of interests, provided that such independent system operator or such independent transmission operator performs all the functions of a system operator and detailed regulation and extensive regulatory control mechanisms are put in place.
(17) Where, on 3 September 2009, an undertaking owning a transmission system is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, Member States should therefore be given a choice between ownership unbundling and setting up a system operator or transmission operator which is independent from supply and generation interests.
(18) To preserve fully the interests of the shareholders of vertically integrated undertakings, Member States should have the choice of implementing ownership unbundling either by direct divestiture or by splitting the shares of the integrated undertaking into shares of the network undertaking and shares of the remaining supply and generation undertaking, provided that the requirements resulting from ownership unbundling are complied with.
(19) The full effectiveness of the independent system operator or independent transmission operator solutions should be ensured by way of specific additional rules. The rules on the independent transmission operator provide an appropriate regulatory framework to guarantee fair competition, sufficient investment, access for new market entrants and the integration of electricity markets. Effective unbundling through the independent transmission operator provisions should be based on a pillar of organisational measures and measures relating to the governance of transmission system operators and on a pillar of measures relating to investment, connecting new production capacities to the network and market integration through regional cooperation. The independence of the transmission operator should also, inter alia, be ensured through certain ‘cooling-off’ periods during which no management or other relevant activity giving access to the same information as could have been obtained in a managerial position is exercised in the vertically integrated undertaking. The independent transmission operator model of effective unbundling is in line with the requirements laid down by the European Council at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007.
(20) In order to develop competition in the internal market in electricity, large non-household customers should be able to choose their suppliers and enter into contracts with several suppliers to secure their electricity requirements. Such customers should be protected against exclusivity clauses the effect of which is to exclude competing or complementary offers.
(21) A Member State has the right to opt for full ownership unbundling in its territory. Where a Member State has exercised that right, an undertaking does not have the right to set up an independent system operator or an independent transmission operator. Furthermore, an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply cannot directly or indirectly exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator from a Member State that has opted for full ownership unbundling.
(22) Under this Directive different types of market organisation will exist in the internal market in electricity. The measures that Member States could take in order to ensure a level playing field should be based on overriding requirements of general interest. The Commission should be consulted on the compatibility of the measures with the Treaty and Community law.
(23) The implementation of effective unbundling should respect the principle of non-discrimination between the public and private sectors. To that end, the same person should not be able to exercise control or any right, in violation of the rules of ownership unbundling or the independent system operator option, solely or jointly, over the composition, voting or decision of the bodies of both the transmission system operators or the transmission systems and the generation or supply undertakings. With regard to ownership unbundling and the independent system operator solution, provided that the Member State in question is able to demonstrate that the requirement is complied with, two separate public bodies should be able to control generation and supply activities on the one hand and transmission activities on the other.
(24) Fully effective separation of network activities from supply and generation activities should apply throughout the Community to both Community and non-Community undertakings. To ensure that network activities and supply and generation activities throughout the Community remain independent from each other, regulatory authorities should be empowered to refuse certification to transmission system operators that do not comply with the unbundling rules. To ensure the consistent application of those rules across the Community, the regulatory authorities should take utmost account of the Commission’s opinion when the former take decisions on certification. To ensure, in addition, respect for the international obligations of the Community, and solidarity and energy security within the Community, the Commission should have the right to give an opinion on certification in relation to a transmission system owner or a transmission system operator which is controlled by a person or persons from a third country or third countries.
(25) The security of energy supply is an essential element of public security and is therefore inherently connected to the efficient functioning of the internal market in electricity and the integration of the isolated electricity markets of Member States. Electricity can reach the citizens of the Union only through the network. Functioning electricity markets and, in particular, the networks and other assets associated with electricity supply are essential for public security, for the competitiveness of the economy and for the well-being of the citizens of the Union. Persons from third countries should therefore be allowed to control a transmission system or a transmission system operator only if they comply with the requirements of effective separation that apply inside the Community. Without prejudice to the international obligations of the Community, the Community considers that the electricity transmission system sector is of high importance to the Community and therefore additional safeguards are necessary regarding the preservation of the security of supply of energy to the Community to avoid any threats to public order and public security in the Community and the welfare of the citizens of the Union. The security of supply of energy to the Community requires, in particular, an assessment of the independence of network operation, the level of the Community’s and individual Member States’ dependence on energy supply from third countries, and the treatment of both domestic and foreign trade and investment in energy in a particular third country. Security of supply should therefore be assessed in the light of the factual circumstances of each case as well as the rights and obligations arising under international law, in particular the international agreements between the Community and the third country concerned. Where appropriate the Commission is encouraged to submit recommendations to negotiate relevant agreements with third countries addressing the security of supply of energy to the Community or to include the necessary issues in other negotiations with those third countries.
(26) Non-discriminatory access to the distribution network determines downstream access to customers at retail level. The scope for discrimination as regards third-party access and investment, however, is less significant at distribution level than at transmission level where congestion and the influence of generation or supply interests are generally greater than at distribution level. Moreover, legal and functional unbundling of distribution system operators was required, pursuant to Directive 2003/54/EC, only from 1 July 2007 and its effects on the internal market in electricity still need to be evaluated. The rules on legal and functional unbundling currently in place can lead to effective unbundling provided they are more clearly defined, properly implemented and closely monitored. To create a level playing field at retail level, the activities of distribution system operators should therefore be monitored so that they are prevented from taking advantage of their vertical integration as regards their competitive position on the market, in particular in relation to household and small non-household customers.
(27) Member States should encourage the modernisation of distribution networks, such as through the introduction of smart grids, which should be built in a way that encourages decentralised generation and energy efficiency.
(28) In the case of small systems it may be necessary that the provision of ancillary services is ensured by transmission system operators interconnected with small systems.
(29) To avoid imposing a disproportionate financial and administrative burden on small distribution system operators, Member States should be able, where necessary, to exempt the undertakings concerned from the legal distribution unbundling requirements.
(30) Where a closed distribution system is used to ensure the optimal efficiency of an integrated energy supply requiring specific operational standards, or a closed distribution system is maintained primarily for the use of the owner of the system, it should be possible to exempt the distribution system operator from obligations which would constitute an unnecessary administrative burden because of the particular nature of the relationship between the distribution system operator and the users of the system. Industrial, commercial or shared services sites such as train station buildings, airports, hospitals, large camping sites with integrated facilities or chemical industry sites can include closed distribution systems because of the specialised nature of their operations.
(31) Authorisation procedures should not lead to an administrative burden disproportionate to the size and potential impact of electricity producers. Unduly lengthy authorisation procedures may constitute a barrier to access for new market entrants.
(32) Further measures should be taken in order to ensure transparent and non-discriminatory tariffs for access to networks. Those tariffs should be applicable to all system users on a non-discriminatory basis.
(33) Directive 2003/54/EC introduced a requirement for Member States to establish regulators with specific competences. However, experience shows that the effectiveness of regulation is frequently hampered through a lack of independence of regulators from government, and insufficient powers and discretion. For that reason, at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals providing for further harmonisation of the powers and strengthening of the independence of national energy regulators. It should be possible for those national regulatory authorities to cover both the electricity and the gas sectors.
(34) Energy regulators need to be able to take decisions in relation to all relevant regulatory issues if the internal market in electricity is to function properly, and to be fully independent from any other public or private interests. This precludes neither judicial review nor parliamentary supervision in accordance with the constitutional laws of the Member States. In addition, approval of the budget of the regulator by the national legislator does not constitute an obstacle to budgetary autonomy. The provisions relating to the autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget of the regulatory authority should be implemented in the framework defined by national budgetary law and rules. While contributing to the independence of the national regulatory authority from any political or economic interest through an appropriate rotation scheme, it should be possible for Member States to take due account of the availability of human resources and of the size of the board.
(35) In order to ensure effective market access for all market players, including new entrants, non-discriminatory and cost-reflective balancing mechanisms are necessary. As soon as the electricity market is sufficiently liquid, this should be achieved through the setting up of transparent market-based mechanisms for the supply and purchase of electricity, needed in the framework of balancing requirements. In the absence of such a liquid market, national regulatory authorities should play an active role to ensure that balancing tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective. At the same time, appropriate incentives should be provided to balance the in-put and off-take of electricity and not to endanger the system. Transmission system operators should facilitate participation of final customers and final customers’ aggregators in reserve and balancing markets.
(36) National regulatory authorities should be able to fix or approve tariffs, or the methodologies underlying the calculation of the tariffs, on the basis of a proposal by the transmission system operator or distribution system operator(s), or on the basis of a proposal agreed between those operator(s) and the users of the network. In carrying out those tasks, national regulatory authorities should ensure that transmission and distribution tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective, and should take account of the long-term, marginal, avoided network costs from distributed generation and demand-side management measures.
(37) Energy regulators should have the power to issue binding decisions in relation to electricity undertakings and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings which fail to comply with their obligations or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties on them. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to decide, irrespective of the application of competition rules, on appropriate measures ensuring customer benefits through the promotion of effective competition necessary for the proper functioning of the internal market in electricity. The establishment of virtual power plants — electricity release programmes whereby electricity undertakings are obliged to sell or to make available a certain volume of electricity or to grant access to part of their generation capacity to interested suppliers for a certain period of time — is one of the possible measures that can be used to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to contribute to ensuring high standards of universal and public service in compliance with market opening, to the protection of vulnerable customers, and to the full effectiveness of consumer protection measures. Those provisions should be without prejudice to both the Commission’s powers concerning the application of competition rules including the examination of mergers with a Community dimension, and the rules on the internal market such as the free movement of capital. The independent body to which a party affected by the decision of a national regulator has a right to appeal could be a court or other tribunal empowered to conduct a judicial review.
(38) Any harmonisation of the powers of national regulatory authorities should include the powers to provide incentives to electricity undertakings, and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. Moreover, regulatory authorities should have the power to request relevant information from electricity undertakings, make appropriate and sufficient investigations and settle disputes.
(39) The internal market in electricity suffers from a lack of liquidity and transparency hindering the efficient allocation of resources, risk hedging and new entry. There is a need for enhancement of competition and security of supply through facilitated integration of new power plants into the electricity network in all Member States, in particular encouraging new market entrants. Trust in the market, its liquidity and the number of market participants needs to increase, and, therefore, regulatory oversight of undertakings active in the supply of electricity needs to be increased. Such requirements should be without prejudice to, and compatible with, existing Community law in relation to the financial markets. Energy regulators and financial market regulators need to cooperate in order to enable each other to have an overview over the markets concerned.
(40) Prior to the adoption by the Commission of Guidelines defining further the record-keeping requirements, the Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators established by Regulation (EC) No 713/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 establishing an Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators(7)(the ‘Agency’), and the Committee of European Securities Regulators (the ‘CESR’), established by Commission Decision 2009/77/EC(8), should confer and advise the Commission in regard to their content. The Agency and the CESR should also cooperate to investigate further and advise on whether transactions in electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives should be subject to pre- or post-trade transparency requirements and, if so, what the content of those requirements should be.
(41) Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authority, should encourage the development of interruptible supply contracts.
(42) All Community industry and commerce, including small and medium-sized enterprises, and all citizens of the Union that enjoy the economic benefits of the internal market should also be able to enjoy high levels of consumer protection, and in particular household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises should also be able to enjoy public service guarantees, in particular with regard to security of supply and reasonable tariffs, for reasons of fairness, competitiveness and, indirectly, to create employment. Those customers should also have access to choice, fairness, representation and dispute settlement mechanisms.
(43) Nearly all Member States have chosen to ensure competition in the electricity generation market through a transparent authorisation procedure. However, Member States should ensure the possibility to contribute to security of supply through the launching of a tendering procedure or an equivalent procedure in the event that sufficient electricity generation capacity is not built on the basis of the authorisation procedure. Member States should have the possibility, in the interests of environmental protection and the promotion of new infant technologies, of tendering for new capacity on the basis of published criteria. Such new capacity includes, inter alia, electricity from renewable energy sources and combined heat and power.
(44) In the interests of security of supply, the balance between supply and demand in individual Member States should be monitored, and such monitoring should be followed by a report on the situation at Community level, taking account of interconnection capacity between areas. Such monitoring should be carried out sufficiently early to enable appropriate measures to be taken if security of supply is compromised. The construction and maintenance of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity, should contribute to ensuring a stable electricity supply. The maintenance and construction of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity and decentralised electricity generation, are important elements in ensuring a stable electricity supply.
(45) Member States should ensure that household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, enjoy the right to be supplied with electricity of a specified quality at clearly comparable, transparent and reasonable prices. In order to ensure the maintenance of the high standards of public service in the Community, all measures taken by Member States to achieve the objective of this Directive should be regularly notified to the Commission. The Commission should regularly publish a report analysing measures taken at national level to achieve public service objectives and comparing their effectiveness, with a view to making recommendations as regards measures to be taken at national level to achieve high public service standards. Member States should take the necessary measures to protect vulnerable customers in the context of the internal market in electricity. Such measures may differ according to the particular circumstances in the Member States in question and may include specific measures relating to the payment of electricity bills, or more general measures taken in the social security system. Where universal service is also provided to small enterprises, measures to ensure that such universal service is provided may differ according to whether they are aimed at household customers or small enterprises.
(46) Respect for the public service requirements is a fundamental requirement of this Directive, and it is important that common minimum standards, respected by all Member States, are specified in this Directive, which take into account the objectives of consumer protection, security of supply, environmental protection and equivalent levels of competition in all Member States. It is important that the public service requirements can be interpreted on a national basis, taking into account national circumstances and subject to the respect of Community law.
(47) It should be possible for Member States to appoint a supplier of last resort. That supplier may be the sales division of a vertically integrated undertaking, which also performs the functions of distribution, provided that it meets the unbundling requirements of this Directive.
(48) It should be possible for measures implemented by Member States to achieve the objectives of social and economic cohesion to include, in particular, the provision of adequate economic incentives, using, where appropriate, all existing national and Community tools. Such tools may include liability mechanisms to guarantee the necessary investment.
(49) To the extent to which measures taken by Member States to fulfil public service obligations constitute State aid under Article 87(1) of the Treaty, there is an obligation under Article 88(3) of the Treaty to notify them to the Commission.
(50) The public service requirements, including as regards the universal service, and the common minimum standards that follow from them need to be further strengthened to make sure that all consumers, especially vulnerable ones, are able to benefit from competition and fair prices. The public service requirements should be defined at national level, taking into account national circumstances; Community law should, however, be respected by the Member States. The citizens of the Union and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, should be able to enjoy public service obligations, in particular with regard to security of supply, and reasonable prices. A key aspect of supplying customers is access to objective and transparent consumption data. Thus, consumers should have access to their consumption data and associated prices and services costs so that they can invite competitors to make an offer based on those data. Consumers should also have the right to be properly informed about their energy consumption. Prepayments should reflect the likely consumption of electricity and different payment systems should be non-discriminatory. Information on energy costs provided to consumers frequently enough will create incentives for energy savings because it will give customers direct feedback on the effects of investment in energy efficiency and change of behaviour. In this respect, full implementation of Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(9)will help consumers to reduce their energy costs.
(51) Consumer interests should be at the heart of this Directive and quality of service should be a central responsibility of electricity undertakings. Existing rights of consumers need to be strengthened and guaranteed, and should include greater transparency. Consumer protection should ensure that all consumers in the wider remit of the Community benefit from a competitive market. Consumer rights should be enforced by Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authorities.
(52) Clear and comprehensible information should be made available to consumers concerning their rights in relation to the energy sector. The Commission should establish, after consulting relevant stakeholders including Member States, national regulatory authorities, consumer organisations and electricity undertakings, an accessible, user-friendly energy consumer checklist providing consumers with practical information about their rights. That checklist should be provided to all consumers and should be made publicly available.
(53) Energy poverty is a growing problem in the Community. Member States which are affected and which have not yet done so should therefore develop national action plans or other appropriate frameworks to tackle energy poverty, aiming at decreasing the number of people suffering such situation. In any event, Member States should ensure the necessary energy supply for vulnerable customers. In doing so, an integrated approach, such as in the framework of social policy, could be used and measures could include social policies or energy efficiency improvements for housing. At the very least, this Directive should allow national policies in favour of vulnerable customers.
(54) Greater consumer protection is guaranteed by the availability of effective means of dispute settlement for all consumers. Member States should introduce speedy and effective complaint handling procedures.
(55) It should be possible to base the introduction of intelligent metering systems on an economic assessment. Should that assessment conclude that the introduction of such metering systems is economically reasonable and cost-effective only for consumers with a certain amount of electricity consumption, Member States should be able to take this into account when implementing intelligent metering systems.
(56) Market prices should give the right incentives for the development of the network and for investing in new electricity generation.
(57) Promoting fair competition and easy access for different suppliers and fostering capacity for new electricity generation should be of the utmost importance for Member States in order to allow consumers to take full advantage of the opportunities of a liberalised internal market in electricity.
(58) With a view to creating an internal market in electricity, Member States should foster the integration of their national markets and the cooperation of system operators at Community and regional level, also incorporating isolated systems forming electricity islands that persist in the Community.
(59) The development of a true internal market in electricity, through a network connected across the Community, should be one of the main goals of this Directive and regulatory issues on cross-border interconnections and regional markets should, therefore, be one of the main tasks of the regulatory authorities, in close cooperation with the Agency where relevant.
(60) Securing common rules for a true internal market and a broad supply of electricity accessible to all should also be one of the main goals of this Directive. To that end, undistorted market prices would provide an incentive for cross-border interconnections and for investments in new power generation while leading, in the long term, to price convergence.
(61) Regulatory authorities should also provide information on the market to permit the Commission to exercise its role of observing and monitoring the internal market in electricity and its short, medium and long-term evolution, including aspects such as generation capacity, different sources of electricity generation, transmission and distribution infrastructure, quality of service, cross-border trade, congestion management, investments, wholesale and consumer prices, market liquidity and environmental and efficiency improvements. National regulatory authorities should report to the competition authorities and the Commission those Member States in which prices impair competition and proper functioning of the market.
(62) Since the objective of this Directive, namely the creation of a fully operational internal electricity market, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve that objective.
(63) Under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on conditions for access to the network for cross-border exchanges in electricity(10), the Commission may adopt Guidelines to achieve the necessary degree of harmonisation. Such Guidelines, which constitute binding implementing measures, are, also with regard to certain provisions of this Directive, a useful tool which can be adapted quickly where necessary.
(64) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(11).
(65) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adopt the Guidelines necessary for providing the minimum degree of harmonisation required to achieve the aim of this Directive. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(66) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional Agreement on better law-making(12), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables, illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures, and to make them public.
(67) Given the scope of the amendments made to Directive 2003/54/EC herein, it is desirable, for reasons of clarity and rationalisation, that the provisions in question should be recast by bringing them all together in a single text in a new Directive.
(68) This Directive respects the fundamental rights, and observes the principles, recognised in particular by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Subject matter and scope
Article 1
This Directive establishes common rules for the generation, transmission, distribution and supply of electricity, together with consumer protection provisions, with a view to improving and integrating competitive electricity markets in the Community. It lays down the rules relating to the organisation and functioning of the electricity sector, open access to the market, the criteria and procedures applicable to calls for tenders and the granting of authorisations and the operation of systems. It also lays down universal service obligations and the rights of electricity consumers and clarifies competition requirements.

Definitions
Article 2
For the purposes of this Directive, the following definitions apply:
1.
‘generation’ means the production of electricity;
2.
‘producer’ means a natural or legal person generating electricity;
3.
‘transmission’ means the transport of electricity on the extra high-voltage and high-voltage interconnected system with a view to its delivery to final customers or to distributors, but does not include supply;
4.
‘transmission system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the transmission system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems, and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity;
5.
‘distribution’ means the transport of electricity on high-voltage, medium-voltage and low-voltage distribution systems with a view to its delivery to customers, but does not include supply;
6.
‘distribution system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the distribution system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the distribution of electricity;
7.
‘customer’ means a wholesale or final customer of electricity;
8.
‘wholesale customer’ means a natural or legal person purchasing electricity for the purpose of resale inside or outside the system where he is established;
9.
‘final customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own use;
10.
‘household customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own household consumption, excluding commercial or professional activities;
11.
‘non-household customer’ means a natural or legal persons purchasing electricity which is not for their own household use and includes producers and wholesale customers;
12.
‘eligible customer’ means a customer who is free to purchase electricity from the supplier of his choice within the meaning of Article 33;
13.
‘interconnector’ means equipment used to link electricity systems;
14.
‘interconnected system’ means a number of transmission and distribution systems linked together by means of one or more interconnectors;
15.
‘direct line’ means either an electricity line linking an isolated generation site with an isolated customer or an electricity line linking an electricity producer and an electricity supply undertaking to supply directly their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers;
16.
‘economic precedence’ means the ranking of sources of electricity supply in accordance with economic criteria;
17.
‘ancillary service’ means a service necessary for the operation of a transmission or distribution system;
18.
‘system user’ means a natural or legal person supplying to, or being supplied by, a transmission or distribution system;
19.
‘supply’ means the sale, including resale, of electricity to customers;
20.
‘integrated electricity undertaking’ means a vertically or horizontally integrated undertaking;
21.
‘vertically integrated undertaking’ means an electricity undertaking or a group of electricity undertakings where the same person or the same persons are entitled, directly or indirectly, to exercise control, and where the undertaking or group of undertakings perform at least one of the functions of transmission or distribution, and at least one of the functions of generation or supply of electricity;
22.
‘related undertaking’ means affiliated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 41 of the Seventh Council Directive 83/349/EEC of 13 June 1983 based on Article 44(2)(g)(*1)of the Treaty on consolidated accounts(13), and/or associated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 33(1) of that Directive, and/or undertakings which belong to the same shareholders;
23.
‘horizontally integrated undertaking’ means an undertaking performing at least one of the functions of generation for sale, or transmission, or distribution, or supply of electricity, and another non-electricity activity;
24.
‘tendering procedure’ means the procedure through which planned additional requirements and replacement capacity are covered by supplies from new or existing generating capacity;
25.
‘long-term planning’ means the planning of the need for investment in generation and transmission and distribution capacity on a long-term basis, with a view to meeting the demand of the system for electricity and securing supplies to customers;
26.
‘small isolated system’ means any system with consumption of less than 3 000 GWh in the year 1996, where less than 5 % of annual consumption is obtained through interconnection with other systems;
27.
‘micro isolated system’ means any system with consumption less than 500 GWh in the year 1996, where there is no connection with other systems;
28.
‘security’ means both security of supply and provision of electricity, and technical safety;
29.
‘energy efficiency/demand-side management’ means a global or integrated approach aimed at influencing the amount and timing of electricity consumption in order to reduce primary energy consumption and peak loads by giving precedence to investments in energy efficiency measures, or other measures, such as interruptible supply contracts, over investments to increase generation capacity, if the former are the most effective and economical option, taking into account the positive environmental impact of reduced energy consumption and the security of supply and distribution cost aspects related to it;
30.
‘renewable energy sources’ means renewable non-fossil energy sources (wind, solar, geothermal, wave, tidal, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases);
31.
‘distributed generation’ means generation plants connected to the distribution system;
32.
‘electricity supply contract’ means a contract for the supply of electricity, but does not include an electricity derivative;
33.
‘electricity derivative’ means a financial instrument specified in points 5, 6 or 7 of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2004/39/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on markets in financial instruments(14), where that instrument relates to electricity;
34.
‘control’ means rights, contracts or any other means which, either separately or in combination and having regard to the considerations of fact or law involved, confer the possibility of exercising decisive influence on an undertaking, in particular by:
(a)
ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking;
(b)
rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking;
35.
‘electricity undertaking’ means any natural or legal person carrying out at least one of the following functions: generation, transmission, distribution, supply, or purchase of electricity, which is responsible for the commercial, technical or maintenance tasks related to those functions, but does not include final customers.

Public service obligations and customer protection
Article 3
1. Member States shall ensure, on the basis of their institutional organisation and with due regard to the principle of subsidiarity, that, without prejudice to paragraph 2, electricity undertakings are operated in accordance with the principles of this Directive with a view to achieving a competitive, secure and environmentally sustainable market in electricity, and shall not discriminate between those undertakings as regards either rights or obligations.
2. Having full regard to the relevant provisions of the Treaty, in particular Article 86 thereof, Member States may impose on undertakings operating in the electricity sector, in the general economic interest, public service obligations which may relate to security, including security of supply, regularity, quality and price of supplies and environmental protection, including energy efficiency, energy from renewable sources and climate protection. Such obligations shall be clearly defined, transparent, non-discriminatory, verifiable and shall guarantee equality of access for electricity undertakings of the Community to national consumers. In relation to security of supply, energy efficiency/demand-side management and for the fulfilment of environmental goals and goals for energy from renewable sources, as referred to in this paragraph, Member States may introduce the implementation of long-term planning, taking into account the possibility of third parties seeking access to the system.
3. Member States shall ensure that all household customers, and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises (namely enterprises with fewer than 50 occupied persons and an annual turnover or balance sheet not exceeding EUR 10 million), enjoy universal service, that is the right to be supplied with electricity of a specified quality within their territory at reasonable, easily and clearly comparable, transparent and non-discriminatory prices. To ensure the provision of universal service, Member States may appoint a supplier of last resort. Member States shall impose on distribution companies an obligation to connect customers to their network under terms, conditions and tariffs set in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 37(6). Nothing in this Directive shall prevent Member States from strengthening the market position of the household, small and medium-sized consumers by promoting the possibilities of voluntary aggregation of representation for that class of consumers.
The first subparagraph shall be implemented in a transparent and non-discriminatory way and shall not impede the opening of the market provided for in Article 33.
4. Member States shall ensure that all customers are entitled to have their electricity provided by a supplier, subject to the supplier’s agreement, regardless of the Member State in which the supplier is registered, as long as the supplier follows the applicable trading and balancing rules. In this regard, Member States shall take all measures necessary to ensure that administrative procedures do not discriminate against supply undertakings already registered in another Member State.
5. Member States shall ensure that:
(a)
where a customer, while respecting contractual conditions, wishes to change supplier, the change is effected by the operator(s) concerned within three weeks; and
(b)
customers are entitled to receive all relevant consumption data.
Member States shall ensure that the rights referred to in points (a) and (b) are granted to customers in a non-discriminatory manner as regards cost, effort or time.
6. Where financial compensation, other forms of compensation and exclusive rights which a Member State grants for the fulfilment of the obligations set out in paragraphs 2 and 3 are provided, this shall be done in a non-discriminatory and transparent way.
7. Member States shall take appropriate measures to protect final customers, and shall, in particular, ensure that there are adequate safeguards to protect vulnerable customers. In this context, each Member State shall define the concept of vulnerable customers which may refer to energy poverty and, inter alia, to the prohibition of disconnection of electricity to such customers in critical times. Member States shall ensure that rights and obligations linked to vulnerable customers are applied. In particular, they shall take measures to protect final customers in remote areas. They shall ensure high levels of consumer protection, particularly with respect to transparency regarding contractual terms and conditions, general information and dispute settlement mechanisms. Member States shall ensure that the eligible customer is in fact able easily to switch to a new supplier. As regards at least household customers, those measures shall include those set out in Annex I.
8. Member States shall take appropriate measures, such as formulating national energy action plans, providing benefits in social security systems to ensure the necessary electricity supply to vulnerable customers, or providing for support for energy efficiency improvements, to address energy poverty where identified, including in the broader context of poverty. Such measures shall not impede the effective opening of the market set out in Article 33 or market functioning and shall be notified to the Commission, where relevant, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 15 of this Article. Such notification may also include measures taken within the general social security system.
9. Member States shall ensure that electricity suppliers specify in or with the bills and in promotional materials made available to final customers:
(a)
the contribution of each energy source to the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year in a comprehensible and, at a national level, clearly comparable manner;
(b)
at least the reference to existing reference sources, such as web pages, where information on the environmental impact, in terms of at least CO2emissions and the radioactive waste resulting from the electricity produced by the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year is publicly available;
(c)
information concerning their rights as regards the means of dispute settlement available to them in the event of a dispute.
As regards points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph with respect to electricity obtained via an electricity exchange or imported from an undertaking situated outside the Community, aggregate figures provided by the exchange or the undertaking in question over the preceding year may be used.
The regulatory authority or another competent national authority shall take the necessary steps to ensure that the information provided by suppliers to their customers pursuant to this Article is reliable and is provided, at a national level, in a clearly comparable manner.
10. Member States shall implement measures to achieve the objectives of social and economic cohesion and environmental protection, which shall include energy efficiency/demand-side management measures and means to combat climate change, and security of supply, where appropriate. Such measures may include, in particular, the provision of adequate economic incentives, using, where appropriate, all existing national and Community tools, for the maintenance and construction of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity.
11. In order to promote energy efficiency, Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authority shall strongly recommend that electricity undertakings optimise the use of electricity, for example by providing energy management services, developing innovative pricing formulas, or introducing intelligent metering systems or smart grids, where appropriate.
12. Member States shall ensure the provision of single points of contact to provide consumers with all necessary information concerning their rights, current legislation and the means of dispute settlement available to them in the event of a dispute. Such contact points may be part of general consumer information points.
13. Member States shall ensure that an independent mechanism such as an energy ombudsman or a consumer body is in place in order to ensure efficient treatment of complaints and out-of-court dispute settlements.
14. Member States may decide not to apply the provisions of Articles 7, 8, 32 and/or 34 insofar as their application would obstruct the performance, in law or in fact, of the obligations imposed on electricity undertakings in the general economic interest and insofar as the development of trade would not be affected to such an extent as would be contrary to the interests of the Community. The interests of the Community include, inter alia, competition with regard to eligible customers in accordance with this Directive and Article 86 of the Treaty.
15. Member States shall, upon implementation of this Directive, inform the Commission of all measures adopted to fulfil universal service and public service obligations, including consumer protection and environmental protection, and their possible effect on national and international competition, whether or not such measures require a derogation from this Directive. They shall inform the Commission subsequently every two years of any changes to such measures, whether or not they require a derogation from this Directive.
16. The Commission shall establish, in consultation with relevant stakeholders including Member States, the national regulatory authorities, consumer organisations, electricity undertakings and, building on the progress achieved to date, social partners, a clear and concise energy consumer checklist of practical information relating to energy consumer rights. Member States shall ensure that electricity suppliers or distribution system operators, in cooperation with the regulatory authority, take the necessary steps to provide their consumers with a copy of the energy consumer checklist and ensure that it is made publicly available.

Monitoring of security of supply
Article 4
Member States shall ensure the monitoring of security of supply issues. Where Member States consider it appropriate, they may delegate that task to the regulatory authorities referred to in Article 35. Such monitoring shall, in particular, cover the balance of supply and demand on the national market, the level of expected future demand and envisaged additional capacity being planned or under construction, and the quality and level of maintenance of the networks, as well as measures to cover peak demand and to deal with shortfalls of one or more suppliers. The competent authorities shall publish every two years, by 31 July, a report outlining the findings resulting from the monitoring of those issues, as well as any measures taken or envisaged to address them and shall forward that report to the Commission forthwith.

Technical rules
Article 5
The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall ensure that technical safety criteria are defined and that technical rules establishing the minimum technical design and operational requirements for the connection to the system of generating installations, distribution systems, directly connected consumers’ equipment, interconnector circuits and direct lines are developed and made public. Those technical rules shall ensure the interoperability of systems and shall be objective and non-discriminatory. The Agency may make appropriate recommendations towards achieving compatibility of those rules, where appropriate. Those rules shall be notified to the Commission in accordance with Article 8 of Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 laying down a procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and of rules on Information Society services(15).

Promotion of regional cooperation
Article 6
1. Member States as well as the regulatory authorities shall cooperate with each other for the purpose of integrating their national markets at one or more regional levels, as a first step towards the creation of a fully liberalised internal market. In particular, the regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall promote and facilitate the cooperation of transmission system operators at a regional level, including on cross-border issues, with the aim of creating a competitive internal market in electricity, foster the consistency of their legal, regulatory and technical framework and facilitate integration of the isolated systems forming electricity islands that persist in the Community. The geographical areas covered by such regional cooperation shall include cooperation in geographical areas defined in accordance with Article 12(3) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009. Such cooperation may cover other geographical areas.
2. The Agency shall cooperate with national regulatory authorities and transmission system operators to ensure the compatibility of regulatory frameworks between the regions with the aim of creating a competitive internal market in electricity. Where the Agency considers that binding rules on such cooperation are required, it shall make appropriate recommendations.
3. Member States shall ensure, through the implementation of this Directive, that transmission system operators have one or more integrated system(s) at regional level covering two or more Member States for capacity allocation and for checking the security of the network.
4. Where vertically integrated transmission system operators participate in a joint undertaking established for implementing such cooperation, the joint undertaking shall establish and implement a compliance programme which sets out the measures to be taken to ensure that discriminatory and anticompetitive conduct is excluded. That compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet the objective of excluding discriminatory and anticompetitive conduct. It shall be subject to the approval of the Agency. Compliance with the programme shall be independently monitored by the compliance officers of the vertically integrated transmission system operators.

Authorisation procedure for new capacity
Article 7
1. For the construction of new generating capacity, Member States shall adopt an authorisation procedure, which shall be conducted in accordance with objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
2. Member States shall lay down the criteria for the grant of authorisations for the construction of generating capacity in their territory. In determining appropriate criteria, Member States shall consider:
(a)
the safety and security of the electricity system, installations and associated equipment;
(b)
the protection of public health and safety;
(c)
the protection of the environment;
(d)
land use and siting;
(e)
the use of public ground;
(f)
energy efficiency;
(g)
the nature of the primary sources;
(h)
the characteristics particular to the applicant, such as technical, economic and financial capabilities;
(i)
compliance with measures adopted pursuant to Article 3;
(j)
the contribution of the generating capacity to meeting the overall Community target of at least a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy in 2020 referred to in Article 3(1) of Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources(16); and
(k)
the contribution of generating capacity to reducing emissions.
3. Member States shall ensure that specific authorisation procedures exist for small decentralised and/or distributed generation, which take into account their limited size and potential impact.
Member States may set guidelines for that specific authorisation procedure. National regulatory authorities or other competent national authorities including planning authorities shall review those guidelines and may recommend amendments thereto.
Where Member States have established particular land use permit procedures applying to major new infrastructure projects in generation capacity, Member States shall, where appropriate, include the construction of new generation capacity within the scope of those procedures and shall implement them in a non-discriminatory manner and within an appropriate time-frame.
4. The authorisation procedures and criteria shall be made public. Applicants shall be informed of the reasons for any refusal to grant an authorisation. Those reasons shall be objective, non-discriminatory, well-founded and duly substantiated. Appeal procedures shall be made available to the applicant.

Tendering for new capacity
Article 8
1. Member States shall ensure the possibility, in the interests of security of supply, of providing for new capacity or energy efficiency/demand-side management measures through a tendering procedure or any procedure equivalent in terms of transparency and non-discrimination, on the basis of published criteria. Those procedures may, however, be launched only where, on the basis of the authorisation procedure, the generating capacity to be built or the energy efficiency/demand-side management measures to be taken are insufficient to ensure security of supply.
2. Member States may ensure the possibility, in the interests of environmental protection and the promotion of infant new technologies, of tendering for new capacity on the basis of published criteria. Such tendering may relate to new capacity or to energy efficiency/demand-side management measures. A tendering procedure may, however, be launched only where, on the basis of the authorisation procedure the generating capacity to be built or the measures to be taken, are insufficient to achieve those objectives.
3. Details of the tendering procedure for means of generating capacity and energy efficiency/demand-side management measures shall be published in theOfficial Journal of the European Unionat least six months prior to the closing date for tenders.
The tender specifications shall be made available to any interested undertaking established in the territory of a Member State so that it has sufficient time in which to submit a tender.
With a view to ensuring transparency and non-discrimination, the tender specifications shall contain a detailed description of the contract specifications and of the procedure to be followed by all tenderers and an exhaustive list of criteria governing the selection of tenderers and the award of the contract, including incentives, such as subsidies, which are covered by the tender. Those specifications may also relate to the fields referred to in Article 7(2).
4. In invitations to tender for the requisite generating capacity, consideration must also be given to electricity supply offers with long-term guarantees from existing generating units, provided that additional requirements can be met in this way.
5. Member States shall designate an authority or a public or private body independent from electricity generation, transmission, distribution and supply activities, which may be a regulatory authority referred to in Article 35(1), to be responsible for the organisation, monitoring and control of the tendering procedure referred to in paragraphs 1 to 4 of this Article. Where a transmission system operator is fully independent from other activities not relating to the transmission system in ownership terms, the transmission system operator may be designated as the body responsible for organising, monitoring and controlling the tendering procedure. That authority or body shall take all necessary steps to ensure confidentiality of the information contained in the tenders.

Unbundling of transmission systems and transmission system operators
Article 9
1. Member States shall ensure that from 3 March 2012:
(a)
each undertaking which owns a transmission system acts as a transmission system operator;
(b)
the same person or persons are entitled neither:
(i)
directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor
(ii)
directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply;
(c)
the same person or persons are not entitled to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of a transmission system operator or a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply; and
(d)
the same person is not entitled to be a member of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of both an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply and a transmission system operator or a transmission system.
2. The rights referred to in points (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall include, in particular:
(a)
the power to exercise voting rights;
(b)
the power to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking; or
(c)
the holding of a majority share.
3. For the purpose of paragraph 1(b), the notion ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply’ shall include ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of production and supply’ within the meaning of Directive 2009/73/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 concerning common rules for the internal market in natural gas(17), and the terms ‘transmission system operator’ and ‘transmission system’ shall include ‘transmission system operator’ and ‘transmission system’ within the meaning of that Directive.
4. Member States may allow for derogations from points (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 until 3 March 2013, provided that transmission system operators are not part of a vertically integrated undertaking.
5. The obligation set out in paragraph 1(a) shall be deemed to be fulfilled in a situation where two or more undertakings which own transmission systems have created a joint venture which acts as a transmission system operator in two or more Member States for the transmission systems concerned. No other undertaking may be part of the joint venture, unless it has been approved under Article 13 as an independent system operator or as an independent transmission operator for the purposes of Chapter V.
6. For the implementation of this Article, where the person referred to in points (b), (c) and (d) of paragraph 1 is the Member State or another public body, two separate public bodies exercising control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system on the one hand, and over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply on the other, shall be deemed not to be the same person or persons.
7. Member States shall ensure that neither commercially sensitive information referred to in Article 16 held by a transmission system operator which was part of a vertically integrated undertaking, nor the staff of such a transmission system operator, is transferred to undertakings performing any of the functions of generation and supply.
8. Where on 3 September 2009, the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking a Member State may decide not to apply paragraph 1.
In such case, the Member State concerned shall either:
(a)
designate an independent system operator in accordance with Article 13; or
(b)
comply with the provisions of Chapter V.
9. Where, on 3 September 2009, the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking and there are arrangements in place which guarantee more effective independence of the transmission system operator than the provisions of Chapter V, a Member State may decide not to apply paragraph 1.
10. Before an undertaking is approved and designated as a transmission system operator under paragraph 9 of this Article, it shall be certified according to the procedures laid down in Article 10(4), (5) and (6) of this Directive and in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, pursuant to which the Commission shall verify that the arrangements in place clearly guarantee more effective independence of the transmission system operator than the provisions of Chapter V.
11. Vertically integrated undertakings which own a transmission system shall not in any event be prevented from taking steps to comply with paragraph 1.
12. Undertakings performing any of the functions of generation or supply shall not in any event be able to directly or indirectly take control over or exercise any right over unbundled transmission system operators in Member States which apply paragraph 1.

Designation and certification of transmission system operators
Article 10
1. Before an undertaking is approved and designated as transmission system operator, it shall be certified according to the procedures laid down in paragraphs 4, 5 and 6 of this Article and in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
2. Undertakings which own a transmission system and which have been certified by the national regulatory authority as having complied with the requirements of Article 9, pursuant to the certification procedure below, shall be approved and designated as transmission system operators by Member States. The designation of transmission system operators shall be notified to the Commission and published in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
3. Transmission system operators shall notify to the regulatory authority any planned transaction which may require a reassessment of their compliance with the requirements of Article 9.
4. Regulatory authorities shall monitor the continuing compliance of transmission system operators with the requirements of Article 9. They shall open a certification procedure to ensure such compliance:
(a)
upon notification by the transmission system operator pursuant to paragraph 3;
(b)
on their own initiative where they have knowledge that a planned change in rights or influence over transmission system owners or transmission system operators may lead to an infringement of Article 9, or where they have reason to believe that such an infringement may have occurred; or
(c)
upon a reasoned request from the Commission.
5. The regulatory authorities shall adopt a decision on the certification of a transmission system operator within a period of four months from the date of the notification by the transmission system operator or from the date of the Commission request. After expiry of that period, the certification shall be deemed to be granted. The explicit or tacit decision of the regulatory authority shall become effective only after the conclusion of the procedure set out in paragraph 6.
6. The explicit or tacit decision on the certification of a transmission system operator shall be notified without delay to the Commission by the regulatory authority, together with all the relevant information with respect to that decision. The Commission shall act in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
7. The regulatory authorities and the Commission may request from transmission system operators and undertakings performing any of the functions of generation or supply any information relevant for the fulfilment of their tasks under this Article.
8. Regulatory authorities and the Commission shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.

Certification in relation to third countries
Article 11
1. Where certification is requested by a transmission system owner or a transmission system operator which is controlled by a person or persons from a third country or third countries, the regulatory authority shall notify the Commission.
The regulatory authority shall also notify to the Commission without delay any circumstances that would result in a person or persons from a third country or third countries acquiring control of a transmission system or a transmission system operator.
2. The transmission system operator shall notify to the regulatory authority any circumstances that would result in a person or persons from a third country or third countries acquiring control of the transmission system or the transmission system operator.
3. The regulatory authority shall adopt a draft decision on the certification of a transmission system operator within four months from the date of notification by the transmission system operator. It shall refuse the certification if it has not been demonstrated:
(a)
that the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b)
to the regulatory authority or to another competent authority designated by the Member State that granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply of the Member State and the Community. In considering that question the regulatory authority or other competent authority so designated shall take into account:
(i)
the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply;
(ii)
the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and
(iii)
other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned.
4. The regulatory authority shall notify the decision to the Commission without delay, together with all the relevant information with respect to that decision.
5. Member States shall provide for the regulatory authority or the designated competent authority referred to in paragraph 3(b), before the regulatory authority adopts a decision on the certification, to request an opinion from the Commission on whether:
(a)
the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b)
granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply to the Community.
6. The Commission shall examine the request referred to in paragraph 5 as soon as it is received. Within a period of two months after receiving the request, it shall deliver its opinion to the national regulatory authority or, if the request was made by the designated competent authority, to that authority.
In preparing the opinion, the Commission may request the views of the Agency, the Member State concerned, and interested parties. In the event that the Commission makes such a request, the two-month period shall be extended by two months.
In the absence of an opinion by the Commission within the period referred to in the first and second subparagraphs, the Commission shall be deemed not to raise objections to the decision of the regulatory authority.
7. When assessing whether the control by a person or persons from a third country or third countries will put at risk the security of energy supply to the Community, the Commission shall take into account:
(a)
the specific facts of the case and the third country or third countries concerned; and
(b)
the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country or third countries arising under international law, including an agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of supply.
8. The national regulatory authority shall, within a period of two months after the expiry of the period referred to in paragraph 6, adopt its final decision on the certification. In adopting its final decision the national regulatory authority shall take utmost account of the Commission’s opinion. In any event Member States shall have the right to refuse certification where granting certification puts at risk the Member State’s security of energy supply or the security of energy supply of another Member State. Where the Member State has designated another competent authority to assess paragraph 3(b), it may require the national regulatory authority to adopt its final decision in accordance with the assessment of that competent authority. The national regulatory authority’s final decision and the Commission’s opinion shall be published together. Where the final decision diverges from the Commission’s opinion, the Member State concerned shall provide and publish, together with that decision, the reasoning underlying such decision.
9. Nothing in this Article shall affect the right of Member States to exercise, in compliance with Community law, national legal controls to protect legitimate public security interests.
10. The Commission may adopt Guidelines setting out the details of the procedure to be followed for the application of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).
11. This Article, with exception of paragraph 3(a), shall also apply to Member States which are subject to a derogation under Article 44.

Tasks of transmission system operators
Article 12
Each transmission system operator shall be responsible for:
(a)
ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity, operating, maintaining and developing under economic conditions secure, reliable and efficient transmission systems with due regard to the environment;
(b)
ensuring adequate means to meet service obligations;
(c)
contributing to security of supply through adequate transmission capacity and system reliability;
(d)
managing electricity flows on the system, taking into account exchanges with other interconnected systems. To that end, the transmission system operator shall be responsible for ensuring a secure, reliable and efficient electricity system and, in that context, for ensuring the availability of all necessary ancillary services, including those provided by demand response, insofar as such availability is independent from any other transmission system with which its system is interconnected;
(e)
providing to the operator of any other system with which its system is interconnected sufficient information to ensure the secure and efficient operation, coordinated development and interoperability of the interconnected system;
(f)
ensuring non-discrimination as between system users or classes of system users, particularly in favour of its related undertakings;
(g)
providing system users with the information they need for efficient access to the system; and
(h)
collecting congestion rents and payments under the inter-transmission system operator compensation mechanism, in compliance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, granting and managing third-party access and giving reasoned explanations when it denies such access, which shall be monitored by the national regulatory authorities; in carrying out their tasks under this Article transmission system operators shall primarily facilitate market integration.

Independent system operator
Article 13
1. Where the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking on 3 September 2009, Member States may decide not to apply Article 9(1) and designate an independent system operator upon a proposal from the transmission system owner. Such designation shall be subject to approval by the Commission.
2. The Member State may approve and designate an independent system operator only where:
(a)
the candidate operator has demonstrated that it complies with the requirements of Article 9(1)(b), (c) and (d);
(b)
the candidate operator has demonstrated that it has at its disposal the required financial, technical, physical and human resources to carry out its tasks under Article 12;
(c)
the candidate operator has undertaken to comply with a ten-year network development plan monitored by the regulatory authority;
(d)
the transmission system owner has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under paragraph 5. To that end, it shall provide all the draft contractual arrangements with the candidate undertaking and any other relevant entity; and
(e)
the candidate operator has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 including the cooperation of transmission system operators at European and regional level.
3. Undertakings which have been certified by the regulatory authority as having complied with the requirements of Article 11 and paragraph 2 of this Article shall be approved and designated as independent system operators by Member States. The certification procedure in either Article 10 of this Directive and Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 or in Article 11 of this Directive shall be applicable.
4. Each independent system operator shall be responsible for granting and managing third-party access, including the collection of access charges, congestion charges, and payments under the inter-transmission system operator compensation mechanism in compliance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, as well as for operating, maintaining and developing the transmission system, and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demand through investment planning. When developing the transmission system, the independent system operator shall be responsible for planning (including authorisation procedure), construction and commissioning of the new infrastructure. For this purpose, the independent system operator shall act as a transmission system operator in accordance with this Chapter. The transmission system owner shall not be responsible for granting and managing third-party access, nor for investment planning.
5. Where an independent system operator has been designated, the transmission system owner shall:
(a)
provide all the relevant cooperation and support to the independent system operator for the fulfilment of its tasks, including in particular all relevant information;
(b)
finance the investments decided by the independent system operator and approved by the regulatory authority, or give its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator. The relevant financing arrangements shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Prior to such approval, the regulatory authority shall consult the transmission system owner together with the other interested parties;
(c)
provide for the coverage of liability relating to the network assets, excluding the liability relating to the tasks of the independent system operator; and
(d)
provide guarantees to facilitate financing any network expansions with the exception of those investments where, pursuant to point (b), it has given its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator.
6. In close cooperation with the regulatory authority, the relevant national competition authority shall be granted all relevant powers to effectively monitor compliance of the transmission system owner with its obligations under paragraph 5.

Unbundling of transmission system owners
Article 14
1. A transmission system owner, where an independent system operator has been appointed, which is part of a vertically integrated undertaking shall be independent at least in terms of its legal form, organisation and decision making from other activities not relating to transmission.
2. In order to ensure the independence of the transmission system owner referred to in paragraph 1, the following minimum criteria shall apply:
(a)
persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner shall not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, distribution and supply of electricity;
(b)
appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that the professional interests of persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently; and
(c)
the transmission system owner shall establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet those objectives. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme to the regulatory authority and shall be published.
3. The Commission may adopt Guidelines to ensure full and effective compliance of the transmission system owner with paragraph 2 of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Dispatching and balancing
Article 15
1. Without prejudice to the supply of electricity on the basis of contractual obligations, including those which derive from the tendering specifications, the transmission system operator shall, where it has such a function, be responsible for dispatching the generating installations in its area and for determining the use of interconnectors with other systems.
2. The dispatching of generating installations and the use of interconnectors shall be determined on the basis of criteria which shall be approved by national regulatory authorities where competent and which must be objective, published and applied in a non-discriminatory manner, ensuring the proper functioning of the internal market in electricity. The criteria shall take into account the economic precedence of electricity from available generating installations or interconnector transfers and the technical constraints on the system.
3. A Member State shall require system operators to act in accordance with Article 16 of Directive 2009/28/EC when dispatching generating installations using renewable energy sources. They also may require the system operator to give priority when dispatching generating installations producing combined heat and power.
4. A Member State may, for reasons of security of supply, direct that priority be given to the dispatch of generating installations using indigenous primary energy fuel sources, to an extent not exceeding, in any calendar year, 15 % of the overall primary energy necessary to produce the electricity consumed in the Member State concerned.
5. The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall require transmission system operators to comply with minimum standards for the maintenance and development of the transmission system, including interconnection capacity.
6. Transmission system operators shall procure the energy they use to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in their system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market-based procedures, whenever they have such a function.
7. Rules adopted by transmission system operators for balancing the electricity system shall be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory, including rules for charging system users of their networks for energy imbalance. The terms and conditions, including the rules and tariffs, for the provision of such services by transmission system operators shall be established pursuant to a methodology compatible with Article 37(6) in a non-discriminatory and cost-reflective way and shall be published.

Confidentiality for transmission system operators and transmission system owners
Article 16
1. Without prejudice to Article 30 or any other legal duty to disclose information, each transmission system operator and each transmission system owner shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information obtained in the course of carrying out its activities, and shall prevent information about its own activities which may be commercially advantageous from being disclosed in a discriminatory manner. In particular it shall not disclose any commercially sensitive information to the remaining parts of the undertaking, unless this is necessary for carrying out a business transaction. In order to ensure the full respect of the rules on information unbundling, Member States shall ensure that the transmission system owner and the remaining part of the undertaking do not use joint services, such as joint legal services, apart from purely administrative or IT functions.
2. Transmission system operators shall not, in the context of sales or purchases of electricity by related undertakings, misuse commercially sensitive information obtained from third parties in the context of providing or negotiating access to the system.
3. Information necessary for effective competition and the efficient functioning of the market shall be made public. That obligation shall be without prejudice to preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.

Assets, equipment, staff and identity
Article 17
1. Transmission system operators shall be equipped with all human, technical, physical and financial resources necessary for fulfilling their obligations under this Directive and carrying out the activity of electricity transmission, in particular:
(a)
assets that are necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the transmission system, shall be owned by the transmission system operator;
(b)
personnel, necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the performance of all corporate tasks, shall be employed by the transmission system operator;
(c)
leasing of personnel and rendering of services, to and from any other parts of the vertically integrated undertaking shall be prohibited. A transmission system operator may, however, render services to the vertically integrated undertaking as long as:
(i)
the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and
(ii)
the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority;
(d)
without prejudice to the decisions of the Supervisory Body under Article 20, appropriate financial resources for future investment projects and/or for the replacement of existing assets shall be made available to the transmission system operator in due time by the vertically integrated undertaking following an appropriate request from the transmission system operator.
2. The activity of electricity transmission shall include at least the following tasks in addition to those listed in Article 12:
(a)
the representation of the transmission system operator and contacts to third parties and the regulatory authorities;
(b)
the representation of the transmission system operator within the European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity (ENTSO for Electricity);
(c)
granting and managing third-party access on a non-discriminatory basis between system users or classes of system users;
(d)
the collection of all the transmission system related charges including access charges, balancing charges for ancillary services such as purchasing of services (balancing costs, energy for losses);
(e)
the operation, maintenance and development of a secure, efficient and economic transmission system;
(f)
investment planning ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demand and guaranteeing security of supply;
(g)
the setting up of appropriate joint ventures, including with one or more transmission system operators, power exchanges, and the other relevant actors pursuing the objectives to develop the creation of regional markets or to facilitate the liberalisation process; and
(h)
all corporate services, including legal services, accountancy and IT services.
3. Transmission system operators shall be organised in a legal form as referred to in Article 1 of Council Directive 68/151/EEC(18).
4. The transmission system operator shall not, in its corporate identity, communication, branding and premises, create confusion in respect of the separate identity of the vertically integrated undertaking or any part thereof.
5. The transmission system operator shall not share IT systems or equipment, physical premises and security access systems with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking nor use the same consultants or external contractors for IT systems or equipment, and security access systems.
6. The accounts of transmission system operators shall be audited by an auditor other than the one auditing the vertically integrated undertaking or any part thereof.

Independence of the transmission system operator
Article 18
1. Without prejudice to the decisions of the Supervisory Body under Article 20, the transmission system operator shall have:
(a)
effective decision-making rights, independent from the vertically integrated undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the transmission system; and
(b)
the power to raise money on the capital market in particular through borrowing and capital increase.
2. The transmission system operator shall at all times act so as to ensure it has the resources it needs in order to carry out the activity of transmission properly and efficiently and develop and maintain an efficient, secure and economic transmission system.
3. Subsidiaries of the vertically integrated undertaking performing functions of generation or supply shall not have any direct or indirect shareholding in the transmission system operator. The transmission system operator shall neither have any direct or indirect shareholding in any subsidiary of the vertically integrated undertaking performing functions of generation or supply, nor receive dividends or any other financial benefit from that subsidiary.
4. The overall management structure and the corporate statutes of the transmission system operator shall ensure effective independence of the transmission system operator in compliance with this Chapter. The vertically integrated undertaking shall not determine, directly or indirectly, the competitive behaviour of the transmission system operator in relation to the day to day activities of the transmission system operator and management of the network, or in relation to activities necessary for the preparation of the ten-year network development plan developed pursuant to Article 22.
5. In fulfilling their tasks in Article 12 and Article 17(2) of this Directive, and in complying with Articles 14, 15 and 16 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, transmission system operators shall not discriminate against different persons or entities and shall not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply.
6. Any commercial and financial relations between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator, including loans from the transmission system operator to the vertically integrated undertaking, shall comply with market conditions. The transmission system operator shall keep detailed records of such commercial and financial relations and make them available to the regulatory authority upon request.
7. The transmission system operator shall submit for approval by the regulatory authority all commercial and financial agreements with the vertically integrated undertaking.
8. The transmission system operator shall inform the regulatory authority of the financial resources, referred to in Article 17(1)(d), available for future investment projects and/or for the replacement of existing assets.
9. The vertically integrated undertaking shall refrain from any action impeding or prejudicing the transmission system operator from complying with its obligations in this Chapter and shall not require the transmission system operator to seek permission from the vertically integrated undertaking in fulfilling those obligations.
10. An undertaking which has been certified by the regulatory authority as being in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter shall be approved and designated as a transmission system operator by the Member State concerned. The certification procedure in either Article 10 of this Directive and Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 or in Article 11 of this Directive shall apply.

Independence of the staff and the management of the transmission system operator
Article 19
1. Decisions regarding the appointment and renewal, working conditions including remuneration, and termination of the term of office of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator shall be taken by the Supervisory Body of the transmission system operator appointed in accordance with Article 20.
2. The identity and the conditions governing the term, the duration and the termination of office of the persons nominated by the Supervisory Body for appointment or renewal as persons responsible for the executive management and/or as members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator, and the reasons for any proposed decision terminating such term of office, shall be notified to the regulatory authority. Those conditions and the decisions referred to in paragraph 1 shall become binding only if the regulatory authority has raised no objections within three weeks of notification.
The regulatory authority may object to the decisions referred to in paragraph 1 where:
(a)
doubts arise as to the professional independence of a nominated person responsible for the management and/or member of the administrative bodies; or
(b)
in the case of premature termination of a term of office, doubts exist regarding the justification of such premature termination.
3. No professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship, directly or indirectly, with the vertically integrated undertaking or any part of it or its controlling shareholders other than the transmission system operator shall be exercised for a period of three years before the appointment of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator who are subject to this paragraph.
4. The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies, and employees of the transmission system operator shall have no other professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship, directly or indirectly, with any other part of the vertically integrated undertaking or with its controlling shareholders.
5. The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies, and employees of the transmission system operator shall hold no interest in or receive any financial benefit, directly or indirectly, from any part of the vertically integrated undertaking other than the transmission system operator. Their remuneration shall not depend on activities or results of the vertically integrated undertaking other than those of the transmission system operator.
6. Effective rights of appeal to the regulatory authority shall be guaranteed for any complaints by the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator against premature terminations of their term of office.
7. After termination of their term of office in the transmission system operator, the persons responsible for its management and/or members of its administrative bodies shall have no professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking other than the transmission system operator, or with its controlling shareholders for a period of not less than four years.
8. Paragraph 3 shall apply to the majority of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator.
The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator who are not subject to paragraph 3 shall have exercised no management or other relevant activity in the vertically integrated undertaking for a period of at least six months before their appointment.
The first subparagraph of this paragraph and paragraphs 4 to 7 shall be applicable to all the persons belonging to the executive management and to those directly reporting to them on matters related to the operation, maintenance or development of the network.

Supervisory Body
Article 20
1. The transmission system operator shall have a Supervisory Body which shall be in charge of taking decisions which may have a significant impact on the value of the assets of the shareholders within the transmission system operator, in particular decisions regarding the approval of the annual and longer-term financial plans, the level of indebtedness of the transmission system operator and the amount of dividends distributed to shareholders. The decisions falling under the remit of the Supervisory Body shall exclude those that are related to the day to day activities of the transmission system operator and management of the network, and to activities necessary for the preparation of the ten-year network development plan developed pursuant to Article 22.
2. The Supervisory Body shall be composed of members representing the vertically integrated undertaking, members representing third party shareholders and, where the relevant legislation of a Member State so provides, members representing other interested parties such as employees of the transmission system operator.
3. The first subparagraph of Article 19(2) and Article 19(3) to (7) shall apply to at least half of the members of the Supervisory Body minus one.
Point (b) of the second subparagraph of Article 19(2) shall apply to all the members of the Supervisory Body.

Compliance programme and compliance officer
Article 21
1. Member States shall ensure that transmission system operators establish and implement a compliance programme which sets out the measures taken in order to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that the compliance with that programme is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet those objectives. It shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Without prejudice to the powers of the national regulator, compliance with the program shall be independently monitored by a compliance officer.
2. The compliance officer shall be appointed by the Supervisory Body, subject to the approval by the regulatory authority. The regulatory authority may refuse the approval of the compliance officer only for reasons of lack of independence or professional capacity. The compliance officer may be a natural or legal person. Article 19(2) to (8) shall apply to the compliance officer.
3. The compliance officer shall be in charge of:
(a)
monitoring the implementation of the compliance programme;
(b)
elaborating an annual report, setting out the measures taken in order to implement the compliance programme and submitting it to the regulatory authority;
(c)
reporting to the Supervisory Body and issuing recommendations on the compliance programme and its implementation;
(d)
notifying the regulatory authority on any substantial breaches with regard to the implementation of the compliance programme; and
(e)
reporting to the regulatory authority on any commercial and financial relations between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator.
4. The compliance officer shall submit the proposed decisions on the investment plan or on individual investments in the network to the regulatory authority. This shall occur at the latest when the management and/or the competent administrative body of the transmission system operator submits them to the Supervisory Body.
5. Where the vertically integrated undertaking, in the general assembly or through the vote of the members of the Supervisory Body it has appointed, has prevented the adoption of a decision with the effect of preventing or delaying investments, which under the ten-year network development plan was to be executed in the following three years, the compliance officer shall report this to the regulatory authority, which then shall act in accordance with Article 22.
6. The conditions governing the mandate or the employment conditions of the compliance officer, including the duration of its mandate, shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Those conditions shall ensure the independence of the compliance officer, including by providing him with all the resources necessary for fulfilling his duties. During his mandate, the compliance officer shall have no other professional position, responsibility or interest, directly or indirectly, in or with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking or with its controlling shareholders.
7. The compliance officer shall report regularly, either orally or in writing, to the regulatory authority and shall have the right to report regularly, either orally or in writing, to the Supervisory Body of the transmission system operator.
8. The compliance officer may attend all meetings of the management or administrative bodies of the transmission system operator, and those of the Supervisory Body and the general assembly. The compliance officer shall attend all meetings that address the following matters:
(a)
conditions for access to the network, as defined in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, in particular regarding tariffs, third party access services, capacity allocation and congestion management, transparency, balancing and secondary markets;
(b)
projects undertaken in order to operate, maintain and develop the transmission system, including interconnection and connection investments;
(c)
energy purchases or sales necessary for the operation of the transmission system.
9. The compliance officer shall monitor the compliance of the transmission system operator with Article 16.
10. The compliance officer shall have access to all relevant data and to the offices of the transmission system operator and to all the information necessary for the fulfilment of his task.
11. After prior approval by the regulatory authority, the Supervisory Body may dismiss the compliance officer. It shall dismiss the compliance officer for reasons of lack of independence or professional capacity upon request of the regulatory authority.
12. The compliance officer shall have access to the offices of the transmission system operator without prior announcement.

Network development and powers to make investment decisions
Article 22
1. Every year, transmission system operators shall submit to the regulatory authority a ten-year network development plan based on existing and forecast supply and demand after having consulted all the relevant stakeholders. That network development plan shall contain efficient measures in order to guarantee the adequacy of the system and the security of supply.
2. The ten-year network development plan shall in particular:
(a)
indicate to market participants the main transmission infrastructure that needs to be built or upgraded over the next ten years;
(b)
contain all the investments already decided and identify new investments which have to be executed in the next three years; and
(c)
provide for a time frame for all investment projects.
3. When elaborating the ten-year network development plan, the transmission system operator shall make reasonable assumptions about the evolution of the generation, supply, consumption and exchanges with other countries, taking into account investment plans for regional and Community-wide networks.
4. The regulatory authority shall consult all actual or potential system users on the ten-year network development plan in an open and transparent manner. Persons or undertakings claiming to be potential system users may be required to substantiate such claims. The regulatory authority shall publish the result of the consultation process, in particular possible needs for investments.
5. The regulatory authority shall examine whether the ten-year network development plan covers all investment needs identified during the consultation process, and whether it is consistent with the non-binding Community-wide ten-year network development plan (Community-wide network development plan) referred to in Article 8(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009. If any doubt arises as to the consistency with the Community-wide network development plan, the regulatory authority shall consult the Agency. The regulatory authority may require the transmission system operator to amend its ten-year network development plan.
6. The regulatory authority shall monitor and evaluate the implementation of the ten-year network development plan.
7. In circumstances where the transmission system operator, other than for overriding reasons beyond its control, does not execute an investment, which, under the ten-year network development plan, was to be executed in the following three years, Member States shall ensure that the regulatory authority is required to take at least one of the following measures to ensure that the investment in question is made if such investment is still relevant on the basis of the most recent ten-year network development plan:
(a)
to require the transmission system operator to execute the investments in question;
(b)
to organise a tender procedure open to any investors for the investment in question; or
(c)
to oblige the transmission system operator to accept a capital increase to finance the necessary investments and allow independent investors to participate in the capital.
Where the regulatory authority has made use of its powers under point (b) of the first subparagraph, it may oblige the transmission system operator to agree to one or more of the following:
(a)
financing by any third party;
(b)
construction by any third party;
(c)
building the new assets concerned itself;
(d)
operating the new asset concerned itself.
The transmission system operator shall provide the investors with all information needed to realise the investment, shall connect new assets to the transmission network and shall generally make its best efforts to facilitate the implementation of the investment project.
The relevant financial arrangements shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority.
8. Where the regulatory authority has made use of its powers under the first subparagraph of paragraph 7, the relevant tariff regulations shall cover the costs of the investments in question.

Decision-making powers regarding the connection of new power plant to the transmission system
Article 23
1. The transmission system operator shall establish and publish transparent and efficient procedures for non-discriminatory connection of new power plants to the transmission system. Those procedures shall be subject to the approval of national regulatory authorities.
2. The transmission system operator shall not be entitled to refuse the connection of a new power plant on the grounds of possible future limitations to available network capacities, such as congestion in distant parts of the transmission system. The transmission system operator shall supply necessary information.
3. The transmission system operator shall not be entitled to refuse a new connection point, on the ground that it will lead to additional costs linked with necessary capacity increase of system elements in the close-up range to the connection point.

Designation of distribution system operators
Article 24
Member States shall designate or shall require undertakings that own or are responsible for distribution systems to designate, for a period of time to be determined by Member States having regard to considerations of efficiency and economic balance, one or more distribution system operators. Member States shall ensure that distribution system operators act in accordance with Articles 25, 26 and 27.

Tasks of distribution system operators
Article 25
1. The distribution system operator shall be responsible for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the distribution of electricity, for operating, maintaining and developing under economic conditions a secure, reliable and efficient electricity distribution system in its area with due regard for the environment and energy efficiency.
2. In any event, it must not discriminate between system users or classes of system users, particularly in favour of its related undertakings.
3. The distribution system operator shall provide system users with the information they need for efficient access to, including use of, the system.
4. A Member State may require the distribution system operator, when dispatching generating installations, to give priority to generating installations using renewable energy sources or waste or producing combined heat and power.
5. Each distribution system operator shall procure the energy it uses to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in its system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market based procedures, whenever it has such a function. That requirement shall be without prejudice to using electricity acquired under contracts concluded before 1 January 2002.
6. Where a distribution system operator is responsible for balancing the distribution system, rules adopted by it for that purpose shall be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory, including rules for the charging of system users of their networks for energy imbalance. Terms and conditions, including rules and tariffs, for the provision of such services by distribution system operators shall be established in accordance with Article 37(6) in a non-discriminatory and cost-reflective way and shall be published.
7. When planning the development of the distribution network, energy efficiency/demand-side management measures or distributed generation that might supplant the need to upgrade or replace electricity capacity shall be considered by the distribution system operator.

Unbundling of distribution system operators
Article 26
1. Where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, it shall be independent at least in terms of its legal form, organisation and decision making from other activities not relating to distribution. Those rules shall not create an obligation to separate the ownership of assets of the distribution system operator from the vertically integrated undertaking.
2. In addition to the requirements under paragraph 1, where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, it shall be independent in terms of its organisation and decision-making from the other activities not related to distribution. In order to achieve this, the following minimum criteria shall apply:
(a)
those persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator must not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, transmission or supply of electricity;
(b)
appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that the professional interests of the persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently;
(c)
the distribution system operator must have effective decision-making rights, independent from the integrated electricity undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the network. In order to fulfil those tasks, the distribution system operator shall have at its disposal the necessary resources including human, technical, physical and financial resources. This should not prevent the existence of appropriate coordination mechanisms to ensure that the economic and management supervision rights of the parent company in respect of return on assets, regulated indirectly in accordance with Article 37(6), in a subsidiary are protected. In particular, this shall enable the parent company to approve the annual financial plan, or any equivalent instrument, of the distribution system operator and to set global limits on the levels of indebtedness of its subsidiary. It shall not permit the parent company to give instructions regarding day-to-day operations, nor with respect to individual decisions concerning the construction or upgrading of distribution lines, that do not exceed the terms of the approved financial plan, or any equivalent instrument; and
(d)
the distribution system operator must establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet that objective. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme, the compliance officer of the distribution system operator, to the regulatory authority referred to in Article 35(1) and shall be published. The compliance officer of the distribution system operator shall be fully independent and shall have access to all the necessary information of the distribution system operator and any affiliated undertaking to fulfil his task.
3. Where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, the Member States shall ensure that the activities of the distribution system operator are monitored by regulatory authorities or other competent bodies so that it cannot take advantage of its vertical integration to distort competition. In particular, vertically integrated distribution system operators shall not, in their communication and branding, create confusion in respect of the separate identity of the supply branch of the vertically integrated undertaking.
4. Member States may decide not to apply paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 to integrated electricity undertakings serving less than 100 000 connected customers, or serving small isolated systems.

Confidentiality obligation of distribution system operators
Article 27
Without prejudice to Article 30 or any other legal duty to disclose information, the distribution system operator must preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information obtained in the course of carrying out its business, and shall prevent information about its own activities which may be commercially advantageous being disclosed in a discriminatory manner.

Closed distribution systems
Article 28
1. Member States may provide for national regulatory authorities or other competent authorities to classify a system which distributes electricity within a geographically confined industrial, commercial or shared services site and does not, without prejudice to paragraph 4, supply household customers, as a closed distribution system if:
(a)
for specific technical or safety reasons, the operations or the production process of the users of that system are integrated; or
(b)
that system distributes electricity primarily to the owner or operator of the system or their related undertakings.
2. Member States may provide for national regulatory authorities to exempt the operator of a closed distribution system from:
(a)
the requirement under Article 25(5) to procure the energy it uses to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in its system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market based procedures;
(b)
the requirement under Article 32(1) that tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, are approved prior to their entry into force in accordance with Article 37.
3. Where an exemption is granted under paragraph 2, the applicable tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, shall be reviewed and approved in accordance with Article 37 upon request by a user of the closed distribution system.
4. Incidental use by a small number of households with employment or similar associations with the owner of the distribution system and located within the area served by a closed distribution system shall not preclude an exemption under paragraph 2 being granted.

Combined operator
Article 29
Article 26(1) shall not prevent the operation of a combined transmission and distribution system operator provided that operator complies with Articles 9(1), or 13 and 14, or Chapter V or falls under Article 44(2).

Right of access to accounts
Article 30
1. Member States or any competent authority they designate, including the regulatory authorities referred to in Article 35, shall, insofar as necessary to carry out their functions, have right of access to the accounts of electricity undertakings as set out in Article 31.
2. Member States and any designated competent authority, including the regulatory authorities, shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information. Member States may provide for the disclosure of such information where this is necessary in order for the competent authorities to carry out their functions.

Unbundling of accounts
Article 31
1. Member States shall take the necessary steps to ensure that the accounts of electricity undertakings are kept in accordance with paragraphs 2 and 3.
2. Electricity undertakings, whatever their system of ownership or legal form, shall draw up, submit to audit and publish their annual accounts in accordance with the rules of national law concerning the annual accounts of limited liability companies adopted pursuant to the Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC of 25 July 1978 based on Article 44(2)(g)(*2)of the Treaty on the annual accounts of certain types of companies(19).
Undertakings which are not legally obliged to publish their annual accounts shall keep a copy of these at the disposal of the public in their head office.
3. Electricity undertakings shall, in their internal accounting, keep separate accounts for each of their transmission and distribution activities as they would be required to do if the activities in question were carried out by separate undertakings, with a view to avoiding discrimination, cross-subsidisation and distortion of competition. They shall also keep accounts, which may be consolidated, for other electricity activities not relating to transmission or distribution. Until 1 July 2007, they shall keep separate accounts for supply activities for eligible customers and supply activities for non-eligible customers. Revenue from ownership of the transmission or distribution system shall be specified in the accounts. Where appropriate, they shall keep consolidated accounts for other, non-electricity activities. The internal accounts shall include a balance sheet and a profit and loss account for each activity.
4. The audit referred to in paragraph 2 shall, in particular, verify that the obligation to avoid discrimination and cross-subsidies referred to in paragraph 3 is respected.

Third-party access
Article 32
1. Member States shall ensure the implementation of a system of third party access to the transmission and distribution systems based on published tariffs, applicable to all eligible customers and applied objectively and without discrimination between system users. Member States shall ensure that those tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, are approved prior to their entry into force in accordance with Article 37 and that those tariffs, and the methodologies — where only methodologies are approved — are published prior to their entry into force.
2. The transmission or distribution system operator may refuse access where it lacks the necessary capacity. Duly substantiated reasons must be given for such refusal, in particular having regard to Article 3, and based on objective and technically and economically justified criteria. The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall ensure that those criteria are consistently applied and that the system user who has been refused access can make use of a dispute settlement procedure. The regulatory authorities shall also ensure, where appropriate and when refusal of access takes place, that the transmission or distribution system operator provides relevant information on measures that would be necessary to reinforce the network. The party requesting such information may be charged a reasonable fee reflecting the cost of providing such information.

Market opening and reciprocity
Article 33
1. Member States shall ensure that the eligible customers comprise:
(a)
until 1 July 2004, the eligible customers as specified in Article 19(1) to (3) of Directive 96/92/EC. Member States shall publish by 31 January each year the criteria for the definition of those eligible customers;
(b)
from 1 July 2004, all non-household customers;
(c)
from 1 July 2007, all customers.
2. To avoid imbalance in the opening of electricity markets:
(a)
contracts for the supply of electricity with an eligible customer in the system of another Member State shall not be prohibited if the customer is considered as eligible in both systems involved; and
(b)
where transactions as described in point (a) are refused because the customer is eligible in only one of the two systems, the Commission may, taking into account the situation in the market and the common interest, oblige the refusing party to execute the requested supply at the request of the Member State where the eligible customer is located.

Direct lines
Article 34
1. Member States shall take the measures necessary to enable:
(a)
all electricity producers and electricity supply undertakings established within their territory to supply their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers through a direct line; and
(b)
all eligible customers within their territory to be supplied through a direct line by a producer and supply undertakings.
2. Member States shall lay down the criteria for the grant of authorisations for the construction of direct lines in their territory. Those criteria shall be objective and non-discriminatory.
3. The possibility of supplying electricity through a direct line as referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article shall not affect the possibility of contracting electricity in accordance with Article 32.
4. Member States may issue an authorisation to construct a direct line subject either to the refusal of system access on the basis, as appropriate, of Article 32 or to the opening of a dispute settlement procedure under Article 37.
5. Member States may refuse to authorise a direct line if the granting of such an authorisation would obstruct the provisions of Article 3. Duly substantiated reasons shall be given for such refusal.

Designation and independence of regulatory authorities
Article 35
1. Each Member State shall designate a single national regulatory authority at national level.
2. Paragraph 1 of this Article shall be without prejudice to the designation of other regulatory authorities at regional level within Member States, provided that there is one senior representative for representation and contact purposes at Community level within the Board of Regulators of the Agency in accordance with Article 14(1) of Regulation (EC) No 713/2009.
3. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 of this Article, a Member State may designate regulatory authorities for small systems on a geographically separate region whose consumption, in 2008, accounted for less than 3 % of the total consumption of the Member State of which it is part. This derogation shall be without prejudice to the appointment of one senior representative for representation and contact purposes at Community level within the Board of Regulators of the Agency in compliance with Article 14(1) of Regulation (EC) No 713/2009.
4. Member States shall guarantee the independence of the regulatory authority and shall ensure that it exercises its powers impartially and transparently. For this purpose, Member State shall ensure that, when carrying out the regulatory tasks conferred upon it by this Directive and related legislation, the regulatory authority:
(a)
is legally distinct and functionally independent from any other public or private entity;
(b)
ensures that its staff and the persons responsible for its management:
(i)
act independently from any market interest; and
(ii)
do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37.
5. In order to protect the independence of the regulatory authority, Member States shall in particular ensure that:
(a)
the regulatory authority can take autonomous decisions, independently from any political body, and has separate annual budget allocations, with autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget, and adequate human and financial resources to carry out its duties; and
(b)
the members of the board of the regulatory authority or, in the absence of a board, the regulatory authority’s top management are appointed for a fixed term of five up to seven years, renewable once.
In regard to point (b) of the first subparagraph, Member States shall ensure an appropriate rotation scheme for the board or the top management. The members of the board or, in the absence of a board, members of the top management may be relieved from office during their term only if they no longer fulfil the conditions set out in this Article or have been guilty of misconduct under national law.

General objectives of the regulatory authority
Article 36
In carrying out the regulatory tasks specified in this Directive, the regulatory authority shall take all reasonable measures in pursuit of the following objectives within the framework of their duties and powers as laid down in Article 37, in close consultation with other relevant national authorities including competition authorities, as appropriate, and without prejudice to their competencies:
(a)
promoting, in close cooperation with the Agency, regulatory authorities of other Member States and the Commission, a competitive, secure and environmentally sustainable internal market in electricity within the Community, and effective market opening for all customers and suppliers in the Community and ensuring appropriate conditions for the effective and reliable operation of electricity networks, taking into account long-term objectives;
(b)
developing competitive and properly functioning regional markets within the Community in view of the achievement of the objectives referred to in point (a);
(c)
eliminating restrictions on trade in electricity between Member States, including developing appropriate cross-border transmission capacities to meet demand and enhancing the integration of national markets which may facilitate electricity flows across the Community;
(d)
helping to achieve, in the most cost-effective way, the development of secure, reliable and efficient non-discriminatory systems that are consumer oriented, and promoting system adequacy and, in line with general energy policy objectives, energy efficiency as well as the integration of large and small-scale production of electricity from renewable energy sources and distributed generation in both transmission and distribution networks;
(e)
facilitating access to the network for new generation capacity, in particular removing barriers that could prevent access for new market entrants and of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(f)
ensuring that system operators and system users are granted appropriate incentives, in both the short and the long term, to increase efficiencies in system performance and foster market integration;
(g)
ensuring that customers benefit through the efficient functioning of their national market, promoting effective competition and helping to ensure consumer protection;
(h)
helping to achieve high standards of universal and public service in electricity supply, contributing to the protection of vulnerable customers and contributing to the compatibility of necessary data exchange processes for customer switching.

Duties and powers of the regulatory authority
Article 37
1. The regulatory authority shall have the following duties:
(a)
fixing or approving, in accordance with transparent criteria, transmission or distribution tariffs or their methodologies;
(b)
ensuring compliance of transmission and distribution system operators and, where relevant, system owners, as well as of any electricity undertakings, with their obligations under this Directive and other relevant Community legislation, including as regards cross-border issues;
(c)
cooperating in regard to cross-border issues with the regulatory authority or authorities of the Member States concerned and with the Agency;
(d)
complying with, and implementing, any relevant legally binding decisions of the Agency and of the Commission;
(e)
reporting annually on its activity and the fulfilment of its duties to the relevant authorities of the Member States, the Agency and the Commission. Such reports shall cover the steps taken and the results obtained as regards each of the tasks listed in this Article;
(f)
ensuring that there are no cross-subsidies between transmission, distribution, and supply activities;
(g)
monitoring investment plans of the transmission system operators, and providing in its annual report an assessment of the investment plans of the transmission system operators as regards their consistency with the Community-wide network development plan referred to in Article 8(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009; such assessment may include recommendations to amend those investment plans;
(h)
monitoring compliance with and reviewing the past performance of network security and reliability rules and setting or approving standards and requirements for quality of service and supply or contributing thereto together with other competent authorities;
(i)
monitoring the level of transparency, including of wholesale prices, and ensuring compliance of electricity undertakings with transparency obligations;
(j)
monitoring the level and effectiveness of market opening and competition at wholesale and retail levels, including on electricity exchanges, prices for household customers including prepayment systems, switching rates, disconnection rates, charges for and the execution of maintenance services, and complaints by household customers, as well as any distortion or restriction of competition, including providing any relevant information, and bringing any relevant cases to the relevant competition authorities;
(k)
monitoring the occurrence of restrictive contractual practices, including exclusivity clauses which may prevent large non-household customers from contracting simultaneously with more than one supplier or restrict their choice to do so, and, where appropriate, informing the national competition authorities of such practices;
(l)
respecting contractual freedom with regard to interruptible supply contracts and with regard to long-term contracts provided that they are compatible with Community law and consistent with Community policies;
(m)
monitoring the time taken by transmission and distribution system operators to make connections and repairs;
(n)
helping to ensure, together with other relevant authorities, that the consumer protection measures, including those set out in Annex I, are effective and enforced;
(o)
publishing recommendations, at least annually, in relation to compliance of supply prices with Article 3, and providing these to the competition authorities, where appropriate;
(p)
ensuring access to customer consumption data, the provision, for optional use, of an easily understandable harmonised format at national level for consumption data, and prompt access for all customers to such data under point (h) of Annex I;
(q)
monitoring the implementation of rules relating to the roles and responsibilities of transmission system operators, distribution system operators, suppliers and customers and other market parties pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 714/2009;
(r)
monitoring investment in generation capacities in relation to security of supply;
(s)
monitoring technical cooperation between Community and third-country transmission system operators;
(t)
monitoring the implementation of safeguards measures as referred to in Article 42; and
(u)
contributing to the compatibility of data exchange processes for the most important market processes at regional level.
2. Where a Member State has so provided, the monitoring duties set out in paragraph 1 may be carried out by other authorities than the regulatory authority. In such a case, the information resulting from such monitoring shall be made available to the regulatory authority as soon as possible.
While preserving their independence, without prejudice to their own specific competencies and consistent with the principles of better regulation, the regulatory authority shall, as appropriate, consult transmission system operators and, as appropriate, closely cooperate with other relevant national authorities when carrying out the duties set out in paragraph 1.
Any approvals given by a regulatory authority or the Agency under this Directive are without prejudice to any duly justified future use of its powers by the regulatory authority under this Article or to any penalties imposed by other relevant authorities or the Commission.
3. In addition to the duties conferred upon it under paragraph 1 of this Article, when an independent system operator has been designated under Article 13, the regulatory authority shall:
(a)
monitor the transmission system owner’s and the independent system operator’s compliance with their obligations under this Article, and issue penalties for non-compliance in accordance with paragraph 4(d);
(b)
monitor the relations and communications between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner so as to ensure compliance of the independent system operator with its obligations, and in particular approve contracts and act as a dispute settlement authority between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner in respect of any complaint submitted by either party pursuant to paragraph 11;
(c)
without prejudice to the procedure under Article 13(2)(c), for the first ten-year network development plan, approve the investments planning and the multi-annual network development plan presented annually by the independent system operator;
(d)
ensure that network access tariffs collected by the independent system operator include remuneration for the network owner or network owners, which provides for adequate remuneration of the network assets and of any new investments made therein, provided they are economically and efficiently incurred;
(e)
have the powers to carry out inspections, including unannounced inspections, at the premises of transmission system owner and independent system operator; and
(f)
monitor the use of congestion charges collected by the independent system operator in accordance with Article 16(6) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
4. Member States shall ensure that regulatory authorities are granted the powers enabling them to carry out the duties referred to in paragraphs 1, 3 and 6 in an efficient and expeditious manner. For this purpose, the regulatory authority shall have at least the following powers:
(a)
to issue binding decisions on electricity undertakings;
(b)
to carry out investigations into the functioning of the electricity markets, and to decide upon and impose any necessary and proportionate measures to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Where appropriate, the regulatory authority shall also have the power to cooperate with the national competition authority and the financial market regulators or the Commission in conducting an investigation relating to competition law;
(c)
to require any information from electricity undertakings relevant for the fulfilment of its tasks, including the justification for any refusal to grant third-party access, and any information on measures necessary to reinforce the network;
(d)
to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings not complying with their obligations under this Directive or any relevant legally binding decisions of the regulatory authority or of the Agency, or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. This shall include the power to impose or propose the imposition of penalties of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the transmission system operator on the transmission system operator or of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the vertically integrated undertaking on the vertically integrated undertaking, as the case may be, for non-compliance with their respective obligations pursuant to this Directive; and
(e)
appropriate rights of investigations and relevant powers of instructions for dispute settlement under paragraphs 11 and 12.
5. In addition to the duties and powers conferred on it under paragraphs 1 and 4 of this Article, when a transmission system operator has been designated in accordance with Chapter V, the regulatory authority shall be granted at least the following duties and powers:
(a)
to issue penalties in accordance with paragraph 4(d) for discriminatory behaviour in favour of the vertically integrated undertaking;
(b)
to monitor communications between the transmission system operator and the vertically integrated undertaking so as to ensure compliance of the transmission system operator with its obligations;
(c)
to act as dispute settlement authority between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator in respect of any complaint submitted pursuant to paragraph 11;
(d)
to monitor commercial and financial relations including loans between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator;
(e)
to approve all commercial and financial agreements between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator on the condition that they comply with market conditions;
(f)
to request justification from the vertically integrated undertaking when notified by the compliance officer in accordance with Article 21(4). Such justification shall, in particular, include evidence to the end that no discriminatory behaviour to the advantage of the vertically integrated undertaking has occurred;
(g)
to carry out inspections, including unannounced ones, on the premises of the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator; and
(h)
to assign all or specific tasks of the transmission system operator to an independent system operator appointed in accordance with Article 13 in case of a persistent breach by the transmission system operator of its obligations under this Directive, in particular in case of repeated discriminatory behaviour to the benefit of the vertically integrated undertaking.
6. The regulatory authorities shall be responsible for fixing or approving sufficiently in advance of their entry into force at least the methodologies used to calculate or establish the terms and conditions for:
(a)
connection and access to national networks, including transmission and distribution tariffs or their methodologies. Those tariffs or methodologies shall allow the necessary investments in the networks to be carried out in a manner allowing those investments to ensure the viability of the networks;
(b)
the provision of balancing services which shall be performed in the most economic manner possible and provide appropriate incentives for network users to balance their input and off-takes. The balancing services shall be provided in a fair and non-discriminatory manner and be based on objective criteria; and
(c)
access to cross-border infrastructures, including the procedures for the allocation of capacity and congestion management.
7. The methodologies or the terms and conditions referred to in paragraph 6 shall be published.
8. In fixing or approving the tariffs or methodologies and the balancing services, the regulatory authorities shall ensure that transmission and distribution system operators are granted appropriate incentive, over both the short and long term, to increase efficiencies, foster market integration and security of supply and support the related research activities.
9. The regulatory authorities shall monitor congestion management of national electricity systems including interconnectors, and the implementation of congestion management rules. To that end, transmission system operators or market operators shall submit their congestion management rules, including capacity allocation, to the national regulatory authorities. National regulatory authorities may request amendments to those rules.
10. Regulatory authorities shall have the authority to require transmission and distribution system operators, if necessary, to modify the terms and conditions, including tariffs or methodologies referred to in this Article, to ensure that they are proportionate and applied in a non-discriminatory manner. In the event of delay in the fixing of transmission and distribution tariffs, regulatory authorities shall have the power to fix or approve provisional transmission and distribution tariffs or methodologies and to decide on the appropriate compensatory measures if the final transmission and distribution tariffs or methodologies deviate from those provisional tariffs or methodologies.
11. Any party having a complaint against a transmission or distribution system operator in relation to that operator’s obligations under this Directive may refer the complaint to the regulatory authority which, acting as dispute settlement authority, shall issue a decision within a period of two months after receipt of the complaint. That period may be extended by two months where additional information is sought by the regulatory authority. That extended period may be further extended with the agreement of the complainant. The regulatory authority’s decision shall have binding effect unless and until overruled on appeal.
12. Any party who is affected and who has a right to complain concerning a decision on methodologies taken pursuant to this Article or, where the regulatory authority has a duty to consult, concerning the proposed tariffs or methodologies, may, at the latest within two months, or a shorter time period as provided by Member States, following publication of the decision or proposal for a decision, submit a complaint for review. Such a complaint shall not have suspensive effect.
13. Member States shall create appropriate and efficient mechanisms for regulation, control and transparency so as to avoid any abuse of a dominant position, in particular to the detriment of consumers, and any predatory behaviour. Those mechanisms shall take account of the provisions of the Treaty, and in particular Article 82 thereof.
14. Member States shall ensure that the appropriate measures are taken, including administrative action or criminal proceedings in conformity with their national law, against the natural or legal persons responsible where confidentiality rules imposed by this Directive have not been respected.
15. Complaints referred to in paragraphs 11 and 12 shall be without prejudice to the exercise of rights of appeal under Community or national law.
16. Decisions taken by regulatory authorities shall be fully reasoned and justified to allow for judicial review. The decisions shall be available to the public while preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.
17. Member States shall ensure that suitable mechanisms exist at national level under which a party affected by a decision of a regulatory authority has a right of appeal to a body independent of the parties involved and of any government.

Regulatory regime for cross-border issues
Article 38
1. Regulatory authorities shall closely consult and cooperate with each other, and shall provide each other and the Agency with any information necessary for the fulfilment of their tasks under this Directive. In respect of the information exchanged, the receiving authority shall ensure the same level of confidentiality as that required of the originating authority.
2. Regulatory authorities shall cooperate at least at a regional level to:
(a)
foster the creation of operational arrangements in order to enable an optimal management of the network, promote joint electricity exchanges and the allocation of cross-border capacity, and to enable an adequate level of interconnection capacity, including through new interconnection, within the region and between regions to allow for development of effective competition and improvement of security of supply, without discriminating between supply undertakings in different Member States;
(b)
coordinate the development of all network codes for the relevant transmission system operators and other market actors; and
(c)
coordinate the development of the rules governing the management of congestion.
3. National regulatory authorities shall have the right to enter into cooperative arrangements with each other to foster regulatory cooperation.
4. The actions referred to in paragraph 2 shall be carried out, as appropriate, in close consultation with other relevant national authorities and without prejudice to their specific competencies.
5. The Commission may adopt Guidelines on the extent of the duties of the regulatory authorities to cooperate with each other and with the Agency. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Compliances with the Guidelines
Article 39
1. Any regulatory authority and the Commission may request the opinion of the Agency on the compliance of a decision taken by a regulatory authority with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
2. The Agency shall provide its opinion to the regulatory authority which has requested it or to the Commission, respectively, and to the regulatory authority which has taken the decision in question within three months from the date of receipt of the request.
3. Where the regulatory authority which has taken the decision does not comply with the Agency’s opinion within four months from the date of receipt of that opinion, the Agency shall inform the Commission accordingly.
4. Any regulatory authority may inform the Commission where it considers that a decision relevant for cross-border trade taken by another regulatory authority does not comply with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 within two months from the date of that decision.
5. Where the Commission, within two months after having been informed by the Agency in accordance with paragraph 3, or by a regulatory authority in accordance with paragraph 4, or on its own initiative, within three months from the date of the decision, finds that the decision of a regulatory authority raises serious doubts as to its compatibility with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, the Commission may decide to examine the case further. In such a case, it shall invite the regulatory authority and the parties to the proceedings before the regulatory authority to submit observations.
6. Where the Commission takes a decision to examine the case further, it shall, within four months of the date of such decision, issue a final decision:
(a)
not to raise objections against the decision of the regulatory authority; or
(b)
to require the regulatory authority concerned to withdraw its decision on the basis that that the Guidelines have not been complied with.
7. Where the Commission has not taken a decision to examine the case further or a final decision within the time-limits set in paragraphs 5 and 6 respectively, it shall be deemed not to have raised objections to the decision of the regulatory authority.
8. The regulatory authority shall comply with the Commission decision to withdraw their decision within a period of two months and shall inform the Commission accordingly.
9. The Commission may adopt Guidelines setting out the details of the procedure to be followed for the application of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Record keeping
Article 40
1. Member States shall require supply undertakings to keep at the disposal of the national authorities, including the national regulatory authority, the national competition authorities and the Commission, for the fulfilment of their tasks, for at least five years, the relevant data relating to all transactions in electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives with wholesale customers and transmission system operators.
2. The data shall include details on the characteristics of the relevant transactions such as duration, delivery and settlement rules, the quantity, the dates and times of execution and the transaction prices and means of identifying the wholesale customer concerned, as well as specified details of all unsettled electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives.
3. The regulatory authority may decide to make available to market participants elements of that information provided that commercially sensitive information on individual market players or individual transactions is not released. This paragraph shall not apply to information about financial instruments which fall within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC.
4. To ensure the uniform application of this Article, the Commission may adopt Guidelines which define the methods and arrangements for record keeping as well as the form and content of the data that shall be kept. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).
5. With respect to transactions in electricity derivatives of supply undertakings with wholesale customers and transmission system operators, this Article shall apply only once the Commission has adopted the Guidelines referred to in paragraph 4.
6. The provisions of this Article shall not create additional obligations towards the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 for entities falling within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC.
7. In the event that the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 need access to data kept by entities falling within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC, the authorities responsible under that Directive shall provide them with the required data.

Retail markets
Article 41
In order to facilitate the emergence of well functioning and transparent retail markets in the Community, Member States shall ensure that the roles and responsibilities of transmission system operators, distribution system operators, supply undertakings and customers and if necessary other market participants are defined with respect to contractual arrangements, commitment to customers, data exchange and settlement rules, data ownership and metering responsibility.
Those rules shall be made public, be designed with the aim to facilitate customers’ and suppliers’ access to networks, and they shall be subject to review by the regulatory authorities or other relevant national authorities.
Large non-household customers shall have the right to contract simultaneously with several suppliers.

Safeguard measures
Article 42
In the event of a sudden crisis in the energy market and where the physical safety or security of persons, apparatus or installations or system integrity is threatened, a Member State may temporarily take the necessary safeguard measures.
Such measures must cause the least possible disturbance in the functioning of the internal market and must not be wider in scope than is strictly necessary to remedy the sudden difficulties which have arisen.
The Member State concerned shall, without delay, notify those measures to the other Member States, and to the Commission, which may decide that the Member State concerned must amend or abolish such measures, insofar as they distort competition and adversely affect trade in a manner which is at variance with the common interest.

Level playing field
Article 43
1. Measures that the Member States may take pursuant to this Directive in order to ensure a level playing field shall be compatible with the Treaty, notably Article 30 thereof, and with Community law.
2. The measures referred to in paragraph 1 shall be proportionate, non-discriminatory and transparent. Those measures may be put into effect only following the notification to and approval by the Commission.
3. The Commission shall act on the notification referred to in paragraph 2 within two months of the receipt of the notification. That period shall begin on the day following receipt of the complete information. In the event that the Commission has not acted within that two-month period, it shall be deemed not to have raised objections to the notified measures.

Derogations
Article 44
1. Member States which can demonstrate, after this Directive has been brought into force, that there are substantial problems for the operation of their small isolated systems, may apply for derogations from the relevant provisions of Chapters IV, VI, VII, and VIII, as well as Chapter III, in the case of micro isolated systems, as far as refurbishing, upgrading and expanding existing capacity are concerned, which may be granted to them by the Commission. The Commission shall inform the Member States of those applications before taking a decision, taking into account respect for confidentiality. That decision shall be published in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
2. Article 9 shall not apply to Cyprus, Luxembourg and/or Malta. In addition, Articles 26, 32 and 33 shall not apply to Malta.
For the purposes of Article 9(1)(b), the notion ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply’ shall not include final customers who perform any of the functions of generation and/or supply of electricity, either directly or via undertakings over which they exercise control, either individually or jointly, provided that the final customers including their shares of the electricity produced in controlled undertakings are, on an annual average, net consumers of electricity and provided that the economic value of the electricity they sell to third parties is insignificant in proportion to their other business operations.

Review procedure
Article 45
In the event that in the report referred to in Article 47(6) the Commission reaches the conclusion that given the effective manner in which network access has been carried out in a Member State — which gives rise to fully effective, non-discriminatory and unhindered network access — certain obligations imposed by this Directive on undertakings (including those with respect to legal unbundling for distribution system operators) are not proportionate to the objective pursued, the Member State in question may submit a request to the Commission for exemption from the requirement in question.
Such request shall be notified, without delay, by the Member State to the Commission, together with all the relevant information necessary to demonstrate that the conclusion reached in the report on effective network access being ensured will be maintained.
Within three months of its receipt of a notification, the Commission shall adopt an opinion with respect to the request by the Member State concerned, and where appropriate, submit proposals to the European Parliament and to the Council to amend the relevant provisions of this Directive. The Commission may propose, in the proposals to amend this Directive, to exempt the Member State concerned from specific requirements, subject to that Member State implementing equally effective measures as appropriate.

Committee
Article 46
1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee.
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4), and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.

Reporting
Article 47
1. The Commission shall monitor and review the application of this Directive and submit an overall progress report to the European Parliament and the Council for the first time by 4 August 2004, and thereafter on an annual basis. The progress report shall cover at least:
(a)
the experience gained and progress made in creating a complete and fully operational internal market in electricity and the obstacles that remain in this respect, including aspects of market dominance, concentration in the market, predatory or anti-competitive behaviour and the effect thereof in terms of market distortion;
(b)
the extent to which the unbundling and tarification requirements contained in this Directive have been successful in ensuring fair and non-discriminatory access to the Community’s electricity system and equivalent levels of competition, as well as the economic, environmental and social consequences of the opening of the electricity market to customers;
(c)
an examination of issues relating to system capacity levels and security of supply of electricity in the Community, and in particular the existing and projected balance between demand and supply, taking into account the physical capacity for exchanges between areas;
(d)
special attention will be given to measures taken in Member States to cover peak demand and to deal with shortfalls of one or more suppliers;
(e)
the implementation of the derogation provided under Article 26(4) with a view to a possible revision of the threshold;
(f)
a general assessment of the progress achieved with regard to bilateral relations with third countries which produce and export or transport electricity, including progress in market integration, the social and environmental consequences of the trade in electricity and access to the networks of such third countries;
(g)
the need for possible harmonisation requirements that are not linked to the provisions of this Directive; and
(h)
the manner in which Member States have implemented in practice the requirements regarding energy labelling contained in Article 3(9), and the manner in which any Commission recommendations on that issue have been taken into account.
Where appropriate, the progress report may include recommendations as regards, in particular, the scope and modalities of labelling provisions, including the way in which reference is made to existing reference sources and the content of those sources, and, notably, how information relating to environmental impact, as regards at least CO2emissions, and radioactive waste, resulting from electricity generation from different energy sources could be made available in a transparent, easily accessible and comparable manner throughout the Community, how the measures taken by the Member States to control the accuracy of the information provided by suppliers could be streamlined, and which measures could counteract the negative effects of market dominance and market concentration.
2. Every two years, the progress report referred to in paragraph 1 shall also include an analysis of the different measures taken in the Member States to meet public service obligations, together with an examination of the effectiveness of those measures and, in particular, their effects on competition in the electricity market. Where appropriate, the report may include recommendations as to the measures to be taken at national level to achieve high public service standards, or measures intended to prevent market foreclosure.
3. The Commission shall, by 3 March 2013, submit, as part of the general review, to the European Parliament and the Council, a detailed specific report outlining the extent to which the unbundling requirements under Chapter V have been successful in ensuring full and effective independence of transmission system operators, using effective and efficient unbundling as a benchmark.
4. For the purpose of its assessment under paragraph 3, the Commission shall take into account in particular the following criteria: fair and non-discriminatory network access, effective regulation, the development of the network to meet market needs, undistorted incentives to invest, the development of interconnection infrastructure, effective competition in the energy markets of the Community and the security of supply situation in the Community.
5. Where appropriate, and in particular in the event that the detailed specific report referred to in paragraph 3 determines that the conditions referred to in paragraph 4 have not been guaranteed in practice, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council to ensure fully effective independence of transmission system operators by 3 March 2014.
6. The Commission shall, by 1 January 2006, forward to the European Parliament and Council, a detailed report outlining progress in creating the internal electricity market. That report shall, in particular, consider:
—
the existence of non-discriminatory network access,
—
effective regulation,
—
the development of interconnection infrastructure and the security of supply situation in the Community,
—
the extent to which the full benefits of the opening of markets are accruing to small enterprises and household customers, notably with respect to public service and universal service standards,
—
the extent to which markets are in practice open to effective competition, including aspects of market dominance, market concentration and predatory or anti-competitive behaviour,
—
the extent to which customers are actually switching suppliers and renegotiating tariffs,
—
price developments, including supply prices, in relation to the degree of the opening of markets; and,
—
the experience gained in the application of this Directive as far as the effective independence of system operators in vertically integrated undertakings is concerned and whether other measures in addition to functional independence and separation of accounts have been developed which have effects equivalent to legal unbundling.
Where appropriate, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, in particular to guarantee high public service standards.
Where appropriate, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, in particular to ensure full and effective independence of distribution system operators before 1 July 2007. When necessary, those proposals shall, in conformity with competition law, also concern measures to address issues of market dominance, market concentration and predatory or anti-competitive behaviour.

Repeal
Article 48
Directive 2003/54/EC is repealed from 3 March 2011 without prejudice to the obligations of Member States concerning the deadlines for transposition and application of the said Directive. References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex II.

Transposition
Article 49
1. Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 3 March 2011. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.
They shall apply those measures from 3 March 2011, with the exception of Article 11, which they shall apply from 3 March 2013.
When Member States adopt those measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such reference shall be laid down by Member States.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Entry into force
Article 50
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Addressees
Article 51
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 47(2) and Articles 55 and 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions(2),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(3),
(1) The internal market in electricity, which has been progressively implemented throughout the Community since 1999, aims to deliver real choice for all consumers of the European Union, be they citizens or businesses, new business opportunities and more cross-border trade, so as to achieve efficiency gains, competitive prices, and higher standards of service, and to contribute to security of supply and sustainability.
(2) Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(4)has made a significant contribution towards the creation of such an internal market in electricity.
(3) The freedoms which the Treaty guarantees the citizens of the Union — inter alia, the free movement of goods, the freedom of establishment and the freedom to provide services — are achievable only in a fully open market, which enables all consumers freely to choose their suppliers and all suppliers freely to deliver to their customers.
(4) However, at present, there are obstacles to the sale of electricity on equal terms and without discrimination or disadvantages in the Community. In particular, non-discriminatory network access and an equally effective level of regulatory supervision in each Member State do not yet exist.
(5) A secure supply of electricity is of vital importance for the development of European society, the implementation of a sustainable climate change policy, and the fostering of competitiveness within the internal market. To that end, cross-border interconnections should be further developed in order to secure the supply of all energy sources at the most competitive prices to consumers and industry within the Community.
(6) A well-functioning internal market in electricity should provide producers with the appropriate incentives for investing in new power generation, including in electricity from renewable energy sources, paying special attention to the most isolated countries and regions in the Community’s energy market. A well-functioning market should also provide consumers with adequate measures to promote the more efficient use of energy for which a secure supply of energy is a precondition.
(7) The Communication of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘An Energy Policy for Europe’ highlighted the importance of completing the internal market in electricity and of creating a level playing field for all electricity undertakings established in the Community. The Communications of the Commission of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Prospects for the internal gas and electricity market’ and ‘Inquiry pursuant to Article 17 of Regulation (EC) No 1/2003 into the European gas and electricity sectors (Final Report)’ showed that the present rules and measures do not provide the necessary framework for achieving the objective of a well-functioning internal market.
(8) In order to secure competition and the supply of electricity at the most competitive price, Member States and national regulatory authorities should facilitate cross-border access for new suppliers of electricity from different energy sources as well as for new providers of power generation.
(9) Without effective separation of networks from activities of generation and supply (effective unbundling), there is an inherent risk of discrimination not only in the operation of the network but also in the incentives for vertically integrated undertakings to invest adequately in their networks.
(10) The rules on legal and functional unbundling as provided for in Directive 2003/54/EC have not, however, led to effective unbundling of the transmission system operators. At its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council therefore invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals for the ‘effective separation of supply and generation activities from network operations’.
(11) Only the removal of the incentive for vertically integrated undertakings to discriminate against competitors as regards network access and investment can ensure effective unbundling. Ownership unbundling, which implies the appointment of the network owner as the system operator and its independence from any supply and production interests, is clearly an effective and stable way to solve the inherent conflict of interests and to ensure security of supply. For that reason, the European Parliament, in its resolution of 10 July 2007 on prospects for the internal gas and electricity market(5)referred to ownership unbundling at transmission level as the most effective tool by which to promote investments in infrastructure in a non-discriminatory way, fair access to the network for new entrants and transparency in the market. Under ownership unbundling, Member States should therefore be required to ensure that the same person or persons are not entitled to exercise control over a generation or supply undertaking and, at the same time, exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator or transmission system. Conversely, control over a transmission system or transmission system operator should preclude the possibility of exercising control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking. Within those limits, a generation or supply undertaking should be able to have a minority shareholding in a transmission system operator or transmission system.
(12) Any system for unbundling should be effective in removing any conflict of interests between producers, suppliers and transmission system operators, in order to create incentives for the necessary investments and guarantee the access of new market entrants under a transparent and efficient regulatory regime and should not create an overly onerous regulatory regime for national regulatory authorities.
(13) The definition of the term ‘control’ is taken from Council Regulation (EC) No 139/2004 of 20 January 2004 on the control of concentrations between undertakings (the EC Merger Regulation)(6).
(14) Since ownership unbundling requires, in some instances, the restructuring of undertakings, Member States that decide to implement ownership unbundling should be granted additional time to apply the relevant provisions. In view of the vertical links between the electricity and gas sectors, the unbundling provisions should apply across the two sectors.
(15) Under ownership unbundling, to ensure full independence of network operation from supply and generation interests and to prevent exchanges of any confidential information, the same person should not be a member of the managing boards of both a transmission system operator or a transmission system and an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply. For the same reason, the same person should not be entitled to appoint members of the managing boards of a transmission system operator or a transmission system and to exercise control or any right over a generation or supply undertaking.
(16) The setting up of a system operator or a transmission operator that is independent from supply and generation interests should enable a vertically integrated undertaking to maintain its ownership of network assets whilst ensuring effective separation of interests, provided that such independent system operator or such independent transmission operator performs all the functions of a system operator and detailed regulation and extensive regulatory control mechanisms are put in place.
(17) Where, on 3 September 2009, an undertaking owning a transmission system is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, Member States should therefore be given a choice between ownership unbundling and setting up a system operator or transmission operator which is independent from supply and generation interests.
(18) To preserve fully the interests of the shareholders of vertically integrated undertakings, Member States should have the choice of implementing ownership unbundling either by direct divestiture or by splitting the shares of the integrated undertaking into shares of the network undertaking and shares of the remaining supply and generation undertaking, provided that the requirements resulting from ownership unbundling are complied with.
(19) The full effectiveness of the independent system operator or independent transmission operator solutions should be ensured by way of specific additional rules. The rules on the independent transmission operator provide an appropriate regulatory framework to guarantee fair competition, sufficient investment, access for new market entrants and the integration of electricity markets. Effective unbundling through the independent transmission operator provisions should be based on a pillar of organisational measures and measures relating to the governance of transmission system operators and on a pillar of measures relating to investment, connecting new production capacities to the network and market integration through regional cooperation. The independence of the transmission operator should also, inter alia, be ensured through certain ‘cooling-off’ periods during which no management or other relevant activity giving access to the same information as could have been obtained in a managerial position is exercised in the vertically integrated undertaking. The independent transmission operator model of effective unbundling is in line with the requirements laid down by the European Council at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007.
(20) In order to develop competition in the internal market in electricity, large non-household customers should be able to choose their suppliers and enter into contracts with several suppliers to secure their electricity requirements. Such customers should be protected against exclusivity clauses the effect of which is to exclude competing or complementary offers.
(21) A Member State has the right to opt for full ownership unbundling in its territory. Where a Member State has exercised that right, an undertaking does not have the right to set up an independent system operator or an independent transmission operator. Furthermore, an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply cannot directly or indirectly exercise control or any right over a transmission system operator from a Member State that has opted for full ownership unbundling.
(22) Under this Directive different types of market organisation will exist in the internal market in electricity. The measures that Member States could take in order to ensure a level playing field should be based on overriding requirements of general interest. The Commission should be consulted on the compatibility of the measures with the Treaty and Community law.
(23) The implementation of effective unbundling should respect the principle of non-discrimination between the public and private sectors. To that end, the same person should not be able to exercise control or any right, in violation of the rules of ownership unbundling or the independent system operator option, solely or jointly, over the composition, voting or decision of the bodies of both the transmission system operators or the transmission systems and the generation or supply undertakings. With regard to ownership unbundling and the independent system operator solution, provided that the Member State in question is able to demonstrate that the requirement is complied with, two separate public bodies should be able to control generation and supply activities on the one hand and transmission activities on the other.
(24) Fully effective separation of network activities from supply and generation activities should apply throughout the Community to both Community and non-Community undertakings. To ensure that network activities and supply and generation activities throughout the Community remain independent from each other, regulatory authorities should be empowered to refuse certification to transmission system operators that do not comply with the unbundling rules. To ensure the consistent application of those rules across the Community, the regulatory authorities should take utmost account of the Commission’s opinion when the former take decisions on certification. To ensure, in addition, respect for the international obligations of the Community, and solidarity and energy security within the Community, the Commission should have the right to give an opinion on certification in relation to a transmission system owner or a transmission system operator which is controlled by a person or persons from a third country or third countries.
(25) The security of energy supply is an essential element of public security and is therefore inherently connected to the efficient functioning of the internal market in electricity and the integration of the isolated electricity markets of Member States. Electricity can reach the citizens of the Union only through the network. Functioning electricity markets and, in particular, the networks and other assets associated with electricity supply are essential for public security, for the competitiveness of the economy and for the well-being of the citizens of the Union. Persons from third countries should therefore be allowed to control a transmission system or a transmission system operator only if they comply with the requirements of effective separation that apply inside the Community. Without prejudice to the international obligations of the Community, the Community considers that the electricity transmission system sector is of high importance to the Community and therefore additional safeguards are necessary regarding the preservation of the security of supply of energy to the Community to avoid any threats to public order and public security in the Community and the welfare of the citizens of the Union. The security of supply of energy to the Community requires, in particular, an assessment of the independence of network operation, the level of the Community’s and individual Member States’ dependence on energy supply from third countries, and the treatment of both domestic and foreign trade and investment in energy in a particular third country. Security of supply should therefore be assessed in the light of the factual circumstances of each case as well as the rights and obligations arising under international law, in particular the international agreements between the Community and the third country concerned. Where appropriate the Commission is encouraged to submit recommendations to negotiate relevant agreements with third countries addressing the security of supply of energy to the Community or to include the necessary issues in other negotiations with those third countries.
(26) Non-discriminatory access to the distribution network determines downstream access to customers at retail level. The scope for discrimination as regards third-party access and investment, however, is less significant at distribution level than at transmission level where congestion and the influence of generation or supply interests are generally greater than at distribution level. Moreover, legal and functional unbundling of distribution system operators was required, pursuant to Directive 2003/54/EC, only from 1 July 2007 and its effects on the internal market in electricity still need to be evaluated. The rules on legal and functional unbundling currently in place can lead to effective unbundling provided they are more clearly defined, properly implemented and closely monitored. To create a level playing field at retail level, the activities of distribution system operators should therefore be monitored so that they are prevented from taking advantage of their vertical integration as regards their competitive position on the market, in particular in relation to household and small non-household customers.
(27) Member States should encourage the modernisation of distribution networks, such as through the introduction of smart grids, which should be built in a way that encourages decentralised generation and energy efficiency.
(28) In the case of small systems it may be necessary that the provision of ancillary services is ensured by transmission system operators interconnected with small systems.
(29) To avoid imposing a disproportionate financial and administrative burden on small distribution system operators, Member States should be able, where necessary, to exempt the undertakings concerned from the legal distribution unbundling requirements.
(30) Where a closed distribution system is used to ensure the optimal efficiency of an integrated energy supply requiring specific operational standards, or a closed distribution system is maintained primarily for the use of the owner of the system, it should be possible to exempt the distribution system operator from obligations which would constitute an unnecessary administrative burden because of the particular nature of the relationship between the distribution system operator and the users of the system. Industrial, commercial or shared services sites such as train station buildings, airports, hospitals, large camping sites with integrated facilities or chemical industry sites can include closed distribution systems because of the specialised nature of their operations.
(31) Authorisation procedures should not lead to an administrative burden disproportionate to the size and potential impact of electricity producers. Unduly lengthy authorisation procedures may constitute a barrier to access for new market entrants.
(32) Further measures should be taken in order to ensure transparent and non-discriminatory tariffs for access to networks. Those tariffs should be applicable to all system users on a non-discriminatory basis.
(33) Directive 2003/54/EC introduced a requirement for Member States to establish regulators with specific competences. However, experience shows that the effectiveness of regulation is frequently hampered through a lack of independence of regulators from government, and insufficient powers and discretion. For that reason, at its meeting on 8 and 9 March 2007, the European Council invited the Commission to develop legislative proposals providing for further harmonisation of the powers and strengthening of the independence of national energy regulators. It should be possible for those national regulatory authorities to cover both the electricity and the gas sectors.
(34) Energy regulators need to be able to take decisions in relation to all relevant regulatory issues if the internal market in electricity is to function properly, and to be fully independent from any other public or private interests. This precludes neither judicial review nor parliamentary supervision in accordance with the constitutional laws of the Member States. In addition, approval of the budget of the regulator by the national legislator does not constitute an obstacle to budgetary autonomy. The provisions relating to the autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget of the regulatory authority should be implemented in the framework defined by national budgetary law and rules. While contributing to the independence of the national regulatory authority from any political or economic interest through an appropriate rotation scheme, it should be possible for Member States to take due account of the availability of human resources and of the size of the board.
(35) In order to ensure effective market access for all market players, including new entrants, non-discriminatory and cost-reflective balancing mechanisms are necessary. As soon as the electricity market is sufficiently liquid, this should be achieved through the setting up of transparent market-based mechanisms for the supply and purchase of electricity, needed in the framework of balancing requirements. In the absence of such a liquid market, national regulatory authorities should play an active role to ensure that balancing tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective. At the same time, appropriate incentives should be provided to balance the in-put and off-take of electricity and not to endanger the system. Transmission system operators should facilitate participation of final customers and final customers’ aggregators in reserve and balancing markets.
(36) National regulatory authorities should be able to fix or approve tariffs, or the methodologies underlying the calculation of the tariffs, on the basis of a proposal by the transmission system operator or distribution system operator(s), or on the basis of a proposal agreed between those operator(s) and the users of the network. In carrying out those tasks, national regulatory authorities should ensure that transmission and distribution tariffs are non-discriminatory and cost-reflective, and should take account of the long-term, marginal, avoided network costs from distributed generation and demand-side management measures.
(37) Energy regulators should have the power to issue binding decisions in relation to electricity undertakings and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings which fail to comply with their obligations or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties on them. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to decide, irrespective of the application of competition rules, on appropriate measures ensuring customer benefits through the promotion of effective competition necessary for the proper functioning of the internal market in electricity. The establishment of virtual power plants — electricity release programmes whereby electricity undertakings are obliged to sell or to make available a certain volume of electricity or to grant access to part of their generation capacity to interested suppliers for a certain period of time — is one of the possible measures that can be used to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Energy regulators should also be granted the power to contribute to ensuring high standards of universal and public service in compliance with market opening, to the protection of vulnerable customers, and to the full effectiveness of consumer protection measures. Those provisions should be without prejudice to both the Commission’s powers concerning the application of competition rules including the examination of mergers with a Community dimension, and the rules on the internal market such as the free movement of capital. The independent body to which a party affected by the decision of a national regulator has a right to appeal could be a court or other tribunal empowered to conduct a judicial review.
(38) Any harmonisation of the powers of national regulatory authorities should include the powers to provide incentives to electricity undertakings, and to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. Moreover, regulatory authorities should have the power to request relevant information from electricity undertakings, make appropriate and sufficient investigations and settle disputes.
(39) The internal market in electricity suffers from a lack of liquidity and transparency hindering the efficient allocation of resources, risk hedging and new entry. There is a need for enhancement of competition and security of supply through facilitated integration of new power plants into the electricity network in all Member States, in particular encouraging new market entrants. Trust in the market, its liquidity and the number of market participants needs to increase, and, therefore, regulatory oversight of undertakings active in the supply of electricity needs to be increased. Such requirements should be without prejudice to, and compatible with, existing Community law in relation to the financial markets. Energy regulators and financial market regulators need to cooperate in order to enable each other to have an overview over the markets concerned.
(40) Prior to the adoption by the Commission of Guidelines defining further the record-keeping requirements, the Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators established by Regulation (EC) No 713/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 establishing an Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators(7)(the ‘Agency’), and the Committee of European Securities Regulators (the ‘CESR’), established by Commission Decision 2009/77/EC(8), should confer and advise the Commission in regard to their content. The Agency and the CESR should also cooperate to investigate further and advise on whether transactions in electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives should be subject to pre- or post-trade transparency requirements and, if so, what the content of those requirements should be.
(41) Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authority, should encourage the development of interruptible supply contracts.
(42) All Community industry and commerce, including small and medium-sized enterprises, and all citizens of the Union that enjoy the economic benefits of the internal market should also be able to enjoy high levels of consumer protection, and in particular household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises should also be able to enjoy public service guarantees, in particular with regard to security of supply and reasonable tariffs, for reasons of fairness, competitiveness and, indirectly, to create employment. Those customers should also have access to choice, fairness, representation and dispute settlement mechanisms.
(43) Nearly all Member States have chosen to ensure competition in the electricity generation market through a transparent authorisation procedure. However, Member States should ensure the possibility to contribute to security of supply through the launching of a tendering procedure or an equivalent procedure in the event that sufficient electricity generation capacity is not built on the basis of the authorisation procedure. Member States should have the possibility, in the interests of environmental protection and the promotion of new infant technologies, of tendering for new capacity on the basis of published criteria. Such new capacity includes, inter alia, electricity from renewable energy sources and combined heat and power.
(44) In the interests of security of supply, the balance between supply and demand in individual Member States should be monitored, and such monitoring should be followed by a report on the situation at Community level, taking account of interconnection capacity between areas. Such monitoring should be carried out sufficiently early to enable appropriate measures to be taken if security of supply is compromised. The construction and maintenance of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity, should contribute to ensuring a stable electricity supply. The maintenance and construction of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity and decentralised electricity generation, are important elements in ensuring a stable electricity supply.
(45) Member States should ensure that household customers and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, enjoy the right to be supplied with electricity of a specified quality at clearly comparable, transparent and reasonable prices. In order to ensure the maintenance of the high standards of public service in the Community, all measures taken by Member States to achieve the objective of this Directive should be regularly notified to the Commission. The Commission should regularly publish a report analysing measures taken at national level to achieve public service objectives and comparing their effectiveness, with a view to making recommendations as regards measures to be taken at national level to achieve high public service standards. Member States should take the necessary measures to protect vulnerable customers in the context of the internal market in electricity. Such measures may differ according to the particular circumstances in the Member States in question and may include specific measures relating to the payment of electricity bills, or more general measures taken in the social security system. Where universal service is also provided to small enterprises, measures to ensure that such universal service is provided may differ according to whether they are aimed at household customers or small enterprises.
(46) Respect for the public service requirements is a fundamental requirement of this Directive, and it is important that common minimum standards, respected by all Member States, are specified in this Directive, which take into account the objectives of consumer protection, security of supply, environmental protection and equivalent levels of competition in all Member States. It is important that the public service requirements can be interpreted on a national basis, taking into account national circumstances and subject to the respect of Community law.
(47) It should be possible for Member States to appoint a supplier of last resort. That supplier may be the sales division of a vertically integrated undertaking, which also performs the functions of distribution, provided that it meets the unbundling requirements of this Directive.
(48) It should be possible for measures implemented by Member States to achieve the objectives of social and economic cohesion to include, in particular, the provision of adequate economic incentives, using, where appropriate, all existing national and Community tools. Such tools may include liability mechanisms to guarantee the necessary investment.
(49) To the extent to which measures taken by Member States to fulfil public service obligations constitute State aid under Article 87(1) of the Treaty, there is an obligation under Article 88(3) of the Treaty to notify them to the Commission.
(50) The public service requirements, including as regards the universal service, and the common minimum standards that follow from them need to be further strengthened to make sure that all consumers, especially vulnerable ones, are able to benefit from competition and fair prices. The public service requirements should be defined at national level, taking into account national circumstances; Community law should, however, be respected by the Member States. The citizens of the Union and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises, should be able to enjoy public service obligations, in particular with regard to security of supply, and reasonable prices. A key aspect of supplying customers is access to objective and transparent consumption data. Thus, consumers should have access to their consumption data and associated prices and services costs so that they can invite competitors to make an offer based on those data. Consumers should also have the right to be properly informed about their energy consumption. Prepayments should reflect the likely consumption of electricity and different payment systems should be non-discriminatory. Information on energy costs provided to consumers frequently enough will create incentives for energy savings because it will give customers direct feedback on the effects of investment in energy efficiency and change of behaviour. In this respect, full implementation of Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(9)will help consumers to reduce their energy costs.
(51) Consumer interests should be at the heart of this Directive and quality of service should be a central responsibility of electricity undertakings. Existing rights of consumers need to be strengthened and guaranteed, and should include greater transparency. Consumer protection should ensure that all consumers in the wider remit of the Community benefit from a competitive market. Consumer rights should be enforced by Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authorities.
(52) Clear and comprehensible information should be made available to consumers concerning their rights in relation to the energy sector. The Commission should establish, after consulting relevant stakeholders including Member States, national regulatory authorities, consumer organisations and electricity undertakings, an accessible, user-friendly energy consumer checklist providing consumers with practical information about their rights. That checklist should be provided to all consumers and should be made publicly available.
(53) Energy poverty is a growing problem in the Community. Member States which are affected and which have not yet done so should therefore develop national action plans or other appropriate frameworks to tackle energy poverty, aiming at decreasing the number of people suffering such situation. In any event, Member States should ensure the necessary energy supply for vulnerable customers. In doing so, an integrated approach, such as in the framework of social policy, could be used and measures could include social policies or energy efficiency improvements for housing. At the very least, this Directive should allow national policies in favour of vulnerable customers.
(54) Greater consumer protection is guaranteed by the availability of effective means of dispute settlement for all consumers. Member States should introduce speedy and effective complaint handling procedures.
(55) It should be possible to base the introduction of intelligent metering systems on an economic assessment. Should that assessment conclude that the introduction of such metering systems is economically reasonable and cost-effective only for consumers with a certain amount of electricity consumption, Member States should be able to take this into account when implementing intelligent metering systems.
(56) Market prices should give the right incentives for the development of the network and for investing in new electricity generation.
(57) Promoting fair competition and easy access for different suppliers and fostering capacity for new electricity generation should be of the utmost importance for Member States in order to allow consumers to take full advantage of the opportunities of a liberalised internal market in electricity.
(58) With a view to creating an internal market in electricity, Member States should foster the integration of their national markets and the cooperation of system operators at Community and regional level, also incorporating isolated systems forming electricity islands that persist in the Community.
(59) The development of a true internal market in electricity, through a network connected across the Community, should be one of the main goals of this Directive and regulatory issues on cross-border interconnections and regional markets should, therefore, be one of the main tasks of the regulatory authorities, in close cooperation with the Agency where relevant.
(60) Securing common rules for a true internal market and a broad supply of electricity accessible to all should also be one of the main goals of this Directive. To that end, undistorted market prices would provide an incentive for cross-border interconnections and for investments in new power generation while leading, in the long term, to price convergence.
(61) Regulatory authorities should also provide information on the market to permit the Commission to exercise its role of observing and monitoring the internal market in electricity and its short, medium and long-term evolution, including aspects such as generation capacity, different sources of electricity generation, transmission and distribution infrastructure, quality of service, cross-border trade, congestion management, investments, wholesale and consumer prices, market liquidity and environmental and efficiency improvements. National regulatory authorities should report to the competition authorities and the Commission those Member States in which prices impair competition and proper functioning of the market.
(62) Since the objective of this Directive, namely the creation of a fully operational internal electricity market, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve that objective.
(63) Under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on conditions for access to the network for cross-border exchanges in electricity(10), the Commission may adopt Guidelines to achieve the necessary degree of harmonisation. Such Guidelines, which constitute binding implementing measures, are, also with regard to certain provisions of this Directive, a useful tool which can be adapted quickly where necessary.
(64) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(11).
(65) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adopt the Guidelines necessary for providing the minimum degree of harmonisation required to achieve the aim of this Directive. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(66) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional Agreement on better law-making(12), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables, illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures, and to make them public.
(67) Given the scope of the amendments made to Directive 2003/54/EC herein, it is desirable, for reasons of clarity and rationalisation, that the provisions in question should be recast by bringing them all together in a single text in a new Directive.
(68) This Directive respects the fundamental rights, and observes the principles, recognised in particular by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Subject matter and scope

This Directive establishes common rules for the generation, transmission, distribution and supply of electricity, together with consumer protection provisions, with a view to improving and integrating competitive electricity markets in the Community. It lays down the rules relating to the organisation and functioning of the electricity sector, open access to the market, the criteria and procedures applicable to calls for tenders and the granting of authorisations and the operation of systems. It also lays down universal service obligations and the rights of electricity consumers and clarifies competition requirements.

Definitions

For the purposes of this Directive, the following definitions apply:
1.
‘generation’ means the production of electricity;
2.
‘producer’ means a natural or legal person generating electricity;
3.
‘transmission’ means the transport of electricity on the extra high-voltage and high-voltage interconnected system with a view to its delivery to final customers or to distributors, but does not include supply;
4.
‘transmission system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the transmission system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems, and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity;
5.
‘distribution’ means the transport of electricity on high-voltage, medium-voltage and low-voltage distribution systems with a view to its delivery to customers, but does not include supply;
6.
‘distribution system operator’ means a natural or legal person responsible for operating, ensuring the maintenance of and, if necessary, developing the distribution system in a given area and, where applicable, its interconnections with other systems and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the distribution of electricity;
7.
‘customer’ means a wholesale or final customer of electricity;
8.
‘wholesale customer’ means a natural or legal person purchasing electricity for the purpose of resale inside or outside the system where he is established;
9.
‘final customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own use;
10.
‘household customer’ means a customer purchasing electricity for his own household consumption, excluding commercial or professional activities;
11.
‘non-household customer’ means a natural or legal persons purchasing electricity which is not for their own household use and includes producers and wholesale customers;
12.
‘eligible customer’ means a customer who is free to purchase electricity from the supplier of his choice within the meaning of Article 33;
13.
‘interconnector’ means equipment used to link electricity systems;
14.
‘interconnected system’ means a number of transmission and distribution systems linked together by means of one or more interconnectors;
15.
‘direct line’ means either an electricity line linking an isolated generation site with an isolated customer or an electricity line linking an electricity producer and an electricity supply undertaking to supply directly their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers;
16.
‘economic precedence’ means the ranking of sources of electricity supply in accordance with economic criteria;
17.
‘ancillary service’ means a service necessary for the operation of a transmission or distribution system;
18.
‘system user’ means a natural or legal person supplying to, or being supplied by, a transmission or distribution system;
19.
‘supply’ means the sale, including resale, of electricity to customers;
20.
‘integrated electricity undertaking’ means a vertically or horizontally integrated undertaking;
21.
‘vertically integrated undertaking’ means an electricity undertaking or a group of electricity undertakings where the same person or the same persons are entitled, directly or indirectly, to exercise control, and where the undertaking or group of undertakings perform at least one of the functions of transmission or distribution, and at least one of the functions of generation or supply of electricity;
22.
‘related undertaking’ means affiliated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 41 of the Seventh Council Directive 83/349/EEC of 13 June 1983 based on Article 44(2)(g)(*1)of the Treaty on consolidated accounts(13), and/or associated undertakings, within the meaning of Article 33(1) of that Directive, and/or undertakings which belong to the same shareholders;
23.
‘horizontally integrated undertaking’ means an undertaking performing at least one of the functions of generation for sale, or transmission, or distribution, or supply of electricity, and another non-electricity activity;
24.
‘tendering procedure’ means the procedure through which planned additional requirements and replacement capacity are covered by supplies from new or existing generating capacity;
25.
‘long-term planning’ means the planning of the need for investment in generation and transmission and distribution capacity on a long-term basis, with a view to meeting the demand of the system for electricity and securing supplies to customers;
26.
‘small isolated system’ means any system with consumption of less than 3 000 GWh in the year 1996, where less than 5 % of annual consumption is obtained through interconnection with other systems;
27.
‘micro isolated system’ means any system with consumption less than 500 GWh in the year 1996, where there is no connection with other systems;
28.
‘security’ means both security of supply and provision of electricity, and technical safety;
29.
‘energy efficiency/demand-side management’ means a global or integrated approach aimed at influencing the amount and timing of electricity consumption in order to reduce primary energy consumption and peak loads by giving precedence to investments in energy efficiency measures, or other measures, such as interruptible supply contracts, over investments to increase generation capacity, if the former are the most effective and economical option, taking into account the positive environmental impact of reduced energy consumption and the security of supply and distribution cost aspects related to it;
30.
‘renewable energy sources’ means renewable non-fossil energy sources (wind, solar, geothermal, wave, tidal, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases);
31.
‘distributed generation’ means generation plants connected to the distribution system;
32.
‘electricity supply contract’ means a contract for the supply of electricity, but does not include an electricity derivative;
33.
‘electricity derivative’ means a financial instrument specified in points 5, 6 or 7 of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2004/39/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on markets in financial instruments(14), where that instrument relates to electricity;
34.
‘control’ means rights, contracts or any other means which, either separately or in combination and having regard to the considerations of fact or law involved, confer the possibility of exercising decisive influence on an undertaking, in particular by:
(a)
ownership or the right to use all or part of the assets of an undertaking;
(b)
rights or contracts which confer decisive influence on the composition, voting or decisions of the organs of an undertaking;
35.
‘electricity undertaking’ means any natural or legal person carrying out at least one of the following functions: generation, transmission, distribution, supply, or purchase of electricity, which is responsible for the commercial, technical or maintenance tasks related to those functions, but does not include final customers.

Public service obligations and customer protection

1. Member States shall ensure, on the basis of their institutional organisation and with due regard to the principle of subsidiarity, that, without prejudice to paragraph 2, electricity undertakings are operated in accordance with the principles of this Directive with a view to achieving a competitive, secure and environmentally sustainable market in electricity, and shall not discriminate between those undertakings as regards either rights or obligations.
2. Having full regard to the relevant provisions of the Treaty, in particular Article 86 thereof, Member States may impose on undertakings operating in the electricity sector, in the general economic interest, public service obligations which may relate to security, including security of supply, regularity, quality and price of supplies and environmental protection, including energy efficiency, energy from renewable sources and climate protection. Such obligations shall be clearly defined, transparent, non-discriminatory, verifiable and shall guarantee equality of access for electricity undertakings of the Community to national consumers. In relation to security of supply, energy efficiency/demand-side management and for the fulfilment of environmental goals and goals for energy from renewable sources, as referred to in this paragraph, Member States may introduce the implementation of long-term planning, taking into account the possibility of third parties seeking access to the system.
3. Member States shall ensure that all household customers, and, where Member States deem it appropriate, small enterprises (namely enterprises with fewer than 50 occupied persons and an annual turnover or balance sheet not exceeding EUR 10 million), enjoy universal service, that is the right to be supplied with electricity of a specified quality within their territory at reasonable, easily and clearly comparable, transparent and non-discriminatory prices. To ensure the provision of universal service, Member States may appoint a supplier of last resort. Member States shall impose on distribution companies an obligation to connect customers to their network under terms, conditions and tariffs set in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 37(6). Nothing in this Directive shall prevent Member States from strengthening the market position of the household, small and medium-sized consumers by promoting the possibilities of voluntary aggregation of representation for that class of consumers.
The first subparagraph shall be implemented in a transparent and non-discriminatory way and shall not impede the opening of the market provided for in Article 33.
4. Member States shall ensure that all customers are entitled to have their electricity provided by a supplier, subject to the supplier’s agreement, regardless of the Member State in which the supplier is registered, as long as the supplier follows the applicable trading and balancing rules. In this regard, Member States shall take all measures necessary to ensure that administrative procedures do not discriminate against supply undertakings already registered in another Member State.
5. Member States shall ensure that:
(a)
where a customer, while respecting contractual conditions, wishes to change supplier, the change is effected by the operator(s) concerned within three weeks; and
(b)
customers are entitled to receive all relevant consumption data.
Member States shall ensure that the rights referred to in points (a) and (b) are granted to customers in a non-discriminatory manner as regards cost, effort or time.
6. Where financial compensation, other forms of compensation and exclusive rights which a Member State grants for the fulfilment of the obligations set out in paragraphs 2 and 3 are provided, this shall be done in a non-discriminatory and transparent way.
7. Member States shall take appropriate measures to protect final customers, and shall, in particular, ensure that there are adequate safeguards to protect vulnerable customers. In this context, each Member State shall define the concept of vulnerable customers which may refer to energy poverty and, inter alia, to the prohibition of disconnection of electricity to such customers in critical times. Member States shall ensure that rights and obligations linked to vulnerable customers are applied. In particular, they shall take measures to protect final customers in remote areas. They shall ensure high levels of consumer protection, particularly with respect to transparency regarding contractual terms and conditions, general information and dispute settlement mechanisms. Member States shall ensure that the eligible customer is in fact able easily to switch to a new supplier. As regards at least household customers, those measures shall include those set out in Annex I.
8. Member States shall take appropriate measures, such as formulating national energy action plans, providing benefits in social security systems to ensure the necessary electricity supply to vulnerable customers, or providing for support for energy efficiency improvements, to address energy poverty where identified, including in the broader context of poverty. Such measures shall not impede the effective opening of the market set out in Article 33 or market functioning and shall be notified to the Commission, where relevant, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 15 of this Article. Such notification may also include measures taken within the general social security system.
9. Member States shall ensure that electricity suppliers specify in or with the bills and in promotional materials made available to final customers:
(a)
the contribution of each energy source to the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year in a comprehensible and, at a national level, clearly comparable manner;
(b)
at least the reference to existing reference sources, such as web pages, where information on the environmental impact, in terms of at least CO2emissions and the radioactive waste resulting from the electricity produced by the overall fuel mix of the supplier over the preceding year is publicly available;
(c)
information concerning their rights as regards the means of dispute settlement available to them in the event of a dispute.
As regards points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph with respect to electricity obtained via an electricity exchange or imported from an undertaking situated outside the Community, aggregate figures provided by the exchange or the undertaking in question over the preceding year may be used.
The regulatory authority or another competent national authority shall take the necessary steps to ensure that the information provided by suppliers to their customers pursuant to this Article is reliable and is provided, at a national level, in a clearly comparable manner.
10. Member States shall implement measures to achieve the objectives of social and economic cohesion and environmental protection, which shall include energy efficiency/demand-side management measures and means to combat climate change, and security of supply, where appropriate. Such measures may include, in particular, the provision of adequate economic incentives, using, where appropriate, all existing national and Community tools, for the maintenance and construction of the necessary network infrastructure, including interconnection capacity.
11. In order to promote energy efficiency, Member States or, where a Member State has so provided, the regulatory authority shall strongly recommend that electricity undertakings optimise the use of electricity, for example by providing energy management services, developing innovative pricing formulas, or introducing intelligent metering systems or smart grids, where appropriate.
12. Member States shall ensure the provision of single points of contact to provide consumers with all necessary information concerning their rights, current legislation and the means of dispute settlement available to them in the event of a dispute. Such contact points may be part of general consumer information points.
13. Member States shall ensure that an independent mechanism such as an energy ombudsman or a consumer body is in place in order to ensure efficient treatment of complaints and out-of-court dispute settlements.
14. Member States may decide not to apply the provisions of Articles 7, 8, 32 and/or 34 insofar as their application would obstruct the performance, in law or in fact, of the obligations imposed on electricity undertakings in the general economic interest and insofar as the development of trade would not be affected to such an extent as would be contrary to the interests of the Community. The interests of the Community include, inter alia, competition with regard to eligible customers in accordance with this Directive and Article 86 of the Treaty.
15. Member States shall, upon implementation of this Directive, inform the Commission of all measures adopted to fulfil universal service and public service obligations, including consumer protection and environmental protection, and their possible effect on national and international competition, whether or not such measures require a derogation from this Directive. They shall inform the Commission subsequently every two years of any changes to such measures, whether or not they require a derogation from this Directive.
16. The Commission shall establish, in consultation with relevant stakeholders including Member States, the national regulatory authorities, consumer organisations, electricity undertakings and, building on the progress achieved to date, social partners, a clear and concise energy consumer checklist of practical information relating to energy consumer rights. Member States shall ensure that electricity suppliers or distribution system operators, in cooperation with the regulatory authority, take the necessary steps to provide their consumers with a copy of the energy consumer checklist and ensure that it is made publicly available.

Monitoring of security of supply

Member States shall ensure the monitoring of security of supply issues. Where Member States consider it appropriate, they may delegate that task to the regulatory authorities referred to in Article 35. Such monitoring shall, in particular, cover the balance of supply and demand on the national market, the level of expected future demand and envisaged additional capacity being planned or under construction, and the quality and level of maintenance of the networks, as well as measures to cover peak demand and to deal with shortfalls of one or more suppliers. The competent authorities shall publish every two years, by 31 July, a report outlining the findings resulting from the monitoring of those issues, as well as any measures taken or envisaged to address them and shall forward that report to the Commission forthwith.

Technical rules

The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall ensure that technical safety criteria are defined and that technical rules establishing the minimum technical design and operational requirements for the connection to the system of generating installations, distribution systems, directly connected consumers’ equipment, interconnector circuits and direct lines are developed and made public. Those technical rules shall ensure the interoperability of systems and shall be objective and non-discriminatory. The Agency may make appropriate recommendations towards achieving compatibility of those rules, where appropriate. Those rules shall be notified to the Commission in accordance with Article 8 of Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 laying down a procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and of rules on Information Society services(15).

Promotion of regional cooperation

1. Member States as well as the regulatory authorities shall cooperate with each other for the purpose of integrating their national markets at one or more regional levels, as a first step towards the creation of a fully liberalised internal market. In particular, the regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall promote and facilitate the cooperation of transmission system operators at a regional level, including on cross-border issues, with the aim of creating a competitive internal market in electricity, foster the consistency of their legal, regulatory and technical framework and facilitate integration of the isolated systems forming electricity islands that persist in the Community. The geographical areas covered by such regional cooperation shall include cooperation in geographical areas defined in accordance with Article 12(3) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009. Such cooperation may cover other geographical areas.
2. The Agency shall cooperate with national regulatory authorities and transmission system operators to ensure the compatibility of regulatory frameworks between the regions with the aim of creating a competitive internal market in electricity. Where the Agency considers that binding rules on such cooperation are required, it shall make appropriate recommendations.
3. Member States shall ensure, through the implementation of this Directive, that transmission system operators have one or more integrated system(s) at regional level covering two or more Member States for capacity allocation and for checking the security of the network.
4. Where vertically integrated transmission system operators participate in a joint undertaking established for implementing such cooperation, the joint undertaking shall establish and implement a compliance programme which sets out the measures to be taken to ensure that discriminatory and anticompetitive conduct is excluded. That compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet the objective of excluding discriminatory and anticompetitive conduct. It shall be subject to the approval of the Agency. Compliance with the programme shall be independently monitored by the compliance officers of the vertically integrated transmission system operators.

Authorisation procedure for new capacity

1. For the construction of new generating capacity, Member States shall adopt an authorisation procedure, which shall be conducted in accordance with objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
2. Member States shall lay down the criteria for the grant of authorisations for the construction of generating capacity in their territory. In determining appropriate criteria, Member States shall consider:
(a)
the safety and security of the electricity system, installations and associated equipment;
(b)
the protection of public health and safety;
(c)
the protection of the environment;
(d)
land use and siting;
(e)
the use of public ground;
(f)
energy efficiency;
(g)
the nature of the primary sources;
(h)
the characteristics particular to the applicant, such as technical, economic and financial capabilities;
(i)
compliance with measures adopted pursuant to Article 3;
(j)
the contribution of the generating capacity to meeting the overall Community target of at least a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy in 2020 referred to in Article 3(1) of Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources(16); and
(k)
the contribution of generating capacity to reducing emissions.
3. Member States shall ensure that specific authorisation procedures exist for small decentralised and/or distributed generation, which take into account their limited size and potential impact.
Member States may set guidelines for that specific authorisation procedure. National regulatory authorities or other competent national authorities including planning authorities shall review those guidelines and may recommend amendments thereto.
Where Member States have established particular land use permit procedures applying to major new infrastructure projects in generation capacity, Member States shall, where appropriate, include the construction of new generation capacity within the scope of those procedures and shall implement them in a non-discriminatory manner and within an appropriate time-frame.
4. The authorisation procedures and criteria shall be made public. Applicants shall be informed of the reasons for any refusal to grant an authorisation. Those reasons shall be objective, non-discriminatory, well-founded and duly substantiated. Appeal procedures shall be made available to the applicant.

Tendering for new capacity

1. Member States shall ensure the possibility, in the interests of security of supply, of providing for new capacity or energy efficiency/demand-side management measures through a tendering procedure or any procedure equivalent in terms of transparency and non-discrimination, on the basis of published criteria. Those procedures may, however, be launched only where, on the basis of the authorisation procedure, the generating capacity to be built or the energy efficiency/demand-side management measures to be taken are insufficient to ensure security of supply.
2. Member States may ensure the possibility, in the interests of environmental protection and the promotion of infant new technologies, of tendering for new capacity on the basis of published criteria. Such tendering may relate to new capacity or to energy efficiency/demand-side management measures. A tendering procedure may, however, be launched only where, on the basis of the authorisation procedure the generating capacity to be built or the measures to be taken, are insufficient to achieve those objectives.
3. Details of the tendering procedure for means of generating capacity and energy efficiency/demand-side management measures shall be published in theOfficial Journal of the European Unionat least six months prior to the closing date for tenders.
The tender specifications shall be made available to any interested undertaking established in the territory of a Member State so that it has sufficient time in which to submit a tender.
With a view to ensuring transparency and non-discrimination, the tender specifications shall contain a detailed description of the contract specifications and of the procedure to be followed by all tenderers and an exhaustive list of criteria governing the selection of tenderers and the award of the contract, including incentives, such as subsidies, which are covered by the tender. Those specifications may also relate to the fields referred to in Article 7(2).
4. In invitations to tender for the requisite generating capacity, consideration must also be given to electricity supply offers with long-term guarantees from existing generating units, provided that additional requirements can be met in this way.
5. Member States shall designate an authority or a public or private body independent from electricity generation, transmission, distribution and supply activities, which may be a regulatory authority referred to in Article 35(1), to be responsible for the organisation, monitoring and control of the tendering procedure referred to in paragraphs 1 to 4 of this Article. Where a transmission system operator is fully independent from other activities not relating to the transmission system in ownership terms, the transmission system operator may be designated as the body responsible for organising, monitoring and controlling the tendering procedure. That authority or body shall take all necessary steps to ensure confidentiality of the information contained in the tenders.

Unbundling of transmission systems and transmission system operators

1. Member States shall ensure that from 3 March 2012:
(a)
each undertaking which owns a transmission system acts as a transmission system operator;
(b)
the same person or persons are entitled neither:
(i)
directly or indirectly to exercise control over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system; nor
(ii)
directly or indirectly to exercise control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply;
(c)
the same person or persons are not entitled to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of a transmission system operator or a transmission system, and directly or indirectly to exercise control or exercise any right over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply; and
(d)
the same person is not entitled to be a member of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking, of both an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply and a transmission system operator or a transmission system.
2. The rights referred to in points (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall include, in particular:
(a)
the power to exercise voting rights;
(b)
the power to appoint members of the supervisory board, the administrative board or bodies legally representing the undertaking; or
(c)
the holding of a majority share.
3. For the purpose of paragraph 1(b), the notion ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply’ shall include ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of production and supply’ within the meaning of Directive 2009/73/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 concerning common rules for the internal market in natural gas(17), and the terms ‘transmission system operator’ and ‘transmission system’ shall include ‘transmission system operator’ and ‘transmission system’ within the meaning of that Directive.
4. Member States may allow for derogations from points (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 until 3 March 2013, provided that transmission system operators are not part of a vertically integrated undertaking.
5. The obligation set out in paragraph 1(a) shall be deemed to be fulfilled in a situation where two or more undertakings which own transmission systems have created a joint venture which acts as a transmission system operator in two or more Member States for the transmission systems concerned. No other undertaking may be part of the joint venture, unless it has been approved under Article 13 as an independent system operator or as an independent transmission operator for the purposes of Chapter V.
6. For the implementation of this Article, where the person referred to in points (b), (c) and (d) of paragraph 1 is the Member State or another public body, two separate public bodies exercising control over a transmission system operator or over a transmission system on the one hand, and over an undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply on the other, shall be deemed not to be the same person or persons.
7. Member States shall ensure that neither commercially sensitive information referred to in Article 16 held by a transmission system operator which was part of a vertically integrated undertaking, nor the staff of such a transmission system operator, is transferred to undertakings performing any of the functions of generation and supply.
8. Where on 3 September 2009, the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking a Member State may decide not to apply paragraph 1.
In such case, the Member State concerned shall either:
(a)
designate an independent system operator in accordance with Article 13; or
(b)
comply with the provisions of Chapter V.
9. Where, on 3 September 2009, the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking and there are arrangements in place which guarantee more effective independence of the transmission system operator than the provisions of Chapter V, a Member State may decide not to apply paragraph 1.
10. Before an undertaking is approved and designated as a transmission system operator under paragraph 9 of this Article, it shall be certified according to the procedures laid down in Article 10(4), (5) and (6) of this Directive and in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, pursuant to which the Commission shall verify that the arrangements in place clearly guarantee more effective independence of the transmission system operator than the provisions of Chapter V.
11. Vertically integrated undertakings which own a transmission system shall not in any event be prevented from taking steps to comply with paragraph 1.
12. Undertakings performing any of the functions of generation or supply shall not in any event be able to directly or indirectly take control over or exercise any right over unbundled transmission system operators in Member States which apply paragraph 1.

Designation and certification of transmission system operators

1. Before an undertaking is approved and designated as transmission system operator, it shall be certified according to the procedures laid down in paragraphs 4, 5 and 6 of this Article and in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
2. Undertakings which own a transmission system and which have been certified by the national regulatory authority as having complied with the requirements of Article 9, pursuant to the certification procedure below, shall be approved and designated as transmission system operators by Member States. The designation of transmission system operators shall be notified to the Commission and published in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
3. Transmission system operators shall notify to the regulatory authority any planned transaction which may require a reassessment of their compliance with the requirements of Article 9.
4. Regulatory authorities shall monitor the continuing compliance of transmission system operators with the requirements of Article 9. They shall open a certification procedure to ensure such compliance:
(a)
upon notification by the transmission system operator pursuant to paragraph 3;
(b)
on their own initiative where they have knowledge that a planned change in rights or influence over transmission system owners or transmission system operators may lead to an infringement of Article 9, or where they have reason to believe that such an infringement may have occurred; or
(c)
upon a reasoned request from the Commission.
5. The regulatory authorities shall adopt a decision on the certification of a transmission system operator within a period of four months from the date of the notification by the transmission system operator or from the date of the Commission request. After expiry of that period, the certification shall be deemed to be granted. The explicit or tacit decision of the regulatory authority shall become effective only after the conclusion of the procedure set out in paragraph 6.
6. The explicit or tacit decision on the certification of a transmission system operator shall be notified without delay to the Commission by the regulatory authority, together with all the relevant information with respect to that decision. The Commission shall act in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
7. The regulatory authorities and the Commission may request from transmission system operators and undertakings performing any of the functions of generation or supply any information relevant for the fulfilment of their tasks under this Article.
8. Regulatory authorities and the Commission shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.

Certification in relation to third countries

1. Where certification is requested by a transmission system owner or a transmission system operator which is controlled by a person or persons from a third country or third countries, the regulatory authority shall notify the Commission.
The regulatory authority shall also notify to the Commission without delay any circumstances that would result in a person or persons from a third country or third countries acquiring control of a transmission system or a transmission system operator.
2. The transmission system operator shall notify to the regulatory authority any circumstances that would result in a person or persons from a third country or third countries acquiring control of the transmission system or the transmission system operator.
3. The regulatory authority shall adopt a draft decision on the certification of a transmission system operator within four months from the date of notification by the transmission system operator. It shall refuse the certification if it has not been demonstrated:
(a)
that the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b)
to the regulatory authority or to another competent authority designated by the Member State that granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply of the Member State and the Community. In considering that question the regulatory authority or other competent authority so designated shall take into account:
(i)
the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country arising under international law, including any agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of energy supply;
(ii)
the rights and obligations of the Member State with respect to that third country arising under agreements concluded with it, insofar as they are in compliance with Community law; and
(iii)
other specific facts and circumstances of the case and the third country concerned.
4. The regulatory authority shall notify the decision to the Commission without delay, together with all the relevant information with respect to that decision.
5. Member States shall provide for the regulatory authority or the designated competent authority referred to in paragraph 3(b), before the regulatory authority adopts a decision on the certification, to request an opinion from the Commission on whether:
(a)
the entity concerned complies with the requirements of Article 9; and
(b)
granting certification will not put at risk the security of energy supply to the Community.
6. The Commission shall examine the request referred to in paragraph 5 as soon as it is received. Within a period of two months after receiving the request, it shall deliver its opinion to the national regulatory authority or, if the request was made by the designated competent authority, to that authority.
In preparing the opinion, the Commission may request the views of the Agency, the Member State concerned, and interested parties. In the event that the Commission makes such a request, the two-month period shall be extended by two months.
In the absence of an opinion by the Commission within the period referred to in the first and second subparagraphs, the Commission shall be deemed not to raise objections to the decision of the regulatory authority.
7. When assessing whether the control by a person or persons from a third country or third countries will put at risk the security of energy supply to the Community, the Commission shall take into account:
(a)
the specific facts of the case and the third country or third countries concerned; and
(b)
the rights and obligations of the Community with respect to that third country or third countries arising under international law, including an agreement concluded with one or more third countries to which the Community is a party and which addresses the issues of security of supply.
8. The national regulatory authority shall, within a period of two months after the expiry of the period referred to in paragraph 6, adopt its final decision on the certification. In adopting its final decision the national regulatory authority shall take utmost account of the Commission’s opinion. In any event Member States shall have the right to refuse certification where granting certification puts at risk the Member State’s security of energy supply or the security of energy supply of another Member State. Where the Member State has designated another competent authority to assess paragraph 3(b), it may require the national regulatory authority to adopt its final decision in accordance with the assessment of that competent authority. The national regulatory authority’s final decision and the Commission’s opinion shall be published together. Where the final decision diverges from the Commission’s opinion, the Member State concerned shall provide and publish, together with that decision, the reasoning underlying such decision.
9. Nothing in this Article shall affect the right of Member States to exercise, in compliance with Community law, national legal controls to protect legitimate public security interests.
10. The Commission may adopt Guidelines setting out the details of the procedure to be followed for the application of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).
11. This Article, with exception of paragraph 3(a), shall also apply to Member States which are subject to a derogation under Article 44.

Tasks of transmission system operators

Each transmission system operator shall be responsible for:
(a)
ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the transmission of electricity, operating, maintaining and developing under economic conditions secure, reliable and efficient transmission systems with due regard to the environment;
(b)
ensuring adequate means to meet service obligations;
(c)
contributing to security of supply through adequate transmission capacity and system reliability;
(d)
managing electricity flows on the system, taking into account exchanges with other interconnected systems. To that end, the transmission system operator shall be responsible for ensuring a secure, reliable and efficient electricity system and, in that context, for ensuring the availability of all necessary ancillary services, including those provided by demand response, insofar as such availability is independent from any other transmission system with which its system is interconnected;
(e)
providing to the operator of any other system with which its system is interconnected sufficient information to ensure the secure and efficient operation, coordinated development and interoperability of the interconnected system;
(f)
ensuring non-discrimination as between system users or classes of system users, particularly in favour of its related undertakings;
(g)
providing system users with the information they need for efficient access to the system; and
(h)
collecting congestion rents and payments under the inter-transmission system operator compensation mechanism, in compliance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, granting and managing third-party access and giving reasoned explanations when it denies such access, which shall be monitored by the national regulatory authorities; in carrying out their tasks under this Article transmission system operators shall primarily facilitate market integration.

Independent system operator

1. Where the transmission system belongs to a vertically integrated undertaking on 3 September 2009, Member States may decide not to apply Article 9(1) and designate an independent system operator upon a proposal from the transmission system owner. Such designation shall be subject to approval by the Commission.
2. The Member State may approve and designate an independent system operator only where:
(a)
the candidate operator has demonstrated that it complies with the requirements of Article 9(1)(b), (c) and (d);
(b)
the candidate operator has demonstrated that it has at its disposal the required financial, technical, physical and human resources to carry out its tasks under Article 12;
(c)
the candidate operator has undertaken to comply with a ten-year network development plan monitored by the regulatory authority;
(d)
the transmission system owner has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under paragraph 5. To that end, it shall provide all the draft contractual arrangements with the candidate undertaking and any other relevant entity; and
(e)
the candidate operator has demonstrated its ability to comply with its obligations under Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 including the cooperation of transmission system operators at European and regional level.
3. Undertakings which have been certified by the regulatory authority as having complied with the requirements of Article 11 and paragraph 2 of this Article shall be approved and designated as independent system operators by Member States. The certification procedure in either Article 10 of this Directive and Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 or in Article 11 of this Directive shall be applicable.
4. Each independent system operator shall be responsible for granting and managing third-party access, including the collection of access charges, congestion charges, and payments under the inter-transmission system operator compensation mechanism in compliance with Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, as well as for operating, maintaining and developing the transmission system, and for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demand through investment planning. When developing the transmission system, the independent system operator shall be responsible for planning (including authorisation procedure), construction and commissioning of the new infrastructure. For this purpose, the independent system operator shall act as a transmission system operator in accordance with this Chapter. The transmission system owner shall not be responsible for granting and managing third-party access, nor for investment planning.
5. Where an independent system operator has been designated, the transmission system owner shall:
(a)
provide all the relevant cooperation and support to the independent system operator for the fulfilment of its tasks, including in particular all relevant information;
(b)
finance the investments decided by the independent system operator and approved by the regulatory authority, or give its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator. The relevant financing arrangements shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Prior to such approval, the regulatory authority shall consult the transmission system owner together with the other interested parties;
(c)
provide for the coverage of liability relating to the network assets, excluding the liability relating to the tasks of the independent system operator; and
(d)
provide guarantees to facilitate financing any network expansions with the exception of those investments where, pursuant to point (b), it has given its agreement to financing by any interested party including the independent system operator.
6. In close cooperation with the regulatory authority, the relevant national competition authority shall be granted all relevant powers to effectively monitor compliance of the transmission system owner with its obligations under paragraph 5.

Unbundling of transmission system owners

1. A transmission system owner, where an independent system operator has been appointed, which is part of a vertically integrated undertaking shall be independent at least in terms of its legal form, organisation and decision making from other activities not relating to transmission.
2. In order to ensure the independence of the transmission system owner referred to in paragraph 1, the following minimum criteria shall apply:
(a)
persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner shall not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, distribution and supply of electricity;
(b)
appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that the professional interests of persons responsible for the management of the transmission system owner are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently; and
(c)
the transmission system owner shall establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet those objectives. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme to the regulatory authority and shall be published.
3. The Commission may adopt Guidelines to ensure full and effective compliance of the transmission system owner with paragraph 2 of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Dispatching and balancing

1. Without prejudice to the supply of electricity on the basis of contractual obligations, including those which derive from the tendering specifications, the transmission system operator shall, where it has such a function, be responsible for dispatching the generating installations in its area and for determining the use of interconnectors with other systems.
2. The dispatching of generating installations and the use of interconnectors shall be determined on the basis of criteria which shall be approved by national regulatory authorities where competent and which must be objective, published and applied in a non-discriminatory manner, ensuring the proper functioning of the internal market in electricity. The criteria shall take into account the economic precedence of electricity from available generating installations or interconnector transfers and the technical constraints on the system.
3. A Member State shall require system operators to act in accordance with Article 16 of Directive 2009/28/EC when dispatching generating installations using renewable energy sources. They also may require the system operator to give priority when dispatching generating installations producing combined heat and power.
4. A Member State may, for reasons of security of supply, direct that priority be given to the dispatch of generating installations using indigenous primary energy fuel sources, to an extent not exceeding, in any calendar year, 15 % of the overall primary energy necessary to produce the electricity consumed in the Member State concerned.
5. The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall require transmission system operators to comply with minimum standards for the maintenance and development of the transmission system, including interconnection capacity.
6. Transmission system operators shall procure the energy they use to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in their system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market-based procedures, whenever they have such a function.
7. Rules adopted by transmission system operators for balancing the electricity system shall be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory, including rules for charging system users of their networks for energy imbalance. The terms and conditions, including the rules and tariffs, for the provision of such services by transmission system operators shall be established pursuant to a methodology compatible with Article 37(6) in a non-discriminatory and cost-reflective way and shall be published.

Confidentiality for transmission system operators and transmission system owners

1. Without prejudice to Article 30 or any other legal duty to disclose information, each transmission system operator and each transmission system owner shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information obtained in the course of carrying out its activities, and shall prevent information about its own activities which may be commercially advantageous from being disclosed in a discriminatory manner. In particular it shall not disclose any commercially sensitive information to the remaining parts of the undertaking, unless this is necessary for carrying out a business transaction. In order to ensure the full respect of the rules on information unbundling, Member States shall ensure that the transmission system owner and the remaining part of the undertaking do not use joint services, such as joint legal services, apart from purely administrative or IT functions.
2. Transmission system operators shall not, in the context of sales or purchases of electricity by related undertakings, misuse commercially sensitive information obtained from third parties in the context of providing or negotiating access to the system.
3. Information necessary for effective competition and the efficient functioning of the market shall be made public. That obligation shall be without prejudice to preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.

Assets, equipment, staff and identity

1. Transmission system operators shall be equipped with all human, technical, physical and financial resources necessary for fulfilling their obligations under this Directive and carrying out the activity of electricity transmission, in particular:
(a)
assets that are necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the transmission system, shall be owned by the transmission system operator;
(b)
personnel, necessary for the activity of electricity transmission, including the performance of all corporate tasks, shall be employed by the transmission system operator;
(c)
leasing of personnel and rendering of services, to and from any other parts of the vertically integrated undertaking shall be prohibited. A transmission system operator may, however, render services to the vertically integrated undertaking as long as:
(i)
the provision of those services does not discriminate between system users, is available to all system users on the same terms and conditions and does not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply; and
(ii)
the terms and conditions of the provision of those services are approved by the regulatory authority;
(d)
without prejudice to the decisions of the Supervisory Body under Article 20, appropriate financial resources for future investment projects and/or for the replacement of existing assets shall be made available to the transmission system operator in due time by the vertically integrated undertaking following an appropriate request from the transmission system operator.
2. The activity of electricity transmission shall include at least the following tasks in addition to those listed in Article 12:
(a)
the representation of the transmission system operator and contacts to third parties and the regulatory authorities;
(b)
the representation of the transmission system operator within the European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity (ENTSO for Electricity);
(c)
granting and managing third-party access on a non-discriminatory basis between system users or classes of system users;
(d)
the collection of all the transmission system related charges including access charges, balancing charges for ancillary services such as purchasing of services (balancing costs, energy for losses);
(e)
the operation, maintenance and development of a secure, efficient and economic transmission system;
(f)
investment planning ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demand and guaranteeing security of supply;
(g)
the setting up of appropriate joint ventures, including with one or more transmission system operators, power exchanges, and the other relevant actors pursuing the objectives to develop the creation of regional markets or to facilitate the liberalisation process; and
(h)
all corporate services, including legal services, accountancy and IT services.
3. Transmission system operators shall be organised in a legal form as referred to in Article 1 of Council Directive 68/151/EEC(18).
4. The transmission system operator shall not, in its corporate identity, communication, branding and premises, create confusion in respect of the separate identity of the vertically integrated undertaking or any part thereof.
5. The transmission system operator shall not share IT systems or equipment, physical premises and security access systems with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking nor use the same consultants or external contractors for IT systems or equipment, and security access systems.
6. The accounts of transmission system operators shall be audited by an auditor other than the one auditing the vertically integrated undertaking or any part thereof.

Independence of the transmission system operator

1. Without prejudice to the decisions of the Supervisory Body under Article 20, the transmission system operator shall have:
(a)
effective decision-making rights, independent from the vertically integrated undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the transmission system; and
(b)
the power to raise money on the capital market in particular through borrowing and capital increase.
2. The transmission system operator shall at all times act so as to ensure it has the resources it needs in order to carry out the activity of transmission properly and efficiently and develop and maintain an efficient, secure and economic transmission system.
3. Subsidiaries of the vertically integrated undertaking performing functions of generation or supply shall not have any direct or indirect shareholding in the transmission system operator. The transmission system operator shall neither have any direct or indirect shareholding in any subsidiary of the vertically integrated undertaking performing functions of generation or supply, nor receive dividends or any other financial benefit from that subsidiary.
4. The overall management structure and the corporate statutes of the transmission system operator shall ensure effective independence of the transmission system operator in compliance with this Chapter. The vertically integrated undertaking shall not determine, directly or indirectly, the competitive behaviour of the transmission system operator in relation to the day to day activities of the transmission system operator and management of the network, or in relation to activities necessary for the preparation of the ten-year network development plan developed pursuant to Article 22.
5. In fulfilling their tasks in Article 12 and Article 17(2) of this Directive, and in complying with Articles 14, 15 and 16 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, transmission system operators shall not discriminate against different persons or entities and shall not restrict, distort or prevent competition in generation or supply.
6. Any commercial and financial relations between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator, including loans from the transmission system operator to the vertically integrated undertaking, shall comply with market conditions. The transmission system operator shall keep detailed records of such commercial and financial relations and make them available to the regulatory authority upon request.
7. The transmission system operator shall submit for approval by the regulatory authority all commercial and financial agreements with the vertically integrated undertaking.
8. The transmission system operator shall inform the regulatory authority of the financial resources, referred to in Article 17(1)(d), available for future investment projects and/or for the replacement of existing assets.
9. The vertically integrated undertaking shall refrain from any action impeding or prejudicing the transmission system operator from complying with its obligations in this Chapter and shall not require the transmission system operator to seek permission from the vertically integrated undertaking in fulfilling those obligations.
10. An undertaking which has been certified by the regulatory authority as being in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter shall be approved and designated as a transmission system operator by the Member State concerned. The certification procedure in either Article 10 of this Directive and Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 or in Article 11 of this Directive shall apply.

Independence of the staff and the management of the transmission system operator

1. Decisions regarding the appointment and renewal, working conditions including remuneration, and termination of the term of office of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator shall be taken by the Supervisory Body of the transmission system operator appointed in accordance with Article 20.
2. The identity and the conditions governing the term, the duration and the termination of office of the persons nominated by the Supervisory Body for appointment or renewal as persons responsible for the executive management and/or as members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator, and the reasons for any proposed decision terminating such term of office, shall be notified to the regulatory authority. Those conditions and the decisions referred to in paragraph 1 shall become binding only if the regulatory authority has raised no objections within three weeks of notification.
The regulatory authority may object to the decisions referred to in paragraph 1 where:
(a)
doubts arise as to the professional independence of a nominated person responsible for the management and/or member of the administrative bodies; or
(b)
in the case of premature termination of a term of office, doubts exist regarding the justification of such premature termination.
3. No professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship, directly or indirectly, with the vertically integrated undertaking or any part of it or its controlling shareholders other than the transmission system operator shall be exercised for a period of three years before the appointment of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator who are subject to this paragraph.
4. The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies, and employees of the transmission system operator shall have no other professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship, directly or indirectly, with any other part of the vertically integrated undertaking or with its controlling shareholders.
5. The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies, and employees of the transmission system operator shall hold no interest in or receive any financial benefit, directly or indirectly, from any part of the vertically integrated undertaking other than the transmission system operator. Their remuneration shall not depend on activities or results of the vertically integrated undertaking other than those of the transmission system operator.
6. Effective rights of appeal to the regulatory authority shall be guaranteed for any complaints by the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator against premature terminations of their term of office.
7. After termination of their term of office in the transmission system operator, the persons responsible for its management and/or members of its administrative bodies shall have no professional position or responsibility, interest or business relationship with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking other than the transmission system operator, or with its controlling shareholders for a period of not less than four years.
8. Paragraph 3 shall apply to the majority of the persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator.
The persons responsible for the management and/or members of the administrative bodies of the transmission system operator who are not subject to paragraph 3 shall have exercised no management or other relevant activity in the vertically integrated undertaking for a period of at least six months before their appointment.
The first subparagraph of this paragraph and paragraphs 4 to 7 shall be applicable to all the persons belonging to the executive management and to those directly reporting to them on matters related to the operation, maintenance or development of the network.

Supervisory Body

1. The transmission system operator shall have a Supervisory Body which shall be in charge of taking decisions which may have a significant impact on the value of the assets of the shareholders within the transmission system operator, in particular decisions regarding the approval of the annual and longer-term financial plans, the level of indebtedness of the transmission system operator and the amount of dividends distributed to shareholders. The decisions falling under the remit of the Supervisory Body shall exclude those that are related to the day to day activities of the transmission system operator and management of the network, and to activities necessary for the preparation of the ten-year network development plan developed pursuant to Article 22.
2. The Supervisory Body shall be composed of members representing the vertically integrated undertaking, members representing third party shareholders and, where the relevant legislation of a Member State so provides, members representing other interested parties such as employees of the transmission system operator.
3. The first subparagraph of Article 19(2) and Article 19(3) to (7) shall apply to at least half of the members of the Supervisory Body minus one.
Point (b) of the second subparagraph of Article 19(2) shall apply to all the members of the Supervisory Body.

Compliance programme and compliance officer

1. Member States shall ensure that transmission system operators establish and implement a compliance programme which sets out the measures taken in order to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that the compliance with that programme is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet those objectives. It shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Without prejudice to the powers of the national regulator, compliance with the program shall be independently monitored by a compliance officer.
2. The compliance officer shall be appointed by the Supervisory Body, subject to the approval by the regulatory authority. The regulatory authority may refuse the approval of the compliance officer only for reasons of lack of independence or professional capacity. The compliance officer may be a natural or legal person. Article 19(2) to (8) shall apply to the compliance officer.
3. The compliance officer shall be in charge of:
(a)
monitoring the implementation of the compliance programme;
(b)
elaborating an annual report, setting out the measures taken in order to implement the compliance programme and submitting it to the regulatory authority;
(c)
reporting to the Supervisory Body and issuing recommendations on the compliance programme and its implementation;
(d)
notifying the regulatory authority on any substantial breaches with regard to the implementation of the compliance programme; and
(e)
reporting to the regulatory authority on any commercial and financial relations between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator.
4. The compliance officer shall submit the proposed decisions on the investment plan or on individual investments in the network to the regulatory authority. This shall occur at the latest when the management and/or the competent administrative body of the transmission system operator submits them to the Supervisory Body.
5. Where the vertically integrated undertaking, in the general assembly or through the vote of the members of the Supervisory Body it has appointed, has prevented the adoption of a decision with the effect of preventing or delaying investments, which under the ten-year network development plan was to be executed in the following three years, the compliance officer shall report this to the regulatory authority, which then shall act in accordance with Article 22.
6. The conditions governing the mandate or the employment conditions of the compliance officer, including the duration of its mandate, shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority. Those conditions shall ensure the independence of the compliance officer, including by providing him with all the resources necessary for fulfilling his duties. During his mandate, the compliance officer shall have no other professional position, responsibility or interest, directly or indirectly, in or with any part of the vertically integrated undertaking or with its controlling shareholders.
7. The compliance officer shall report regularly, either orally or in writing, to the regulatory authority and shall have the right to report regularly, either orally or in writing, to the Supervisory Body of the transmission system operator.
8. The compliance officer may attend all meetings of the management or administrative bodies of the transmission system operator, and those of the Supervisory Body and the general assembly. The compliance officer shall attend all meetings that address the following matters:
(a)
conditions for access to the network, as defined in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, in particular regarding tariffs, third party access services, capacity allocation and congestion management, transparency, balancing and secondary markets;
(b)
projects undertaken in order to operate, maintain and develop the transmission system, including interconnection and connection investments;
(c)
energy purchases or sales necessary for the operation of the transmission system.
9. The compliance officer shall monitor the compliance of the transmission system operator with Article 16.
10. The compliance officer shall have access to all relevant data and to the offices of the transmission system operator and to all the information necessary for the fulfilment of his task.
11. After prior approval by the regulatory authority, the Supervisory Body may dismiss the compliance officer. It shall dismiss the compliance officer for reasons of lack of independence or professional capacity upon request of the regulatory authority.
12. The compliance officer shall have access to the offices of the transmission system operator without prior announcement.

Network development and powers to make investment decisions

1. Every year, transmission system operators shall submit to the regulatory authority a ten-year network development plan based on existing and forecast supply and demand after having consulted all the relevant stakeholders. That network development plan shall contain efficient measures in order to guarantee the adequacy of the system and the security of supply.
2. The ten-year network development plan shall in particular:
(a)
indicate to market participants the main transmission infrastructure that needs to be built or upgraded over the next ten years;
(b)
contain all the investments already decided and identify new investments which have to be executed in the next three years; and
(c)
provide for a time frame for all investment projects.
3. When elaborating the ten-year network development plan, the transmission system operator shall make reasonable assumptions about the evolution of the generation, supply, consumption and exchanges with other countries, taking into account investment plans for regional and Community-wide networks.
4. The regulatory authority shall consult all actual or potential system users on the ten-year network development plan in an open and transparent manner. Persons or undertakings claiming to be potential system users may be required to substantiate such claims. The regulatory authority shall publish the result of the consultation process, in particular possible needs for investments.
5. The regulatory authority shall examine whether the ten-year network development plan covers all investment needs identified during the consultation process, and whether it is consistent with the non-binding Community-wide ten-year network development plan (Community-wide network development plan) referred to in Article 8(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009. If any doubt arises as to the consistency with the Community-wide network development plan, the regulatory authority shall consult the Agency. The regulatory authority may require the transmission system operator to amend its ten-year network development plan.
6. The regulatory authority shall monitor and evaluate the implementation of the ten-year network development plan.
7. In circumstances where the transmission system operator, other than for overriding reasons beyond its control, does not execute an investment, which, under the ten-year network development plan, was to be executed in the following three years, Member States shall ensure that the regulatory authority is required to take at least one of the following measures to ensure that the investment in question is made if such investment is still relevant on the basis of the most recent ten-year network development plan:
(a)
to require the transmission system operator to execute the investments in question;
(b)
to organise a tender procedure open to any investors for the investment in question; or
(c)
to oblige the transmission system operator to accept a capital increase to finance the necessary investments and allow independent investors to participate in the capital.
Where the regulatory authority has made use of its powers under point (b) of the first subparagraph, it may oblige the transmission system operator to agree to one or more of the following:
(a)
financing by any third party;
(b)
construction by any third party;
(c)
building the new assets concerned itself;
(d)
operating the new asset concerned itself.
The transmission system operator shall provide the investors with all information needed to realise the investment, shall connect new assets to the transmission network and shall generally make its best efforts to facilitate the implementation of the investment project.
The relevant financial arrangements shall be subject to approval by the regulatory authority.
8. Where the regulatory authority has made use of its powers under the first subparagraph of paragraph 7, the relevant tariff regulations shall cover the costs of the investments in question.

Decision-making powers regarding the connection of new power plant to the transmission system

1. The transmission system operator shall establish and publish transparent and efficient procedures for non-discriminatory connection of new power plants to the transmission system. Those procedures shall be subject to the approval of national regulatory authorities.
2. The transmission system operator shall not be entitled to refuse the connection of a new power plant on the grounds of possible future limitations to available network capacities, such as congestion in distant parts of the transmission system. The transmission system operator shall supply necessary information.
3. The transmission system operator shall not be entitled to refuse a new connection point, on the ground that it will lead to additional costs linked with necessary capacity increase of system elements in the close-up range to the connection point.

Designation of distribution system operators

Member States shall designate or shall require undertakings that own or are responsible for distribution systems to designate, for a period of time to be determined by Member States having regard to considerations of efficiency and economic balance, one or more distribution system operators. Member States shall ensure that distribution system operators act in accordance with Articles 25, 26 and 27.

Tasks of distribution system operators

1. The distribution system operator shall be responsible for ensuring the long-term ability of the system to meet reasonable demands for the distribution of electricity, for operating, maintaining and developing under economic conditions a secure, reliable and efficient electricity distribution system in its area with due regard for the environment and energy efficiency.
2. In any event, it must not discriminate between system users or classes of system users, particularly in favour of its related undertakings.
3. The distribution system operator shall provide system users with the information they need for efficient access to, including use of, the system.
4. A Member State may require the distribution system operator, when dispatching generating installations, to give priority to generating installations using renewable energy sources or waste or producing combined heat and power.
5. Each distribution system operator shall procure the energy it uses to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in its system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market based procedures, whenever it has such a function. That requirement shall be without prejudice to using electricity acquired under contracts concluded before 1 January 2002.
6. Where a distribution system operator is responsible for balancing the distribution system, rules adopted by it for that purpose shall be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory, including rules for the charging of system users of their networks for energy imbalance. Terms and conditions, including rules and tariffs, for the provision of such services by distribution system operators shall be established in accordance with Article 37(6) in a non-discriminatory and cost-reflective way and shall be published.
7. When planning the development of the distribution network, energy efficiency/demand-side management measures or distributed generation that might supplant the need to upgrade or replace electricity capacity shall be considered by the distribution system operator.

Unbundling of distribution system operators

1. Where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, it shall be independent at least in terms of its legal form, organisation and decision making from other activities not relating to distribution. Those rules shall not create an obligation to separate the ownership of assets of the distribution system operator from the vertically integrated undertaking.
2. In addition to the requirements under paragraph 1, where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, it shall be independent in terms of its organisation and decision-making from the other activities not related to distribution. In order to achieve this, the following minimum criteria shall apply:
(a)
those persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator must not participate in company structures of the integrated electricity undertaking responsible, directly or indirectly, for the day-to-day operation of the generation, transmission or supply of electricity;
(b)
appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that the professional interests of the persons responsible for the management of the distribution system operator are taken into account in a manner that ensures that they are capable of acting independently;
(c)
the distribution system operator must have effective decision-making rights, independent from the integrated electricity undertaking, with respect to assets necessary to operate, maintain or develop the network. In order to fulfil those tasks, the distribution system operator shall have at its disposal the necessary resources including human, technical, physical and financial resources. This should not prevent the existence of appropriate coordination mechanisms to ensure that the economic and management supervision rights of the parent company in respect of return on assets, regulated indirectly in accordance with Article 37(6), in a subsidiary are protected. In particular, this shall enable the parent company to approve the annual financial plan, or any equivalent instrument, of the distribution system operator and to set global limits on the levels of indebtedness of its subsidiary. It shall not permit the parent company to give instructions regarding day-to-day operations, nor with respect to individual decisions concerning the construction or upgrading of distribution lines, that do not exceed the terms of the approved financial plan, or any equivalent instrument; and
(d)
the distribution system operator must establish a compliance programme, which sets out measures taken to ensure that discriminatory conduct is excluded, and ensure that observance of it is adequately monitored. The compliance programme shall set out the specific obligations of employees to meet that objective. An annual report, setting out the measures taken, shall be submitted by the person or body responsible for monitoring the compliance programme, the compliance officer of the distribution system operator, to the regulatory authority referred to in Article 35(1) and shall be published. The compliance officer of the distribution system operator shall be fully independent and shall have access to all the necessary information of the distribution system operator and any affiliated undertaking to fulfil his task.
3. Where the distribution system operator is part of a vertically integrated undertaking, the Member States shall ensure that the activities of the distribution system operator are monitored by regulatory authorities or other competent bodies so that it cannot take advantage of its vertical integration to distort competition. In particular, vertically integrated distribution system operators shall not, in their communication and branding, create confusion in respect of the separate identity of the supply branch of the vertically integrated undertaking.
4. Member States may decide not to apply paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 to integrated electricity undertakings serving less than 100 000 connected customers, or serving small isolated systems.

Confidentiality obligation of distribution system operators

Without prejudice to Article 30 or any other legal duty to disclose information, the distribution system operator must preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information obtained in the course of carrying out its business, and shall prevent information about its own activities which may be commercially advantageous being disclosed in a discriminatory manner.

Closed distribution systems

1. Member States may provide for national regulatory authorities or other competent authorities to classify a system which distributes electricity within a geographically confined industrial, commercial or shared services site and does not, without prejudice to paragraph 4, supply household customers, as a closed distribution system if:
(a)
for specific technical or safety reasons, the operations or the production process of the users of that system are integrated; or
(b)
that system distributes electricity primarily to the owner or operator of the system or their related undertakings.
2. Member States may provide for national regulatory authorities to exempt the operator of a closed distribution system from:
(a)
the requirement under Article 25(5) to procure the energy it uses to cover energy losses and reserve capacity in its system according to transparent, non-discriminatory and market based procedures;
(b)
the requirement under Article 32(1) that tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, are approved prior to their entry into force in accordance with Article 37.
3. Where an exemption is granted under paragraph 2, the applicable tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, shall be reviewed and approved in accordance with Article 37 upon request by a user of the closed distribution system.
4. Incidental use by a small number of households with employment or similar associations with the owner of the distribution system and located within the area served by a closed distribution system shall not preclude an exemption under paragraph 2 being granted.

Combined operator

Article 26(1) shall not prevent the operation of a combined transmission and distribution system operator provided that operator complies with Articles 9(1), or 13 and 14, or Chapter V or falls under Article 44(2).

Right of access to accounts

1. Member States or any competent authority they designate, including the regulatory authorities referred to in Article 35, shall, insofar as necessary to carry out their functions, have right of access to the accounts of electricity undertakings as set out in Article 31.
2. Member States and any designated competent authority, including the regulatory authorities, shall preserve the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information. Member States may provide for the disclosure of such information where this is necessary in order for the competent authorities to carry out their functions.

Unbundling of accounts

1. Member States shall take the necessary steps to ensure that the accounts of electricity undertakings are kept in accordance with paragraphs 2 and 3.
2. Electricity undertakings, whatever their system of ownership or legal form, shall draw up, submit to audit and publish their annual accounts in accordance with the rules of national law concerning the annual accounts of limited liability companies adopted pursuant to the Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC of 25 July 1978 based on Article 44(2)(g)(*2)of the Treaty on the annual accounts of certain types of companies(19).
Undertakings which are not legally obliged to publish their annual accounts shall keep a copy of these at the disposal of the public in their head office.
3. Electricity undertakings shall, in their internal accounting, keep separate accounts for each of their transmission and distribution activities as they would be required to do if the activities in question were carried out by separate undertakings, with a view to avoiding discrimination, cross-subsidisation and distortion of competition. They shall also keep accounts, which may be consolidated, for other electricity activities not relating to transmission or distribution. Until 1 July 2007, they shall keep separate accounts for supply activities for eligible customers and supply activities for non-eligible customers. Revenue from ownership of the transmission or distribution system shall be specified in the accounts. Where appropriate, they shall keep consolidated accounts for other, non-electricity activities. The internal accounts shall include a balance sheet and a profit and loss account for each activity.
4. The audit referred to in paragraph 2 shall, in particular, verify that the obligation to avoid discrimination and cross-subsidies referred to in paragraph 3 is respected.

Third-party access

1. Member States shall ensure the implementation of a system of third party access to the transmission and distribution systems based on published tariffs, applicable to all eligible customers and applied objectively and without discrimination between system users. Member States shall ensure that those tariffs, or the methodologies underlying their calculation, are approved prior to their entry into force in accordance with Article 37 and that those tariffs, and the methodologies — where only methodologies are approved — are published prior to their entry into force.
2. The transmission or distribution system operator may refuse access where it lacks the necessary capacity. Duly substantiated reasons must be given for such refusal, in particular having regard to Article 3, and based on objective and technically and economically justified criteria. The regulatory authorities where Member States have so provided or Member States shall ensure that those criteria are consistently applied and that the system user who has been refused access can make use of a dispute settlement procedure. The regulatory authorities shall also ensure, where appropriate and when refusal of access takes place, that the transmission or distribution system operator provides relevant information on measures that would be necessary to reinforce the network. The party requesting such information may be charged a reasonable fee reflecting the cost of providing such information.

Market opening and reciprocity

1. Member States shall ensure that the eligible customers comprise:
(a)
until 1 July 2004, the eligible customers as specified in Article 19(1) to (3) of Directive 96/92/EC. Member States shall publish by 31 January each year the criteria for the definition of those eligible customers;
(b)
from 1 July 2004, all non-household customers;
(c)
from 1 July 2007, all customers.
2. To avoid imbalance in the opening of electricity markets:
(a)
contracts for the supply of electricity with an eligible customer in the system of another Member State shall not be prohibited if the customer is considered as eligible in both systems involved; and
(b)
where transactions as described in point (a) are refused because the customer is eligible in only one of the two systems, the Commission may, taking into account the situation in the market and the common interest, oblige the refusing party to execute the requested supply at the request of the Member State where the eligible customer is located.

Direct lines

1. Member States shall take the measures necessary to enable:
(a)
all electricity producers and electricity supply undertakings established within their territory to supply their own premises, subsidiaries and eligible customers through a direct line; and
(b)
all eligible customers within their territory to be supplied through a direct line by a producer and supply undertakings.
2. Member States shall lay down the criteria for the grant of authorisations for the construction of direct lines in their territory. Those criteria shall be objective and non-discriminatory.
3. The possibility of supplying electricity through a direct line as referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article shall not affect the possibility of contracting electricity in accordance with Article 32.
4. Member States may issue an authorisation to construct a direct line subject either to the refusal of system access on the basis, as appropriate, of Article 32 or to the opening of a dispute settlement procedure under Article 37.
5. Member States may refuse to authorise a direct line if the granting of such an authorisation would obstruct the provisions of Article 3. Duly substantiated reasons shall be given for such refusal.

Designation and independence of regulatory authorities

1. Each Member State shall designate a single national regulatory authority at national level.
2. Paragraph 1 of this Article shall be without prejudice to the designation of other regulatory authorities at regional level within Member States, provided that there is one senior representative for representation and contact purposes at Community level within the Board of Regulators of the Agency in accordance with Article 14(1) of Regulation (EC) No 713/2009.
3. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 of this Article, a Member State may designate regulatory authorities for small systems on a geographically separate region whose consumption, in 2008, accounted for less than 3 % of the total consumption of the Member State of which it is part. This derogation shall be without prejudice to the appointment of one senior representative for representation and contact purposes at Community level within the Board of Regulators of the Agency in compliance with Article 14(1) of Regulation (EC) No 713/2009.
4. Member States shall guarantee the independence of the regulatory authority and shall ensure that it exercises its powers impartially and transparently. For this purpose, Member State shall ensure that, when carrying out the regulatory tasks conferred upon it by this Directive and related legislation, the regulatory authority:
(a)
is legally distinct and functionally independent from any other public or private entity;
(b)
ensures that its staff and the persons responsible for its management:
(i)
act independently from any market interest; and
(ii)
do not seek or take direct instructions from any government or other public or private entity when carrying out the regulatory tasks. This requirement is without prejudice to close cooperation, as appropriate, with other relevant national authorities or to general policy guidelines issued by the government not related to the regulatory powers and duties under Article 37.
5. In order to protect the independence of the regulatory authority, Member States shall in particular ensure that:
(a)
the regulatory authority can take autonomous decisions, independently from any political body, and has separate annual budget allocations, with autonomy in the implementation of the allocated budget, and adequate human and financial resources to carry out its duties; and
(b)
the members of the board of the regulatory authority or, in the absence of a board, the regulatory authority’s top management are appointed for a fixed term of five up to seven years, renewable once.
In regard to point (b) of the first subparagraph, Member States shall ensure an appropriate rotation scheme for the board or the top management. The members of the board or, in the absence of a board, members of the top management may be relieved from office during their term only if they no longer fulfil the conditions set out in this Article or have been guilty of misconduct under national law.

General objectives of the regulatory authority

In carrying out the regulatory tasks specified in this Directive, the regulatory authority shall take all reasonable measures in pursuit of the following objectives within the framework of their duties and powers as laid down in Article 37, in close consultation with other relevant national authorities including competition authorities, as appropriate, and without prejudice to their competencies:
(a)
promoting, in close cooperation with the Agency, regulatory authorities of other Member States and the Commission, a competitive, secure and environmentally sustainable internal market in electricity within the Community, and effective market opening for all customers and suppliers in the Community and ensuring appropriate conditions for the effective and reliable operation of electricity networks, taking into account long-term objectives;
(b)
developing competitive and properly functioning regional markets within the Community in view of the achievement of the objectives referred to in point (a);
(c)
eliminating restrictions on trade in electricity between Member States, including developing appropriate cross-border transmission capacities to meet demand and enhancing the integration of national markets which may facilitate electricity flows across the Community;
(d)
helping to achieve, in the most cost-effective way, the development of secure, reliable and efficient non-discriminatory systems that are consumer oriented, and promoting system adequacy and, in line with general energy policy objectives, energy efficiency as well as the integration of large and small-scale production of electricity from renewable energy sources and distributed generation in both transmission and distribution networks;
(e)
facilitating access to the network for new generation capacity, in particular removing barriers that could prevent access for new market entrants and of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(f)
ensuring that system operators and system users are granted appropriate incentives, in both the short and the long term, to increase efficiencies in system performance and foster market integration;
(g)
ensuring that customers benefit through the efficient functioning of their national market, promoting effective competition and helping to ensure consumer protection;
(h)
helping to achieve high standards of universal and public service in electricity supply, contributing to the protection of vulnerable customers and contributing to the compatibility of necessary data exchange processes for customer switching.

Duties and powers of the regulatory authority

1. The regulatory authority shall have the following duties:
(a)
fixing or approving, in accordance with transparent criteria, transmission or distribution tariffs or their methodologies;
(b)
ensuring compliance of transmission and distribution system operators and, where relevant, system owners, as well as of any electricity undertakings, with their obligations under this Directive and other relevant Community legislation, including as regards cross-border issues;
(c)
cooperating in regard to cross-border issues with the regulatory authority or authorities of the Member States concerned and with the Agency;
(d)
complying with, and implementing, any relevant legally binding decisions of the Agency and of the Commission;
(e)
reporting annually on its activity and the fulfilment of its duties to the relevant authorities of the Member States, the Agency and the Commission. Such reports shall cover the steps taken and the results obtained as regards each of the tasks listed in this Article;
(f)
ensuring that there are no cross-subsidies between transmission, distribution, and supply activities;
(g)
monitoring investment plans of the transmission system operators, and providing in its annual report an assessment of the investment plans of the transmission system operators as regards their consistency with the Community-wide network development plan referred to in Article 8(3)(b) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009; such assessment may include recommendations to amend those investment plans;
(h)
monitoring compliance with and reviewing the past performance of network security and reliability rules and setting or approving standards and requirements for quality of service and supply or contributing thereto together with other competent authorities;
(i)
monitoring the level of transparency, including of wholesale prices, and ensuring compliance of electricity undertakings with transparency obligations;
(j)
monitoring the level and effectiveness of market opening and competition at wholesale and retail levels, including on electricity exchanges, prices for household customers including prepayment systems, switching rates, disconnection rates, charges for and the execution of maintenance services, and complaints by household customers, as well as any distortion or restriction of competition, including providing any relevant information, and bringing any relevant cases to the relevant competition authorities;
(k)
monitoring the occurrence of restrictive contractual practices, including exclusivity clauses which may prevent large non-household customers from contracting simultaneously with more than one supplier or restrict their choice to do so, and, where appropriate, informing the national competition authorities of such practices;
(l)
respecting contractual freedom with regard to interruptible supply contracts and with regard to long-term contracts provided that they are compatible with Community law and consistent with Community policies;
(m)
monitoring the time taken by transmission and distribution system operators to make connections and repairs;
(n)
helping to ensure, together with other relevant authorities, that the consumer protection measures, including those set out in Annex I, are effective and enforced;
(o)
publishing recommendations, at least annually, in relation to compliance of supply prices with Article 3, and providing these to the competition authorities, where appropriate;
(p)
ensuring access to customer consumption data, the provision, for optional use, of an easily understandable harmonised format at national level for consumption data, and prompt access for all customers to such data under point (h) of Annex I;
(q)
monitoring the implementation of rules relating to the roles and responsibilities of transmission system operators, distribution system operators, suppliers and customers and other market parties pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 714/2009;
(r)
monitoring investment in generation capacities in relation to security of supply;
(s)
monitoring technical cooperation between Community and third-country transmission system operators;
(t)
monitoring the implementation of safeguards measures as referred to in Article 42; and
(u)
contributing to the compatibility of data exchange processes for the most important market processes at regional level.
2. Where a Member State has so provided, the monitoring duties set out in paragraph 1 may be carried out by other authorities than the regulatory authority. In such a case, the information resulting from such monitoring shall be made available to the regulatory authority as soon as possible.
While preserving their independence, without prejudice to their own specific competencies and consistent with the principles of better regulation, the regulatory authority shall, as appropriate, consult transmission system operators and, as appropriate, closely cooperate with other relevant national authorities when carrying out the duties set out in paragraph 1.
Any approvals given by a regulatory authority or the Agency under this Directive are without prejudice to any duly justified future use of its powers by the regulatory authority under this Article or to any penalties imposed by other relevant authorities or the Commission.
3. In addition to the duties conferred upon it under paragraph 1 of this Article, when an independent system operator has been designated under Article 13, the regulatory authority shall:
(a)
monitor the transmission system owner’s and the independent system operator’s compliance with their obligations under this Article, and issue penalties for non-compliance in accordance with paragraph 4(d);
(b)
monitor the relations and communications between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner so as to ensure compliance of the independent system operator with its obligations, and in particular approve contracts and act as a dispute settlement authority between the independent system operator and the transmission system owner in respect of any complaint submitted by either party pursuant to paragraph 11;
(c)
without prejudice to the procedure under Article 13(2)(c), for the first ten-year network development plan, approve the investments planning and the multi-annual network development plan presented annually by the independent system operator;
(d)
ensure that network access tariffs collected by the independent system operator include remuneration for the network owner or network owners, which provides for adequate remuneration of the network assets and of any new investments made therein, provided they are economically and efficiently incurred;
(e)
have the powers to carry out inspections, including unannounced inspections, at the premises of transmission system owner and independent system operator; and
(f)
monitor the use of congestion charges collected by the independent system operator in accordance with Article 16(6) of Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
4. Member States shall ensure that regulatory authorities are granted the powers enabling them to carry out the duties referred to in paragraphs 1, 3 and 6 in an efficient and expeditious manner. For this purpose, the regulatory authority shall have at least the following powers:
(a)
to issue binding decisions on electricity undertakings;
(b)
to carry out investigations into the functioning of the electricity markets, and to decide upon and impose any necessary and proportionate measures to promote effective competition and ensure the proper functioning of the market. Where appropriate, the regulatory authority shall also have the power to cooperate with the national competition authority and the financial market regulators or the Commission in conducting an investigation relating to competition law;
(c)
to require any information from electricity undertakings relevant for the fulfilment of its tasks, including the justification for any refusal to grant third-party access, and any information on measures necessary to reinforce the network;
(d)
to impose effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties on electricity undertakings not complying with their obligations under this Directive or any relevant legally binding decisions of the regulatory authority or of the Agency, or to propose that a competent court impose such penalties. This shall include the power to impose or propose the imposition of penalties of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the transmission system operator on the transmission system operator or of up to 10 % of the annual turnover of the vertically integrated undertaking on the vertically integrated undertaking, as the case may be, for non-compliance with their respective obligations pursuant to this Directive; and
(e)
appropriate rights of investigations and relevant powers of instructions for dispute settlement under paragraphs 11 and 12.
5. In addition to the duties and powers conferred on it under paragraphs 1 and 4 of this Article, when a transmission system operator has been designated in accordance with Chapter V, the regulatory authority shall be granted at least the following duties and powers:
(a)
to issue penalties in accordance with paragraph 4(d) for discriminatory behaviour in favour of the vertically integrated undertaking;
(b)
to monitor communications between the transmission system operator and the vertically integrated undertaking so as to ensure compliance of the transmission system operator with its obligations;
(c)
to act as dispute settlement authority between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator in respect of any complaint submitted pursuant to paragraph 11;
(d)
to monitor commercial and financial relations including loans between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator;
(e)
to approve all commercial and financial agreements between the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator on the condition that they comply with market conditions;
(f)
to request justification from the vertically integrated undertaking when notified by the compliance officer in accordance with Article 21(4). Such justification shall, in particular, include evidence to the end that no discriminatory behaviour to the advantage of the vertically integrated undertaking has occurred;
(g)
to carry out inspections, including unannounced ones, on the premises of the vertically integrated undertaking and the transmission system operator; and
(h)
to assign all or specific tasks of the transmission system operator to an independent system operator appointed in accordance with Article 13 in case of a persistent breach by the transmission system operator of its obligations under this Directive, in particular in case of repeated discriminatory behaviour to the benefit of the vertically integrated undertaking.
6. The regulatory authorities shall be responsible for fixing or approving sufficiently in advance of their entry into force at least the methodologies used to calculate or establish the terms and conditions for:
(a)
connection and access to national networks, including transmission and distribution tariffs or their methodologies. Those tariffs or methodologies shall allow the necessary investments in the networks to be carried out in a manner allowing those investments to ensure the viability of the networks;
(b)
the provision of balancing services which shall be performed in the most economic manner possible and provide appropriate incentives for network users to balance their input and off-takes. The balancing services shall be provided in a fair and non-discriminatory manner and be based on objective criteria; and
(c)
access to cross-border infrastructures, including the procedures for the allocation of capacity and congestion management.
7. The methodologies or the terms and conditions referred to in paragraph 6 shall be published.
8. In fixing or approving the tariffs or methodologies and the balancing services, the regulatory authorities shall ensure that transmission and distribution system operators are granted appropriate incentive, over both the short and long term, to increase efficiencies, foster market integration and security of supply and support the related research activities.
9. The regulatory authorities shall monitor congestion management of national electricity systems including interconnectors, and the implementation of congestion management rules. To that end, transmission system operators or market operators shall submit their congestion management rules, including capacity allocation, to the national regulatory authorities. National regulatory authorities may request amendments to those rules.
10. Regulatory authorities shall have the authority to require transmission and distribution system operators, if necessary, to modify the terms and conditions, including tariffs or methodologies referred to in this Article, to ensure that they are proportionate and applied in a non-discriminatory manner. In the event of delay in the fixing of transmission and distribution tariffs, regulatory authorities shall have the power to fix or approve provisional transmission and distribution tariffs or methodologies and to decide on the appropriate compensatory measures if the final transmission and distribution tariffs or methodologies deviate from those provisional tariffs or methodologies.
11. Any party having a complaint against a transmission or distribution system operator in relation to that operator’s obligations under this Directive may refer the complaint to the regulatory authority which, acting as dispute settlement authority, shall issue a decision within a period of two months after receipt of the complaint. That period may be extended by two months where additional information is sought by the regulatory authority. That extended period may be further extended with the agreement of the complainant. The regulatory authority’s decision shall have binding effect unless and until overruled on appeal.
12. Any party who is affected and who has a right to complain concerning a decision on methodologies taken pursuant to this Article or, where the regulatory authority has a duty to consult, concerning the proposed tariffs or methodologies, may, at the latest within two months, or a shorter time period as provided by Member States, following publication of the decision or proposal for a decision, submit a complaint for review. Such a complaint shall not have suspensive effect.
13. Member States shall create appropriate and efficient mechanisms for regulation, control and transparency so as to avoid any abuse of a dominant position, in particular to the detriment of consumers, and any predatory behaviour. Those mechanisms shall take account of the provisions of the Treaty, and in particular Article 82 thereof.
14. Member States shall ensure that the appropriate measures are taken, including administrative action or criminal proceedings in conformity with their national law, against the natural or legal persons responsible where confidentiality rules imposed by this Directive have not been respected.
15. Complaints referred to in paragraphs 11 and 12 shall be without prejudice to the exercise of rights of appeal under Community or national law.
16. Decisions taken by regulatory authorities shall be fully reasoned and justified to allow for judicial review. The decisions shall be available to the public while preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.
17. Member States shall ensure that suitable mechanisms exist at national level under which a party affected by a decision of a regulatory authority has a right of appeal to a body independent of the parties involved and of any government.

Regulatory regime for cross-border issues

1. Regulatory authorities shall closely consult and cooperate with each other, and shall provide each other and the Agency with any information necessary for the fulfilment of their tasks under this Directive. In respect of the information exchanged, the receiving authority shall ensure the same level of confidentiality as that required of the originating authority.
2. Regulatory authorities shall cooperate at least at a regional level to:
(a)
foster the creation of operational arrangements in order to enable an optimal management of the network, promote joint electricity exchanges and the allocation of cross-border capacity, and to enable an adequate level of interconnection capacity, including through new interconnection, within the region and between regions to allow for development of effective competition and improvement of security of supply, without discriminating between supply undertakings in different Member States;
(b)
coordinate the development of all network codes for the relevant transmission system operators and other market actors; and
(c)
coordinate the development of the rules governing the management of congestion.
3. National regulatory authorities shall have the right to enter into cooperative arrangements with each other to foster regulatory cooperation.
4. The actions referred to in paragraph 2 shall be carried out, as appropriate, in close consultation with other relevant national authorities and without prejudice to their specific competencies.
5. The Commission may adopt Guidelines on the extent of the duties of the regulatory authorities to cooperate with each other and with the Agency. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Compliances with the Guidelines

1. Any regulatory authority and the Commission may request the opinion of the Agency on the compliance of a decision taken by a regulatory authority with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009.
2. The Agency shall provide its opinion to the regulatory authority which has requested it or to the Commission, respectively, and to the regulatory authority which has taken the decision in question within three months from the date of receipt of the request.
3. Where the regulatory authority which has taken the decision does not comply with the Agency’s opinion within four months from the date of receipt of that opinion, the Agency shall inform the Commission accordingly.
4. Any regulatory authority may inform the Commission where it considers that a decision relevant for cross-border trade taken by another regulatory authority does not comply with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009 within two months from the date of that decision.
5. Where the Commission, within two months after having been informed by the Agency in accordance with paragraph 3, or by a regulatory authority in accordance with paragraph 4, or on its own initiative, within three months from the date of the decision, finds that the decision of a regulatory authority raises serious doubts as to its compatibility with the Guidelines referred to in this Directive or in Regulation (EC) No 714/2009, the Commission may decide to examine the case further. In such a case, it shall invite the regulatory authority and the parties to the proceedings before the regulatory authority to submit observations.
6. Where the Commission takes a decision to examine the case further, it shall, within four months of the date of such decision, issue a final decision:
(a)
not to raise objections against the decision of the regulatory authority; or
(b)
to require the regulatory authority concerned to withdraw its decision on the basis that that the Guidelines have not been complied with.
7. Where the Commission has not taken a decision to examine the case further or a final decision within the time-limits set in paragraphs 5 and 6 respectively, it shall be deemed not to have raised objections to the decision of the regulatory authority.
8. The regulatory authority shall comply with the Commission decision to withdraw their decision within a period of two months and shall inform the Commission accordingly.
9. The Commission may adopt Guidelines setting out the details of the procedure to be followed for the application of this Article. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).

Record keeping

1. Member States shall require supply undertakings to keep at the disposal of the national authorities, including the national regulatory authority, the national competition authorities and the Commission, for the fulfilment of their tasks, for at least five years, the relevant data relating to all transactions in electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives with wholesale customers and transmission system operators.
2. The data shall include details on the characteristics of the relevant transactions such as duration, delivery and settlement rules, the quantity, the dates and times of execution and the transaction prices and means of identifying the wholesale customer concerned, as well as specified details of all unsettled electricity supply contracts and electricity derivatives.
3. The regulatory authority may decide to make available to market participants elements of that information provided that commercially sensitive information on individual market players or individual transactions is not released. This paragraph shall not apply to information about financial instruments which fall within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC.
4. To ensure the uniform application of this Article, the Commission may adopt Guidelines which define the methods and arrangements for record keeping as well as the form and content of the data that shall be kept. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 46(2).
5. With respect to transactions in electricity derivatives of supply undertakings with wholesale customers and transmission system operators, this Article shall apply only once the Commission has adopted the Guidelines referred to in paragraph 4.
6. The provisions of this Article shall not create additional obligations towards the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 for entities falling within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC.
7. In the event that the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 need access to data kept by entities falling within the scope of Directive 2004/39/EC, the authorities responsible under that Directive shall provide them with the required data.

Retail markets

In order to facilitate the emergence of well functioning and transparent retail markets in the Community, Member States shall ensure that the roles and responsibilities of transmission system operators, distribution system operators, supply undertakings and customers and if necessary other market participants are defined with respect to contractual arrangements, commitment to customers, data exchange and settlement rules, data ownership and metering responsibility.
Those rules shall be made public, be designed with the aim to facilitate customers’ and suppliers’ access to networks, and they shall be subject to review by the regulatory authorities or other relevant national authorities.
Large non-household customers shall have the right to contract simultaneously with several suppliers.

Safeguard measures

In the event of a sudden crisis in the energy market and where the physical safety or security of persons, apparatus or installations or system integrity is threatened, a Member State may temporarily take the necessary safeguard measures.
Such measures must cause the least possible disturbance in the functioning of the internal market and must not be wider in scope than is strictly necessary to remedy the sudden difficulties which have arisen.
The Member State concerned shall, without delay, notify those measures to the other Member States, and to the Commission, which may decide that the Member State concerned must amend or abolish such measures, insofar as they distort competition and adversely affect trade in a manner which is at variance with the common interest.

Level playing field

1. Measures that the Member States may take pursuant to this Directive in order to ensure a level playing field shall be compatible with the Treaty, notably Article 30 thereof, and with Community law.
2. The measures referred to in paragraph 1 shall be proportionate, non-discriminatory and transparent. Those measures may be put into effect only following the notification to and approval by the Commission.
3. The Commission shall act on the notification referred to in paragraph 2 within two months of the receipt of the notification. That period shall begin on the day following receipt of the complete information. In the event that the Commission has not acted within that two-month period, it shall be deemed not to have raised objections to the notified measures.

Derogations

1. Member States which can demonstrate, after this Directive has been brought into force, that there are substantial problems for the operation of their small isolated systems, may apply for derogations from the relevant provisions of Chapters IV, VI, VII, and VIII, as well as Chapter III, in the case of micro isolated systems, as far as refurbishing, upgrading and expanding existing capacity are concerned, which may be granted to them by the Commission. The Commission shall inform the Member States of those applications before taking a decision, taking into account respect for confidentiality. That decision shall be published in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
2. Article 9 shall not apply to Cyprus, Luxembourg and/or Malta. In addition, Articles 26, 32 and 33 shall not apply to Malta.
For the purposes of Article 9(1)(b), the notion ‘undertaking performing any of the functions of generation or supply’ shall not include final customers who perform any of the functions of generation and/or supply of electricity, either directly or via undertakings over which they exercise control, either individually or jointly, provided that the final customers including their shares of the electricity produced in controlled undertakings are, on an annual average, net consumers of electricity and provided that the economic value of the electricity they sell to third parties is insignificant in proportion to their other business operations.

Review procedure

In the event that in the report referred to in Article 47(6) the Commission reaches the conclusion that given the effective manner in which network access has been carried out in a Member State — which gives rise to fully effective, non-discriminatory and unhindered network access — certain obligations imposed by this Directive on undertakings (including those with respect to legal unbundling for distribution system operators) are not proportionate to the objective pursued, the Member State in question may submit a request to the Commission for exemption from the requirement in question.
Such request shall be notified, without delay, by the Member State to the Commission, together with all the relevant information necessary to demonstrate that the conclusion reached in the report on effective network access being ensured will be maintained.
Within three months of its receipt of a notification, the Commission shall adopt an opinion with respect to the request by the Member State concerned, and where appropriate, submit proposals to the European Parliament and to the Council to amend the relevant provisions of this Directive. The Commission may propose, in the proposals to amend this Directive, to exempt the Member State concerned from specific requirements, subject to that Member State implementing equally effective measures as appropriate.

Committee

1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee.
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4), and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.

Reporting

1. The Commission shall monitor and review the application of this Directive and submit an overall progress report to the European Parliament and the Council for the first time by 4 August 2004, and thereafter on an annual basis. The progress report shall cover at least:
(a)
the experience gained and progress made in creating a complete and fully operational internal market in electricity and the obstacles that remain in this respect, including aspects of market dominance, concentration in the market, predatory or anti-competitive behaviour and the effect thereof in terms of market distortion;
(b)
the extent to which the unbundling and tarification requirements contained in this Directive have been successful in ensuring fair and non-discriminatory access to the Community’s electricity system and equivalent levels of competition, as well as the economic, environmental and social consequences of the opening of the electricity market to customers;
(c)
an examination of issues relating to system capacity levels and security of supply of electricity in the Community, and in particular the existing and projected balance between demand and supply, taking into account the physical capacity for exchanges between areas;
(d)
special attention will be given to measures taken in Member States to cover peak demand and to deal with shortfalls of one or more suppliers;
(e)
the implementation of the derogation provided under Article 26(4) with a view to a possible revision of the threshold;
(f)
a general assessment of the progress achieved with regard to bilateral relations with third countries which produce and export or transport electricity, including progress in market integration, the social and environmental consequences of the trade in electricity and access to the networks of such third countries;
(g)
the need for possible harmonisation requirements that are not linked to the provisions of this Directive; and
(h)
the manner in which Member States have implemented in practice the requirements regarding energy labelling contained in Article 3(9), and the manner in which any Commission recommendations on that issue have been taken into account.
Where appropriate, the progress report may include recommendations as regards, in particular, the scope and modalities of labelling provisions, including the way in which reference is made to existing reference sources and the content of those sources, and, notably, how information relating to environmental impact, as regards at least CO2emissions, and radioactive waste, resulting from electricity generation from different energy sources could be made available in a transparent, easily accessible and comparable manner throughout the Community, how the measures taken by the Member States to control the accuracy of the information provided by suppliers could be streamlined, and which measures could counteract the negative effects of market dominance and market concentration.
2. Every two years, the progress report referred to in paragraph 1 shall also include an analysis of the different measures taken in the Member States to meet public service obligations, together with an examination of the effectiveness of those measures and, in particular, their effects on competition in the electricity market. Where appropriate, the report may include recommendations as to the measures to be taken at national level to achieve high public service standards, or measures intended to prevent market foreclosure.
3. The Commission shall, by 3 March 2013, submit, as part of the general review, to the European Parliament and the Council, a detailed specific report outlining the extent to which the unbundling requirements under Chapter V have been successful in ensuring full and effective independence of transmission system operators, using effective and efficient unbundling as a benchmark.
4. For the purpose of its assessment under paragraph 3, the Commission shall take into account in particular the following criteria: fair and non-discriminatory network access, effective regulation, the development of the network to meet market needs, undistorted incentives to invest, the development of interconnection infrastructure, effective competition in the energy markets of the Community and the security of supply situation in the Community.
5. Where appropriate, and in particular in the event that the detailed specific report referred to in paragraph 3 determines that the conditions referred to in paragraph 4 have not been guaranteed in practice, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council to ensure fully effective independence of transmission system operators by 3 March 2014.
6. The Commission shall, by 1 January 2006, forward to the European Parliament and Council, a detailed report outlining progress in creating the internal electricity market. That report shall, in particular, consider:
—
the existence of non-discriminatory network access,
—
effective regulation,
—
the development of interconnection infrastructure and the security of supply situation in the Community,
—
the extent to which the full benefits of the opening of markets are accruing to small enterprises and household customers, notably with respect to public service and universal service standards,
—
the extent to which markets are in practice open to effective competition, including aspects of market dominance, market concentration and predatory or anti-competitive behaviour,
—
the extent to which customers are actually switching suppliers and renegotiating tariffs,
—
price developments, including supply prices, in relation to the degree of the opening of markets; and,
—
the experience gained in the application of this Directive as far as the effective independence of system operators in vertically integrated undertakings is concerned and whether other measures in addition to functional independence and separation of accounts have been developed which have effects equivalent to legal unbundling.
Where appropriate, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, in particular to guarantee high public service standards.
Where appropriate, the Commission shall submit proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, in particular to ensure full and effective independence of distribution system operators before 1 July 2007. When necessary, those proposals shall, in conformity with competition law, also concern measures to address issues of market dominance, market concentration and predatory or anti-competitive behaviour.

Repeal

Directive 2003/54/EC is repealed from 3 March 2011 without prejudice to the obligations of Member States concerning the deadlines for transposition and application of the said Directive. References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex II.

Transposition

1. Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 3 March 2011. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.
They shall apply those measures from 3 March 2011, with the exception of Article 11, which they shall apply from 3 March 2013.
When Member States adopt those measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such reference shall be laid down by Member States.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Entry into force

This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Addressees

This Directive is addressed to the Member States.
ANNEX IMEASURES ON CONSUMER PROTECTION1. Without prejudice to Community rules on consumer protection, in particular Directive 97/7/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 1997 on the protection of consumers in respect of distance contracts(1)and Council Directive 93/13/EEC of 5 April 1993 on unfair terms in consumer contracts(2), the measures referred to in Article 3 are to ensure that customers:

(a) | have a right to a contract with their electricity service provider that specifies:—the identity and address of the supplier,—the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection,—the types of maintenance service offered,—the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained,—the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted,—any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing,—the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f),—information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,Conditions shall be fair and well-known in advance. In any case, this information should be provided prior to the conclusion or confirmation of the contract. Where contracts are concluded through intermediaries, the information relating to the matters set out in this point shall also be provided prior to the conclusion of the contract; | — | the identity and address of the supplier, | — | the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection, | — | the types of maintenance service offered, | — | the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained, | — | the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted, | — | any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing, | — | the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f), | — | information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,
— | the identity and address of the supplier,
— | the services provided, the service quality levels offered, as well as the time for the initial connection,
— | the types of maintenance service offered,
— | the means by which up-to-date information on all applicable tariffs and maintenance charges may be obtained,
— | the duration of the contract, the conditions for renewal and termination of services and of the contract and whether withdrawal from the contract without charge is permitted,
— | any compensation and the refund arrangements which apply if contracted service quality levels are not met, including inaccurate and delayed billing,
— | the method of initiating procedures for settlement of disputes in accordance with point (f),
— | information relating to consumer rights, including on the complaint handling and all of the information referred to in this point, clearly communicated through billing or the electricity undertaking’s web site,
(b) | are given adequate notice of any intention to modify contractual conditions and are informed about their right of withdrawal when the notice is given. Service providers shall notify their subscribers directly of any increase in charges, at an appropriate time no later than one normal billing period after the increase comes into effect in a transparent and comprehensible manner. Member States shall ensure that customers are free to withdraw from contracts if they do not accept the new conditions notified to them by their electricity service provider;
(c) | receive transparent information on applicable prices and tariffs and on standard terms and conditions, in respect of access to and use of electricity services;
(d) | are offered a wide choice of payment methods, which do not unduly discriminate between customers. Prepayment systems shall be fair and adequately reflect likely consumption. Any difference in terms and conditions shall reflect the costs to the supplier of the different payment systems. General terms and conditions shall be fair and transparent. They shall be given in clear and comprehensible language and shall not include non-contractual barriers to the exercise of customers’ rights, for example excessive contractual documentation. Customers shall be protected against unfair or misleading selling methods;
(e) | are not charged for changing supplier;
(f) | benefit from transparent, simple and inexpensive procedures for dealing with their complaints. In particular, all consumers shall have the right to a good standard of service and complaint handling by their electricity service provider. Such out-of-court dispute settlements procedures shall enable disputes to be settled fairly and promptly, preferably within three months, with provision, where warranted, for a system of reimbursement and/or compensation. They should, wherever possible, be in line with the principles set out in Commission Recommendation 98/257/EC of 30 March 1998 on the principles applicable to the bodies responsible for out-of-court settlement of consumer disputes(3);
(g) | when having access to universal service under the provisions adopted by Member States pursuant to Article 3(3), are informed about their rights regarding universal service;
(h) | have at their disposal their consumption data, and shall be able to, by explicit agreement and free of charge, give any registered supply undertaking access to its metering data. The party responsible for data management shall be obliged to give those data to the undertaking. Member States shall define a format for the data and a procedure for suppliers and consumers to have access to the data. No additional costs shall be charged to the consumer for that service;
(i) | are properly informed of actual electricity consumption and costs frequently enough to enable them to regulate their own electricity consumption. That information shall be given by using a sufficient time frame, which takes account of the capability of customer’s metering equipment and the electricity product in question. Due account shall be taken of the cost-efficiency of such measures. No additional costs shall be charged to the consumer for that service;
(j) | receive a final closure account following any change of electricity supplier no later than six weeks after the change of supplier has taken place.2. Member States shall ensure the implementation of intelligent metering systems that shall assist the active participation of consumers in the electricity supply market. The implementation of those metering systems may be subject to an economic assessment of all the long-term costs and benefits to the market and the individual consumer or which form of intelligent metering is economically reasonable and cost-effective and which timeframe is feasible for their distribution.
Such assessment shall take place by 3 September 2012.
Subject to that assessment, Member States or any competent authority they designate shall prepare a timetable with a target of up to 10 years for the implementation of intelligent metering systems.
Where roll-out of smart meters is assessed positively, at least 80 % of consumers shall be equipped with intelligent metering systems by 2020.
The Member States, or any competent authority they designate, shall ensure the interoperability of those metering systems to be implemented within their territories and shall have due regard to the use of appropriate standards and best practice and the importance of the development of the internal market in electricity.

(1)
OJ L 144, 4.6.1997, p. 19.
(2)
OJ L 95, 21.4.1993, p. 29.
(3)
OJ L 115, 17.4.1998, p. 31.

ANNEX IICORRELATION TABLE
Directive 2003/54/EC | This Directive
Article 1 | Article 1
Article 2 | Article 2
Article 3 | Article 3
Article 4 | Article 4
Article 5 | Article 5
— | Article 6
Article 6 | Article 7
Article 7 | Article 8
Article 10 | Article 9
Article 8 | Article 10
— | Article 11
Article 9 | Article 12
— | Article 13
— | Article 14
Article 11 | Article 15
Article 12 | Article 16
— | Article 17
— | Article 18
— | Article 19
— | Article 20
— | Article 21
— | Article 22
— | Article 23
Article 13 | Article 24
Article 14 | Article 25
Article 15 | Article 26
Article 16 | Article 27
Article 17 | Article 29
Article 18 | Article 30
Article 19 | Article 31
Article 20 | Article 32
Article 21 | Article 33
Article 22 | Article 34
Article 23(1) (first and second sentence) | Article 35
— | Article 36
Article 23 (rest) | Article 37
— | Article 38
— | Article 39
— | Article 40
— | Article 41
Article 24 | Article 42
— | Article 43
Article 25 | —
Article 26 | Article 44
Article 27 | Article 45
— | Article 46
Article 28 | Article 47
Article 29 | Article 48
Article 30 | Article 49
Article 31 | Article 50
Article 32 | Article 51
Annex A | Annex I

Pending: 32009L0064

20.8.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 216/1
(1) Council Directive 75/322/EEC of 20 May 1975 on the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 75/322/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex XII, Part B,
— refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval in respect of any given type of vehicle,
— refuse to grant EC component or technical unit type-approval in respect of any given type of component or separate technical unit,
— prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of vehicles,
— prohibit the sale or use of components or separate technical units,
— may not grant EC vehicle type-approval, EC component type-approval or EC separate technical unit type-approval, and
— may refuse to grant national type-approval,
— shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with Directive 2003/37/EC to be not valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and
— may refuse the sale and entry into service of new electrical or electronic sub-assemblies as components or separate technical units,
ANNEX I REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BY VEHICLES AND ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES FITTED TO A VEHICLE
Appendix 1 Vehicle broadband reference limits: Antenna-vehicle separation: 10 m
Appendix 2 Vehicle broadband reference limits: Antenna-vehicle separation: 3 m
Appendix 3 Vehicle narrowband reference limits: Antenna-vehicle separation: 10 m
Appendix 4 Vehicle narrowband reference limits: Antenna-vehicle separation: 3 m
Appendix 5 Broadband reference limits of electrical/electronic sub-assembly
Appendix 6 Narrowband reference limits of electrical/electronic sub-assembly
Appendix 7 Example of the EC type-approval mark
ANNEX II Information document No … pursuant to Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC relating to EC type-approval of an agricultural or forestry tractor concerning electromagnetic compatibility (Directive 2009/64/EC)
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
ANNEX III Information document No … relating to EC type-approval of an electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) with respect to electromagnetic compatibility (Directive 2009/64/EC)
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
ANNEX IV MODEL: EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE ‘VEHICLE’
Appendix to EC type-approval certificate No … concerning the type-approval of a vehicle with regard to Directive 2009/64/EC
ANNEX V MODEL: EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE ‘ESA’
Appendix to EC type-approval certificate No … concerning the type-approval of an electrical/electronic sub-assembly with regard to Directive 2009/64/EC
ANNEX VI METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED BROADBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM VEHICLES
Appendix 1 Figure 1 TRACTOR TEST AREA
Figure 2 POSITION OF ANTENNA RELATIVE TO TRACTOR
ANNEX VII METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED NARROWBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM VEHICLES
ANNEX VIII METHOD OF TESTING FOR IMMUNITY OF VEHICLES TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3 Characteristics of test signal to be generated
ANNEX IX METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED BROADBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES
Appendix 1 Electrical/electronic sub-assembly test area boundary
Appendix 2 Figure 1 Radiated electromagnetic emissions from an ESA test layout (General plan view)
Figure 2 Radiated electromagnetic emissions from an ESA view of test bench plane of longitudinal symmetry
ANNEX X METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED NARROWBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES
ANNEX XI METHOD(S) OF TESTING FOR IMMUNITY OF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
Appendix 1 Figure 1 150 mm stripline testing
Figure 2 150 mm stripline testing
Figure 3 800 mm stripline testing
Figure 4 800 mm stripline dimensions
Appendix 2 Example of BCI test configuration
Appendix 3 Figure 1 TEM cell testing
Figure 2 Design of rectangular TEM cell
Figure 3 Typical TEM cell dimensions
Appendix 4 Free field ESA immunity test
Figure 1 Test layout (general plan view)
Figure 2 View of test bench plane of longitudinal symmetry
ANNEX XII PART A: Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
PART B: List of time-limits for transposition into national law and application
ANNEX XIII Correlation table
The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format.Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail. Details must be provided of the working of any systems, comportents or technical units with electronic controls.
— spark ignition/compression ignition(1)
— direct injection/injection(1)
— four stroke/two stroke(1)
The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and must include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail.If the systems, component or separate technical units (stu) have electronic controls, information concerning their performance must be supplied.
— EC type-approval(1)
— extension of EC type-approval(1)
— refusal of EC type-approval(1)
— withdrawal of EC type-approval(1)
— EC type-approval(1)
— extension of EC type-approval(1)
— refusal of EC type-approval(1)
— withdrawal of EC type-approval(1)
Engine type Method of measurements
Quasi peak Peak
Spark ignition Engine speed Engine speed
One cylinder 2 500 rpm ± 10 % 2 500 rpm ± 10 %
More than one cylinder 1 500 rpm ± 10 % 1 500 rpm ± 10 %
Spot frequency(MHz) Tolerance(MHz)
45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190 and 230 ±5
280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 ±20
— 1,0 ± 0,2 m inside the vehicle, measured from the point of intersection of the windscreen and bonnet (point C in Appendix 1), or
— 0,2 ± 0,2 m from the centre line of the front axle of the tractor, measured towards the centre of the tractor (point D in Appendix 2),
— 1,0 ± 0,2 m inside the vehicle, measured from the point of intersection of the windscreen and bonnet (point C in Appendix 1), or
— 0,2 ± 0,2 m from the centre line of the rear axle of the tractor, measured towards the centre of the tractor (point D in Appendix 2),
(a) for all field generating devices, 0,5 ± 0,05 m either side of the reference point on a line passing through the reference point and at the same height as the reference point, and perpendicular to the vehicle plane of longitudinal symmetry;
(b) in the case of a TLS, 1,50 ± 0,05 m on a line passing through the reference point at the same height as the reference point and along the line of longitudinal symmetry.
m = (maximum envelope excursion – minimum envelope excursion)/(maximum envelope excursion + minimum envelope excursion).
Spot frequency(MHz) Tolerance(MHz)
45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190 and 230 ±5
280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 ±20
— Stripline testing: see Appendix 1
— Bulk current injection testing: see Appendix 2
— TEM cell testing: see Appendix 3
— Free field test: see Appendix 4
m = (maximum envelope excursion — minimum envelope excursion)/(maximum envelope excursion + minimum envelope excursion)
(a) is perpendicular to the ground plane;
(b) bisects the edge of the ground plane and the midpoint of the principal portion of the wiring harness; and
(c) is perpendicular to the edge of the ground plane and the principal portion of the wiring harness.
(a) is perpendicular to the ground plane;
(b) is perpendicular to the edge of the ground plane along which the principal portion of the wiring harness runs;
(c) bisects the edge of the ground plane and the midpoint of the principal portion of the wiring harness; and
(d) is coincident with the midpoint of the principal portion of the harness which runs along the edge of the ground plane closest to the antenna;
E = Electric field (volts/metre)
P = Power flowing into cell (W)
Z = Impedance of cell (50 Ω)
d = Separation distance (metres) between the upper wall and the plate (septum).
(a) to a screened peripheral;
(b) to a vehicle next to the TEM cell; or
(c) directly to the screened patchboard.
1 = Ground plate
2 = Main loom and sensor/actuator cables
3 = Wooden frame
4 = Driven plate
5 = Insulator
6 = Test object
1 = DUT
2 = RF measuring probe (optional)
3 = RF injection probe
4 = Artificial network
5 = Shielded room filter network
6 = Power source
7 = DUT interface: stimulation and monitoring equipment
8 = Signal generator
9 = Broadband amplifier
10 = RF 50 Ω directional complex
11 = RF power level measuring device or equivalent
12 = Spectrum analyser or equivalent (optional)
1 = Outer conductor, shield
2 = Inner conductor (septum)
3 = Insulator
4 = Input
5 = Insulator
6 = Door
7 = Socket panel
8 = Test object power supply
9 = Terminating resistance 50 Ω
10 = Insulation
11 = Test object (maximum height one third of distance between cell floor and septum)
Upper frequency(MHz) Cell form factorW: b Cell form factorL/W Plate separationb (cm) SeptumS (cm)
200 1,69 0,66 56 70
200 1,00 1,00 60 50
Council Directive 75/322/EEC(OJ L 147, 9.6.1975, p. 28)
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45) only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in Article 1(1)
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24) only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in the first indent of Article 1
Commission Directive 2000/2/EC(OJ L 21, 26.1.2000, p. 23) Article 1 and Annex only
Commission Directive 2001/3/EC(OJ L 28, 30.1.2001, p. 1) Article 2 and Annex II only
Point I.A.13 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 57)
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in Article 1 and Annex, point A.12.
Directive Time-limit for transposition Date of application
75/322/EEC 21 November 1976 —
82/890/EEC 21 June 1984 —
97/54/EC 22 September 1998 23 September 1998
2000/2/EC 31 December 2000(1) —
2001/3/EC 30 June 2002 —
2006/96/EC 31 December 2006 —
— refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval in respect of any given type of vehicle,
— refuse to grant EC component or technical unit type-approval in respect of any given type of component or separate technical unit,
— prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of vehicles,
— prohibit the sale or use of components or separate technical units,
— may no longer grant EC vehicle type-approval, EC component type-approval or EC separate technical unit type-approval, and
— may refuse to grant national type-approval,
— shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 74/150/EEC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and
— may refuse the sale and entry into service of new electrical or electronic sub-assemblies as components or separate technical units,
Directive 75/322/EEC Directive 2000/2/EC This Directive
Article 1 Article 1
Article 2 Article 2
Article 4 Article 3
Article 5 Article 4
Article 6(1) —
Article 6(2) Article 5
— Article 6
— Article 7
Article 7 Article 8
Annex I Annex I
Annex IIA Annex II
Annex IIB Annex III
Annex IIIA Annex IV
Annex IIIB Annex V
Annex IV Annex VI
Annex V Annex VII
Annex VI Annex VIII
Annex VII Annex IX
Annex VIII Annex X
Annex IX Annex XI
— Annex XII
— Annex XIII
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 75/322/EEC of 20 May 1975 on the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 75/322/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex XII, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
For the purposes of this Directive, ‘vehicle’ means any vehicle as defined in Article 2(d) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 2
1. Member States may not, on grounds relating to electromagnetic compatibility:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval in respect of any given type of vehicle,
—
refuse to grant EC component or technical unit type-approval in respect of any given type of component or separate technical unit,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of vehicles,
—
prohibit the sale or use of components or separate technical units,
if the vehicles, components or separate technical units comply with the requirements of this Directive.
2. Member States
—
may not grant EC vehicle type-approval, EC component type-approval or EC separate technical unit type-approval, and
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval,
for any type of vehicle, component or separate technical unit, if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
3. Paragraph 2 shall not apply to vehicle types approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Council Directive 77/537/EEC of 28 June 1977 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of pollutants from diesel engines for use in wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(6)or to any subsequent extensions to those approvals.
4. Member States:
—
shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with Directive 2003/37/EC to be not valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and
—
may refuse the sale and entry into service of new electrical or electronic sub-assemblies as components or separate technical units,
if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
5. Without prejudice to paragraphs 2 and 4, in the case of replacement parts, Member States shall continue to grant EC type-approval and to permit the sale and entry into service of components or separate technical units intended for use on vehicle types which have been approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Directive 75/322/EEC or Directive 77/537/EEC and, where applicable, subsequent extensions to those approvals.

Article 3
This Directive shall constitute ‘another Community directive’ for the purposes of Article 1(4) of Directive 2004/108/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility(7).

Article 4
The amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to XI shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 5
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 6
Directive 75/322/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex XII, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex XII, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XIII.

Article 7
This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 8
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 75/322/EEC of 20 May 1975 on the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility)(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 75/322/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors (electromagnetic compatibility). Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex XII, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
For the purposes of this Directive, ‘vehicle’ means any vehicle as defined in Article 2(d) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
1. Member States may not, on grounds relating to electromagnetic compatibility:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval in respect of any given type of vehicle,
—
refuse to grant EC component or technical unit type-approval in respect of any given type of component or separate technical unit,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of vehicles,
—
prohibit the sale or use of components or separate technical units,
if the vehicles, components or separate technical units comply with the requirements of this Directive.
2. Member States
—
may not grant EC vehicle type-approval, EC component type-approval or EC separate technical unit type-approval, and
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval,
for any type of vehicle, component or separate technical unit, if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
3. Paragraph 2 shall not apply to vehicle types approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Council Directive 77/537/EEC of 28 June 1977 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of pollutants from diesel engines for use in wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(6)or to any subsequent extensions to those approvals.
4. Member States:
—
shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with Directive 2003/37/EC to be not valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and
—
may refuse the sale and entry into service of new electrical or electronic sub-assemblies as components or separate technical units,
if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
5. Without prejudice to paragraphs 2 and 4, in the case of replacement parts, Member States shall continue to grant EC type-approval and to permit the sale and entry into service of components or separate technical units intended for use on vehicle types which have been approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Directive 75/322/EEC or Directive 77/537/EEC and, where applicable, subsequent extensions to those approvals.
This Directive shall constitute ‘another Community directive’ for the purposes of Article 1(4) of Directive 2004/108/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility(7).
The amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to XI shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 75/322/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex XII, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex XII, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XIII.
This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

1.   SCOPE

ANNEX IREQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BY VEHICLES AND ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES FITTED TO A VEHICLE1.1. This Directive applies to the electromagnetic compatibility of vehicles covered by Article 1. It also applies to electrical or electronic separate technical units intended to be fitted to the vehicles.
2. DEFINITIONS2.1. For the purposes of this Directive2.1.1.
‘Electromagnetic compatibility’ means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
2.1.2.
‘Electromagnetic disturbance’ means any electromagnetic phenomenon which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s). An electromagnetic disturbance may be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change in the propagation medium itself.
2.1.3.
‘Electromagnetic immunity’ means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to perform without degradation of performance in the presence of specified electromagnetic disturbances.
2.1.4.
‘Electromagnetic environment’ means the totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.
2.1.5.
‘Reference limit’ means the nominal level to which type-approval and conformity of production limit values are referenced.
2.1.6.
‘Reference antenna’ for the frequency range 20 to 80 MHz: means a shortened balanced dipole being a half wave resonant dipole at 80 MHz, and for the frequency range above 80 MHz: means a balanced half wave resonant dipole tuned to the measurement frequency.
2.1.7.
‘Broadband emission’ means an emission which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver.
2.1.8.
‘Narrowband emission’ means an emission which has a bandwidth less than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver.
2.1.9.
‘Electrical/electronic system’ means (an) electrical and/or electronic device(s) or set(s) of devices together with any associated electrical connections which form part of a vehicle but which are not intended to be type approved separately from the vehicle.
2.1.10.
‘Electrical/electronic sub-assembly’ (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer as either a ‘component’ or a ‘separate technical unit (STU)’ (see Article 4(1)(c) of Directive 2003/37/EC).
‘Vehicle type’ in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means vehicles which do not differ essentially in such respects as:
2.1.11.1. the overall size and shape of the engine compartment;
2.1.11.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components and the general wiring arrangement;
2.1.11.3. the primary material of which the body or shell (if applicable) of the vehicle is constructed (for example, a steel, aluminium or fibreglass body shell); the presence of panels of different material does not change the vehicle type provided the primary material of the body is unchanged; however, such variations must be notified.
An ‘ESA type’ in relation to electromagnetic compatibility means ESAs which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.12.1. the function performed by the ESA;
2.1.12.2. the general arrangement of the electrical and/or electronic components, if applicable.
3. APPLICATION FOR EC TYPE-APPROVAL3.1. Approval of a vehicle type3.1.1. The application for approval of a vehicle type, with regard to its electromagnetic compatibility pursuant to Article 4(1) of Directive 2003/37/EC shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer.
3.1.2. A model for the information document is set out in Annex II.
3.1.3. The vehicle manufacturer shall draw up a schedule describing all projected combinations of relevant vehicle electrical/electronic systems or ESAs, body styles(1), variations in body material(1), general wiring arrangements, engine variations, left-hand/right-hand drive versions and wheelbase versions. Relevant vehicle electrical/electronic systems or ESAs are those which may emit significant broadband or narrowband radiation and/or those which are involved in the driver’s direct control (see point 6.4.2.3) of the vehicle.
3.1.4. A representative vehicle shall be selected from this schedule for the purpose of being tested, in mutual agreement between the manufacturer and the competent authority. This vehicle shall represent the vehicle type (see Appendix 1 of Annex II). The choice of vehicle shall be based on the electrical/electronic systems offered by the manufacturer. One more vehicle may be selected from this schedule for the purpose of being tested if it is considered by mutual agreement between the manufacturer and the competent authority that different electrical/electronic systems are included which are likely to have a significant effect on the vehicle’s electromagnetic compatibility compared with the first representative vehicle.
3.1.5. The choice of the vehicle(s) in conformity with point 3.1.4 is limited to vehicle/electrical/electronic system combinations intended for actual production.
3.1.6. The manufacturer may supplement the application with a report from tests which have been carried out. Any such data provided may be used by the approval authority for the purpose of drawing up the EC type-approval certificate.
3.1.7. If the technical service responsible for the type-approval test carries out the test itself, then a vehicle representative of the type to be approved, according to point 3.1.4 shall be provided.
3.2. Approval of a type of ESA3.2.1. The application for approval of a type of ESA with regard to its electromagnetic compatibility pursuant to Article 4(1) of Directive 2003/37/EC shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by the manufacturer of the ESA.
3.2.2. A model for the information document is set out in Annex III.
3.2.3. The manufacturer may supplement the application with a report from tests which have been carried out. Any such data provided may be used by the approval authority for the purpose of drawing up the EC type-approval certificate.
3.2.4. If the technical service responsible for the type-approval test carries out the test itself, then a sample of the ESA system representative of the type to be approved shall be provided, if necessary, after discussion with the manufacturer on, for example, possible variations in the layout, the number of components and the number of sensors. If the technical service deems it necessary, it may select a further sample.
3.2.5. The sample(s) must be clearly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer’s trade name or mark and the type designation.
3.2.6. Where applicable, any restrictions on use shall be identified. Any such restrictions shall be included in the information document set out in Annex III and/or in the EC type-approval certificate set out in Annex V.
4. TYPE-APPROVAL4.1. Routes to type-approval4.1.1. Type-approval of a vehicleThe following alternative routes to type-approval of a vehicle may be used at the discretion of the vehicle manufacturer.
4.1.1.1. Approval of a vehicle installationA vehicle installation may achieve type-approval directly by following the provisions laid down in point 6. If this route is chosen by a vehicle manufacturer, no separate testing of electrical/electronic systems or ESAs is required.
4.1.1.2. Approval of vehicle type by testing of individual ESAsA vehicle manufacturer may obtain approval for the vehicle by demonstrating to the approval authority that all the relevant (see point 3.1.3) electrical/electronic systems or ESAs have individually been approved in accordance with this Directive and have been installed in accordance with any conditions attached thereto.
4.1.1.3. A manufacturer, if he wishes, may obtain approval pursuant to this Directive if the vehicle has no equipment of the type which is subject to immunity or emission tests. The vehicle shall have no systems as specified in point 3.1.3 (immunity) and no spark ignition equipment. Such approvals shall not require testing.
4.1.2. Type-approval of an ESAType-approval may be granted to an ESA to be fitted either to any vehicle type or to a specific vehicle type or types requested by the manufacturer. ESAs involved in the direct control of vehicles will normally receive type-approval in conjunction with a vehicle manufacturer.
4.2. Granting of type-approval4.2.1. Vehicle4.2.1.1. If the representative vehicle fulfils the requirements of this Directive, EC type-approval pursuant to Article 4 of Directive 2003/37/EC shall be granted.
4.2.1.2. A model for the EC type-approval certificate is set out in Annex IV.
4.2.2. ESA4.2.2.1. If the representative ESA system(s) fulfil(s) the requirements of this Directive, EC type-approval pursuant to Article 4 of Directive 2003/37/EC shall be granted.
4.2.2.2. A model for the EC type-approval certificate is given in Annex V.
4.2.3. In order to draw up the certificates referred to in point 4.2.1.2 or 4.2.2.2, the competent authority of the Member State granting the approval may use a report prepared by an approved or recognised laboratory or in accordance with the provisions of this Directive.
4.3. Amendments to approvals4.3.1. In the case of amendments to approvals granted pursuant to this Directive, the provisions of Article 5(2) and (3) of Directive 2003/37/EC shall apply.
4.3.2. Amendment of a vehicle type-approval by ESA addition or substitution4.3.2.1. Where a vehicle manufacturer has obtained approval for a vehicle installation and wishes to fit an additional or substitutional electrical/electronic system or ESA which has already received approval pursuant to this Directive, and which will be installed in accordance with any conditions attached thereto, the vehicle approval may be amended without further testing. The additional or substitutional electrical/electronic system or ESA shall be considered as part of the vehicle for conformity of production purposes.
4.3.2.2. Where the additional or substitutional part(s) has (have) not received approval pursuant to this Directive, and if testing is considered necessary, the whole vehicle shall be deemed to comply if the new or revised part(s) can be shown to comply with the relevant requirements of point 6 or if, in a comparative test, the new part can be shown not to be likely to adversely affect compliance of the vehicle type.
4.3.2.3. The addition by a vehicle manufacturer to an approved vehicle of standard domestic or business equipment, other than mobile communication equipment(2)which complies with Directive 2004/108/EC, and is installed according to the recommendations of the equipment and vehicle manufacturers, or the substitution or removal thereof, shall not invalidate the vehicle approval. This shall not preclude vehicle manufacturers fitting communication equipment with suitable installations guidelines developed by the vehicle manufacturer and/or manufacturer(s) of such communication equipment. The vehicle manufacturer shall provide evidence (if requested by the test authority) that vehicle performance is not adversely affected by such transmitters. This may be a statement that the power levels and installation are such that the immunity levels of this Directive offer sufficient protection when subject to transmission alone, namely excluding transmission in conjunction with the tests specified in point 6. This Directive does not authorise the use of a communication transmitter when other requirements on such equipment or its use apply. A vehicle manufacturer may refuse to install in his vehicle standard domestic or business equipment which complies with Directive 2004/108/EC.
5. MARKING5.1. Every ESA conforming to a type approved pursuant to this Directive shall bear an EC type-approval mark.
5.2. This mark shall consist of a rectangle surrounding the letter ‘e’ followed by the distinguishing number of the Member State which has granted EC type-approval:
1 for Germany; 2 for France; 3 for Italy; 4 for the Netherlands; 5 for Sweden; 6 for Belgium; 7 for Hungary; 8 for the Czech Republic; 9 for Spain; 11 for the United Kingdom; 12 for Austria; 13 for Luxembourg; 17 for Finland; 18 for Denmark; 19 for Romania; 20 for Poland; 21 for Portugal; 23 for Greece; 24 for Ireland; 26 for Slovenia; 27 for Slovakia; 29 for Estonia; 32 for Latvia; 34 for Bulgaria; 36 for Lithuania; 49 for Cyprus; 50 for Malta.
It must also include in the vicinity of the rectangle the four-digit sequential number (with leading zeros as applicable) — hereinafter referred to as the ‘base approval number’ — contained in Section 4 of the type-approval number shown on the EC type-approval certificate issued for the type of device in question (see Annex V), preceded by the two figures indicating the sequence number assigned to the most recent major technical amendment to Directive 75/322/EEC, as replaced by this Directive, on the date EC component type-approval was granted.
5.3. The EC type-approval mark must be affixed to the main part of the ESA (for example the electronic control unit) in such a way as to be clearly legible and indelible.
5.4. An example of the EC type-approval mark is set out in Appendix 7.
5.5. No marking is required for electrical/electronic systems included in vehicle types approved by this Directive.
5.6. Markings on ESAs in compliance with point 5.3 need not be visible when the ESA is installed in a vehicle.
6. SPECIFICATIONS6.1. General specification6.1.1. A vehicle (and its electrical/electronic system(s) or ESAs) shall be so designed, constructed and fitted as to enable the vehicle, in normal conditions of use, to comply with the requirements of this Directive.
6.2. Specifications concerning broadband electromagnetic radiation from vehicles fitted with spark ignition6.2.1. Method of measurementThe electromagnetic radiation generated by the vehicle representative of its type shall be measured using the method described in Annex VI at either of the defined antenna distances. The choice shall be made by the vehicle manufacturer.
6.2.2. Vehicle broadband reference limits6.2.2.1. If measurements are made using the method described in Annex VI using a vehicle-to-antenna spacing of 10,0 ± 0,2 m, the radiation reference limits shall be 34 dB microvolts/m (50 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band and 34 to 45 dB microvolts/m (50 to 180 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz frequency band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 1 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 45 dB microvolts/m (180 microvolts/m).
6.2.2.2. If measurements are made using the method described in Annex VI using a vehicle-to-antenna spacing of 3,0 ± 0,05 m, the radiation reference limits shall be 44 dB microvolts/m (160 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band and 44 to 55 dB microvolts/m (160 to 562 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz frequency band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 2 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 55 dB microvolts/m (562 microvolts/m).
6.2.2.3. On the vehicle representative of its type, the measured values, expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m), shall be at least 2,0 dB (20 %) below the reference limits.
6.3. Specifications concerning narrowband electromagnetic radiation from vehicles6.3.1. Method of measurementThe electromagnetic radiation generated by the vehicle representative of its type shall be measured using the method described in Annex VII at either of the defined antenna distances. The choice shall be made by the vehicle manufacturer.
6.3.2. Vehicle narrowband reference limits6.3.2.1. If measurements are made using the method described in Annex VII using a vehicle-to-antenna spacing of 10,0 ± 0,2 m, the radiation-reference limits shall be 24 dB microvolts/m (16 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band and 24 to 35 dB microvolts/m (16 to 56 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz frequency band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 3 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 35 dB microvolts/m (56 microvolts/m).
6.3.2.2. If measurements are made using the method described in Annex VII using a vehicle-to-antenna spacing of 3,0 ± 0,05 m, the radiation reference limit shall be 34 dB microvolts/m (50 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band and 34 to 45 dB microvolts/m (50 to 180 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz frequency band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 4 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 45 dB microvolts/m (180 microvolts/m).
6.3.2.3. On the vehicle representative of its type, the measured values, expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m), shall be at least 2,0 dB (20 %) below the reference limit.
6.3.2.4. Notwithstanding the limits defined in points 6.3.2.1, 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 of this Annex, if, during the initial step described in point 1.3 of Annex VII, the signal strength measured at the vehicle broadcast radio antenna is less than 20 dB microvolts/m (10 microvolts/m) over the frequency range 88 to 108 MHz, then the vehicle shall be deemed to comply with the limits for narrowband emissions and no further testing will be required.
6.4. Specifications concerning immunity of vehicles to electromagnetic radiation6.4.1. Method of testingThe immunity to electromagnetic radiation of the vehicle representative of its type shall be tested by the method described in Annex VIII.
6.4.2. Vehicle immunity reference limits6.4.2.1. If tests are made using the method described in Annex VIII, the field strength reference level shall be 24 volts/m rms in over 90 % of the 20 to 1 000 MHz frequency band and 20 volts/m rms over the whole 20 to 1 000 MHz frequency band.
6.4.2.2. The vehicle representative of its type shall be considered as complying with immunity requirements if, during the tests performed in accordance with Annex VIII, and subjected to a field strength, expressed in volts/m, of 25 % above the reference level, there shall be no abnormal change in the speed of the driven wheels of the vehicle, no degradation of performance which would cause confusion to other road users, and no degradation in the driver’s direct control of the vehicle which could be observed by the driver or other road user.
6.4.2.3. The driver’s direct control of the vehicle is exercised by means of, for example, steering, braking, or engine speed control.
6.5. Specification concerning broadband electromagnetic interference generated by ESAs6.5.1. Method of measurementThe electromagnetic radiation generated by the ESA representative of its type shall be measured by the method described in Annex IX.
6.5.2. ESA broadband reference limits6.5.2.1. If measurements are made using the method described in Annex IX, the radiation reference limits shall be 64 to 54 dB microvolts/m(1 600 to 500 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band, this limit decreasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 30 MHz, and 54 to 65 dB microvolts/m (500 to 1 800 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 5 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 65 dB microvolts/m (1 800 microvolts/m).
6.5.2.2. On the ESA representative of its type, the measured values, expressed in dB microvolts/m, (microvolts/m) shall be at least 2,0 dB (20 %) below the reference limits.
6.6. Specifications concerning narrowband electromagnetic interference generated by ESAs6.6.1. Method of measurementThe electromagnetic radiation generated by the ESA representative of its type shall be measured by the method described in Annex X.
6.6.2. ESA narrowband reference limits6.6.2.1. If measures are made using the method described in Annex X, the radiation reference limits shall be 54 to 44 dB microvolts/m (500 to 160 microvolts/m) in the 30 to 75 MHz frequency band, this limit decreasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 30 MHz, and 44 to 55 dB microvolts/m (160 to 560 microvolts/m) in the 75 to 400 MHz band, this limit increasing logarithmically (linearly) with frequencies above 75 MHz as shown in Appendix 6 of this Annex. In the 400 to 1 000 MHz frequency band the limit remains constant at 55 dB microvolts/m (560 microvolts/m).
6.6.2.2. On the ESA representative of its type, the measured value, expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m) shall be at least 2,0 dB (20 %) below the reference limits.
6.7. Specifications concerning immunity of ESAs to electromagnetic radiation6.7.1. Method(s) of testingThe immunity to electromagnetic radiation of the ESA representative of its type shall be tested by the method(s) chosen from those described in Annex XI.
6.7.2. ESA immunity reference limits6.7.2.1. If tests are made using the methods described in Annex XI, the immunity test reference levels shall be 48 volts/m for the 150 mm stripline testing method, 12 volts/m for the 800 mm stripline testing method, 60 volts/m for the transverse electromagnetic mode (TEM) cell testing method, 48 mA for the bulk current injection (BCI) testing method and 24 volts/m for the free field testing method.
6.7.2.2. On the ESA representative of its type at a field strength or current expressed in appropriate linear units 25 % above the reference limit, the ESA shall not exhibit any malfunction which would cause any degradation of performance which could cause confusion to other road users or any degradation in the driver’s direct control of a vehicle fitted with the system which could be observed by the driver or other road user.
7. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION7.1. Conformity of production with regard to the electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle or component of separate technical unit shall be checked on the basis of the data contained in the EC type-approval certificate(s) set out in Annex IV and/or Annex V as appropriate.
7.2. If the conformity of a vehicle, component or STU taken from the series is being verified, production shall be deemed to conform to the requirements of this Directive in relation to broadband radiated emissions and narrowband radiated emissions if the levels measured do not exceed by more than 2 dB, (25 %) the reference limits prescribed in points 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2, 6.3.2.1 and 6.3.2.2 (as appropriate).
7.3. If the conformity of a vehicle, component or STU taken from the series is being verified, production shall be deemed to conform to the requirements of this Directive in relation to immunity to electromagnetic radiation if the vehicle, component or STU does not exhibit any degradation relating to the direct control of the vehicle which could be observed by the driver or other road user when the vehicle, component or STU is in the state defined in point 4 of Annex VIII and subjected to a field strength, expressed in volts/m, up to 80 % of the reference limits prescribed in point 6.4.2.1 of this Annex.
8. EXCEPTIONS8.1. Where a vehicle or electrical/electronic system or ESA does not include an electronic oscillator with an operating frequency greater than 9 kHz, it shall be deemed to comply with point 6.3.2 or 6.6.2 of this Annex and with Annexes VII and X.
8.2. Vehicles which do not have electrical/electronic systems or ESAs involved in the direct control of the vehicle need not be tested for immunity and shall be deemed to comply with point 6.4 of this Annex and with Annex VIII.
8.3. ESAs whose functions are not involved in the direct control of the vehicle need not be tested for immunity and shall be deemed to comply with point 6.7 of this Annex and with Annex XI.
8.4. Electrostatic dischargeFor vehicles fitted with tyres, the vehicle body/chassis can be considered to be an electrically isolated structure. Significant electrostatic forces in relation to the vehicle’s external environment only occur at the moment of occupant entry into or exit from the vehicle. As the vehicle is stationary at these moments, no type-approval test for electrostatic discharge is deemed necessary.
8.5. Conducted transientsSince during normal driving, no external electrical connections are made to vehicles, no conducted transients are generated in relation to the external environment. The responsibility of ensuring that equipment can tolerate the conducted transients within a vehicle, for example due to load switching and interaction between systems, lies with the manufacturer. No type-approval test for conducted transients is deemed necessary.

(1) If applicable.
(2) For example: radio telephone and citizens’ band radio.

Appendix 1Vehicle broadband reference limitsAntenna-vehicle separation: 10 m
Band width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 34
L = 34 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 45
Quasi-peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
45
40
34
180
100
50
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.2.2.1 of Annex I
Appendix 2Vehicle broadband reference limitsAntenna-vehicle separation: 3 m
Band width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 44
L = 44 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 55
Quasi-peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
55
50
44
562
316
160
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.2.2.2 of Annex I
Appendix 3Vehicle narrowband reference limitsAntenna-vehicle separation: 10 m
Band width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 24
L = 24 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 35
Peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Examples of spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
35
30
24
56
31
16
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.3.2.1 of Annex I
Appendix 4Vehicle narrowband reference limitsAntenna-vehicle separation: 3 m
Band width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 34
L = 34 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 45
Peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Example of spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
45
40
34
180
100
50
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.3.2.2 of Annex I
Appendix 5Broadband reference limits of electrical/electronic sub-assemblyBand width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 6 4 – 25,13 log (f/30)
L = 54 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 65
Quasi-peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
65
60
54
1 800
1 000
500
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.5.2.1 of Annex I
Appendix 6Narrowband reference limits of electrical/electronic sub-assemblyBand width
Limit L [dB(µV/m)], at frequency f (MHz)
30 to 75 MHz
75 to 400 MHz
400 to 1 000 MHz
120 kHz
L = 54 – 25,13 log (f/30)
L = 44 + 15,13 log (f/75)
L = 55
Peak
Linear, when plotted dB vs log frequency
Band width 120 kHz
dBµV/m
µV/m
Examples of spot frequencies
LINEAR
LOG
55
50
44
562
316
160
45
65
90
120
150
190
230
280
380
450
600
750
900
30
75
400
1 000
Frequency — megahertz — logarithmic
See point 6.6.2.1 of Annex I
Appendix 7Example of the EC type-approval markThe ESA bearing the above EC type-approval mark is a device which has been approved in Germany (e1) under the base approval number 0148. The first two digits (02) indicate that the device conforms with the requirements of Directive 75/322/EEC, as amended by Directive 2000/2/EC.
The figures used are only indicative.

0.   General

ANNEX IIInformation document No … pursuant to Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC relating to EC type-approval of an agricultural or forestry tractor concerning electromagnetic compatibility (Directive 2009/64/EC)
The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format.Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail. Details must be provided of the working of any systems, comportents or technical units with electronic controls.0.1. Make(s) (trade mark registered by the manufacturer):
0.2. Type (specify any variants and versions):
Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle:
0.3.1. Manufacturer’s plate (location and method of affixing):
0.4. Category of vehicle:
0.5. Name and address of manufacturer:
0.8. Name(s) and address(es) of assembly plant(s):
1. General construction characteristics of the vehiclePhotograph(s) and/or drawings of a representative vehicle:
1.2. Position and arrangement of the engine:
3. Engine3.1.2. Type and commercial description of the parent engine (as marked on the engine or other means of identification):
3.1.4. Name and address of manufacturer:
Operating principle:

— | spark ignition/compression ignition(1)
— | direct injection/injection(1)
— | four stroke/two stroke(1)3.2.1.6. Number and arrangement of cylinders:
3.2.1.9. Maximum torque … min–1
Fuel feed:
3.2.3.1. Feed pump:
Pressure(2)or characteristic diagram … kPa
Injection system:
3.2.4.2.1. Description of system:
3.2.5. Electronic control functions:
Description of system:
Electrical system:
3.11.1. Nominal voltage …, positive/negative earth(1)
Generator:
3.11.2.1. Type
3.11.2.2. Rased power VA
4. TransmissionType (mechanical hydraulic, electric, etc):
4.2.1. Brief description of the electrical/electronic components (if any):
6. Suspension (where appropriate)6.2.2. Brief description of the electrical/electronic components (if any):
7. Steerling7.2.2.1. Brief description of the electrical/electronic components (if any):
7.2.6. Range and method of adjustment, if any, of the steering control:
8. Brakes8.5. For tractors with anti-lock brake systems, description of system operation (including any electronic parts), electric block diagram hydraulic or pneumatic circuit plan:
9. Field of vision, glaxing, windscreen wipers and rear-view mirrorsGlaxing:
9.2.3.4. Brief description of the electrical/electronic components (if fitted) of the side-window operating mechanism:
9.3. Windscreen wipers:
Technical description:
Rear-view mince(s) (position of each):
9.4.6. Brief description of the electical/electronic components (if fitted) of the adjusting system:
Defrosting and demisting:
9.5.1. Technical description:
10. Roll-over protective structures, weather protection, seats, load platformsSeats and footrests:
10.3.1.4. Position and main characteristics:
10.3.1.5. Adjustment system:
10.3.1.6. Displacement and locking system:
Suppression of radio interference:
10.5.1. Description and drawings/photographs of the shapes and constituent materials of the part of the body forming the engine compartment and adjacent parts of the passenger compartment:
10.5.2. Drawings or photographs of the position of the metal components housed in the engine compartment (e.g. heating appliances, spare wheel, air filter, steering mechanism, etc.):
10.5.3. Table and drawing of radio interference control equipment:
10.5.4. Particulars of the nominal value of the direct current resistances, and in the case of resistive ignition cables, of their nominal resistance per metre:
11. Lighting and light-signalling devices11.3. Brief description of electrical/electronic components other than lamps (if any):
12. Miscellaneous12.8. Description of the on-board electronics used for the operation and control of the vehicle-mounted or towed implements:

(1) Delete as appropriate.
(2) Indicate tolerance.

Appendix 1Description of vehicle chosen to represent the type
Body style:
Left or right-hand drive:
Wheelbase:
Component options:
Appendix 2Relevant test report(s) supplied by the manufacturer or approved/recognised laboratories for the purpose of drawing up the EC type-approval certificate.

0.   GENERAL

ANNEX IIIInformation document No … relating to EC type-approval of an electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) with respect to electromagnetic compatibility (Directive 2009/64/EC)
The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and must include a list of contents. Any drawings must be supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show sufficient detail.If the systems, component or separate technical units (stu) have electronic controls, information concerning their performance must be supplied.0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer):
0.2. Type and general commercial description(s):
0.5. Name and address of manufacturer:
0.7. In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark:
0.8. Address(es) of assembly plant(s):
1. THIS ESA SHALL BE APPROVED AS A COMPONENT/STU (1) 2. ANY RESTRICTIONS OF USE AND CONDITIONS FOR FITTING:
(1) Delete where not applicable.
Appendix 1Description of the ESA chosen to represent the type:
Appendix 2Relevant test report(s) supplied by the manufacturer or approved/recognised laboratories for the purpose of drawing up the EC type-approval certificate.

SECTION I

ANNEX IVMODEL(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
‘VEHICLE’

Stamp of administration
Communication concerning the:

— | EC type-approval(1)
— | extension of EC type-approval(1)
— | refusal of EC type-approval(1)
— | withdrawal of EC type-approval(1)of a type of vehicle with regard to Directive 2009/64/EC.
EC type-approval number:
Reason for extension:
0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer):
0.2. Type and general commercial description(s):
Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle/component/separate technical unit(1)(2):
0.3.1. Location of that marking:
0.4. Vehicle:
0.5. Name and address of manufacturer:
0.8. Address(es) of assembly plant(s):
SECTION II1. Additional information (where applicable): See Appendix
2. Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests:
3. Date of test report:
4. Number of test report:
5. Remarks (if any): See Appendix
6. Place:
7. Date:
8. Signature:
9. The index to the information package lodged with the approval authority, which may be obtained on request is attached

(1) Delete where not applicable.
(2) If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this type-approval certificate such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol: ‘?’ (for example ABC??123??).

SECTION I

ANNEX VMODEL(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
‘ESA’

Stamp of administration
Communication concerning the:

— | EC type-approval(1)
— | extension of EC type-approval(1)
— | refusal of EC type-approval(1)
— | withdrawal of EC type-approval(1)of a type of component/separate technical unit(1)with regard to Directive 2009/64/EC.
EC type-approval number:
Reason for extension:
0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer):
0.2. Type and general commercial description(s):
Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle/component/separate technical unit(1)(2):
0.3.1. Location of that marking:
0.4. Vehicle:
0.5. Name and address of manufacturer:
0.7. In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval-mark:
0.8. Address(es) of assembly plant(s):
SECTION II1. Additional information (where applicable): See Appendix
2. Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests:
3. Date of test report:
4. Number of test report:
5. Remarks (if any): See Appendix
6. Place:
7. Date:
8. Signature:
9. The index to the information package lodged with the approval authority, which may be obtained on request is attached.

(1) Delete where not applicable.
(2) If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this type-approval certificate such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol: ‘?’ (for example ABC??123??).

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX VIMETHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED BROADBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM VEHICLES1.1. The test method described in this Annex shall only be applied to vehicles.
1.2. Measuring apparatusThe measuring equipment shall comply with the requirements of publication No 16-1 (93) of the International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
A quasi-peak detector shall be used for the measurement of broadband electromagnetic emissions in this Annex, or if a peak detector is used an appropriate correction factor shall be used depending on the spark pulse rate.
1.3. Test methodThis test is intended to measure the broadband electromagnetic emissions generated by spark-ignition systems and by electric motors (electric traction motors, engines for heating or de-icing systems, fuel pumps, water pumps, etc.) permanently fitted to the vehicle.
Two alternative reference antenna distances are permissible: 10 or 3 m from the vehicle. In either case the requirements of point 3 shall be complied with.
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSThe results of measurements shall be expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvol/m) for 120 kHz band width. If the actual band width B (expressed in kHz) of the measuring apparatus differs from 120 kHz, the readings taken in microvolts/m shall be converted to 120 kHz band width through multiplication by a factor 120/B.
3. MEASURING LOCATION3.1. The test site shall be a level, clear area free from electromagnetic reflecting surfaces within a circle of minimum radius 30 m measured from a point midway between the vehicle and the antenna (see Figure 1 in Appendix 1).
3.2. The measuring set, test hut, or vehicle in which the measurement set is located may be within the test site, but only in the permitted region shown in Figure 1 in Appendix 1.
Other measuring antennae are allowed within the test area, at a minimum distance of 10 m both from receiving antenna and the vehicle under test, provided that it can be shown that the test results will not be affected.
3.3. Enclosed test facilities may be used if correlation can be shown between the enclosed test facility and an outdoor site. Enclosed test facilities do not need to meet the dimensional requirements of Figure 1 in Appendix 1 other than the distance from the antenna to the vehicle and the height of the antenna. Neither do they need to have ambient emissions checked before or after the test as indicated in point 3.4.
3.4. AmbientTo ensure that there is no extraneous noise or signal of a magnitude sufficient to affect materially the measurement, measurements shall be taken before and after the main test. If the vehicle is present when ambient measurements are taken, it will be necessary to ensure that any emissions from the vehicle do not affect significantly the ambient measurements, for example by removing the vehicle from the test area, removing the ignition key, or disconnecting the battery. In both of the measurements, the extraneous noise or signal shall be at least 10 dB below the limits of interference given in point 6.2.2.1 or 6.2.2.2 (as appropriate) of Annex I, except for intentional narrowband ambient transmissions.
4. VEHICLE STATE DURING TESTS4.1. EngineThe engine shall be running at its normal operating temperature and the transmission shall be in neutral. If for practical reasons this cannot be achieved, alternative arrangements mutually agreed between the manufacturer and the test authorities may be made.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the speed setting mechanism does not influence electromagnetic radiations. During each measurement, the engine shall be operated as follows:

Engine type | Method of measurements
Quasi peak | Peak
Spark ignition | Engine speed | Engine speed
One cylinder | 2 500 rpm ± 10 % | 2 500 rpm ± 10 %
More than one cylinder | 1 500 rpm ± 10 % | 1 500 rpm ± 10 %4.2. Testing shall not be conducted while rain or other precipitation is falling on the vehicle or within 10 minutes after such precipitation has stopped.
5. ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION5.1. Antenna typeAny antenna may be used provided it can be normalised to the reference antenna. The method described in CISPR publication No 12, Edition 3, Appendix A, may be used to calibrate the antenna.
5.2. Height and distance of measurement5.2.1. Height5.2.1.1. 10 m testThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 3,00 ± 0,05 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.1.2. 3 m testThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 1,80 ± 0,05 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.1.3. No part of any antenna’s receiving elements shall be closer than 0,25 m to the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.2. Distance of measurement5.2.2.1. 10 m testThe horizontal distance from the tip or other appropriate point of the antenna defined during the normalisation procedure described in point 5.1 to the outer body surface of the vehicle shall be 10,0 ± 0,2 m.
5.2.2.2. 3 m testThe horizontal distance from the tip or other appropriate point of the antenna defined during the normalisation procedure described in point 5.1 to the outer body surface of the vehicle shall be 3,00 ± 0,05 m.
5.2.2.3. If the test is carried out in a facility enclosed for radio frequency electromagnetic screening purposes, the antenna’s receiving elements shall be no closer than 1,0 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the enclosed facility. There must be no absorbent material between the receiving antenna and vehicle under test.
5.3. Antenna location relative to vehicleThe antenna shall be located successively on the left and right-hand sides of the vehicle, with the antenna parallel to the plane of longitudinal symmetry of the vehicle, in line with the engine mid-point (see Figure 1 in Appendix 1) and in line with the vehicle mid-point defined as the point on the principal axis of the vehicle midway between the centres of the front and rear axles of the vehicle.
5.4. Antenna positionAt each of the measuring points, readings shall be taken both with the antenna in a horizontal and in a vertical polarisation (see Figure 2 in Appendix 1).
5.5. ReadingsThe maximum of the four readings taken in accordance with points 5.3 and 5.4 at each spot frequency shall be taken as the characteristic reading at the frequency at which the measurements were made.
6. FREQUENCIES6.1. MeasurementsLas mediciones se efectuarán en la gama de frecuencias que va desde los 30 hasta los 1 000 MHz. A fin de comprobar que se cumplen los requisitos del presente anexo, la autoridad encargada del ensayo efectuará ensayos en hasta 13 frecuencias de dicha gama, por ejemplo 45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190, 230, 280, 380, 450, 600, 750 y 900 MHz. En caso de que se rebase el límite durante el ensayo, se deberá comprobar si ello se debe al vehículo y no a la radiación ambiental.
6.1.1. The limits apply throughout the frequency range 30 to 1 000 MHz.
6.1.2. Measurements can be performed with either quasi-peak or peak detectors. The limits given in points 6.2 and 6.5 of Annex I are for quasi-peak. If peak is used, add 38 dB for 1 MHz band width or subtract 22 dB for 1 kHz band width.
6.2. Tolerances
Spot frequency(MHz) | Tolerance(MHz)
45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190 and 230 | ±5
280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 | ±20The tolerances apply to frequencies quoted and are intended to avoid interference from transmissions operating on or near the nominal spot frequencies during the time of measurement.

Figure 1

Appendix 1TRACTOR TEST AREA(Level area free from reflecting electromagnetic surfaces)
30 m minimum radius
Centre of 30 m clear area midway between antenna and vehicle
10 m (3 m)
Antenna
15 m minimum radius
Permitted region for measuring set (or hut or vehicle)
Figure 2POSITION OF ANTENNA RELATIVE TO TRACTOR10,00 ± 0,2 m
(3,00 ± 0,05 m)
3,00 ± 0,05 m
(1,80 ± 0,05 m)
Elevation
Dipole antenna in position to measure vertical component of radiation
10,00 ± 0,2 m
(3,00 ± 0,05 m)
Plan
Dipole antenna in position to measure horizontal component of radiation*

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX VIIMETHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED NARROWBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM VEHICLES1.1. The test method described in this Annex shall only be applied to vehicles.
1.2. Measuring apparatusThe measuring equipment shall comply with the requirements of publication No 16-1 (93) of the International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
An average detector or a peak detector shall be used for the measurement of radiated narrowband electromagnetic emissions in this Annex.
1.3. Test method1.3.1. This test is intended to measure narrowband electromagnetic emissions such as might emanate from a microprocessor-based system or other narrowband source.
1.3.2. As an initial step the levels of emissions in the FM frequency band (88 to 108 MHz) shall be measured at the vehicle broadcast radio antenna with equipment as specified in point 1.2. If the level specified in point 6.3.2.4 of Annex I is not exceeded, then the vehicle shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of this Annex in respect of that frequency band and the full test shall not be carried out.
1.3.3. In the full test procedure two alternative antenna distances are permissible: 10 or 3 m from the vehicle. In either case the requirements of point 3 of this Annex shall be complied with.
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSThe results of measurements shall be expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m).
3. MEASURING LOCATION3.1. The test site shall be a level, clear area free from electromagnetic reflecting surfaces within a circle of minimum radius 30 m measured from a point midway between the vehicle and the antenna (see Figure 1 in Appendix 1 of Annex VI).
3.2. The measuring set, test hut, or vehicle in which the measurement set is located may be within the test site, but only in the permitted region shown in Figure 1 in Appendix 1 of Annex VI.
Other measuring antennae are allowed within the test area, at a minimum distance of 10 m both from receiving antenna and the vehicle under test, provided that it can be shown that the test results will not be affected.
3.3. Enclosed test facilities may be used if correlation can be shown between the enclosed test facility and an outdoor site. Enclosed test facilities do not need to meet the dimensional requirements of Figure 1 in Appendix 1 of Annex VI other than the distance from the antenna to the vehicle and the height of the antenna. Neither do they need to have ambient emissions checked before or after the test as indicated in point 3.4 of this Annex.
3.4. AmbientTo ensure that there is no extraneous noise or signal of a magnitude sufficient to affect materially the measurement, ambient measurements shall be taken before and after the main test. It will be necessary to ensure that any emissions from the vehicle do not affect significantly the ambient measurements, for example by removing the vehicle from the test area, removing the ignition key, or disconnecting the battery(ies). In both of the measurements, the extraneous noise or signal shall be at least 10 dB below the limits of interference given in point 6.3.2.1 or 6.3.2.2 (as appropriate) of Annex I, except for intentional narrowband ambient transmissions.
4. VEHICLE STATE DURING TESTS4.1. The vehicle’s electronic systems shall all be in normal operating mode with the vehicle stationary.
4.2. The ignition shall be switched on. The engine shall not be operating.
4.3. Measurements shall not be made while rain or other precipitation is falling on the vehicle or within 10 minutes after such precipitation has stopped.
5. ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION5.1. Antenna typeAny antenna may be used provided that it can be normalised to the reference antenna. The method described in the CISPR publication No 12, Edition 3, Appendix A, may be used to calibrate the antenna.
5.2. Height and distance of measurement5.2.1. Height5.2.1.1. 10 m testThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 3,00 ± 0,05 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.1.2. 3 m testThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 1,80 ± 0,05 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.1.3. No part of any antenna’s receiving elements shall be closer than 0,25 m to the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.2. Distance of measurement5.2.2.1. 10 m testThe horizontal distance from the tip or other appropriate point of the antenna defined during the normalisation procedure described in point 5.1 to the outer body surface of the vehicle shall be 10,0 ± 0,2 m.
5.2.2.2. 3 m testThe horizontal distance from the tip or other appropriate point of the antenna defined during the normalisation procedure described in point 5.1 to the outer body surface of the vehicle shall be 3,00 ± 0,05 m.
5.2.2.3. If the test is carried out in a facility enclosed for radio frequency electromagnetic screening purposes, the antenna’s receiving elements shall be no closer than 1,0 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the enclosed facility. There must be no absorbent material between the receiving antenna and vehicle under test.
5.3. Antenna location relative to vehicleThe antenna shall be located successively on the left and right-hand sides of the vehicle with the antenna parallel to the plane of longitudinal symmetry of the vehicle and in line with the engine mid-point (see Figure 2 in Appendix 1 of Annex VI).
5.4. Antenna positionAt each of the measuring points, readings shall be taken both with the antenna in a horizontal and in a vertical polarisation (see Figure 2 in Appendix 1 of Annex VI).
5.5. ReadingsThe maximum of the four readings taken in accordance with points 5.3 and 5.4 at each spot frequency shall be taken as the characteristic reading at the frequency at which the measurements are made.
6. FREQUENCIES6.1. MeasurementsMeasurements shall be made throughout the 30 to 1 000 MHz frequency range. This range shall be divided into 13 bands. In each band one spot frequency may be tested to demonstrate that the required limits are satisfied. To confirm that the vehicle meets the requirements of this Annex, the testing authority shall test at one such point in each of the following 13 frequency bands:
30 to 50, 50 to 75, 75 to 100, 100 to 130, 130 to 165, 165 to 200, 200 to 250, 250 to 320, 320 to 400, 400 to 520, 520 to 660, 660 to 820, 820 to 1 000 MHz.
In the event that the limit is exceeded during the test, investigations shall be made to ensure that this is due to the vehicle and not to background radiation.

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX VIIIMETHOD OF TESTING FOR IMMUNITY OF VEHICLES TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION1.1. The test method described in this Annex shall only be applied to vehicles.
1.2. Test methodThis test is intended to demonstrate the immunity to degradation in the direct control of the vehicle. The vehicle shall be subject to electromagnetic fields as described in this Annex. The vehicle shall be monitored during the tests.
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSFor the test described in this Annex, field strengths shall be expressed in volts/m.
3. MEASURING LOCATIONThe test facility shall be capable of generating the field strengths over the frequency ranges defined in this Annex. The test facility shall comply with (national) legal requirements regarding the emission of electromagnetic signals.
Care shall be taken so that the control and monitoring equipment shall not be affected by radiated fields in such a way as to invalidate the tests.
4. VEHICLE STATE DURING TESTSThe vehicle shall be in an unladen condition except for necessary test equipment.
4.1.1. The engine shall turn the driving wheels normally at a constant speed corresponding to three quarters of the maximum speed of the vehicle if there is no technical reason for the manufacturer to prefer another speed. The vehicle’s engine must be loaded with an appropriate torque. If need be, the transmission shafts may be disengaged (for example, in the case of vehicles with more than two axles), provided they do not drive a component-emitting interference.
4.1.2. Headlamps shall be on dipped beam.
4.1.3. Left or right-direction indicator shall be operating.
4.1.4. All other systems which affect the driver’s control of the vehicle shall be (on) as in normal operation of the vehicle.
4.1.5. The vehicle shall not be electrically connected to the test area and no connections shall be made to the vehicle from any equipment, except as required by point 4.1.1 or 4.2. Tyre contact with the test area floor shall not be considered to be an electrical connection.
4.2. If there are vehicle electrical/electronic systems which form an integral part of the direct control of the vehicle, which will not operate under the conditions described in point 4.1, it will be permissible for the manufacturer to provide a report or additional evidence to the testing authority that the vehicle electrical/electronic system meets the requirements of this Directive. Such evidence shall be retained in the type-approval documentation.
4.3. Only non-perturbing equipment shall be used while monitoring the vehicle. The vehicle exterior and the passenger compartment shall be monitored to determine whether the requirements of this Annex are met (for example by using (a) video camera(s)).
4.4. The vehicle shall normally face a fixed antenna. However, where the electronic control units and the associated wiring harness are predominantly in the rear of the vehicle, the test shall normally be carried out with the vehicle facing away from the antenna. In the case of long vehicles (namely excluding cars and light vans), which have electronic control units and associated wiring harness predominantly towards the middle of the vehicle, a reference point (see point 5.4) may be established based on either the right-side surface or the left-side surface of the vehicle. This reference point shall be at the midpoint of the vehicle’s length or at one point along the side of the vehicle chosen by the manufacturer in conjunction with the competent authority after considering the distribution of electronic systems and the layout of any wiring harness.
Such testing may only take place if the physical construction of the chamber permits. The antenna location must be noted in the test report.
5. FIELD GENERATING DEVICE TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION5.1. Field generating device type5.1.1. The field generating device type(s) shall be chosen such that the desired field strength is achieved at the reference point (see point 5.4) at the appropriate frequencies.
5.1.2. The field generating device(s) may be an antenna or antennas or a transmission line system (TLS).
5.1.3. The construction and orientation of any field generating device shall be such that the generated field is polarised: from 20 to 1 000 MHz horizontally or vertically.
5.2. Height and distance of measurement5.2.1. Height5.2.1.1. The phase centre of any antenna shall not be less than 1,5 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests or not less than 2,0 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests if the vehicle roof exceeds 3 m in height.
5.2.1.2. No part of any antenna’s radiating elements shall be closer than 0,25 m to the plane on which the vehicle rests.
5.2.2. Distance of measurement5.2.2.1. In-service conditions may be best approximated by placing the field generating device as far from the vehicle as practical. This distance will typically lie within the range 1 to 5 m.
5.2.2.2. If the test is carried out in an enclosed facility, the field generating device’s radiating elements shall be no closer than 1,0 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the enclosed facility. There shall be no absorbent material between the transmitting antenna and the vehicle under test.
5.3. Antenna location relative to vehicle5.3.1. The field generating device’s radiating elements shall not be closer than 0,5 m to the outer body surface of the vehicle.
5.3.2. The field generating device shall be positioned on the vehicle’s centre line (plane of longitudinal symmetry).
5.3.3. No part of a TLS, with the exception of the plane on which the vehicle rests, shall be closer than 0,5 m to any part of the vehicle.
5.3.4. Any field generating device which is placed over the vehicle shall extend centrally over at least 75 % of the length of the vehicle.
5.4. Reference pointFor the purposes of this Annex the reference point is the point at which the field strength shall be established and shall be defined as follows:
5.4.1.1. at least 2 m horizontally from the antenna phase centre or at least 1 m vertically from the radiating elements of a TLS,
5.4.1.2. on the vehicle’s centre line (plane of longitudinal symmetry),
5.4.1.3. at a height of 1,0 ± 0,05 m above the plane on which the vehicle rests or 2,0 ± 0,05 m if the minimum height of the roof of any vehicle in the model range exceeds 3,0 m,
5.4.1.4. for front illumination, either:

— | 1,0 ± 0,2 m inside the vehicle, measured from the point of intersection of the windscreen and bonnet (point C in Appendix 1), or
— | 0,2 ± 0,2 m from the centre line of the front axle of the tractor, measured towards the centre of the tractor (point D in Appendix 2),whichever results in a reference point closer to the antenna,
5.4.1.5. for rear illumination, either:

— | 1,0 ± 0,2 m inside the vehicle, measured from the point of intersection of the windscreen and bonnet (point C in Appendix 1), or
— | 0,2 ± 0,2 m from the centre line of the rear axle of the tractor, measured towards the centre of the tractor (point D in Appendix 2),whichever results in a reference point closer to the antenna.
5.5. If it is decided to radiate the rear of the vehicle, the reference point shall be established as in point 5.4. The vehicle shall then be installed facing away from the antenna and positioned as if it had been horizontally rotated 180° around its centre point, namely in such a way that the distance from the antenna to the nearest part of the outer body of the vehicle remains the same. This is illustrated in Appendix 3.
6. TEST REQUIREMENTS6.1. Frequency range, dwell times, polarisationThe vehicle shall be exposed to electromagnetic radiation in the 20 to 1 000 MHz frequency range.
6.1.1. To confirm that the vehicle meets the requirements of this Annex, the vehicle shall be tested at up to 14 spot frequencies in the range, for example:
27, 45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190, 230, 280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz.
The response time of the equipment under test shall be considered and the dwell time shall be sufficient to allow the equipment under test to react under normal conditions. In any case, it shall not be less than two seconds.
6.1.2. One mode of polarisation shall be used at each frequency — see point 5.1.3.
6.1.3. All other test parameters shall be as defined in this Annex.
6.1.4. If a vehicle fails the test defined in point 6.1.1, it must be verified as having failed under the relevant test conditions and not as a result of the generation of uncontrolled fields.
7. GENERATION OF REQUIRED FIELD STRENGTH7.1. Test methodology7.1.1. The ‘substitution method’ shall be used to establish the test field conditions.
7.1.2. Calibration phaseAt each test frequency, a level of power shall be fed into the field generating device to produce the required field strength at the reference point (as defined in point 5) in the test area with the vehicle absent, the level of forward power, or another parameter directly related to the forward power required to define the field, shall be measured and the results recorded. Test frequencies shall lie in the range 20 to 1 000 MHz. Calibration shall be made, starting at 20, in steps not greater than two per cent of the previous frequency finishing at 1 000 MHz. These results shall be used for type-approval tests unless changes occur in the facilities or equipment which necessitate this procedure being repeated.
7.1.3. Test phaseThe vehicle shall then be introduced into the test facility and positioned in accordance with the requirements of point 5. The required forward power defined in point 7.1.2 at each frequency as defined in point 6.1.1 shall then be applied to the field generating device.
7.1.4. Whatever parameter was chosen in point 7.1.2 to define the field, the same parameter shall be used to establish the field strength during the test.
7.1.5. The field generating equipment and its layout employed during the test shall be to the same specification as that used during the operations performed in point 7.1.2.
7.1.6. Field strength measuring deviceA suitable compact field strength measuring device shall be used to determine the field strength during the calibration phase of the substitution method.
7.1.7. During the calibration phase of the substitution method, the phase centre of the field strength measuring device shall be positioned at the reference point.
7.1.8. If a calibrated receiving antenna is used as the field strength measuring device, readings shall be obtained in three mutually orthogonal directions and the isotropic equivalent value of the readings shall be taken as the field strength.
7.1.9. To take account of different vehicle geometries, a number of antennae positions or reference points may need to be established for a given test facility.
7.2. Field strength contour7.2.1. During the calibration phase of the substitution method (prior to a vehicle being introduced into the test area), the field strength in at least 80 % of the calibration steps shall not be less than 50 % of the nominal field strength, at the following locations:

(a) | for all field generating devices, 0,5 ± 0,05 m either side of the reference point on a line passing through the reference point and at the same height as the reference point, and perpendicular to the vehicle plane of longitudinal symmetry;
(b) | in the case of a TLS, 1,50 ± 0,05 m on a line passing through the reference point at the same height as the reference point and along the line of longitudinal symmetry.7.3. Chamber resonanceNotwithstanding the condition set out in point 7.2.1, tests shall not be performed at chamber resonant frequencies.
7.4. Characteristics of the test signal to be generated7.4.1. Maximum envelope excursionThe maximum envelope excursion of the test signal shall equal the maximum envelope excursion of an unmodulated sine wave whose rms value in volts/m is defined in point 6.4.2 of Annex I (see Appendix 3 of this Annex).
7.4.2. Test signal wave formThe test signal shall be a radio frequency sine wave, amplitude modulated by a 1 kHz sine wave at a modulation depth m of 0,8 ± 0,04.
7.4.3. Modulation depthThe modulation depth m is defined as:

m | = | (maximum envelope excursion – minimum envelope excursion)/(maximum envelope excursion + minimum envelope excursion).

Appendix 11,0 ± 0,2 m
The reference point lies in one of these planes (cf. 5.4.1.4)
Point C
Intersection of windscreen and bonnet or point where these items will be positioned on a complete vehicle
Point D
0,2 ± 0,2 m
Appendix 2The reference point lies in one of these planes (cf. 5.4.1.5)
0,20 ± 0,2 m
Intersection of windscreen and bonnet or point where these items will be positioned on a complete tractor:
Point C
Point D
Rear axle
1,0 + 0,2 m
Appendix 3Characteristics of test signal to be generatedUnmodulated sine wave whose rms value is as defined in point 6.4.2 of Annex I
Test signal 80 %, sine wave, amplitude modulated: maximum envelope excursion equal to maximum envelope excursion of an unmodulated sine wave whose rms value is as defined in point 6.4.2 of Annex I

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX IXMETHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED BROADBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES1.1. The test method described in this Annex may be applied to ESAs which may be subsequently fitted to vehicles which comply with Annex VI.
1.2. Measuring apparatusThe measuring equipment shall comply with the requirements of publication No 16-1 (93) of the International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
A quasi-peak detector shall be used for the measurement of broadband electromagnetic emissions in this Annex, or if a peak detector is used an appropriate correction factor shall be used depending on the interference pulse rate.
1.3. Test methodThis test is intended to measure broadband electromagnetic emissions from ESAs.
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSThe results of measurements shall be expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m), for 120 kHz band width. If the actual band width B (expressed in kHz) of the measuring apparatus differs from 120 kHz, the readings taken in microvolts/m shall be converted to 120 kHz band width through multiplication by a factor 120/B.
3. MEASURING LOCATION3.1. The test site shall comply with the requirements of CISPR publication No 16-1 (93) (see Appendix 1).
3.2. The measuring set, test hut or vehicle in which the measurement set is located shall be outside the boundary shown in Appendix 1.
3.3. Enclosed test facilities may be used if correlation can be shown between the enclosed test facility and an approved outdoor site. Enclosed test facilities do not need to meet the dimensional requirements of Appendix 1 other than the distance from the antenna to the ESA under test and the height of the antenna (see Figures 1 and 2 in Appendix 2).
3.4. AmbientTo ensure that there is no extraneous noise or signal of a magnitude sufficient to affect materially the measurement, measurements shall be taken before and after the main test. In both of these measurements, the extraneous noise or signal shall be at least 10 dB below the limits of interference given in point 6.5.2.1 of Annex I, except for intentional narrowband ambient transmissions.
4. ESA STATE DURING TESTS4.1. The ESA under test shall be in normal operation mode.
4.2. Measurements shall not be made while rain or other precipitation is falling on the ESA under test or within 10 minutes after such rain or other precipitation has stopped.
4.3. Test arrangements4.3.1. The ESA under test and its wiring harnesses shall be supported 50 ± 5 mm above a wooden or equivalent non-conducting table. However, if any part of the ESA under test is intended to be electrically bonded to a vehicle’s metal bodywork, that part shall be placed on a ground plane and shall be electrically bonded to the ground plane. The ground plane shall be a metallic sheet with a minimum thickness of 0,5 mm. The minimum size of the ground plane depends on the size of the ESA under test but shall allow for the distribution of the ESA’s wiring harness and components. The ground plane shall be connected to the protective conductor of the earthing system. The ground plane shall be situated at a height of 1,0 ± 0,1 m above the test facility floor and shall be parallel to it.
4.3.2. The ESA under test shall be arranged and connected according to its requirements. The power supply harness shall be positioned along, and within 100 mm of, the edge of the ground plane/table closest to the antenna.
4.3.3. The ESA under test shall be connected to the grounding system according to the manufacturer’s installation specification, no additional grounding connections shall be permitted.
4.3.4. The minimum distance between the ESA under test and all other conductive structures, such as walls of a shielded area (with the exception of the ground plane/table underneath the test object) must be 1,0 m.
4.4. Power shall be applied to the ESA under test via a 5 µH/50 Ω artificial network (AN) which shall be electrically bonded to the ground plane. The electrical supply voltage shall be maintained to ±10 % of its nominal system operating voltage. Any ripple voltage shall be less than 1,5 % of the nominal system operating voltage measured at the AN monitoring port.
4.5. If the ESA under test consists of more than one unit, the interconnecting cables shall ideally be the wiring harness as intended for use in the vehicle. If these are not available, the length between the electronic control unit and the AN shall be 1 500 ± 75 mm.
All cables in the loom shall be terminated as realistically as possible and preferably with real loads and actuators.
If extraneous equipment is required for the correct operation of the ESA under test, compensation shall be made for the contribution it makes to the emissions measured.
5. ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION5.1. Antenna typeAny linearly polarised antenna may be used provided it can be normalised to the reference antenna.
5.2. Height and distance of measurement5.2.1. HeightThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 150 ± 10 mm above ground plane.
5.2.2. Distance of measurementThe horizontal distance from the phase centre, or tip of the antenna as appropriate, to the edge of the ground plane shall be 1,00 ± 0,05 m. No part of the antenna shall be closer than 0,5 m to the ground plane.
The antenna shall be placed parallel to a plane which is perpendicular to the ground plane and coincident with the edge of the ground plane along which the principal portion of the harness runs.
5.2.3. If the test is carried out in a facility enclosed for radio frequency electromagnetic screening purposes, the antenna’s receiving elements shall be no closer than 0,5 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the enclosed facility. There must be no absorbent material between the receiving antenna and the ESA under test.
5.3. Antenna orientation and polarisationAt the measuring point, readings shall be taken both with the antenna in a vertical and in a horizontal polarisation.
5.4. ReadingsThe maximum of the two readings taken (in accordance with point 5.3) at each spot frequency shall be taken as the characteristic reading at the frequency at which the measurements were made.
6. FREQUENCIES6.1. MeasurementsMeasurements shall be made throughout the 30 to 1 000 MHz frequency range. An ESA is considered as very likely to satisfy the required limits over the whole frequency range if it satisfies them at the following 13 frequencies in the range: 45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190, 230, 280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz
In the event that the limit is exceeded during the test, investigations shall be made to ensure that this is due to the ESA and not to background radiation.
6.1.1. The limits apply throughout the frequency range 30 to 1 000 MHz.
6.1.2. Measurements can be performed with either quasi-peak or peak detectors. The limits given in points 6.2 and 6.5 of Annex I are for quasi-peak. If peak is used, add 38 dB for 1 MHz band width or subtract 22 dB for 1 kHz band width.
6.2. Tolerances
Spot frequency(MHz) | Tolerance(MHz)
45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190 and 230 | ±5
280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 | ±20The tolerances apply to frequencies quoted and are intended to avoid interference from transmissions operating on or near the nominal spot frequencies during the time of measurement.
Appendix 1Electrical/electronic sub-assembly test area boundaryLevel clear area free from electromagnetic reflecting surfaces
15 m minimum radius
Test sample on ground plane
1 m
Antenna

Figure 1

Appendix 2Radiated electromagnetic emissions from an ESA test layout (General plan view)1 000
To axis of antenna or closest element of log periodic array: 1 000 ± 50 mm
Test bench with ground plane bonded to wall
Test harness 1 500 = 75 mm long and 50 ± 5 mm above ground plane
Power supply in to subject under test
Feedthrough
Connecting box including AN
1 000 ± 50
> 200
ESA
500 minimum
500 minimum
1 500 minimum
Shielded enclosure
Double shielded coaxial cable
Feedthrough
Measuring receiver
Antenna matching unit (where necessary) in close proximity to antenna
Closest radiating elements 500 mm minimum from the edge of the ground plane
All dimensions in millimetres
Figure 2Radiated electromagnetic emissions from an ESA view of test bench plane of longitudinal symmetryPlane in which lie the reference point and the main portion of the harness
Reference point
All dimensions in millimetres
1 000 ± 50
50 ± 10
1 000 ± 100
100 ± 10
Antenna
1 500 minimum
500 minimum
250 minimum

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX XMETHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIATED NARROWBAND ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS FROM ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES1.1. The test method described in this Annex may be applied to ESAs.
1.2. Measuring apparatusThe measuring equipment shall comply with the requirements of publication No 16-1 (93) of the International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR).
An average detector or a peak detector shall be used for the measurement of radiated narrowband electromagnetic emissions in this Annex.
1.3. Test method1.3.1. This test is intended to measure the narrowband electromagnetic radiation such as might emanate from a microprocessor-based system.
1.3.2. As a short (2 to 3 minutes) initial step, choosing one antenna polarisation, it is permitted to make sweeps of the frequency range identified in point 6.1 using a spectrum analyser to indicate the existence and/or whereabouts of peak emissions. This may assist in the choice of frequencies to be tested (see point 6).
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSThe results of measurements shall be expressed in dB microvolts/m (microvolts/m).
3. MEASURING LOCATION3.1. The test site shall comply with the requirements of CISPR publication No 16-1 (93) (see Appendix 1 of Annex IX).
3.2. The measuring set, test hut or vehicle in which the measurement set is located shall be outside the boundary shown in Appendix 1 of Annex IX.
3.3. Enclosed test facilities may be used if correlation can be shown between the enclosed test facility and an outdoor site. Enclosed test facilities do not need to meet the dimensional requirements of Appendix 1 of Annex IX other than the distance from the antenna to the ESA under test and the height of the antenna (see Figures 1 and 2 in Appendix 2 of Annex IX).
3.4. AmbientTo ensure that there is no extraneous noise or signal of a magnitude sufficient to affect materially the measurement, measurements shall be taken before and after the main test. In both of these measurements, the extraneous noise or signal shall be at least 10 dB below the limits of interference given in point 6.6.2.1 of Annex I, except for intentional narrowband ambient transmissions.
4. ESA STATE DURING TESTS4.1. The ESA under test shall be in normal operation mode.
4.2. Measurements shall not be made while rain or other precipitation is falling on the ESA under test or within 10 minutes after rain or other precipitation has stopped.
4.3. Test arrangements4.3.1. The ESA under test and its wiring harnesses shall be supported 50 ± 5 mm above a wooden or equivalent non-conducting table. However, if any part of the ESA under test is intended to be electrically bonded to a vehicle’s metal bodywork, that part shall be placed on a ground plane and shall be electrically bonded to the ground plane.
The ground plane shall be a metallic sheet with a minimum thickness of 0,5 mm. The minimum size of the ground plane depends on the size of the ESA under test but shall allow for the distribution of the ESA’s wiring harness and components. The ground plane shall be connected to the protective conductor of the earthing system. The ground plane shall be situated at a height of 1,0 ± 0,1 m above the test facility floor and shall be parallel to it.
4.3.2. The ESA under test shall be arranged and connected according to its requirements. The power supply harness shall be positioned along, and within 100 mm of, the edge of the ground plane/table closest to the antenna.
4.3.3. The ESA under test shall be connected to the grounding system according to the manufacturer’s installation specification, no additional grounding connections shall be permitted.
4.3.4. The minimum distance between the ESA under test and all other conductive structures, such as walls of a shielded area (with the exception of the ground plane/table underneath the test object) must be 1,0 m.
4.4. Power shall be applied to the ESA under test via a 5 µH/50 Ω resistance artificial network (AN) which shall be electrically bonded to the ground plane. The electrical supply voltage shall be maintained to ±10 % of its nominal system operating voltage. Any ripple voltage shall be less than 1,5 % of the nominal system operating voltage measured at the AN monitoring port.
4.5. If the ESA under test consists of more than one unit, the interconnecting cables shall ideally be the wiring harness as intended for use in the vehicle. If these are not available, the length between the electronic control unit and the AN shall be 1 500 ± 75 mm. All cables in the loom shall be terminated as realistically as possible and preferably with real loads and actuators. If extraneous equipment is required for the correct operation of the ESA under test, compensation shall be made for the contribution it makes to the emissions measured.
5. ANTENNA TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION5.1. Antenna typeAny linearly polarised antenna may be used provided it can be normalised to the reference antenna.
5.2. Height and distance of measurement5.2.1. HeightThe phase centre of the antenna shall be 150 ± 10 mm above ground plane.
5.2.2. Distance of measurementThe horizontal distance from the phase centre, or tip of the antenna as appropriate, to the edge of the ground plane shall be 1,00 ± 0,05 m. No part of the antenna shall be closer than 0,5 m to the ground plane.
The antenna shall be placed parallel to a plane which is perpendicular to the ground plane and coincident with the edge of the ground plane along which the principal portion of the harness runs.
5.2.3. If the test is carried out in a facility enclosed for radio frequency electromagnetic screening purposes, the antenna’s receiving elements shall be no closer than 0,5 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the enclosed facility. There must be no absorbent material between the receiving antenna and the ESA under test.
5.3. Antenna orientation and polarisationAt the measuring point, readings shall be taken both with the antenna in a vertical and in a horizontal polarisation.
5.4. ReadingsThe maximum of the two readings taken (in accordance with point 5.3) at each spot frequency shall be taken as the characteristic reading at the frequency at which the measurements were made.
6. FREQUENCIES6.1. MeasurementsMeasurements shall be made throughout the 30 to 1 000 MHz frequency range. This range shall be divided into 13 bands. In each band one spot frequency may be tested to demonstrate that the required limits are satisfied. To confirm that the ESA under test meets the requirements of this Annex, the testing authority shall test one such point in each of the following 13 frequency bands:
30 to 50, 50 to 75, 75 to 100, 100 to 130, 130 to 165, 165 to 200, 200 to 250, 250 to 320, 320 to 400, 400 to 520, 520 to 660, 660 to 820, 820 to 1 000 MHz.
In the event that the limit is exceeded during the test, investigations shall be made to ensure that this is due to the ESA under test and not to background radiation.
6.2. If during the initial step which may have been carried out as described in point 1.3, the radiated narrowband emissions for any of the bands identified in point 6.1 are at least 10 dB below the reference limit, then the ESA shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of this Annex in respect of that frequency band.

1.   GENERAL

ANNEX XIMETHOD(S) OF TESTING FOR IMMUNITY OF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SUB-ASSEMBLIES TO ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION1.1. The test method(s) described in this Annex may be applied to ESAs.
1.2. Test methods1.2.1. ESAs may comply with the requirements of any combination of the following test methods at the manufacturer’s discretion provided that this results in the full frequency range specified in point 5.1 being covered.

— | Stripline testing: see Appendix 1
— | Bulk current injection testing: see Appendix 2
— | TEM cell testing: see Appendix 3
— | Free field test: see Appendix 41.2.2. Due to radiation of electromagnetic fields during these tests, all testing shall be conducted in a shielded area (the TEM cell is a shielded area).
2. EXPRESSION OF RESULTSFor the tests described in this Annex, field strengths shall be expressed in volts/m and injected current shall be expressed in milliamps.
3. MEASURING LOCATION3.1. The test facility shall be capable of generating the required test signal over the frequency ranges defined in this Annex. The test facility shall comply with (national) legal requirements regarding the emission of electromagnetic signals.
3.2. The measuring equipment shall be located outside the chamber.
4. STATE OF ESA DURING TESTS4.1. The ESA under test shall be in normal operation mode. It shall be arranged as defined in this Annex unless individual test methods dictate otherwise.
4.2. Power shall be applied to the ESA under test via an (5 µ H/50 Ω) artificial network (AN), which shall be electrically grounded. The electrical supply voltage shall be maintained to ±10 % of its nominal system operating voltage. Any ripple voltage shall be less than 1,5 % of the nominal system operating voltage measured at the AN monitoring port.
4.3. Any extraneous equipment required to operate the ESA under test shall be in place during the calibration phase. No extraneous equipment shall be closer than 1 m from the reference point during calibration.
4.4. To ensure reproducible measurement results are obtained when tests and measurements are repeated, the test signal generating equipment and its layout shall be to the same specification as that used during each appropriate calibration phase (points 7.2, 7.3.2.3, 8.4, 9.2 and 10.2).
4.5. If the ESA under test consists of more than one unit, the interconnecting cables shall ideally be the wiring harness as intended for use in the vehicle. If these are not available, the length between the electronic control unit and the AN shall be 1 500 ± 75 mm. All cables in the loom shall be terminated as realistically as possible and preferably with real loads and actuators.
5. FREQUENCY RANGE, DWELL TIMES5.1. Measurements shall be made in the 20 to 1 000 MHz frequency range.
5.2. To confirm that the ESA(s) meet(s) the requirements of this Annex, the tests shall be performed at up to 14 spot frequencies in the range, for example:
27, 45, 65, 90, 120, 150, 190, 230, 280, 380, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz
The response time of the equipment under test shall be considered and the dwell time shall be sufficient to allow the equipment under test to react under normal conditions. In any case, it shall not be less than two seconds.
6. CHARACTERISTICS OF TEST SIGNAL TO BE GENERATED6.1. Maximum envelope excursionThe maximum envelope excursion of the test signal shall equal the maximum envelope excursion of an unmodulated sine wave whose rms value is defined in point 6.4.2 of Annex I (see Appendix 3 of Annex VIII).
6.2. Test signal wave formThe test signal shall be a radio frequency sine wave, amplitude modulated by a 1 kHz sine wave at a modulation depth m of 0,8 ± 0,04.
6.3. Modulation depthThe modulation depth m is defined as:

m | = | (maximum envelope excursion — minimum envelope excursion)/(maximum envelope excursion + minimum envelope excursion)7. STRIPLINE TESTING7.1. Test methodThis test method consists of subjecting the wiring harness connecting the components in an ESA to specified field strengths.
7.2. Field strength measurement in the striplineAt each desired test frequency a level of power shall be fed into the stripline to produce the required field strength in the test area with the ESA under test absent, this level of forward power, or another parameter directly related to the forward power required to define the field, shall be measured and the results recorded. These results shall be used for type-approval tests unless changes occur in the facilities or equipment which necessitate this procedure being repeated. During this process, the position of the field probe head shall be under the active conductor, centred in longitudinal, vertical and transversal directions. The housing of the probe’s electronics shall be as far away from the longitudinal stripline axis as possible.
7.3. Installation of the ESA under test7.3.1. 150 mm stripline testingThe test method allows the generation of homogeneous fields between an active conductor (the stripline 50 Ω impedance), and a ground plane (the conducting surface of the mounting table), between which part of the wiring harness may be inserted. The electronic controller(s) of the ESA under test shall be installed on the ground plane but outside the stripline with one of its edges parallel to the active conductor of the stripline. It shall be 200 ± 10 mm from a line on the ground plane directly under the edge of the active conductor.
The distance between any edge of the active conductor and any peripheral device used for measurement shall be at least 200 mm.
The wiring harness section of the ESA under test shall be placed in a horizontal attitude between the active conductor and the ground plane (see Figures 1 and 2 in Appendix 1).
7.3.1.1. The minimum length of the wiring harness, which shall include the power harness to the electronic control unit and shall be placed under the stripline, shall be 1,5 m unless the wiring harness in the vehicle is less than 1,5 m. In this case, the length of the wiring harness shall be that of the longest length of harness used in the vehicle installation. Any line branches occurring in this length shall be routed perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis of the line.
7.3.1.2. Alternatively, the fully extended length of the wiring harness, including the length of the longest of any branches, shall be 1,5 m.
7.3.2. 800 mm stripline testing7.3.2.1. Test methodThe stripline consists of two parallel metallic plates separated by 800 mm. Equipment under test is positioned centrally between the plates and subjected to an electromagnetic field (see Figures 3 and 4 in Appendix 1).
This method can test complete electronic systems including sensors and actuators as well as the controller and wiring loom. It is suitable for apparatus whose largest dimension is less than one-third of the plate separation.
7.3.2.2. Positioning of striplineThe stripline shall be housed in a screened room (to prevent external emissions) and positioned 2 m away from walls and any metallic enclosure to prevent electromagnetic reflections. RF absorber material may be used to damp these reflections. The stripline shall be placed on non-conducting supports at least 0,4 m above the floor.
7.3.2.3. Calibration of the striplineA field measuring probe shall be positioned within the central one-third of the longitudinal, vertical and transverse dimensions of the space between the parallel plates with the system under test absent. The associated measuring equipment shall be sited outside the screen room.
At each desired test frequency, a level of power shall be fed into the stripline to produce the required field strength at the antenna. This level of forward power, or another parameter directly related to the forward power required to define the field, shall be used for type-approval tests unless changes occur in the facilities or equipment which necessitate this procedure being repeated.
7.3.2.4. Installation of the ESA under testThe main control unit shall be positioned within the central one-third of the longitudinal, vertical and transverse dimensions of the space between the parallel plates. It shall be supported on a stand made from non-conducting material.
7.3.2.5. Main wiring loom and sensor/actuator cablesThe main wiring loom and any sensor/actuator cables shall rise vertically from the control unit to the top ground plate (this helps to maximise coupling with the electromagnetic field). Then they shall follow the underside of the plate to one of its free edges where they shall loop over and follow the top of the ground plate as far as the connections to the stripline feed. The cables shall then be routed to the associated equipment which shall be sited in an area outside the influence of the electromagnetic field, for example: on the floor of the screened room 1 m longitudinally away from the stripline.
8. FREE FIELD ESA IMMUNITY TEST8.1. Test methodThis test method allows the testing of vehicle electrical/electronic systems by exposing an ESA to electromagnetic radiation generated by an antenna.
8.2. Test bench descriptionThe test shall be performed inside a semi-anechoic chamber on a bench top.
8.2.1. Ground plane8.2.1.1. For free field immunity testing, the ESA under test and its wiring harnesses shall be supported 50 ± 5 mm above a wooden or equivalent non-conducting table. However, if any part of the ESA under test is intended to be electrically bonded to a vehicle’s metal bodywork, that part shall be placed on a ground plane and shall be electrically bonded to the ground plane. The ground plane shall be a metallic sheet with a minimum thickness of 0,5 mm. The minimum size of the ground plane depends on the size of the ESA under test but shall allow for the distribution of the ESA’s wiring harness and components. The ground plane shall be connected to the protective conductor of the earthing system. The ground plane shall be situated at a height of 1,0 ± 0,1 m above the test facility floor and shall be parallel to it.
8.2.1.2. The ESA under test shall be arranged and connected according to its requirements. The power supply harness shall be positioned along, and within 100 mm of, the edge of the ground plane/table closest to the antenna.
8.2.1.3. The ESA under test shall be connected to the grounding system according to the manufacturer’s installation specification, no additional grounding connections shall be permitted.
8.2.1.4. The minimum distance between the ESA under test and all other conductive structures, such as walls of a shielded area (with the exception of the ground plane/table underneath the test object) must be 1,0 m.
8.2.1.5. The dimension of any ground plane shall be 2,25 square metres or larger in area with the smaller side no less than 750 mm. The ground plane shall be bonded to the chamber with bonding straps such that the DC bonding resistance shall not exceed 2,5 milliohms.
8.2.2. Installation of ESA under testFor large equipment mounted on a metal test stand, the test stand shall be considered a part of the ground plane for testing purposes and shall be bonded accordingly. The faces of the test sample shall be located at a minimum of 200 mm from the edge of the ground plane. All leads and cables shall be a minimum of 100 mm from the edge of the ground plane and the distance to the ground plane (from the lowest point of the harness) shall be 50 ± 5 mm above the ground plane. Power shall be applied to the ESA under test via an (5 µ H/50 Ω) artificial network (AN).
8.3. Field generating device type, position and orientation8.3.1. Field generating device type8.3.1.1. The field generating device type(s) shall be chosen such that the desired field strength is achieved at the reference point (see point 8.3.4) at the appropriate frequencies.
8.3.1.2. The field generating device(s) may be (an) antenna(s) or a plate antenna.
8.3.1.3. The construction and orientation of any field generating device shall be such that the generated field is polarised: from 20 to 1 000 MHz horizontally or vertically.
8.3.2. Height and distance of measurement8.3.2.1. HeightThe phase centre of any antenna shall be 150 ± 10 mm above the ground plane on which the ESA under test rests. No parts of any antenna’s radiating elements shall be closer than 250 mm to the floor of the facility.
8.3.2.2. Distance of measurement8.3.2.2.1. In-service conditions may best be approximated by placing the field generating device as far from the ESA as practical. This distance will typically lie within the range 1 to 5 m.
8.3.2.2.2. If the test is carried out in an enclosed facility, the field generating device’s radiating elements shall be no closer than 0,5 m to any radio absorbent material and no closer than 1,5 m to the wall of the facility. There shall be no absorbent material interposed between the transmitting antenna and the ESA under test.
8.3.3. Antenna location relative to ESA under test8.3.3.1. The field generating device’s radiating elements shall not be closer than 0,5 m to the edge of the ground plane.
8.3.3.2. The phase centre of the field generating device shall be on a plane which:

(a) | is perpendicular to the ground plane;
(b) | bisects the edge of the ground plane and the midpoint of the principal portion of the wiring harness; and
(c) | is perpendicular to the edge of the ground plane and the principal portion of the wiring harness.The field generating device shall be placed parallel to this plane (see Figures 1 and 2 in Appendix 4).
8.3.3.3. Any field generating device which is placed over the ground plane or ESA under test shall extend over the ESA under test.
8.3.4. Reference pointFor the purpose of this Annex the reference point is the point at which the field strength shall be established and shall be defined as follows:
8.3.4.1. at least 1 m horizontally from the antenna phase centre or at least 1 m vertically from the radiating elements of a plate antenna;
8.3.4.2. on a plane which:

(a) | is perpendicular to the ground plane;
(b) | is perpendicular to the edge of the ground plane along which the principal portion of the wiring harness runs;
(c) | bisects the edge of the ground plane and the midpoint of the principal portion of the wiring harness; and
(d) | is coincident with the midpoint of the principal portion of the harness which runs along the edge of the ground plane closest to the antenna;8.3.4.3. 150 ± 10 mm above the ground plane.
8.4. Generation of required field strength: test methodology8.4.1. The ‘substitution method’ shall be used to establish the test field conditions.
8.4.2. Substitution methodAt each desired test frequency, a level of power shall be fed into the field generating device to produce the required field strength at the reference point (as defined in point 8.3.4 in the test area with the ESA under test absent), this level of forward power, or another parameter directly related to the forward power required to define the field, shall be measured and the results recorded. These results shall be used for type-approval tests unless changes occur in the facilities or equipment which necessitates this procedure being repeated.
8.4.3. Extraneous equipment must be a minimum of 1 m from the reference point during calibration.
8.4.4. Field strength measuring deviceA suitable compact field strength measuring device shall be used to determine the field strength during the calibration phase of the substitution method.
8.4.5. The phase centre of the field strength measuring device shall be positioned at the reference point.
8.4.6. The ESA under test which may include an additional ground plane shall then be introduced into the test facility and positioned in accordance with the requirements of point 8.3. If a second ground plane is used, then it shall be within 5 mm of the bench ground plane and electrically bounded to it. The required forward power defined in point 8.4.2 at each frequency as defined in point 5 shall then be applied to the field generating device.
8.4.7. Whatever parameter was chosen in point 8.4.2 to define the field, the same parameter shall be used to determine the field strength during the test.
8.5. Field strength contour8.5.1. During the calibration phase of the substitution method (prior to an ESA under test being introduced into the test area), the field strength shall not be less than 50 % of the nominal field strength 0,5 ± 0,05 m either side of the reference point on a line parallel to the edge of the ground plane nearest to the antenna and passing through the reference point.
9. TEM CELL TESTING9.1. Test methodThe transverse electromagnetic mode (TEM) cell generates homogeneous fields between the internal conductor (septum) and housing (ground plane). It is used for testing ESAs (see Figure 1 in Appendix 3).
9.2. Field strength measurement in a TEM cell9.2.1. The electric field in the TEM cell shall be determined by using the equation:
|E| = (√(P × Z))/d

E | = | Electric field (volts/metre)
P | = | Power flowing into cell (W)
Z | = | Impedance of cell (50 Ω)
d | = | Separation distance (metres) between the upper wall and the plate (septum).9.2.2. Alternatively an appropriate field strength sensor shall be placed in the upper half of the TEM cell. In this part of the TEM cell the electronic control unit(s) has only a small influence on the test field. The output of this sensor shall determine the field strength.
9.3. Dimensions of TEM cellIn order to maintain a homogeneous field in the TEM cell and to obtain repeatable measurement results, the test object shall not be larger than one-third of the cell inside height.
Recommended TEM cell dimensions are given in Appendix 3, Figures 2 and 3.
9.4. Power, signal and control wiresThe TEM cell shall be attached to a co-axial socket panel and connected as closely as possible to a plug connector with an adequate number of pins. The supply and signal leads from the plug connector in the cell wall shall be directly connected to the test object.
The external components such as sensors, power supply and control elements can be connected:

(a) | to a screened peripheral;
(b) | to a vehicle next to the TEM cell; or
(c) | directly to the screened patchboard.Screened cables must be used in connecting the TEM cell to the peripheral or the vehicle if the vehicle or peripheral is not in the same or adjacent screened room.
10. BULK CURRENT INJECTION TESTING10.1. Test methodThis is a method of carrying out immunity tests by inducing currents directly into a wiring harness using a current injection probe. The injection probe consists of a coupling clamp through which the cables of the ESA under test are passed. Immunity tests can then be carried out by varying the frequency of the induced signals.
The ESA under test may be installed on a ground plane as in point 8.2.1 or in a vehicle in accordance with the vehicle design specification.
10.2. Calibration of bulk current injection probe prior to commencing testsThe injection probe shall be mounted in a calibration jig. Whilst sweeping the test frequency range, the power required to achieve the current specified in point 6.7.2.1 of Annex I shall be monitored. This method calibrates the bulk current injection system forward power versus current prior to testing, and it is this forward power which shall be applied to the injection probe when connected to the ESA under test via the cables used during calibration. It should be noted that the monitored power applied to the injection probe is the forward power.
10.3. Installation of the ESA under testFor an ESA mounted on a ground plane as in point 8.2.1 all cables in the wiring harness shall be terminated as realistically as possible and preferably with real loads and actuators. For both vehicle mounted and ground plane mounted ESAs the current injection probe shall be mounted in turn around all the wires in the wiring harness to each connector and 150 ± 10mm from each connector of the ESA under test electronic control units (ECU), instrument modules or active sensors as illustrated in Appendix 2.
10.4. Power, signal and control wiresFor an ESA under test mounted on a ground plane as in point 8.2.1, a wiring harness shall be connected between an artificial network (AN) and the principal electronic control unit (ECU). This harness shall run parallel to the edge of the ground plane and 200 mm minimum from its edge. This harness shall contain the power feed wire which is used to connect the vehicle battery to this ECU and the power return wire if used on the vehicle.
The distance from the ECU to the AN shall be 1,0 ± 0,1 m or shall be the harness length between the ECU and the battery as used on the vehicle, if known, whichever is the shorter. If a vehicle harness is used then any line branches which occur in this length shall be routed along the ground plane but perpendicular away from the edge of the ground plane. Otherwise the ESA under test wires which are in this length shall break out at the AN.

Figure 1

Appendix 1150 mm stripline testing1 = Shielded room
2 = Cable harness
3 = Test object
4 = Terminating resistance
5 = Frequency generator
6/7 = Alternative battery
8 = Power supply
9 = Filter
10 = Peripheral
11 = Filter
12 = Video peripheral
13 = Opto-electrical converter
14 = Optical lines
15 = Non irradiation-proof peripheral
16 = Linear or radiation-proof peripheral
17 = Opto-electrical converter
18 = Insulating base
19 = Video camera
All dimensions in millimetres
1
2
3
4
5
6/7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1 500
200
50 Ω
200
Figure 2150 mm stripline testingL = 2 500 mm
S = 800 mm
W = 740 mm
h = 150 mm
All dimensions in millimetres
1 = Test object
2 = Cable harness
3 = Peripheral
4 = Terminating resistance
5 = Insulting base
h
S
L
S
W
1 500
4 300
1 500
200
P
1
2
3
3
4
5
= 200
Figure 3800 mm stripline testingN Type connector monitor
Brass bracket
N Type connector feed
470 Ω 2 w
2 × 120 Ω 2 w
470 Ω 2 w
2 × 820 Ω 2 w
Brass bracket
Details of stripline feed
Brass bracket
330 Ω 2 w
270 Ω 2 w
Brass bracket
Details of stripline termination
1
2
3
4
5
6

1 | = | Ground plate
2 | = | Main loom and sensor/actuator cables
3 | = | Wooden frame
4 | = | Driven plate
5 | = | Insulator
6 | = | Test objectFigure 4800 mm stripline dimensionsAllowed working region
Insultating support
Earth
Side view
Allowed working region
Plan view
All dimensions in millimetres
800
800
800
3
800
3
800
3
800
3
800
400
800
800
800
3
800
3
800
3
800
3

Appendix 2Example of BCI test configurationGround plane
500
min.
100
min.
200
min.
Shielded enclosure
All dimensions in millimetres
1 000 ± 100
50
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1 | = | DUT
2 | = | RF measuring probe (optional)
3 | = | RF injection probe
4 | = | Artificial network
5 | = | Shielded room filter network
6 | = | Power source
7 | = | DUT interface: stimulation and monitoring equipment
8 | = | Signal generator
9 | = | Broadband amplifier
10 | = | RF 50 Ω directional complex
11 | = | RF power level measuring device or equivalent
12 | = | Spectrum analyser or equivalent (optional)

Figure 1

Appendix 3TEM cell testing
1 | = | Outer conductor, shield
2 | = | Inner conductor (septum)
3 | = | Insulator
4 | = | Input
5 | = | Insulator
6 | = | Door
7 | = | Socket panel
8 | = | Test object power supply
9 | = | Terminating resistance 50 Ω
10 | = | Insulation
11 | = | Test object (maximum height one third of distance between cell floor and septum)Figure 2Design of rectangular TEM cellTEM cell dimensions
Dielectric rods
Allowed working region:
0,6 W
0,6 L
Horizontal section view at septum
0,95 L
5 cm
Access door
Vertical section view
***W
S
***b
**L
2
L
L
2
Figure 3The following table shows the dimensions for constructing a cell with specified upper frequency limits:

Upper frequency(MHz) | Cell form factorW: b | Cell form factorL/W | Plate separationb (cm) | SeptumS (cm)
200 | 1,69 | 0,66 | 56 | 70
200 | 1,00 | 1,00 | 60 | 50Typical TEM cell dimensions

Figure 1

Appendix 4Free field ESA immunity test
Test layout (general plan view)
1 000
To axis of antenna or closest element of log periodic array: 1 000 ± 50 mm
Test bench with ground plane bonded to wall
Test harness 1 500 = 75 mm long and 50 ± 5 mm above ground plane
Power supply in to subject under test
Feedthrough
Connecting box including AN
1 000 ± 50
200
ESA
500 minimum
500 minimum
1 500 minimum
Shielded enclosure
Double shielded coaxial cable
Feedthrough
Measuring receiver
Antenna matching unit (where necessary) in close proximity to antenna
Closest radiating elements 500 mm minimum from the edge of the ground plane
All dimensions in millimetres
Figure 2Free field ESA immunity test
View of test bench plane of longitudinal symmetry
Plane in which lie the reference point and the main portion of the harness
Reference point
All dimensions in millimetres
1 000 ± 50
50 ± 10
1 000 ± 100
100 ± 10
Antenna
1 500 minimum
500 minimum
250 minimum

PART A

ANNEX XIIRepealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
(referred to in Article 6)

Council Directive 75/322/EEC(OJ L 147, 9.6.1975, p. 28) |
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45) | only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in Article 1(1)
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24) | only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in the first indent of Article 1
Commission Directive 2000/2/EC(OJ L 21, 26.1.2000, p. 23) | Article 1 and Annex only
Commission Directive 2001/3/EC(OJ L 28, 30.1.2001, p. 1) | Article 2 and Annex II only
Point I.A.13 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 57) |
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) | only as regards the reference to Directive 75/322/EEC in Article 1 and Annex, point A.12.PART BList of time-limits for transposition into national law and application
(referred to in Article 6)

Directive | Time-limit for transposition | Date of application
75/322/EEC | 21 November 1976 | —
82/890/EEC | 21 June 1984 | —
97/54/EC | 22 September 1998 | 23 September 1998
2000/2/EC | 31 December 2000(1) | —
2001/3/EC | 30 June 2002 | —
2006/96/EC | 31 December 2006 | —
(1) In conformity with Article 2 of Directive 2000/2/EC:
‘1. With effect from 1 January 2001, Member States may not, on grounds relating to electromagnetic compatibility:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval in respect of any given type of vehicle,
—
refuse to grant EC component or technical unit type-approval in respect of any given type of component or separate technical unit,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of vehicles,
—
prohibit the sale or use of components or separate technical units,
if the vehicles, components or separate technical units comply with the requirements of Directive 75/322/EEC, as amended by this Directive. 2. With effect from 1 October 2002, Member States:
—
may no longer grant EC vehicle type-approval, EC component type-approval or EC separate technical unit type-approval, and
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval,
for any type of vehicle component or separate technical unit, if the requirements of Directive 75/322/EEC, as amended by this Directive, are not fulfilled. 3. Paragraph 2 shall not apply to vehicle types approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Council Directive 77/537/EEC (*1) nor to any subsequent extensions to these approvals. 4. With effect from 1 October 2008, Member States:
—
shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 74/150/EEC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and
—
may refuse the sale and entry into service of new electrical or electronic sub-assemblies as components or separate technical units,
if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled. 5. Without prejudice to paragraphs 2 and 4, in the case of replacement parts, Member States shall continue to grant EC type-approval and to permit the sale and entry into service of components or separate technical units intended for use on vehicle types which have been approved before 1 October 2002 pursuant to Directive 75/322/EEC or Directive 77/537/EEC and, where applicable, subsequent extensions to these approvals.

ANNEX XIIICORRELATION TABLE
Directive 75/322/EEC | Directive 2000/2/EC | This Directive
Article 1 | | Article 1
| Article 2 | Article 2
Article 4 | | Article 3
Article 5 | | Article 4
Article 6(1) | | —
Article 6(2) | | Article 5
— | | Article 6
— | | Article 7
Article 7 | | Article 8
Annex I | | Annex I
Annex IIA | | Annex II
Annex IIB | | Annex III
Annex IIIA | | Annex IV
Annex IIIB | | Annex V
Annex IV | | Annex VI
Annex V | | Annex VII
Annex VI | | Annex VIII
Annex VII | | Annex IX
Annex VIII | | Annex X
Annex IX | | Annex XI
— | | Annex XII
— | | Annex XIII

Pending: 32009L0062

30.7.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 198/20
(1) Council Directive 93/94/EEC of 29 October 1993 relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel vehicles(3)has been substantially amended(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 93/94/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles as replaced by Directive 2002/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 March 2002 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of two or three-wheel vehicles as regards the space for mounting the rear registration plate. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to allow for the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2002/24/EC to be applied in respect of each type of vehicle. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2002/24/EC relating to vehicle systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) The objective of this Directive is not to harmonise the dimensions of registration plates used in the various Member States. The Member States should therefore ensure that protruding registration plates do not constitute a danger for users, without, however, this requiring any modification with regard to vehicle construction.
(4) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
— refuse, in respect of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle, to grant EC type-approval,
— prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of two or three-wheel motor vehicles,
1.1.1. Width:100 mm;
1.1.2. Height:175 mm;or
1.1.3. Width:145 mm;
1.1.4. Height:125 mm.
1.2.1. Width:280 mm;
1.2.2. Height:210 mm.
1.3.1. The provisions for passenger cars as set out in Council Directive 70/222/EEC(2)shall apply.
2.1. The mounting for the rear registration plate must be located at the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that:
2.1.1. the plate can be positioned within the longitudinal planes passing through the outer extremities of the vehicle.
3.1. The rear registration plate:3.1.1.must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;3.1.2.may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards;3.1.3.may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards. 3.1.1. must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle; 3.1.2. may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards; 3.1.3. may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards.
3.1.1. must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;
3.1.2. may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards;
3.1.3. may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards.
3.1.1. must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;
3.1.2. may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards;
3.1.3. may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards.
4.1. No point on the space for mounting the registration plate may be more than 1,5 m above the ground when the vehicle is unladen.
5.1. No point on the space for mounting the registration plate shall be less than 0,20 m above the ground or less than the radius of the wheel above the ground if that is less than 0,20 m, when the vehicle is unladen.
6.1. The space for mounting the plate must be visible within a space bordered by two dihedrals: one with a horizontal edge defined by two planes passing through the upper and lower horizontal edges of the space for mounting the plate, the angles of which in relation to the horizontal are shown in Figure 1; the other with a perceptibly vertical edge defined by two planes passing through each side of the plate, the angles of which in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle are shown in Figure 2.Figure 1Figure 1Figure 2Figure 2
— 0.1
— 0.2
— 0.4 to 0.6
— 2.2
— 2.2.1
— 9.6
— 9.6.1.
1. Trade mark or name of vehicle …
2. Vehicle type …
3. Manufacturer’s name and address ……
4. Name and address of manufacturer’s representative (if any) ……
5. Date vehicle submitted for test …
6. EC component type-approval has been granted/refused(1).
7. Place …
8. Date …
9. Signature …
Council Directive 93/94/EEC (OJ L 311, 14.12.1993, p. 83).
Commission Directive 1999/26/EC (OJ L 118, 6.5.1999, p. 32).
Directive Time-limit for transposition Date of application
93/94/EEC 30 April 1995 1 November 1995(1)
1999/26/EC 31 December 1999 1 January 2000(2)
— refuse, in respect of a type of two or three-wheel vehicle, to grant EC type-approval,
— prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of two or three-wheel motor vehicles,
Directive 93/94/EEC Directive 1999/26/EC This Directive
Articles 1, 2 and 3 Articles 1, 2 and 3
Article 2(1) Article 4(1)
Article 2(2) Article 4(2)
Article 4(1) —
Article 4(2) Article 4(3)
— Article 5
— Article 6
Article 5 Article 7
Annex Annex I
— Annex II
— Annex III
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the Opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 93/94/EEC of 29 October 1993 relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel vehicles(3)has been substantially amended(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 93/94/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles as replaced by Directive 2002/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 March 2002 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of two or three-wheel vehicles as regards the space for mounting the rear registration plate. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to allow for the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2002/24/EC to be applied in respect of each type of vehicle. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2002/24/EC relating to vehicle systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) The objective of this Directive is not to harmonise the dimensions of registration plates used in the various Member States. The Member States should therefore ensure that protruding registration plates do not constitute a danger for users, without, however, this requiring any modification with regard to vehicle construction.
(4) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
This Directive shall apply to the space for mounting the rear registration plate of all types of motor vehicles as defined in Article 1 of Directive 2002/24/EC.

Article 2
The procedure for the granting of EC component type-approval in respect of the space for mounting the rear registration plate for a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle and the conditions governing the free movement of such vehicles shall be as laid down in Chapters II and III of Directive 2002/24/EC.

Article 3
The amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annex I shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 18(2) of Directive 2002/24/EC.

Article 4
1. Member States shall not, on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle, to grant EC type-approval,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of two or three-wheel motor vehicles,
if the space for mounting the rear registration plate complies with the requirements of this Directive.
2. Member States shall refuse to grant EC type-approval for any type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
3. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 5
Directive 93/94/EEC, as amended by the Directive listed in Annex II, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table set out in Annex III.

Article 6
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 7
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the Opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 93/94/EEC of 29 October 1993 relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel vehicles(3)has been substantially amended(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 93/94/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles as replaced by Directive 2002/24/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 March 2002 relating to the type-approval of two or three-wheel motor vehicles(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of two or three-wheel vehicles as regards the space for mounting the rear registration plate. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to allow for the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2002/24/EC to be applied in respect of each type of vehicle. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2002/24/EC relating to vehicle systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) The objective of this Directive is not to harmonise the dimensions of registration plates used in the various Member States. The Member States should therefore ensure that protruding registration plates do not constitute a danger for users, without, however, this requiring any modification with regard to vehicle construction.
(4) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
This Directive shall apply to the space for mounting the rear registration plate of all types of motor vehicles as defined in Article 1 of Directive 2002/24/EC.
The procedure for the granting of EC component type-approval in respect of the space for mounting the rear registration plate for a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle and the conditions governing the free movement of such vehicles shall be as laid down in Chapters II and III of Directive 2002/24/EC.
The amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annex I shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 18(2) of Directive 2002/24/EC.
1. Member States shall not, on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle, to grant EC type-approval,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of two or three-wheel motor vehicles,
if the space for mounting the rear registration plate complies with the requirements of this Directive.
2. Member States shall refuse to grant EC type-approval for any type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate if the requirements of this Directive are not fulfilled.
3. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 93/94/EEC, as amended by the Directive listed in Annex II, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table set out in Annex III.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

1.   DIMENSIONS

ANNEX IThe dimensions of the space for mounting the rear registration plate of two or three-wheel motor vehicles(1)are as follows:
1.1. Mopeds and light quadricycles without a body

| 1.1.1. | Width:100 mm;
| 1.1.2. | Height:175 mm;or
| 1.1.3. | Width:145 mm;
| 1.1.4. | Height:125 mm.1.2. Motorcycles, tricycles up to a maximum power of 15 kW and quadricycles, other than light quadricycles, without a body

| 1.2.1. | Width:280 mm;
| 1.2.2. | Height:210 mm.1.3. Tricycles with a maximum power exceeding 15 kW, light quadricycles fitted with a body and quadricycles, other than light quadricycles, fitted with a body

| 1.3.1. | The provisions for passenger cars as set out in Council Directive 70/222/EEC(2)shall apply.2. GENERAL LOCATION
| 2.1. | The mounting for the rear registration plate must be located at the rear of the vehicle in such a manner that:
| 2.1.1. | the plate can be positioned within the longitudinal planes passing through the outer extremities of the vehicle.3. INCLINATION
| 3.1. | The rear registration plate:3.1.1.must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;3.1.2.may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards;3.1.3.may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards. | 3.1.1. | must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle; | 3.1.2. | may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards; | 3.1.3. | may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards.
3.1.1. | must be at right angles to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;
3.1.2. | may be inclined from the vertical by not more than 30°, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces upwards;
3.1.3. | may be inclined by not more than 15° from the vertical, with the vehicle unladen, when the backing plate for the registration number faces downwards.4. MAXIMUM HEIGHT
| 4.1. | No point on the space for mounting the registration plate may be more than 1,5 m above the ground when the vehicle is unladen.5. MINIMUM HEIGHT
| 5.1. | No point on the space for mounting the registration plate shall be less than 0,20 m above the ground or less than the radius of the wheel above the ground if that is less than 0,20 m, when the vehicle is unladen.6. GEOMETRIC VISIBILITY
| 6.1. | The space for mounting the plate must be visible within a space bordered by two dihedrals: one with a horizontal edge defined by two planes passing through the upper and lower horizontal edges of the space for mounting the plate, the angles of which in relation to the horizontal are shown in Figure 1; the other with a perceptibly vertical edge defined by two planes passing through each side of the plate, the angles of which in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle are shown in Figure 2.Figure 1Figure 1Figure 2Figure 2
(1) In the case of mopeds, this is any registration and/or identification plate.
(2)
OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 25.

Information document in respect of the space for mounting the rear registration plate of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle

Appendix 1(to be attached to the application for EC component type-approval where this is submitted separately from the application for EC vehicle type-approval)Order No (assigned by the applicant):
The application for EC component type-approval in respect of the space for mounting the rear registration plate of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle must contain the information set out in Annex II to Directive 2002/24/EC, Part 1, section A, points:

— | 0.1
— | 0.2
— | 0.4 to 0.6
— | 2.2
— | 2.2.1
— | 9.6
— | 9.6.1.

EC component type-approval certificate in respect of the space for mounting the rear registration plate of a type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle

Appendix 2
MODEL
Report No … by technical service … date …
EC component type-approval No … Extension No …

| 1. | Trade mark or name of vehicle …
| 2. | Vehicle type …
| 3. | Manufacturer’s name and address ……
| 4. | Name and address of manufacturer’s representative (if any) ……
| 5. | Date vehicle submitted for test …
| 6. | EC component type-approval has been granted/refused(1).
| 7. | Place …
| 8. | Date …
| 9. | Signature …
(1) Delete as appropriate.

PART A

ANNEX II
Repealed Directive with its amendment

(referred to in Article 5)

Council Directive 93/94/EEC | (OJ L 311, 14.12.1993, p. 83).
Commission Directive 1999/26/EC | (OJ L 118, 6.5.1999, p. 32).PART B
List of time-limits for transposition into national law and application

(referred to in Article 5)

Directive | Time-limit for transposition | Date of application
93/94/EEC | 30 April 1995 | 1 November 1995(1)
1999/26/EC | 31 December 1999 | 1 January 2000(2)
(1) In conformity with Article 4 of Directive 93/94/EEC:
‘From [1 May 1995], Member States may not, for reasons connected with the space for mounting the rear registration plate, prohibit the initial entry into service of vehicles which conform to this Directive.’

(2) In conformity with Article 2 of Directive 1999/26/EC:
‘1. With effect from 1 January 2000, Member States shall not, on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of two or three-wheel vehicle, to grant EC type-approval,
—
prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of two or three-wheel motor vehicles,
if the space for mounting the rear registration plate complies with the requirements of Directive 93/94/EEC as amended by this Directive. 2. With effect from 1 July 2000, Member States shall refuse to grant EC type-approval for any type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle on grounds relating to the space for mounting the rear registration plate if the requirements of Directive 93/94/EEC, as amended by this Directive, are not fulfilled.’.

ANNEX III
Correlation Table

Directive 93/94/EEC | Directive 1999/26/EC | This Directive
Articles 1, 2 and 3 | | Articles 1, 2 and 3
| Article 2(1) | Article 4(1)
| Article 2(2) | Article 4(2)
Article 4(1) | | —
Article 4(2) | | Article 4(3)
— | | Article 5
— | | Article 6
Article 5 | | Article 7
Annex | | Annex I
— | | Annex II
— | | Annex III

Pending: 32009L0061

5.8.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 203/19
(1) Council Directive 78/933/EEC of 17 October 1978 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 78/933/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States concerning the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
— shall no longer grant EC type-approval;
— may refuse to grant national type-approval.
— shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany those new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 2003/37/EC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive;
— may refuse the registration, sale or entry into service of those new vehicles.
1.1.1. the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
1.1.2. the number and positioning of the devices.The following are likewise considered not to be tractors of a different type: tractors which differ within the meaning of points 1.1.1 and 1.1.2 above, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the tractor type in question, and tractors on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent.
— retro-reflecting number plates,
— other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Member State’s specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation.
1.10.1. of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
1.10.2. of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
1.10.3. of rear-view mirrors;
1.10.4. of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
1.10.5. of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.
2.1. The application for EC approval of a tractor type with regard to the installation of its lighting and light-signalling devices shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or his representative.
2.2. It shall be accompanied by the following documents in triplicate, and by the following particulars:2.2.1.a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1;2.2.2.a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’;2.2.3.layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor;2.2.4.layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6. 2.2.1. a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1; 2.2.2. a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’; 2.2.3. layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor; 2.2.4. layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6.
2.2.1. a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1;
2.2.2. a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’;
2.2.3. layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor;
2.2.4. layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6.
2.2.1. a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1;
2.2.2. a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’;
2.2.3. layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor;
2.2.4. layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6.
2.3. An unladen tractor fitted with lighting and light-signalling equipment as described in point 2.2.2 and representative of the tractor type to be approved, must be submitted to the technical authority conducting approval tests.
2.4. The document provided for in Annex II shall be attached to the type-approval document.
3.1.1. Tractors must be equipped with electrical connectors to enable a detachable light-signalling system to be used. In particular tractors must be fitted with the permanently connected socket outlet recommended in standard ISO R 1724 (Electrical connections for vehicles with 6 or 12 volt electrical systems applying more specifically to private motor cars and lightweight trailers or caravans) (first edition, April 1970) or ISO R 1185 (Electrical connections between towing and towed vehicles having 24 volt electrical systems used for international commercial transport purposes) (first edition, March 1970). In the case of standard ISO R 1185, the function of contact 2 shall be restricted to the rear position (side) lamp and to the end-outline marker lamp on the left-hand side.
3.5.1. be fitted to the tractor symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane;
3.5.2. be symmetrical to one another in relation to the median longitudinal plane;
3.5.3. satisfy the same colorimetric characteristics;
3.5.4. have substantially identical photometric characteristics.
3.10.1. for the visibility of a red light towards the front: there is no direct visibility of a red light if viewed by an observer moving within zone 1 in a transverse plane situated 25 m in front of the tractor (see Appendix 2, Figure 1);
3.10.2. for the visibility of a white light towards the rear: there is no direct visibility of a white light if viewed by an observer moving within zone 2 in a transverse plane situated 25 m behind the tractor (see Appendix 2, Figure 2).
3.10.3. Zones 1 and 2, as seen by the observer, are limited in their respective planes as follows:3.10.3.1.as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;3.10.3.2.as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2. 3.10.3.1. as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground; 3.10.3.2. as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2.
3.10.3.1. as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;
3.10.3.2. as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2.
3.10.3.1. as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;
3.10.3.2. as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2.
— main-beam headlamp: white,
— dipped-beam headlamp: white,
— front fog-lamp: white or yellow,
— reversing lamp: white,
— direction indicator lamp: amber,
— hazard-warning signal: amber,
— stop lamp: red,
— rear registration-plate lamp: white,
— front position (side) lamp: white,
— rear position (side) lamp: red,
— rear fog-lamp: red,
— parking lamp: white in front, red at the rear, amber if incorporated in the side direction indicator lamps,
— work lamp: no specifications,
— end-outline marker lamp: white in front, red at the rear,
— rear reflex reflector, non-triangular: red.
3.15.1. The concealment of lamps shall be prohibited, with the exception of main-beam headlamps, dipped-beam headlamps and front fog-lamps, which may be concealed when not in use.
3.15.2. An illuminating device in the position of use shall remain in that position if the malfunction referred to in point 3.15.2.1 occurs alone or in conjunction with one of the malfunctions described in point 3.15.2.2.3.15.2.1.The absence of power for manipulating the lamp.3.15.2.2.A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device. 3.15.2.1. The absence of power for manipulating the lamp. 3.15.2.2. A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device.
3.15.2.1. The absence of power for manipulating the lamp.
3.15.2.2. A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device.
3.15.2.1. The absence of power for manipulating the lamp.
3.15.2.2. A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device.
3.15.3. In the event of a defect in the concealment control, a concealed lighting device shall be capable of being moved into the position of use without the aid of tools.
3.15.4. It must be possible to move illuminating devices into the position of use and to switch them on by means of a single control, without excluding the possibility of moving them into the position of use without switching them on. However, in the case of grouped-main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps, the control referred to above is required only to activate the dipped-beam headlamps.
3.15.5. It must not be possible deliberately, from the driver’s seat, to stop the movement of switched-on headlamps before they reach the position of use. If there is a danger of dazzling other road users by the movement of headlamps, they may light up only when they have reached their final position.
3.15.6. At temperatures of – 30 to + 50 °C an illuminating device must be capable of reaching the fully-open position within three seconds of initial operation of the control.
3.16.1. In the case of tractors having a track width of 1 150 mm or less, the position of the direction indicator lamps, the front and rear position (side) lamps and the stop lamps may be varied, provided that:3.16.1.1.these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered;3.16.1.2.these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic. 3.16.1.1. these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered; 3.16.1.2. these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic.
3.16.1.1. these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered;
3.16.1.2. these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic.
3.16.1.1. these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered;
3.16.1.2. these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic.
4.1.9.1. with the dipped-beam headlamp, unless the main-beam headlamp swivels according to the angle of lock of the steering;
4.1.9.2. with the front position (side) lamp;
4.1.9.3. with the front fog-lamp;
4.1.9.4. with the parking lamp.
4.1.10.1 The main-beam headlamps may be switched on either simultaneously or in pairs. For changing over from the dipped to the main beam at least one pair of main beams must be switched on. For changing over from the main to the dipped beam all main-beam headlamps must be switched off simultaneously.
4.1.10.2. The dipped beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main beams.
4.1.12.1. The aggregate maximum intensity of the main beams which can be switched on simultaneously must not exceed 225 000 cd.
4.1.12.2. This maximum intensity shall be obtained by adding together the individual maximum intensities measured at the time of component type-approval and shown on the relevant approval certificates.
4.2.4.2.1. if only two dipped-beam headlamps are fitted:—minimum 500 mm,—maximum 1 200 mm.This distance may be increased to 1 500 mm, if the height of 1 200 mm cannot be observed due to the design, taking account of the conditions of use of the tractor and its working equipment; — minimum 500 mm, — maximum 1 200 mm.
— minimum 500 mm,
— maximum 1 200 mm.
— minimum 500 mm,
— maximum 1 200 mm.
4.2.4.2.2. in the case of tractors equipped for the fitting of portable devices at the front, two dipped-beam headlamps in addition to the lamps mentioned in point 4.2.4.2.1 shall be allowed at a height not exceeding 3 000 mm, if the electrical connections are such that two pairs of dipped-beam headlamps cannot be switched on at the same time.
α = 15° upwards and 10° downwards,
β = 45° outwards and 5° inwards.
4.2.6.1. The alignment of the dipped-beam headlamps must not vary according to the angle of lock of the steering.
4.2.6.2. If the height of the dipped-beam headlamps is equal to or greater than 500 mm and equal to or less than 1 200 mm, it must be possible to lower the dipped beam by between 0,5 and 4 %;
4.2.6.3. If the height of the dipped-beam headlamps is greater than 1 200 but not greater than 1 500 mm, the limit of 4 % laid down in point 4.2.6.2 shall be increased to 6 %; the dipped-beam headlamps referred to in point 4.2.4.2.2 must be aligned in such a way that, measured at 15 m from the lamp, the horizontal line separating the lit zone from the unlit zone is situated at a height equivalent to only half the distance between the ground and the centre of the lamp.
4.2.9.1. with the main-beam headlamp, unless the latter swivels according to the angle of lock of the steering;
4.2.9.2. with the other front lamps.
α = 5° upwards and downwards,
β = 45° outwards and 5° inwards.
4.3.9.1. with main-beam headlamps which do not swivel according to the angle of lock of the steering when there are four headlamps;
4.3.9.2. with the front position (side) lamps;
4.3.9.3. with the parking lamp.
α = 15° upwards and 5° downwards,
β = 45° to right and left if there is only one lamp,
β = 45° outwards and 30° inwards if there are two.
A —Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).These lamps may be independent, grouped or combined. — Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1), — Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
B —Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).The front and repeating side lamps may be independent, grouped, or combined. — Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1), — Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5), — Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
C —Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2),—Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5). — Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1), — Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2), — Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5).
— Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2),
— Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5).
— Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2),
— Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5).
D —Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2). — Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1), — Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2).
— Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1),
— Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2).
— not less than 500 mm for direction-indicator lamps in category 5,
— not less than 400 mm for direction-indicator lamps in categories 1 and 2,
— not more than 1 900 mm for all categories.If the structure of the tractor makes it impossible to keep to this maximum figure, the highest point on the illuminating surface may be at 2 300 mm for direction-indicator lamps in category 5, for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement A, for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement B and for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement D; it may be at 2 100 mm for those in categories 1 and 2 of the other arrangements.
— up to 4 000 mm for optional direction-indicator lamps.
4.6.2.Number 4.6.2. Number As specified in the corresponding headings of point 4.5.
4.6.2. Number
4.6.3.Arrangement 4.6.3. Arrangement
4.6.3. Arrangement
4.6.4.Position 4.6.4. Position
4.6.4. Position
4.6.4.1.Width 4.6.4.1. Width
4.6.4.1. Width
4.6.4.2.Height 4.6.4.2. Height
4.6.4.2. Height
4.6.4.3.Length 4.6.4.3. Length
4.6.4.3. Length
4.6.5.Geometric visibility 4.6.5. Geometric visibility
4.6.5. Geometric visibility
4.6.6.Alignment 4.6.6. Alignment
4.6.6. Alignment
4.6.7.May/may not be ‘grouped’ 4.6.7. May/may not be ‘grouped’
4.6.7. May/may not be ‘grouped’
4.6.8.May/may not be ‘combined’ 4.6.8. May/may not be ‘combined’
4.6.8. May/may not be ‘combined’
4.6.9.May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ 4.6.9. May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.6.9. May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.6.2. Number
4.6.3. Arrangement
4.6.4. Position
4.6.4.1. Width
4.6.4.2. Height
4.6.4.3. Length
4.6.5. Geometric visibility
4.6.6. Alignment
4.6.7. May/may not be ‘grouped’
4.6.8. May/may not be ‘combined’
4.6.9. May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.8.2.Number 4.8.2. Number Such that the device is capable of illuminating the space for the registration plate.
4.8.2. Number
4.8.3.Arrangement 4.8.3. Arrangement
4.8.3. Arrangement
4.8.4.Position 4.8.4. Position
4.8.4. Position
4.8.4.1.Width 4.8.4.1. Width
4.8.4.1. Width
4.8.4.2.Height 4.8.4.2. Height
4.8.4.2. Height
4.8.4.3.Length 4.8.4.3. Length
4.8.4.3. Length
4.8.5.Geometric visibility 4.8.5. Geometric visibility
4.8.5. Geometric visibility
4.8.6.Alignment 4.8.6. Alignment
4.8.6. Alignment
4.8.2. Number
4.8.3. Arrangement
4.8.4. Position
4.8.4.1. Width
4.8.4.2. Height
4.8.4.3. Length
4.8.5. Geometric visibility
4.8.6. Alignment
— either 45° inwards and 80° outwards,
— or 80° inwards and 45° outwards.
— either two front lamps and two rear lamps,
— or one lamp on each side.
— at the front: with the position (side) lamps, the dipped-beam headlamps, the main-beam headlamps and the front fog-lamps,
— at the rear: with the position (side) lamps, the stop lamps and the rear fog-lamps.
— with the direction indicator lamps in category 5.
4.13.7.May not be ‘grouped’ 4.13.7. May not be ‘grouped’ with other lamps, except for the case referred to in point 4.2.4.2.2.
4.13.7. May not be ‘grouped’
4.13.8.May not be ‘combined’ 4.13.8. May not be ‘combined’
4.13.8. May not be ‘combined’
4.13.9.May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ 4.13.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.13.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.13.7. May not be ‘grouped’
4.13.8. May not be ‘combined’
4.13.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.14.5.1. Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards.Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm. Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards. Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.
Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards.
Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.
Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards.
Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.
4.14.5.2. If it is impossible to observe the above position and visibility requirements, four reflex reflectors may be fitted in accordance with the following installation specifications:4.14.5.2.1.two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°.4.14.5.2.2.the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1. 4.14.5.2.1. two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°. 4.14.5.2.2. the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1.
4.14.5.2.1. two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°.
4.14.5.2.2. the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1.
4.14.5.2.1. two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°.
4.14.5.2.2. the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1.
4.15.3.Arrangement 4.15.3. Arrangement No individual specifications.
4.15.3. Arrangement
4.15.4.Position 4.15.4. Position
4.15.4. Position
4.15.4.1.Width 4.15.4.1. Width
4.15.4.1. Width
4.15.4.2.Height 4.15.4.2. Height
4.15.4.2. Height
4.15.4.3.Length 4.15.4.3. Length
4.15.4.3. Length
4.15.5.Geometric visibility 4.15.5. Geometric visibility
4.15.5. Geometric visibility
4.15.6.Alignment 4.15.6. Alignment
4.15.6. Alignment
4.15.7.May be ‘grouped’ 4.15.7. May be ‘grouped’ with another lamp.
4.15.7. May be ‘grouped’
4.15.8May not be ‘combined’ 4.15.8 May not be ‘combined’
4.15.8 May not be ‘combined’
4.15.9.May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ 4.15.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.15.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.15.3. Arrangement
4.15.4. Position
4.15.4.1. Width
4.15.4.2. Height
4.15.4.3. Length
4.15.5. Geometric visibility
4.15.6. Alignment
4.15.7. May be ‘grouped’
4.15.8 May not be ‘combined’
4.15.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
5.1. Every series-produced tractor shall conform to the tractor type which received type approval as regards the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices and their characteristics as specified by this Directive.
Name of administration
5.1. Main-beam headlamps: yes/no(2)
5.2. Dipped-beam headlines: yes/no(2)
5.3. Front fog-lamps: yes/no(2)
5.4. Reversing lamps: yes/no(2)
5.5. Front direction-indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
5.6. Rear direction-indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
5.7. Repeating side indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
5.8. Hazard-warning device: yes/no(2)
5.9. Stop lamps: yes/no(2)
5.10. Rear registration-plate lamp: yes/no(2)
5.11. Front position (side) lamps: yes/no(2)
5.12. Rear position (side) lamps: yes/no(2)
5.13. Rear fog-lamps: yes/no(2)
5.14. Parking lamps: yes/no(2)
5.15. End-outline marker lamps: yes/no(2)
5.16. Rear reflex reflectors, non triangular: yes/no(2)
5.17. Work lamp: yes/no(2)
Council Directive 78/933/EEC(OJ L 325, 20.11.1978, p. 16)
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45) Only the references made by Article 1(1) to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EEC
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24) Only the references made by Article 1(1) to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EEC
Commission Directive 1999/56/EC(OJ L 146, 11.6.1999, p. 31)
Commission Directive 2006/26/EC(OJ L 65, 7.3.2006, p. 22) Only the references made by Article 3 and Annex III to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EEC
Directive Time-limit for transposition Date of application
78/933/EEC 25 April 1980 —
82/890/EEC 22 June 1984 —
97/54/EC 22 September 1998 23 September 1998
1999/56/EC 30 June 2000(1) —
2006/26/EC 31 December 2006(2) —
— refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— may no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by this Directive.’
(a) refuse to grant EC type-approval or to grant national type-approval;
(b) prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of such a vehicle.
(a) shall no longer grant EC type-approval;
(b) may refuse to grant national type-approval.
(a) shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 2003/37/EC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1);
(b) may refuse the registration, sale or entry into service of those new vehicles.’
Directive 78/933/EEC Directive 2006/26/EC This Directive
Article 1 Article 1
Article 2 —
— Article 5 Article 2
Articles 3 to 5 Articles 3 to 5
Article 6 —
Article 7(1) —
Article 7(2) Article 6
— Article 7
— Article 8
Article 8 Article 9
Annex I Annex I
Annex II Annex II
— Annex III
— Annex IV
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 78/933/EEC of 17 October 1978 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 78/933/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States concerning the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
1. ‘Tractor’ (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks, having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.

Article 2
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval of a type of tractor on grounds relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, whether mandatory or optional, listed in points 1.5.7 to 1.5.21 of Annex I if these are installed in accordance with the requirements set out in that Annex.
2. With respect to vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down in this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of this Directive, Member States:
—
shall no longer grant EC type-approval;
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval.
3. With respect to new vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down in this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of this Directive, Member States:
—
shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany those new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 2003/37/EC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive;
—
may refuse the registration, sale or entry into service of those new vehicles.

Article 3
No Member State may refuse the registration, or prohibit the sale, entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, whether mandatory or optional, listed in points 1.5.7 to 1.5.21 of Annex I if these are installed in accordance with the requirements set out in that Annex.

Article 4
A Member State which has granted EC type-approval shall take the necessary measures to ensure that it is informed of any modification to any of the parts or characteristics referred to in point 1.1 of Annex I. The competent authorities of that Member State shall determine whether further tests should be carried out on the modified tractor type and a fresh report drawn up. Where such tests reveal failure to comply with the requirements of this Directive, the modification shall not be approved.

Article 5
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I and II shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 6
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 7
Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by the Directives listed in Annex III, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex IV.

Article 8
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following that of its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 9
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 78/933/EEC of 17 October 1978 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 78/933/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States concerning the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
1. ‘Tractor’ (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks, having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval or national type-approval of a type of tractor on grounds relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, whether mandatory or optional, listed in points 1.5.7 to 1.5.21 of Annex I if these are installed in accordance with the requirements set out in that Annex.
2. With respect to vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down in this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of this Directive, Member States:
—
shall no longer grant EC type-approval;
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval.
3. With respect to new vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down in this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of this Directive, Member States:
—
shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany those new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 2003/37/EC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1) of that Directive;
—
may refuse the registration, sale or entry into service of those new vehicles.
No Member State may refuse the registration, or prohibit the sale, entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, whether mandatory or optional, listed in points 1.5.7 to 1.5.21 of Annex I if these are installed in accordance with the requirements set out in that Annex.
A Member State which has granted EC type-approval shall take the necessary measures to ensure that it is informed of any modification to any of the parts or characteristics referred to in point 1.1 of Annex I. The competent authorities of that Member State shall determine whether further tests should be carried out on the modified tractor type and a fresh report drawn up. Where such tests reveal failure to comply with the requirements of this Directive, the modification shall not be approved.
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I and II shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by the Directives listed in Annex III, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex IV.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following that of its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICES

ANNEX I1. DEFINITIONS1.1. Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices
‘Tractor type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices’ means tractors which do not differ in such essential respects as:

1.1.1. | the dimensions and exterior shape of the tractor;
1.1.2. | the number and positioning of the devices.The following are likewise considered not to be tractors of a different type: tractors which differ within the meaning of points 1.1.1 and 1.1.2 above, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the type, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps prescribed for the tractor type in question, and tractors on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent.1.2. Transverse plane
‘Transverse plane’ means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor.
1.3. Unladen tractor
‘Unladen tractor’ means the tractor in running order, as defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I, model information document, to Directive 2003/37/EC.
1.4. Laden tractor
‘Laden tractor’ means the tractor loaded to its technically permissible maximum weight, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this weight between the axles.
1.5. Lamp
‘Lamp’ means a device designed to illuminate the road (headlamp) or to emit a light signal. Rear registration-plate lamps and reflex reflectors shall likewise be regarded as lamps.
1.5.1. Equivalent lamps
‘Equivalent lamps’ means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the tractor is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the tractor when it is approved, on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Annex.
1.5.2. Independent lamps
‘Independent lamps’ means lamps having separate lenses, separate light sources, and separate lamp bodies.
1.5.3. Grouped lamps
‘Grouped lamps’ means devices having separate lenses and separate light sources, but a common lamp body.
1.5.4. Combined lamps
‘Combined lamps’ means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body.
1.5.5. Reciprocally incorporated lamps
‘Reciprocally incorporated lamps’ means devices having separate light sources (or a single light source operating under different conditions), totally or partially common lenses and a common lamp body.
1.5.6. Concealable illuminating lamp
‘Concealable illuminating lamp’ means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term ‘retractable’ is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork.
1.5.6.1. Variable-position lamps
‘Variable position lamps’ means lamps installed on the tractor which can move in relation to it and whose lenses cannot be concealed.
1.5.7. Main-beam headlamp
‘Main-beam headlamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the tractor.
1.5.8. Dipped-beam headlamp
‘Dipped-beam headlamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the tractor without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users.
1.5.9. Front fog-lamp
‘Front fog-lamp’ means the lamp used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, rainstorms or dust clouds.
1.5.10. Reversing lamp
‘Reversing lamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the tractor and to warn other road-users that the tractor is reversing or about to reverse.
1.5.11. Direction-indicator lamp
‘Direction-indicator lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left.
1.5.12. Hazard-warning signal
‘Hazard-warning signal’ means the device permitting the simultaneous operation of all of a tractor’s direction indicator lamps to draw attention to the fact that the tractor temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users.
1.5.13. Stop lamp
‘Stop lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users to the rear of the tractor that the latter’s driver is applying the service brake.
1.5.14. Rear registration-plate lamp
‘Rear registration-plate lamp’ means the device used to illuminate the space intended to accommodate the rear registration plate; it may consist of different optical elements.
1.5.15. Front position (side) lamp
‘Front position (side) lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the front.
1.5.16. Rear position (side) lamp
‘Rear position (side) lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the tractor when the latter is viewed from the rear.
1.5.17. Rear fog-lamp
‘Rear fog-lamp’ means the lamp used to render the tractor more readily visible from the rear in dense fog.
1.5.18. Parking lamp
‘Parking lamp’ means the lamp used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary tractor, without a trailer, in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position (side) lamps.
1.5.19. End-outline marker lamp
‘End-outline marker lamp’ means the lamps fitted to the extreme outer edge as close as possible to the top of the tractor and intended clearly to indicate the tractor’s overall width. This signal is intended, for certain tractors, to complement the tractor’s front and rear position (side) lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk.
1.5.20. Reflex reflector
‘Reflex reflector’ means a device used to indicate the presence of a tractor by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the tractor, the observer being situated near the source.
For the purposes of this Directive the following are not considered as reflex reflectors:

— | retro-reflecting number plates,
— | other plates and retro-reflecting signals which must be used to comply with a Member State’s specifications for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation.1.5.21. Work lamp
‘Work lamp’ means a device for illuminating a working area or process.
1.6. Illuminating surface of a lamp
1.6.1. Illuminating surface of a lighting device
‘Illuminating surface of a lighting device’ (points 1.5.7 to 1.5.10) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector in a transverse plane. If the lamp glass (or glasses) extend(s) over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account. In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited on the side of the cut-off by the apparent projection of the line of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and glass are adjustable, the mean adjustment should be used.
1.6.2. Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector
‘Illuminating surface of a signalling lamp other than a reflex reflector’ (points 1.5.11 to 1.5.19) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 % of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used.
1.6.3. Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector
‘Illuminating surface of a reflex reflector’ (point 1.5.20) means the orthogonal projection of the reflecting surface of the reflex reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and bounded by planes touching the outer edges of the light projection surface of the reflex reflector and parallel to this axis. To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface, only vertical and horizontal planes shall be used.
1.6.4. Exterior light-emitting surfaces
‘Exterior light-emitting surfaces’, for a defined direction of observation, means the orthogonal projection of the surface of light emission in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation (see drawing in Appendix 1).
1.7. Axis of reference
‘Axis of reference’ means the characteristic axis of the light signal determined by the manufacturer of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the tractor.
1.8. Centre of reference
‘Centre of reference’ means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface, specified by the manufacturer of the lamp.
1.9. Angles of geometric visibility
‘Angles of geometric visibility’ means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of a sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles β correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp.
This shall not apply to any obstacles existing at the time when the lamp is approved if approval is required.
1.10. Extreme outer edge
‘Extreme outer edge’ on either side of the tractor means the plane parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and coinciding with its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:

1.10.1. | of tyres near their point of contact with the ground and connections for tyre-pressure gauges;
1.10.2. | of any anti-skid devices which may be mounted on the wheels;
1.10.3. | of rear-view mirrors;
1.10.4. | of side direction indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position (side) lamps and parking lamps;
1.10.5. | of customs seals affixed to the tractor and devices for securing and protecting such seals.1.11. Overall width
‘Overall width’ means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in point 1.10 above.
1.12. A single lamp
‘A single lamp’ means any combination of two or more lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function and colour, if it comprises devices, the projection of whose aggregate light-emitting surfaces in a given transverse plane occupies 60 % or more of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the light-emitting surfaces of the aforementioned lamps, provided that such combination is, where approval is required, approved as a single lamp.
This possible combination does not apply to main-beam headlamps, dipped-beam headlamps and front fog lamps.
1.13. Two lamps or an even number of lamps
‘Two lamps’ or ‘an even number of lamps’ means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual light-emitting surfaces.
1.14. Distance between two lamps
‘Distance between two lamps’ which face in the same direction, means the distance between the orthogonal projections in a plane perpendicular to the direction in question of the outlines of the two illuminating surfaces as defined according to the case mentioned in point 1.6.
1.15. Optional lamp
‘Optional lamp’ means a lamp the presence of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
1.16. Operational tell-tale
‘Operational tell-tale’ means a tell-tale showing whether a device that has been actuated is operating correctly or not.
1.17. Circuit-closed tell-tale
‘Circuit-closed tell-tale’ means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.
2. APPLICATION FOR EC TYPE-APPROVAL
| 2.1. | The application for EC approval of a tractor type with regard to the installation of its lighting and light-signalling devices shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or his representative.
| 2.2. | It shall be accompanied by the following documents in triplicate, and by the following particulars:2.2.1.a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1;2.2.2.a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’;2.2.3.layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor;2.2.4.layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6. | 2.2.1. | a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1; | 2.2.2. | a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’; | 2.2.3. | layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor; | 2.2.4. | layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6.
2.2.1. | a description of the tractor type as regards the particulars referred to in point 1.1;
2.2.2. | a list of devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type must be duly identified (for example component type-approval mark, name and address of manufacturer, etc.). The list may also include the following additional particulars in respect of each operation: ‘or equivalent devices’;
2.2.3. | layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various lamps of the tractor;
2.2.4. | layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surfaces as defined in point 1.6.
| 2.3. | An unladen tractor fitted with lighting and light-signalling equipment as described in point 2.2.2 and representative of the tractor type to be approved, must be submitted to the technical authority conducting approval tests.
| 2.4. | The document provided for in Annex II shall be attached to the type-approval document.3. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS3.1. The lighting and light-signalling devices must be so fitted that under normal conditions of use, and notwithstanding any vibration to which they may be subjected, they retain the characteristics laid down in this Annex and enable the tractor to comply with the requirements of this Annex. In particular, it shall not be possible for the adjustment of the lamps to be inadvertently disturbed.

| 3.1.1. | Tractors must be equipped with electrical connectors to enable a detachable light-signalling system to be used. In particular tractors must be fitted with the permanently connected socket outlet recommended in standard ISO R 1724 (Electrical connections for vehicles with 6 or 12 volt electrical systems applying more specifically to private motor cars and lightweight trailers or caravans) (first edition, April 1970) or ISO R 1185 (Electrical connections between towing and towed vehicles having 24 volt electrical systems used for international commercial transport purposes) (first edition, March 1970). In the case of standard ISO R 1185, the function of contact 2 shall be restricted to the rear position (side) lamp and to the end-outline marker lamp on the left-hand side.3.2. The illuminating lamps described in points 1.5.7, 1.5.8 and 1.5.9 must be so fitted that a correct setting of their alignment can easily be performed.
3.3. For all light-signalling devices, the reference axis of the lamp when fitted to the tractor must be parallel with the bearing plane of the tractor on the road and with the longitudinal plane of the tractor. In each direction a tolerance of ± 3° shall be allowed. In addition, any specific instructions as regards fitting laid down by the manufacturer must be complied with.
3.4. In the absence of specific instructions, the height and alignment of the lamps shall be checked with the unladen tractor placed on a flat, horizontal surface.
3.5. In the absence of specific requirements, lamps constituting a pair shall:

3.5.1. | be fitted to the tractor symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane;
3.5.2. | be symmetrical to one another in relation to the median longitudinal plane;
3.5.3. | satisfy the same colorimetric characteristics;
3.5.4. | have substantially identical photometric characteristics.3.6. On tractors whose external shape is asymmetrical, the requirements of points 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 shall be satisfied as far as possible. These requirements shall be regarded as having been met if the distance of the two lamps from the median longitudinal plane and from the bearing plane on the ground is the same.
3.7. Lamps having different functions may be independent or be grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated in one device, provided that each such lamp complies with the requirements applicable to it.
3.8. The maximum height above ground shall be measured from the highest point and the minimum height from the lowest point of the illuminating surface.
3.9. In the absence of specific requirements no lamps other than direction indicator lamps and the hazard warning signal may emit a flashing light.
3.10. No red light shall be visible towards the front and no white light other than that from the reversing lamp or work lamps shall be visible towards the rear.
This requirement is considered to have been met if:

3.10.1. | for the visibility of a red light towards the front: there is no direct visibility of a red light if viewed by an observer moving within zone 1 in a transverse plane situated 25 m in front of the tractor (see Appendix 2, Figure 1);
3.10.2. | for the visibility of a white light towards the rear: there is no direct visibility of a white light if viewed by an observer moving within zone 2 in a transverse plane situated 25 m behind the tractor (see Appendix 2, Figure 2).
3.10.3. | Zones 1 and 2, as seen by the observer, are limited in their respective planes as follows:3.10.3.1.as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;3.10.3.2.as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2. | 3.10.3.1. | as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground; | 3.10.3.2. | as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2.
3.10.3.1. | as regards height, by two horizontal planes which are 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;
3.10.3.2. | as regards width, by two vertical planes which make an angle of 15° towards the front and rear respectively, and towards the outside by reference to the median plane of the tractor, passing through the point (or points) of contact of vertical planes which are parallel with the median longitudinal plane of the tractor, and limiting the overall width of the tractor when on wide track.If there are several points of contact, the one furthest towards the front shall be selected for zone 1 and the one furthest towards the rear shall be selected for zone 2.3.11. The electrical connections must be such that the front and rear position (side) lamps, the end-outline marker lamps if they exist, and the rear registration-plate lamp can only be switched on and off simultaneously.
3.12. The electrical connections must be such that the main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps, and the front and rear fog lamps cannot be switched on unless the lamps referred to in point 3.11 are also switched on. This requirement shall not apply, however, to main-beam or dipped-beam headlamps when their luminous warnings consist of the intermittent lighting up at short intervals of the dipped-beam headlamps or the intermittent lighting up of the main-beam headlamps or the alternate lighting up at short intervals of the dipped-beam and main-beam headlamps.
3.13. The colours of the light emitted by the lamps or reflectors are as follows:

— | main-beam headlamp: white,
— | dipped-beam headlamp: white,
— | front fog-lamp: white or yellow,
— | reversing lamp: white,
— | direction indicator lamp: amber,
— | hazard-warning signal: amber,
— | stop lamp: red,
— | rear registration-plate lamp: white,
— | front position (side) lamp: white,
— | rear position (side) lamp: red,
— | rear fog-lamp: red,
— | parking lamp: white in front, red at the rear, amber if incorporated in the side direction indicator lamps,
— | work lamp: no specifications,
— | end-outline marker lamp: white in front, red at the rear,
— | rear reflex reflector, non-triangular: red.3.14. The function of the circuit-closed tell-tales may be fulfilled by operational tell-tales.
3.15. Concealable lamps

| 3.15.1. | The concealment of lamps shall be prohibited, with the exception of main-beam headlamps, dipped-beam headlamps and front fog-lamps, which may be concealed when not in use.
| 3.15.2. | An illuminating device in the position of use shall remain in that position if the malfunction referred to in point 3.15.2.1 occurs alone or in conjunction with one of the malfunctions described in point 3.15.2.2.3.15.2.1.The absence of power for manipulating the lamp.3.15.2.2.A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device. | 3.15.2.1. | The absence of power for manipulating the lamp. | 3.15.2.2. | A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device.
3.15.2.1. | The absence of power for manipulating the lamp.
3.15.2.2. | A break, impedance, or short-circuit to earth in the electrical circuit, defects in the hydraulic or pneumatic leads, Bowden cables, solenoids or other components controlling or transmitting the energy intended to activate the concealment device.
| 3.15.3. | In the event of a defect in the concealment control, a concealed lighting device shall be capable of being moved into the position of use without the aid of tools.
| 3.15.4. | It must be possible to move illuminating devices into the position of use and to switch them on by means of a single control, without excluding the possibility of moving them into the position of use without switching them on. However, in the case of grouped-main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps, the control referred to above is required only to activate the dipped-beam headlamps.
| 3.15.5. | It must not be possible deliberately, from the driver’s seat, to stop the movement of switched-on headlamps before they reach the position of use. If there is a danger of dazzling other road users by the movement of headlamps, they may light up only when they have reached their final position.
| 3.15.6. | At temperatures of – 30 to + 50 °C an illuminating device must be capable of reaching the fully-open position within three seconds of initial operation of the control.3.16. Variable position lamps

| 3.16.1. | In the case of tractors having a track width of 1 150 mm or less, the position of the direction indicator lamps, the front and rear position (side) lamps and the stop lamps may be varied, provided that:3.16.1.1.these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered;3.16.1.2.these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic. | 3.16.1.1. | these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered; | 3.16.1.2. | these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic.
3.16.1.1. | these lamps remain visible even when their position is altered;
3.16.1.2. | these lamps may be locked in the position required by traffic conditions. Locking must be automatic.4. INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS4.1. Main-beam headlamp
4.1.1. Presence
Optional.
4.1.2. Number
Two or four.
4.1.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.1.4. Position
4.1.4.1. Width:
The outer edges of the illuminating surface must in no case be closer to the extreme outer edge of the tractor than the outer edges of the illuminating surface of the dipped-beam headlamps.
4.1.4.2. Height:
No individual specifications.
4.1.4.3. Length:
As near to the front of the tractor as possible; however, the light emitted must not in any circumstances cause discomfort to the driver either directly, or indirectly through the rearview mirrors and/or other reflecting surfaces of the tractor.
4.1.5. Geometric visibility
The visibility of the illuminating surface, including its visibility in areas which do not appear to be illuminated in the direction of observation considered, must be ensured within a divergent space defined by generating lines based on the perimeter of the illuminating surface and forming an angle of not less than 5° with the axis of reference of the headlamp.
4.1.6. Alignment
Towards the front.
Apart from the devices necessary to maintain correct adjustment, and when there are two pairs of main-beam headlamps, one pair consisting of headlamps functioning as main-beam only, may swivel, according to the angle of lock of the steering, about an axis very near the vertical.
4.1.7. May be ‘grouped’

with the dipped-beam headlamp and the other front lamps.
4.1.8. May not be ‘combined’

with any other lamp.
4.1.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

| 4.1.9.1. | with the dipped-beam headlamp, unless the main-beam headlamp swivels according to the angle of lock of the steering;
| 4.1.9.2. | with the front position (side) lamp;
| 4.1.9.3. | with the front fog-lamp;
| 4.1.9.4. | with the parking lamp.4.1.10. Electrical connections

| 4.1.10.1 | The main-beam headlamps may be switched on either simultaneously or in pairs. For changing over from the dipped to the main beam at least one pair of main beams must be switched on. For changing over from the main to the dipped beam all main-beam headlamps must be switched off simultaneously.
| 4.1.10.2. | The dipped beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main beams.4.1.11. Circuit-closed tell-tale
Mandatory.
4.1.12. Other requirements

| 4.1.12.1. | The aggregate maximum intensity of the main beams which can be switched on simultaneously must not exceed 225 000 cd.
| 4.1.12.2. | This maximum intensity shall be obtained by adding together the individual maximum intensities measured at the time of component type-approval and shown on the relevant approval certificates.4.2. Dipped-beam headlamps
4.2.1. Presence
Mandatory.
4.2.2. Number
Two.
4.2.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.2.4. Position
4.2.4.1. Width:
No individual specifications.
4.2.4.2. Height above the ground:

| 4.2.4.2.1. | if only two dipped-beam headlamps are fitted:—minimum 500 mm,—maximum 1 200 mm.This distance may be increased to 1 500 mm, if the height of 1 200 mm cannot be observed due to the design, taking account of the conditions of use of the tractor and its working equipment; | — | minimum 500 mm, | — | maximum 1 200 mm.
— | minimum 500 mm,
— | maximum 1 200 mm.
| 4.2.4.2.2. | in the case of tractors equipped for the fitting of portable devices at the front, two dipped-beam headlamps in addition to the lamps mentioned in point 4.2.4.2.1 shall be allowed at a height not exceeding 3 000 mm, if the electrical connections are such that two pairs of dipped-beam headlamps cannot be switched on at the same time.4.2.4.3. Length:
As near to the front of the tractor as possible; however, the light emitted must not in any circumstances cause discomfort to the driver either directly or indirectly through the rearview mirrors and/or other reflecting surfaces of the tractor.
4.2.5. Geometric visibility
Defined by angelsαandβas specified in point 1.9:

α | = | 15° upwards and 10° downwards,
β | = | 45° outwards and 5° inwards.Within this field, almost the whole of the light-emitting surface of the light must be visible.
The presence of panels or other items of equipment near the lamp must not give rise to secondary effects causing discomfort to other road users.
4.2.6. Alignment

| 4.2.6.1. | The alignment of the dipped-beam headlamps must not vary according to the angle of lock of the steering.
| 4.2.6.2. | If the height of the dipped-beam headlamps is equal to or greater than 500 mm and equal to or less than 1 200 mm, it must be possible to lower the dipped beam by between 0,5 and 4 %;
| 4.2.6.3. | If the height of the dipped-beam headlamps is greater than 1 200 but not greater than 1 500 mm, the limit of 4 % laid down in point 4.2.6.2 shall be increased to 6 %; the dipped-beam headlamps referred to in point 4.2.4.2.2 must be aligned in such a way that, measured at 15 m from the lamp, the horizontal line separating the lit zone from the unlit zone is situated at a height equivalent to only half the distance between the ground and the centre of the lamp.4.2.7. May be ‘grouped’

with the main-beam headlamp and the other front lamps.
4.2.8. May not be ‘combined’

with any other lamp.
4.2.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

| 4.2.9.1. | with the main-beam headlamp, unless the latter swivels according to the angle of lock of the steering;
| 4.2.9.2. | with the other front lamps.4.2.10. Electrical connections
The control for changing over to the dipped beam must switch off all main-beam headlamps simultaneously.
The dipped beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main beams.
4.2.11 Circuit-closed tell-tale
Optional.
4.2.12. Other requirements
The requirements of point 3.5.2 shall not apply to dipped beam headlamps.
4.3. Front fog-lamp
4.3.1. Presence
Optional.
4.3.2. Number
Two.
4.3.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.3.4. Position
4.3.4.1. Width:
No individual specifications.
4.3.4.2. Height:
Not less than 250 mm above the ground.
No point on the illuminating surface must be higher than the highest point on the illuminating surface of the dipped-beam headlamp.
4.3.4.3. Length:
As near to the front of the tractor as possible; however, the light emitted must not in any circumstances cause discomfort to the driver either directly or indirectly through the rearview mirrors and/or other reflecting surfaces of the tractor.
4.3.5. Geometric visibility
Defined by anglesαandβas specified in point 1.9:

α | = | 5° upwards and downwards,
β | = | 45° outwards and 5° inwards.4.3.6. Alignment
The alignment of the front fog-lamps must not vary according to the angle of lock of the steering.
They must be directed forwards without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users.
4.3.7. May be ‘grouped’

with other front lamps.
4.3.8. May not be ‘combined’

with other front lamps.
4.3.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’:

| 4.3.9.1. | with main-beam headlamps which do not swivel according to the angle of lock of the steering when there are four headlamps;
| 4.3.9.2. | with the front position (side) lamps;
| 4.3.9.3. | with the parking lamp.4.3.10. Electrical connections
It must be possible to switch the fog-lamp on and off independently of the main-beam or dipped-beam headlamps and vice versa.
4.3.11. Circuit-closed tell-tale
Optional.
4.4. Reversing lamps
4.4.1. Presence
Optional.
4.4.2. Number
One or two.
4.4.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.4.4. Position
4.4.4.1. Width:
No individual specifications.
4.4.4.2. Height:
Not less than 250 mm and not more than 1 200 mm above the ground.
4.4.4.3. Length:
At the back of the tractor.
4.4.5. Geometric visibility
Defined by anglesαandβas specified in point 1.9:

α | = | 15° upwards and 5° downwards,
β | = | 45° to right and left if there is only one lamp,
β | = | 45° outwards and 30° inwards if there are two.4.4.6. Alignment
Rearwards.
4.4.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other rear lamp.
4.4.8. May not be ‘combined’

with other lamps.
4.4.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with other lamps.
4.4.10. Electrical connections
It can only light up if the reverse gear is engaged and if the device which controls the starting or stopping of the engine is in such a position that operation of the engine is possible.
It must not light up or remain lit up if either of the above conditions is not satisfied.
4.4.11. Tell-tale
Optional.
4.5. Direction-indicator lamp
4.5.1. Presence (see Appendix 3)Mandatory. Types of indicators fall into categories (1, 2 and 5) the assembly of which on one tractor constitutes an arrangement (A to D).
Arrangement A shall be allowed only on tractors whose overall length does not exceed 4,60 m and in the case of which the distance between the outer edges of the illuminating surfaces is not more than 1,60 m.
Arrangements B, C and D shall apply to all tractors.
Additional direction-indicator lamps optional.
4.5.2. Number
The number of devices shall be such that they can emit signals which correspond to one of the arrangements referred to in point 4.5.3.
4.5.3. Arrangement (see Appendix 3).
| A | —Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).These lamps may be independent, grouped or combined. | — | Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1), | — | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— | Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
| B | —Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).The front and repeating side lamps may be independent, grouped, or combined. | — | Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1), | — | Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5), | — | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
— | Two front direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— | Two repeating side direction indicator lamps (category 5),
— | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2).
| C | —Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2),—Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5). | — | Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1), | — | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2), | — | Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5).
— | Two front, direction indicator lamps (category 1),
— | Two rear direction indicator lamps (category 2),
— | Two repeating side indicator lamps (category 5).
| D | —Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1),—Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2). | — | Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1), | — | Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2).
— | Two front direction-indicator lamps (category 1),
— | Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2).4.5.4. Position
4.5.4.1. Width:
The edge of the illuminating surface furthest from the median longitudinal plane of the tractor must not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the tractor.
The distance between the inner edges of the two illuminating surfaces shall be not less than 500 mm.
Where the vertical distance between the rear direction-indicator lamp and the corresponding rear position (side) lamp is not more than 300 mm, the distance between the extreme outer edge of the tractor and the outer edge of the rear direction-indicator lamp must not exceed by more than 50 mm the distance between the extreme outer edge of the tractor and the outer edge of the corresponding rear position (side) lamp.
For front direction-indicator lamps the illuminating surface must be not less than 40 mm from the illuminating surface of the dipped-beam headlamps or front fog-lamps, if any. A smaller distance is permitted if the luminous intensity in the reference axis of the direction-indicator lamp is equal to at least 400 cd.
4.5.4.2. Height:
Above the ground:

— | not less than 500 mm for direction-indicator lamps in category 5,
— | not less than 400 mm for direction-indicator lamps in categories 1 and 2,
— | not more than 1 900 mm for all categories.If the structure of the tractor makes it impossible to keep to this maximum figure, the highest point on the illuminating surface may be at 2 300 mm for direction-indicator lamps in category 5, for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement A, for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement B and for those in categories 1 and 2 of arrangement D; it may be at 2 100 mm for those in categories 1 and 2 of the other arrangements.
— | up to 4 000 mm for optional direction-indicator lamps.4.5.4.3. Length:
The distance between the centre of reference of the illuminating surface of the side direction-indicator lamp (arrangements B and C) and the transverse plane which marks the forward boundary of the tractor’s overall length shall not exceed 1 800 mm. If the structure of the tractor makes it impossible to comply with the minimum angles of visibility, this distance may be increased to 2 600 mm.
4.5.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
See Appendix 3.

Vertical angle
15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 10° in the case of side repeating direction-indicator lamps of arrangements B and C if their height is less than 1 500 mm. The same applies in the case of direction indicator lamps in category 1 of arrangements B and D.
4.5.6. Alignment
If individual specifications for installation are laid down by the manufacturer they must be observed.
4.5.7. May be ‘grouped’

with one or more lamps, which may not be concealed.
4.5.8. May not be ‘combined’

with another lamp, save in accordance with the arrangements referred to in point 4.5.3.
4.5.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with a parking lamp only, but solely in the case of direction-indicator lamps in category 5.
4.5.10. Electrical connections
Direction-indicator lamps shall switch on independently of the other lamps. All direction-indicator lamps on one side of a tractor shall be switched on and off by means of one control and must flash in phase.
4.5.11. Operational tell-tale
Mandatory for all direction indicator lamps not directly visible to the driver. It may be optical or auditory or both.
If it is optical, it shall be a flashing light which, in the event of the malfunction of any of the direction indicator lamps other than the repeating side direction-indicator lamps, is either extinguished, or remains alight without flashing, or shows a marked change of frequency. If it is entirely auditory, it shall be clearly audible and shall show a marked change of frequency in the event of any malfunction.
If a tractor is equipped to draw a trailer, it must be equipped with a special optical operational tell-tale for the direction-indicator lamps on the trailer unless the tell-tale of the drawing vehicle allows the failure of any one of the direction-indicator lamps on the tractor combination thus formed to be detected.
4.5.12. Other requirements
The light shall be a flashing light flashing 90 ± 30 times per minute.
Operation of the light-signal control shall be followed within not more than one second by the appearance of the light and within not more than one and one-half seconds by its first extinction.
If a tractor is authorised to draw a trailer, the control of the direction-indicator lamps on the tractor shall also operate the indicator lamps of the trailer.
In the event of failure, other than a short-circuit, of one direction-indicator lamp, the others must continue to flash but the frequency under this condition may be different from that specified.
4.6. Hazard-warning signal
4.6.1. Presence
Mandatory.

4.6.2.Number | 4.6.2. | Number | As specified in the corresponding headings of point 4.5.
4.6.2. | Number
4.6.3.Arrangement | 4.6.3. | Arrangement
4.6.3. | Arrangement
4.6.4.Position | 4.6.4. | Position
4.6.4. | Position
4.6.4.1.Width | 4.6.4.1. | Width
4.6.4.1. | Width
4.6.4.2.Height | 4.6.4.2. | Height
4.6.4.2. | Height
4.6.4.3.Length | 4.6.4.3. | Length
4.6.4.3. | Length
4.6.5.Geometric visibility | 4.6.5. | Geometric visibility
4.6.5. | Geometric visibility
4.6.6.Alignment | 4.6.6. | Alignment
4.6.6. | Alignment
4.6.7.May/may not be ‘grouped’ | 4.6.7. | May/may not be ‘grouped’
4.6.7. | May/may not be ‘grouped’
4.6.8.May/may not be ‘combined’ | 4.6.8. | May/may not be ‘combined’
4.6.8. | May/may not be ‘combined’
4.6.9.May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ | 4.6.9. | May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.6.9. | May/may not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’4.6.10. Electrical connections
The signal shall be operated by means of a separate control enabling all the direction-indicator lamps to function in phase.
4.6.11. Circuit-closed tell-tale
Mandatory. Flashing warning light, which can operate in conjunction with the tell-tale(s) specified in point 4.5.11.
4.6.12. Other requirements
As specified in point 4.5.12. If a tractor is equipped to draw a trailer the hazard-warning signal control must be also capable of bringing the direction-indicator lamps on the trailer into action. The hazard-warning signal must be able to function even if the device which starts or stops the engine is in a position which makes it impossible to start the engine.
4.7. Stop lamps
4.7.1. Presence
Mandatory.
4.7.2. Number
Two.
4.7.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.7.4. Position
4.7.4.1. Width:
Not less than 500 mm apart. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm if the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 400 mm.
4.7.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm, not more than 1 900 mm or 2 300 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep to 1 900 mm.
4.7.4.3. Length:
At rear of tractor.
4.7.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
45° outwards and inwards.

Vertical angle
15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 10° in the case of lamps less than 1 500 mm above the ground; to 5° in the case of lamps less than 750 mm above the ground.
4.7.6. Alignment
Towards the rear of the tractor.
4.7.7. May be ‘grouped’

with one or more other rear lamps.
4.7.8. May not be ‘combined’

with another lamp.
4.7.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with the rear position (side) lamp or the parking lamp.
4.7.10. Electrical connections
must light up when the service brake is applied.
4.7.11. Operational tell-tale
Optional. If it exists, it should be a non-flashing warning light which comes on in the event of the malfunctioning of the stop lamps.
4.7.12. Other requirements
The luminous intensity of the stop lamps must be markedly greater than that of the rear position (side) lamps.
4.8. Rear registration-plate lamp
4.8.1. Presence
Mandatory.

4.8.2.Number | 4.8.2. | Number | Such that the device is capable of illuminating the space for the registration plate.
4.8.2. | Number
4.8.3.Arrangement | 4.8.3. | Arrangement
4.8.3. | Arrangement
4.8.4.Position | 4.8.4. | Position
4.8.4. | Position
4.8.4.1.Width | 4.8.4.1. | Width
4.8.4.1. | Width
4.8.4.2.Height | 4.8.4.2. | Height
4.8.4.2. | Height
4.8.4.3.Length | 4.8.4.3. | Length
4.8.4.3. | Length
4.8.5.Geometric visibility | 4.8.5. | Geometric visibility
4.8.5. | Geometric visibility
4.8.6.Alignment | 4.8.6. | Alignment
4.8.6. | Alignment4.8.7. May be ‘grouped’

with one or more rear lamps.
4.8.8. May be ‘combined’

with the rear position (side) lamps.
4.8.9. May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with another lamp.
4.8.10. Electrical connections
The device must light up only at the same time as the rear position (side) lamps.
4.8.11. Circuit-closed tell-tale
Optional. If it exists, its function should be performed by the tell-tale required for the front and rear position (side) lamps.
4.9. Front position (side) lamps
4.9.1. Presence
Mandatory.
4.9.2. Number
Two or four (see point 4.2.4.2.2).
4.9.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.9.4. Position
4.9.4.1. Width:
The point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the tractor’s median longitudinal plane must not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the tractor.
The clearance between the respective inner edges of the two illuminating surfaces must not be less than 500 mm.
4.9.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm, not more than 1 900 mm or not more than 2 300 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within the 1 900 mm prescribed above.
4.9.4.3. Length:
No specifications provided that the lamps are aligned forwards and the angles of geometrical visibility specified in point 4.9.5 are complied with.
4.9.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
For the two front position (side) lamps: 10° inwards and 80° outwards. However, the angle of 10° inward may be reduced to 5° if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep to 10°. For tractors with an overall width not exceeding 1 400 mm this angle may be reduced to 3° if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep to 10°.

Vertical angle
15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 10° if the height of the lamp above the ground is less than 1 500 mm, and to 5° if this height is less than 750 mm.
4.9.6. Alignment
Towards the front.
4.9.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other front lamp.
4.9.8. May not be ‘combined’

with any other lamps.
4.9.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with any other front lamp.
4.9.10. Electrical connections
No individual specifications.
4.9.11. Tell-tale
Mandatory. This tell-tale shall be non-flashing. It shall not be required if the instrument panel lighting can only be turned on simultaneously with the front position (side) lamps.
4.10. Rear position (side) lamps
4.10.1. Presence
Mandatory.
4.10.2. Number
Two.
4.10.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.10.4. Position
4.10.4.1. Width:
The point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the tractor’s median longitudinal plane must not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the tractor.
The distance between the inner edges of the two illuminating surfaces shall be not less than 500 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the tractor is less than 1 400 mm.
4.10.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm, not more than 1 900 mm, or not more than 2 300 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 900 mm.
4.10.4.3. Length:
At rear of tractor.
4.10.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
For the two rear position (side) lamps:

— | either 45° inwards and 80° outwards,
— | or 80° inwards and 45° outwards.
Vertical angle
15° above and below the horizontal. The angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 10° if the height of the lamp above the ground is less than 1 500 mm, and to 5° if this height is less than 750 mm.
4.10.6. Alignment
Towards the rear.
4.10.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other rear lamp.
4.10.8. May be ‘combined’

with the rear registration-plate lamp.
4.10.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with the stop lamp, the rear fog-lamp or the parking lamp.
4.10.10. Electrical connections
No individual specifications.
4.10.11. Circuit-closed tell-tale
Mandatory. It must be combined with that of the front position (side) lamps.
4.11. Rear fog lamp
4.11.1. Presence
Optional.
4.11.2. Number
One or two.
4.11.3. Arrangement
This must satisfy the conditions of geometric visibility.
4.11.4. Position
4.11.4.1. Width:
If there is only one rear fog lamp, it must be on the opposite side of the median longitudinal plane of the tractor to the direction of traffic prescribed in the country of registration.
In all cases the distance between the rear fog-lamp and the stop lamp must be greater than 100 mm.
4.11.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm, not more than 1 900 mm, or not more than 2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 900 mm.
4.11.4.3. Length:
At rear of tractor.
4.11.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
25° inwards and outwards.

Vertical angle
5° above and below the horizontal.
4.11.6. Alignment
Towards the rear.
4.11.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other rear lamps.
4.11.8. May not be ‘combined’

with other lamps.
4.11.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

with rear position (side) lamps or the parking lamp.
4.11.10. Electrical connections
Must be such that the rear fog lamp can light up only when the dipped-beam headlamps or the front fog-lamps are in use.
If there are front fog-lamps, it must be possible to extinguish the rear fog-lamp independently of the front fog-lamps.
4.11.11. Circuit-closed tell tale
Mandatory. An independent, fixed-intensity warning light.
4.12. Parking lamp
4.12.1. Presence
Optional.
4.12.2. Number
Dependent upon the arrangement.
4.12.3. Arrangement

— | either two front lamps and two rear lamps,
— | or one lamp on each side.4.12.4. Position
4.12.4.1. Width:
The point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the median longitudinal plane of the tractor must not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the tractor. Furthermore, in the case of a pair of lamps, the lamps must be on the sides of the tractor.
4.12.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm, not more than 1 900 mm or not more than 2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 900 mm.
4.12.4.3. Length:
No individual specifications.
4.12.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
45° outwards, towards, the front and towards the rear.

Vertical angle
15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 10° if the height of the lamp above the ground is less than 1 500 mm; and to 5° if this height is less than 750 mm.
4.12.6. Alignment
Such that the lamps meet the conditions concerning visibility towards the front and towards the rear.
4.12.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other lamp.
4.12.8. May not be ‘combined’

with other lamps.
4.12.9. May be ‘reciprocally incorporated’

— | at the front: with the position (side) lamps, the dipped-beam headlamps, the main-beam headlamps and the front fog-lamps,
— | at the rear: with the position (side) lamps, the stop lamps and the rear fog-lamps.
— | with the direction indicator lamps in category 5.4.12.10. Electrical connections
The connections must allow the parking lamp(s) on the same side of the tractor to be lit independently of any other lamps.
4.12.11. Tell-tale
Optional. If there is one, it must not be possible to confuse it with the tell-tale for the position (side) lamps.
4.12.12. Other requirements
The function of this lamp may also be performed by simultaneously switching on the front and rear position (side) lamps on the same side of the tractor.
4.13. End-outline marker lamp
4.13.1. Presence
Optional on tractors exceeding 2,10 m in width.
Prohibited on all other tractors.
4.13.2. Number
Two visible from the front and two visible from the rear.
4.13.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.13.4. Position
4.13.4.1. Width:
As close as possible to the extreme outer edge of the tractor.
4.13.4.2. Height:
At the maximum height compatible with the requirements relating to the position as regards width and to the symmetry of the lamps.
4.13.4.3. Length:
No individual specifications.
4.13.5. Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle
80° outwards.

Vertical angle
5° above and 20° below the horizontal.
4.13.6. Alignment
Such that the lamps meet the visibility requirements towards the front and towards the rear.

4.13.7.May not be ‘grouped’ | 4.13.7. | May not be ‘grouped’ | with other lamps, except for the case referred to in point 4.2.4.2.2.
4.13.7. | May not be ‘grouped’
4.13.8.May not be ‘combined’ | 4.13.8. | May not be ‘combined’
4.13.8. | May not be ‘combined’
4.13.9.May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ | 4.13.9. | May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.13.9. | May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’4.13.10. Electrical connections
No individual specifications.
4.13.11. Tell-tale
Optional.
4.13.12. Other requirements
Subject to all the other conditions being met, the lamp visible from the front and the lamp visible from the rear, on the same side of the tractor, may be combined in one device.
The position of an end-outline marker lamp in relation to the corresponding position (side) lamp shall be such that the distance between the projections on a transverse vertical plane of the points nearest to the illuminating surfaces of the two lamps considered is not less than 200 mm.
4.14. Rear reflex reflector, non triangular
4.14.1. Presence
Mandatory.
4.14.2. Number
Two or four (see point 4.14.5.2.).
4.14.3. Arrangement
No individual specifications.
4.14.4. Position
4.14.4.1. Width:
The point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the tractor’s median longitudinal plane must be not more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the tractor.
The distance between the interior edges of the reflex reflectors shall be 600 mm minimum. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm if the overall width of the tractor is less than 1 300 mm.
4.14.4.2. Height:
Above the ground: not less than 400 mm and not more than 900 mm. The upper limit may be increased to 1 200 mm if it is not possible to keep within the height of 900 mm without having to use fixing devices liable to be easily damaged or bent.
4.14.4.3. Length:
No individual specifications.
4.14.5. Geometric visibility

| 4.14.5.1. | Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards.Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm. | | Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards. | | Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.
| Horizontal angle30° inwards and outwards.
| Vertical angle15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.
| 4.14.5.2. | If it is impossible to observe the above position and visibility requirements, four reflex reflectors may be fitted in accordance with the following installation specifications:4.14.5.2.1.two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°.4.14.5.2.2.the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1. | 4.14.5.2.1. | two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°. | 4.14.5.2.2. | the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1.
4.14.5.2.1. | two reflex reflectors must keep within the maximum height of 900 mm above the ground, observe a distance between the interior edges of at least 400 mm and have a vertical angle of visibility above the horizontal of 15°.
4.14.5.2.2. | the other two shall keep within a maximum height of 2 300 mm above the ground and shall be bound by the requirements of points 4.14.4.1 and 4.14.5.1.4.14.6. Alignment
Towards the rear.
4.14.7. May be ‘grouped’

with any other lamp.
4.14.8. Other requirements
The illuminating surface of the reflex reflector may have parts in common with that of any other rear lamp.
4.15. Work lamp
4.15.1. Presence
Optional.
4.15.2. Number
No individual specifications.

4.15.3.Arrangement | 4.15.3. | Arrangement | No individual specifications.
4.15.3. | Arrangement
4.15.4.Position | 4.15.4. | Position
4.15.4. | Position
4.15.4.1.Width | 4.15.4.1. | Width
4.15.4.1. | Width
4.15.4.2.Height | 4.15.4.2. | Height
4.15.4.2. | Height
4.15.4.3.Length | 4.15.4.3. | Length
4.15.4.3. | Length
4.15.5.Geometric visibility | 4.15.5. | Geometric visibility
4.15.5. | Geometric visibility
4.15.6.Alignment | 4.15.6. | Alignment
4.15.6. | Alignment
4.15.7.May be ‘grouped’ | 4.15.7. | May be ‘grouped’ | with another lamp.
4.15.7. | May be ‘grouped’
4.15.8May not be ‘combined’ | 4.15.8 | May not be ‘combined’
4.15.8 | May not be ‘combined’
4.15.9.May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’ | 4.15.9. | May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’
4.15.9. | May not be ‘reciprocally incorporated’4.15.10. Electrical connections
This lamp must be illuminated independently of all other lamps in view of the fact that it does not illuminate the road or act as a signalling device on the road.
4.15.11. Tell-tale
Optional.
5. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION
| 5.1. | Every series-produced tractor shall conform to the tractor type which received type approval as regards the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices and their characteristics as specified by this Directive.

Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Figure 1

Zone 1
Visibility of a red lamp to the front
The visibility test must be carried out at maximum track width.

Figure 2

Visibility of a white light to the rear
Zone 2

Direction-Indicator Lamp: Geometrical Visibility

Appendix 3

MODEL

ANNEX II
Name of administration
ANNEX TO THE EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICES
Article 4(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical unitsEC type-approval No …
1. Make (trade name): …
2. Vehicle type and commercial description classification: …
3. Manufacturer’s name and address: …
…
4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer’s representative: …
…
…
5. Lighting equipment installed on the tractor submitted for approval(1): …

| 5.1. | Main-beam headlamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.2. | Dipped-beam headlines: yes/no(2)
| 5.3. | Front fog-lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.4. | Reversing lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.5. | Front direction-indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.6. | Rear direction-indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.7. | Repeating side indicator lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.8. | Hazard-warning device: yes/no(2)
| 5.9. | Stop lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.10. | Rear registration-plate lamp: yes/no(2)
| 5.11. | Front position (side) lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.12. | Rear position (side) lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.13. | Rear fog-lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.14. | Parking lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.15. | End-outline marker lamps: yes/no(2)
| 5.16. | Rear reflex reflectors, non triangular: yes/no(2)
| 5.17. | Work lamp: yes/no(2)6. Equivalent lamps: yes/no(2)(see point 15)
…
…
7. Tractor submitted for approval on:
…
8. Technical service conducting the EC type-approval tests:
…
…
9. Date of report issued by that service: …
10. Number of report issued by that service: …
11. EC type-approval with regard to the lighting and light signalling devices is granted/refused(2)
12. Place: …
13. Date: …
14. Signature
15. The following document, bearing the type-approval mark indicated above, is annexed to this type-approval certificate: … list(s) of devices presented by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly; for each device the manufacturer’s mark and the component type-approval mark are indicated.
This (these) list(s) include(s) a schedule of equivalent lamps(2)
16. Remarks:
…
…
…

(1) Annex the layout drawing for the tractor, as mentioned in point 2.2.3 of Annex I to Directive [2009/61/EC] of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

PART A

ANNEX III
Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
(referred to in Article 7)
Council Directive 78/933/EEC(OJ L 325, 20.11.1978, p. 16) |
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45) | Only the references made by Article 1(1) to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EEC
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24) | Only the references made by Article 1(1) to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EEC
Commission Directive 1999/56/EC(OJ L 146, 11.6.1999, p. 31) |
Commission Directive 2006/26/EC(OJ L 65, 7.3.2006, p. 22) | Only the references made by Article 3 and Annex III to the provisions of Directive 78/933/EECPART B
Time-limits for transposition into national law and application
(referred to in Article 7)
Directive | Time-limit for transposition | Date of application
78/933/EEC | 25 April 1980 | —
82/890/EEC | 22 June 1984 | —
97/54/EC | 22 September 1998 | 23 September 1998
1999/56/EC | 30 June 2000(1) | —
2006/26/EC | 31 December 2006(2) | —
(1) In accordance with Article 2 of Directive 1999/56/EC:
‘1. From 1 July 2000, Member States may not:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of a type of tractor, or
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the tractors in question meet the requirements of Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by this Directive. 2. From 1 January 2001, Member States:
—
may no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 78/933/EEC, as amended by this Directive.’

(2) In accordance with Article 5 of Directive 2006/26/EC:
‘1. With effect from 1 January 2007, with respect to vehicles which comply with the requirements laid down respectively in Directives 74/151/EEC, 78/933/EEC, 77/311/EEC and 89/173/EEC as amended by this Directive, Member States shall not, on grounds relating to the subject-matter of the Directive concerned:
(a) refuse to grant EC type-approval or to grant national type-approval;
(b) prohibit the registration, sale or entry into service of such a vehicle. 2. With effect from 1 July 2007, with respect to vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down respectively in Directives 74/151/EEC, 78/933/EEC, 77/311/EEC and 89/173/EEC as amended by this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of the Directive concerned, Member States:
(a) shall no longer grant EC type-approval;
(b) may refuse to grant national type-approval. 3. With effect from 1 July 2009, with respect to vehicles which do not comply with the requirements laid down respectively in Directives 74/151/EEC, 78/933/EEC, 77/311/EEC and 89/173/EEC as amended by this Directive, and on grounds relating to the subject-matter of the Directive concerned, Member States:
(a) shall consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles in accordance with the provisions of Directive 2003/37/EC to be no longer valid for the purposes of Article 7(1);
(b) may refuse the registration, sale or entry into service of those new vehicles.’

ANNEX IV
Correlation table

Directive 78/933/EEC | Directive 2006/26/EC | This Directive
Article 1 | | Article 1
Article 2 | | —
— | Article 5 | Article 2
Articles 3 to 5 | | Articles 3 to 5
Article 6 | | —
Article 7(1) | | —
Article 7(2) | | Article 6
— | | Article 7
— | | Article 8
Article 8 | | Article 9
Annex I | | Annex I
Annex II | | Annex II
— | | Annex III
— | | Annex IV

Pending: 32009L0060

30.7.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 198/15
(1) Council Directive 74/152/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the maximum design speed of and load platforms for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 74/152/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards their maximum design speed and load platforms. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
1.1. For the type-approval tests, the average speed shall be measured on a straight track, which the tractor shall traverse in both directions from a flying start. The soil of the track shall be stabilised; the track shall be flat and at least 100 metres long; however it may include slopes of not more than 1,5 %.
1.2. During the test, the tractor shall be unladen and in running order without ballast weights or special equipment and the tyre pressures shall be those specified for road use.
1.3. During the test the tractor shall be fitted with new pneumatic tyres having the greatest rolling radius intended by the manufacturer for the tractor.
1.4. The gear ratio used during the test shall be that producing the maximum vehicle speed and the throttle shall be fully open.
1.5. In order to take account of various unavoidable errors due, in particular, to the measuring technique and to the increase in running speed of the engine with a partial load, a measured speed exceeding the value for the maximum design speed by 3 km/h shall be acceptable for the type-approval test.
1.6. So that the authorities competent for the type-approval of tractors may calculate their maximum theoretical speed, the manufacturer shall specify as a guide the gear ratio, the actual forward movement of the powered wheels corresponding to one complete revolution, and the rpm at maximum power output with the throttle fully open and the speed governor, if fitted, adjusted as laid down by the manufacturer.
2.1. The centre of gravity of the platform shall be situated between the axles.
2.2. The dimensions of the platform shall be such that:—the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger,—the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment, — the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger, — the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment,
— the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger,
— the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment,
— the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger,
— the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment,
2.3. The platform shall be laid out symmetrically in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the tractor.
2.4. The height of the load platform above the ground shall be not more than 150 cm.
2.5. The type of platform and the way it is fitted shall be such that, with a normal load, the driver’s field of vision remains adequate and the various compulsory lighting and light-signalling devices may continue to fulfil their proper function.
2.6. The load platform shall be detachable; it shall be attached to the tractor in such a way as to avoid any risk of accidental detachment.
Council Directive 74/152/EEC(OJ L 84, 28.3.1974, p. 33).
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45). Only as regards the references to Directive 74/152/EEC in Article 1(1)
Commission Directive 88/412/EEC(OJ L 200, 26.7.1988, p. 31).
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24). Only as regards the references to Directive 74/152/EEC in Article 1, first indent.
Commission Directive 98/89/EC(OJ L 322, 1.12.1998, p. 40).
Directive Time-limit for transposition Date of application
74/152/EEC 8 September 1975 —
82/890/EEC 22 June 1984 —
88/412/EEC 30 September 1988(1) —
97/54/EC 22 September 1998 23 September 1998
98/89/EC 31 December 1999(2) —
— refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type approval; or,
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC for a type of tractor of which the maximum design speed and load platforms do not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type approval in respect of a type of tractor of which the maximum design speed and load platforms do not comply with the provisions of this Directive.’,
— refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EC type approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type approval, or,
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC for a type of tractor if this does not meet the requirements of Directive 74/152/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type approval in respect of a type of tractor if this does not meet the requirements of Directive 74/152/EEC as amended by this Directive.’,
Directive 74/152/EEC Directive 98/89/EC This Directive
Article 1 Article 1
Article 2 Article 2
Articles 3 to 5 Articles 3 to 5
Article 6(1) —
Article 6(2) Article 6
— Article 7
— Article 8
Article 7 Article 9
Annex Annex I
— Annex II
— Annex III
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 74/152/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the maximum design speed of and load platforms for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 74/152/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards their maximum design speed and load platforms. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
1. ‘Tractor’ (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.

Article 2
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to its maximum design speed or load platform, if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annex I.
2. Member States may not issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.

Article 3
No Member State may refuse registration or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the maximum design speed or the load platforms if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annex I.

Article 4
1. No Member State may prohibit the fitting of load platforms or require that tractors be fitted with one or more such platforms.
2. No Member State may prohibit the carriage on load platforms of products which they permit to be carried on trailers used for agriculture or forestry purposes. Within the limits laid down by the manufacturer, a maximum load of at least 80 % of the weight of the tractor in running order is authorised.

Article 5
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annex I shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 6
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 7
Directive 74/152/EEC, as amended by the Directives listed in Annex II, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex III.

Article 8
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 9
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 74/152/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the maximum design speed of and load platforms for wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 74/152/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5)and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors as regards their maximum design speed and load platforms. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently, the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
1. ‘Tractor’ (agricultural or forestry) means any motor vehicle, fitted with wheels or endless tracks and having at least two axles, the main function of which lies in its tractive power and which is specially designed to tow, push, carry or power certain tools, machinery or trailers intended for agricultural or forestry use. It may be equipped to carry a load and passengers.
2. This Directive shall apply only to tractors defined in paragraph 1 which are equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a maximum design speed of between 6 and 40 km/h.
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to its maximum design speed or load platform, if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annex I.
2. Member States may not issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
No Member State may refuse registration or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the maximum design speed or the load platforms if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annex I.
1. No Member State may prohibit the fitting of load platforms or require that tractors be fitted with one or more such platforms.
2. No Member State may prohibit the carriage on load platforms of products which they permit to be carried on trailers used for agriculture or forestry purposes. Within the limits laid down by the manufacturer, a maximum load of at least 80 % of the weight of the tractor in running order is authorised.
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annex I shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 74/152/EEC, as amended by the Directives listed in Annex II, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time-limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex II, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex III.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

1.   Maximum design speed

ANNEX I
| 1.1. | For the type-approval tests, the average speed shall be measured on a straight track, which the tractor shall traverse in both directions from a flying start. The soil of the track shall be stabilised; the track shall be flat and at least 100 metres long; however it may include slopes of not more than 1,5 %.
| 1.2. | During the test, the tractor shall be unladen and in running order without ballast weights or special equipment and the tyre pressures shall be those specified for road use.
| 1.3. | During the test the tractor shall be fitted with new pneumatic tyres having the greatest rolling radius intended by the manufacturer for the tractor.
| 1.4. | The gear ratio used during the test shall be that producing the maximum vehicle speed and the throttle shall be fully open.
| 1.5. | In order to take account of various unavoidable errors due, in particular, to the measuring technique and to the increase in running speed of the engine with a partial load, a measured speed exceeding the value for the maximum design speed by 3 km/h shall be acceptable for the type-approval test.
| 1.6. | So that the authorities competent for the type-approval of tractors may calculate their maximum theoretical speed, the manufacturer shall specify as a guide the gear ratio, the actual forward movement of the powered wheels corresponding to one complete revolution, and the rpm at maximum power output with the throttle fully open and the speed governor, if fitted, adjusted as laid down by the manufacturer.2. Load platforms

| 2.1. | The centre of gravity of the platform shall be situated between the axles.
| 2.2. | The dimensions of the platform shall be such that:—the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger,—the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment, | — | the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger, | — | the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment,
— | the length does not exceed 1,4 times the front or rear track of the tractor, whichever is the larger,
— | the width does not exceed the maximum overall width of the tractor without equipment,
| 2.3. | The platform shall be laid out symmetrically in relation to the longitudinal median plane of the tractor.
| 2.4. | The height of the load platform above the ground shall be not more than 150 cm.
| 2.5. | The type of platform and the way it is fitted shall be such that, with a normal load, the driver’s field of vision remains adequate and the various compulsory lighting and light-signalling devices may continue to fulfil their proper function.
| 2.6. | The load platform shall be detachable; it shall be attached to the tractor in such a way as to avoid any risk of accidental detachment.

Part A

ANNEX II
Repealed Directive with its successive amendments
(referred to in Article 7)
Council Directive 74/152/EEC(OJ L 84, 28.3.1974, p. 33). |
Council Directive 82/890/EEC(OJ L 378, 31.12.1982, p. 45). | Only as regards the references to Directive 74/152/EEC in Article 1(1)
Commission Directive 88/412/EEC(OJ L 200, 26.7.1988, p. 31). |
Directive 97/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 277, 10.10.1997, p. 24). | Only as regards the references to Directive 74/152/EEC in Article 1, first indent.
Commission Directive 98/89/EC(OJ L 322, 1.12.1998, p. 40). |
Part B

List of time-limits for transposition into national law and application
(referred to in Article 7)
Directive | Time-limit for transposition | Date of application
74/152/EEC | 8 September 1975 | —
82/890/EEC | 22 June 1984 | —
88/412/EEC | 30 September 1988(1) | —
97/54/EC | 22 September 1998 | 23 September 1998
98/89/EC | 31 December 1999(2) | —
(1) In conformity with Article 2 of Directive 88/412/EEC:
‘1. From 1 October 1988 no Member State may:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EEC type-approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type approval; or,
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the maximum design speed and load platforms of this type of tractor or tractors comply with the provisions of this Directive. 2. From 1 October 1989 Member States:
—
may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC for a type of tractor of which the maximum design speed and load platforms do not comply with the provisions of this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type approval in respect of a type of tractor of which the maximum design speed and load platforms do not comply with the provisions of this Directive.’,

(2) In conformity with Article 2 of Directive 98/89/EC:
‘1. From 1 January 2000 no Member State may:
—
refuse, in respect of a type of tractor, to grant EC type approval, to issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type approval, or,
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if those tractors meet the requirements of Directive 74/152/EEC, as amended by this Directive. 2. From 1 October 2004, Member States:
—
may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 10(1), final indent, of Directive 74/150/EEC for a type of tractor if this does not meet the requirements of Directive 74/152/EEC, as amended by this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type approval in respect of a type of tractor if this does not meet the requirements of Directive 74/152/EEC as amended by this Directive.’,

ANNEX III
CORRELATION TABLE

Directive 74/152/EEC | Directive 98/89/EC | This Directive
Article 1 | | Article 1
| Article 2 | Article 2
Articles 3 to 5 | | Articles 3 to 5
Article 6(1) | | —
Article 6(2) | | Article 6
— | | Article 7
— | | Article 8
Article 7 | | Article 9
Annex | | Annex I
— | | Annex II
— | | Annex III

Pending: 32009L0057

3.10.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 261/1
(1) Council Directive 77/536/EEC of 28 June 1977 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality, the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 77/536/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards the roll-over protection structures. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
(a) clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b) fixed or adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c) possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d) mass between 1,5 and 6 tonnes, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.
ANNEX I Conditions for EC component type-approval
ANNEX II Conditions for testing the strength of the roll-over protection structures and of their attachment to tractors
ANNEX III Test procedures
ANNEX IV Figures
ANNEX V Model report relating to the EC component type-approval test of a roll-over protection structure (safety frame or cab) with regard to its strength as well as to the strength of its attachment to the tractor
ANNEX VI Marks
ANNEX VII Model of EC component type-approval certificate
ANNEX VIII Conditions for EC type-approval
ANNEX IX Annex to the EC type-approval certificate for a tractor with regard to the strength of the roll-over protection structures (safety cab or frame) and the strength of their attachment to the tractor
ANNEX X Part A: Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendmentsPart B: Time limits for transposition into national law and application
ANNEX XI Correlation table
1.1. A roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
1.2. The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that, in the event of roll-over, they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.
2.1. Every roll-over protection structure and its attachment to a tractor must be so designed and constructed as to fulfil the essential purpose laid down in point 1.
2.2. This requirement shall be checked by one of the two test methods described in Annex III. The method chosen shall take account of the tractor mass as follows:for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B,for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A,as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply. for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B, for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A, as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply.
for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B,
for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A,
as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply.
for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B,
for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A,
as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply.
3.1. The application for EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a roll-over protection structure and the strength of its attachment to a tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by the manufacturer of the roll-over protection structure or by their authorised representatives.
3.2. The application for EC component type-approval shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars:general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V). general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components, photographs from side and rear showing mounting details, brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation, details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
3.3. A tractor representative of the tractor type for which the protection structure to be approved is intended shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the component type-approval tests. This tractor shall be fitted with the roll-over protection structure.
3.4. The holder of EC component type-approval may request its extension to other tractor types. The competent authority which has granted the original EC component type-approval shall grant the extension if the approved roll-over protection structure and the type(s) of tractor for which the extension is requested comply with the following conditions:the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical,the position of the seat has not been changed. the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test, the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical, any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical, the position of the seat has not been changed.
the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical,
the position of the seat has not been changed.
the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical,
the position of the seat has not been changed.
4.1. Every roll-over protection structure conforming to the approved type shall bear the following markings:4.1.1.the trade mark or name;4.1.2.a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;4.1.3.serial number of the protection structure;4.1.4.make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended. 4.1.1. the trade mark or name; 4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI; 4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure; 4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.2. All these particulars must appear on a small plate.
4.3. These markings must be visible, legible and indelible.
1.2.1. A roll-over protection structure must be tested on a tractor of the type for which it is designed. It must be attached to the tractor in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer of the tractor and/or those of the manufacturer of the roll-over protection structure.
1.2.2. For the tests a tractor must be fitted with all structural components of the series production which may influence the strength of the roll-over protection structure or which may be necessary for the strength test.Components which may create a hazard in the zone of clearance must also be fitted so that they may be examined as to their compliance with the requirements of point 4.1 of this Annex.
1.2.3. Tests shall be made with the tractor stationary.
2.1.1. A pendulum weight shall be suspended by two chains or wire ropes from pivot points not less than 6 m above the ground. Means shall be provided for adjusting independently the suspended height of the weight and the angle between the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes.
2.1.2. The weight shall be 2 000 ± 20 kg excluding the weight of the chains or wire ropes which themselves shall not exceed 100 kg. The length of the sides of the impact face shall be 680 ± 20 mm (see Annex IV, fig. 4). The weight shall be filled in such a way that the position of its centre of gravity is constant.
2.1.3. Means shall be provided of pulling the weight back as a pendulum to a height which is determined for each test. A quick-release mechanism shall allow the weight to swing downwards without altering the tilt in relation to the supporting chains or wire ropes.
2.3.1. The tractor shall be lashed by means of restraining and tensioning devices to ground rails rigidly attached to a non-yielding concrete base. The rails shall be suitably spaced to enable the tractor to be lashed down as illustrated in Annex IV, figs 5, 6 and 7. For each test the tractor wheels and any axle stands used shall rest on the non-yielding base.
2.3.2. Apart from the tensioning devices and ground rail attachments the tractor shall be lashed down with wire rope of the dimensions specified.This wire rope shall be any round strand, fibre core, construction 6 × 19 in accordance with ISO 2408. The nominal rope diameter shall be 13 mm.
2.3.3. The central pivot of an articulated tractor shall be supported and lashed down as appropriate for the front, rear and side impacts and for the crushing tests and shall, in addition, be propped from the side for the side impact. The front and rear wheels need not be in line if this makes it more convenient to attach appropriate wire ropes.
2.4.1. A beam shall be used as a prop for the wheel in the side impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7.
2.4.2. A softwood beam of approximately 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped to the floor to brace the tyres on the side opposite the impact as shown in Annex IV, figs 5, 6 and 7.
2.5.1. Additional props and lashings shall be used for articulated tractors. Their purpose is to ensure that the section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is fitted is as rigid as that of a rigid tractor.
2.5.2. Additional specific details are given in Annex III for the impact and crushing tests.
2.7.1. For the tests laid down in Annex III, Parts A and B, a device must be used on which a moving friction collar is tightly fitted on a horizontal rod for the purpose of measuring the difference between maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection during a side impact test.
2.7.2. For the tests laid down in Annex III, Part A, measurements shall be made after the laboratory test to determine whether any part of the protection structure has entered the zone of clearance prescribed in point 2 of Annex III, Part A.
2.7.3. For the tests laid down in Annex III, Part B, equipment must be provided — which may include photographic equipment — so that after the laboratory tests it may be established whether any part of the protection structure has, during these tests, entered or come into contact with the zone of clearance prescribed in point 2 of Annex III, Part B.
2.8.1. linear dimensions measured during test (except point 2.8.2); protection structure and tractor dimensions, zone of clearance and tyre deflections when lashed for impact tests: ± 3 mm;
2.8.2. height of pendulum weight set for impact tests: ± 6 mm;
2.8.3. measured tractor mass: ± 20 kg;
2.8.4. load applied in crushing tests: ± 2 %;
2.8.5. angle of weight-supporting chains or wire ropes at the point of impact: ± 2 °.
3.1.1.1. The list and sequence of tests shall be as follows. The item numbers are those in which the tests are described in Annex III, Parts A and B:1.impact from the rear:1.1,2.crushing test at the rear:1.4,3.impact from the front:1.2,4.impact from the side:1.3,5.crushing test at the front:1.5. 1.impact from the rear: 1. impact from the rear: 1.1, 2.crushing test at the rear: 2. crushing test at the rear: 1.4, 3.impact from the front: 3. impact from the front: 1.2, 4.impact from the side: 4. impact from the side: 1.3, 5.crushing test at the front: 5. crushing test at the front: 1.5.
1.impact from the rear: 1. impact from the rear: 1.1,
1. impact from the rear:
2.crushing test at the rear: 2. crushing test at the rear: 1.4,
2. crushing test at the rear:
3.impact from the front: 3. impact from the front: 1.2,
3. impact from the front:
4.impact from the side: 4. impact from the side: 1.3,
4. impact from the side:
5.crushing test at the front: 5. crushing test at the front: 1.5.
5. crushing test at the front:
1.impact from the rear: 1. impact from the rear: 1.1,
1. impact from the rear:
2.crushing test at the rear: 2. crushing test at the rear: 1.4,
2. crushing test at the rear:
3.impact from the front: 3. impact from the front: 1.2,
3. impact from the front:
4.impact from the side: 4. impact from the side: 1.3,
4. impact from the side:
5.crushing test at the front: 5. crushing test at the front: 1.5.
5. crushing test at the front:
1. impact from the rear:
2. crushing test at the rear:
3. impact from the front:
4. impact from the side:
5. crushing test at the front:
3.1.1.2. If, during the test, any part of the restraining equipment moves or breaks, the test shall be repeated.
3.1.1.3. No repairs or adjustments to the tractor or roll-over protection structure may be carried out during the test.
3.1.1.4. The tractor gear-box shall be in neutral and the brakes off throughout the test.
3.1.1.5. In the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the first impact shall be longitudinal and shall be applied at the heaviest extremity (with more than 50 % of the mass of the tractor). It shall be followed by a crushing test at the same extremity. The second impact shall be on the lightest extremity, and the third impact shall be from the side. Lastly, a second crushing test shall be carried out on the lightest extremity.
Tyre pressure (bar) Deflection (mm)
Radial-ply tyres Diagonal-ply tyres Front Rear
Front Rear Front Rear
Four-wheel drive, front and rear wheels of the same size 1,20 1,20 1,00 1,00 25 25
Four-wheel drive, front wheels smaller than rear 1,80 1,20 1,50 1,00 20 25
Two-wheel drive 2,40 1,20 2,00 1,00 15 25
4.1. A roll-over protection structure submitted for EC component type-approval shall be considered as having satisfied requirements concerning strength if it fulfils the following conditions:4.1.1.it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B;4.1.2.for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B;4.1.3.for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm. 4.1.1. it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B; 4.1.2. for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B; 4.1.3. for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm.
4.1.1. it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B;
4.1.2. for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B;
4.1.3. for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm.
4.1.1. it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B;
4.1.2. for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B;
4.1.3. for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm.
4.2. There is no other feature presenting a particular hazard to the driver, for example, glass of a type likely to shatter dangerously, insufficient padding inside the roof or where the driver’s head may strike.
5.1. The test report shall be attached to the EC component type-approval certificate referred to in Annex VII. The presentation of the report shall be as shown in Annex V. The report shall include:5.1.1.a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system;5.1.2.details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor;5.1.3.a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction;5.1.4.a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted. 5.1.1. a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system; 5.1.2. details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor; 5.1.3. a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction; 5.1.4. a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted.
5.1.1. a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system;
5.1.2. details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor;
5.1.3. a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction;
5.1.4. a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted.
5.1.1. a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system;
5.1.2. details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor;
5.1.3. a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction;
5.1.4. a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted.
5.2. The report must identify clearly the tractor type (make, type, commercial description, etc.) used for testing and the types for which the roll-over protection structure is intended.
5.3. If EC component type-approval is being extended for other tractor types, the report must include the exact reference of the report of the original EC component type-approval as well as precise indications regarding the requirements laid down in point 3.4 of Annex I.
1.1.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a rearward overturning accident, normally the upper edge. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be one-sixth of the width of the top of the roll-over protection structure inwards from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the back of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than that inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).If a protruding member would present an inadequate area for the weight, a steel plate of appropriate thickness and depth and about 300 mm in length shall be fastened to that member in such a manner that the strength of the roll-over protection structure is not affected.
1.1.2. Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle. They shall either be in the plane in which the centre of gravity of the pendulum will swing or more than one lashing shall give a resultant force in this plane, as in Annex IV, fig. 5.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped in front of the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
1.1.3. Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the rear axle in Annex IV, fig. 5. The point of articulation will then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm and will be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
1.1.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 Wwhere H is the height of fall in millimetres and W the mass of the tractor as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II.The weight shall then be released and allowed to crash against the roll-over protection structure.
1.2.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first if the tractor overturned sideways whilst travelling forward, normally the top front corner. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be not more than 80 mm from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the front of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than 80 mm inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).
1.2.2. Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down as indicated in Annex IV, fig. 6. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam approximately 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped behind the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
1.2.3. Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the front axle in Annex IV, fig. 6. The point of articulation shall then be supported by a beam approximately 100 mm × 100 mm and shall be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
1.2.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 W.
1.3.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are vertical unless the protection structure at the point of contact is, during deflection, other than vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining vertical. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a sideways overturning accident, normally the upper edge. Unless it is certain that another part of this edge would hit the ground first, the point of impact shall be in the plane at right angles to the median plane of the tractor and passing through the middle of the seat at the mid-point of adjustment. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact.
1.3.2. For rigid tractors, any axle the position of which is rigid relative to the protection structure shall be lashed down on the side on which the impact is to be administered. In the case of a two-wheel drive tractor this will normally be the rear axle; this arrangement is shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The two lashings shall pass over the axle from points directly below it, one passing to a point of attachment approximately 1,5 m in front of the axle and the other to a point approximately 1,5 m behind the axle. The lashings shall be tightened so that there is a deflection in the tyre adjacent to the lashing as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After lashing, a wooden beam shall be placed as a prop against the wheel opposite the weight and secured to the floor so that it is held tightly against the wheel rim during impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The length of the beam shall be chosen so that when in position against the wheel it is at an angle of 30 ± 3 ° to the horizontal. Its length shall be 20 to 25 times its thickness and its width two to three times its thickness. Both axles shall be prevented from moving sideways by means of a beam clamped to the floor against the outside of the wheel on the side opposite that on which the impact is to be administered.
1.3.3. An articulated tractor must be lashed down so that the section of the tractor bearing the protection structure is fixed rigidly to the ground as in the case of a non-articulated tractor.Both axles of articulated tractors shall be lashed to the ground. The axle and wheels of that section of the tractor on which the protection structure is mounted shall be lashed and propped as in Annex IV, fig. 7. The point of articulation shall be supported by a beam at least 100 mm × 100 mm and lashed down to the ground rails. A prop will be positioned against the point of articulation and secured to the floor so that it has the same effect as a prop against the rear wheel and provides support similar to that achieved for a rigid tractor.
1.3.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,150 W.
1.5.1. This shall be identical to the crushing test at the rear except that the front edge of the beam shall be over the frontmost top part of the roll-over protection structure.
1.5.2. Where the front part of the protection structure roof will not sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the roll-over protection structure with that part of the front of the tractor capable of supporting the tractor’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed and the tractor re-positioned so that the beam is over that point of the protection structure which would then support the rear of the tractor when completely overturned, as shown in Annex IV, fig. 10, and the full force reapplied.
2.1. The ‘zone of clearance’ is defined by planes as follows, the tractor being on a horizontal surface:horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat;vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat;vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat;vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat;an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel. horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat; vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat; vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat; vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat; an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel.
horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat;
vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat;
vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat;
vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat;
an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel.
horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat;
vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat;
vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat;
vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat;
an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel.
2.2. The back of the seat shall be determined ignoring any padding thereon. The seat shall be in its rearmost adjustment for normal seated operation of the tractor and in its highest position if this is independently variable. Where the suspension of the seat is adjustable it shall be at its mean setting and the load on it shall be 75 kg.
3.2.1. After each test the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to see whether any part of the protection structure has entered a zone of clearance round the driving seat as defined in point 2.
3.2.2. In addition, the protection structure shall be examined to determine whether any part of the zone of clearance is outside the protection of the protection structure. For this purpose it shall be considered to be outside the protection of the structure if any part of it would have come in contact with flat ground if the tractor had overturned towards the direction from which the impact came. For this purpose the tyre and track setting shall be assumed to be the smallest indicated by the manufacturer.
1.1.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a rearward overturning accident, normally the upper edge. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be one-sixth of the width of the top of the roll-over protection structure inwards from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the back of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than that inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).If a protruding member would present an inadequate area for the weight, a steel plate of appropriate thickness and depth and about 300 mm in length shall be fastened to that member in such a manner that the strength of the roll-over protection structure is not affected.
1.1.2. Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle. They shall either be in the plane in which the centre of gravity of the pendulum will swing or more than one lashing shall give a resultant force in this plane, as in Annex IV, fig. 5.The lashing shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After the lashings have been tightened a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped in front of the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
1.1.3. Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle for that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the rear axle in Annex IV, fig. 5. The point of articulation will then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm minimum and will be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
1.1.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 2,165 × 10-8× WL2or H = 5,73 × 10-2× Iwhere:H=the height of fall in millimetres,W=the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II,L=the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres,I=the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).The weight shall then be released and allowed to crash against the roll-over protection structure. H = the height of fall in millimetres, W = the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II, L = the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres, I = the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).
H = the height of fall in millimetres,
W = the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II,
L = the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres,
I = the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).
H = the height of fall in millimetres,
W = the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II,
L = the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres,
I = the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).
1.1.5. There shall be no rear impact in the case of a tractor at least 50 % of the mass of which, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, bears on the front axle.
1.2.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the protection structure likely to hit the ground first if the tractor overturned sideways whilst travelling forward, normally the top front corner. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be not more than 80 mm from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the front of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than 80 mm inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).
1.2.2. Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down as illustrated in Annex IV, fig. 6. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped behind the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
1.2.3. Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the front axle in Annex IV, fig. 6. The point of articulation shall then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm minimum and shall be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
1.2.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 W.
1.3.1. The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are vertical unless the protection structure at the point of contact is, during deflection, other than vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining vertical. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a sideways overturning accident, normally the upper edge. Unless it is certain that another part of this edge would hit the ground first, the point of impact shall be in the plane at right angles to the median plane of the tractor and passing through the middle of the seat at the mid-point of adjustment. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. In the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the point of impact shall be determined in relation to the intersection of the median plane of the tractor and of a plane perpendicular to it, by a straight line passing through a point that is equidistant from the two seat reference points.
1.3.2. For rigid tractors, any axle the position of which is rigid relative to the protection structure shall be lashed down on the side on which the impact is to be administered. In the case of a two-wheel drive tractor this will normally be the rear axle; this arrangement is shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The two lashings shall pass over the axle from points directly below it, one passing to a point of attachment approximately 1,5 m in front of the axle and the other to a point approximately 1,5 m behind the axle. The lashings shall be tightened so that there is a deflection in the tyre adjacent to the lashing as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After lashing, a wooden beam shall be placed as a prop against the wheel opposite the weight and secured to the floor so that it is held tightly against the wheel rim during impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The length of the beam shall be chosen so that when in position against the wheel it is at an angle of 30 ± 3 ° to the horizontal. Its length shall be 20 to 25 times its thickness and its width two to three times its thickness. Both axles shall be prevented from moving sideways by means of a beam clamped to the floor against the outside of the wheel on the side opposite that on which the impact is to be administered.
1.3.3. An articulated tractor must be lashed down so that the section of the tractor bearing the protection structure is fixed rigidly to the ground as in the case of a non-articulated tractor.Both axles of articulated tractors shall be lashed to the ground. The axle and wheels of that section of the tractor on which the protection structure is mounted shall be lashed and propped as in Annex IV, fig. 7. The point of articulation shall be supported by a beam at least 100 mm × 100 mm and lashed down to the ground rails. A prop will be positioned against the point of articulation and secured to the floor so that it has the same effect as a prop against the rear wheel and provides support similar to that achieved for a rigid tractor.
1.3.4. The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,150 W.
1.5.1. This test shall be identical to the crushing test at the rear except that the front edge of the beam shall be over the frontmost top part of the roll-over protection structure.
1.5.2. Where the front part of the roll-over protection structure roof cannot sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the roll-over protection structure with that part of the front of the tractor capable of supporting the tractor’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed and the tractor re-positioned so that the beam is over that point of the roll-over protection structure which would then support the rear of the tractor when completely over-turned as shown in Annex IV, fig. 10, and the full force reapplied.
2.1. The zone of clearance is illustrated in Annex IV, fig. 3, and is defined in relation to a vertical reference plane generally longitudinal to the tractor and passing through a seat reference point, described in point 2.3, and the centre of the steering wheel. The reference plane shall be assumed to move horizontally with the seat and steering wheel during impacts but to remain perpendicular to the floor of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure if this is resiliently mounted.Where the steering wheel is adjustable, its position should be that for normal seated driving.
2.2. The boundaries of the zone shall be taken as:2.2.1.vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;2.2.2.parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;2.2.3.a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;2.2.4.an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension;2.2.5.a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat;2.2.6.a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;2.2.7.a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;2.2.8.an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7;2.2.9.a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;2.2.10.a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;2.2.11.in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;2.2.12.in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;2.2.13.where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required. 2.2.1. vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm; 2.2.2. parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane; 2.2.3. a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point; 2.2.4. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension; 2.2.5. a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat; 2.2.6. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4; 2.2.7. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point; 2.2.8. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7; 2.2.9. a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel; 2.2.10. a horizontal plane through the seat reference point; 2.2.11. in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat; 2.2.12. in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points; 2.2.13. where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required.
2.2.1. vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;
2.2.2. parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;
2.2.3. a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;
2.2.4. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension;
2.2.5. a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat;
2.2.6. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;
2.2.7. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;
2.2.8. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7;
2.2.9. a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;
2.2.10. a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;
2.2.11. in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;
2.2.12. in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;
2.2.13. where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required.
2.2.1. vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;
2.2.2. parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;
2.2.3. a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;
2.2.4. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension;
2.2.5. a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat;
2.2.6. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;
2.2.7. a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;
2.2.8. an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7;
2.2.9. a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;
2.2.10. a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;
2.2.11. in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;
2.2.12. in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;
2.2.13. where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required.
2.3. Seat location and seat reference point
2.3.1. For the purpose of defining the zone of clearance in point 2.1, the seat shall be at the rearmost point of any horizontal adjustment range. It shall be set at the mid-point of the vertical adjustment range where this is independent of adjustment of its horizontal position.The reference point shall be established using the apparatus illustrated in Annex IV, figs 1 and 2, to simulate loading by a human occupant. The apparatus shall consist of a seat pan board and backrest boards. The lower backrest board shall be jointed in the region of the ischium humps (A) and loin (B), the joint (B) being adjustable in height.
2.3.2. The reference point is defined as the point in the median longitudinal plane of the seat where the tangential plane of the lower backrest and a horizontal plane intersect. This horizontal plane cuts the lower surface of the seat pan board 150 mm in front of the abovementioned tangent.
2.3.3. Where a seat suspension is provided with adjustment for the weight of the driver, this shall be set so that the seat is at the mid-point of its dynamic range.The apparatus shall be positioned on the seat. It shall then be loaded with a force of 550 N at a point 50 mm in front of joint (A), and the two parts of the backrest board shall be lightly pressed tangentially against the backrest.
2.3.4. If it is not possible to determine definite tangents to each area of the backrest (above and below the lumbar region) the following should be done:2.3.4.1.where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;2.3.4.2.where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially. 2.3.4.1. where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically; 2.3.4.2. where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially.
2.3.4.1. where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;
2.3.4.2. where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially.
2.3.4.1. where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;
2.3.4.2. where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially.
3.2.1. During each test the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to see whether any part of the roll-over protection structure has entered a zone of clearance round the driving seat as defined in points 2.1 and 2.2.
3.2.2. In addition, the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to determine whether any part of the zone of clearance is outside the protection of the roll-over protection structure. For this purpose it shall be considered to be outside the protection of the roll-over protection structure if any part of it would have come in contact with flat ground if the tractor had overturned towards the direction from which the impact came. For this purpose the tyre and track setting shall be assumed to be the smallest specified by the manufacturer.
1. The application for EC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength of a roll-over protection structure and the strength of its attachment to the tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorised representative.
2. A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a protection structure and its attachment, duly approved, are mounted, shall be submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests.
3. The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests shall check whether the approved type of protection structure is intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the type-approval is requested. In particular, it shall ascertain that the attachment of the protection structure corresponds to that which was tested when the EC component type-approval was granted.
4. The holder of the EC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of protection structures.
5. The competent authorities shall grant such extension on the following conditions:5.1.the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;5.2.it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;5.3.the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted. 5.1. the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval; 5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested; 5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
6. A certificate, of which a model is shown in Annex IX, shall be annexed to the EC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused.
7. If the application for EC type-approval for a type of tractor is introduced at the same time as the request for EC component type-approval for a type of roll-over protection structure intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which EC type-approval is requested, the checks laid down in points 2 and 3 will not be made.
Council Directive 77/536/EEC(OJ L 220, 29.8.1977, p. 1)
Part X of Annex I to the 1979 Act of Accession(OJ L 291, 19.11.1979, p. 108)
Part IX A of Annex I to the 1985 Act of Accession(OJ L 302, 15.11.1985, p. 209)
Council Directive 87/354/EC(OJ L 192, 11.7.1987, p. 43) Only the references made to Directive 77/536/EC by point 9(a) of the Annex
Council Directive 89/680/EC(OJ L 398, 30.12.1989, p. 26)
Point XI.C.II.2 of Annex I to the 1994 Act of Accession(OJ C 241, 29.8.1994, p. 205)
Commission Directive 1999/55/EC(OJ L 146, 11.6.1999, p. 28).
Point I.A.21 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 53)
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) Only the reference to Directive 77/536/EC made in Article 1 and point 20 of Part A of the Annex
Directive Time limit for transposition Date of application
77/536/EC 29 December 1978 —
87/354/EC 31 December 1987 —
89/680/EC 3 January 1990 —
1999/55/EC 30 June 2000(1) —
2006/96/EC 1 January 2007 —
— refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of any type of tractor, or
— prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
— may no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 77/536/EC as amended by this Directive,
— may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 77/536/EC, as amended by this Directive.’
Directive 77/536/EEC Directive 1999/55/EC This Directive
Article 9 Article 1
Article 1 Article 2
Article 2 Article 3
Article 3 Article 4
Article 4 Article 5
Article 5 Article 6
Article 6 Article 7
Article 7 —
Article 2 Article 8
Article 8 Article 9
Articles 10 and 11 Articles 10 and 11
Article 12(1) —
Article 12(2) Article 12
— Article 13
— Article 14
Article 13 Article 15
Annexes I to IX Annexes I to IX
— Annex X
— Annex XI
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 77/536/EEC of 28 June 1977 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality, the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 77/536/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards the roll-over protection structures. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
This Directive shall apply to tractors defined in Article 2(j) of Directive 2003/37/EC having the following characteristics:
(a)
clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b)
fixed or adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c)
possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d)
mass between 1,5 and 6 tonnes, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.

Article 2
1. Each Member State shall grant EC component type-approval for any type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes I to V.
2. The Member State which has granted EC component type-approval shall take the measures required to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks.

Article 3
Member States shall for each type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which they approve pursuant to Article 2, issue to the manufacturer of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure, or to his authorised representative, an EC component type-approval mark conforming to the model shown in Annex VI.
Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between roll-over protection structures which have been component type-approved pursuant to Article 2 and other devices.

Article 4
1. No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures or their tractor attachment on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EC component type-approval mark.
2. Nevertheless, a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures bearing the EC component type-approval mark which consistently fail to conform to the approved type.
That State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision.

Article 5
The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States a copy of the component type-approval certificates, an example of which is given in Annex VII, completed for each type of roll-over protection structure which they approve or refuse to approve.

Article 6
1. If the Member State which has granted EC component type-approval finds that a number of roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments bearing the same EC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type. The competent authorities of that State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken which may, if necessary, where there is serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of EC component type-approval. The said authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform.
2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall within one month inform each other of any withdrawal of EC component type-approval and of the reasons for any such measure.

Article 7
Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw component type-approval for roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments, or to prohibit their placing on the market or their use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based. Such decision shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies.

Article 8
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to its roll-over protection structure, if this satisfies the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
2. Member States may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC for any type of tractor that does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor that does not meet the requirements of this Directive.

Article 9
No Member State may refuse registration or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.

Article 10
In the context of EC type-approval any tractor to which Article 1 refers must be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV.

Article 11
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to IX shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.

Article 12
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 13
Directive 77/536/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex X, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XI.

Article 14
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.

Article 15
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 95 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 77/536/EEC of 28 June 1977 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the roll-over protection structures of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). In the interests of clarity and rationality, the said Directive should be codified.
(2) Directive 77/536/EEC is one of the separate Directives of the EC type-approval system provided for in Council Directive 74/150/EEC of 4 March 1974 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of wheeled agricultural or forestry tractors, as replaced by Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on type-approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units(5), and lays down technical prescriptions concerning the design and construction of agricultural or forestry tractors, as regards the roll-over protection structures. Those technical prescriptions concern the approximation of the laws of the Member States to enable the EC type-approval procedure provided for in Directive 2003/37/EC to be applied in respect of each type of tractor. Consequently the provisions laid down in Directive 2003/37/EC relating to agricultural and forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units, apply to this Directive.
(3) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
This Directive shall apply to tractors defined in Article 2(j) of Directive 2003/37/EC having the following characteristics:
(a)
clearance beneath the rear axle of not more than 1 000 mm;
(b)
fixed or adjustable track width of one of the driving axles of 1 150 mm or more;
(c)
possibility of being fitted with a multipoint coupling device for detachable tools and a draw bar;
(d)
mass between 1,5 and 6 tonnes, corresponding to the unladen mass of the tractor as defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC, including the roll-over protection structure fitted in compliance with this Directive and tyres of the largest size recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Each Member State shall grant EC component type-approval for any type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which satisfies the construction and testing requirements laid down in Annexes I to V.
2. The Member State which has granted EC component type-approval shall take the measures required to verify, in so far as is necessary and if need be in cooperation with the competent authorities in the other Member States, that production models conform to the approved type. Such verification shall be limited to spot checks.
Member States shall for each type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment which they approve pursuant to Article 2, issue to the manufacturer of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure, or to his authorised representative, an EC component type-approval mark conforming to the model shown in Annex VI.
Member States shall take all appropriate measures to prevent the use of marks liable to create confusion between roll-over protection structures which have been component type-approved pursuant to Article 2 and other devices.
1. No Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures or their tractor attachment on grounds relating to their construction if they bear the EC component type-approval mark.
2. Nevertheless, a Member State may prohibit the placing on the market of roll-over protection structures bearing the EC component type-approval mark which consistently fail to conform to the approved type.
That State shall forthwith inform the other Member States and the Commission of the measures taken, specifying the reasons for its decision.
The competent authorities of each Member State shall within one month send to the competent authorities of the other Member States a copy of the component type-approval certificates, an example of which is given in Annex VII, completed for each type of roll-over protection structure which they approve or refuse to approve.
1. If the Member State which has granted EC component type-approval finds that a number of roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments bearing the same EC component type-approval mark do not conform to the type which it has approved, it shall take the necessary measures to ensure that production models conform to the approved type. The competent authorities of that State shall advise those of the other Member States of the measures taken which may, if necessary, where there is serious and repeated failure to conform, extend to withdrawal of EC component type-approval. The said authorities shall take the same measures if they are informed by the competent authorities of another Member State of such failure to conform.
2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall within one month inform each other of any withdrawal of EC component type-approval and of the reasons for any such measure.
Any decision taken pursuant to the provisions adopted in implementation of this Directive to refuse or withdraw component type-approval for roll-over protection structures and their tractor attachments, or to prohibit their placing on the market or their use, shall set out in detail the reasons on which it is based. Such decision shall be notified to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the remedies available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of the time limits allowed for the exercise of such remedies.
1. No Member State may refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC, or to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor on grounds relating to its roll-over protection structure, if this satisfies the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
2. Member States may no longer issue the document referred to in Article 2(u) of Directive 2003/37/EC for any type of tractor that does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
Member States may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor that does not meet the requirements of this Directive.
No Member State may refuse registration or prohibit the sale, initial entry into service or use of tractors on grounds relating to the roll-over protection structures if these satisfy the requirements set out in Annexes I to IX.
In the context of EC type-approval any tractor to which Article 1 refers must be fitted with a roll-over protection structure which satisfies the requirements laid down in Annexes I to IV.
Any amendments necessary to adapt to technical progress the requirements of Annexes I to IX shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 20(3) of Directive 2003/37/EC.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
Directive 77/536/EEC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex X, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law and application of the Directives set out in Annex X, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex XI.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 1 January 2010.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

Conditions for EC component type-approval

ANNEX I1. DEFINITION
| 1.1. | A roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) means the structure on a tractor the essential purpose of which is to avoid or limit risks to the driver resulting from roll-over of the tractor during normal use.
| 1.2. | The structures mentioned in point 1.1 are characterised by the fact that, in the event of roll-over, they ensure an unobstructed space inside them large enough to protect the driver.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
| 2.1. | Every roll-over protection structure and its attachment to a tractor must be so designed and constructed as to fulfil the essential purpose laid down in point 1.
| 2.2. | This requirement shall be checked by one of the two test methods described in Annex III. The method chosen shall take account of the tractor mass as follows:for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B,for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A,as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply. | | for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B, | | for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A, | | as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply.
| for tractors of mass specified by Article 1 — Annex III, Part B,
| for tractors of mass more than 1,5 tonnes and not more than 3,5 tonnes — Annex III, Part A,
| as regards tractors with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel) or fitted with optional seats, only the testing method described in Annex III, Part B, shall apply.3. APPLICATION FOR EC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL
| 3.1. | The application for EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a roll-over protection structure and the strength of its attachment to a tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by the manufacturer of the roll-over protection structure or by their authorised representatives.
| 3.2. | The application for EC component type-approval shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and by the following particulars:general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V). | | general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components, | | photographs from side and rear showing mounting details, | | brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation, | | details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
| general arrangement drawing either to a scale marked on the drawing or giving the main dimensions of the roll-over protection structure. This drawing must in particular show details of the mounting components,
| photographs from side and rear showing mounting details,
| brief description of the roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor and, where necessary, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding and features to prevent continuous rolling and details of heating and ventilation,
| details of materials used in structural parts including attaching brackets and fixing bolts (see Annex V).
| 3.3. | A tractor representative of the tractor type for which the protection structure to be approved is intended shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the component type-approval tests. This tractor shall be fitted with the roll-over protection structure.
| 3.4. | The holder of EC component type-approval may request its extension to other tractor types. The competent authority which has granted the original EC component type-approval shall grant the extension if the approved roll-over protection structure and the type(s) of tractor for which the extension is requested comply with the following conditions:the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical,the position of the seat has not been changed. | | the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test, | | the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical, | | any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical, | | the position of the seat has not been changed.
| the mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, does not exceed by more than 5 % the reference mass used in the test,
| the method of attachment and the tractor’s components to which the attachments are made are identical,
| any components such as mudguards and bonnet cowls which may provide support for the roll-over protection device are identical,
| the position of the seat has not been changed.4. MARKINGS
| 4.1. | Every roll-over protection structure conforming to the approved type shall bear the following markings:4.1.1.the trade mark or name;4.1.2.a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;4.1.3.serial number of the protection structure;4.1.4.make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended. | 4.1.1. | the trade mark or name; | 4.1.2. | a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI; | 4.1.3. | serial number of the protection structure; | 4.1.4. | make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
4.1.1. | the trade mark or name;
4.1.2. | a component type-approval mark conforming to the model in Annex VI;
4.1.3. | serial number of the protection structure;
4.1.4. | make and type(s) of tractor(s) for which the protection structure is intended.
| 4.2. | All these particulars must appear on a small plate.
| 4.3. | These markings must be visible, legible and indelible.

Conditions for testing the strength of a roll-over protection structure and of its attachment to a tractor

ANNEX II1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1.1. Test purposesTests made using special rigs are intended to simulate such loads as are imposed on a roll-over protection structure when a tractor overturns. These tests, described in Annex III, must enable the strength of the roll-over protection structure and the attaching brackets to the tractor to be assessed.
1.2. Preparation for test
| 1.2.1. | A roll-over protection structure must be tested on a tractor of the type for which it is designed. It must be attached to the tractor in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer of the tractor and/or those of the manufacturer of the roll-over protection structure.
| 1.2.2. | For the tests a tractor must be fitted with all structural components of the series production which may influence the strength of the roll-over protection structure or which may be necessary for the strength test.Components which may create a hazard in the zone of clearance must also be fitted so that they may be examined as to their compliance with the requirements of point 4.1 of this Annex.
| 1.2.3. | Tests shall be made with the tractor stationary.1.3. Tractor massThe measured mass W used in the formulae (see Annex III, Parts A and B) to calculate the height of the fall of the pendulum weight and the crushing force, shall be at least that defined in point 2.1.1 of Annex I to Directive 2003/37/EC (i.e. excluding optional accessories but including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and driver) plus the roll-over protection structure and less 75 kg. Not included are optional front or rear ballast weights, tyre ballast, mounted implements, mounted equipment or any specialised components.
2. APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT2.1. Pendulum weight
| 2.1.1. | A pendulum weight shall be suspended by two chains or wire ropes from pivot points not less than 6 m above the ground. Means shall be provided for adjusting independently the suspended height of the weight and the angle between the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes.
| 2.1.2. | The weight shall be 2 000 ± 20 kg excluding the weight of the chains or wire ropes which themselves shall not exceed 100 kg. The length of the sides of the impact face shall be 680 ± 20 mm (see Annex IV, fig. 4). The weight shall be filled in such a way that the position of its centre of gravity is constant.
| 2.1.3. | Means shall be provided of pulling the weight back as a pendulum to a height which is determined for each test. A quick-release mechanism shall allow the weight to swing downwards without altering the tilt in relation to the supporting chains or wire ropes.2.2. Pendulum supportsThe pendulum pivot points shall be rigidly fixed so that their displacement in any direction does not exceed 1 % of the height of fall.
2.3. Lashings
| 2.3.1. | The tractor shall be lashed by means of restraining and tensioning devices to ground rails rigidly attached to a non-yielding concrete base. The rails shall be suitably spaced to enable the tractor to be lashed down as illustrated in Annex IV, figs 5, 6 and 7. For each test the tractor wheels and any axle stands used shall rest on the non-yielding base.
| 2.3.2. | Apart from the tensioning devices and ground rail attachments the tractor shall be lashed down with wire rope of the dimensions specified.This wire rope shall be any round strand, fibre core, construction 6 × 19 in accordance with ISO 2408. The nominal rope diameter shall be 13 mm.
| 2.3.3. | The central pivot of an articulated tractor shall be supported and lashed down as appropriate for the front, rear and side impacts and for the crushing tests and shall, in addition, be propped from the side for the side impact. The front and rear wheels need not be in line if this makes it more convenient to attach appropriate wire ropes.2.4. Wheel prop and beam
| 2.4.1. | A beam shall be used as a prop for the wheel in the side impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7.
| 2.4.2. | A softwood beam of approximately 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped to the floor to brace the tyres on the side opposite the impact as shown in Annex IV, figs 5, 6 and 7.2.5. Props and lashings for articulated tractors
| 2.5.1. | Additional props and lashings shall be used for articulated tractors. Their purpose is to ensure that the section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is fitted is as rigid as that of a rigid tractor.
| 2.5.2. | Additional specific details are given in Annex III for the impact and crushing tests.2.6. Crushing rigA rig as shown in Annex IV, fig. 8, shall be capable of exerting a downward force on a roll-over protection structure through a rigid beam approximately 250 mm wide connected to the load-applying mechanism by means of universal joints. Suitable axle stands shall be provided so that the tractor tyres do not bear crushing force.
2.7. Measuring apparatus
| 2.7.1. | For the tests laid down in Annex III, Parts A and B, a device must be used on which a moving friction collar is tightly fitted on a horizontal rod for the purpose of measuring the difference between maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection during a side impact test.
| 2.7.2. | For the tests laid down in Annex III, Part A, measurements shall be made after the laboratory test to determine whether any part of the protection structure has entered the zone of clearance prescribed in point 2 of Annex III, Part A.
| 2.7.3. | For the tests laid down in Annex III, Part B, equipment must be provided — which may include photographic equipment — so that after the laboratory tests it may be established whether any part of the protection structure has, during these tests, entered or come into contact with the zone of clearance prescribed in point 2 of Annex III, Part B.2.8. Measurement tolerancesThe following tolerances shall apply to measurements made during the tests:

2.8.1. | linear dimensions measured during test (except point 2.8.2); protection structure and tractor dimensions, zone of clearance and tyre deflections when lashed for impact tests: ± 3 mm;
2.8.2. | height of pendulum weight set for impact tests: ± 6 mm;
2.8.3. | measured tractor mass: ± 20 kg;
2.8.4. | load applied in crushing tests: ± 2 %;
2.8.5. | angle of weight-supporting chains or wire ropes at the point of impact: ± 2 °.3. TESTS3.1. General requirements3.1.1. Sequence of tests
| 3.1.1.1. | The list and sequence of tests shall be as follows. The item numbers are those in which the tests are described in Annex III, Parts A and B:1.impact from the rear:1.1,2.crushing test at the rear:1.4,3.impact from the front:1.2,4.impact from the side:1.3,5.crushing test at the front:1.5. | 1.impact from the rear: | 1. | impact from the rear: | 1.1, | 2.crushing test at the rear: | 2. | crushing test at the rear: | 1.4, | 3.impact from the front: | 3. | impact from the front: | 1.2, | 4.impact from the side: | 4. | impact from the side: | 1.3, | 5.crushing test at the front: | 5. | crushing test at the front: | 1.5.
1.impact from the rear: | 1. | impact from the rear: | 1.1,
1. | impact from the rear:
2.crushing test at the rear: | 2. | crushing test at the rear: | 1.4,
2. | crushing test at the rear:
3.impact from the front: | 3. | impact from the front: | 1.2,
3. | impact from the front:
4.impact from the side: | 4. | impact from the side: | 1.3,
4. | impact from the side:
5.crushing test at the front: | 5. | crushing test at the front: | 1.5.
5. | crushing test at the front:
| 3.1.1.2. | If, during the test, any part of the restraining equipment moves or breaks, the test shall be repeated.
| 3.1.1.3. | No repairs or adjustments to the tractor or roll-over protection structure may be carried out during the test.
| 3.1.1.4. | The tractor gear-box shall be in neutral and the brakes off throughout the test.
| 3.1.1.5. | In the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the first impact shall be longitudinal and shall be applied at the heaviest extremity (with more than 50 % of the mass of the tractor). It shall be followed by a crushing test at the same extremity. The second impact shall be on the lightest extremity, and the third impact shall be from the side. Lastly, a second crushing test shall be carried out on the lightest extremity.3.1.2. Track widthA track width setting for the rear wheels shall be chosen such that as far as possible the roll-over protection structure is not supported by the tyres during the tests.
3.1.3. Removal of non-hazard-creating componentsAll components of the tractor and roll-over protection structure which, as complete units, constitute protection for the driver — including weather protection — shall be supplied with the tractor to be tested. It is permissible to remove front, side and rear windows of safety glass or similar material and any detachable panels, fittings and accessories which have no function of structural strength and which cannot create a hazard in the event of overturning.
3.1.4. Direction of impactsThe side of the tractor on which the side impact is struck shall be that which is likely to give the greatest distortion. The rear impact shall be on the corner furthest from the side impact, and the front impact on the corner nearest the side impact.
3.1.5. Tyre pressures and deflectionsTyres shall not be water ballasted. Pressures and deflections in those tyres which are lashed in the various tests shall be in accordance with the following table:

| Tyre pressure (bar) | Deflection (mm)
Radial-ply tyres | Diagonal-ply tyres | Front | Rear
Front | Rear | Front | Rear
Four-wheel drive, front and rear wheels of the same size | 1,20 | 1,20 | 1,00 | 1,00 | 25 | 25
Four-wheel drive, front wheels smaller than rear | 1,80 | 1,20 | 1,50 | 1,00 | 20 | 25
Two-wheel drive | 2,40 | 1,20 | 2,00 | 1,00 | 15 | 254. INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS
| 4.1. | A roll-over protection structure submitted for EC component type-approval shall be considered as having satisfied requirements concerning strength if it fulfils the following conditions:4.1.1.it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B;4.1.2.for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B;4.1.3.for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm. | 4.1.1. | it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B; | 4.1.2. | for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B; | 4.1.3. | for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm.
4.1.1. | it is free from fractures and cracks as described in point 3.1 of Annex III, Parts A and B;
4.1.2. | for Annex III, Part A tests: no part of the zone of clearance is outside the roll-over protection structure;for Annex III, Part B tests: no part of the zone of clearance has been entered by the roll-over protection structure during any of the impact or crushing tests or is outside the roll-over protection structure, as described in point 3.2 of Annex III, Part B;
4.1.3. | for Annex III, Part A tests: the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part A, does not exceed 15 cm;for Annex III, Part B tests: during the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection, referred to in point 3.3 of Annex III, Part B does not exceed 25 cm.
| 4.2. | There is no other feature presenting a particular hazard to the driver, for example, glass of a type likely to shatter dangerously, insufficient padding inside the roof or where the driver’s head may strike.5. TEST REPORT
| 5.1. | The test report shall be attached to the EC component type-approval certificate referred to in Annex VII. The presentation of the report shall be as shown in Annex V. The report shall include:5.1.1.a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system;5.1.2.details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor;5.1.3.a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction;5.1.4.a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted. | 5.1.1. | a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system; | 5.1.2. | details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor; | 5.1.3. | a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction; | 5.1.4. | a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted.
5.1.1. | a general description of the roll-over protection structure’s shape and construction including materials and fixings; external dimensions of tractor with protection structure fitted; main interior dimensions; minimum clearance from steering wheel; lateral distance from steering wheel to protection structure sides; height of protection structure roof above seat or seat reference point and above foot platform if there is one; details of provisions for normal entry and exit and for escape as determined by the protection structure parts; and details of heating and, where appropriate, ventilation system;
5.1.2. | details of any special features such as devices to prevent the continuous rolling of the tractor;
5.1.3. | a brief description of any interior padding intended to minimise head or shoulder injuries or to effect noise reduction;
5.1.4. | a statement of the type of windscreen and glazing fitted.
| 5.2. | The report must identify clearly the tractor type (make, type, commercial description, etc.) used for testing and the types for which the roll-over protection structure is intended.
| 5.3. | If EC component type-approval is being extended for other tractor types, the report must include the exact reference of the report of the original EC component type-approval as well as precise indications regarding the requirements laid down in point 3.4 of Annex I.

TEST PROCEDURES

ANNEX III
A — Test method I
1. IMPACT AND CRUSHING TESTS1.1. Impact at the rear
| 1.1.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a rearward overturning accident, normally the upper edge. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be one-sixth of the width of the top of the roll-over protection structure inwards from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the back of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than that inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).If a protruding member would present an inadequate area for the weight, a steel plate of appropriate thickness and depth and about 300 mm in length shall be fastened to that member in such a manner that the strength of the roll-over protection structure is not affected.
| 1.1.2. | Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle. They shall either be in the plane in which the centre of gravity of the pendulum will swing or more than one lashing shall give a resultant force in this plane, as in Annex IV, fig. 5.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped in front of the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
| 1.1.3. | Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the rear axle in Annex IV, fig. 5. The point of articulation will then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm and will be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
| 1.1.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 Wwhere H is the height of fall in millimetres and W the mass of the tractor as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II.The weight shall then be released and allowed to crash against the roll-over protection structure.1.2. Impact at the front
| 1.2.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first if the tractor overturned sideways whilst travelling forward, normally the top front corner. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be not more than 80 mm from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the front of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than 80 mm inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).
| 1.2.2. | Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down as indicated in Annex IV, fig. 6. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam approximately 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped behind the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
| 1.2.3. | Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the front axle in Annex IV, fig. 6. The point of articulation shall then be supported by a beam approximately 100 mm × 100 mm and shall be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
| 1.2.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 W.1.3. Impact at the side
| 1.3.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are vertical unless the protection structure at the point of contact is, during deflection, other than vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining vertical. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a sideways overturning accident, normally the upper edge. Unless it is certain that another part of this edge would hit the ground first, the point of impact shall be in the plane at right angles to the median plane of the tractor and passing through the middle of the seat at the mid-point of adjustment. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact.
| 1.3.2. | For rigid tractors, any axle the position of which is rigid relative to the protection structure shall be lashed down on the side on which the impact is to be administered. In the case of a two-wheel drive tractor this will normally be the rear axle; this arrangement is shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The two lashings shall pass over the axle from points directly below it, one passing to a point of attachment approximately 1,5 m in front of the axle and the other to a point approximately 1,5 m behind the axle. The lashings shall be tightened so that there is a deflection in the tyre adjacent to the lashing as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After lashing, a wooden beam shall be placed as a prop against the wheel opposite the weight and secured to the floor so that it is held tightly against the wheel rim during impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The length of the beam shall be chosen so that when in position against the wheel it is at an angle of 30 ± 3 ° to the horizontal. Its length shall be 20 to 25 times its thickness and its width two to three times its thickness. Both axles shall be prevented from moving sideways by means of a beam clamped to the floor against the outside of the wheel on the side opposite that on which the impact is to be administered.
| 1.3.3. | An articulated tractor must be lashed down so that the section of the tractor bearing the protection structure is fixed rigidly to the ground as in the case of a non-articulated tractor.Both axles of articulated tractors shall be lashed to the ground. The axle and wheels of that section of the tractor on which the protection structure is mounted shall be lashed and propped as in Annex IV, fig. 7. The point of articulation shall be supported by a beam at least 100 mm × 100 mm and lashed down to the ground rails. A prop will be positioned against the point of articulation and secured to the floor so that it has the same effect as a prop against the rear wheel and provides support similar to that achieved for a rigid tractor.
| 1.3.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,150 W.1.4. Crushing at the rearThe tractor shall be positioned in the rig described in point 2.6 of Annex II and shown in Annex IV, figs 8 and 10, in such a way that the rear edge of the beam is over the rearmost top load-bearing part of the protection structure and the median longitudinal plane of the tractor is midway between the points of application of force to the beam.
The axle stands shall be placed under the axles in such a way that the tyres do not bear the crushing force. The force applied shall correspond to twice the mass of the tractor as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II. It may be necessary to lash down the front of the tractor.
1.5. Crushing at the front
| 1.5.1. | This shall be identical to the crushing test at the rear except that the front edge of the beam shall be over the frontmost top part of the roll-over protection structure.
| 1.5.2. | Where the front part of the protection structure roof will not sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the roll-over protection structure with that part of the front of the tractor capable of supporting the tractor’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed and the tractor re-positioned so that the beam is over that point of the protection structure which would then support the rear of the tractor when completely overturned, as shown in Annex IV, fig. 10, and the full force reapplied.2. ZONE OF CLEARANCE
| 2.1. | The ‘zone of clearance’ is defined by planes as follows, the tractor being on a horizontal surface:horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat;vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat;vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat;vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat;an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel. | | horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat; | | vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat; | | vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat; | | vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat; | | an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel.
| horizontal, 95 cm above the compressed seat;
| vertical, perpendicular to the median plane of the tractor and 10 cm behind the back of the seat;
| vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the left of the centre of the seat;
| vertical, parallel to the median plane of the tractor and 25 cm to the right of the centre of the seat;
| an inclined plane in which lies a horizontal line which is at right angles to the median plane of the tractor, 95 cm above the compressed seat and 45 cm (plus the normal fore and aft movement of the seat) in front of the back of the seat. This inclined plane passes in front of the steering wheel and at its nearest point is 4 cm from the rim of the steering wheel.
| 2.2. | The back of the seat shall be determined ignoring any padding thereon. The seat shall be in its rearmost adjustment for normal seated operation of the tractor and in its highest position if this is independently variable. Where the suspension of the seat is adjustable it shall be at its mean setting and the load on it shall be 75 kg.3. MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE3.1. Fractures and cracksAfter each test all structural members, joints and attaching brackets on the tractor shall be visually examined for fractures or cracks, any small cracks in unimportant parts being ignored.
3.2. Zone of clearance
| 3.2.1. | After each test the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to see whether any part of the protection structure has entered a zone of clearance round the driving seat as defined in point 2.
| 3.2.2. | In addition, the protection structure shall be examined to determine whether any part of the zone of clearance is outside the protection of the protection structure. For this purpose it shall be considered to be outside the protection of the structure if any part of it would have come in contact with flat ground if the tractor had overturned towards the direction from which the impact came. For this purpose the tyre and track setting shall be assumed to be the smallest indicated by the manufacturer.3.3. Maximum momentary deflectionDuring the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection at a height of 950 mm above the loaded seat shall be recorded. One end of the rod described in point 2.7.1 of Annex II shall be attached to the upper part of the roll-over protection structure and the other end passed through a hole in the vertical standard. The position of the friction collar on the rod after the impact indicates the maximum momentary deflection.
3.4. Permanent deflectionAfter the final compression test the permanent deflection of the protection structure shall be recorded. For this purpose, before the start of the test, the positions of the main roll-over protection structure members in relation to the seat shall be recorded.

B — Test method II
1. IMPACT AND CRUSHING TESTS1.1. Impact at the rear
| 1.1.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the roll-over protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a rearward overturning accident, normally the upper edge. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be one-sixth of the width of the top of the roll-over protection structure inwards from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the back of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than that inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).If a protruding member would present an inadequate area for the weight, a steel plate of appropriate thickness and depth and about 300 mm in length shall be fastened to that member in such a manner that the strength of the roll-over protection structure is not affected.
| 1.1.2. | Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle. They shall either be in the plane in which the centre of gravity of the pendulum will swing or more than one lashing shall give a resultant force in this plane, as in Annex IV, fig. 5.The lashing shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After the lashings have been tightened a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped in front of the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
| 1.1.3. | Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle for that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the rear axle in Annex IV, fig. 5. The point of articulation will then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm minimum and will be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
| 1.1.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 2,165 × 10-8× WL2or H = 5,73 × 10-2× Iwhere:H=the height of fall in millimetres,W=the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II,L=the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres,I=the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).The weight shall then be released and allowed to crash against the roll-over protection structure. | H | = | the height of fall in millimetres, | W | = | the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II, | L | = | the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres, | I | = | the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).
H | = | the height of fall in millimetres,
W | = | the mass of the tractor as defined in 1.3 of Annex II,
L | = | the maximum tractor wheelbase in millimetres,
I | = | the moment of inertia of the rear axle, with wheels removed, in kilograms per square metre (kg/m2).
| 1.1.5. | There shall be no rear impact in the case of a tractor at least 50 % of the mass of which, as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II, bears on the front axle.1.2. Impact at the front
| 1.2.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical unless the roll-over protection structure at the point of contact has, during deflection, a greater angle to the vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the roll-over protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining at an angle of 20 ° to the vertical. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the protection structure likely to hit the ground first if the tractor overturned sideways whilst travelling forward, normally the top front corner. The position of the centre of gravity of the weight shall be not more than 80 mm from a vertical plane parallel to the median plane of the tractor touching the outside extremity of the top of the roll-over protection structure.However, if a curve in the front of the roll-over protection structure starts at a greater distance than 80 mm inside this vertical plane, the impact shall be administered at the beginning of the curve, i.e. at the point where this curve is tangential to a line at right angles to the median plane of the tractor (see Annex IV, fig. 9).
| 1.2.2. | Tractors with rigid bodies shall be lashed down as illustrated in Annex IV, fig. 6. The points of attachment of the lashings shall be approximately 2 m behind the rear axle and 1,5 m in front of the front axle.The lashings shall be tightened so that the deflections in the front and rear tyres are as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. When the lashings have been tightened, a wooden beam 150 mm × 150 mm shall be clamped behind the rear wheels and driven tight against them.
| 1.2.3. | Articulated tractors shall have both axles lashed down. The axle of that section of the tractor on which the roll-over protection structure is mounted shall be treated as the front axle in Annex IV, fig. 6. The point of articulation shall then be supported by a beam 100 mm × 100 mm minimum and shall be lashed down firmly by means of wire ropes attached to the ground rails.
| 1.2.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,020 W.1.3. Impact at the side
| 1.3.1. | The tractor shall be so placed in relation to the weight that the weight will strike the roll-over protection structure when the impact face of the weight and the supporting chains or wire ropes are vertical unless the protection structure at the point of contact is, during deflection, other than vertical. In this case the impact face of the weight shall be adjusted by means of an additional support so that it is parallel to the protection structure at the point of impact at the moment of maximum deflection, the supporting chains or wire ropes remaining vertical. The suspended height of the weight shall be so adjusted that the locus of its centre of gravity passes through the point of contact.The point of impact shall be that part of the protection structure likely to hit the ground first in a sideways overturning accident, normally the upper edge. Unless it is certain that another part of this edge would hit the ground first, the point of impact shall be in the plane at right angles to the median plane of the tractor and passing through the middle of the seat at the mid-point of adjustment. Steps must be taken to reduce the tendency of the weight to turn about the point of contact. In the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the point of impact shall be determined in relation to the intersection of the median plane of the tractor and of a plane perpendicular to it, by a straight line passing through a point that is equidistant from the two seat reference points.
| 1.3.2. | For rigid tractors, any axle the position of which is rigid relative to the protection structure shall be lashed down on the side on which the impact is to be administered. In the case of a two-wheel drive tractor this will normally be the rear axle; this arrangement is shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The two lashings shall pass over the axle from points directly below it, one passing to a point of attachment approximately 1,5 m in front of the axle and the other to a point approximately 1,5 m behind the axle. The lashings shall be tightened so that there is a deflection in the tyre adjacent to the lashing as indicated in point 3.1.5 of Annex II. After lashing, a wooden beam shall be placed as a prop against the wheel opposite the weight and secured to the floor so that it is held tightly against the wheel rim during impact as shown in Annex IV, fig. 7. The length of the beam shall be chosen so that when in position against the wheel it is at an angle of 30 ± 3 ° to the horizontal. Its length shall be 20 to 25 times its thickness and its width two to three times its thickness. Both axles shall be prevented from moving sideways by means of a beam clamped to the floor against the outside of the wheel on the side opposite that on which the impact is to be administered.
| 1.3.3. | An articulated tractor must be lashed down so that the section of the tractor bearing the protection structure is fixed rigidly to the ground as in the case of a non-articulated tractor.Both axles of articulated tractors shall be lashed to the ground. The axle and wheels of that section of the tractor on which the protection structure is mounted shall be lashed and propped as in Annex IV, fig. 7. The point of articulation shall be supported by a beam at least 100 mm × 100 mm and lashed down to the ground rails. A prop will be positioned against the point of articulation and secured to the floor so that it has the same effect as a prop against the rear wheel and provides support similar to that achieved for a rigid tractor.
| 1.3.4. | The weight shall be pulled back so that the height of its centre of gravity above that at the point of impact is given by the formula:H = 125 + 0,150 W.1.4. Crushing at the rearThe tractor shall be positioned in the rig described in point 2.6 of Annex II and shown in Annex IV, figs 8 and 10 in such a way that the rear edge of the beam is over the rearmost top load-bearing part of the roll-over protection structure and the median longitudinal plane of the tractor is midway between the points of application of force to the beam.
The axle stands shall be placed under the axles in such a way that the tyres do not bear the crushing force. The force applied shall correspond to twice the mass of the tractor as defined in point 1.3 of Annex II. It may be necessary to lash down the front of the tractor.
1.5. Crushing at the front
| 1.5.1. | This test shall be identical to the crushing test at the rear except that the front edge of the beam shall be over the frontmost top part of the roll-over protection structure.
| 1.5.2. | Where the front part of the roll-over protection structure roof cannot sustain the full crushing force, the force shall be applied until the roof is deflected to coincide with the plane joining the upper part of the roll-over protection structure with that part of the front of the tractor capable of supporting the tractor’s mass when overturned. The force shall then be removed and the tractor re-positioned so that the beam is over that point of the roll-over protection structure which would then support the rear of the tractor when completely over-turned as shown in Annex IV, fig. 10, and the full force reapplied.2. ZONE OF CLEARANCE
| 2.1. | The zone of clearance is illustrated in Annex IV, fig. 3, and is defined in relation to a vertical reference plane generally longitudinal to the tractor and passing through a seat reference point, described in point 2.3, and the centre of the steering wheel. The reference plane shall be assumed to move horizontally with the seat and steering wheel during impacts but to remain perpendicular to the floor of the tractor or of the roll-over protection structure if this is resiliently mounted.Where the steering wheel is adjustable, its position should be that for normal seated driving.
| 2.2. | The boundaries of the zone shall be taken as:2.2.1.vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;2.2.2.parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;2.2.3.a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;2.2.4.an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension;2.2.5.a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat;2.2.6.a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;2.2.7.a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;2.2.8.an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7;2.2.9.a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;2.2.10.a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;2.2.11.in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;2.2.12.in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;2.2.13.where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required. | 2.2.1. | vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm; | 2.2.2. | parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane; | 2.2.3. | a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point; | 2.2.4. | an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension; | 2.2.5. | a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat; | 2.2.6. | a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4; | 2.2.7. | a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point; | 2.2.8. | an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7; | 2.2.9. | a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel; | 2.2.10. | a horizontal plane through the seat reference point; | 2.2.11. | in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat; | 2.2.12. | in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points; | 2.2.13. | where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required.
2.2.1. | vertical planes 250 mm on either side of the reference plane extending upwards from the seat reference point for 300 mm;
2.2.2. | parallel planes extending from the upper edge of planes 2.2.1 to a maximum height of 900 mm above the seat reference point and inclined in such a way that the upper edge of the plane on the side from which the side impact is struck is at least 100 mm from the reference plane;
2.2.3. | a horizontal plane 900 mm above the seat reference point;
2.2.4. | an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane and including a point 900 mm directly above the seat reference point and the rearmost point of the seat structure including its suspension;
2.2.5. | a vertical plane perpendicular to the reference plane extending downwards from the rear-most point of the seat;
2.2.6. | a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, with a radius of 120 mm tangential to planes 2.2.3 and 2.2.4;
2.2.7. | a curvilinear surface, perpendicular to the reference plane, having a radius of 900 mm and extending forward for 400 mm from and tangential to plane 2.2.3 at a point 150 mm forward of the seat reference point;
2.2.8. | an inclined plane perpendicular to the reference plane, joining surface 2.2.7 at its forward edge and passing 40 mm from the steering wheel. In the case of a high steering wheel position this plane is replaced by a tangent plane to surface 2.2.7;
2.2.9. | a vertical plane, perpendicular to the reference plane, 40 mm forward of the steering wheel;
2.2.10. | a horizontal plane through the seat reference point;
2.2.11. | in the case of a tractor with a reversible driving position (i.e. with a reversible seat and steering wheel), the clearance shall be a combination of the two clearances determined by the two positions of the steering wheel and seat;
2.2.12. | in the case of a tractor which can be fitted with optional seats, the tests shall be based on the combined clearance of the seat reference points for all available seat-fitting options. The roll-over protection structure must not enter the combined clearance around the various seat reference points;
2.2.13. | where a new option for the seat is proposed after the test has taken place, a calculation is made to determine whether the clearance around the new seat reference point is located entirely within the combined clearance established previously. If this is not the case, a new test is required.
| 2.3. | Seat location and seat reference point
| 2.3.1. | For the purpose of defining the zone of clearance in point 2.1, the seat shall be at the rearmost point of any horizontal adjustment range. It shall be set at the mid-point of the vertical adjustment range where this is independent of adjustment of its horizontal position.The reference point shall be established using the apparatus illustrated in Annex IV, figs 1 and 2, to simulate loading by a human occupant. The apparatus shall consist of a seat pan board and backrest boards. The lower backrest board shall be jointed in the region of the ischium humps (A) and loin (B), the joint (B) being adjustable in height.
| 2.3.2. | The reference point is defined as the point in the median longitudinal plane of the seat where the tangential plane of the lower backrest and a horizontal plane intersect. This horizontal plane cuts the lower surface of the seat pan board 150 mm in front of the abovementioned tangent.
| 2.3.3. | Where a seat suspension is provided with adjustment for the weight of the driver, this shall be set so that the seat is at the mid-point of its dynamic range.The apparatus shall be positioned on the seat. It shall then be loaded with a force of 550 N at a point 50 mm in front of joint (A), and the two parts of the backrest board shall be lightly pressed tangentially against the backrest.
| 2.3.4. | If it is not possible to determine definite tangents to each area of the backrest (above and below the lumbar region) the following should be done:2.3.4.1.where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;2.3.4.2.where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially. | 2.3.4.1. | where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically; | 2.3.4.2. | where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially.
2.3.4.1. | where no definite tangent to the lower area is possible: the lower part of the backrest board is pressed against the backrest vertically;
2.3.4.2. | where no definite tangent to the upper area is possible: the joint (B) is fixed at a height of 230 mm above the seat reference point, if the lower part of the backrest board is vertical. Then the two parts of the backrest board are lightly pressed against the backrest tangentially.3. MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE3.1. Fractures and cracksAfter each test all structural members, joints and attaching brackets on the tractor shall be visually examined for fractures or cracks, any small cracks in unimportant parts being ignored.
3.2. Zone of clearance
| 3.2.1. | During each test the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to see whether any part of the roll-over protection structure has entered a zone of clearance round the driving seat as defined in points 2.1 and 2.2.
| 3.2.2. | In addition, the roll-over protection structure shall be examined to determine whether any part of the zone of clearance is outside the protection of the roll-over protection structure. For this purpose it shall be considered to be outside the protection of the roll-over protection structure if any part of it would have come in contact with flat ground if the tractor had overturned towards the direction from which the impact came. For this purpose the tyre and track setting shall be assumed to be the smallest specified by the manufacturer.3.3. Maximum momentary deflectionDuring the side impact test the difference between the maximum momentary deflection and the residual deflection at a height of 900 mm above and 150 mm forward of the seat reference point shall be recorded. One end of the rod described in point 2.7.1 of Annex II shall be attached to the upper part of the roll-over protection structure and the other end passed through a hole in the vertical standard. The position of the friction collar on the rod after the blow indicates the maximum momentary deflection.
3.4. Permanent deflectionAfter the final compression test the permanent deflection of the protection structure shall be recorded. For this purpose, before the start of the test, the position of the main roll-over protection structure members in relation to the seat reference point shall be recorded.

FIGURES

ANNEX IV
ANNEX V

MODEL
REPORT RELATING TO THE EC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL TEST OF A ROLL-OVER PROTECTION STRUCTURE (SAFETY FRAME OR CAB) WITH REGARD TO ITS STRENGTH AS WELL AS TO THE STRENGTH OF ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE TRACTOR
Protection structure
Make
Type
Tractor make
Tractor type
Test method
I/II (1) Identification of test station
EC component type-approval No … 1. Trade mark or name of protection structure … 2. Name and address of manufacturer of tractor or protection structure … 3. If applicable, name and address of tractor or protection structure manufacturer’s authorised representative … 4. Specifications of tractor on which the tests are carried out
4.1. Trade mark or name …
4.2. Type and commercial description …
4.3. Serial number …
4.4. Mass of unballasted tractor with roll-over protection structure fitted, without driver … kg
4.5. Wheelbase/moment of inertia (1) … mm/kg/m2 (1) 4.6. Tyre sizes: front …
rear … 5. Extension of EC component type-approval for other tractor types
5.1. Trade mark or name …
(1) Delete where inapplicable.

5.2. Type and commercial description …
5.3. Mass of unballasted tractor, with roll-over protection structure fitted, without driver … kg
5.4. Wheelbase/moment of inertia (1) … mm/kg/m2 (1) 5.5. Tyre sizes: front …
rear … 6. Specifications of roll-over protection structure
6.1. General arrangement drawing of both the roll-over protection structure and its attachment to the tractor
6.2. Photographs from side and rear showing mounting details
6.3. Brief description of roll-over protection structure including type of construction, details of mounting on the tractor, details of cladding, means of access and escape, details of interior padding, features to prevent continous rolling and details of heating and ventilation
6.4. Dimensions
6.4.1. Height of roof members above the loaded tractor seat above the seat reference point (2) … mm
6.4.2. Height of roof members above the tractor foot platform … mm
6.4.3. Interior width of the roll-over protection structure at 950 mm above the loaded seat/at 900 mm above the seat reference point (2) … mm
6.4.4. Interior width of the roll-over protection structure at a point above the seat at the height of the centre of the steering wheel … mm
6.4.5. Distance from the centre of the steering wheel to the right-hand side of roll-over protection structure … mm
6.4.6. Distance from the centre of the steering wheel to the left-hand side of roll-over protection structure … mm
6.4.7. Minimum distance from the steering wheel rim to the roll-over protection structure … mm
6.4.8. Width of the doorways:
at the top … mm
in the middle … mm
at the bottom … mm
6.4.9. Height of the doorways:
above foot platform … mm
(1) Delete where inapplicable.
(2) According to the test method used.

above highest mounting step … mm
above lowest mounting step … mm
6.4.10. Overall height of the tractor with the roll-over protection structure fitted … mm
6.4.11. Overall width of the roll-over protection structure … mm
6.4.12. Horizontal distance to the rear of the protection structure from the back of the loaded seat at a height of 950 mm/from the seat reference point at a height of 900 mm (1) … mm
6.5. Details and quality of materials used, standards used …
Main frame … (material and dimensions)
Mountings … (material and dimensions)
Cladding … (material and dimensions)
Roof … (material and dimensions)
Interior padding … (material and dimensions)
Assembly and mounting bolts … (grade and dimensions) 7. Test results
7.1. Impact and crushing tests
Impact tests were made to the left/right-hand (2) rear and to the right/left-hand (2) front and right/left-hand side (2). The reference mass used for calculating impact energies and crushing forces was … kg
The test requirements concerning fractures or cracks, maximum instantaneous deflection and the zone of clearance were satisfactorily fulfilled
7.2. Deflection measured after the tests Permanent deflection:
rear: left-hand … mm
right-hand … mm
front: left-hand … mm
right-hand … mm
side sideways:
front … mm
rear … mm
top downwards:
front … mm
rear … mm
Difference between maximum momentary and residual deflection during sideways impact test … mm 8. Report number … 9. Report date … 10. Signature …
(1) According to the test method used.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

MARKS

ANNEX VIThe EC component type-approval mark shall consist of a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ‘e’ followed by the distinguishing number of the Member State which has granted the component type-approval:
1.for Germany
2.for France
3.for Italy
4.for the Netherlands
5.for Sweden
6.for Belgium
7.for Hungary
8.for the Czech Republic
9.for Spain
11.for the United Kingdom,
12.for Austria
13.for Luxembourg
17.for Finland
18.for Denmark
19.for Romania
20.for Poland
21.for Portugal
23.for Greece
24.for Ireland
26.for Slovenia
27.for Slovakia
29.for Estonia
32.for Latvia
34.for Bulgaria
36.for Lithuania
49.for Cyprus
50.for Malta
It must also include in the vicinity of the rectangle the EC component type-approval number which corresponds to the number of the EC component type-approval certificate issued with regard to the strength of the type of roll-over protection structure and its attachment to the tractor.

Example of an EC component type-approval mark

ANNEX VII

MODEL
EC COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
Name of competent authority
Notification concerning the granting, refusal, withdrawal or extension of EC component type-approval with regard to the strength of a roll-over protection structure (safety cab or frame) and to the strength of its attachment to the tractor
EC component type-approval No …
… extension (1) 1. Trade name or mark of protection structure … 2. Name and address of manufacturer of protection structure … 3. If applicable, name and address of authorized representative of manufacturer of protection structure … 4. Trade mark or name, type and commercial description of tractor for which protection structure is intended … 5. Extension of EC component type-approval for the following tractor type(s) …
5.1. The mass of the unballasted tractor, as defined in 1.3 of Annex II, exceeds/does not exceed (2) the reference mass used for the test by more than 5 %.
5.2. The method of attachment and points of attachment are/are not (2) identical.
5.3. All the components likely to serve as supports for the roll-over protection structure are/are not (2) identical. 6. Submitted for EC component type-approval on … 7. Test station … 8. Date and number of the report of the test station 9. Date of granting/refusal/withdrawal of EC component type-approval (2) … 10. Date of granting/refusal/withdrawal of the extension of EC component type-approval (2) … 11. Place … 12. Date … 13. The following documents, bearing the component type-approval number shown above, are annexed to this certificate (e.g. report of the test station) … 14. Remarks, if any … 15. Signature …
(1) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EC component type-approval.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

Conditions for EC type-approval

ANNEX VIII
| 1. | The application for EC type-approval of a tractor, with regard to the strength of a roll-over protection structure and the strength of its attachment to the tractor shall be submitted by the tractor manufacturer or by his authorised representative.
| 2. | A tractor representative of the tractor type to be approved, on which a protection structure and its attachment, duly approved, are mounted, shall be submitted to the technical services responsible for conducting the type-approval tests.
| 3. | The technical service responsible for conducting the type-approval tests shall check whether the approved type of protection structure is intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the type-approval is requested. In particular, it shall ascertain that the attachment of the protection structure corresponds to that which was tested when the EC component type-approval was granted.
| 4. | The holder of the EC type-approval may ask for its extension for other types of protection structures.
| 5. | The competent authorities shall grant such extension on the following conditions:5.1.the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;5.2.it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;5.3.the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted. | 5.1. | the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval; | 5.2. | it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested; | 5.3. | the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
5.1. | the new type of roll-over protection structure and its tractor attachment have received EC component type-approval;
5.2. | it is designed to be mounted on the type of tractor for which the extension of the EC type-approval is requested;
5.3. | the attachment of the protection structure to the tractor corresponds to that which was tested when EC component type-approval was granted.
| 6. | A certificate, of which a model is shown in Annex IX, shall be annexed to the EC type-approval certificate for each type-approval or type-approval extension which has been granted or refused.
| 7. | If the application for EC type-approval for a type of tractor is introduced at the same time as the request for EC component type-approval for a type of roll-over protection structure intended to be mounted on the type of tractor for which EC type-approval is requested, the checks laid down in points 2 and 3 will not be made.
ANNEX IX

MODEL
Name of competent authority
ANNEX TO THE EC TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR A TRACTOR TYPE WITH REGARD TO THE STRENGTH OF ROLLOVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES (SAFETY CAB OR FRAME) AND THE STRENGTH OF THEIR ATTACHMENT TO THE TRACTOR
(Article 4(1) of Directive 2003/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on type approval of agricultural or forestry tractors, their trailers and interchangeable towed machinery, together with their systems, components and separate technical units and repealing Directive 74/150/EEC)
EC type approval No …
… extension (1) 1. Trade name or mark of tractor … 2. Tractor type … 3. Name and address of tractor manufacturer … 4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer’s authorised representative … 5. Trade name or mark of rollover protection structure … 6. Extension of EC type approval for the following type(s) of protection structure … 7. Tractor submitted for EC type approval on … 8. Technical service responsible for EC type approval conformity control … 9. Date of report issued by that service … 10. Number of report issued by that service … 11. EC type approval with regard to the strength of the rollover protection structures and the strength of their attachment to the tractor has been granted/refused (2) … 12. The extension of the EC type approval with regard to the strength of the rollover protection structures and the strength of their attachment to tractor has been granted/refused (2) … 13. Place … 14. Date … 15. Signature …
(1) If applicable, state whether this is the first, second, etc. extension of the original EC type approval.
(2) Delete where inapplicable.

PART A

ANNEX X
Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
(referred to in Article 13)
Council Directive 77/536/EEC(OJ L 220, 29.8.1977, p. 1) |
Part X of Annex I to the 1979 Act of Accession(OJ L 291, 19.11.1979, p. 108) |
Part IX A of Annex I to the 1985 Act of Accession(OJ L 302, 15.11.1985, p. 209) |
Council Directive 87/354/EC(OJ L 192, 11.7.1987, p. 43) | Only the references made to Directive 77/536/EC by point 9(a) of the Annex
Council Directive 89/680/EC(OJ L 398, 30.12.1989, p. 26) |
Point XI.C.II.2 of Annex I to the 1994 Act of Accession(OJ C 241, 29.8.1994, p. 205) |
Commission Directive 1999/55/EC(OJ L 146, 11.6.1999, p. 28). |
Point I.A.21 of Annex II to the 2003 Act of Accession(OJ L 236, 23.9.2003, p. 53) |
Council Directive 2006/96/EC(OJ L 363, 20.12.2006, p. 81) | Only the reference to Directive 77/536/EC made in Article 1 and point 20 of Part A of the AnnexPART B
List of time limits for transposition into national law and application
(referred to in Article 13)
Directive | Time limit for transposition | Date of application
77/536/EC | 29 December 1978 | —
87/354/EC | 31 December 1987 | —
89/680/EC | 3 January 1990 | —
1999/55/EC | 30 June 2000(1) | —
2006/96/EC | 1 January 2007 | —
(1) In conformity with Article 2 of Directive 1999/55/EC:
‘1. From 1 July 2000, Member States may not:
—
refuse to grant EC type-approval, to issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC, or to grant national type-approval, in respect of any type of tractor, or
—
prohibit the entry into service of tractors,
if the tractors in question meet the requirements of Directive 77/536/EC as amended by this Directive. 2. From 1 January 2001, Member States:
—
may no longer issue the document provided for in the third indent of Article 10(1) of Directive 74/150/EEC in respect of any type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 77/536/EC as amended by this Directive,
—
may refuse to grant national type-approval in respect of a type of tractor which does not meet the requirements of Directive 77/536/EC, as amended by this Directive.’
ANNEX XI
CORRELATION TABLE

Directive 77/536/EEC | Directive 1999/55/EC | This Directive
Article 9 | | Article 1
Article 1 | | Article 2
Article 2 | | Article 3
Article 3 | | Article 4
Article 4 | | Article 5
Article 5 | | Article 6
Article 6 | | Article 7
Article 7 | | —
| Article 2 | Article 8
Article 8 | | Article 9
Articles 10 and 11 | | Articles 10 and 11
Article 12(1) | | —
Article 12(2) | | Article 12
— | | Article 13
— | | Article 14
Article 13 | | Article 15
Annexes I to IX | | Annexes I to IX
— | | Annex X
— | | Annex XI

Pending: 32009L0040

6.6.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 141/12
(1) Council Directive 96/96/EC of 20 December 1996 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). Since further amendments are to be made, it should be recast in the interests of clarity.
(2) Within the framework of the common transport policy, certain road traffic within the Community should operate under the most favourable circumstances as regards both safety and competitive conditions applying to carriers in the Member States.
(3) The growth of road traffic and the resultant increase in danger and nuisances present all Member States with safety problems of a similar nature and seriousness.
(4) Testing during the lifecycle of a vehicle should be relatively simple, quick and inexpensive.
(5) The minimum Community standards and methods to be used for testing the items listed in this Directive should therefore be defined in separate Directives.
(6) It is necessary to adapt rapidly to technical progress the standards and methods laid down in the separate Directives and, in order to facilitate implementation of the measures required for this purpose, to establish a procedure for close cooperation between the Member States and the Commission within a committee on the adaptation to technical progress of the Directive on roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers.
(7) With regard to braking systems it is difficult to set values for such matters as air pressure settings and build-up times, given the variance in the equipment and methods within the Community.
(8) It is recognised by all concerned with vehicle testing that the method of testing and, in particular, whether the vehicle is tested in a laden, part-laden or unladen condition, can influence the degree of confidence testers have as to the roadworthiness of the braking system.
(9) The prescription of brake force reference values for various laden conditions for each vehicle model should help restore that confidence. This Directive should enable testing under this regime as an alternative to testing against minimum performance values for each vehicle category.
(10) With regard to braking systems the scope of this Directive should relate in the main to vehicles which have been granted component type-approval in accordance with Council Directive 71/320/EEC of 26 July 1971 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the braking devices of certain categories of motor vehicles and their trailers(5)although it is recognised that certain types of vehicle have been granted such approval in accordance with national standards which may differ from the requirements of that Directive.
(11) Member States may extend the scope of the braking test to include vehicles or test items outside the scope of this Directive.
(12) Member States may make the braking test more stringent or increase the frequency of testing.
(13) This Directive is intended to maintain emissions at a low level throughout the useful life of a vehicle by means of regular exhaust emission tests and to ensure that vehicles which are major polluters are withdrawn from service until they are brought to a proper state of maintenance.
(14) Bad tuning and inadequate maintenance are detrimental not only to the engine but also to the environment since they cause increased pollution and fuel consumption. It is important that environment-friendly transport be developed.
(15) In the case of compression-ignition (diesel) engines measurement of the opacity of the exhaust fumes is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the condition of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(16) For positive-ignition (petrol) engines, measurement of carbon monoxide emissions from the exhaust pipe when the engine is idling is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(17) The failure rate in exhaust-emission tests for vehicles which have not been regularly maintained may well be high.
(18) In the case of petrol-engined vehicles for which the type-approval standards specify that they must be equipped with advanced emission control systems such as three-way catalytic converters which are lambda-probe controlled, the regular emission test standards must be more stringent than for conventional vehicles.
(19) Directive 98/69/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to measures to be taken against air pollution by emissions from motor vehicles(6)requires the introduction, from 2000, of on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for petrol-driven cars and light commercial vehicles to monitor the functioning of the vehicle’s emission control system in service. Similarly, from 2003, OBD systems are required also for new diesel vehicles.
(20) Member States may, if appropriate, exclude from the scope of this Directive certain vehicles that are considered to be of historic interest. They may also establish their own testing standards for such vehicles. However, such a right must not lead to the application of stricter standards than those which the vehicles concerned were originally designed to meet.
(21) Simple, common diagnostic systems are available that can be used by testing organisations to test the vast majority of the speed limiters equipped. For those vehicles that are not accessible by such readily available diagnostic tools, the authorities will need to either make use of available equipment from the original vehicle manufacturer or provide for the acceptance of appropriate test certification from the vehicle manufacturer or its franchise organisation.
(22) Periodic verification of the correct functioning of the speed limiter should be facilitated for the vehicles that are fitted with the new recording equipment (digital tachograph) in accordance with Council Regulation (EC) No 2135/98 of 24 September 1998 amending Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 on recording equipment in road transport and Directive 88/599/EEC concerning the application of Regulations (EEC) No 3820/85 and (EEC) No 3821/85(7). Since the year 2003, new vehicles are fitted with such equipment.
(23) Technical requirements relating to taxis and ambulances are similar to those for private cars. The items to be checked may therefore be similar, although the frequency of tests is different.
(24) Each Member State must ensure, within its own area of jurisdiction, that roadworthiness tests are conducted methodically and to a high standard.
(25) The Commission should verify the practical application of this Directive.
(26) Since the objectives of the proposed action, namely to harmonise the rules on roadworthiness tests, to prevent distortion of competition as between road hauliers and to guarantee that vehicles are properly checked and maintained, cannot be achieved by the Member States acting alone and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(27) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(8).
(28) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to define certain minimum standards and methods for testing and to adapt them to technical progress. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(29) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
(a) bring forward the date for the first compulsory roadworthiness test and, where appropriate, require the vehicle to be submitted for testing prior to registration;
(b) shorten the interval between two successive compulsory tests;
(c) make the testing of optional equipment compulsory;
(d) increase the number of items to be tested;
(e) extend the periodic test requirement to other categories of vehicles;
(f) prescribe special additional tests;
(g) require for vehicles registered on their territory higher minimum standards for braking efficiency than those specified in Annex II and include a test on vehicles with heavier loads, provided such requirements do not exceed those of the vehicle’s original type-approval.
Categories of vehicle Frequency of tests
1.Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat 1. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
1. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat
2.Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg 2. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
2. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg
3.Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg 3. Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
3. Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg
4.Taxis, ambulances 4. Taxis, ambulances One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
4. Taxis, ambulances
5.Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500  kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery 5. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500  kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery Four years after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter every two years
5. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500  kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery
6.Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat 6. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat Four years after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter every two years
6. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat
1. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat
2. Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg
3. Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500  kg
4. Taxis, ambulances
5. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500  kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery
6. Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat
Items to be checked/tested Reasons for failure
1.1.Mechanical condition and operation 1.1. Mechanical condition and operation
1.1. Mechanical condition and operation
1.1.1.Footbrake pedal pivot 1.1.1. Footbrake pedal pivot —too tight—bearing worn—excessive wear/play — too tight — bearing worn — excessive wear/play
1.1.1. Footbrake pedal pivot
— too tight
— bearing worn
— excessive wear/play
1.1.2.Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device 1.1.2. Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device —excessive or insufficient reserve travel—brake control not releasing correctly—anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth — excessive or insufficient reserve travel — brake control not releasing correctly — anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth
1.1.2. Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device
— excessive or insufficient reserve travel
— brake control not releasing correctly
— anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth
1.1.3.Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs 1.1.3. Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs —time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive—insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading)—air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks — time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive — insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading) — air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks
1.1.3. Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs
— time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive
— insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading)
— air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks
1.1.4.Low pressure warning indicator or gauge 1.1.4. Low pressure warning indicator or gauge —malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge — malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge
1.1.4. Low pressure warning indicator or gauge
— malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge
1.1.5.Hand-operated brake control valve 1.1.5. Hand-operated brake control valve —cracked or damaged control, excessive wear—malfunction of control valve—control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure—connections loose or leak in system—unsatisfactory operation — cracked or damaged control, excessive wear — malfunction of control valve — control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure — connections loose or leak in system — unsatisfactory operation
1.1.5. Hand-operated brake control valve
— cracked or damaged control, excessive wear
— malfunction of control valve
— control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure
— connections loose or leak in system
— unsatisfactory operation
1.1.6.Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet 1.1.6. Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet —parking brake ratchet not holding correctly—excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism—excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment — parking brake ratchet not holding correctly — excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism — excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment
1.1.6. Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet
— parking brake ratchet not holding correctly
— excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism
— excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment
1.1.7.Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.) 1.1.7. Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.) —damaged, excessive air leakage—excessive discharge of oil from compressor—insecure/inadequate mounting—discharge of hydraulic brake fluid — damaged, excessive air leakage — excessive discharge of oil from compressor — insecure/inadequate mounting — discharge of hydraulic brake fluid
1.1.7. Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.)
— damaged, excessive air leakage
— excessive discharge of oil from compressor
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— discharge of hydraulic brake fluid
1.1.8.Couplings for trailer brakes 1.1.8. Couplings for trailer brakes —defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve—insecure/inadequate mounting—excessive leaks — defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve — insecure/inadequate mounting — excessive leaks
1.1.8. Couplings for trailer brakes
— defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— excessive leaks
1.1.9.Energy storage reservoir pressure tank 1.1.9. Energy storage reservoir pressure tank —damaged, corroded, leaking—drain device inoperative—insecure/inadequate mounting — damaged, corroded, leaking — drain device inoperative — insecure/inadequate mounting
1.1.9. Energy storage reservoir pressure tank
— damaged, corroded, leaking
— drain device inoperative
— insecure/inadequate mounting
1.1.10.Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems) 1.1.10. Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems) —servo unit is defective or ineffective—master cylinder defective or leaking—master cylinder insecure—insufficient quantity of brake fluid—master cylinder reservoir cap missing—brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective—incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device — servo unit is defective or ineffective — master cylinder defective or leaking — master cylinder insecure — insufficient quantity of brake fluid — master cylinder reservoir cap missing — brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective — incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device
1.1.10. Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems)
— servo unit is defective or ineffective
— master cylinder defective or leaking
— master cylinder insecure
— insufficient quantity of brake fluid
— master cylinder reservoir cap missing
— brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective
— incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device
1.1.11.Rigid brake pipes 1.1.11. Rigid brake pipes —risk of failure or fracture—leaks from pipes or connections to coupling—damaged or excessively corroded—misplaced — risk of failure or fracture — leaks from pipes or connections to coupling — damaged or excessively corroded — misplaced
1.1.11. Rigid brake pipes
— risk of failure or fracture
— leaks from pipes or connections to coupling
— damaged or excessively corroded
— misplaced
1.1.12.Flexible brake hoses 1.1.12. Flexible brake hoses —risk of failure or fracture—damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted—leaks from hoses or couplings—hose bulging under pressure—porosity — risk of failure or fracture — damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted — leaks from hoses or couplings — hose bulging under pressure — porosity
1.1.12. Flexible brake hoses
— risk of failure or fracture
— damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted
— leaks from hoses or couplings
— hose bulging under pressure
— porosity
1.1.13.Brake coverings (lining pads) 1.1.13. Brake coverings (lining pads) —excessive wear—contaminated (oil, grease, etc.) — excessive wear — contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
1.1.13. Brake coverings (lining pads)
— excessive wear
— contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
1.1.14.Brake drums, brake discs 1.1.14. Brake drums, brake discs —excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured—contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)—backplate insecure — excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured — contaminated (oil, grease, etc.) — backplate insecure
1.1.14. Brake drums, brake discs
— excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured
— contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
— backplate insecure
1.1.15.Brake cables, rods, levers linkage 1.1.15. Brake cables, rods, levers linkage —cables damaged, knotted—excessively worn or corroded—cable or rod joint insecure—cable guide defective—any restriction to free movement of the braking system—any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear — cables damaged, knotted — excessively worn or corroded — cable or rod joint insecure — cable guide defective — any restriction to free movement of the braking system — any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear
1.1.15. Brake cables, rods, levers linkage
— cables damaged, knotted
— excessively worn or corroded
— cable or rod joint insecure
— cable guide defective
— any restriction to free movement of the braking system
— any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear
1.1.16.Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders) 1.1.16. Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders) —cracked or damaged—leaking—insecure/inadequate mounting—excessively corroded—excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism—dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged — cracked or damaged — leaking — insecure/inadequate mounting — excessively corroded — excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism — dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged
1.1.16. Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders)
— cracked or damaged
— leaking
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— excessively corroded
— excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism
— dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged
1.1.17.Load sensing valve 1.1.17. Load sensing valve —defective linkage—incorrect adjustment—seized, not working—missing — defective linkage — incorrect adjustment — seized, not working — missing
1.1.17. Load sensing valve
— defective linkage
— incorrect adjustment
— seized, not working
— missing
1.1.18.Automatic slack adjusters indicating 1.1.18. Automatic slack adjusters indicating —seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment—defective — seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment — defective
1.1.18. Automatic slack adjusters indicating
— seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment
— defective
1.1.19.Retarder system (where fitted or required) 1.1.19. Retarder system (where fitted or required) —insecure connectors or mountings—defective — insecure connectors or mountings — defective
1.1.19. Retarder system (where fitted or required)
— insecure connectors or mountings
— defective
1.2.Service brake performance and efficiency 1.2. Service brake performance and efficiency
1.2. Service brake performance and efficiency
1.2.1.Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort) 1.2.1. Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort) —inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels—braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive—no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing)—abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel—excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums — inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels — braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive — no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing) — abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel — excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums
1.2.1. Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort)
— inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels
— braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive
— no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing)
— abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel
— excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums
1.2.2.Efficiency 1.2.2. Efficiency —a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 %—ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5) — a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 % — category 1: 50 %(1) — category 2: 43 %(2) — category 3: 40 %(3) — category 4: 50 % — category 5: 45 %(4) — category 6: 50 % — ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5)
1.2.2. Efficiency
— a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 % — category 1: 50 %(1) — category 2: 43 %(2) — category 3: 40 %(3) — category 4: 50 % — category 5: 45 %(4) — category 6: 50 %
— category 1: 50 %(1)
— category 2: 43 %(2)
— category 3: 40 %(3)
— category 4: 50 %
— category 5: 45 %(4)
— category 6: 50 %
— ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5)
1.3.Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system) 1.3. Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system)
1.3. Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system)
1.3.1.Performance 1.3.1. Performance —brake inoperative on one side—braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle—no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing)—automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers — brake inoperative on one side — braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle — no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing) — automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers
1.3.1. Performance
— brake inoperative on one side
— braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle
— no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing)
— automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers
1.3.2.Efficiency 1.3.2. Efficiency —for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads — for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads
1.3.2. Efficiency
— for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads
1.4.Parking brake performance and efficiency 1.4. Parking brake performance and efficiency
1.4. Parking brake performance and efficiency
1.4.1.Performance 1.4.1. Performance —brake inoperative on one side — brake inoperative on one side
1.4.1. Performance
— brake inoperative on one side
1.4.2.Efficiency 1.4.2. Efficiency —for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater — for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater
1.4.2. Efficiency
— for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater
1.5.Retarder or exhaust brake system performance 1.5. Retarder or exhaust brake system performance —no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder)—defective — no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder) — defective
1.5. Retarder or exhaust brake system performance
— no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder)
— defective
1.6.Anti-lock braking 1.6. Anti-lock braking —malfunction of the anti-lock warning device—defective — malfunction of the anti-lock warning device — defective
1.6. Anti-lock braking
— malfunction of the anti-lock warning device
— defective
1.1. Mechanical condition and operation
1.1.1. Footbrake pedal pivot
— too tight
— bearing worn
— excessive wear/play
1.1.2. Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device
— excessive or insufficient reserve travel
— brake control not releasing correctly
— anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth
1.1.3. Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs
— time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive
— insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading)
— air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks
1.1.4. Low pressure warning indicator or gauge
— malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge
1.1.5. Hand-operated brake control valve
— cracked or damaged control, excessive wear
— malfunction of control valve
— control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure
— connections loose or leak in system
— unsatisfactory operation
1.1.6. Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet
— parking brake ratchet not holding correctly
— excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism
— excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment
1.1.7. Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.)
— damaged, excessive air leakage
— excessive discharge of oil from compressor
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— discharge of hydraulic brake fluid
1.1.8. Couplings for trailer brakes
— defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— excessive leaks
1.1.9. Energy storage reservoir pressure tank
— damaged, corroded, leaking
— drain device inoperative
— insecure/inadequate mounting
1.1.10. Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems)
— servo unit is defective or ineffective
— master cylinder defective or leaking
— master cylinder insecure
— insufficient quantity of brake fluid
— master cylinder reservoir cap missing
— brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective
— incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device
1.1.11. Rigid brake pipes
— risk of failure or fracture
— leaks from pipes or connections to coupling
— damaged or excessively corroded
— misplaced
1.1.12. Flexible brake hoses
— risk of failure or fracture
— damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted
— leaks from hoses or couplings
— hose bulging under pressure
— porosity
1.1.13. Brake coverings (lining pads)
— excessive wear
— contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
1.1.14. Brake drums, brake discs
— excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured
— contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
— backplate insecure
1.1.15. Brake cables, rods, levers linkage
— cables damaged, knotted
— excessively worn or corroded
— cable or rod joint insecure
— cable guide defective
— any restriction to free movement of the braking system
— any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear
1.1.16. Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders)
— cracked or damaged
— leaking
— insecure/inadequate mounting
— excessively corroded
— excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism
— dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged
1.1.17. Load sensing valve
— defective linkage
— incorrect adjustment
— seized, not working
— missing
1.1.18. Automatic slack adjusters indicating
— seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment
— defective
1.1.19. Retarder system (where fitted or required)
— insecure connectors or mountings
— defective
1.2. Service brake performance and efficiency
1.2.1. Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort)
— inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels
— braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive
— no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing)
— abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel
— excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums
1.2.2. Efficiency
— a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 % — category 1: 50 %(1) — category 2: 43 %(2) — category 3: 40 %(3) — category 4: 50 % — category 5: 45 %(4) — category 6: 50 %
— category 1: 50 %(1)
— category 2: 43 %(2)
— category 3: 40 %(3)
— category 4: 50 %
— category 5: 45 %(4)
— category 6: 50 %
— category 1: 50 %(1)
— category 2: 43 %(2)
— category 3: 40 %(3)
— category 4: 50 %
— category 5: 45 %(4)
— category 6: 50 %
— ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5)
1.3. Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system)
1.3.1. Performance
— brake inoperative on one side
— braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle
— no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing)
— automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers
1.3.2. Efficiency
— for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads
1.4. Parking brake performance and efficiency
1.4.1. Performance
— brake inoperative on one side
1.4.2. Efficiency
— for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater
1.5. Retarder or exhaust brake system performance
— no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder)
— defective
1.6. Anti-lock braking
— malfunction of the anti-lock warning device
— defective
VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2 AND 3 VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 4, 5 AND 6
2.Steering and steering wheel 2. Steering and steering wheel 2.Steering 2. Steering
2. Steering and steering wheel
2. Steering
2.1.Mechanical condition 2.1. Mechanical condition 2.1.Mechanical condition 2.1. Mechanical condition
2.1. Mechanical condition
2.1. Mechanical condition
2.2.Steering wheel 2.2. Steering wheel 2.2.Steering play 2.2. Steering play
2.2. Steering wheel
2.2. Steering play
2.3.Steering play 2.3. Steering play 2.3.Steering system attachment 2.3. Steering system attachment
2.3. Steering play
2.3. Steering system attachment
2.4.Wheel bearings 2.4. Wheel bearings
2.4. Wheel bearings
3.Visibility 3. Visibility 3.Visibility 3. Visibility
3. Visibility
3. Visibility
3.1.Field of vision 3.1. Field of vision 3.1.Field of vision 3.1. Field of vision
3.1. Field of vision
3.1. Field of vision
3.2.Condition of glass 3.2. Condition of glass 3.2.Condition of glass 3.2. Condition of glass
3.2. Condition of glass
3.2. Condition of glass
3.3.Rear-view mirrors 3.3. Rear-view mirrors 3.3.Rear-view mirrors 3.3. Rear-view mirrors
3.3. Rear-view mirrors
3.3. Rear-view mirrors
3.4.Windscreen wipers 3.4. Windscreen wipers 3.4.Windscreen wipers 3.4. Windscreen wipers
3.4. Windscreen wipers
3.4. Windscreen wipers
3.5.Screen washers 3.5. Screen washers 3.5.Screen washers 3.5. Screen washers
3.5. Screen washers
3.5. Screen washers
4.Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment 4. Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment 4.Lighting equipment 4. Lighting equipment
4. Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment
4. Lighting equipment
4.1.Main and dipped-beam headlamps 4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps 4.1.Main and dipped-beam headlamps 4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1.1.Condition and operation 4.1.1. Condition and operation 4.1.1.Condition and operation 4.1.1. Condition and operation
4.1.1. Condition and operation
4.1.1. Condition and operation
4.1.2.Alignment 4.1.2. Alignment 4.1.2.Alignment 4.1.2. Alignment
4.1.2. Alignment
4.1.2. Alignment
4.1.3.Switches 4.1.3. Switches 4.1.3.Switches 4.1.3. Switches
4.1.3. Switches
4.1.3. Switches
4.1.4.Visual efficiency 4.1.4. Visual efficiency
4.1.4. Visual efficiency
4.2.Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps 4.2. Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps 4.2.Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of: 4.2. Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of:
4.2. Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps
4.2. Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of:
4.2.1.Condition and operation 4.2.1. Condition and operation 4.2.1.Side and rear lamps 4.2.1. Side and rear lamps
4.2.1. Condition and operation
4.2.1. Side and rear lamps
4.2.2.Colour and visual efficiency 4.2.2. Colour and visual efficiency 4.2.2.Stop lamps 4.2.2. Stop lamps
4.2.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.2.2. Stop lamps
4.2.3.Direction-indicator lamps 4.2.3. Direction-indicator lamps
4.2.3. Direction-indicator lamps
4.2.4.Reserving lamps 4.2.4. Reserving lamps
4.2.4. Reserving lamps
4.2.5.Fog lamps 4.2.5. Fog lamps
4.2.5. Fog lamps
4.2.6.Rear registration plate lamps 4.2.6. Rear registration plate lamps
4.2.6. Rear registration plate lamps
4.2.7.Retro reflectors 4.2.7. Retro reflectors
4.2.7. Retro reflectors
4.2.8.Hazard warning lamps 4.2.8. Hazard warning lamps
4.2.8. Hazard warning lamps
4.3.Stop lamps 4.3. Stop lamps
4.3. Stop lamps
4.3.1.Condition and operation 4.3.1. Condition and operation
4.3.1. Condition and operation
4.3.2.Colour and visual efficiency 4.3.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.3.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.Direction-indicator lamps 4.4. Direction-indicator lamps
4.4. Direction-indicator lamps
4.4.1.Condition and operation 4.4.1. Condition and operation
4.4.1. Condition and operation
4.4.2.Colour and visual efficiency 4.4.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.3.Switches 4.4.3. Switches
4.4.3. Switches
4.4.4.Flashing frequency 4.4.4. Flashing frequency
4.4.4. Flashing frequency
4.5.Front and rear fog lamps 4.5. Front and rear fog lamps
4.5. Front and rear fog lamps
4.5.1.Position 4.5.1. Position
4.5.1. Position
4.5.2.Condition and operation 4.5.2. Condition and operation
4.5.2. Condition and operation
4.5.3.Colour and visual efficiency 4.5.3. Colour and visual efficiency
4.5.3. Colour and visual efficiency
4.6.Reversing lamps 4.6. Reversing lamps
4.6. Reversing lamps
4.6.1.Condition and operation 4.6.1. Condition and operation
4.6.1. Condition and operation
4.6.2.Colour and visual efficiency 4.6.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.6.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.7.Rear registration plate lamp 4.7. Rear registration plate lamp
4.7. Rear registration plate lamp
4.8.Retro reflectors—condition and colour 4.8. Retro reflectors — condition and colour
4.8. Retro reflectors
— condition and colour
4.9.Telltales 4.9. Telltales
4.9. Telltales
4.10.Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer 4.10. Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer
4.10. Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer
4.11.Electrical wiring 4.11. Electrical wiring
4.11. Electrical wiring
5.Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension 5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension 5.Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension 5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5.1.Axles 5.1. Axles 5.1.Axles 5.1. Axles
5.1. Axles
5.1. Axles
5.2.Wheels and tyres 5.2. Wheels and tyres 5.2.Wheels and tyres 5.2. Wheels and tyres
5.2. Wheels and tyres
5.2. Wheels and tyres
5.3.Suspension 5.3. Suspension 5.3.Suspension 5.3. Suspension
5.3. Suspension
5.3. Suspension
6.Chassis and chassis attachments 6. Chassis and chassis attachments 6.Chassis and chassis attachments 6. Chassis and chassis attachments
6. Chassis and chassis attachments
6. Chassis and chassis attachments
6.1.Chassis or frame and attachments 6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments 6.1.Chassis or frame and attachments 6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1.1.General condition 6.1.1. General condition 6.1.1.General condition 6.1.1. General condition
6.1.1. General condition
6.1.1. General condition
6.1.2.Exhaust pipes and silencers 6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers 6.1.2.Exhaust pipes and silencers 6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.3.Fuel tank or pipes 6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes 6.1.3.Fuel tank or pipes 6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.4.Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries 6.1.4. Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries 6.1.4.Spare-wheel carrier 6.1.4. Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.4. Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries
6.1.4. Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5.Spare-wheel carrier 6.1.5. Spare-wheel carrier 6.1.5.Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted) 6.1.5. Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted)
6.1.5. Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5. Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted)
6.1.6.Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers 6.1.6. Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers
6.1.6. Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers
6.2.Cab and bodywork 6.2. Cab and bodywork 6.2.Bodywork 6.2. Bodywork
6.2. Cab and bodywork
6.2. Bodywork
6.2.1.General condition 6.2.1. General condition 6.2.1.Structural condition 6.2.1. Structural condition
6.2.1. General condition
6.2.1. Structural condition
6.2.2.Mounting 6.2.2. Mounting 6.2.2.Doors and locks 6.2.2. Doors and locks
6.2.2. Mounting
6.2.2. Doors and locks
6.2.3.Doors and locks 6.2.3. Doors and locks
6.2.3. Doors and locks
6.2.4.Floor 6.2.4. Floor
6.2.4. Floor
6.2.5.Driver’s seat 6.2.5. Driver’s seat
6.2.5. Driver’s seat
6.2.6.Running boards 6.2.6. Running boards
6.2.6. Running boards
7.Other equipment 7. Other equipment 7.Other equipment 7. Other equipment
7. Other equipment
7. Other equipment
7.1.Safety belts 7.1. Safety belts 7.1.Mounting of driver’s seat 7.1. Mounting of driver’s seat
7.1. Safety belts
7.1. Mounting of driver’s seat
7.2.Fire extinguisher 7.2. Fire extinguisher 7.2.Mounting of battery 7.2. Mounting of battery
7.2. Fire extinguisher
7.2. Mounting of battery
7.3.Locks and anti-theft device 7.3. Locks and anti-theft device 7.3.Audible warning device 7.3. Audible warning device
7.3. Locks and anti-theft device
7.3. Audible warning device
7.4.Warning triangle 7.4. Warning triangle 7.4.Warning triangle 7.4. Warning triangle
7.4. Warning triangle
7.4. Warning triangle
7.5.First-aid kit 7.5. First-aid kit 7.5.Safety belts 7.5. Safety belts
7.5. First-aid kit
7.5. Safety belts
7.5.1.Security of mountings 7.5.1. Security of mountings
7.5.1. Security of mountings
7.5.2.Condition of belts 7.5.2. Condition of belts
7.5.2. Condition of belts
7.5.3.Operation 7.5.3. Operation
7.5.3. Operation
7.6.Wheel chock(s) 7.6. Wheel chock(s)
7.6. Wheel chock(s)
7.7.Audible warning device 7.7. Audible warning device
7.7. Audible warning device
7.8.Speedometer 7.8. Speedometer
7.8. Speedometer
7.9.Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact 7.9. Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7) — check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate — where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
7.9. Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7) — check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate — where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)
— check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
7.10.Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values 7.10. Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values — where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8) — check validity of speed limiter plate — where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
7.10. Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values — where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8) — check validity of speed limiter plate — where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
— where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)
— check validity of speed limiter plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
8.Nuisance 8. Nuisance 8.Nuisance 8. Nuisance
8. Nuisance
8. Nuisance
8.1.Noise 8.1. Noise 8.1.Noise 8.1. Noise
8.1. Noise
8.1. Noise
2. Steering and steering wheel
2. Steering
2.1. Mechanical condition
2.1. Mechanical condition
2.2. Steering wheel
2.2. Steering play
2.3. Steering play
2.3. Steering system attachment
2.4. Wheel bearings
3. Visibility
3. Visibility
3.1. Field of vision
3.1. Field of vision
3.2. Condition of glass
3.2. Condition of glass
3.3. Rear-view mirrors
3.3. Rear-view mirrors
3.4. Windscreen wipers
3.4. Windscreen wipers
3.5. Screen washers
3.5. Screen washers
4. Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment
4. Lighting equipment
4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1. Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1.1. Condition and operation
4.1.1. Condition and operation
4.1.2. Alignment
4.1.2. Alignment
4.1.3. Switches
4.1.3. Switches
4.1.4. Visual efficiency
4.2. Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps
4.2. Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of:
4.2.1. Condition and operation
4.2.1. Side and rear lamps
4.2.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.2.2. Stop lamps
4.2.3. Direction-indicator lamps
4.2.4. Reserving lamps
4.2.5. Fog lamps
4.2.6. Rear registration plate lamps
4.2.7. Retro reflectors
4.2.8. Hazard warning lamps
4.3. Stop lamps
4.3.1. Condition and operation
4.3.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.4. Direction-indicator lamps
4.4.1. Condition and operation
4.4.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.3. Switches
4.4.4. Flashing frequency
4.5. Front and rear fog lamps
4.5.1. Position
4.5.2. Condition and operation
4.5.3. Colour and visual efficiency
4.6. Reversing lamps
4.6.1. Condition and operation
4.6.2. Colour and visual efficiency
4.7. Rear registration plate lamp
4.8. Retro reflectors
— condition and colour
4.9. Telltales
4.10. Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer
4.11. Electrical wiring
5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5. Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5.1. Axles
5.1. Axles
5.2. Wheels and tyres
5.2. Wheels and tyres
5.3. Suspension
5.3. Suspension
6. Chassis and chassis attachments
6. Chassis and chassis attachments
6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1. Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1.1. General condition
6.1.1. General condition
6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.2. Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.3. Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.4. Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries
6.1.4. Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5. Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5. Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted)
6.1.6. Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers
6.2. Cab and bodywork
6.2. Bodywork
6.2.1. General condition
6.2.1. Structural condition
6.2.2. Mounting
6.2.2. Doors and locks
6.2.3. Doors and locks
6.2.4. Floor
6.2.5. Driver’s seat
6.2.6. Running boards
7. Other equipment
7. Other equipment
7.1. Safety belts
7.1. Mounting of driver’s seat
7.2. Fire extinguisher
7.2. Mounting of battery
7.3. Locks and anti-theft device
7.3. Audible warning device
7.4. Warning triangle
7.4. Warning triangle
7.5. First-aid kit
7.5. Safety belts
7.5.1. Security of mountings
7.5.2. Condition of belts
7.5.3. Operation
7.6. Wheel chock(s)
7.7. Audible warning device
7.8. Speedometer
7.9. Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7) — check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate — where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)
— check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)
— check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
7.10. Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values — where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8) — check validity of speed limiter plate — where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact — check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
— where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)
— check validity of speed limiter plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
— where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)
— check validity of speed limiter plate
— where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
8. Nuisance
8. Nuisance
8.1. Noise
8.1. Noise
(a) Where the exhaust emissions are not controlled by an advanced emission control system such as a three-way catalytic converter that is lambda-probe controlled:1.Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. 1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. 2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. (i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.; (ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. (i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.; (ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
(i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;
(ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. (i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.; (ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
(i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;
(ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
(i) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;
(ii) for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
(b) Where the exhaust emissions are controlled by an advanced emission control system such as a three-way catalytic converter that is lambda-probe controlled:1.Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.3.Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.4.Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. 1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. 2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. 3. Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. (i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002. (ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. (iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
3. Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. (i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002. (ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. (iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
(i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.
(ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
1. Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
3. Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. (i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002. (ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. (iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
(i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.
(ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
(i) Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.
(ii) Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
(a) Exhaust gas opacity to be measured during free acceleration (no load from idle up to cut-off speed) with gear lever in neutral and clutch engaged.
(b) Vehicle preconditioning:1.Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition.2.Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. 1. Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition. 2. Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. (i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan. (ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
1. Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition.
2. Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. (i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan. (ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
(i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.
(ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
1. Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition.
2. Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. (i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan. (ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
(i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.
(ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
(i) Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.
(ii) Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
(c) Test procedure:1.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle.3.To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump.4.During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds. 1. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. 2. Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle. 3. To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump. 4. During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds.
1. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle.
3. To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump.
4. During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds.
1. Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle.
3. To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump.
4. During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds.
(d) Limit values:1.The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10).2.Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008.3.Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements.4.Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles.5.To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). 1. The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10). 2. Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008. — naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1, — turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1, — a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV) 3. Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements. 4. Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles. 5. To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii).
1. The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10).
2. Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008. — naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1, — turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1, — a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
— naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,
— turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,
— a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
(a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);
(d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
3. Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements.
4. Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles.
5. To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii).
1. The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10).
2. Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008. — naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1, — turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1, — a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
— naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,
— turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,
— a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
(a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);
(d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
— naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,
— turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,
— a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. (a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); (c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); (d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
(a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);
(d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
(a) row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(b) row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(c) row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);
(d) row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
3. Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements.
4. Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles.
5. To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii).
VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2 AND 3 VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 4, 5 AND 6
8.3.Suppression of radio interference 8.3. Suppression of radio interference
8.3. Suppression of radio interference
9.Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles 9. Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles
9. Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles
9.1.Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s) 9.1. Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s)
9.1. Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s)
9.2.Heating system 9.2. Heating system
9.2. Heating system
9.3.Ventilation system 9.3. Ventilation system
9.3. Ventilation system
9.4.Seat layout 9.4. Seat layout
9.4. Seat layout
9.5.Interior lighting 9.5. Interior lighting
9.5. Interior lighting
10.Vehicle identification 10. Vehicle identification 10.Vehicle identification 10. Vehicle identification
10. Vehicle identification
10. Vehicle identification
10.1.Registration plate 10.1. Registration plate 10.1.Registration plate 10.1. Registration plate
10.1. Registration plate
10.1. Registration plate
10.2.Chassis number 10.2. Chassis number 10.2.Chassis number 10.2. Chassis number
10.2. Chassis number
10.2. Chassis number
8.3. Suppression of radio interference
9. Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles
9.1. Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s)
9.2. Heating system
9.3. Ventilation system
9.4. Seat layout
9.5. Interior lighting
10. Vehicle identification
10. Vehicle identification
10.1. Registration plate
10.1. Registration plate
10.2. Chassis number
10.2. Chassis number
Council Directive 96/96/EC(OJ L 46, 17.2.1997, p. 1)
Commission Directive 1999/52/EC(OJ L 142, 5.6.1999, p. 26)
Commission Directive 2001/9/EC(OJ L 48, 17.2.2001, p. 18)
Commission Directive 2001/11/EC(OJ L 48, 17.2.2001, p. 20)
Commission Directive 2003/27/EC(OJ L 90, 8.4.2003, p. 41)
Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 284, 31.10.2003, p. 1) only Annex III, point 68
Directive Time limit for transposition
96/96/EC 9 March 1998
1999/52/EC 30 September 2000
2001/9/EC 9 March 2002
2001/11/EC 9 March 2003
2003/27/EC 1 January 2004
Directive 96/96/EC This Directive
Articles 1 to 4 Articles 1 to 4
Article 5, introductory wording Article 5, introductory wording
Article 5, first to seventh indents Article 5, points (a) to (g)
Article 6 —
Article 7 Article 6(1)
— Article 6(2)
Article 8(1) Article 7(1)
Article 8(2), first subparagraph Article 7(2)
Article 8(2), second subparagraph —
Article 8(3) —
Article 9(1) —
Article 9(2) Article 8
Article 10 —
Article 11(1) —
Article 11(2) Article 9
Article 11(3) —
— Article 10
Article 12 Article 11
Article 13 Article 12
Annexes I and II Annexes I and II
Annexes III and IV —
— Annex III
— Annex IV
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 71 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having consulted the Committee of the Regions,
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 96/96/EC of 20 December 1996 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). Since further amendments are to be made, it should be recast in the interests of clarity.
(2) Within the framework of the common transport policy, certain road traffic within the Community should operate under the most favourable circumstances as regards both safety and competitive conditions applying to carriers in the Member States.
(3) The growth of road traffic and the resultant increase in danger and nuisances present all Member States with safety problems of a similar nature and seriousness.
(4) Testing during the lifecycle of a vehicle should be relatively simple, quick and inexpensive.
(5) The minimum Community standards and methods to be used for testing the items listed in this Directive should therefore be defined in separate Directives.
(6) It is necessary to adapt rapidly to technical progress the standards and methods laid down in the separate Directives and, in order to facilitate implementation of the measures required for this purpose, to establish a procedure for close cooperation between the Member States and the Commission within a committee on the adaptation to technical progress of the Directive on roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers.
(7) With regard to braking systems it is difficult to set values for such matters as air pressure settings and build-up times, given the variance in the equipment and methods within the Community.
(8) It is recognised by all concerned with vehicle testing that the method of testing and, in particular, whether the vehicle is tested in a laden, part-laden or unladen condition, can influence the degree of confidence testers have as to the roadworthiness of the braking system.
(9) The prescription of brake force reference values for various laden conditions for each vehicle model should help restore that confidence. This Directive should enable testing under this regime as an alternative to testing against minimum performance values for each vehicle category.
(10) With regard to braking systems the scope of this Directive should relate in the main to vehicles which have been granted component type-approval in accordance with Council Directive 71/320/EEC of 26 July 1971 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the braking devices of certain categories of motor vehicles and their trailers(5)although it is recognised that certain types of vehicle have been granted such approval in accordance with national standards which may differ from the requirements of that Directive.
(11) Member States may extend the scope of the braking test to include vehicles or test items outside the scope of this Directive.
(12) Member States may make the braking test more stringent or increase the frequency of testing.
(13) This Directive is intended to maintain emissions at a low level throughout the useful life of a vehicle by means of regular exhaust emission tests and to ensure that vehicles which are major polluters are withdrawn from service until they are brought to a proper state of maintenance.
(14) Bad tuning and inadequate maintenance are detrimental not only to the engine but also to the environment since they cause increased pollution and fuel consumption. It is important that environment-friendly transport be developed.
(15) In the case of compression-ignition (diesel) engines measurement of the opacity of the exhaust fumes is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the condition of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(16) For positive-ignition (petrol) engines, measurement of carbon monoxide emissions from the exhaust pipe when the engine is idling is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(17) The failure rate in exhaust-emission tests for vehicles which have not been regularly maintained may well be high.
(18) In the case of petrol-engined vehicles for which the type-approval standards specify that they must be equipped with advanced emission control systems such as three-way catalytic converters which are lambda-probe controlled, the regular emission test standards must be more stringent than for conventional vehicles.
(19) Directive 98/69/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to measures to be taken against air pollution by emissions from motor vehicles(6)requires the introduction, from 2000, of on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for petrol-driven cars and light commercial vehicles to monitor the functioning of the vehicle’s emission control system in service. Similarly, from 2003, OBD systems are required also for new diesel vehicles.
(20) Member States may, if appropriate, exclude from the scope of this Directive certain vehicles that are considered to be of historic interest. They may also establish their own testing standards for such vehicles. However, such a right must not lead to the application of stricter standards than those which the vehicles concerned were originally designed to meet.
(21) Simple, common diagnostic systems are available that can be used by testing organisations to test the vast majority of the speed limiters equipped. For those vehicles that are not accessible by such readily available diagnostic tools, the authorities will need to either make use of available equipment from the original vehicle manufacturer or provide for the acceptance of appropriate test certification from the vehicle manufacturer or its franchise organisation.
(22) Periodic verification of the correct functioning of the speed limiter should be facilitated for the vehicles that are fitted with the new recording equipment (digital tachograph) in accordance with Council Regulation (EC) No 2135/98 of 24 September 1998 amending Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 on recording equipment in road transport and Directive 88/599/EEC concerning the application of Regulations (EEC) No 3820/85 and (EEC) No 3821/85(7). Since the year 2003, new vehicles are fitted with such equipment.
(23) Technical requirements relating to taxis and ambulances are similar to those for private cars. The items to be checked may therefore be similar, although the frequency of tests is different.
(24) Each Member State must ensure, within its own area of jurisdiction, that roadworthiness tests are conducted methodically and to a high standard.
(25) The Commission should verify the practical application of this Directive.
(26) Since the objectives of the proposed action, namely to harmonise the rules on roadworthiness tests, to prevent distortion of competition as between road hauliers and to guarantee that vehicles are properly checked and maintained, cannot be achieved by the Member States acting alone and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(27) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(8).
(28) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to define certain minimum standards and methods for testing and to adapt them to technical progress. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(29) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
1. In each Member State, motor vehicles registered in that State and their trailers and semi-trailers shall undergo periodic roadworthiness tests in accordance with this Directive.
2. The categories of vehicles to be tested, the frequency of the roadworthiness tests and the items which must be tested are listed in Annexes I and II.

Article 2
The roadworthiness tests provided for in this Directive shall be carried out by the Member State, or by a public body entrusted with the task by the State or by bodies or establishments designated and directly supervised by the State, including duly authorised private bodies. In particular, where establishments designated as vehicle testing centres also perform motor vehicle repairs, Member States shall make every effort to ensure the objectivity and high quality of the vehicle testing.

Article 3
1. Member States shall take such measures as they deem necessary to make it possible to prove that a vehicle has passed a roadworthiness test complying with at least the provisions of this Directive.
These measures shall be notified to the other Member States and to the Commission.
2. Each Member State shall, on the same basis as if it had itself issued the proof, recognise the proof issued in another Member State showing that a motor vehicle registered on the territory of that other State, together with its trailer or semi-trailer, has passed a roadworthiness test complying with at least the provisions of this Directive.
3. Member States shall apply suitable procedures to establish, as far as practicable, that the brake performance of the vehicles registered in their territory meets the requirements specified in this Directive.

Article 4
1. Member States shall have the right to exclude from the scope of this Directive vehicles belonging to the armed forces, the forces of law and order and the fire service.
2. Member States may, after consulting the Commission, exclude from the scope of this Directive, or subject to special provisions, certain vehicles operated or used in exceptional conditions and vehicles which are never, or hardly ever, used on public highways, including vehicles of historic interest which were manufactured before 1 January 1960 or which are temporarily withdrawn from circulation.
3. Member States may, after consulting the Commission, set their own testing standards for vehicles considered to be of historic interest.

Article 5
Notwithstanding the provisions of Annexes I and II, Member States may:
(a)
bring forward the date for the first compulsory roadworthiness test and, where appropriate, require the vehicle to be submitted for testing prior to registration;
(b)
shorten the interval between two successive compulsory tests;
(c)
make the testing of optional equipment compulsory;
(d)
increase the number of items to be tested;
(e)
extend the periodic test requirement to other categories of vehicles;
(f)
prescribe special additional tests;
(g)
require for vehicles registered on their territory higher minimum standards for braking efficiency than those specified in Annex II and include a test on vehicles with heavier loads, provided such requirements do not exceed those of the vehicle’s original type-approval.

Article 6
1. The Commission shall adopt the separate Directives necessary to define the minimum standards and methods for testing the items listed in Annex II, as well as any amendments necessary to adapt those standards and methods to technical progress.
2. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 7(2).

Article 7
1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee on the adaptation to technical progress of the Directive on roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers.
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4) and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.

Article 8
No later than three years after the introduction of regular testing of speed limitation devices, the Commission shall examine whether, on the basis of the experience gained, the tests laid down are sufficient to detect defective or manipulated speed limitation devices or whether the rules need to be amended.

Article 9
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field governed by this Directive.

Article 10
Directive 96/96/EC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex III, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex IV.

Article 11
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Article 12
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 71 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having consulted the Committee of the Regions,
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(2),
(1) Council Directive 96/96/EC of 20 December 1996 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers(3)has been substantially amended several times(4). Since further amendments are to be made, it should be recast in the interests of clarity.
(2) Within the framework of the common transport policy, certain road traffic within the Community should operate under the most favourable circumstances as regards both safety and competitive conditions applying to carriers in the Member States.
(3) The growth of road traffic and the resultant increase in danger and nuisances present all Member States with safety problems of a similar nature and seriousness.
(4) Testing during the lifecycle of a vehicle should be relatively simple, quick and inexpensive.
(5) The minimum Community standards and methods to be used for testing the items listed in this Directive should therefore be defined in separate Directives.
(6) It is necessary to adapt rapidly to technical progress the standards and methods laid down in the separate Directives and, in order to facilitate implementation of the measures required for this purpose, to establish a procedure for close cooperation between the Member States and the Commission within a committee on the adaptation to technical progress of the Directive on roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers.
(7) With regard to braking systems it is difficult to set values for such matters as air pressure settings and build-up times, given the variance in the equipment and methods within the Community.
(8) It is recognised by all concerned with vehicle testing that the method of testing and, in particular, whether the vehicle is tested in a laden, part-laden or unladen condition, can influence the degree of confidence testers have as to the roadworthiness of the braking system.
(9) The prescription of brake force reference values for various laden conditions for each vehicle model should help restore that confidence. This Directive should enable testing under this regime as an alternative to testing against minimum performance values for each vehicle category.
(10) With regard to braking systems the scope of this Directive should relate in the main to vehicles which have been granted component type-approval in accordance with Council Directive 71/320/EEC of 26 July 1971 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the braking devices of certain categories of motor vehicles and their trailers(5)although it is recognised that certain types of vehicle have been granted such approval in accordance with national standards which may differ from the requirements of that Directive.
(11) Member States may extend the scope of the braking test to include vehicles or test items outside the scope of this Directive.
(12) Member States may make the braking test more stringent or increase the frequency of testing.
(13) This Directive is intended to maintain emissions at a low level throughout the useful life of a vehicle by means of regular exhaust emission tests and to ensure that vehicles which are major polluters are withdrawn from service until they are brought to a proper state of maintenance.
(14) Bad tuning and inadequate maintenance are detrimental not only to the engine but also to the environment since they cause increased pollution and fuel consumption. It is important that environment-friendly transport be developed.
(15) In the case of compression-ignition (diesel) engines measurement of the opacity of the exhaust fumes is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the condition of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(16) For positive-ignition (petrol) engines, measurement of carbon monoxide emissions from the exhaust pipe when the engine is idling is deemed to be an adequate indicator of the vehicle’s state of maintenance, with regard to emissions.
(17) The failure rate in exhaust-emission tests for vehicles which have not been regularly maintained may well be high.
(18) In the case of petrol-engined vehicles for which the type-approval standards specify that they must be equipped with advanced emission control systems such as three-way catalytic converters which are lambda-probe controlled, the regular emission test standards must be more stringent than for conventional vehicles.
(19) Directive 98/69/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to measures to be taken against air pollution by emissions from motor vehicles(6)requires the introduction, from 2000, of on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for petrol-driven cars and light commercial vehicles to monitor the functioning of the vehicle’s emission control system in service. Similarly, from 2003, OBD systems are required also for new diesel vehicles.
(20) Member States may, if appropriate, exclude from the scope of this Directive certain vehicles that are considered to be of historic interest. They may also establish their own testing standards for such vehicles. However, such a right must not lead to the application of stricter standards than those which the vehicles concerned were originally designed to meet.
(21) Simple, common diagnostic systems are available that can be used by testing organisations to test the vast majority of the speed limiters equipped. For those vehicles that are not accessible by such readily available diagnostic tools, the authorities will need to either make use of available equipment from the original vehicle manufacturer or provide for the acceptance of appropriate test certification from the vehicle manufacturer or its franchise organisation.
(22) Periodic verification of the correct functioning of the speed limiter should be facilitated for the vehicles that are fitted with the new recording equipment (digital tachograph) in accordance with Council Regulation (EC) No 2135/98 of 24 September 1998 amending Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 on recording equipment in road transport and Directive 88/599/EEC concerning the application of Regulations (EEC) No 3820/85 and (EEC) No 3821/85(7). Since the year 2003, new vehicles are fitted with such equipment.
(23) Technical requirements relating to taxis and ambulances are similar to those for private cars. The items to be checked may therefore be similar, although the frequency of tests is different.
(24) Each Member State must ensure, within its own area of jurisdiction, that roadworthiness tests are conducted methodically and to a high standard.
(25) The Commission should verify the practical application of this Directive.
(26) Since the objectives of the proposed action, namely to harmonise the rules on roadworthiness tests, to prevent distortion of competition as between road hauliers and to guarantee that vehicles are properly checked and maintained, cannot be achieved by the Member States acting alone and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(27) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(8).
(28) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to define certain minimum standards and methods for testing and to adapt them to technical progress. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(29) This Directive should be without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
1. In each Member State, motor vehicles registered in that State and their trailers and semi-trailers shall undergo periodic roadworthiness tests in accordance with this Directive.
2. The categories of vehicles to be tested, the frequency of the roadworthiness tests and the items which must be tested are listed in Annexes I and II.
The roadworthiness tests provided for in this Directive shall be carried out by the Member State, or by a public body entrusted with the task by the State or by bodies or establishments designated and directly supervised by the State, including duly authorised private bodies. In particular, where establishments designated as vehicle testing centres also perform motor vehicle repairs, Member States shall make every effort to ensure the objectivity and high quality of the vehicle testing.
1. Member States shall take such measures as they deem necessary to make it possible to prove that a vehicle has passed a roadworthiness test complying with at least the provisions of this Directive.
These measures shall be notified to the other Member States and to the Commission.
2. Each Member State shall, on the same basis as if it had itself issued the proof, recognise the proof issued in another Member State showing that a motor vehicle registered on the territory of that other State, together with its trailer or semi-trailer, has passed a roadworthiness test complying with at least the provisions of this Directive.
3. Member States shall apply suitable procedures to establish, as far as practicable, that the brake performance of the vehicles registered in their territory meets the requirements specified in this Directive.
1. Member States shall have the right to exclude from the scope of this Directive vehicles belonging to the armed forces, the forces of law and order and the fire service.
2. Member States may, after consulting the Commission, exclude from the scope of this Directive, or subject to special provisions, certain vehicles operated or used in exceptional conditions and vehicles which are never, or hardly ever, used on public highways, including vehicles of historic interest which were manufactured before 1 January 1960 or which are temporarily withdrawn from circulation.
3. Member States may, after consulting the Commission, set their own testing standards for vehicles considered to be of historic interest.
Notwithstanding the provisions of Annexes I and II, Member States may:
(a)
bring forward the date for the first compulsory roadworthiness test and, where appropriate, require the vehicle to be submitted for testing prior to registration;
(b)
shorten the interval between two successive compulsory tests;
(c)
make the testing of optional equipment compulsory;
(d)
increase the number of items to be tested;
(e)
extend the periodic test requirement to other categories of vehicles;
(f)
prescribe special additional tests;
(g)
require for vehicles registered on their territory higher minimum standards for braking efficiency than those specified in Annex II and include a test on vehicles with heavier loads, provided such requirements do not exceed those of the vehicle’s original type-approval.
1. The Commission shall adopt the separate Directives necessary to define the minimum standards and methods for testing the items listed in Annex II, as well as any amendments necessary to adapt those standards and methods to technical progress.
2. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 7(2).
1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee on the adaptation to technical progress of the Directive on roadworthiness tests for motor vehicles and their trailers.
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4) and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.
No later than three years after the introduction of regular testing of speed limitation devices, the Commission shall examine whether, on the basis of the experience gained, the tests laid down are sufficient to detect defective or manipulated speed limitation devices or whether the rules need to be amended.
Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field governed by this Directive.
Directive 96/96/EC, as amended by the acts listed in Annex III, Part A, is repealed, without prejudice to the obligations of the Member States relating to the time limits for transposition into national law of the Directives set out in Annex III, Part B.
References to the repealed Directive shall be construed as references to this Directive and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex IV.
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.
ANNEX I
CATEGORIES OF VEHICLES SUBJECT TO ROADWORTHINESS TESTS AND FREQUENCY OF THE TESTS

Categories of vehicle | Frequency of tests
1.Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat | 1. | Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat | One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
1. | Motor vehicles used for the carriage of passengers and with more than eight seats, excluding the driver’s seat
2.Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg | 2. | Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg | One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
2. | Motor vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg
3.Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg | 3. | Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg | One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
3. | Trailers and semi-trailers with a maximum permissible mass exceeding 3 500 kg
4.Taxis, ambulances | 4. | Taxis, ambulances | One year after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter annually
4. | Taxis, ambulances
5.Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500 kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery | 5. | Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500 kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery | Four years after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter every two years
5. | Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, normally used for the road carriage of goods and with a maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3 500 kg, excluding agricultural tractors and machinery
6.Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat | 6. | Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat | Four years after the date on which the vehicle was first used, and thereafter every two years
6. | Motor vehicles having at least four wheels, used for the carriage of passengers and with not more than eight seats excluding the driver’s seat

ITEMS TO BE COMPULSORILY TESTED

ANNEX IIThe test must cover at least the items listed below, provided that these are related to the obligatory equipment of the vehicle being tested in the Member State concerned.
The tests covered by this Annex may be carried out visually without disassembly of vehicle parts.
Where the vehicle is found to be defective with regard to the test items below, the competent authorities in the Member States must adopt a procedure for setting the conditions under which the vehicle may be used before passing another roadworthiness test.
VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AND 61. Braking systems
The following items are to be included in the roadworthiness test of vehicle braking systems. The test results achieved during the checks on the braking systems must be equivalent as far as is practicable to the technical requirements of Directive 71/320/EEC.

Items to be checked/tested | Reasons for failure
1.1.Mechanical condition and operation | 1.1. | Mechanical condition and operation |
1.1. | Mechanical condition and operation
1.1.1.Footbrake pedal pivot | 1.1.1. | Footbrake pedal pivot | —too tight—bearing worn—excessive wear/play | — | too tight | — | bearing worn | — | excessive wear/play
1.1.1. | Footbrake pedal pivot
— | too tight
— | bearing worn
— | excessive wear/play
1.1.2.Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device | 1.1.2. | Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device | —excessive or insufficient reserve travel—brake control not releasing correctly—anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth | — | excessive or insufficient reserve travel | — | brake control not releasing correctly | — | anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth
1.1.2. | Pedal condition and travel of the brake operating device
— | excessive or insufficient reserve travel
— | brake control not releasing correctly
— | anti-slip provision on brake pedal missing, loose or worn smooth
1.1.3.Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs | 1.1.3. | Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs | —time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive—insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading)—air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks | — | time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive | — | insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading) | — | air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks
1.1.3. | Vacuum pump or compressor and reservoirs
— | time taken to build up air pressure/vacuum for the effective operation of the brakes is excessive
— | insufficient air pressure/vacuum to give assistance for at least two applications of the brake after the warning device has operated (or gauge shows unsafe reading)
— | air leak causing a noticeable drop in pressure or audible air leaks
1.1.4.Low pressure warning indicator or gauge | 1.1.4. | Low pressure warning indicator or gauge | —malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge | — | malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge
1.1.4. | Low pressure warning indicator or gauge
— | malfunctioning or defective low pressure indicator/air pressure gauge
1.1.5.Hand-operated brake control valve | 1.1.5. | Hand-operated brake control valve | —cracked or damaged control, excessive wear—malfunction of control valve—control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure—connections loose or leak in system—unsatisfactory operation | — | cracked or damaged control, excessive wear | — | malfunction of control valve | — | control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure | — | connections loose or leak in system | — | unsatisfactory operation
1.1.5. | Hand-operated brake control valve
— | cracked or damaged control, excessive wear
— | malfunction of control valve
— | control insecure on valve spindle or valve unit insecure
— | connections loose or leak in system
— | unsatisfactory operation
1.1.6.Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet | 1.1.6. | Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet | —parking brake ratchet not holding correctly—excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism—excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment | — | parking brake ratchet not holding correctly | — | excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism | — | excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment
1.1.6. | Parking brake, lever control, parking brake ratchet
— | parking brake ratchet not holding correctly
— | excessive wear at lever pivot or ratchet mechanism
— | excessive movement of lever indicating incorrect adjustment
1.1.7.Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.) | 1.1.7. | Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.) | —damaged, excessive air leakage—excessive discharge of oil from compressor—insecure/inadequate mounting—discharge of hydraulic brake fluid | — | damaged, excessive air leakage | — | excessive discharge of oil from compressor | — | insecure/inadequate mounting | — | discharge of hydraulic brake fluid
1.1.7. | Braking valves (foot valves, unloaders, governors, etc.)
— | damaged, excessive air leakage
— | excessive discharge of oil from compressor
— | insecure/inadequate mounting
— | discharge of hydraulic brake fluid
1.1.8.Couplings for trailer brakes | 1.1.8. | Couplings for trailer brakes | —defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve—insecure/inadequate mounting—excessive leaks | — | defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve | — | insecure/inadequate mounting | — | excessive leaks
1.1.8. | Couplings for trailer brakes
— | defective isolation taps or self-sealing valve
— | insecure/inadequate mounting
— | excessive leaks
1.1.9.Energy storage reservoir pressure tank | 1.1.9. | Energy storage reservoir pressure tank | —damaged, corroded, leaking—drain device inoperative—insecure/inadequate mounting | — | damaged, corroded, leaking | — | drain device inoperative | — | insecure/inadequate mounting
1.1.9. | Energy storage reservoir pressure tank
— | damaged, corroded, leaking
— | drain device inoperative
— | insecure/inadequate mounting
1.1.10.Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems) | 1.1.10. | Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems) | —servo unit is defective or ineffective—master cylinder defective or leaking—master cylinder insecure—insufficient quantity of brake fluid—master cylinder reservoir cap missing—brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective—incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device | — | servo unit is defective or ineffective | — | master cylinder defective or leaking | — | master cylinder insecure | — | insufficient quantity of brake fluid | — | master cylinder reservoir cap missing | — | brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective | — | incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device
1.1.10. | Brake servo units, master cylinder (hydraulic systems)
— | servo unit is defective or ineffective
— | master cylinder defective or leaking
— | master cylinder insecure
— | insufficient quantity of brake fluid
— | master cylinder reservoir cap missing
— | brake fluid warning lamp illuminated or defective
— | incorrect functioning of brake fluid level warning device
1.1.11.Rigid brake pipes | 1.1.11. | Rigid brake pipes | —risk of failure or fracture—leaks from pipes or connections to coupling—damaged or excessively corroded—misplaced | — | risk of failure or fracture | — | leaks from pipes or connections to coupling | — | damaged or excessively corroded | — | misplaced
1.1.11. | Rigid brake pipes
— | risk of failure or fracture
— | leaks from pipes or connections to coupling
— | damaged or excessively corroded
— | misplaced
1.1.12.Flexible brake hoses | 1.1.12. | Flexible brake hoses | —risk of failure or fracture—damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted—leaks from hoses or couplings—hose bulging under pressure—porosity | — | risk of failure or fracture | — | damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted | — | leaks from hoses or couplings | — | hose bulging under pressure | — | porosity
1.1.12. | Flexible brake hoses
— | risk of failure or fracture
— | damaged, chafing, brake hoses too short, twisted
— | leaks from hoses or couplings
— | hose bulging under pressure
— | porosity
1.1.13.Brake coverings (lining pads) | 1.1.13. | Brake coverings (lining pads) | —excessive wear—contaminated (oil, grease, etc.) | — | excessive wear | — | contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
1.1.13. | Brake coverings (lining pads)
— | excessive wear
— | contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
1.1.14.Brake drums, brake discs | 1.1.14. | Brake drums, brake discs | —excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured—contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)—backplate insecure | — | excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured | — | contaminated (oil, grease, etc.) | — | backplate insecure
1.1.14. | Brake drums, brake discs
— | excessive wear, excessive scoring, cracks, insecure or fractured
— | contaminated (oil, grease, etc.)
— | backplate insecure
1.1.15.Brake cables, rods, levers linkage | 1.1.15. | Brake cables, rods, levers linkage | —cables damaged, knotted—excessively worn or corroded—cable or rod joint insecure—cable guide defective—any restriction to free movement of the braking system—any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear | — | cables damaged, knotted | — | excessively worn or corroded | — | cable or rod joint insecure | — | cable guide defective | — | any restriction to free movement of the braking system | — | any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear
1.1.15. | Brake cables, rods, levers linkage
— | cables damaged, knotted
— | excessively worn or corroded
— | cable or rod joint insecure
— | cable guide defective
— | any restriction to free movement of the braking system
— | any abnormal movement of levers/rods/linkage indicating maladjustment or excessive wear
1.1.16.Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders) | 1.1.16. | Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders) | —cracked or damaged—leaking—insecure/inadequate mounting—excessively corroded—excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism—dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged | — | cracked or damaged | — | leaking | — | insecure/inadequate mounting | — | excessively corroded | — | excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism | — | dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged
1.1.16. | Brake actuators (including spring brakes or hydraulic wheel cylinders)
— | cracked or damaged
— | leaking
— | insecure/inadequate mounting
— | excessively corroded
— | excessive travel of operating piston or diaphragm mechanism
— | dust protection cover missing or excessively damaged
1.1.17.Load sensing valve | 1.1.17. | Load sensing valve | —defective linkage—incorrect adjustment—seized, not working—missing | — | defective linkage | — | incorrect adjustment | — | seized, not working | — | missing
1.1.17. | Load sensing valve
— | defective linkage
— | incorrect adjustment
— | seized, not working
— | missing
1.1.18.Automatic slack adjusters indicating | 1.1.18. | Automatic slack adjusters indicating | —seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment—defective | — | seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment | — | defective
1.1.18. | Automatic slack adjusters indicating
— | seized or abnormal movement, excessive wear or wrong adjustment
— | defective
1.1.19.Retarder system (where fitted or required) | 1.1.19. | Retarder system (where fitted or required) | —insecure connectors or mountings—defective | — | insecure connectors or mountings | — | defective
1.1.19. | Retarder system (where fitted or required)
— | insecure connectors or mountings
— | defective
1.2.Service brake performance and efficiency | 1.2. | Service brake performance and efficiency |
1.2. | Service brake performance and efficiency
1.2.1.Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort) | 1.2.1. | Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort) | —inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels—braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive—no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing)—abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel—excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums | — | inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels | — | braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive | — | no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing) | — | abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel | — | excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums
1.2.1. | Performance (progressively increased to maximum effort)
— | inadequate braking effort on one or more wheels
— | braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle. In the case of brake testing on the road, the vehicle’s deviation from a straight line is excessive
— | no gradual variation of brake effort (grabbing)
— | abnormal time lag in brake operation at any wheel
— | excessive fluctuation of brake effort due to distorted discs or oval drums
1.2.2.Efficiency | 1.2.2. | Efficiency | —a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 %—ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5) | — | a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 % | — | category 1: 50 %(1) | — | category 2: 43 %(2) | — | category 3: 40 %(3) | — | category 4: 50 % | — | category 5: 45 %(4) | — | category 6: 50 % | — | ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5)
1.2.2. | Efficiency
— | a braking ratio which relates to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads where practicable, less than the following:minimum braking efficiency:—category 1: 50 %(1)—category 2: 43 %(2)—category 3: 40 %(3)—category 4: 50 %—category 5: 45 %(4)—category 6: 50 % | — | category 1: 50 %(1) | — | category 2: 43 %(2) | — | category 3: 40 %(3) | — | category 4: 50 % | — | category 5: 45 %(4) | — | category 6: 50 %
— | category 1: 50 %(1)
— | category 2: 43 %(2)
— | category 3: 40 %(3)
— | category 4: 50 %
— | category 5: 45 %(4)
— | category 6: 50 %
— | ora braking effort less than the reference values if specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle axle(5)
1.3.Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system) | 1.3. | Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system) |
1.3. | Secondary (emergency) brake performance and efficiency (if met by separate system)
1.3.1.Performance | 1.3.1. | Performance | —brake inoperative on one side—braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle—no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing)—automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers | — | brake inoperative on one side | — | braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle | — | no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing) | — | automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers
1.3.1. | Performance
— | brake inoperative on one side
— | braking effort from any wheel is less than 70 % of the highest recorded effort from another wheel on the same axle
— | no gradual variation of efficiency (grabbing)
— | automatic brake system not working in the case of trailers
1.3.2.Efficiency | 1.3.2. | Efficiency | —for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads | — | for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads
1.3.2. | Efficiency
— | for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 50 %(6)of the service brake performance defined in 1.2.2 in relation to the maximum authorised mass or, in the case of semi-trailers, to the sum of the authorised axle loads
1.4.Parking brake performance and efficiency | 1.4. | Parking brake performance and efficiency |
1.4. | Parking brake performance and efficiency
1.4.1.Performance | 1.4.1. | Performance | —brake inoperative on one side | — | brake inoperative on one side
1.4.1. | Performance
— | brake inoperative on one side
1.4.2.Efficiency | 1.4.2. | Efficiency | —for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater | — | for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater
1.4.2. | Efficiency
— | for all vehicle categories, a braking ratio less than 16 % in relation to the maximum authorised mass, or, for motor vehicles, less than 12 % in relation to the maximum authorised combination mass of the vehicle, whichever is greater
1.5.Retarder or exhaust brake system performance | 1.5. | Retarder or exhaust brake system performance | —no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder)—defective | — | no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder) | — | defective
1.5. | Retarder or exhaust brake system performance
— | no gradual variation of efficiency (retarder)
— | defective
1.6.Anti-lock braking | 1.6. | Anti-lock braking | —malfunction of the anti-lock warning device—defective | — | malfunction of the anti-lock warning device | — | defective
1.6. | Anti-lock braking
— | malfunction of the anti-lock warning device
— | defective

VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2 AND 3 | VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 4, 5 AND 6
2.Steering and steering wheel | 2. | Steering and steering wheel | 2.Steering | 2. | Steering
2. | Steering and steering wheel
2. | Steering
2.1.Mechanical condition | 2.1. | Mechanical condition | 2.1.Mechanical condition | 2.1. | Mechanical condition
2.1. | Mechanical condition
2.1. | Mechanical condition
2.2.Steering wheel | 2.2. | Steering wheel | 2.2.Steering play | 2.2. | Steering play
2.2. | Steering wheel
2.2. | Steering play
2.3.Steering play | 2.3. | Steering play | 2.3.Steering system attachment | 2.3. | Steering system attachment
2.3. | Steering play
2.3. | Steering system attachment
2.4.Wheel bearings | 2.4. | Wheel bearings |
2.4. | Wheel bearings
3.Visibility | 3. | Visibility | 3.Visibility | 3. | Visibility
3. | Visibility
3. | Visibility
3.1.Field of vision | 3.1. | Field of vision | 3.1.Field of vision | 3.1. | Field of vision
3.1. | Field of vision
3.1. | Field of vision
3.2.Condition of glass | 3.2. | Condition of glass | 3.2.Condition of glass | 3.2. | Condition of glass
3.2. | Condition of glass
3.2. | Condition of glass
3.3.Rear-view mirrors | 3.3. | Rear-view mirrors | 3.3.Rear-view mirrors | 3.3. | Rear-view mirrors
3.3. | Rear-view mirrors
3.3. | Rear-view mirrors
3.4.Windscreen wipers | 3.4. | Windscreen wipers | 3.4.Windscreen wipers | 3.4. | Windscreen wipers
3.4. | Windscreen wipers
3.4. | Windscreen wipers
3.5.Screen washers | 3.5. | Screen washers | 3.5.Screen washers | 3.5. | Screen washers
3.5. | Screen washers
3.5. | Screen washers
4.Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment | 4. | Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment | 4.Lighting equipment | 4. | Lighting equipment
4. | Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment
4. | Lighting equipment
4.1.Main and dipped-beam headlamps | 4.1. | Main and dipped-beam headlamps | 4.1.Main and dipped-beam headlamps | 4.1. | Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1. | Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1. | Main and dipped-beam headlamps
4.1.1.Condition and operation | 4.1.1. | Condition and operation | 4.1.1.Condition and operation | 4.1.1. | Condition and operation
4.1.1. | Condition and operation
4.1.1. | Condition and operation
4.1.2.Alignment | 4.1.2. | Alignment | 4.1.2.Alignment | 4.1.2. | Alignment
4.1.2. | Alignment
4.1.2. | Alignment
4.1.3.Switches | 4.1.3. | Switches | 4.1.3.Switches | 4.1.3. | Switches
4.1.3. | Switches
4.1.3. | Switches
4.1.4.Visual efficiency | 4.1.4. | Visual efficiency |
4.1.4. | Visual efficiency
4.2.Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps | 4.2. | Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps | 4.2.Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of: | 4.2. | Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of:
4.2. | Side lamps and end-outline marker lamps
4.2. | Condition and operation, condition of lenses, colour and visual efficiency of:
4.2.1.Condition and operation | 4.2.1. | Condition and operation | 4.2.1.Side and rear lamps | 4.2.1. | Side and rear lamps
4.2.1. | Condition and operation
4.2.1. | Side and rear lamps
4.2.2.Colour and visual efficiency | 4.2.2. | Colour and visual efficiency | 4.2.2.Stop lamps | 4.2.2. | Stop lamps
4.2.2. | Colour and visual efficiency
4.2.2. | Stop lamps
| 4.2.3.Direction-indicator lamps | 4.2.3. | Direction-indicator lamps
4.2.3. | Direction-indicator lamps
| 4.2.4.Reserving lamps | 4.2.4. | Reserving lamps
4.2.4. | Reserving lamps
| 4.2.5.Fog lamps | 4.2.5. | Fog lamps
4.2.5. | Fog lamps
| 4.2.6.Rear registration plate lamps | 4.2.6. | Rear registration plate lamps
4.2.6. | Rear registration plate lamps
| 4.2.7.Retro reflectors | 4.2.7. | Retro reflectors
4.2.7. | Retro reflectors
| 4.2.8.Hazard warning lamps | 4.2.8. | Hazard warning lamps
4.2.8. | Hazard warning lamps
4.3.Stop lamps | 4.3. | Stop lamps |
4.3. | Stop lamps
4.3.1.Condition and operation | 4.3.1. | Condition and operation |
4.3.1. | Condition and operation
4.3.2.Colour and visual efficiency | 4.3.2. | Colour and visual efficiency |
4.3.2. | Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.Direction-indicator lamps | 4.4. | Direction-indicator lamps |
4.4. | Direction-indicator lamps
4.4.1.Condition and operation | 4.4.1. | Condition and operation |
4.4.1. | Condition and operation
4.4.2.Colour and visual efficiency | 4.4.2. | Colour and visual efficiency |
4.4.2. | Colour and visual efficiency
4.4.3.Switches | 4.4.3. | Switches |
4.4.3. | Switches
4.4.4.Flashing frequency | 4.4.4. | Flashing frequency |
4.4.4. | Flashing frequency
4.5.Front and rear fog lamps | 4.5. | Front and rear fog lamps |
4.5. | Front and rear fog lamps
4.5.1.Position | 4.5.1. | Position |
4.5.1. | Position
4.5.2.Condition and operation | 4.5.2. | Condition and operation |
4.5.2. | Condition and operation
4.5.3.Colour and visual efficiency | 4.5.3. | Colour and visual efficiency |
4.5.3. | Colour and visual efficiency
4.6.Reversing lamps | 4.6. | Reversing lamps |
4.6. | Reversing lamps
4.6.1.Condition and operation | 4.6.1. | Condition and operation |
4.6.1. | Condition and operation
4.6.2.Colour and visual efficiency | 4.6.2. | Colour and visual efficiency |
4.6.2. | Colour and visual efficiency
4.7.Rear registration plate lamp | 4.7. | Rear registration plate lamp |
4.7. | Rear registration plate lamp
4.8.Retro reflectors—condition and colour | 4.8. | Retro reflectors | — | condition and colour |
4.8. | Retro reflectors
— | condition and colour
4.9.Telltales | 4.9. | Telltales |
4.9. | Telltales
4.10.Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer | 4.10. | Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer |
4.10. | Electrical connections between drawing vehicle and trailer or semi-trailer
4.11.Electrical wiring | 4.11. | Electrical wiring |
4.11. | Electrical wiring
5.Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension | 5. | Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension | 5.Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension | 5. | Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5. | Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5. | Axles, wheels, tyres, suspension
5.1.Axles | 5.1. | Axles | 5.1.Axles | 5.1. | Axles
5.1. | Axles
5.1. | Axles
5.2.Wheels and tyres | 5.2. | Wheels and tyres | 5.2.Wheels and tyres | 5.2. | Wheels and tyres
5.2. | Wheels and tyres
5.2. | Wheels and tyres
5.3.Suspension | 5.3. | Suspension | 5.3.Suspension | 5.3. | Suspension
5.3. | Suspension
5.3. | Suspension
6.Chassis and chassis attachments | 6. | Chassis and chassis attachments | 6.Chassis and chassis attachments | 6. | Chassis and chassis attachments
6. | Chassis and chassis attachments
6. | Chassis and chassis attachments
6.1.Chassis or frame and attachments | 6.1. | Chassis or frame and attachments | 6.1.Chassis or frame and attachments | 6.1. | Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1. | Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1. | Chassis or frame and attachments
6.1.1.General condition | 6.1.1. | General condition | 6.1.1.General condition | 6.1.1. | General condition
6.1.1. | General condition
6.1.1. | General condition
6.1.2.Exhaust pipes and silencers | 6.1.2. | Exhaust pipes and silencers | 6.1.2.Exhaust pipes and silencers | 6.1.2. | Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.2. | Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.2. | Exhaust pipes and silencers
6.1.3.Fuel tank or pipes | 6.1.3. | Fuel tank or pipes | 6.1.3.Fuel tank or pipes | 6.1.3. | Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.3. | Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.3. | Fuel tank or pipes
6.1.4.Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries | 6.1.4. | Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries | 6.1.4.Spare-wheel carrier | 6.1.4. | Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.4. | Geometric properties and condition of rear protective device, heavy lorries
6.1.4. | Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5.Spare-wheel carrier | 6.1.5. | Spare-wheel carrier | 6.1.5.Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted) | 6.1.5. | Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted)
6.1.5. | Spare-wheel carrier
6.1.5. | Security of coupling mechanism (if fitted)
6.1.6.Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers | 6.1.6. | Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers |
6.1.6. | Coupling mechanism on drawing vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers
6.2.Cab and bodywork | 6.2. | Cab and bodywork | 6.2.Bodywork | 6.2. | Bodywork
6.2. | Cab and bodywork
6.2. | Bodywork
6.2.1.General condition | 6.2.1. | General condition | 6.2.1.Structural condition | 6.2.1. | Structural condition
6.2.1. | General condition
6.2.1. | Structural condition
6.2.2.Mounting | 6.2.2. | Mounting | 6.2.2.Doors and locks | 6.2.2. | Doors and locks
6.2.2. | Mounting
6.2.2. | Doors and locks
6.2.3.Doors and locks | 6.2.3. | Doors and locks |
6.2.3. | Doors and locks
6.2.4.Floor | 6.2.4. | Floor |
6.2.4. | Floor
6.2.5.Driver’s seat | 6.2.5. | Driver’s seat |
6.2.5. | Driver’s seat
6.2.6.Running boards | 6.2.6. | Running boards |
6.2.6. | Running boards
7.Other equipment | 7. | Other equipment | 7.Other equipment | 7. | Other equipment
7. | Other equipment
7. | Other equipment
7.1.Safety belts | 7.1. | Safety belts | 7.1.Mounting of driver’s seat | 7.1. | Mounting of driver’s seat
7.1. | Safety belts
7.1. | Mounting of driver’s seat
7.2.Fire extinguisher | 7.2. | Fire extinguisher | 7.2.Mounting of battery | 7.2. | Mounting of battery
7.2. | Fire extinguisher
7.2. | Mounting of battery
7.3.Locks and anti-theft device | 7.3. | Locks and anti-theft device | 7.3.Audible warning device | 7.3. | Audible warning device
7.3. | Locks and anti-theft device
7.3. | Audible warning device
7.4.Warning triangle | 7.4. | Warning triangle | 7.4.Warning triangle | 7.4. | Warning triangle
7.4. | Warning triangle
7.4. | Warning triangle
7.5.First-aid kit | 7.5. | First-aid kit | 7.5.Safety belts | 7.5. | Safety belts
7.5. | First-aid kit
7.5. | Safety belts
7.5.1.Security of mountings | 7.5.1. | Security of mountings |
7.5.1. | Security of mountings
| 7.5.2.Condition of belts | 7.5.2. | Condition of belts
7.5.2. | Condition of belts
7.5.3.Operation | 7.5.3. | Operation |
7.5.3. | Operation
7.6.Wheel chock(s) | 7.6. | Wheel chock(s) |
7.6. | Wheel chock(s)
7.7.Audible warning device | 7.7. | Audible warning device |
7.7. | Audible warning device
7.8.Speedometer | 7.8. | Speedometer |
7.8. | Speedometer
7.9.Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact | 7.9. | Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact | — | check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7) | — | check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate | — | where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact |
7.9. | Tachograph (presence of, and integrity of seals)—check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)—check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate—where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact | — | check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7) | — | check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate | — | where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— | check validity of tachograph plate if required by Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85(7)
— | check, if in doubt, whether the nominal circumference or size of tyre matches the data given on the tachograph plate
— | where practical, check that the seals of the tachograph and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
7.10.Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values | 7.10. | Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values | — | where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8) | — | check validity of speed limiter plate | — | where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact | — | check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values |
7.10. | Speed limitation device—where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)—check validity of speed limiter plate—where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact—check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values | — | where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8) | — | check validity of speed limiter plate | — | where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact | — | check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
— | where possible, check whether speed limiter is fitted as required by Directive 92/6/EEC(8)
— | check validity of speed limiter plate
— | where practical, check that the seals of the speed limiter and, where appropriate, any other means of protecting the connections against fraudulent manipulation are intact
— | check where practical that the speed limitation device prevents vehicles mentioned in Article 2 and Article 3 of Directive 92/6/EEC from exceeding the prescribed values
8.Nuisance | 8. | Nuisance | 8.Nuisance | 8. | Nuisance
8. | Nuisance
8. | Nuisance
8.1.Noise | 8.1. | Noise | 8.1.Noise | 8.1. | Noise
8.1. | Noise
8.1. | NoiseVEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AND 68.2. Exhaust emissions8.2.1. Motor vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines and fuelled by petrol
| (a) | Where the exhaust emissions are not controlled by an advanced emission control system such as a three-way catalytic converter that is lambda-probe controlled:1.Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. | 1. | Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. | 2. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. | (i) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.; | (ii) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
1. | Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.After a reasonable period of engine conditioning (taking account of manufacturer’s recommendations) the carbon monoxide (CO) content of the exhaust gases is measured when the engine is idling (no load).The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer. Where this information is not available or where the Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference value, the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;(ii)for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol. | (i) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.; | (ii) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
(i) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time between the date from which Member States required the vehicles to comply with Directive 70/220/EEC(9)and 1 October 1986: CO — 4,5 % vol.;
(ii) | for vehicles registered or put into service for the first time after 1 October 1986 — 3,5 % vol.
| (b) | Where the exhaust emissions are controlled by an advanced emission control system such as a three-way catalytic converter that is lambda-probe controlled:1.Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.3.Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.4.Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. | 1. | Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. | 2. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. | 3. | Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. | 4. | Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. | (i) | Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002. | (ii) | Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. | (iii) | For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
1. | Visual inspection of the exhaust system in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
3. | Determination of the efficiency of the vehicle’s emission control system by measuring the lambda value and the CO content of the exhaust gases in accordance with point 4 or with the procedures proposed by the manufacturers and approved at the time of type-approval. For each of the tests the engine is conditioned in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. | Exhaust pipe emissions — limit valuesThe maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases is that stated by the vehicle manufacturer.Where this information is not available the CO content must not exceed the following:(i)Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.(ii)Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.(iii)For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system. | (i) | Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002. | (ii) | Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. | (iii) | For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.
(i) | Measurement at engine idling speed:The maximum permissible CO content in the exhaust gases must not exceed 0,5 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,3 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.
(ii) | Measurement at high idle speed (no load), engine speed to be at least 2 000 min-1:CO content: maximum 0,3 % vol. and for vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in row A or row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC; the maximum CO content must not exceed 0,2 % vol. Where compliance with Directive 70/220/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2002.Lambda: 1 ± 0,03 or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) | For motor vehicles equipped with on-board diagnostic systems (OBD) in accordance with Directive 70/220/EEC Member States may as an alternative to the test specified in item (i) establish the correct functioning of the emission system through the appropriate reading of the OBD device and the simultaneous checking of the proper functioning of the OBD system.8.2.2. Motor vehicles equipped with compression-ignition (diesel) engines
| (a) | Exhaust gas opacity to be measured during free acceleration (no load from idle up to cut-off speed) with gear lever in neutral and clutch engaged.
| (b) | Vehicle preconditioning:1.Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition.2.Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. | 1. | Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition. | 2. | Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. | (i) | Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan. | (ii) | Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
1. | Vehicles may be tested without preconditioning although for safety reasons checks should be made that the engine is warm and in a satisfactory mechanical condition.
2. | Except as specified in point (d)(5), no vehicle will be failed unless it has been preconditioned according to the following requirements:(i)Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.(ii)Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method. | (i) | Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan. | (ii) | Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
(i) | Engine shall be fully warm, for instance the engine oil temperature measured by a probe in the oil level dipstick tube to be at least 80 °C, or normal operating temperature if lower, or the engine block temperature measured by the level of infrared radiation to be at least an equivalent temperature. If, owing to vehicle configuration, this measurement is impractical, the establishment of the engine’s normal operating temperature may be made by other means, for example by the operation of the engine cooling fan.
(ii) | Exhaust system shall be purged by at least three free acceleration cycles or by an equivalent method.
| (c) | Test procedure:1.Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.2.Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle.3.To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump.4.During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds. | 1. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks. | 2. | Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle. | 3. | To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump. | 4. | During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds.
1. | Visual inspection of any emission control equipment fitted by the manufacturer in order to check that it is complete and in a satisfactory condition and that there are no leaks.
2. | Engine and any turbocharger fitted, to be at idle before the start of each free acceleration cycle. For heavy-duty diesels, this means waiting for at least 10 seconds after the release of the throttle.
3. | To initiate each free acceleration cycle, the throttle pedal must be fully depressed quickly and continuously (in less than one second) but not violently, so as to obtain maximum delivery from the injection pump.
4. | During each free acceleration cycle, the engine shall reach cut-off speed or, for vehicles with automatic transmissions, the speed specified by the manufacturer or if this data is not available then two-thirds of the cut-off speed, before the throttle is released. This could be checked, for instance, by monitoring engine speed or by allowing a sufficient time to elapse between initial throttle depression and release, which in the case of vehicles of category 1 and 2 of Annex I should be at least two seconds.
| (d) | Limit values:1.The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10).2.Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008.3.Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements.4.Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles.5.To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). | 1. | The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10). | 2. | Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008. | — | naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1, | — | turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1, | — | a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. | (a) | row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (b) | row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (c) | row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); | (d) | row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV) | 3. | Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements. | 4. | Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles. | 5. | To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii).
1. | The level of concentration must not exceed the level recorded on the plate pursuant to Directive 72/306/EEC(10).
2. | Where this information is not available or where Member States’ competent authorities decide not to use it as a reference, the level of concentration must not exceed the level stated by the manufacturer or the limit values of the coefficient of absorption that are as follows:Maximum coefficient of absorption for:—naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,—turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,—a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval.Where compliance with point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC or with point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC is not possible then the above shall apply to vehicles registered or first put into service after 1 July 2008. | — | naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1, | — | turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1, | — | a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. | (a) | row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (b) | row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (c) | row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); | (d) | row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
— | naturally aspirated diesel engines = 2,5 m-1,
— | turbo-charged diesel engines = 3,0 m-1,
— | a limit of 1,5 m-1shall apply to the following vehicles that have been type-approved according to the limit values shown in:(a)row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(b)row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);(c)row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);(d)row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)or limit values in later amendments of Directive 70/220/EEC or limit values in later amendments of Directive 88/77/EEC or equivalent values where use is made of equipment of a type different from that used for EC type-approval. | (a) | row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (b) | row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4); | (c) | row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5); | (d) | row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
(a) | row B of the table in point 5.3.1.4 of Annex I to Directive 70/220/EEC (Light Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(b) | row B1 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC(11)(Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 4);
(c) | row B2 of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle Diesel — Euro 5);
(d) | row C of the tables in point 6.2.1 of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC (Heavy Duty Vehicle — EEV)
3. | Vehicles registered or put into service for the first time before 1 January 1980 are exempted from these requirements.
4. | Vehicles shall only be failed if the arithmetic means of at least the last three free acceleration cycles are in excess of the limit value. This may be calculated by ignoring any measurement that departs significantly from the measured mean, or the result of any other statistical calculation that takes account of the scattering of the measurements. Member States may limit the number of test cycles.
5. | To avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), fail vehicles which have measured values significantly in excess of the limit values after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii). Equally to avoid unnecessary testing, Member States may, by way of exception from the provisions of point 8.2.2(d)(4), pass vehicles which have measured values significantly below the limits after less than three free acceleration cycles or after the purging cycles (or equivalent) specified in point 8.2.2(b)2(ii).8.2.3. Test equipmentVehicle emissions are tested using equipment designed to establish accurately whether the limit values prescribed or indicated by the manufacturer have been complied with.
8.2.4. Where, during EC type-approval, a type of vehicle is found not to have satisfied the limit values laid down by this directive, the Member States may lay down higher limit values for that type of vehicle on the basis of proof supplied by the manufacturer. They must forthwith inform the Commission thereof and it in turn must inform the other Member States.

VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 1, 2 AND 3 | VEHICLES IN CATEGORIES 4, 5 AND 6
8.3.Suppression of radio interference | 8.3. | Suppression of radio interference |
8.3. | Suppression of radio interference
9.Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles | 9. | Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles |
9. | Supplementary tests for public transport vehicles
9.1.Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s) | 9.1. | Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s) |
9.1. | Emergency exit(s) (including hammers for breaking windows), signs indicating emergency exit(s)
9.2.Heating system | 9.2. | Heating system |
9.2. | Heating system
9.3.Ventilation system | 9.3. | Ventilation system |
9.3. | Ventilation system
9.4.Seat layout | 9.4. | Seat layout |
9.4. | Seat layout
9.5.Interior lighting | 9.5. | Interior lighting |
9.5. | Interior lighting
10.Vehicle identification | 10. | Vehicle identification | 10.Vehicle identification | 10. | Vehicle identification
10. | Vehicle identification
10. | Vehicle identification
10.1.Registration plate | 10.1. | Registration plate | 10.1.Registration plate | 10.1. | Registration plate
10.1. | Registration plate
10.1. | Registration plate
10.2.Chassis number | 10.2. | Chassis number | 10.2.Chassis number | 10.2. | Chassis number
10.2. | Chassis number
10.2. | Chassis number
(1) 48 % for category 1 vehicles not fitted with ABS, or type-approved before 1 October 1991 (date of prohibition of first putting into circulation without EC component type-approval) (Directive 71/320/EEC).
(2) 45 % for vehicles registered after 1988 or from the date of application of Directive 71/320/EEC, under Member States’ national legislation, whichever is the later.
(3) 43 % for semi-trailers and draw-bar trailers registered after 1988 or from the date of application of Directive 71/320/EEC, under Member States’ national legislation, whichever is the later.
(4) 50 % for category 5 vehicles registered after 1988 or from the date of application of Directive 71/320/EEC, under Member States’ national legislation, whichever is the later.
(5) The reference value for the vehicle axle is the braking effort (expressed in newtons) necessary to achieve this minimum prescribed braking force at the particular weight that the vehicle is presented.
(6) For category 2 and 5 vehicles the minimum secondary brake performance must be 2,2 m/s2 (as the secondary brake performance was not covered by Directive 71/320/EEC).
(7) Council Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 of 20 December 1985 on recording equipment in road transport (OJ L 370, 31.12.1985, p. 8).
(8) Council Directive 92/6/EEC of 10 February 1992 on the installation and use of speed limitation devices for certain categories of motor vehicles in the Community (OJ L 57, 2.3.1992, p. 27).
(9) Council Directive 70/220/EEC of 20 March 1970 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States on measures to be taken against air pollution by emissions from motor vehicles (OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 1).
(10) Council Directive 72/306/EEC of 2 August 1972 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of pollutants from diesel engines for use in vehicles (OJ L 190, 20.8.1972, p. 1).
(11) Council Directive 88/77/EEC of 3 December 1987 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from compression-ignition engines for use in vehicles, and the emission of gaseous pollutants from positive ignition engines fuelled with natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas for use in vehicles (OJ L 36, 9.2.1988, p. 33).

PART A

ANNEX III
Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments

(referred to in Article 10)

Council Directive 96/96/EC(OJ L 46, 17.2.1997, p. 1) |
Commission Directive 1999/52/EC(OJ L 142, 5.6.1999, p. 26) |
Commission Directive 2001/9/EC(OJ L 48, 17.2.2001, p. 18) |
Commission Directive 2001/11/EC(OJ L 48, 17.2.2001, p. 20) |
Commission Directive 2003/27/EC(OJ L 90, 8.4.2003, p. 41) |
Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council(OJ L 284, 31.10.2003, p. 1) | only Annex III, point 68PART B
Time limits for transposition into national law

(referred to in Article 10)

Directive | Time limit for transposition
96/96/EC | 9 March 1998
1999/52/EC | 30 September 2000
2001/9/EC | 9 March 2002
2001/11/EC | 9 March 2003
2003/27/EC | 1 January 2004

ANNEX IV
CORRELATION TABLE

Directive 96/96/EC | This Directive
Articles 1 to 4 | Articles 1 to 4
Article 5, introductory wording | Article 5, introductory wording
Article 5, first to seventh indents | Article 5, points (a) to (g)
Article 6 | —
Article 7 | Article 6(1)
— | Article 6(2)
Article 8(1) | Article 7(1)
Article 8(2), first subparagraph | Article 7(2)
Article 8(2), second subparagraph | —
Article 8(3) | —
Article 9(1) | —
Article 9(2) | Article 8
Article 10 | —
Article 11(1) | —
Article 11(2) | Article 9
Article 11(3) | —
— | Article 10
Article 12 | Article 11
Article 13 | Article 12
Annexes I and II | Annexes I and II
Annexes III and IV | —
— | Annex III
— | Annex IV

Pending: 32009L0036

17.4.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 98/31
(1) Following the publication of a scientific study in 2001, entitled ‘Use of permanent hair dyes and bladder cancer risk’, the Scientific Committee on Cosmetic Products and Non-Food Products intended for Consumers, currently the Scientific Committee on Consumer Products (hereinafter SCCP)(2), concluded that the potential risks were of concern. It recommended that the Commission take further steps to control the use of hair dye substances.
(2) The SCCP further recommended an overall safety assessment strategy for hair dye substances including the requirements for testing substances used in hair dye products for their potential genotoxicity/mutagenicity.
(3) Following the opinions of the SCCP, the Commission, together with Member States and stakeholders, agreed on an overall strategy to regulate substances used in hair dye products, according to which the industry was required to submit files containing the scientific data on hair dye substances to be evaluated by the SCCP.
(4) Substances for which updated safety files were submitted are currently being evaluated by the SCCP. For 17 hair dye substances final opinions have already been given by the SCCP. Therefore, definitive regulation of these hair dye substances, on the basis of such evaluations, can take place.
(5) Directive 76/768/EEC should therefore be amended accordingly.
(6) The measures provided for in this Directive are in accordance with the opinion of the Standing Committee on Cosmetic Products,
1. In Part 1 of Annex III the following reference numbers 189 – 205 are added:Reference numberSubstanceRestrictionsConditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the labelField of application and/or useMaximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic productOther limitations and requirementsabcdef‘189Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5  %190Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5  %191Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,4  %192Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5  %193Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)0,6  %(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.194Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5  %195Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1961-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1971,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,1  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1983-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,15  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1992,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,8  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction2001-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction201Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products3,0  %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction2024,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction2036-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl)(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye(b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction2042,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0  %Can cause allergic reaction2054-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)2,6 %(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. Reference number Substance Restrictions Conditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the label Field of application and/or use Maximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic product Other limitations and requirements a b c d e f ‘189 Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % 190 Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % 191 Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,4  % 192 Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % 193 Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)0,6  % (b) 0,6  % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. 194 Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % 195 Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers 196 1-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers 197 1,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,1  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers 198 3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,15  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers 199 2,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,8  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction 200 1-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction 201 Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 3,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction 202 4,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. 203 6-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl) (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride). — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. 204 2,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % Can cause allergic reaction 205 4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)2,6 % (b) 2,6 % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base. — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
Reference number Substance Restrictions Conditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the label
Field of application and/or use Maximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic product Other limitations and requirements
a b c d e f
‘189 Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
190 Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
191 Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,4  %
192 Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
193 Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)0,6  % (b) 0,6  % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 0,6  %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
194 Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
195 Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
196 1-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
197 1,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,1  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
198 3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,15  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
199 2,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,8  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
200 1-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
201 Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 3,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
202 4,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
203 6-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl) (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride). — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye
(b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
204 2,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % Can cause allergic reaction
205 4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)2,6 % (b) 2,6 % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base. — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 2,6 %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
Reference number Substance Restrictions Conditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the label
Field of application and/or use Maximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic product Other limitations and requirements
a b c d e f
‘189 Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
190 Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
191 Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,4  %
192 Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
193 Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)0,6  % (b) 0,6  % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 0,6  %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
194 Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  %
195 Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,5  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
196 1-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
197 1,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,1  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
198 3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 0,15  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
199 2,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,8  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
200 1-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
201 Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 3,0  % —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers Can cause allergic reaction
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
202 4,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
203 6-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl) (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye (b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride). — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye
(b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
204 2,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6 Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products 2,0  % Can cause allergic reaction
205 4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9 (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products (b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products (b)2,6 % (b) 2,6 % (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers (a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base. — Do not use with nitrosating systems — Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg — Keep in nitrite-free containers (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. (a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 2,6 %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 0,6  %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye
(b) 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) 2,6 %
(a) After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.
— Do not use with nitrosating systems
— Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
2. In columns ‘c’ and ‘d’ of entry 55 of Part 2 of Annex III section b is deleted.
3. In Part 2 of Annex III reference numbers 7, 9, 14, 24, 28, 47, and 58 are deleted.
THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community,
Having regard to Council Directive 76/768/EEC of 27 July 1976 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to cosmetic products(1), and in particular Article 8(2) thereof,
After consulting the Scientific Committee on Consumer Products,
(1) Following the publication of a scientific study in 2001, entitled ‘Use of permanent hair dyes and bladder cancer risk’, the Scientific Committee on Cosmetic Products and Non-Food Products intended for Consumers, currently the Scientific Committee on Consumer Products (hereinafter SCCP)(2), concluded that the potential risks were of concern. It recommended that the Commission take further steps to control the use of hair dye substances.
(2) The SCCP further recommended an overall safety assessment strategy for hair dye substances including the requirements for testing substances used in hair dye products for their potential genotoxicity/mutagenicity.
(3) Following the opinions of the SCCP, the Commission, together with Member States and stakeholders, agreed on an overall strategy to regulate substances used in hair dye products, according to which the industry was required to submit files containing the scientific data on hair dye substances to be evaluated by the SCCP.
(4) Substances for which updated safety files were submitted are currently being evaluated by the SCCP. For 17 hair dye substances final opinions have already been given by the SCCP. Therefore, definitive regulation of these hair dye substances, on the basis of such evaluations, can take place.
(5) Directive 76/768/EEC should therefore be amended accordingly.
(6) The measures provided for in this Directive are in accordance with the opinion of the Standing Committee on Cosmetic Products,
HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1
Annex III to Directive 76/768/EEC is amended in accordance with the Annex to this Directive.

Article 2
1. Member States shall adopt and publish, by 15 November 2009 at the latest, the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive. They shall forthwith communicate to the Commission the text of those provisions.
They shall apply the provisions set out in the Annex to this Directive from 15 May 2010.
When Member States adopt those provisions, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. Member States shall determine how such reference is to be made.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 3
This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Article 4
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community,
Having regard to Council Directive 76/768/EEC of 27 July 1976 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to cosmetic products(1), and in particular Article 8(2) thereof,
After consulting the Scientific Committee on Consumer Products,
(1) Following the publication of a scientific study in 2001, entitled ‘Use of permanent hair dyes and bladder cancer risk’, the Scientific Committee on Cosmetic Products and Non-Food Products intended for Consumers, currently the Scientific Committee on Consumer Products (hereinafter SCCP)(2), concluded that the potential risks were of concern. It recommended that the Commission take further steps to control the use of hair dye substances.
(2) The SCCP further recommended an overall safety assessment strategy for hair dye substances including the requirements for testing substances used in hair dye products for their potential genotoxicity/mutagenicity.
(3) Following the opinions of the SCCP, the Commission, together with Member States and stakeholders, agreed on an overall strategy to regulate substances used in hair dye products, according to which the industry was required to submit files containing the scientific data on hair dye substances to be evaluated by the SCCP.
(4) Substances for which updated safety files were submitted are currently being evaluated by the SCCP. For 17 hair dye substances final opinions have already been given by the SCCP. Therefore, definitive regulation of these hair dye substances, on the basis of such evaluations, can take place.
(5) Directive 76/768/EEC should therefore be amended accordingly.
(6) The measures provided for in this Directive are in accordance with the opinion of the Standing Committee on Cosmetic Products,
HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
Annex III to Directive 76/768/EEC is amended in accordance with the Annex to this Directive.
1. Member States shall adopt and publish, by 15 November 2009 at the latest, the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive. They shall forthwith communicate to the Commission the text of those provisions.
They shall apply the provisions set out in the Annex to this Directive from 15 May 2010.
When Member States adopt those provisions, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. Member States shall determine how such reference is to be made.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.
This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.
ANNEXDirective 76/768/EEC is amended as follows:

1. | In Part 1 of Annex III the following reference numbers 189 – 205 are added:Reference numberSubstanceRestrictionsConditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the labelField of application and/or useMaximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic productOther limitations and requirementsabcdef‘189Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5 %190Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5 %191Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,4 %192Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5 %193Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)0,6 %(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.194Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5 %195Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,5 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1961-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1971,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,1 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1983-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products0,15 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers1992,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,8 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction2001-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction201Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products3,0 %—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containersCan cause allergic reaction2024,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction2036-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl)(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye(b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction2042,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products2,0 %Can cause allergic reaction2054-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9(a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products(b)2,6 %(a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers(a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | Reference number | Substance | Restrictions | Conditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the label | Field of application and/or use | Maximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic product | Other limitations and requirements | a | b | c | d | e | f | ‘189 | Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | | | 190 | Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | | | 191 | Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,4 % | | | 192 | Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | | | 193 | Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)0,6 % | (b) | 0,6 % | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | 194 | Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | | | 195 | Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | | 196 | 1-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | | 197 | 1,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,1 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | | 198 | 3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,15 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | | 199 | 2,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,8 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction | 200 | 1-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction | 201 | Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 3,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction | 202 | 4,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) | (b) | 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | 203 | 6-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl) | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye | (b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) | (b) | 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride). | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | 204 | 2,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | | Can cause allergic reaction | 205 | 4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)2,6 % | (b) | 2,6 % | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base. | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
Reference number | Substance | Restrictions | Conditions of use and warnings which must be printed on the label
Field of application and/or use | Maximum authorized concentration in the finished cosmetic product | Other limitations and requirements
a | b | c | d | e | f
‘189 | Trisodium 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulphophenyl)-4-(4-sulphophenylazo)pyrazole-3-carboxylate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Yellow 23CAS 1934-21-0EINECS 217-699-5Acid Yellow 23 Aluminum lakeCAS 12225-21-7EINECS 235-428-9CI 19140 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | |
190 | Benzenemethanaminium, N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[ethyl-[(3-sulfophenyl)-methyl]-amino]-phenyl] [2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadien-1-ylidene]-3-sulfo, inner salt, disodium salt and its ammonium and aluminium salts(15)Acid Blue 9CAS 3844-45-9EINECS 223-339-8Acid Blue 9 Ammonium saltCAS 2650-18-2EINECS 220-168-0Acid Blue 9 Aluminum lakeCAS 68921-42-6EINECS 272-939-6CI 42090 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | |
191 | Disodium 6-hydroxy-5-[(2-methoxy-4-sulphonato-m-tolyl)azo]naphthalene-2-sulphonate(15)Curry RedCAS 25956-17-6EINECS 247-368-0CI 16035 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,4 % | |
192 | Trisodium 1-(1-naphthylazo)-2-hydroxynaphthalene-4′,6,8-trisulphonate and aluminium lake(15)Acid Red 18CAS 2611-82-7EINECS 220-036-2Acid Red 18 Aluminum lakeCAS 12227-64-4EINECS 235-438-3CI 16255 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | |
193 | Hydrogen 3,6-bis(diethylamino)-9-(2,4-disulphonatophenyl)xanthylium, sodium salt(15)Acid Red 52CAS 3520-42-1EINECS 222-529-8CI 45100 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)0,6 % | (b) | 0,6 % | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %. | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) | 0,6 %
(a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,5 %.
(a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
194 | Disodium 5-amino-4-hydroxy-3-(phenylazo)naphthalene-2,7-disulphonate(15)Acid Red 33CAS 3567-66-6EINECS 222-656-9CI 17200 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | |
195 | Sodium 1-amino-4-(cyclohexylamino)-9,10-dihydro-9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulphonate(15)Acid Blue 62CAS 4368-56-3EINECS 224-460-9CI 62045 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,5 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers |
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
196 | 1-[(2′-Methoxyethyl)amino]-2-nitro-4-[di-(2′-hydroxyethyl)amino]benzene(15)HC Blue No 11CAS 23920-15-2EINECS 459-980-7 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers |
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
197 | 1,5-Di-(ß-hydroxyethylamino)-2-nitro-4-chlorobenzene(15)HC Yellow No 10CAS 109023-83-8EINECS 416-940-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,1 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers |
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
198 | 3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol(15)3-Methylamino-4-nitrophenoxyethanol (INCI)CAS 59820-63-2EINECS 261-940-7 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 0,15 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers |
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
199 | 2,2′-[[4-[(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-3-nitrophenyl]imino]bisethanol(15)HC Blue No 2CAS 33229-34-4EINECS 251-410-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,8 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
200 | 1-Propanol, 3-[[4-[bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amino]-2-nitrophenyl]amino](15)HC Violet No 2CAS 104226-19-9EINECS 410-910-3 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
201 | Phenol, 2-chloro-6-(ethylamino)-4-nitro-(15)2-Chloro-6-ethylamino-4-nitrophenolCAS 131657-78-8EINECS 411-440-1 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 3,0 % | —Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | Can cause allergic reaction
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
202 | 4,4′-[1,3-Propanediylbis(oxy)]bisbenzene-1,3-diamine and its tetrahydrochloride salt(15)1,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propaneCAS 81892-72-0EINECS 279-845-41,3-bis-(2,4-Diaminophenoxy)propane HClCAS 74918-21-1EINECS 278-022-7 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) | (b) | 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt) | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt). | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) | 1,2 % as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt)
(a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 1,2 % calculated as free base (1,8 % as tetrahydrochloride salt).
(a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
203 | 6-Methoxy-N2-methyl-2,3-pyridinediamine hydrochloride and dihydrochloride salt(15)6-Methoxy-2-methylamino-3-aminopyridine HClCAS 90817-34-8 (HCl)CAS 83732-72-3 (2HCl)EINECS 280-622-9 (2HCl) | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye | (b)0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) | (b) | 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride) | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).For a) and b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride). | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.For (a) and (b):Can cause allergic reaction | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye
(b) | 0,68 % as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride)
(a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 0,68 % calculated as free base (1,0 % as dihydrochloride).
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
204 | 2,3-Dihydro-1H-indole-5,6-diol and its hydrobromide salt(15)DihydroxyindolineCAS 29539-03-5Dihydroxyindoline HBrCAS 138937-28-7EINECS 421-170-6 | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | 2,0 % | | Can cause allergic reaction
205 | 4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol(15)4-Hydroxypropylamino-3-nitrophenol (INCI)CAS 92952-81-3EINECS 406-305-9 | (a)Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products(b)Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products | (b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products | (b)2,6 % | (b) | 2,6 % | (a)After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.For (a) and (b):—Do not use with nitrosating systems—Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg—Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base. | — | Do not use with nitrosating systems | — | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg | — | Keep in nitrite-free containers | (a)The mixing ratio must be printed on the label. | (a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
(a) | Hair dye substance in oxidative hair dye products
(b) | Hair dye substance in non-oxidative hair dye products
(b) | 2,6 %
(a) | After mixing under oxidative conditions the maximum concentration applied to hair must not exceed 2,6 % calculated as free base.
— | Do not use with nitrosating systems
— | Maximum nitrosamine content: 50 μg/kg
— | Keep in nitrite-free containers
(a) | The mixing ratio must be printed on the label.
2. | In columns ‘c’ and ‘d’ of entry 55 of Part 2 of Annex III section b is deleted.
3. | In Part 2 of Annex III reference numbers 7, 9, 14, 24, 28, 47, and 58 are deleted.
(15) The free base and salts of this hair colouring ingredient, unless prohibited under Annex II, are permitted for use.’

Pending: 32009L0028

5.6.2009 EN Official Journal of the European Union L 140/16
(1) The control of European energy consumption and the increased use of energy from renewable sources, together with energy savings and increased energy efficiency, constitute important parts of the package of measures needed to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and comply with the Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, and with further Community and international greenhouse gas emission reduction commitments beyond 2012. Those factors also have an important part to play in promoting the security of energy supply, promoting technological development and innovation and providing opportunities for employment and regional development, especially in rural and isolated areas.
(2) In particular, increasing technological improvements, incentives for the use and expansion of public transport, the use of energy efficiency technologies and the use of energy from renewable sources in transport are some of the most effective tools by which the Community can reduce its dependence on imported oil in the transport sector, in which the security of energy supply problem is most acute, and influence the fuel market for transport.
(3) The opportunities for establishing economic growth through innovation and a sustainable competitive energy policy have been recognised. Production of energy from renewable sources often depends on local or regional small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs). The opportunities for growth and employment that investment in regional and local production of energy from renewable sources bring about in the Member States and their regions are important. The Commission and the Member States should therefore support national and regional development measures in those areas, encourage the exchange of best practices in production of energy from renewable sources between local and regional development initiatives and promote the use of structural funding in this area.
(4) When favouring the development of the market for renewable energy sources, it is necessary to take into account the positive impact on regional and local development opportunities, export prospects, social cohesion and employment opportunities, in particular as concerns SMEs and independent energy producers.
(5) In order to reduce greenhouse gas emissions within the Community and reduce its dependence on energy imports, the development of energy from renewable sources should be closely linked to increased energy efficiency.
(6) It is appropriate to support the demonstration and commercialisation phase of decentralised renewable energy technologies. The move towards decentralised energy production has many benefits, including the utilisation of local energy sources, increased local security of energy supply, shorter transport distances and reduced energy transmission losses. Such decentralisation also fosters community development and cohesion by providing income sources and creating jobs locally.
(7) Directive 2001/77/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 September 2001 on the promotion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources in the internal electricity market(4)and Directive 2003/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 May 2003 on the promotion of the use of biofuels or other renewable fuels for transport(5)established definitions for different types of energy from renewable sources. Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(6)established definitions for the electricity sector in general. In the interests of legal certainty and clarity it is appropriate to use the same or similar definitions in this Directive.
(8) The Commission communication of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Renewable Energy Roadmap — Renewable energies in the 21st century: building a more sustainable future’ demonstrated that a 20 % target for the overall share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport would be appropriate and achievable objectives, and that a framework that includes mandatory targets should provide the business community with the long-term stability it needs to make rational, sustainable investments in the renewable energy sector which are capable of reducing dependence on imported fossil fuels and boosting the use of new energy technologies. Those targets exist in the context of the 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020 set out in the Commission communication of 19 October 2006 entitled ‘Action Plan for Energy Efficiency: Realising the Potential’, which was endorsed by the European Council of March 2007, and by the European Parliament in its resolution of 31 January 2008 on that Action Plan.
(9) The European Council of March 2007 reaffirmed the Community’s commitment to the Community-wide development of energy from renewable sources beyond 2010. It endorsed a mandatory target of a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in overall Community energy consumption by 2020 and a mandatory 10 % minimum target to be achieved by all Member States for the share of biofuels in transport petrol and diesel consumption by 2020, to be introduced in a cost-effective way. It stated that the binding character of the biofuel target is appropriate, subject to production being sustainable, second-generation biofuels becoming commercially available and Directive 98/70/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to the quality of petrol and diesel fuels(7)being amended to allow for adequate levels of blending. The European Council of March 2008 repeated that it is essential to develop and fulfil effective sustainability criteria for biofuels and ensure the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels. The European Council of June 2008 referred again to the sustainability criteria and the development of second-generation biofuels, and underlined the need to assess the possible impacts of biofuel production on agricultural food products and to take action, if necessary, to address shortcomings. It also stated that further assessment should be made of the environmental and social consequences of the production and consumption of biofuels.
(10) In its resolution of 25 September 2007 on the Road Map for Renewable Energy in Europe(8), the European Parliament called on the Commission to present, by the end of 2007, a proposal for a legislative framework for energy from renewable sources, referring to the importance of setting targets for the shares of energy from renewable sources at Community and Member State level.
(11) It is necessary to set transparent and unambiguous rules for calculating the share of energy from renewable sources and for defining those sources. In this context, the energy present in oceans and other water bodies in the form of waves, marine currents, tides, ocean thermal energy gradients or salinity gradients should be included.
(12) The use of agricultural material such as manure, slurry and other animal and organic waste for biogas production has, in view of the high greenhouse gas emission saving potential, significant environmental advantages in terms of heat and power production and its use as biofuel. Biogas installations can, as a result of their decentralised nature and the regional investment structure, contribute significantly to sustainable development in rural areas and offer farmers new income opportunities.
(13) In the light of the positions taken by the European Parliament, the Council and the Commission, it is appropriate to establish mandatory national targets consistent with a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in transport in Community energy consumption by 2020.
(14) The main purpose of mandatory national targets is to provide certainty for investors and to encourage continuous development of technologies which generate energy from all types of renewable sources. Deferring a decision about whether a target is mandatory until a future event takes place is thus not appropriate.
(15) The starting point, the renewable energy potential and the energy mix of each Member State vary. It is therefore necessary to translate the Community 20 % target into individual targets for each Member State, with due regard to a fair and adequate allocation taking account of Member States’ different starting points and potentials, including the existing level of energy from renewable sources and the energy mix. It is appropriate to do this by sharing the required total increase in the use of energy from renewable sources between Member States on the basis of an equal increase in each Member State’s share weighted by their GDP, modulated to reflect their starting points, and by accounting in terms of gross final consumption of energy, with account being taken of Member States’ past efforts with regard to the use of energy from renewable sources.
(16) By contrast, it is appropriate for the 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport to be set at the same level for each Member State in order to ensure consistency in transport fuel specifications and availability. Because transport fuels are traded easily, Member States with low endowments of the relevant resources will easily be able to obtain biofuels from elsewhere. While it would technically be possible for the Community to meet its target for the use of energy from renewable sources in transport solely from domestic production, it is both likely and desirable that the target will in fact be met through a combination of domestic production and imports. To this end, the Commission should monitor the supply of the Community market for biofuels, and should, as appropriate, propose relevant measures to achieve a balanced approach between domestic production and imports, taking into account, inter alia, the development of multilateral and bilateral trade negotiations, environmental, social and economic considerations, and the security of energy supply.
(17) The improvement of energy efficiency is a key objective of the Community, and the aim is to achieve a 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020. That aim, together with existing and future legislation including Directive 2002/91/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2002 on the energy performance of buildings(9), Directive 2005/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 6 July 2005 establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-using products(10), and Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(11), has a critical role to play in ensuring that the climate and energy objectives are being achieved at least cost, and can also provide new opportunities for the European Union’s economy. Energy efficiency and energy saving policies are some of the most effective methods by which Member States can increase the percentage share of energy from renewable sources, and Member States will thus more easily achieve the overall national and transport targets for energy from renewable sources laid down by this Directive.
(18) It will be incumbent upon Member States to make significant improvements in energy efficiency in all sectors in order more easily to achieve their targets for energy from renewable sources, which are expressed as a percentage of gross final consumption of energy. The need for energy efficiency in the transport sector is imperative because a mandatory percentage target for energy from renewable sources is likely to become increasingly difficult to achieve sustainably if overall demand for energy for transport continues to rise. The mandatory 10 % target for transport to be achieved by all Member States should therefore be defined as that share of final energy consumed in transport which is to be achieved from renewable sources as a whole, and not from biofuels alone.
(19) To ensure that the mandatory national overall targets are achieved, Member States should work towards an indicative trajectory tracing a path towards the achievement of their final mandatory targets. They should establish a national renewable energy action plan including information on sectoral targets, while having in mind that there are different uses of biomass and therefore it is essential to mobilise new biomass resources. In addition, Member States should set out measures to achieve those targets. Each Member State should assess, when evaluating its expected gross final consumption of energy in its national renewable energy action plan, the contribution which energy efficiency and energy saving measures can make to achieving its national targets. Member States should take into account the optimal combination of energy efficiency technologies with energy from renewable sources.
(20) To permit the benefits of technological progress and economies of scale to be reaped, the indicative trajectory should take into account the possibility of a more rapid growth in the use of energy from renewable sources in the future. Thus special attention can be given to sectors that suffer disproportionately from the absence of technological progress and economies of scale and therefore remain under-developed, but which, in future, could significantly contribute to reaching the targets for 2020.
(21) The indicative trajectory should take 2005 as its starting point because that is the latest year for which reliable data on national shares of energy from renewable sources are available.
(22) The achievement of the objectives of this Directive requires that the Community and Member States dedicate a significant amount of financial resources to research and development in relation to renewable energy technologies. In particular, the European Institute of Innovation and Technology should give high priority to the research and development of renewable energy technologies.
(23) Member States may encourage local and regional authorities to set targets in excess of national targets and to involve local and regional authorities in drawing up national renewable energy action plans and in raising awareness of the benefits of energy from renewable sources.
(24) In order to exploit the full potential of biomass, the Community and the Member States should promote greater mobilisation of existing timber reserves and the development of new forestry systems.
(25) Member States have different renewable energy potentials and operate different schemes of support for energy from renewable sources at the national level. The majority of Member States apply support schemes that grant benefits solely to energy from renewable sources that is produced on their territory. For the proper functioning of national support schemes it is vital that Member States can control the effect and costs of their national support schemes according to their different potentials. One important means to achieve the aim of this Directive is to guarantee the proper functioning of national support schemes, as under Directive 2001/77/EC, in order to maintain investor confidence and allow Member States to design effective national measures for target compliance. This Directive aims at facilitating cross-border support of energy from renewable sources without affecting national support schemes. It introduces optional cooperation mechanisms between Member States which allow them to agree on the extent to which one Member State supports the energy production in another and on the extent to which the energy production from renewable sources should count towards the national overall target of one or the other. In order to ensure the effectiveness of both measures of target compliance, i.e. national support schemes and cooperation mechanisms, it is essential that Member States are able to determine if and to what extent their national support schemes apply to energy from renewable sources produced in other Member States and to agree on this by applying the cooperation mechanisms provided for in this Directive.
(26) It is desirable that energy prices reflect external costs of energy production and consumption, including, as appropriate, environmental, social and healthcare costs.
(27) Public support is necessary to reach the Community’s objectives with regard to the expansion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, in particular for as long as electricity prices in the internal market do not reflect the full environmental and social costs and benefits of energy sources used.
(28) The Community and the Member States should strive to reduce total consumption of energy in transport and increase energy efficiency in transport. The principal means of reducing consumption of energy in transport include transport planning, support for public transport, increasing the share of electric cars in production and producing cars which are more energy efficient and smaller both in size and in engine capacity.
(29) Member States should aim to diversify the mix of energy from renewable sources in all transport sectors. The Commission should present a report to the European Parliament and the Council by 1 June 2015 outlining the potential for increasing the use of energy from renewable sources in each transport sector.
(30) In calculating the contribution of hydropower and wind power for the purposes of this Directive, the effects of climatic variation should be smoothed through the use of a normalisation rule. Further, electricity produced in pumped storage units from water that has previously been pumped uphill should not be considered to be electricity produced from renewable energy sources.
(31) Heat pumps enabling the use of aerothermal, geothermal or hydrothermal heat at a useful temperature level need electricity or other auxiliary energy to function. The energy used to drive heat pumps should therefore be deducted from the total usable heat. Only heat pumps with an output that significantly exceeds the primary energy needed to drive it should be taken into account.
(32) Passive energy systems use building design to harness energy. This is considered to be saved energy. To avoid double counting, energy harnessed in this way should not be taken into account for the purposes of this Directive.
(33) Some Member States have a large share of aviation in their gross final consumption of energy. In view of the current technological and regulatory constraints that prevent the commercial use of biofuels in aviation, it is appropriate to provide a partial exemption for such Member States, by excluding from the calculation of their gross final consumption of energy in national air transport, the amount by which they exceed one-and-a-half times the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005, as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 6,18 %. Cyprus and Malta, due to their insular and peripheral character, rely on aviation as a mode of transport, which is essential for their citizens and their economy. As a result, Cyprus and Malta have a gross final consumption of energy in national air transport which is disproportionally high, i.e. more than three times the Community average in 2005, and are thus disproportionately affected by the current technological and regulatory constraints. For those Member States it is therefore appropriate to provide that the exemption should cover the amount by which they exceed the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005 as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 4,12 %.
(34) To obtain an energy model that supports energy from renewable sources there is a need to encourage strategic cooperation between Member States, involving, as appropriate, regions and local authorities.
(35) Whilst having due regard to the provisions of this Directive, Member States should be encouraged to pursue all appropriate forms of cooperation in relation to the objectives set out in this Directive. Such cooperation can take place at all levels, bilaterally or multilaterally. Apart from the mechanisms with effect on target calculation and target compliance, which are exclusively provided for in this Directive, namely statistical transfers between Member States, joint projects and joint support schemes, cooperation can also take the form of, for example, exchanges of information and best practices, as provided for, in particular, in the transparency platform established by this Directive, and other voluntary coordination between all types of support schemes.
(36) To create opportunities for reducing the cost of achieving the targets laid down in this Directive, it is appropriate both to facilitate the consumption in Member States of energy produced from renewable sources in other Member States, and to enable Member States to count energy from renewable sources consumed in other Member States towards their own national targets. For this reason, flexibility measures are required, but they remain under Member States’ control in order not to affect their ability to reach their national targets. Those flexibility measures take the form of statistical transfers, joint projects between Member States or joint support schemes.
(37) It should be possible for imported electricity, produced from renewable energy sources outside the Community, to count towards Member States’ targets. However, to avoid a net increase in greenhouse gas emissions through the diversion of existing renewable sources and their complete or partial replacement by conventional energy sources, only electricity produced by renewable energy installations that become operational after the entry into force of this Directive or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date should be eligible to be counted. In order to guarantee an adequate effect of energy from renewable sources replacing conventional energy in the Community as well as in third countries it is appropriate to ensure that such imports can be tracked and accounted for in a reliable way. Agreements with third countries concerning the organisation of such trade in electricity from renewable energy sources will be considered. If, by virtue of a decision taken under the Energy Community Treaty(12)to that effect, the contracting parties to that treaty become bound by the relevant provisions of this Directive, the measures of cooperation between Member States provided for in this Directive will be applicable to them.
(38) When Member States undertake joint projects with one or more third countries regarding the production of electricity from renewable energy sources, it is appropriate that those joint projects relate only to newly constructed installations or to installations with newly increased capacity. This will help ensure that the proportion of energy from renewable sources in the third country’s total energy consumption is not reduced due to the importation of energy from renewable sources into the Community. In addition, the Member States concerned should facilitate the domestic use by the third country concerned of part of the production of electricity by the installations covered by the joint project. Furthermore, the third country concerned should be encouraged by the Commission and Member States to develop a renewable energy policy, including ambitious targets.
(39) Noting that projects of high European interest in third countries, such as the Mediterranean Solar Plan, may need a long lead-time before being fully interconnected to the territory of the Community, it is appropriate to facilitate their development by allowing Member States to take into account in their national targets a limited amount of electricity produced by such projects during the construction of the interconnection.
(40) The procedure used by the administration responsible for supervising the authorisation, certification and licensing of renewable energy plants should be objective, transparent, non-discriminatory and proportionate when applying the rules to specific projects. In particular, it is appropriate to avoid any unnecessary burden that could arise by classifying renewable energy projects under installations which represent a high health risk.
(41) The lack of transparent rules and coordination between the different authorisation bodies has been shown to hinder the deployment of energy from renewable sources. Therefore the specific structure of the renewable energy sector should be taken into account when national, regional and local authorities review their administrative procedures for giving permission to construct and operate plants and associated transmission and distribution network infrastructures for the production of electricity, heating and cooling or transport fuels from renewable energy sources. Administrative approval procedures should be streamlined with transparent timetables for installations using energy from renewable sources. Planning rules and guidelines should be adapted to take into consideration cost-effective and environmentally beneficial renewable heating and cooling and electricity equipment.
(42) For the benefit of rapid deployment of energy from renewable sources and in view of their overall high sustainable and environmental beneficial quality, Member States should, when applying administrative rules, planning structures and legislation which are designed for licensing installations with respect to pollution reduction and control for industrial plants, for combating air pollution and for the prevention or minimisation of the discharge of dangerous substances in the environment, take into account the contribution of renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(43) In order to stimulate the contribution by individual citizens to the objectives set out in this Directive, the relevant authorities should consider the possibility of replacing authorisations by simple notifications to the competent body when installing small decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources.
(44) The coherence between the objectives of this Directive and the Community’s other environmental legislation should be ensured. In particular, during the assessment, planning or licensing procedures for renewable energy installations, Member States should take account of all Community environmental legislation and the contribution made by renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(45) National technical specifications and other requirements falling within the scope of Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 laying down a procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and rules on Information Society services(13), relating for example to levels of quality, testing methods or conditions of use, should not create barriers for trade in renewable energy equipment and systems. Therefore, support schemes for energy from renewable sources should not prescribe national technical specifications which deviate from existing Community standards or require the supported equipment or systems to be certified or tested in a specified location or by a specified entity.
(46) It is appropriate for Member States to consider mechanisms for the promotion of district heating and cooling from energy from renewable sources.
(47) At national and regional level, rules and obligations for minimum requirements for the use of energy from renewable sources in new and renovated buildings have led to considerable increases in the use of energy from renewable sources. Those measures should be encouraged in a wider Community context, while promoting the use of more energy-efficient applications of energy from renewable sources through building regulations and codes.
(48) It may be appropriate for Member States, in order to facilitate and accelerate the setting of minimum levels for the use of energy from renewable sources in buildings, to provide that such levels are achieved by incorporating a factor for energy from renewable sources in meeting minimum energy performance requirements under Directive 2002/91/EC, relating to a cost-optimal reduction of carbon emissions per building.
(49) Information and training gaps, especially in the heating and cooling sector, should be removed in order to encourage the deployment of energy from renewable sources.
(50) In so far as the access or pursuit of the profession of installer is a regulated profession, the preconditions for the recognition of professional qualifications are laid down in Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications(14). This Directive therefore applies without prejudice to Directive 2005/36/EC.
(51) While Directive 2005/36/EC lays down requirements for the mutual recognition of professional qualifications, including for architects, there is a further need to ensure that architects and planners properly consider an optimal combination of renewable energy sources and high-efficiency technologies in their plans and designs. Member States should therefore provide clear guidance in this regard. This should be done without prejudice to the provisions of Directive 2005/36/EC and in particular Articles 46 and 49 thereof.
(52) Guarantees of origin issued for the purpose of this Directive have the sole function of proving to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources. A guarantee of origin can be transferred, independently of the energy to which it relates, from one holder to another. However, with a view to ensuring that a unit of electricity from renewable energy sources is disclosed to a customer only once, double counting and double disclosure of guarantees of origin should be avoided. Energy from renewable sources in relation to which the accompanying guarantee of origin has been sold separately by the producer should not be disclosed or sold to the final customer as energy from renewable sources. It is important to distinguish between green certificates used for support schemes and guarantees of origin.
(53) It is appropriate to allow the emerging consumer market for electricity from renewable energy sources to contribute to the construction of new installations for energy from renewable sources. Member States should therefore be able to require electricity suppliers who disclose their energy mix to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, to include a minimum percentage of guarantees of origin from recently constructed installations producing energy from renewable sources, provided that such a requirement is in conformity with Community law.
(54) It is important to provide information on how the supported electricity is allocated to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC. In order to improve the quality of that information to consumers, in particular as regards the amount of energy from renewable sources produced by new installations, the Commission should assess the effectiveness of the measures taken by Member States.
(55) Directive 2004/8/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 February 2004 on the promotion of cogeneration based on a useful heat demand in the internal energy market(15)provides for guarantees of origin for proving the origin of electricity produced from high-efficiency cogeneration plants. Such guarantees of origin cannot be used when disclosing the use of energy from renewable sources in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC as this might result in double counting and double disclosure.
(56) Guarantees of origin do not by themselves confer a right to benefit from national support schemes.
(57) There is a need to support the integration of energy from renewable sources into the transmission and distribution grid and the use of energy storage systems for integrated intermittent production of energy from renewable sources.
(58) The development of renewable energy projects, including renewable energy projects of European interest under the Trans-European Network for Energy (TEN-E) programme should be accelerated. To that end, the Commission should also analyse how the financing of such projects can be improved. Particular attention should be paid to renewable energy projects that will contribute to a significant increase in security of energy supply in the Community and neighbouring countries.
(59) Interconnection among countries facilitates integration of electricity from renewable energy sources. Besides smoothing out variability, interconnection can reduce balancing costs, encourage true competition bringing about lower prices, and support the development of networks. Also, the sharing and optimal use of transmission capacity could help avoid excessive need for newly built capacity.
(60) Priority access and guaranteed access for electricity from renewable energy sources are important for integrating renewable energy sources into the internal market in electricity, in line with Article 11(2) and developing further Article 11(3) of Directive 2003/54/EC. Requirements relating to the maintenance of the reliability and safety of the grid and to the dispatching may differ according to the characteristics of the national grid and its secure operation. Priority access to the grid provides an assurance given to connected generators of electricity from renewable energy sources that they will be able to sell and transmit the electricity from renewable energy sources in accordance with connection rules at all times, whenever the source becomes available. In the event that the electricity from renewable energy sources is integrated into the spot market, guaranteed access ensures that all electricity sold and supported obtains access to the grid, allowing the use of a maximum amount of electricity from renewable energy sources from installations connected to the grid. However, this does not imply any obligation on the part of Member States to support or introduce purchase obligations for energy from renewable sources. In other systems, a fixed price is defined for electricity from renewable energy sources, usually in combination with a purchase obligation for the system operator. In such a case, priority access has already been given.
(61) In certain circumstances it is not possible fully to ensure transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. In such circumstances it may be appropriate for financial compensation to be given to those producers. Nevertheless, the objectives of this Directive require a sustained increase in the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. To this end, Member States should take appropriate measures in order to allow a higher penetration of electricity from renewable energy sources, inter alia, by taking into account the specificities of variable resources and resources which are not yet storable. To the extent required by the objectives set out in this Directive, the connection of new renewable energy installations should be allowed as soon as possible. In order to accelerate grid connection procedures, Member States may provide for priority connection or reserved connection capacities for new installations producing electricity from renewable energy sources.
(62) The costs of connecting new producers of electricity and gas from renewable energy sources to the electricity and gas grids should be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory and due account should be taken of the benefit that embedded producers of electricity from renewable energy sources and local producers of gas from renewable sources bring to the electricity and gas grids.
(63) Electricity producers who want to exploit the potential of energy from renewable sources in the peripheral regions of the Community, in particular in island regions and regions of low population density, should, whenever feasible, benefit from reasonable connection costs in order to ensure that they are not unfairly disadvantaged in comparison with producers situated in more central, more industrialised and more densely populated areas.
(64) Directive 2001/77/EC lays down the framework for the integration into the grid of electricity from renewable energy sources. However, there is a significant variation between Member States in the degree of integration actually achieved. For this reason it is necessary to strengthen the framework and to review its application periodically at national level.
(65) Biofuel production should be sustainable. Biofuels used for compliance with the targets laid down in this Directive, and those that benefit from national support schemes, should therefore be required to fulfil sustainability criteria.
(66) The Community should take appropriate steps in the context of this Directive, including the promotion of sustainability criteria for biofuels and the development of second and third-generation biofuels in the Community and worldwide, and to strengthen agricultural research and knowledge creation in those areas.
(67) The introduction of sustainability criteria for biofuels will not achieve its objective if those products that do not fulfil the criteria and would otherwise have been used as biofuels are used, instead, as bioliquids in the heating or electricity sectors. For this reason, the sustainability criteria should also apply to bioliquids in general.
(68) The European Council of March 2007 invited the Commission to propose a comprehensive Directive on the use of all renewable energy sources, which could contain criteria and provisions to ensure sustainable provision and use of bioenergy. Such sustainability criteria should form a coherent part of a wider scheme covering all bioliquids and not biofuels alone. Such sustainability criteria should therefore be included in this Directive. In order to ensure a coherent approach between energy and environment policies, and to avoid the additional costs to business and the environmental incoherence that would be associated with an inconsistent approach, it is essential to provide the same sustainability criteria for the use of biofuels for the purposes of this Directive on the one hand, and Directive 98/70/EC on the other. For the same reasons, double reporting should be avoided in this context. Furthermore, the Commission and the competent national authorities should coordinate their activities in the framework of a committee specifically responsible for sustainability aspects. The Commission should, in addition, in 2009, review the possible inclusion of other biomass applications and the modalities relating thereto.
(69) The increasing worldwide demand for biofuels and bioliquids, and the incentives for their use provided for in this Directive, should not have the effect of encouraging the destruction of biodiverse lands. Those finite resources, recognised in various international instruments to be of value to all mankind, should be preserved. Consumers in the Community would, in addition, find it morally unacceptable that their increased use of biofuels and bioliquids could have the effect of destroying biodiverse lands. For these reasons, it is necessary to provide sustainability criteria ensuring that biofuels and bioliquids can qualify for the incentives only when it can be guaranteed that they do not originate in biodiverse areas or, in the case of areas designated for nature protection purposes or for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species, the relevant competent authority demonstrates that the production of the raw material does not interfere with those purposes. The sustainability criteria should consider forest as biodiverse where it is a primary forest in accordance with the definition used by the Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations (FAO) in its Global Forest Resource Assessment, which countries use worldwide to report on the extent of primary forest or where it is protected by national nature protection law. Areas where collection of non-wood forest products occurs should be included, provided the human impact is small. Other types of forests as defined by the FAO, such as modified natural forests, semi-natural forests and plantations, should not be considered as primary forests. Having regard, furthermore, to the highly biodiverse nature of certain grasslands, both temperate and tropical, including highly biodiverse savannahs, steppes, scrublands and prairies, biofuels made from raw materials originating in such lands should not qualify for the incentives provided for by this Directive. The Commission should establish appropriate criteria and geographical ranges to define such highly biodiverse grasslands in accordance with the best available scientific evidence and relevant international standards.
(70) If land with high stocks of carbon in its soil or vegetation is converted for the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels or bioliquids, some of the stored carbon will generally be released into the atmosphere, leading to the formation of carbon dioxide. The resulting negative greenhouse gas impact can offset the positive greenhouse gas impact of the biofuels or bioliquids, in some cases by a wide margin. The full carbon effects of such conversion should therefore be accounted for in calculating the greenhouse gas emission saving of particular biofuels and bioliquids. This is necessary to ensure that the greenhouse gas emission saving calculation takes into account the totality of the carbon effects of the use of biofuels and bioliquids.
(71) In calculating the greenhouse gas impact of land conversion, economic operators should be able to use actual values for the carbon stocks associated with the reference land use and the land use after conversion. They should also be able to use standard values. The work of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change is the appropriate basis for such standard values. That work is not currently expressed in a form that is immediately applicable by economic operators. The Commission should therefore produce guidance drawing on that work to serve as the basis for the calculation of carbon stock changes for the purposes of this Directive, including such changes to forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 to 30 %, savannahs, scrublands and prairies.
(72) It is appropriate for the Commission to develop methodologies with a view to assessing the impact of the drainage of peatlands on greenhouse gas emissions.
(73) Land should not be converted for the production of biofuels if its carbon stock loss upon conversion could not, within a reasonable period, taking into account the urgency of tackling climate change, be compensated by the greenhouse gas emission saving resulting from the production of biofuels or bioliquids. This would prevent unnecessary, burdensome research by economic operators and the conversion of high-carbon-stock land that would prove to be ineligible for producing raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids. Inventories of worldwide carbon stocks indicate that wetlands and continuously forested areas with a canopy cover of more than 30 % should be included in that category. Forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 and 30 % should also be included, unless there is evidence demonstrating that their carbon stock is sufficiently low to justify their conversion in accordance with the rules laid down in this Directive. The reference to wetlands should take into account the definition laid down in the Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, especially as Waterfowl Habitat, adopted on 2 February 1971 in Ramsar.
(74) The incentives provided for in this Directive will encourage increased production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide. Where biofuels and bioliquids are made from raw material produced within the Community, they should also comply with Community environmental requirements for agriculture, including those concerning the protection of groundwater and surface water quality, and with social requirements. However, there is a concern that production of biofuels and bioliquids in certain third countries might not respect minimum environmental or social requirements. It is therefore appropriate to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that cover key environmental and social considerations, in order to promote the production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide in a sustainable manner. In the absence of such agreements or schemes, Member States should require economic operators to report on those issues.
(75) The requirements for a sustainability scheme for energy uses of biomass, other than bioliquids and biofuels, should be analysed by the Commission in 2009, taking into account the need for biomass resources to be managed in a sustainable manner.
(76) Sustainability criteria will be effective only if they lead to changes in the behaviour of market actors. Those changes will occur only if biofuels and bioliquids meeting those criteria command a price premium compared to those that do not. According to the mass balance method of verifying compliance, there is a physical link between the production of biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria and the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids in the Community, providing an appropriate balance between supply and demand and ensuring a price premium that is greater than in systems where there is no such link. To ensure that biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria can be sold at a higher price, the mass balance method should therefore be used to verify compliance. This should maintain the integrity of the system while at the same time avoiding the imposition of an unreasonable burden on industry. Other verification methods should, however, be reviewed.
(77) Where appropriate, the Commission should take due account of the Millennium Ecosystem Assessment which contains useful data for the conservation of at least those areas that provide basic ecosystem services in critical situations such as watershed protection and erosion control.
(78) It is appropriate to monitor the impact of biomass cultivation, such as through land-use changes, including displacement, the introduction of invasive alien species and other effects on biodiversity, and effects on food production and local prosperity. The Commission should consider all relevant sources of information, including the FAO hunger map. Biofuels should be promoted in a manner that encourages greater agricultural productivity and the use of degraded land.
(79) It is in the interests of the Community to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that set standards for the production of sustainable biofuels and bioliquids, and that certify that the production of biofuels and bioliquids meets those standards. For that reason, provision should be made for such agreements or schemes to be recognised as providing reliable evidence and data, provided that they meet adequate standards of reliability, transparency and independent auditing.
(80) It is necessary to lay down clear rules for the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions from biofuels and bioliquids and their fossil fuel comparators.
(81) Co-products from the production and use of fuels should be taken into account in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions. The substitution method is appropriate for the purposes of policy analysis, but not for the regulation of individual economic operators and individual consignments of transport fuels. In those cases the energy allocation method is the most appropriate method, as it is easy to apply, is predictable over time, minimises counter-productive incentives and produces results that are generally comparable with those produced by the substitution method. For the purposes of policy analysis the Commission should also, in its reporting, present results using the substitution method.
(82) In order to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, a list of default values should be laid down for common biofuel production pathways and that list should be updated and expanded when further reliable data is available. Economic operators should always be entitled to claim the level of greenhouse gas emission saving for biofuels and bioliquids established by that list. Where the default value for greenhouse gas emission saving from a production pathway lies below the required minimum level of greenhouse gas emission saving, producers wishing to demonstrate their compliance with this minimum level should be required to show that actual emissions from their production process are lower than those that were assumed in the calculation of the default values.
(83) It is appropriate for the data used in the calculation of the default values to be obtained from independent, scientifically expert sources and to be updated as appropriate as those sources progress their work. The Commission should encourage those sources to address, when they update their work, emissions from cultivation, the effect of regional and climatological conditions, the effects of cultivation using sustainable agricultural and organic farming methods, and the scientific contribution of producers, within the Community and in third countries, and civil society.
(84) In order to avoid encouraging the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids in places where this would lead to high greenhouse gas emissions, the use of default values for cultivation should be limited to regions where such an effect can reliably be ruled out. However, to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, it is appropriate for Member States to establish national or regional averages for emissions from cultivation, including from fertiliser use.
(85) Global demand for agricultural commodities is growing. Part of that increased demand will be met through an increase in the amount of land devoted to agriculture. The restoration of land that has been severely degraded or heavily contaminated and therefore cannot be used, in its present state, for agricultural purposes is a way of increasing the amount of land available for cultivation. The sustainability scheme should promote the use of restored degraded land because the promotion of biofuels and bioliquids will contribute to the growth in demand for agricultural commodities. Even if biofuels themselves are made using raw materials from land already in arable use, the net increase in demand for crops caused by the promotion of biofuels could lead to a net increase in the cropped area. This could affect high carbon stock land, which would result in damaging carbon stock losses. To alleviate that risk, it is appropriate to introduce accompanying measures to encourage an increased rate of productivity on land already used for crops, the use of degraded land, and the adoption of sustainability requirements, comparable to those laid down in this Directive for Community biofuel consumption, in other biofuel-consuming countries. The Commission should develop a concrete methodology to minimise greenhouse gas emissions caused by indirect land-use changes. To this end, the Commission should analyse, on the basis of best available scientific evidence, in particular, the inclusion of a factor for indirect land-use changes in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions and the need to incentivise sustainable biofuels which minimise the impacts of land-use change and improve biofuel sustainability with respect to indirect land-use change. In developing that methodology, the Commission should address, inter alia, the potential indirect land-use changes resulting from biofuels produced from non-food cellulosic material and from ligno-cellulosic material.
(86) In order to permit the achievement of an adequate market share of biofuels, it is necessary to ensure the placing on the market of higher blends of biodiesel in diesel than those envisaged by standard EN590/2004.
(87) In order to ensure that biofuels that diversify the range of feedstocks used become commercially viable, those biofuels should receive an extra weighting under national biofuel obligations.
(88) Regular reporting is needed to ensure a continuing focus on progress in the development of energy from renewable sources at national and Community level. It is appropriate to require the use of a harmonised template for national renewable energy action plans which Member States should submit. Such plans could include estimated costs and benefits of the measures envisaged, measures relating to the necessary extension or reinforcement of the existing grid infrastructure, estimated costs and benefits to develop energy from renewable sources in excess of the level required by the indicative trajectory, information on national support schemes and information on their use of energy from renewable sources in new or renovated buildings.
(89) When designing their support systems, Member States may encourage the use of biofuels which give additional benefits, including the benefits of diversification offered by biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material, ligno-cellulosic material and algae, as well as non-irrigated plants grown in arid areas to fight desertification, by taking due account of the different costs of producing energy from traditional biofuels on the one hand and of those biofuels that give additional benefits on the other. Member States may encourage investment in research and development in relation to those and other renewable energy technologies that need time to become competitive.
(90) The implementation of this Directive should reflect, where relevant, the provisions of the Convention on Access to Information, Public Participation in Decision-Making and Access to Justice in Environmental Matters, in particular as implemented through Directive 2003/4/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 28 January 2003 on public access to environmental information(16).
(91) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(17).
(92) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adapt the methodological principles and values necessary for assessing whether sustainability criteria have been fulfilled in relation to biofuels and bioliquids, to adapt the energy content of transport fuels to technical and scientific progress, to establish criteria and geographic ranges for determining highly biodiverse grassland, and to establish detailed definitions for severely degraded or contaminated land. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, inter alia, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(93) Those provisions of Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC that overlap with the provisions of this Directive should be deleted from the latest possible moment for transposition of this Directive. Those that deal with targets and reporting for 2010 should remain in force until the end of 2011. It is therefore necessary to amend Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC accordingly.
(94) Since the measures provided for in Articles 17 to 19 also have an effect on the functioning of the internal market by harmonising the sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids for the target accounting purposes under this Directive, and thus facilitate, in accordance with Article 17(8), trade between Member States in biofuels and bioliquids which comply with those conditions, they are based on Article 95 of the Treaty.
(95) The sustainability scheme should not prevent Member States from taking into account, in their national support schemes, the higher production cost of biofuels and bioliquids that deliver benefits that exceed the minima laid down in the sustainability scheme.
(96) Since the general objectives of this Directive, namely to achieve a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in each Member State’s transport energy consumption by 2020, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(97) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional agreement on better law-making(18), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures and to make them public,
(a) ‘energy from renewable sources’ means energy from renewable non-fossil sources, namely wind, solar, aerothermal, geothermal, hydrothermal and ocean energy, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases;
(b) ‘aerothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in the ambient air;
(c) ‘geothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat beneath the surface of solid earth;
(d) ‘hydrothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in surface water;
(e) ‘biomass’ means the biodegradable fraction of products, waste and residues from biological origin from agriculture (including vegetal and animal substances), forestry and related industries including fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the biodegradable fraction of industrial and municipal waste;
(f) ‘gross final consumption of energy’ means the energy commodities delivered for energy purposes to industry, transport, households, services including public services, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, including the consumption of electricity and heat by the energy branch for electricity and heat production and including losses of electricity and heat in distribution and transmission;
(g) ‘district heating’ or ‘district cooling’ means the distribution of thermal energy in the form of steam, hot water or chilled liquids, from a central source of production through a network to multiple buildings or sites, for the use of space or process heating or cooling;
(h) ‘bioliquids’ means liquid fuel for energy purposes other than for transport, including electricity and heating and cooling, produced from biomass;
(i) ‘biofuels’ means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport produced from biomass;
(j) ‘guarantee of origin’ means an electronic document which has the sole function of providing proof to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources as required by Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(k) ‘support scheme’ means any instrument, scheme or mechanism applied by a Member State or a group of Member States, that promotes the use of energy from renewable sources by reducing the cost of that energy, increasing the price at which it can be sold, or increasing, by means of a renewable energy obligation or otherwise, the volume of such energy purchased. This includes, but is not restricted to, investment aid, tax exemptions or reductions, tax refunds, renewable energy obligation support schemes including those using green certificates, and direct price support schemes including feed-in tariffs and premium payments;
(l) ‘renewable energy obligation’ means a national support scheme requiring energy producers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their production, requiring energy suppliers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their supply, or requiring energy consumers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their consumption. This includes schemes under which such requirements may be fulfilled by using green certificates;
(m) ‘actual value’ means the greenhouse gas emission saving for some or all of the steps of a specific biofuel production process calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V;
(n) ‘typical value’ means an estimate of the representative greenhouse gas emission saving for a particular biofuel production pathway;
(o) ‘default value’ means a value derived from a typical value by the application of pre-determined factors and that may, in circumstances specified in this Directive, be used in place of an actual value.
(a) support schemes;
(b) measures of cooperation between different Member States and with third countries for achieving their national overall targets in accordance with Articles 5 to 11.
(a) for the calculation of the denominator, that is the total amount of energy consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, only petrol, diesel, biofuels consumed in road and rail transport, and electricity shall be taken into account;
(b) for the calculation of the numerator, that is the amount of energy from renewable sources consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, all types of energy from renewable sources consumed in all forms of transport shall be taken into account;
(c) for the calculation of the contribution from electricity produced from renewable sources and consumed in all types of electric vehicles for the purpose of points (a) and (b), Member States may choose to use either the average share of electricity from renewable energy sources in the Community or the share of electricity from renewable energy sources in their own country as measured two years before the year in question. Furthermore, for the calculation of the electricity from renewable energy sources consumed by electric road vehicles, that consumption shall be considered to be 2,5 times the energy content of the input of electricity from renewable energy sources.
(a) its estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States in accordance with Articles 6 to 11, as well as its estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020; and
(b) its estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020.
(a) gross final consumption of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(b) gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for heating and cooling; and
(c) final consumption of energy from renewable sources in transport.
(a) deducted from the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by the Member State making the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2); and
(b) added to the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by another Member State accepting the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2).
(a) describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b) specify the proportion or amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of another Member State;
(c) identify the Member State in whose favour the notification is being made; and
(d) specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity or heating or cooling produced by the installation from renewable energy sources is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the other Member State.
(a) the total amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 7; and
(b) the amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards the national overall target of another Member State in accordance with the terms of the notification.
(a) deducted from the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State issuing the letter of notification under paragraph 1; and
(b) added to the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State receiving the letter of notification in accordance with paragraph 2.
(a) the electricity is consumed in the Community, a requirement that is deemed to be met where:(i)an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit;(ii)an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and(iii)the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time; (i) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit; (ii) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and (iii) the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time;
(i) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit;
(ii) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and
(iii) the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time;
(i) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit;
(ii) an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and
(iii) the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time;
(b) the electricity is produced by a newly constructed installation that became operational after 25 June 2009 or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date, under a joint project as referred to in paragraph 1; and
(c) the amount of electricity produced and exported has not received support from a support scheme of a third country other than investment aid granted to the installation.
(a) construction of the interconnector started by 31 December 2016;
(b) it is not possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2020;
(c) it is possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2022;
(d) after it becomes operational, the interconnector will be used for the export to the Community, in accordance with paragraph 2, of electricity generated from renewable energy sources;
(e) the application relates to a joint project that fulfils the criteria in points (b) and (c) of paragraph 2 and that will use the interconnector after it becomes operational, and to a quantity of electricity that is no greater than the quantity that will be exported to the Community after the interconnector becomes operational.
(a) describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b) specify the proportion or amount of electricity produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national target of a Member State as well as, subject to confidentiality requirements, the corresponding financial arrangements;
(c) specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the Member State; and
(d) include a written acknowledgement of points (b) and (c) by the third country in whose territory the installation is to become operational and the proportion or amount of electricity produced by the installation which will be used domestically by that third country.
(a) the total amount of electricity produced during that year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 9;
(b) the amount of electricity produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards its national overall target in accordance with the terms of the notification under Article 9; and
(c) proof of compliance with the conditions set out in Article 9(2).
(a) make a statistical transfer of specified amounts of energy from renewable sources from one Member State to another Member State in accordance with Article 6; or
(b) set up a distribution rule agreed by participating Member States that allocates amounts of energy from renewable sources between the participating Member States. Such a rule shall be notified to the Commission no later than three months after the end of the first year in which it takes effect.
(a) subject to differences between Member States in their administrative structures and organisation, the respective responsibilities of national, regional and local administrative bodies for authorisation, certification and licensing procedures including spatial planning are clearly coordinated and defined, with transparent timetables for determining planning and building applications;
(b) comprehensive information on the processing of authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and on available assistance to applicants are made available at the appropriate level;
(c) administrative procedures are streamlined and expedited at the appropriate administrative level;
(d) rules governing authorisation, certification and licensing are objective, transparent, proportionate, do not discriminate between applicants and take fully into account the particularities of individual renewable energy technologies;
(e) administrative charges paid by consumers, planners, architects, builders and equipment and system installers and suppliers are transparent and cost-related; and
(f) simplified and less burdensome authorisation procedures, including through simple notification if allowed by the applicable regulatory framework, are established for smaller projects and for decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources, where appropriate.
(a) the energy source from which the energy was produced and the start and end dates of production;
(b) whether it relates to:(i)electricity; or(ii)heating or cooling; (i) electricity; or (ii) heating or cooling;
(i) electricity; or
(ii) heating or cooling;
(i) electricity; or
(ii) heating or cooling;
(c) the identity, location, type and capacity of the installation where the energy was produced;
(d) whether and to what extent the installation has benefited from investment support, whether and to what extent the unit of energy has benefited in any other way from a national support scheme, and the type of support scheme;
(e) the date on which the installation became operational; and
(f) the date and country of issue and a unique identification number.
(a) Member States shall ensure that transmission system operators and distribution system operators in their territory guarantee the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(b) Member States shall also provide for either priority access or guaranteed access to the grid-system of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(c) Member States shall ensure that when dispatching electricity generating installations, transmission system operators shall give priority to generating installations using renewable energy sources in so far as the secure operation of the national electricity system permits and based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria. Member States shall ensure that appropriate grid and market-related operational measures are taken in order to minimise the curtailment of electricity produced from renewable energy sources. If significant measures are taken to curtail the renewable energy sources in order to guarantee the security of the national electricity system and security of energy supply, Members States shall ensure that the responsible system operators report to the competent regulatory authority on those measures and indicate which corrective measures they intend to take in order to prevent inappropriate curtailments.
(a) a comprehensive and detailed estimate of the costs associated with the connection;
(b) a reasonable and precise timetable for receiving and processing the request for grid connection;
(c) a reasonable indicative timetable for any proposed grid connection.
(a) measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national targets;
(b) measuring compliance with renewable energy obligations;
(c) eligibility for financial support for the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids.
(a) primary forest and other wooded land, namely forest and other wooded land of native species, where there is no clearly visible indication of human activity and the ecological processes are not significantly disturbed;
(b) areas designated:(i)by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or(ii)for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);unless evidence is provided that the production of that raw material did not interfere with those nature protection purposes; (i) by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or (ii) for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);
(i) by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or
(ii) for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);
(i) by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or
(ii) for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);
(c) highly biodiverse grassland that is:(i)natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or(ii)non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status. (i) natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or (ii) non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status.
(i) natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or
(ii) non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status.
(i) natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or
(ii) non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status.
(a) wetlands, namely land that is covered with or saturated by water permanently or for a significant part of the year;
(b) continuously forested areas, namely land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of more than 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ;
(c) land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of between 10 % and 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ, unless evidence is provided that the carbon stock of the area before and after conversion is such that, when the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V is applied, the conditions laid down in paragraph 2 of this Article would be fulfilled.
— Convention concerning Forced or Compulsory Labour (No 29),
— Convention concerning Freedom of Association and Protection of the Right to Organise (No 87),
— Convention concerning the Application of the Principles of the Right to Organise and to Bargain Collectively (No 98),
— Convention concerning Equal Remuneration of Men and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value (No 100),
— Convention concerning the Abolition of Forced Labour (No 105),
— Convention concerning Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation (No 111),
— Convention concerning Minimum Age for Admission to Employment (No 138),
— Convention concerning the Prohibition and Immediate Action for the Elimination of the Worst Forms of Child Labour (No 182).
— the Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety,
— the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora.
(a) allows consignments of raw material or biofuel with differing sustainability characteristics to be mixed;
(b) requires information about the sustainability characteristics and sizes of the consignments referred to in point (a) to remain assigned to the mixture; and
(c) provides for the sum of all consignments withdrawn from the mixture to be described as having the same sustainability characteristics, in the same quantities, as the sum of all consignments added to the mixture.
(a) the effectiveness of the system in place for the provision of information on sustainability criteria; and
(b) whether it is feasible and appropriate to introduce mandatory requirements in relation to air, soil or water protection, taking into account the latest scientific evidence and the Community’s international obligations.
(a) where a default value for greenhouse gas emission saving for the production pathway is laid down in part A or B of Annex V and where theelvalue for those biofuels or bioliquids calculated in accordance with point 7 of part C of Annex V is equal to or less than zero, by using that default value;
(b) by using an actual value calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V; or
(c) by using a value calculated as the sum of the factors of the formula referred to in point 1 of part C of Annex V, where disaggregated default values in part D or E of Annex V may be used for some factors, and actual values, calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V, for all other factors.
(a) cultivated outside the Community;
(b) cultivated in the Community in areas included in the lists referred to in paragraph 2; or
(c) waste or residues other than agricultural, aquaculture and fisheries residues.
— the method of accounting for wastes and residues,
— the method of accounting for co-products,
— the method of accounting for cogeneration, and
— the status given to agricultural crop residues as co-products.
(a) where the contribution of a factor to overall emissions is small, or where there is limited variation, or where the cost or difficulty of establishing actual values is high, default values must be typical of normal production processes;
(b) in all other cases default values must be conservative compared to normal production processes.
(a) the sectoral (electricity, heating and cooling, and transport) and overall shares of energy from renewable sources in the preceding two calendar years and the measures taken or planned at national level to promote the growth of energy from renewable sources taking into account the indicative trajectory in part B of Annex I, in accordance with Article 5;
(b) the introduction and functioning of support schemes and other measures to promote energy from renewable sources, and any developments in the measures used with respect to those set out in the Member State’s national renewable energy action plan, and information on how supported electricity is allocated to final customers for purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(c) how, where applicable, the Member State has structured its support schemes to take into account renewable energy applications that give additional benefits in relation to other, comparable applications, but may also have higher costs, including biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(d) the functioning of the system of guarantees of origin for electricity and heating and cooling from renewable energy sources and the measures taken to ensure the reliability and protection against fraud of the system;
(e) progress made in evaluating and improving administrative procedures to remove regulatory and non-regulatory barriers to the development of energy from renewable sources;
(f) measures taken to ensure the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, and to improve the framework or rules for bearing and sharing of costs referred to in Article 16(3);
(g) developments in the availability and use of biomass resources for energy purposes;
(h) changes in commodity prices and land use within the Member State associated with its increased use of biomass and other forms of energy from renewable sources;
(i) the development and share of biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(j) the estimated impact of the production of biofuels and bioliquids on biodiversity, water resources, water quality and soil quality within the Member State;
(k) the estimated net greenhouse gas emission saving due to the use of energy from renewable sources;
(l) the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States, as well as the estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020;
(m) the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020; and
(n) information on how the share of biodegradable waste in waste used for producing energy has been estimated, and what steps have been taken to improve and verify such estimates.
(a) establish a single administrative body responsible for processing authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and providing assistance to applicants;
(b) provide for automatic approval of planning and permit applications for renewable energy installations where the authorising body has not responded within the set time limits; or
(c) indicate geographical locations suitable for exploitation of energy from renewable sources in land-use planning and for the establishment of district heating and cooling.
(a) the relative environmental benefits and costs of different biofuels, the effects of the Community’s import policies thereon, the security of supply implications and the ways of achieving a balanced approach between domestic production and imports;
(b) the impact of increased demand for biofuel on sustainability in the Community and in third countries, considering economic and environmental impacts, including impacts on biodiversity;
(c) the scope for identifying, in a scientifically objective manner, geographical areas of high biodiversity value that are not covered in Article 17(3);
(d) the impact of increased demand for biomass on biomass using sectors;
(e) the availability of biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material and ligno-cellulosic material; and
(f) indirect land-use changes in relation to all production pathways.
(a) the better use of structural funds and framework programmes;
(b) the better and increased use of funds from the European Investment Bank and other public finance institutions;
(c) better access to risk capital notably by analysing the feasibility of a risk sharing facility for investments in energy from renewable sources in the Community similar to the Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund initiative which is aimed at third countries;
(d) the better coordination of Community and national funding and other forms of support; and
(e) the better coordination in support of renewable energy initiatives whose success depends on action by actors in several Member States.
(a) a review of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving thresholds to apply from the dates referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(2), on the basis of an impact assessment taking into account, in particular, technological developments, available technologies and the availability of first and second-generation bio-fuels with a high level of greenhouse gas emission saving;
(b) with respect to the target referred to in Article 3(4), a review of:(i)the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target;(ii)an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels;(iii)the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices;(iv)the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector;(v)the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels; (i) the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target; (ii) an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels; (iii) the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices; (iv) the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector; (v) the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels;
(i) the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target;
(ii) an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels;
(iii) the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices;
(iv) the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector;
(v) the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels;
(i) the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target;
(ii) an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels;
(iii) the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices;
(iv) the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector;
(v) the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels;
(c) an evaluation of the implementation of this Directive, in particular with regard to cooperation mechanisms, in order to ensure that, together with the possibility for the Members States to continue to use national support schemes referred to in Article 3(3), those mechanisms enable Member States to achieve the national targets defined in Annex I on the best cost-benefit basis, of technological developments, and the conclusions to be drawn to achieve the target of 20 % of energy from renewable sources at Community level.
— for the element contained in point (a), a modification of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving referred to in that point, and
— for the element contained in point (c), appropriate adjustments of the cooperation measures provided for in this Directive in order to improve their effectiveness for achieving the target of 20 %. Such proposals shall neither affect the 20 % target nor Member States’ control over national support schemes and cooperation measures.
(a) the process of preparing forecasts and national renewable energy action plans;
(b) the effectiveness of the cooperation mechanisms;
(c) technological developments in energy from renewable sources, including the development of the use of biofuels in commercial aviation;
(d) the effectiveness of the national support schemes; and
(e) the conclusions of the Commission reports referred to in paragraphs 8 and 9.
(a) Member States’ national renewable energy action plans;
(b) Member States’ forecast documents referred to in Article 4(3), complemented as soon as possible with the Commission’s summary of excess production and estimated import demand;
(c) Member States’ offers to cooperate on statistical transfers or joint projects, upon request of the Member State concerned;
(d) the information referred to in Article 6(2) on the statistical transfers between Member States;
(e) the information referred to in Article 7(2) and (3) and Article 9(4) and (5) on joint projects;
(f) Member States’ national reports referred to in Article 22;
(g) the Commission reports referred to in Article 23(3).
Share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy, 2005 (S2005) Target for share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy, 2020 (S2020)
Belgium 2,2 % 13 %
Bulgaria 9,4 % 16 %
Czech Republic 6,1 % 13 %
Denmark 17,0 % 30 %
Germany 5,8 % 18 %
Estonia 18,0 % 25 %
Ireland 3,1 % 16 %
Greece 6,9 % 18 %
Spain 8,7 % 20 %
France 10,3 % 23 %
Italy 5,2 % 17 %
Cyprus 2,9 % 13 %
Latvia 32,6 % 40 %
Lithuania 15,0 % 23 %
Luxembourg 0,9 % 11 %
Hungary 4,3 % 13 %
Malta 0,0 % 10 %
Netherlands 2,4 % 14 %
Austria 23,3 % 34 %
Poland 7,2 % 15 %
Portugal 20,5 % 31 %
Romania 17,8 % 24 %
Slovenia 16,0 % 25 %
Slovak Republic 6,7 % 14 %
Finland 28,5 % 38 %
Sweden 39,8 % 49 %
United Kingdom 1,3 % 15 %
N = reference year;
QN(norm) = normalised electricity generated by all hydropower plants of the Member State in yearN, for accounting purposes;
Qi = the quantity of electricity actually generated in yeariby all hydropower plants of the Member State measured in GWh, excluding production from pumped storage units using water that has previously been pumped uphill;
Ci = the total installed capacity, net of pumped storage, of all hydropower plants of the Member State at the end of yeari, measured in MW.
N = reference year;
QN(norm) = normalised electricity generated by all wind power plants of the Member State in yearN, for accounting purposes;
Qi = the quantity of electricity actually generated in yeariby all wind power plants of the Member State measured in GWh;
Cj = the total installed capacity of all the wind power plants of the Member State at the end of yearj, measured in MW;
n = 4 or the number of years preceding yearNfor which capacity and production data are available for the Member State in question, whichever is lower.
Fuel Energy content by weight(lower calorific value, MJ/kg) Energy content by volume(lower calorific value, MJ/l)
Bioethanol (ethanol produced from biomass) 27 21
Bio-ETBE (ethyl-tertio-butyl-ether produced on the basis of bioethanol) 36 (of which 37 % from renewable sources) 27 (of which 37 % from renewable sources)
Biomethanol (methanol produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) 20 16
Bio-MTBE (methyl-tertio-butyl-ether produced on the basis of bio-methanol) 35 (of which 22 % from renewable sources) 26 (of which 22 % from renewable sources)
Bio-DME (dimethylether produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) 28 19
Bio-TAEE (tertiary-amyl-ethyl-ether produced on the basis of bioethanol) 38 (of which 29 % from renewable sources) 29 (of which 29 % from renewable sources)
Biobutanol (butanol produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) 33 27
Biodiesel (methyl-ester produced from vegetable or animal oil, of diesel quality, to be used as biofuel) 37 33
Fischer-Tropsch diesel (a synthetic hydrocarbon or mixture of synthetic hydrocarbons produced from biomass) 44 34
Hydrotreated vegetable oil (vegetable oil thermochemically treated with hydrogen) 44 34
Pure vegetable oil (oil produced from oil plants through pressing, extraction or comparable procedures, crude or refined but chemically unmodified, when compatible with the type of engines involved and the corresponding emission requirements) 37 34
Biogas (a fuel gas produced from biomass and/or from the biodegradable fraction of waste, that can be purified to natural gas quality, to be used as biofuel, or wood gas) 50 —
Petrol 43 32
Diesel 43 36
1. The certification or qualification process shall be transparent and clearly defined by the Member State or the administrative body they appoint.
2. Biomass, heat pump, shallow geothermal and solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installers shall be certified by an accredited training programme or training provider.
3. The accreditation of the training programme or provider shall be effected by Member States or administrative bodies they appoint. The accrediting body shall ensure that the training programme offered by the training provider has continuity and regional or national coverage. The training provider shall have adequate technical facilities to provide practical training, including some laboratory equipment or corresponding facilities to provide practical training. The training provider shall also offer in addition to the basic training, shorter refresher courses on topical issues, including on new technologies, to enable life-long learning in installations. The training provider may be the manufacturer of the equipment or system, institutes or associations.
4. The training leading to installer certification or qualification shall include both theoretical and practical parts. At the end of the training, the installer must have the skills required to install the relevant equipment and systems to meet the performance and reliability needs of the customer, incorporate quality craftsmanship, and comply with all applicable codes and standards, including energy and eco-labelling.
5. The training course shall end with an examination leading to a certificate or qualification. The examination shall include a practical assessment of successfully installing biomass boilers or stoves, heat pumps, shallow geothermal installations, solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installations.
6. The certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes referred to in Article 14(3) shall take due account of the following guidelines:(a)Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.(b)The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law.(c)The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.(d)The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.(e)The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification. (a) Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. (i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite; (ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite; (iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or (iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. (b) The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law. (c) The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. (i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF); (ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and (iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. (d) The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. (i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations; (ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration; (iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and (iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. (e) The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification.
(a) Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. (i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite; (ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite; (iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or (iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;
(ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;
(iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or
(iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(b) The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law.
(c) The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. (i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF); (ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and (iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);
(ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and
(iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(d) The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. (i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations; (ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration; (iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and (iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;
(ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;
(iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and
(iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(e) The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification.
(a) Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. (i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite; (ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite; (iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or (iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;
(ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;
(iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or
(iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(i) in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;
(ii) in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;
(iii) in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or
(iv) a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(b) The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law.
(c) The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. (i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF); (ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and (iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);
(ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and
(iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(i) a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);
(ii) an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and
(iii) the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(d) The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. (i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations; (ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration; (iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and (iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;
(ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;
(iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and
(iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(i) the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;
(ii) the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;
(iii) the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and
(iv) for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(e) The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification.
Biofuel production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emission saving Default greenhouse gas emission saving
sugar beet ethanol 61 % 52 %
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) 32 % 16 %
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) 32 % 16 %
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) 45 % 34 %
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 53 % 47 %
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) 69 % 69 %
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 56 % 49 %
sugar cane ethanol 71 % 71 %
the part from renewable sources of ethyl-tertio-butyl-ether (ETBE) Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of tertiary-amyl-ethyl-ether (TAEE) Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel 45 % 38 %
sunflower biodiesel 58 % 51 %
soybean biodiesel 40 % 31 %
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) 36 % 19 %
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) 62 % 56 %
waste vegetable or animal(*1)oil biodiesel 88 % 83 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed 51 % 47 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower 65 % 62 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) 40 % 26 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) 68 % 65 %
pure vegetable oil from rape seed 58 % 57 %
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas 80 % 73 %
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas 84 % 81 %
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas 86 % 82 %
Biofuel production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emission saving Default greenhouse gas emission saving
wheat straw ethanol 87 % 85 %
waste wood ethanol 80 % 74 %
farmed wood ethanol 76 % 70 %
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 95 % 95 %
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 93 % 93 %
waste wood dimethylether (DME) 95 % 95 %
farmed wood DME 92 % 92 %
waste wood methanol 94 % 94 %
farmed wood methanol 91 % 91 %
the part from renewable sources of methyl-tertio-butyl-ether (MTBE) Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
E = total emissions from the use of the fuel;
eec = emissions from the extraction or cultivation of raw materials;
el = annualised emissions from carbon stock changes caused by land-use change;
ep = emissions from processing;
etd = emissions from transport and distribution;
eu = emissions from the fuel in use;
esca = emission saving from soil carbon accumulation via improved agricultural management;
eccs = emission saving from carbon capture and geological storage;
eccr = emission saving from carbon capture and replacement; and
eee = emission saving from excess electricity from cogeneration.
EB = total emissions from the biofuel or bioliquid; and
EF = total emissions from the fossil fuel comparator.
CO2 : 1
N2O : 296
CH4 : 23
el = annualised greenhouse gas emissions from carbon stock change due to land-use change (measured as mass of CO2-equivalent per unit biofuel energy);
CSR = the carbon stock per unit area associated with the reference land use (measured as mass of carbon per unit area, including both soil and vegetation). The reference land use shall be the land use in January 2008 or 20 years before the raw material was obtained, whichever was the later;
CSA = the carbon stock per unit area associated with the actual land use (measured as mass of carbon per unit area, including both soil and vegetation). In cases where the carbon stock accumulates over more than one year, the value attributed toCSAshall be the estimated stock per unit area after 20 years or when the crop reaches maturity, whichever the earlier;
P = the productivity of the crop (measured as biofuel or bioliquid energy per unit area per year); and
eB = bonus of 29 gCO2eq/MJ biofuel or bioliquid if biomass is obtained from restored degraded land under the conditions provided for in point 8.
(a) was not in use for agriculture or any other activity in January 2008; and
(b) falls into one of the following categories:(i)severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use;(ii)heavily contaminated land. (i) severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use; (ii) heavily contaminated land.
(i) severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use;
(ii) heavily contaminated land.
(i) severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use;
(ii) heavily contaminated land.
(a) ‘severely degraded land’ means land that, for a significant period of time, has either been significantly salinated or presented significantly low organic matter content and has been severely eroded;
(b) ‘heavily contaminated land’ means land that is unfit for the cultivation of food and feed due to soil contamination.
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol 12 12
wheat ethanol 23 23
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced 20 20
sugar cane ethanol 14 14
the part from renewable sources of ETBE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel 29 29
sunflower biodiesel 18 18
soybean biodiesel 19 19
palm oil biodiesel 14 14
waste vegetable or animal(*2)oil biodiesel 0 0
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed 30 30
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower 18 18
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil 15 15
pure vegetable oil from rape seed 30 30
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas 0 0
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas 0 0
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas 0 0
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol 19 26
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) 32 45
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) 32 45
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) 21 30
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 14 19
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) 1 1
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 15 21
sugar cane ethanol 1 1
the part from renewable sources of ETBE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel 16 22
sunflower biodiesel 16 22
soybean biodiesel 18 26
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) 35 49
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) 13 18
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel 9 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed 10 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower 10 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) 30 42
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) 7 9
pure vegetable oil from rape seed 4 5
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas 14 20
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas 8 11
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas 8 11
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol 2 2
wheat ethanol 2 2
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced 2 2
sugar cane ethanol 9 9
the part from renewable sources of ETBE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel 1 1
sunflower biodiesel 1 1
soybean biodiesel 13 13
palm oil biodiesel 5 5
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel 1 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed 1 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower 1 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil 5 5
pure vegetable oil from rape seed 1 1
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas 3 3
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas 5 5
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas 4 4
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol 33 40
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) 57 70
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) 57 70
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) 46 55
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 39 44
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) 26 26
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) 37 43
sugar cane ethanol 24 24
the part from renewable sources of ETBE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel 46 52
sunflower biodiesel 35 41
soybean biodiesel 50 58
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) 54 68
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) 32 37
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel 10 14
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed 41 44
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower 29 32
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) 50 62
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) 27 29
pure vegetable oil from rape seed 35 36
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas 17 23
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas 13 16
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas 12 15
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol 3 3
waste wood ethanol 1 1
farmed wood ethanol 6 6
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 1 1
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 4 4
waste wood DME 1 1
farmed wood DME 5 5
waste wood methanol 1 1
farmed wood methanol 5 5
the part from renewable sources of MTBE Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol 5 7
wood ethanol 12 17
wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 0 0
wood DME 0 0
wood methanol 0 0
the part from renewable sources of MTBE Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol 2 2
waste wood ethanol 4 4
farmed wood ethanol 2 2
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 3 3
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 2 2
waste wood DME 4 4
farmed wood DME 2 2
waste wood methanol 4 4
farmed wood methanol 2 2
the part from renewable sources of MTBE Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol 11 13
waste wood ethanol 17 22
farmed wood ethanol 20 25
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 4 4
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel 6 6
waste wood DME 5 5
farmed wood DME 7 7
waste wood methanol 5 5
farmed wood methanol 7 7
the part from renewable sources of MTBE Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
(a) target share of energy from renewable sources in electricity in 2020;
(b) estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in electricity;
(c) target share of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling in 2020;
(d) estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling;
(e) estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in transport;
(f) national indicative trajectory as referred to in Article 3(2) and part B of Annex I.
(a) overview of all policies and measures concerning the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources;
(b) specific measures to fulfil the requirements of Articles 13, 14 and 16, including the need to extend or reinforce existing infrastructure to facilitate the integration of the quantities of energy from renewable sources needed to achieve the 2020 national target, measures to accelerate the authorisation procedures, measures to reduce non-technological barriers and measures concerning Articles 17 to 21;
(c) support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in electricity applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(d) support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(e) support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in transport applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(f) specific measures on the promotion of the use of energy from biomass, especially for new biomass mobilisation taking into account:(i)biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports;(ii)measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors); (i) biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports; (ii) measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors);
(i) biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports;
(ii) measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors);
(i) biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports;
(ii) measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors);
(g) planned use of statistical transfers between Member States and planned participation in joint projects with other Member States and third countries:(i)the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States;(ii)the estimated potential for joint projects;(iii)the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production. (i) the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States; (ii) the estimated potential for joint projects; (iii) the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production.
(i) the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States;
(ii) the estimated potential for joint projects;
(iii) the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production.
(i) the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States;
(ii) the estimated potential for joint projects;
(iii) the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production.
(a) the total contribution expected of each renewable energy technology to meet the mandatory 2020 targets and the indicative trajectory for the shares of energy from renewable sources in electricity, heating and cooling and transport;
(b) the total contribution expected of the energy efficiency and energy saving measures to meet the mandatory 2020 targets and the indicative trajectory for the shares of energy from renewable sources in electricity, heating and cooling and transport.
— Qusable= the estimated total usable heat delivered by heat pumps fulfilling the criteria referred to in Article 5(4), implemented as follows: Only heat pumps for whichSPF > 1,15 * 1/ηshall be taken into account,
— SPF= the estimated average seasonal performance factor for those heat pumps,
— ηis the ratio between total gross production of electricity and the primary energy consumption for electricity production and shall be calculated as an EU average based on Eurostat data.
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 175(1) thereof, and Article 95 thereof in relation to Articles 17, 18 and 19 of this Directive,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions(2),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(3),
(1) The control of European energy consumption and the increased use of energy from renewable sources, together with energy savings and increased energy efficiency, constitute important parts of the package of measures needed to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and comply with the Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, and with further Community and international greenhouse gas emission reduction commitments beyond 2012. Those factors also have an important part to play in promoting the security of energy supply, promoting technological development and innovation and providing opportunities for employment and regional development, especially in rural and isolated areas.
(2) In particular, increasing technological improvements, incentives for the use and expansion of public transport, the use of energy efficiency technologies and the use of energy from renewable sources in transport are some of the most effective tools by which the Community can reduce its dependence on imported oil in the transport sector, in which the security of energy supply problem is most acute, and influence the fuel market for transport.
(3) The opportunities for establishing economic growth through innovation and a sustainable competitive energy policy have been recognised. Production of energy from renewable sources often depends on local or regional small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs). The opportunities for growth and employment that investment in regional and local production of energy from renewable sources bring about in the Member States and their regions are important. The Commission and the Member States should therefore support national and regional development measures in those areas, encourage the exchange of best practices in production of energy from renewable sources between local and regional development initiatives and promote the use of structural funding in this area.
(4) When favouring the development of the market for renewable energy sources, it is necessary to take into account the positive impact on regional and local development opportunities, export prospects, social cohesion and employment opportunities, in particular as concerns SMEs and independent energy producers.
(5) In order to reduce greenhouse gas emissions within the Community and reduce its dependence on energy imports, the development of energy from renewable sources should be closely linked to increased energy efficiency.
(6) It is appropriate to support the demonstration and commercialisation phase of decentralised renewable energy technologies. The move towards decentralised energy production has many benefits, including the utilisation of local energy sources, increased local security of energy supply, shorter transport distances and reduced energy transmission losses. Such decentralisation also fosters community development and cohesion by providing income sources and creating jobs locally.
(7) Directive 2001/77/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 September 2001 on the promotion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources in the internal electricity market(4)and Directive 2003/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 May 2003 on the promotion of the use of biofuels or other renewable fuels for transport(5)established definitions for different types of energy from renewable sources. Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(6)established definitions for the electricity sector in general. In the interests of legal certainty and clarity it is appropriate to use the same or similar definitions in this Directive.
(8) The Commission communication of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Renewable Energy Roadmap — Renewable energies in the 21st century: building a more sustainable future’ demonstrated that a 20 % target for the overall share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport would be appropriate and achievable objectives, and that a framework that includes mandatory targets should provide the business community with the long-term stability it needs to make rational, sustainable investments in the renewable energy sector which are capable of reducing dependence on imported fossil fuels and boosting the use of new energy technologies. Those targets exist in the context of the 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020 set out in the Commission communication of 19 October 2006 entitled ‘Action Plan for Energy Efficiency: Realising the Potential’, which was endorsed by the European Council of March 2007, and by the European Parliament in its resolution of 31 January 2008 on that Action Plan.
(9) The European Council of March 2007 reaffirmed the Community’s commitment to the Community-wide development of energy from renewable sources beyond 2010. It endorsed a mandatory target of a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in overall Community energy consumption by 2020 and a mandatory 10 % minimum target to be achieved by all Member States for the share of biofuels in transport petrol and diesel consumption by 2020, to be introduced in a cost-effective way. It stated that the binding character of the biofuel target is appropriate, subject to production being sustainable, second-generation biofuels becoming commercially available and Directive 98/70/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to the quality of petrol and diesel fuels(7)being amended to allow for adequate levels of blending. The European Council of March 2008 repeated that it is essential to develop and fulfil effective sustainability criteria for biofuels and ensure the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels. The European Council of June 2008 referred again to the sustainability criteria and the development of second-generation biofuels, and underlined the need to assess the possible impacts of biofuel production on agricultural food products and to take action, if necessary, to address shortcomings. It also stated that further assessment should be made of the environmental and social consequences of the production and consumption of biofuels.
(10) In its resolution of 25 September 2007 on the Road Map for Renewable Energy in Europe(8), the European Parliament called on the Commission to present, by the end of 2007, a proposal for a legislative framework for energy from renewable sources, referring to the importance of setting targets for the shares of energy from renewable sources at Community and Member State level.
(11) It is necessary to set transparent and unambiguous rules for calculating the share of energy from renewable sources and for defining those sources. In this context, the energy present in oceans and other water bodies in the form of waves, marine currents, tides, ocean thermal energy gradients or salinity gradients should be included.
(12) The use of agricultural material such as manure, slurry and other animal and organic waste for biogas production has, in view of the high greenhouse gas emission saving potential, significant environmental advantages in terms of heat and power production and its use as biofuel. Biogas installations can, as a result of their decentralised nature and the regional investment structure, contribute significantly to sustainable development in rural areas and offer farmers new income opportunities.
(13) In the light of the positions taken by the European Parliament, the Council and the Commission, it is appropriate to establish mandatory national targets consistent with a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in transport in Community energy consumption by 2020.
(14) The main purpose of mandatory national targets is to provide certainty for investors and to encourage continuous development of technologies which generate energy from all types of renewable sources. Deferring a decision about whether a target is mandatory until a future event takes place is thus not appropriate.
(15) The starting point, the renewable energy potential and the energy mix of each Member State vary. It is therefore necessary to translate the Community 20 % target into individual targets for each Member State, with due regard to a fair and adequate allocation taking account of Member States’ different starting points and potentials, including the existing level of energy from renewable sources and the energy mix. It is appropriate to do this by sharing the required total increase in the use of energy from renewable sources between Member States on the basis of an equal increase in each Member State’s share weighted by their GDP, modulated to reflect their starting points, and by accounting in terms of gross final consumption of energy, with account being taken of Member States’ past efforts with regard to the use of energy from renewable sources.
(16) By contrast, it is appropriate for the 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport to be set at the same level for each Member State in order to ensure consistency in transport fuel specifications and availability. Because transport fuels are traded easily, Member States with low endowments of the relevant resources will easily be able to obtain biofuels from elsewhere. While it would technically be possible for the Community to meet its target for the use of energy from renewable sources in transport solely from domestic production, it is both likely and desirable that the target will in fact be met through a combination of domestic production and imports. To this end, the Commission should monitor the supply of the Community market for biofuels, and should, as appropriate, propose relevant measures to achieve a balanced approach between domestic production and imports, taking into account, inter alia, the development of multilateral and bilateral trade negotiations, environmental, social and economic considerations, and the security of energy supply.
(17) The improvement of energy efficiency is a key objective of the Community, and the aim is to achieve a 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020. That aim, together with existing and future legislation including Directive 2002/91/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2002 on the energy performance of buildings(9), Directive 2005/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 6 July 2005 establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-using products(10), and Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(11), has a critical role to play in ensuring that the climate and energy objectives are being achieved at least cost, and can also provide new opportunities for the European Union’s economy. Energy efficiency and energy saving policies are some of the most effective methods by which Member States can increase the percentage share of energy from renewable sources, and Member States will thus more easily achieve the overall national and transport targets for energy from renewable sources laid down by this Directive.
(18) It will be incumbent upon Member States to make significant improvements in energy efficiency in all sectors in order more easily to achieve their targets for energy from renewable sources, which are expressed as a percentage of gross final consumption of energy. The need for energy efficiency in the transport sector is imperative because a mandatory percentage target for energy from renewable sources is likely to become increasingly difficult to achieve sustainably if overall demand for energy for transport continues to rise. The mandatory 10 % target for transport to be achieved by all Member States should therefore be defined as that share of final energy consumed in transport which is to be achieved from renewable sources as a whole, and not from biofuels alone.
(19) To ensure that the mandatory national overall targets are achieved, Member States should work towards an indicative trajectory tracing a path towards the achievement of their final mandatory targets. They should establish a national renewable energy action plan including information on sectoral targets, while having in mind that there are different uses of biomass and therefore it is essential to mobilise new biomass resources. In addition, Member States should set out measures to achieve those targets. Each Member State should assess, when evaluating its expected gross final consumption of energy in its national renewable energy action plan, the contribution which energy efficiency and energy saving measures can make to achieving its national targets. Member States should take into account the optimal combination of energy efficiency technologies with energy from renewable sources.
(20) To permit the benefits of technological progress and economies of scale to be reaped, the indicative trajectory should take into account the possibility of a more rapid growth in the use of energy from renewable sources in the future. Thus special attention can be given to sectors that suffer disproportionately from the absence of technological progress and economies of scale and therefore remain under-developed, but which, in future, could significantly contribute to reaching the targets for 2020.
(21) The indicative trajectory should take 2005 as its starting point because that is the latest year for which reliable data on national shares of energy from renewable sources are available.
(22) The achievement of the objectives of this Directive requires that the Community and Member States dedicate a significant amount of financial resources to research and development in relation to renewable energy technologies. In particular, the European Institute of Innovation and Technology should give high priority to the research and development of renewable energy technologies.
(23) Member States may encourage local and regional authorities to set targets in excess of national targets and to involve local and regional authorities in drawing up national renewable energy action plans and in raising awareness of the benefits of energy from renewable sources.
(24) In order to exploit the full potential of biomass, the Community and the Member States should promote greater mobilisation of existing timber reserves and the development of new forestry systems.
(25) Member States have different renewable energy potentials and operate different schemes of support for energy from renewable sources at the national level. The majority of Member States apply support schemes that grant benefits solely to energy from renewable sources that is produced on their territory. For the proper functioning of national support schemes it is vital that Member States can control the effect and costs of their national support schemes according to their different potentials. One important means to achieve the aim of this Directive is to guarantee the proper functioning of national support schemes, as under Directive 2001/77/EC, in order to maintain investor confidence and allow Member States to design effective national measures for target compliance. This Directive aims at facilitating cross-border support of energy from renewable sources without affecting national support schemes. It introduces optional cooperation mechanisms between Member States which allow them to agree on the extent to which one Member State supports the energy production in another and on the extent to which the energy production from renewable sources should count towards the national overall target of one or the other. In order to ensure the effectiveness of both measures of target compliance, i.e. national support schemes and cooperation mechanisms, it is essential that Member States are able to determine if and to what extent their national support schemes apply to energy from renewable sources produced in other Member States and to agree on this by applying the cooperation mechanisms provided for in this Directive.
(26) It is desirable that energy prices reflect external costs of energy production and consumption, including, as appropriate, environmental, social and healthcare costs.
(27) Public support is necessary to reach the Community’s objectives with regard to the expansion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, in particular for as long as electricity prices in the internal market do not reflect the full environmental and social costs and benefits of energy sources used.
(28) The Community and the Member States should strive to reduce total consumption of energy in transport and increase energy efficiency in transport. The principal means of reducing consumption of energy in transport include transport planning, support for public transport, increasing the share of electric cars in production and producing cars which are more energy efficient and smaller both in size and in engine capacity.
(29) Member States should aim to diversify the mix of energy from renewable sources in all transport sectors. The Commission should present a report to the European Parliament and the Council by 1 June 2015 outlining the potential for increasing the use of energy from renewable sources in each transport sector.
(30) In calculating the contribution of hydropower and wind power for the purposes of this Directive, the effects of climatic variation should be smoothed through the use of a normalisation rule. Further, electricity produced in pumped storage units from water that has previously been pumped uphill should not be considered to be electricity produced from renewable energy sources.
(31) Heat pumps enabling the use of aerothermal, geothermal or hydrothermal heat at a useful temperature level need electricity or other auxiliary energy to function. The energy used to drive heat pumps should therefore be deducted from the total usable heat. Only heat pumps with an output that significantly exceeds the primary energy needed to drive it should be taken into account.
(32) Passive energy systems use building design to harness energy. This is considered to be saved energy. To avoid double counting, energy harnessed in this way should not be taken into account for the purposes of this Directive.
(33) Some Member States have a large share of aviation in their gross final consumption of energy. In view of the current technological and regulatory constraints that prevent the commercial use of biofuels in aviation, it is appropriate to provide a partial exemption for such Member States, by excluding from the calculation of their gross final consumption of energy in national air transport, the amount by which they exceed one-and-a-half times the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005, as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 6,18 %. Cyprus and Malta, due to their insular and peripheral character, rely on aviation as a mode of transport, which is essential for their citizens and their economy. As a result, Cyprus and Malta have a gross final consumption of energy in national air transport which is disproportionally high, i.e. more than three times the Community average in 2005, and are thus disproportionately affected by the current technological and regulatory constraints. For those Member States it is therefore appropriate to provide that the exemption should cover the amount by which they exceed the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005 as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 4,12 %.
(34) To obtain an energy model that supports energy from renewable sources there is a need to encourage strategic cooperation between Member States, involving, as appropriate, regions and local authorities.
(35) Whilst having due regard to the provisions of this Directive, Member States should be encouraged to pursue all appropriate forms of cooperation in relation to the objectives set out in this Directive. Such cooperation can take place at all levels, bilaterally or multilaterally. Apart from the mechanisms with effect on target calculation and target compliance, which are exclusively provided for in this Directive, namely statistical transfers between Member States, joint projects and joint support schemes, cooperation can also take the form of, for example, exchanges of information and best practices, as provided for, in particular, in the transparency platform established by this Directive, and other voluntary coordination between all types of support schemes.
(36) To create opportunities for reducing the cost of achieving the targets laid down in this Directive, it is appropriate both to facilitate the consumption in Member States of energy produced from renewable sources in other Member States, and to enable Member States to count energy from renewable sources consumed in other Member States towards their own national targets. For this reason, flexibility measures are required, but they remain under Member States’ control in order not to affect their ability to reach their national targets. Those flexibility measures take the form of statistical transfers, joint projects between Member States or joint support schemes.
(37) It should be possible for imported electricity, produced from renewable energy sources outside the Community, to count towards Member States’ targets. However, to avoid a net increase in greenhouse gas emissions through the diversion of existing renewable sources and their complete or partial replacement by conventional energy sources, only electricity produced by renewable energy installations that become operational after the entry into force of this Directive or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date should be eligible to be counted. In order to guarantee an adequate effect of energy from renewable sources replacing conventional energy in the Community as well as in third countries it is appropriate to ensure that such imports can be tracked and accounted for in a reliable way. Agreements with third countries concerning the organisation of such trade in electricity from renewable energy sources will be considered. If, by virtue of a decision taken under the Energy Community Treaty(12)to that effect, the contracting parties to that treaty become bound by the relevant provisions of this Directive, the measures of cooperation between Member States provided for in this Directive will be applicable to them.
(38) When Member States undertake joint projects with one or more third countries regarding the production of electricity from renewable energy sources, it is appropriate that those joint projects relate only to newly constructed installations or to installations with newly increased capacity. This will help ensure that the proportion of energy from renewable sources in the third country’s total energy consumption is not reduced due to the importation of energy from renewable sources into the Community. In addition, the Member States concerned should facilitate the domestic use by the third country concerned of part of the production of electricity by the installations covered by the joint project. Furthermore, the third country concerned should be encouraged by the Commission and Member States to develop a renewable energy policy, including ambitious targets.
(39) Noting that projects of high European interest in third countries, such as the Mediterranean Solar Plan, may need a long lead-time before being fully interconnected to the territory of the Community, it is appropriate to facilitate their development by allowing Member States to take into account in their national targets a limited amount of electricity produced by such projects during the construction of the interconnection.
(40) The procedure used by the administration responsible for supervising the authorisation, certification and licensing of renewable energy plants should be objective, transparent, non-discriminatory and proportionate when applying the rules to specific projects. In particular, it is appropriate to avoid any unnecessary burden that could arise by classifying renewable energy projects under installations which represent a high health risk.
(41) The lack of transparent rules and coordination between the different authorisation bodies has been shown to hinder the deployment of energy from renewable sources. Therefore the specific structure of the renewable energy sector should be taken into account when national, regional and local authorities review their administrative procedures for giving permission to construct and operate plants and associated transmission and distribution network infrastructures for the production of electricity, heating and cooling or transport fuels from renewable energy sources. Administrative approval procedures should be streamlined with transparent timetables for installations using energy from renewable sources. Planning rules and guidelines should be adapted to take into consideration cost-effective and environmentally beneficial renewable heating and cooling and electricity equipment.
(42) For the benefit of rapid deployment of energy from renewable sources and in view of their overall high sustainable and environmental beneficial quality, Member States should, when applying administrative rules, planning structures and legislation which are designed for licensing installations with respect to pollution reduction and control for industrial plants, for combating air pollution and for the prevention or minimisation of the discharge of dangerous substances in the environment, take into account the contribution of renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(43) In order to stimulate the contribution by individual citizens to the objectives set out in this Directive, the relevant authorities should consider the possibility of replacing authorisations by simple notifications to the competent body when installing small decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources.
(44) The coherence between the objectives of this Directive and the Community’s other environmental legislation should be ensured. In particular, during the assessment, planning or licensing procedures for renewable energy installations, Member States should take account of all Community environmental legislation and the contribution made by renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(45) National technical specifications and other requirements falling within the scope of Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 laying down a procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and rules on Information Society services(13), relating for example to levels of quality, testing methods or conditions of use, should not create barriers for trade in renewable energy equipment and systems. Therefore, support schemes for energy from renewable sources should not prescribe national technical specifications which deviate from existing Community standards or require the supported equipment or systems to be certified or tested in a specified location or by a specified entity.
(46) It is appropriate for Member States to consider mechanisms for the promotion of district heating and cooling from energy from renewable sources.
(47) At national and regional level, rules and obligations for minimum requirements for the use of energy from renewable sources in new and renovated buildings have led to considerable increases in the use of energy from renewable sources. Those measures should be encouraged in a wider Community context, while promoting the use of more energy-efficient applications of energy from renewable sources through building regulations and codes.
(48) It may be appropriate for Member States, in order to facilitate and accelerate the setting of minimum levels for the use of energy from renewable sources in buildings, to provide that such levels are achieved by incorporating a factor for energy from renewable sources in meeting minimum energy performance requirements under Directive 2002/91/EC, relating to a cost-optimal reduction of carbon emissions per building.
(49) Information and training gaps, especially in the heating and cooling sector, should be removed in order to encourage the deployment of energy from renewable sources.
(50) In so far as the access or pursuit of the profession of installer is a regulated profession, the preconditions for the recognition of professional qualifications are laid down in Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications(14). This Directive therefore applies without prejudice to Directive 2005/36/EC.
(51) While Directive 2005/36/EC lays down requirements for the mutual recognition of professional qualifications, including for architects, there is a further need to ensure that architects and planners properly consider an optimal combination of renewable energy sources and high-efficiency technologies in their plans and designs. Member States should therefore provide clear guidance in this regard. This should be done without prejudice to the provisions of Directive 2005/36/EC and in particular Articles 46 and 49 thereof.
(52) Guarantees of origin issued for the purpose of this Directive have the sole function of proving to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources. A guarantee of origin can be transferred, independently of the energy to which it relates, from one holder to another. However, with a view to ensuring that a unit of electricity from renewable energy sources is disclosed to a customer only once, double counting and double disclosure of guarantees of origin should be avoided. Energy from renewable sources in relation to which the accompanying guarantee of origin has been sold separately by the producer should not be disclosed or sold to the final customer as energy from renewable sources. It is important to distinguish between green certificates used for support schemes and guarantees of origin.
(53) It is appropriate to allow the emerging consumer market for electricity from renewable energy sources to contribute to the construction of new installations for energy from renewable sources. Member States should therefore be able to require electricity suppliers who disclose their energy mix to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, to include a minimum percentage of guarantees of origin from recently constructed installations producing energy from renewable sources, provided that such a requirement is in conformity with Community law.
(54) It is important to provide information on how the supported electricity is allocated to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC. In order to improve the quality of that information to consumers, in particular as regards the amount of energy from renewable sources produced by new installations, the Commission should assess the effectiveness of the measures taken by Member States.
(55) Directive 2004/8/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 February 2004 on the promotion of cogeneration based on a useful heat demand in the internal energy market(15)provides for guarantees of origin for proving the origin of electricity produced from high-efficiency cogeneration plants. Such guarantees of origin cannot be used when disclosing the use of energy from renewable sources in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC as this might result in double counting and double disclosure.
(56) Guarantees of origin do not by themselves confer a right to benefit from national support schemes.
(57) There is a need to support the integration of energy from renewable sources into the transmission and distribution grid and the use of energy storage systems for integrated intermittent production of energy from renewable sources.
(58) The development of renewable energy projects, including renewable energy projects of European interest under the Trans-European Network for Energy (TEN-E) programme should be accelerated. To that end, the Commission should also analyse how the financing of such projects can be improved. Particular attention should be paid to renewable energy projects that will contribute to a significant increase in security of energy supply in the Community and neighbouring countries.
(59) Interconnection among countries facilitates integration of electricity from renewable energy sources. Besides smoothing out variability, interconnection can reduce balancing costs, encourage true competition bringing about lower prices, and support the development of networks. Also, the sharing and optimal use of transmission capacity could help avoid excessive need for newly built capacity.
(60) Priority access and guaranteed access for electricity from renewable energy sources are important for integrating renewable energy sources into the internal market in electricity, in line with Article 11(2) and developing further Article 11(3) of Directive 2003/54/EC. Requirements relating to the maintenance of the reliability and safety of the grid and to the dispatching may differ according to the characteristics of the national grid and its secure operation. Priority access to the grid provides an assurance given to connected generators of electricity from renewable energy sources that they will be able to sell and transmit the electricity from renewable energy sources in accordance with connection rules at all times, whenever the source becomes available. In the event that the electricity from renewable energy sources is integrated into the spot market, guaranteed access ensures that all electricity sold and supported obtains access to the grid, allowing the use of a maximum amount of electricity from renewable energy sources from installations connected to the grid. However, this does not imply any obligation on the part of Member States to support or introduce purchase obligations for energy from renewable sources. In other systems, a fixed price is defined for electricity from renewable energy sources, usually in combination with a purchase obligation for the system operator. In such a case, priority access has already been given.
(61) In certain circumstances it is not possible fully to ensure transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. In such circumstances it may be appropriate for financial compensation to be given to those producers. Nevertheless, the objectives of this Directive require a sustained increase in the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. To this end, Member States should take appropriate measures in order to allow a higher penetration of electricity from renewable energy sources, inter alia, by taking into account the specificities of variable resources and resources which are not yet storable. To the extent required by the objectives set out in this Directive, the connection of new renewable energy installations should be allowed as soon as possible. In order to accelerate grid connection procedures, Member States may provide for priority connection or reserved connection capacities for new installations producing electricity from renewable energy sources.
(62) The costs of connecting new producers of electricity and gas from renewable energy sources to the electricity and gas grids should be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory and due account should be taken of the benefit that embedded producers of electricity from renewable energy sources and local producers of gas from renewable sources bring to the electricity and gas grids.
(63) Electricity producers who want to exploit the potential of energy from renewable sources in the peripheral regions of the Community, in particular in island regions and regions of low population density, should, whenever feasible, benefit from reasonable connection costs in order to ensure that they are not unfairly disadvantaged in comparison with producers situated in more central, more industrialised and more densely populated areas.
(64) Directive 2001/77/EC lays down the framework for the integration into the grid of electricity from renewable energy sources. However, there is a significant variation between Member States in the degree of integration actually achieved. For this reason it is necessary to strengthen the framework and to review its application periodically at national level.
(65) Biofuel production should be sustainable. Biofuels used for compliance with the targets laid down in this Directive, and those that benefit from national support schemes, should therefore be required to fulfil sustainability criteria.
(66) The Community should take appropriate steps in the context of this Directive, including the promotion of sustainability criteria for biofuels and the development of second and third-generation biofuels in the Community and worldwide, and to strengthen agricultural research and knowledge creation in those areas.
(67) The introduction of sustainability criteria for biofuels will not achieve its objective if those products that do not fulfil the criteria and would otherwise have been used as biofuels are used, instead, as bioliquids in the heating or electricity sectors. For this reason, the sustainability criteria should also apply to bioliquids in general.
(68) The European Council of March 2007 invited the Commission to propose a comprehensive Directive on the use of all renewable energy sources, which could contain criteria and provisions to ensure sustainable provision and use of bioenergy. Such sustainability criteria should form a coherent part of a wider scheme covering all bioliquids and not biofuels alone. Such sustainability criteria should therefore be included in this Directive. In order to ensure a coherent approach between energy and environment policies, and to avoid the additional costs to business and the environmental incoherence that would be associated with an inconsistent approach, it is essential to provide the same sustainability criteria for the use of biofuels for the purposes of this Directive on the one hand, and Directive 98/70/EC on the other. For the same reasons, double reporting should be avoided in this context. Furthermore, the Commission and the competent national authorities should coordinate their activities in the framework of a committee specifically responsible for sustainability aspects. The Commission should, in addition, in 2009, review the possible inclusion of other biomass applications and the modalities relating thereto.
(69) The increasing worldwide demand for biofuels and bioliquids, and the incentives for their use provided for in this Directive, should not have the effect of encouraging the destruction of biodiverse lands. Those finite resources, recognised in various international instruments to be of value to all mankind, should be preserved. Consumers in the Community would, in addition, find it morally unacceptable that their increased use of biofuels and bioliquids could have the effect of destroying biodiverse lands. For these reasons, it is necessary to provide sustainability criteria ensuring that biofuels and bioliquids can qualify for the incentives only when it can be guaranteed that they do not originate in biodiverse areas or, in the case of areas designated for nature protection purposes or for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species, the relevant competent authority demonstrates that the production of the raw material does not interfere with those purposes. The sustainability criteria should consider forest as biodiverse where it is a primary forest in accordance with the definition used by the Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations (FAO) in its Global Forest Resource Assessment, which countries use worldwide to report on the extent of primary forest or where it is protected by national nature protection law. Areas where collection of non-wood forest products occurs should be included, provided the human impact is small. Other types of forests as defined by the FAO, such as modified natural forests, semi-natural forests and plantations, should not be considered as primary forests. Having regard, furthermore, to the highly biodiverse nature of certain grasslands, both temperate and tropical, including highly biodiverse savannahs, steppes, scrublands and prairies, biofuels made from raw materials originating in such lands should not qualify for the incentives provided for by this Directive. The Commission should establish appropriate criteria and geographical ranges to define such highly biodiverse grasslands in accordance with the best available scientific evidence and relevant international standards.
(70) If land with high stocks of carbon in its soil or vegetation is converted for the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels or bioliquids, some of the stored carbon will generally be released into the atmosphere, leading to the formation of carbon dioxide. The resulting negative greenhouse gas impact can offset the positive greenhouse gas impact of the biofuels or bioliquids, in some cases by a wide margin. The full carbon effects of such conversion should therefore be accounted for in calculating the greenhouse gas emission saving of particular biofuels and bioliquids. This is necessary to ensure that the greenhouse gas emission saving calculation takes into account the totality of the carbon effects of the use of biofuels and bioliquids.
(71) In calculating the greenhouse gas impact of land conversion, economic operators should be able to use actual values for the carbon stocks associated with the reference land use and the land use after conversion. They should also be able to use standard values. The work of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change is the appropriate basis for such standard values. That work is not currently expressed in a form that is immediately applicable by economic operators. The Commission should therefore produce guidance drawing on that work to serve as the basis for the calculation of carbon stock changes for the purposes of this Directive, including such changes to forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 to 30 %, savannahs, scrublands and prairies.
(72) It is appropriate for the Commission to develop methodologies with a view to assessing the impact of the drainage of peatlands on greenhouse gas emissions.
(73) Land should not be converted for the production of biofuels if its carbon stock loss upon conversion could not, within a reasonable period, taking into account the urgency of tackling climate change, be compensated by the greenhouse gas emission saving resulting from the production of biofuels or bioliquids. This would prevent unnecessary, burdensome research by economic operators and the conversion of high-carbon-stock land that would prove to be ineligible for producing raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids. Inventories of worldwide carbon stocks indicate that wetlands and continuously forested areas with a canopy cover of more than 30 % should be included in that category. Forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 and 30 % should also be included, unless there is evidence demonstrating that their carbon stock is sufficiently low to justify their conversion in accordance with the rules laid down in this Directive. The reference to wetlands should take into account the definition laid down in the Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, especially as Waterfowl Habitat, adopted on 2 February 1971 in Ramsar.
(74) The incentives provided for in this Directive will encourage increased production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide. Where biofuels and bioliquids are made from raw material produced within the Community, they should also comply with Community environmental requirements for agriculture, including those concerning the protection of groundwater and surface water quality, and with social requirements. However, there is a concern that production of biofuels and bioliquids in certain third countries might not respect minimum environmental or social requirements. It is therefore appropriate to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that cover key environmental and social considerations, in order to promote the production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide in a sustainable manner. In the absence of such agreements or schemes, Member States should require economic operators to report on those issues.
(75) The requirements for a sustainability scheme for energy uses of biomass, other than bioliquids and biofuels, should be analysed by the Commission in 2009, taking into account the need for biomass resources to be managed in a sustainable manner.
(76) Sustainability criteria will be effective only if they lead to changes in the behaviour of market actors. Those changes will occur only if biofuels and bioliquids meeting those criteria command a price premium compared to those that do not. According to the mass balance method of verifying compliance, there is a physical link between the production of biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria and the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids in the Community, providing an appropriate balance between supply and demand and ensuring a price premium that is greater than in systems where there is no such link. To ensure that biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria can be sold at a higher price, the mass balance method should therefore be used to verify compliance. This should maintain the integrity of the system while at the same time avoiding the imposition of an unreasonable burden on industry. Other verification methods should, however, be reviewed.
(77) Where appropriate, the Commission should take due account of the Millennium Ecosystem Assessment which contains useful data for the conservation of at least those areas that provide basic ecosystem services in critical situations such as watershed protection and erosion control.
(78) It is appropriate to monitor the impact of biomass cultivation, such as through land-use changes, including displacement, the introduction of invasive alien species and other effects on biodiversity, and effects on food production and local prosperity. The Commission should consider all relevant sources of information, including the FAO hunger map. Biofuels should be promoted in a manner that encourages greater agricultural productivity and the use of degraded land.
(79) It is in the interests of the Community to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that set standards for the production of sustainable biofuels and bioliquids, and that certify that the production of biofuels and bioliquids meets those standards. For that reason, provision should be made for such agreements or schemes to be recognised as providing reliable evidence and data, provided that they meet adequate standards of reliability, transparency and independent auditing.
(80) It is necessary to lay down clear rules for the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions from biofuels and bioliquids and their fossil fuel comparators.
(81) Co-products from the production and use of fuels should be taken into account in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions. The substitution method is appropriate for the purposes of policy analysis, but not for the regulation of individual economic operators and individual consignments of transport fuels. In those cases the energy allocation method is the most appropriate method, as it is easy to apply, is predictable over time, minimises counter-productive incentives and produces results that are generally comparable with those produced by the substitution method. For the purposes of policy analysis the Commission should also, in its reporting, present results using the substitution method.
(82) In order to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, a list of default values should be laid down for common biofuel production pathways and that list should be updated and expanded when further reliable data is available. Economic operators should always be entitled to claim the level of greenhouse gas emission saving for biofuels and bioliquids established by that list. Where the default value for greenhouse gas emission saving from a production pathway lies below the required minimum level of greenhouse gas emission saving, producers wishing to demonstrate their compliance with this minimum level should be required to show that actual emissions from their production process are lower than those that were assumed in the calculation of the default values.
(83) It is appropriate for the data used in the calculation of the default values to be obtained from independent, scientifically expert sources and to be updated as appropriate as those sources progress their work. The Commission should encourage those sources to address, when they update their work, emissions from cultivation, the effect of regional and climatological conditions, the effects of cultivation using sustainable agricultural and organic farming methods, and the scientific contribution of producers, within the Community and in third countries, and civil society.
(84) In order to avoid encouraging the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids in places where this would lead to high greenhouse gas emissions, the use of default values for cultivation should be limited to regions where such an effect can reliably be ruled out. However, to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, it is appropriate for Member States to establish national or regional averages for emissions from cultivation, including from fertiliser use.
(85) Global demand for agricultural commodities is growing. Part of that increased demand will be met through an increase in the amount of land devoted to agriculture. The restoration of land that has been severely degraded or heavily contaminated and therefore cannot be used, in its present state, for agricultural purposes is a way of increasing the amount of land available for cultivation. The sustainability scheme should promote the use of restored degraded land because the promotion of biofuels and bioliquids will contribute to the growth in demand for agricultural commodities. Even if biofuels themselves are made using raw materials from land already in arable use, the net increase in demand for crops caused by the promotion of biofuels could lead to a net increase in the cropped area. This could affect high carbon stock land, which would result in damaging carbon stock losses. To alleviate that risk, it is appropriate to introduce accompanying measures to encourage an increased rate of productivity on land already used for crops, the use of degraded land, and the adoption of sustainability requirements, comparable to those laid down in this Directive for Community biofuel consumption, in other biofuel-consuming countries. The Commission should develop a concrete methodology to minimise greenhouse gas emissions caused by indirect land-use changes. To this end, the Commission should analyse, on the basis of best available scientific evidence, in particular, the inclusion of a factor for indirect land-use changes in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions and the need to incentivise sustainable biofuels which minimise the impacts of land-use change and improve biofuel sustainability with respect to indirect land-use change. In developing that methodology, the Commission should address, inter alia, the potential indirect land-use changes resulting from biofuels produced from non-food cellulosic material and from ligno-cellulosic material.
(86) In order to permit the achievement of an adequate market share of biofuels, it is necessary to ensure the placing on the market of higher blends of biodiesel in diesel than those envisaged by standard EN590/2004.
(87) In order to ensure that biofuels that diversify the range of feedstocks used become commercially viable, those biofuels should receive an extra weighting under national biofuel obligations.
(88) Regular reporting is needed to ensure a continuing focus on progress in the development of energy from renewable sources at national and Community level. It is appropriate to require the use of a harmonised template for national renewable energy action plans which Member States should submit. Such plans could include estimated costs and benefits of the measures envisaged, measures relating to the necessary extension or reinforcement of the existing grid infrastructure, estimated costs and benefits to develop energy from renewable sources in excess of the level required by the indicative trajectory, information on national support schemes and information on their use of energy from renewable sources in new or renovated buildings.
(89) When designing their support systems, Member States may encourage the use of biofuels which give additional benefits, including the benefits of diversification offered by biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material, ligno-cellulosic material and algae, as well as non-irrigated plants grown in arid areas to fight desertification, by taking due account of the different costs of producing energy from traditional biofuels on the one hand and of those biofuels that give additional benefits on the other. Member States may encourage investment in research and development in relation to those and other renewable energy technologies that need time to become competitive.
(90) The implementation of this Directive should reflect, where relevant, the provisions of the Convention on Access to Information, Public Participation in Decision-Making and Access to Justice in Environmental Matters, in particular as implemented through Directive 2003/4/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 28 January 2003 on public access to environmental information(16).
(91) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(17).
(92) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adapt the methodological principles and values necessary for assessing whether sustainability criteria have been fulfilled in relation to biofuels and bioliquids, to adapt the energy content of transport fuels to technical and scientific progress, to establish criteria and geographic ranges for determining highly biodiverse grassland, and to establish detailed definitions for severely degraded or contaminated land. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, inter alia, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(93) Those provisions of Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC that overlap with the provisions of this Directive should be deleted from the latest possible moment for transposition of this Directive. Those that deal with targets and reporting for 2010 should remain in force until the end of 2011. It is therefore necessary to amend Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC accordingly.
(94) Since the measures provided for in Articles 17 to 19 also have an effect on the functioning of the internal market by harmonising the sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids for the target accounting purposes under this Directive, and thus facilitate, in accordance with Article 17(8), trade between Member States in biofuels and bioliquids which comply with those conditions, they are based on Article 95 of the Treaty.
(95) The sustainability scheme should not prevent Member States from taking into account, in their national support schemes, the higher production cost of biofuels and bioliquids that deliver benefits that exceed the minima laid down in the sustainability scheme.
(96) Since the general objectives of this Directive, namely to achieve a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in each Member State’s transport energy consumption by 2020, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(97) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional agreement on better law-making(18), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures and to make them public,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Subject matter and scope
Article 1
This Directive establishes a common framework for the promotion of energy from renewable sources. It sets mandatory national targets for the overall share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy and for the share of energy from renewable sources in transport. It lays down rules relating to statistical transfers between Member States, joint projects between Member States and with third countries, guarantees of origin, administrative procedures, information and training, and access to the electricity grid for energy from renewable sources. It establishes sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids.

Definitions
Article 2
For the purposes of this Directive, the definitions in Directive 2003/54/EC apply.
The following definitions also apply:
(a)
‘energy from renewable sources’ means energy from renewable non-fossil sources, namely wind, solar, aerothermal, geothermal, hydrothermal and ocean energy, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases;
(b)
‘aerothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in the ambient air;
(c)
‘geothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat beneath the surface of solid earth;
(d)
‘hydrothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in surface water;
(e)
‘biomass’ means the biodegradable fraction of products, waste and residues from biological origin from agriculture (including vegetal and animal substances), forestry and related industries including fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the biodegradable fraction of industrial and municipal waste;
(f)
‘gross final consumption of energy’ means the energy commodities delivered for energy purposes to industry, transport, households, services including public services, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, including the consumption of electricity and heat by the energy branch for electricity and heat production and including losses of electricity and heat in distribution and transmission;
(g)
‘district heating’ or ‘district cooling’ means the distribution of thermal energy in the form of steam, hot water or chilled liquids, from a central source of production through a network to multiple buildings or sites, for the use of space or process heating or cooling;
(h)
‘bioliquids’ means liquid fuel for energy purposes other than for transport, including electricity and heating and cooling, produced from biomass;
(i)
‘biofuels’ means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport produced from biomass;
(j)
‘guarantee of origin’ means an electronic document which has the sole function of providing proof to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources as required by Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(k)
‘support scheme’ means any instrument, scheme or mechanism applied by a Member State or a group of Member States, that promotes the use of energy from renewable sources by reducing the cost of that energy, increasing the price at which it can be sold, or increasing, by means of a renewable energy obligation or otherwise, the volume of such energy purchased. This includes, but is not restricted to, investment aid, tax exemptions or reductions, tax refunds, renewable energy obligation support schemes including those using green certificates, and direct price support schemes including feed-in tariffs and premium payments;
(l)
‘renewable energy obligation’ means a national support scheme requiring energy producers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their production, requiring energy suppliers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their supply, or requiring energy consumers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their consumption. This includes schemes under which such requirements may be fulfilled by using green certificates;
(m)
‘actual value’ means the greenhouse gas emission saving for some or all of the steps of a specific biofuel production process calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V;
(n)
‘typical value’ means an estimate of the representative greenhouse gas emission saving for a particular biofuel production pathway;
(o)
‘default value’ means a value derived from a typical value by the application of pre-determined factors and that may, in circumstances specified in this Directive, be used in place of an actual value.

Mandatory national overall targets and measures for the use of energy from renewable sources
Article 3
1. Each Member State shall ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources, calculated in accordance with Articles 5 to 11, in gross final consumption of energy in 2020 is at least its national overall target for the share of energy from renewable sources in that year, as set out in the third column of the table in part A of Annex I. Such mandatory national overall targets are consistent with a target of at least a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy in 2020. In order to achieve the targets laid down in this Article more easily, each Member State shall promote and encourage energy efficiency and energy saving.
2. Member States shall introduce measures effectively designed to ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources equals or exceeds that shown in the indicative trajectory set out in part B of Annex I.
3. In order to reach the targets set in paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article Member States may, inter alia, apply the following measures:
(a)
support schemes;
(b)
measures of cooperation between different Member States and with third countries for achieving their national overall targets in accordance with Articles 5 to 11.
Without prejudice to Articles 87 and 88 of the Treaty, Member States shall have the right to decide, in accordance with Articles 5 to 11 of this Directive, to which extent they support energy from renewable sources which is produced in a different Member State.
4. Each Member State shall ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources in all forms of transport in 2020 is at least 10 % of the final consumption of energy in transport in that Member State.
For the purposes of this paragraph, the following provisions shall apply:
(a)
for the calculation of the denominator, that is the total amount of energy consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, only petrol, diesel, biofuels consumed in road and rail transport, and electricity shall be taken into account;
(b)
for the calculation of the numerator, that is the amount of energy from renewable sources consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, all types of energy from renewable sources consumed in all forms of transport shall be taken into account;
(c)
for the calculation of the contribution from electricity produced from renewable sources and consumed in all types of electric vehicles for the purpose of points (a) and (b), Member States may choose to use either the average share of electricity from renewable energy sources in the Community or the share of electricity from renewable energy sources in their own country as measured two years before the year in question. Furthermore, for the calculation of the electricity from renewable energy sources consumed by electric road vehicles, that consumption shall be considered to be 2,5 times the energy content of the input of electricity from renewable energy sources.
By 31 December 2011, the Commission shall present, if appropriate, a proposal permitting, subject to certain conditions, the whole amount of the electricity originating from renewable sources used to power all types of electric vehicles to be considered.
By 31 December 2011, the Commission shall also present, if appropriate, a proposal for a methodology for calculating the contribution of hydrogen originating from renewable sources in the total fuel mix.

National renewable energy action plans
Article 4
1. Each Member State shall adopt a national renewable energy action plan. The national renewable energy action plans shall set out Member States’ national targets for the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in transport, electricity and heating and cooling in 2020, taking into account the effects of other policy measures relating to energy efficiency on final consumption of energy, and adequate measures to be taken to achieve those national overall targets, including cooperation between local, regional and national authorities, planned statistical transfers or joint projects, national policies to develop existing biomass resources and mobilise new biomass resources for different uses, and the measures to be taken to fulfil the requirements of Articles 13 to 19.
By 30 June 2009, the Commission shall adopt a template for the national renewable energy action plans. That template shall comprise the minimum requirements set out in Annex VI. Member States shall comply with that template in the presentation of their national renewable energy action plans.
2. Member States shall notify their national renewable energy action plans to the Commission by 30 June 2010.
3. Each Member State shall publish and notify to the Commission, six months before its national renewable energy action plan is due, a forecast document indicating:
(a)
its estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States in accordance with Articles 6 to 11, as well as its estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020; and
(b)
its estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020.
That information may include elements relating to cost and benefits and financing. That forecast shall be updated in the reports of the Member States as set out in Article 22(1)(l) and (m).
4. A Member State whose share of energy from renewable sources fell below the indicative trajectory in the immediately preceding two-year period set out in part B of Annex I, shall submit an amended national renewable energy action plan to the Commission by 30 June of the following year, setting out adequate and proportionate measures to rejoin, within a reasonable timetable, the indicative trajectory in part B of Annex I.
The Commission may, if the Member State has not met the indicative trajectory by a limited margin, and taking due account of the current and future measures taken by the Member State, adopt a decision to release the Member State from the obligation to submit an amended national renewable energy action plan.
5. The Commission shall evaluate the national renewable energy action plans, notably the adequacy of the measures envisaged by the Member State in accordance with Article 3(2). In response to a national renewable energy action plan or to an amended national renewable energy action plan, the Commission may issue a recommendation.
6. The Commission shall send to the European Parliament the national renewable energy action plans and the forecast documents in the form as made public on the transparency platform as referred to in Article 24(2), as well as any recommendation as referred to in paragraph 5 of this Article.

Calculation of the share of energy from renewable sources
Article 5
1. The gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources in each Member State shall be calculated as the sum of:
(a)
gross final consumption of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(b)
gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for heating and cooling; and
(c)
final consumption of energy from renewable sources in transport.
Gas, electricity and hydrogen from renewable energy sources shall be considered only once in point (a), (b), or (c) of the first subparagraph, for calculating the share of gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources.
Subject to the second subparagraph of Article 17(1), biofuels and bioliquids that do not fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (6) shall not be taken into account.
2. Where a Member State considers that, due to force majeure, it is impossible for it to meet its share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy in 2020 set out in the third column of the table in Annex I, it shall inform the Commission accordingly as soon as possible. The Commission shall adopt a decision on whether force majeure has been demonstrated. In the event that the Commission decides that force majeure has been demonstrated, it shall determine what adjustment shall be made to the Member State’s gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for the year 2020.
3. For the purposes of paragraph 1(a), gross final consumption of electricity from renewable energy sources shall be calculated as the quantity of electricity produced in a Member State from renewable energy sources, excluding the production of electricity in pumped storage units from water that has previously been pumped uphill.
In multi-fuel plants using renewable and conventional sources, only the part of electricity produced from renewable energy sources shall be taken into account. For the purposes of this calculation, the contribution of each energy source shall be calculated on the basis of its energy content.
The electricity generated by hydropower and wind power shall be accounted for in accordance with the normalisation rules set out in Annex II.
4. For the purposes of paragraph 1(b), the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for heating and cooling shall be calculated as the quantity of district heating and cooling produced in a Member State from renewable sources, plus the consumption of other energy from renewable sources in industry, households, services, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, for heating, cooling and processing purposes.
In multi-fuel plants using renewable and conventional sources, only the part of heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources shall be taken into account. For the purposes of this calculation, the contribution of each energy source shall be calculated on the basis of its energy content.
Aerothermal, geothermal and hydrothermal heat energy captured by heat pumps shall be taken into account for the purposes of paragraph 1(b) provided that the final energy output significantly exceeds the primary energy input required to drive the heat pumps. The quantity of heat to be considered as energy from renewable sources for the purposes of this Directive shall be calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in Annex VII.
Thermal energy generated by passive energy systems, under which lower energy consumption is achieved passively through building design or from heat generated by energy from non-renewable sources, shall not be taken into account for the purposes of paragraph 1(b).
5. The energy content of the transport fuels listed in Annex III shall be taken to be as set out in that Annex. Annex III may be adapted to technical and scientific progress. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
6. The share of energy from renewable sources shall be calculated as the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources divided by the gross final consumption of energy from all energy sources, expressed as a percentage.
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, the sum referred to in paragraph 1 shall be adjusted in accordance with Articles 6, 8, 10 and 11.
In calculating a Member State’s gross final energy consumption for the purpose of measuring its compliance with the targets and indicative trajectory laid down in this Directive, the amount of energy consumed in aviation shall, as a proportion of that Member State’s gross final consumption of energy, be considered to be no more than 6,18 %. For Cyprus and Malta the amount of energy consumed in aviation shall, as a proportion of those Member States’ gross final consumption of energy, be considered to be no more than 4,12 %.
7. The methodology and definitions used in the calculation of the share of energy from renewable sources shall be those of Regulation (EC) No 1099/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 October 2008 on energy statistics(19).
Member States shall ensure coherence of statistical information used in calculating those sectoral and overall shares and statistical information reported to the Commission under Regulation (EC) No 1099/2008.

Statistical transfers between Member States
Article 6
1. Member States may agree on and may make arrangements for the statistical transfer of a specified amount of energy from renewable sources from one Member State to another Member State. The transferred quantity shall be:
(a)
deducted from the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by the Member State making the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2); and
(b)
added to the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by another Member State accepting the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2).
A statistical transfer shall not affect the achievement of the national target of the Member State making the transfer.
2. The arrangements referred to in paragraph 1 may have a duration of one or more years. They shall be notified to the Commission no later than three months after the end of each year in which they have effect. The information sent to the Commission shall include the quantity and price of the energy involved.
3. Transfers shall become effective only after all Member States involved in the transfer have notified the transfer to the Commission.

Joint projects between Member States
Article 7
1. Two or more Member States may cooperate on all types of joint projects relating to the production of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources. That cooperation may involve private operators.
2. Member States shall notify the Commission of the proportion or amount of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources produced by any joint project in their territory, that became operational after 25 June 2009, or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date, which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of another Member State for the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive.
3. The notification referred to in paragraph 2 shall:
(a)
describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b)
specify the proportion or amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of another Member State;
(c)
identify the Member State in whose favour the notification is being made; and
(d)
specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity or heating or cooling produced by the installation from renewable energy sources is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the other Member State.
4. The period specified under paragraph 3(d) shall not extend beyond 2020. The duration of a joint project may extend beyond 2020.
5. A notification made under this Article shall not be varied or withdrawn without the joint agreement of the Member State making the notification and the Member State identified in accordance with paragraph 3(c).

Effects of joint projects between Member States
Article 8
1. Within three months of the end of each year falling within the period specified under Article 7(3)(d), the Member State that made the notification under Article 7 shall issue a letter of notification stating:
(a)
the total amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 7; and
(b)
the amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards the national overall target of another Member State in accordance with the terms of the notification.
2. The notifying Member State shall send the letter of notification to the Member State in whose favour the notification was made and to the Commission.
3. For the purposes of measuring target compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 1(b) shall be:
(a)
deducted from the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State issuing the letter of notification under paragraph 1; and
(b)
added to the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State receiving the letter of notification in accordance with paragraph 2.

Joint projects between Member States and third countries
Article 9
1. One or more Member States may cooperate with one or more third countries on all types of joint projects regarding the production of electricity from renewable energy sources. Such cooperation may involve private operators.
2. Electricity from renewable energy sources produced in a third country shall be taken into account only for the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets if the following conditions are met:
(a)
the electricity is consumed in the Community, a requirement that is deemed to be met where:
(i)
an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit;
(ii)
an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and
(iii)
the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time;
(b)
the electricity is produced by a newly constructed installation that became operational after 25 June 2009 or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date, under a joint project as referred to in paragraph 1; and
(c)
the amount of electricity produced and exported has not received support from a support scheme of a third country other than investment aid granted to the installation.
3. Member States may apply to the Commission, for the purposes of Article 5, for account to be taken of electricity from renewable energy sources produced and consumed in a third country, in the context of the construction of an interconnector with a very long lead-time between a Member State and a third country if the following conditions are met:
(a)
construction of the interconnector started by 31 December 2016;
(b)
it is not possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2020;
(c)
it is possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2022;
(d)
after it becomes operational, the interconnector will be used for the export to the Community, in accordance with paragraph 2, of electricity generated from renewable energy sources;
(e)
the application relates to a joint project that fulfils the criteria in points (b) and (c) of paragraph 2 and that will use the interconnector after it becomes operational, and to a quantity of electricity that is no greater than the quantity that will be exported to the Community after the interconnector becomes operational.
4. The proportion or amount of electricity produced by any installation in the territory of a third country, which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of one or more Member States for the purposes of measuring compliance with Article 3, shall be notified to the Commission. When more than one Member State is concerned, the distribution between Member States of this proportion or amount shall be notified to the Commission. This proportion or amount shall not exceed the proportion or amount actually exported to, and consumed in, the Community, corresponding to the amount referred to in paragraph 2(a)(i) and (ii) of this Article and meeting the conditions as set out in its paragraph (2)(a). The notification shall be made by each Member State towards whose overall national target the proportion or amount of electricity is to count.
5. The notification referred to in paragraph 4 shall:
(a)
describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b)
specify the proportion or amount of electricity produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national target of a Member State as well as, subject to confidentiality requirements, the corresponding financial arrangements;
(c)
specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the Member State; and
(d)
include a written acknowledgement of points (b) and (c) by the third country in whose territory the installation is to become operational and the proportion or amount of electricity produced by the installation which will be used domestically by that third country.
6. The period specified under paragraph 5(c) shall not extend beyond 2020. The duration of a joint project may extend beyond 2020.
7. A notification made under this Article may not be varied or withdrawn without the joint agreement of the Member State making the notification and the third country that has acknowledged the joint project in accordance with paragraph 5(d).
8. Member States and the Community shall encourage the relevant bodies of the Energy Community Treaty to take, in conformity with the Energy Community Treaty, the measures which are necessary so that the Contracting Parties to that Treaty can apply the provisions on cooperation laid down in this Directive between Member States.

Effects of joint projects between Member States and third countries
Article 10
1. Within three months of the end of each year falling within the period specified under Article 9(5)(c), the Member State having made the notification under Article 9 shall issue a letter of notification stating:
(a)
the total amount of electricity produced during that year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 9;
(b)
the amount of electricity produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards its national overall target in accordance with the terms of the notification under Article 9; and
(c)
proof of compliance with the conditions set out in Article 9(2).
2. The Member State shall send the letter of notification to the third country which has acknowledged the project in accordance with Article 9(5)(d) and to the Commission.
3. For the purposes of measuring target compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity produced from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 1(b) shall be added to the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State issuing the letter of notification.

Joint support schemes
Article 11
1. Without prejudice to the obligations of Member States under Article 3, two or more Member States may decide, on a voluntary basis, to join or partly coordinate their national support schemes. In such cases, a certain amount of energy from renewable sources produced in the territory of one participating Member State may count towards the national overall target of another participating Member State if the Member States concerned:
(a)
make a statistical transfer of specified amounts of energy from renewable sources from one Member State to another Member State in accordance with Article 6; or
(b)
set up a distribution rule agreed by participating Member States that allocates amounts of energy from renewable sources between the participating Member States. Such a rule shall be notified to the Commission no later than three months after the end of the first year in which it takes effect.
2. Within three months of the end of each year each Member State having made a notification under paragraph 1(b) shall issue a letter of notification stating the total amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources produced during the year which is to be the subject of the distribution rule.
3. For the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 2 shall be reallocated between the concerned Member States in accordance with the notified distribution rule.

Capacity increases
Article 12
For the purpose of Article 7(2) and Article 9(2)(b), units of energy from renewable sources imputable to an increase in the capacity of an installation shall be treated as if they were produced by a separate installation becoming operational at the moment at which the increase of capacity occurred.

Administrative procedures, regulations and codes
Article 13
1. Member States shall ensure that any national rules concerning the authorisation, certification and licensing procedures that are applied to plants and associated transmission and distribution network infrastructures for the production of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources, and to the process of transformation of biomass into biofuels or other energy products, are proportionate and necessary.
Member States shall, in particular, take the appropriate steps to ensure that:
(a)
subject to differences between Member States in their administrative structures and organisation, the respective responsibilities of national, regional and local administrative bodies for authorisation, certification and licensing procedures including spatial planning are clearly coordinated and defined, with transparent timetables for determining planning and building applications;
(b)
comprehensive information on the processing of authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and on available assistance to applicants are made available at the appropriate level;
(c)
administrative procedures are streamlined and expedited at the appropriate administrative level;
(d)
rules governing authorisation, certification and licensing are objective, transparent, proportionate, do not discriminate between applicants and take fully into account the particularities of individual renewable energy technologies;
(e)
administrative charges paid by consumers, planners, architects, builders and equipment and system installers and suppliers are transparent and cost-related; and
(f)
simplified and less burdensome authorisation procedures, including through simple notification if allowed by the applicable regulatory framework, are established for smaller projects and for decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources, where appropriate.
2. Member States shall clearly define any technical specifications which must be met by renewable energy equipment and systems in order to benefit from support schemes. Where European standards exist, including eco-labels, energy labels and other technical reference systems established by the European standardisation bodies, such technical specifications shall be expressed in terms of those standards. Such technical specifications shall not prescribe where the equipment and systems are to be certified and should not impede the operation of the internal market.
3. Member States shall recommend to all actors, in particular local and regional administrative bodies to ensure equipment and systems are installed for the use of electricity, heating and cooling from renewable energy sources and for district heating and cooling when planning, designing, building and renovating industrial or residential areas. Member States shall, in particular, encourage local and regional administrative bodies to include heating and cooling from renewable energy sources in the planning of city infrastructure, where appropriate.
4. Member States shall introduce in their building regulations and codes appropriate measures in order to increase the share of all kinds of energy from renewable sources in the building sector.
In establishing such measures or in their regional support schemes, Member States may take into account national measures relating to substantial increases in energy efficiency and relating to cogeneration and to passive, low or zero-energy buildings.
By 31 December 2014, Member States shall, in their building regulations and codes or by other means with equivalent effect, where appropriate, require the use of minimum levels of energy from renewable sources in new buildings and in existing buildings that are subject to major renovation. Member States shall permit those minimum levels to be fulfilled, inter alia, through district heating and cooling produced using a significant proportion of renewable energy sources.
The requirements of the first subparagraph shall apply to the armed forces, only to the extent that its application does not cause any conflict with the nature and primary aim of the activities of the armed forces and with the exception of material used exclusively for military purposes.
5. Member States shall ensure that new public buildings, and existing public buildings that are subject to major renovation, at national, regional and local level fulfil an exemplary role in the context of this Directive from 1 January 2012 onwards. Member States may, inter alia, allow that obligation to be fulfilled by complying with standards for zero energy housing, or by providing that the roofs of public or mixed private-public buildings are used by third parties for installations that produce energy from renewable sources.
6. With respect to their building regulations and codes, Member States shall promote the use of renewable energy heating and cooling systems and equipment that achieve a significant reduction of energy consumption. Member States shall use energy or eco-labels or other appropriate certificates or standards developed at national or Community level, where these exist, as the basis for encouraging such systems and equipment.
In the case of biomass, Member States shall promote conversion technologies that achieve a conversion efficiency of at least 85 % for residential and commercial applications and at least 70 % for industrial applications.
In the case of heat pumps, Member States shall promote those that fulfil the minimum requirements of eco-labelling established in Commission Decision 2007/742/EC of 9 November 2007 establishing the ecological criteria for the award of the Community eco-label to electrically driven, gas driven or gas absorption heat pumps(20).
In the case of solar thermal energy, Member States shall promote certified equipment and systems based on European standards where these exist, including eco-labels, energy labels and other technical reference systems established by the European standardisation bodies.
In assessing the conversion efficiency and input/output ratio of systems and equipment for the purposes of this paragraph, Member States shall use Community or, in their absence, international procedures if such procedures exist.

Information and training
Article 14
1. Member States shall ensure that information on support measures is made available to all relevant actors, such as consumers, builders, installers, architects, and suppliers of heating, cooling and electricity equipment and systems and of vehicles compatible with the use of energy from renewable sources.
2. Member States shall ensure that information on the net benefits, cost and energy efficiency of equipment and systems for the use of heating, cooling and electricity from renewable energy sources is made available either by the supplier of the equipment or system or by the national competent authorities.
3. Member States shall ensure that certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes become or are available by 31 December 2012 for installers of small-scale biomass boilers and stoves, solar photovoltaic and solar thermal systems, shallow geothermal systems and heat pumps. Those schemes may take into account existing schemes and structures as appropriate, and shall be based on the criteria laid down in Annex IV. Each Member State shall recognise certification awarded by other Member States in accordance with those criteria.
4. Member States shall make available to the public information on certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes as referred to in paragraph 3. Member States may also make available the list of installers who are qualified or certified in accordance with the provisions referred to in paragraph 3.
5. Member States shall ensure that guidance is made available to all relevant actors, notably for planners and architects so that they are able properly to consider the optimal combination of renewable energy sources, of high-efficiency technologies and of district heating and cooling when planning, designing, building and renovating industrial or residential areas.
6. Member States, with the participation of local and regional authorities, shall develop suitable information, awareness-raising, guidance or training programmes in order to inform citizens of the benefits and practicalities of developing and using energy from renewable sources.

Guarantees of origin of electricity, heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources
Article 15
1. For the purposes of proving to final customers the share or quantity of energy from renewable sources in an energy supplier’s energy mix in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, Member States shall ensure that the origin of electricity produced from renewable energy sources can be guaranteed as such within the meaning of this Directive, in accordance with objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
2. To that end, Member States shall ensure that a guarantee of origin is issued in response to a request from a producer of electricity from renewable energy sources. Member States may arrange for guarantees of origin to be issued in response to a request from producers of heating and cooling from renewable energy sources. Such an arrangement may be made subject to a minimum capacity limit. A guarantee of origin shall be of the standard size of 1 MWh. No more than one guarantee of origin shall be issued in respect of each unit of energy produced.
Member States shall ensure that the same unit of energy from renewable sources is taken into account only once.
Member States may provide that no support be granted to a producer when that producer receives a guarantee of origin for the same production of energy from renewable sources.
The guarantee of origin shall have no function in terms of a Member State’s compliance with Article 3. Transfers of guarantees of origin, separately or together with the physical transfer of energy, shall have no effect on the decision of Member States to use statistical transfers, joint projects or joint support schemes for target compliance or on the calculation of the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources in accordance with Article 5.
3. Any use of a guarantee of origin shall take place within 12 months of production of the corresponding energy unit. A guarantee of origin shall be cancelled once it has been used.
4. Member States or designated competent bodies shall supervise the issuance, transfer and cancellation of guarantees of origin. The designated competent bodies shall have non-overlapping geographical responsibilities, and be independent of production, trade and supply activities.
5. Member States or the designated competent bodies shall put in place appropriate mechanisms to ensure that guarantees of origin shall be issued, transferred and cancelled electronically and are accurate, reliable and fraud-resistant.
6. A guarantee of origin shall specify at least:
(a)
the energy source from which the energy was produced and the start and end dates of production;
(b)
whether it relates to:
(i)
electricity; or
(ii)
heating or cooling;
(c)
the identity, location, type and capacity of the installation where the energy was produced;
(d)
whether and to what extent the installation has benefited from investment support, whether and to what extent the unit of energy has benefited in any other way from a national support scheme, and the type of support scheme;
(e)
the date on which the installation became operational; and
(f)
the date and country of issue and a unique identification number.
7. Where an electricity supplier is required to prove the share or quantity of energy from renewable sources in its energy mix for the purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, it may do so by using its guarantees of origin.
8. The amount of energy from renewable sources corresponding to guarantees of origin transferred by an electricity supplier to a third party shall be deducted from the share of energy from renewable sources in its energy mix for the purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC.
9. Member States shall recognise guarantees of origin issued by other Member States in accordance with this Directive exclusively as proof of the elements referred to in paragraph 1 and paragraph 6(a) to (f). A Member State may refuse to recognise a guarantee of origin only when it has well-founded doubts about its accuracy, reliability or veracity. The Member State shall notify the Commission of such a refusal and its justification.
10. If the Commission finds that a refusal to recognise a guarantee of origin is unfounded, the Commission may adopt a decision requiring the Member State in question to recognise it.
11. A Member State may introduce, in conformity with Community law, objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria for the use of guarantees of origin in complying with the obligations laid down in Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC.
12. Where energy suppliers market energy from renewable sources to consumers with a reference to environmental or other benefits of energy from renewable sources, Member States may require those energy suppliers to make available, in summary form, information on the amount or share of energy from renewable sources that comes from installations or increased capacity that became operational after 25 June 2009.

Access to and operation of the grids
Article 16
1. Member States shall take the appropriate steps to develop transmission and distribution grid infrastructure, intelligent networks, storage facilities and the electricity system, in order to allow the secure operation of the electricity system as it accommodates the further development of electricity production from renewable energy sources, including interconnection between Member States and between Member States and third countries. Member States shall also take appropriate steps to accelerate authorisation procedures for grid infrastructure and to coordinate approval of grid infrastructure with administrative and planning procedures.
2. Subject to requirements relating to the maintenance of the reliability and safety of the grid, based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria defined by the competent national authorities:
(a)
Member States shall ensure that transmission system operators and distribution system operators in their territory guarantee the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(b)
Member States shall also provide for either priority access or guaranteed access to the grid-system of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(c)
Member States shall ensure that when dispatching electricity generating installations, transmission system operators shall give priority to generating installations using renewable energy sources in so far as the secure operation of the national electricity system permits and based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria. Member States shall ensure that appropriate grid and market-related operational measures are taken in order to minimise the curtailment of electricity produced from renewable energy sources. If significant measures are taken to curtail the renewable energy sources in order to guarantee the security of the national electricity system and security of energy supply, Members States shall ensure that the responsible system operators report to the competent regulatory authority on those measures and indicate which corrective measures they intend to take in order to prevent inappropriate curtailments.
3. Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to set up and make public their standard rules relating to the bearing and sharing of costs of technical adaptations, such as grid connections and grid reinforcements, improved operation of the grid and rules on the non-discriminatory implementation of the grid codes, which are necessary in order to integrate new producers feeding electricity produced from renewable energy sources into the interconnected grid.
Those rules shall be based on objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria taking particular account of all the costs and benefits associated with the connection of those producers to the grid and of the particular circumstances of producers located in peripheral regions and in regions of low population density. Those rules may provide for different types of connection.
4. Where appropriate, Member States may require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to bear, in full or in part, the costs referred to in paragraph 3. Member States shall review and take the necessary measures to improve the frameworks and rules for the bearing and sharing of costs referred to in paragraph 3 by 30 June 2011 and every two years thereafter to ensure the integration of new producers as referred to in that paragraph.
5. Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to provide any new producer of energy from renewable sources wishing to be connected to the system with the comprehensive and necessary information required, including:
(a)
a comprehensive and detailed estimate of the costs associated with the connection;
(b)
a reasonable and precise timetable for receiving and processing the request for grid connection;
(c)
a reasonable indicative timetable for any proposed grid connection.
Member States may allow producers of electricity from renewable energy sources wishing to be connected to the grid to issue a call for tender for the connection work.
6. The sharing of costs referred in paragraph 3 shall be enforced by a mechanism based on objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria taking into account the benefits which initially and subsequently connected producers as well as transmission system operators and distribution system operators derive from the connections.
7. Member States shall ensure that the charging of transmission and distribution tariffs does not discriminate against electricity from renewable energy sources, including in particular electricity from renewable energy sources produced in peripheral regions, such as island regions, and in regions of low population density. Member States shall ensure that the charging of transmission and distribution tariffs does not discriminate against gas from renewable energy sources.
8. Member States shall ensure that tariffs charged by transmission system operators and distribution system operators for the transmission and distribution of electricity from plants using renewable energy sources reflect realisable cost benefits resulting from the plant’s connection to the network. Such cost benefits could arise from the direct use of the low-voltage grid.
9. Where relevant, Member States shall assess the need to extend existing gas network infrastructure to facilitate the integration of gas from renewable energy sources.
10. Where relevant, Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators in their territory to publish technical rules in line with Article 6 of Directive 2003/55/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning the common rules for the internal market in natural gas(21), in particular regarding network connection rules that include gas quality, gas odoration and gas pressure requirements. Member States shall also require transmission and distribution system operators to publish the connection tariffs to connect renewable gas sources based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
11. Member States in their national renewable energy action plans shall assess the necessity to build new infrastructure for district heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources in order to achieve the 2020 national target referred to in Article 3(1). Subject to that assessment, Member States shall, where relevant, take steps with a view to developing a district heating infrastructure to accommodate the development of heating and cooling production from large biomass, solar and geothermal facilities.

Sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids
Article 17
1. Irrespective of whether the raw materials were cultivated inside or outside the territory of the Community, energy from biofuels and bioliquids shall be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) only if they fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in paragraphs 2 to 6:
(a)
measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national targets;
(b)
measuring compliance with renewable energy obligations;
(c)
eligibility for financial support for the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids.
However, biofuels and bioliquids produced from waste and residues, other than agricultural, aquaculture, fisheries and forestry residues, need only fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in paragraph 2 in order to be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c).
2. The greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be at least 35 %.
With effect from 1 January 2017, the greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be at least 50 %. From 1 January 2018 that greenhouse gas emission saving shall be at least 60 % for biofuels and bioliquids produced in installations in which production started on or after 1 January 2017.
The greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids shall be calculated in accordance with Article 19(1).
In the case of biofuels and bioliquids produced by installations that were in operation on 23 January 2008, the first subparagraph shall apply from 1 April 2013.
3. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land with high biodiversity value, namely land that had one of the following statuses in or after January 2008, whether or not the land continues to have that status:
(a)
primary forest and other wooded land, namely forest and other wooded land of native species, where there is no clearly visible indication of human activity and the ecological processes are not significantly disturbed;
(b)
areas designated:
(i)
by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or
(ii)
for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);
unless evidence is provided that the production of that raw material did not interfere with those nature protection purposes;
(c)
highly biodiverse grassland that is:
(i)
natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or
(ii)
non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status.
The Commission shall establish the criteria and geographic ranges to determine which grassland shall be covered by point (c) of the first subparagraph. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, by supplementing it shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
4. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land with high carbon stock, namely land that had one of the following statuses in January 2008 and no longer has that status:
(a)
wetlands, namely land that is covered with or saturated by water permanently or for a significant part of the year;
(b)
continuously forested areas, namely land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of more than 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ;
(c)
land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of between 10 % and 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ, unless evidence is provided that the carbon stock of the area before and after conversion is such that, when the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V is applied, the conditions laid down in paragraph 2 of this Article would be fulfilled.
The provisions of this paragraph shall not apply if, at the time the raw material was obtained, the land had the same status as it had in January 2008.
5. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land that was peatland in January 2008, unless evidence is provided that the cultivation and harvesting of that raw material does not involve drainage of previously undrained soil.
6. Agricultural raw materials cultivated in the Community and used for the production of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be obtained in accordance with the requirements and standards under the provisions referred to under the heading ‘Environment’ in part A and in point 9 of Annex II to Council Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 of 19 January 2009 establishing common rules for direct support schemes for farmers under the common agricultural policy and establishing certain support schemes for farmers(22)and in accordance with the minimum requirements for good agricultural and environmental condition defined pursuant to Article 6(1) of that Regulation.
7. The Commission shall, every two years, report to the European Parliament and the Council, in respect of both third countries and Member States that are a significant source of biofuels or of raw material for biofuels consumed within the Community, on national measures taken to respect the sustainability criteria set out in paragraphs 2 to 5 and for soil, water and air protection. The first report shall be submitted in 2012.
The Commission shall, every two years, report to the European Parliament and the Council on the impact on social sustainability in the Community and in third countries of increased demand for biofuel, on the impact of Community biofuel policy on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices, in particular for people living in developing countries, and wider development issues. Reports shall address the respect of land-use rights. They shall state, both for third countries and Member States that are a significant source of raw material for biofuel consumed within the Community, whether the country has ratified and implemented each of the following Conventions of the International Labour Organisation:
—
Convention concerning Forced or Compulsory Labour (No 29),
—
Convention concerning Freedom of Association and Protection of the Right to Organise (No 87),
—
Convention concerning the Application of the Principles of the Right to Organise and to Bargain Collectively (No 98),
—
Convention concerning Equal Remuneration of Men and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value (No 100),
—
Convention concerning the Abolition of Forced Labour (No 105),
—
Convention concerning Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation (No 111),
—
Convention concerning Minimum Age for Admission to Employment (No 138),
—
Convention concerning the Prohibition and Immediate Action for the Elimination of the Worst Forms of Child Labour (No 182).
Those reports shall state, both for third countries and Member States that are a significant source of raw material for biofuel consumed within the Community, whether the country has ratified and implemented:
—
the Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety,
—
the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora.
The first report shall be submitted in 2012. The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action, in particular if evidence shows that biofuel production has a significant impact on food prices.
8. For the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1, Member States shall not refuse to take into account, on other sustainability grounds, biofuels and bioliquids obtained in compliance with this Article.
9. The Commission shall report on requirements for a sustainability scheme for energy uses of biomass, other than biofuels and bioliquids, by 31 December 2009. That report shall be accompanied, where appropriate, by proposals for a sustainability scheme for other energy uses of biomass, to the European Parliament and the Council. That report and any proposals contained therein shall be based on the best available scientific evidence, taking into account new developments in innovative processes. If the analysis done for that purpose demonstrates that it would be appropriate to introduce amendments, in relation to forest biomass, in the calculation methodology in Annex V or in the sustainability criteria relating to carbon stocks applied to biofuels and bioliquids, the Commission shall, where appropriate, make proposals to the European Parliament and Council at the same time in this regard.

Verification of compliance with the sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids
Article 18
1. Where biofuels and bioliquids are to be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 17(1), Member States shall require economic operators to show that the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5) have been fulfilled. For that purpose they shall require economic operators to use a mass balance system which:
(a)
allows consignments of raw material or biofuel with differing sustainability characteristics to be mixed;
(b)
requires information about the sustainability characteristics and sizes of the consignments referred to in point (a) to remain assigned to the mixture; and
(c)
provides for the sum of all consignments withdrawn from the mixture to be described as having the same sustainability characteristics, in the same quantities, as the sum of all consignments added to the mixture.
2. The Commission shall report to the European Parliament and the Council in 2010 and 2012 on the operation of the mass balance verification method described in paragraph 1 and on the potential for allowing for other verification methods in relation to some or all types of raw material, biofuel or bioliquids. In its assessment, the Commission shall consider those verification methods in which information about sustainability characteristics need not remain physically assigned to particular consignments or mixtures. The assessment shall take into account the need to maintain the integrity and effectiveness of the verification system while avoiding the imposition of an unreasonable burden on industry. The report shall be accompanied, where appropriate, by proposals to the European Parliament and the Council concerning the use of other verification methods.
3. Member States shall take measures to ensure that economic operators submit reliable information and make available to the Member State, on request, the data that were used to develop the information. Member States shall require economic operators to arrange for an adequate standard of independent auditing of the information submitted, and to provide evidence that this has been done. The auditing shall verify that the systems used by economic operators are accurate, reliable and protected against fraud. It shall evaluate the frequency and methodology of sampling and the robustness of the data.
The information referred to in the first subparagraph shall include in particular information on compliance with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5), appropriate and relevant information on measures taken for soil, water and air protection, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and appropriate and relevant information concerning measures taken in order to take into account the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7).
The Commission shall, in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3), establish the list of appropriate and relevant information referred to in the first two subparagraphs. It shall ensure, in particular, that the provision of that information does not represent an excessive administrative burden for operators in general or for smallholder farmers, producer organisations and cooperatives in particular.
The obligations laid down in this paragraph shall apply whether the biofuels or bioliquids are produced within the Community or imported.
Member States shall submit to the Commission, in aggregated form, the information referred to in the first subparagraph of this paragraph. The Commission shall publish that information on the transparency platform referred to in Article 24 in summary form preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.
4. The Community shall endeavour to conclude bilateral or multilateral agreements with third countries containing provisions on sustainability criteria that correspond to those of this Directive. Where the Community has concluded agreements containing provisions relating to matters covered by the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5), the Commission may decide that those agreements demonstrate that biofuels and bioliquids produced from raw materials cultivated in those countries comply with the sustainability criteria in question. When those agreements are concluded, due consideration shall be given to measures taken for the conservation of areas that provide, in critical situations, basic ecosystem services (such as watershed protection and erosion control), for soil, water and air protection, indirect land-use changes, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and to the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7).
The Commission may decide that voluntary national or international schemes setting standards for the production of biomass products contain accurate data for the purposes of Article 17(2) or demonstrate that consignments of biofuel comply with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(3) to (5). The Commission may decide that those schemes contain accurate data for the purposes of information on measures taken for the conservation of areas that provide, in critical situations, basic ecosystem services (such as watershed protection and erosion control), for soil, water and air protection, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and on the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7). The Commission may also recognise areas for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature for the purposes of Article 17(3)(b)(ii).
The Commission may decide that voluntary national or international schemes to measure greenhouse gas emission saving contain accurate data for the purposes of Article 17(2).
The Commission may decide that land that falls within the scope of a national or regional recovery programme aimed at improving severely degraded or heavily contaminated land fulfils the criteria referred to in point 9 of part C of Annex V.
5. The Commission shall adopt decisions under paragraph 4 only if the agreement or scheme in question meets adequate standards of reliability, transparency and independent auditing. In the case of schemes to measure greenhouse gas emission saving, such schemes shall also comply with the methodological requirements in Annex V. Lists of areas of high biodiversity value as referred to in Article 17(3)(b)(ii) shall meet adequate standards of objectivity and coherence with internationally recognised standards and provide for appropriate appeal procedures.
6. Decisions under paragraph 4 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3). Such decisions shall be valid for a period of no more than five years.
7. When an economic operator provides proof or data obtained in accordance with an agreement or scheme that has been the subject of a decision pursuant to paragraph 4, to the extent covered by that decision, a Member State shall not require the supplier to provide further evidence of compliance with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5) nor information on measures referred to in the second subparagraph of paragraph 3 of this Article.
8. At the request of a Member State or on its own initiative the Commission shall examine the application of Article 17 in relation to a source of biofuel or bioliquid and, within six months of receipt of a request and in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3), decide whether the Member State concerned may take biofuel or bioliquid from that source into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 17(1).
9. By 31 December 2012, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and to the Council on:
(a)
the effectiveness of the system in place for the provision of information on sustainability criteria; and
(b)
whether it is feasible and appropriate to introduce mandatory requirements in relation to air, soil or water protection, taking into account the latest scientific evidence and the Community’s international obligations.
The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action.

Calculation of the greenhouse gas impact of biofuels and bioliquids
Article 19
1. For the purposes of Article 17(2), the greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuel and bioliquids shall be calculated as follows:
(a)
where a default value for greenhouse gas emission saving for the production pathway is laid down in part A or B of Annex V and where theelvalue for those biofuels or bioliquids calculated in accordance with point 7 of part C of Annex V is equal to or less than zero, by using that default value;
(b)
by using an actual value calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V; or
(c)
by using a value calculated as the sum of the factors of the formula referred to in point 1 of part C of Annex V, where disaggregated default values in part D or E of Annex V may be used for some factors, and actual values, calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V, for all other factors.
2. By 31 March 2010, Member States shall submit to the Commission a report including a list of those areas on their territory classified as level 2 in the nomenclature of territorial units for statistics (NUTS) or as a more disaggregated NUTS level in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1059/2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on the establishment of a common classification of territorial units for statistics (NUTS)(23)where the typical greenhouse gas emissions from cultivation of agricultural raw materials can be expected to be lower than or equal to the emissions reported under the heading ‘Disaggregated default values for cultivation’ in part D of Annex V to this Directive, accompanied by a description of the method and data used to establish that list. That method shall take into account soil characteristics, climate and expected raw material yields.
3. The default values in part A of Annex V for biofuels, and the disaggregated default values for cultivation in part D of Annex V for biofuels and bioliquids, may be used only when their raw materials are:
(a)
cultivated outside the Community;
(b)
cultivated in the Community in areas included in the lists referred to in paragraph 2; or
(c)
waste or residues other than agricultural, aquaculture and fisheries residues.
For biofuels and bioliquids not falling under points (a), (b) or (c), actual values for cultivation shall be used.
4. By 31 March 2010, the Commission shall submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council on the feasibility of drawing up lists of areas in third countries where the typical greenhouse gas emissions from cultivation of agricultural raw materials can be expected to be lower than or equal to the emissions reported under the heading ‘cultivation’ in part D of Annex V, accompanied if possible by such lists and a description of the method and data used to establish them. The report shall, if appropriate, be accompanied by relevant proposals.
5. The Commission shall report by 31 December 2012, and every two years thereafter, on the estimated typical and default values in parts B and E of Annex V, paying particular attention to emissions from transport and processing, and may, where necessary, decide to correct the values. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
6. The Commission shall, by 31 December 2010, submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council reviewing the impact of indirect land-use change on greenhouse gas emissions and addressing ways to minimise that impact. The report shall, if appropriate, be accompanied, by a proposal, based on the best available scientific evidence, containing a concrete methodology for emissions from carbon stock changes caused by indirect land-use changes, ensuring compliance with this Directive, in particular Article 17(2).
Such a proposal shall include the necessary safeguards to provide certainty for investment undertaken before that methodology is applied. With respect to installations that produced biofuels before the end of 2013, the application of the measures referred to in the first subparagraph shall not, until 31 December 2017, lead to biofuels produced by those installations being deemed to have failed to comply with the sustainability requirements of this Directive if they would otherwise have done so, provided that those biofuels achieve a greenhouse gas emission saving of at least 45 %. This shall apply to the capacities of the installations of biofuels at the end of 2012.
The European Parliament and the Council shall endeavour to decide, by 31 December 2012, on any such proposals submitted by the Commission.
7. Annex V may be adapted to technical and scientific progress, including by the addition of values for further biofuel production pathways for the same or for other raw materials and by modifying the methodology laid down in part C. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, inter alia, by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
Regarding the default values and methodology laid down in Annex V, particular consideration shall be given to:
—
the method of accounting for wastes and residues,
—
the method of accounting for co-products,
—
the method of accounting for cogeneration, and
—
the status given to agricultural crop residues as co-products.
The default values for waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel shall be reviewed as soon as possible.
Any adaptation of or addition to the list of default values in Annex V shall comply with the following:
(a)
where the contribution of a factor to overall emissions is small, or where there is limited variation, or where the cost or difficulty of establishing actual values is high, default values must be typical of normal production processes;
(b)
in all other cases default values must be conservative compared to normal production processes.
8. Detailed definitions, including technical specifications required for the categories set out in point 9 of part C of Annex V shall be established. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).

Implementing measures
Article 20
The implementing measures referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(3), the third subparagraph of Article 18(3), Article 18(6), Article 18(8), Article 19(5), the first subparagraph of Article 19(7), and Article 19(8) shall also take full account of the purposes of Article 7a of Directive 98/70/EC.

Specific provisions related to energy from renewable sources in transport
Article 21
1. Member States shall ensure that information is given to the public on the availability and environmental benefits of all different renewable sources of energy for transport. When the percentages of biofuels, blended in mineral oil derivatives, exceed 10 % by volume, Member States shall require this to be indicated at the sales points.
2. For the purposes of demonstrating compliance with national renewable energy obligations placed on operators and the target for the use of energy from renewable sources in all forms of transport referred to in Article 3(4), the contribution made by biofuels produced from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material shall be considered to be twice that made by other biofuels.

Reporting by the Member States
Article 22
1. Each Member State shall submit a report to the Commission on progress in the promotion and use of energy from renewable sources by 31 December 2011, and every two years thereafter. The sixth report, to be submitted by 31 December 2021, shall be the last report required.
The report shall detail, in particular:
(a)
the sectoral (electricity, heating and cooling, and transport) and overall shares of energy from renewable sources in the preceding two calendar years and the measures taken or planned at national level to promote the growth of energy from renewable sources taking into account the indicative trajectory in part B of Annex I, in accordance with Article 5;
(b)
the introduction and functioning of support schemes and other measures to promote energy from renewable sources, and any developments in the measures used with respect to those set out in the Member State’s national renewable energy action plan, and information on how supported electricity is allocated to final customers for purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(c)
how, where applicable, the Member State has structured its support schemes to take into account renewable energy applications that give additional benefits in relation to other, comparable applications, but may also have higher costs, including biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(d)
the functioning of the system of guarantees of origin for electricity and heating and cooling from renewable energy sources and the measures taken to ensure the reliability and protection against fraud of the system;
(e)
progress made in evaluating and improving administrative procedures to remove regulatory and non-regulatory barriers to the development of energy from renewable sources;
(f)
measures taken to ensure the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, and to improve the framework or rules for bearing and sharing of costs referred to in Article 16(3);
(g)
developments in the availability and use of biomass resources for energy purposes;
(h)
changes in commodity prices and land use within the Member State associated with its increased use of biomass and other forms of energy from renewable sources;
(i)
the development and share of biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(j)
the estimated impact of the production of biofuels and bioliquids on biodiversity, water resources, water quality and soil quality within the Member State;
(k)
the estimated net greenhouse gas emission saving due to the use of energy from renewable sources;
(l)
the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States, as well as the estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020;
(m)
the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020; and
(n)
information on how the share of biodegradable waste in waste used for producing energy has been estimated, and what steps have been taken to improve and verify such estimates.
2. In estimating net greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels, the Member State may, for the purpose of the reports referred to in paragraph 1, use the typical values given in part A and part B of Annex V.
3. In its first report, the Member State shall outline whether it intends to:
(a)
establish a single administrative body responsible for processing authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and providing assistance to applicants;
(b)
provide for automatic approval of planning and permit applications for renewable energy installations where the authorising body has not responded within the set time limits; or
(c)
indicate geographical locations suitable for exploitation of energy from renewable sources in land-use planning and for the establishment of district heating and cooling.
4. In each report the Member State may correct the data of the previous reports.

Monitoring and reporting by the Commission
Article 23
1. The Commission shall monitor the origin of biofuels and bioliquids consumed in the Community and the impact of their production, including impact as a result of displacement, on land use in the Community and the main third countries of supply. Such monitoring shall be based on Member States’ reports, submitted pursuant to Article 22(1), and those of relevant third countries, intergovernmental organisations, scientific studies and any other relevant pieces of information. The Commission shall also monitor the commodity price changes associated with the use of biomass for energy and any associated positive and negative effects on food security. The Commission shall monitor all installations to which Article 19(6) applies.
2. The Commission shall maintain a dialogue and exchange information with third countries and biofuel producers, consumer organisations and civil society concerning the general implementation of the measures in this Directive relating to biofuels and bioliquids. It shall, within that framework, pay particular attention to the impact biofuel production may have on food prices.
3. On the basis of the reports submitted by Member States pursuant to Article 22(1) and the monitoring and analysis referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the Commission shall report every two years to the European Parliament and the Council. The first report shall be submitted in 2012.
4. In reporting on greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels, the Commission shall use the values reported by Member States and shall evaluate whether and how the estimate would change if co-products were accounted for using the substitution approach.
5. In its reports, the Commission shall, in particular, analyse:
(a)
the relative environmental benefits and costs of different biofuels, the effects of the Community’s import policies thereon, the security of supply implications and the ways of achieving a balanced approach between domestic production and imports;
(b)
the impact of increased demand for biofuel on sustainability in the Community and in third countries, considering economic and environmental impacts, including impacts on biodiversity;
(c)
the scope for identifying, in a scientifically objective manner, geographical areas of high biodiversity value that are not covered in Article 17(3);
(d)
the impact of increased demand for biomass on biomass using sectors;
(e)
the availability of biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material and ligno-cellulosic material; and
(f)
indirect land-use changes in relation to all production pathways.
The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action.
6. On the basis of the reports submitted by Member States pursuant to Article 22(3), the Commission shall analyse the effectiveness of measures taken by Member States on establishing a single administrative body responsible for processing authorisation, certification and licensing applications and providing assistance to applicants.
7. In order to improve financing and coordination with a view to the achievement of the 20 % target referred to in Article 3(1), the Commission shall, by 31 December 2010, present an analysis and action plan on energy from renewable sources with a view, in particular, to:
(a)
the better use of structural funds and framework programmes;
(b)
the better and increased use of funds from the European Investment Bank and other public finance institutions;
(c)
better access to risk capital notably by analysing the feasibility of a risk sharing facility for investments in energy from renewable sources in the Community similar to the Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund initiative which is aimed at third countries;
(d)
the better coordination of Community and national funding and other forms of support; and
(e)
the better coordination in support of renewable energy initiatives whose success depends on action by actors in several Member States.
8. By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall present a report, addressing, in particular, the following elements:
(a)
a review of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving thresholds to apply from the dates referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(2), on the basis of an impact assessment taking into account, in particular, technological developments, available technologies and the availability of first and second-generation bio-fuels with a high level of greenhouse gas emission saving;
(b)
with respect to the target referred to in Article 3(4), a review of:
(i)
the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target;
(ii)
an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels;
(iii)
the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices;
(iv)
the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector;
(v)
the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels;
(c)
an evaluation of the implementation of this Directive, in particular with regard to cooperation mechanisms, in order to ensure that, together with the possibility for the Members States to continue to use national support schemes referred to in Article 3(3), those mechanisms enable Member States to achieve the national targets defined in Annex I on the best cost-benefit basis, of technological developments, and the conclusions to be drawn to achieve the target of 20 % of energy from renewable sources at Community level.
On the basis of that report, the Commission shall submit, if appropriate, proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, addressing the above elements and in particular:
—
for the element contained in point (a), a modification of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving referred to in that point, and
—
for the element contained in point (c), appropriate adjustments of the cooperation measures provided for in this Directive in order to improve their effectiveness for achieving the target of 20 %. Such proposals shall neither affect the 20 % target nor Member States’ control over national support schemes and cooperation measures.
9. In 2018, the Commission shall present a Renewable Energy Roadmap for the post-2020 period.
That roadmap shall, if appropriate, be accompanied by proposals to the European Parliament and the Council for the period after 2020. The roadmap shall take into account the experience of the implementation of this Directive and technological developments in energy from renewable sources.
10. In 2021, the Commission shall present a report reviewing the application of this Directive. That report shall, in particular, address the role of the following elements in having enabled Member States to achieve the national targets defined in Annex I on the best cost-benefit basis:
(a)
the process of preparing forecasts and national renewable energy action plans;
(b)
the effectiveness of the cooperation mechanisms;
(c)
technological developments in energy from renewable sources, including the development of the use of biofuels in commercial aviation;
(d)
the effectiveness of the national support schemes; and
(e)
the conclusions of the Commission reports referred to in paragraphs 8 and 9.

Transparency platform
Article 24
1. The Commission shall establish an online public transparency platform. That platform shall serve to increase transparency, and facilitate and promote cooperation between Member States, in particular concerning statistical transfers referred to in Article 6 and joint projects referred to in Articles 7 and 9. In addition, the platform may be used to make public relevant information which the Commission or a Member State deems to be of key importance to this Directive and to the achievement of its objectives.
2. The Commission shall make public on the transparency platform the following information, where appropriate in aggregated form, preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information:
(a)
Member States’ national renewable energy action plans;
(b)
Member States’ forecast documents referred to in Article 4(3), complemented as soon as possible with the Commission’s summary of excess production and estimated import demand;
(c)
Member States’ offers to cooperate on statistical transfers or joint projects, upon request of the Member State concerned;
(d)
the information referred to in Article 6(2) on the statistical transfers between Member States;
(e)
the information referred to in Article 7(2) and (3) and Article 9(4) and (5) on joint projects;
(f)
Member States’ national reports referred to in Article 22;
(g)
the Commission reports referred to in Article 23(3).
However, upon request of the Member State that submitted the information, the Commission shall not make public Member States’ forecast documents referred to in Article 4(3), or the information in Member States’ national reports referred to in Article 22(1)(l) and (m).

Committees
Article 25
1. Except in the cases referred to in paragraph 2, the Commission shall be assisted by the Committee on Renewable Energy Sources.
2. For matters relating to the sustainability of biofuels and bioliquids, the Commission shall be assisted by the Committee on the Sustainability of Biofuels and Bioliquids.
3. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Articles 3 and 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.
4. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4) and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.

Amendments and repeal
Article 26
1. In Directive 2001/77/EC, Article 2, Article 3(2), and Articles 4 to 8 shall be deleted with effect from 1 April 2010.
2. In Directive 2003/30/EC, Article 2, Article 3(2), (3) and (5), and Articles 5 and 6 shall be deleted with effect from 1 April 2010.
3. Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC shall be repealed with effect from 1 January 2012.

Transposition
Article 27
1. Without prejudice to Article 4(1), (2) and (3), Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 5 December 2010.
When Member States adopt measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such a reference shall be laid down by the Member States.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Entry into force
Article 28
This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Addressees
Article 29
This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 175(1) thereof, and Article 95 thereof in relation to Articles 17, 18 and 19 of this Directive,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions(2),
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty(3),
(1) The control of European energy consumption and the increased use of energy from renewable sources, together with energy savings and increased energy efficiency, constitute important parts of the package of measures needed to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and comply with the Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, and with further Community and international greenhouse gas emission reduction commitments beyond 2012. Those factors also have an important part to play in promoting the security of energy supply, promoting technological development and innovation and providing opportunities for employment and regional development, especially in rural and isolated areas.
(2) In particular, increasing technological improvements, incentives for the use and expansion of public transport, the use of energy efficiency technologies and the use of energy from renewable sources in transport are some of the most effective tools by which the Community can reduce its dependence on imported oil in the transport sector, in which the security of energy supply problem is most acute, and influence the fuel market for transport.
(3) The opportunities for establishing economic growth through innovation and a sustainable competitive energy policy have been recognised. Production of energy from renewable sources often depends on local or regional small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs). The opportunities for growth and employment that investment in regional and local production of energy from renewable sources bring about in the Member States and their regions are important. The Commission and the Member States should therefore support national and regional development measures in those areas, encourage the exchange of best practices in production of energy from renewable sources between local and regional development initiatives and promote the use of structural funding in this area.
(4) When favouring the development of the market for renewable energy sources, it is necessary to take into account the positive impact on regional and local development opportunities, export prospects, social cohesion and employment opportunities, in particular as concerns SMEs and independent energy producers.
(5) In order to reduce greenhouse gas emissions within the Community and reduce its dependence on energy imports, the development of energy from renewable sources should be closely linked to increased energy efficiency.
(6) It is appropriate to support the demonstration and commercialisation phase of decentralised renewable energy technologies. The move towards decentralised energy production has many benefits, including the utilisation of local energy sources, increased local security of energy supply, shorter transport distances and reduced energy transmission losses. Such decentralisation also fosters community development and cohesion by providing income sources and creating jobs locally.
(7) Directive 2001/77/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 September 2001 on the promotion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources in the internal electricity market(4)and Directive 2003/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 May 2003 on the promotion of the use of biofuels or other renewable fuels for transport(5)established definitions for different types of energy from renewable sources. Directive 2003/54/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning common rules for the internal market in electricity(6)established definitions for the electricity sector in general. In the interests of legal certainty and clarity it is appropriate to use the same or similar definitions in this Directive.
(8) The Commission communication of 10 January 2007 entitled ‘Renewable Energy Roadmap — Renewable energies in the 21st century: building a more sustainable future’ demonstrated that a 20 % target for the overall share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport would be appropriate and achievable objectives, and that a framework that includes mandatory targets should provide the business community with the long-term stability it needs to make rational, sustainable investments in the renewable energy sector which are capable of reducing dependence on imported fossil fuels and boosting the use of new energy technologies. Those targets exist in the context of the 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020 set out in the Commission communication of 19 October 2006 entitled ‘Action Plan for Energy Efficiency: Realising the Potential’, which was endorsed by the European Council of March 2007, and by the European Parliament in its resolution of 31 January 2008 on that Action Plan.
(9) The European Council of March 2007 reaffirmed the Community’s commitment to the Community-wide development of energy from renewable sources beyond 2010. It endorsed a mandatory target of a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in overall Community energy consumption by 2020 and a mandatory 10 % minimum target to be achieved by all Member States for the share of biofuels in transport petrol and diesel consumption by 2020, to be introduced in a cost-effective way. It stated that the binding character of the biofuel target is appropriate, subject to production being sustainable, second-generation biofuels becoming commercially available and Directive 98/70/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 October 1998 relating to the quality of petrol and diesel fuels(7)being amended to allow for adequate levels of blending. The European Council of March 2008 repeated that it is essential to develop and fulfil effective sustainability criteria for biofuels and ensure the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels. The European Council of June 2008 referred again to the sustainability criteria and the development of second-generation biofuels, and underlined the need to assess the possible impacts of biofuel production on agricultural food products and to take action, if necessary, to address shortcomings. It also stated that further assessment should be made of the environmental and social consequences of the production and consumption of biofuels.
(10) In its resolution of 25 September 2007 on the Road Map for Renewable Energy in Europe(8), the European Parliament called on the Commission to present, by the end of 2007, a proposal for a legislative framework for energy from renewable sources, referring to the importance of setting targets for the shares of energy from renewable sources at Community and Member State level.
(11) It is necessary to set transparent and unambiguous rules for calculating the share of energy from renewable sources and for defining those sources. In this context, the energy present in oceans and other water bodies in the form of waves, marine currents, tides, ocean thermal energy gradients or salinity gradients should be included.
(12) The use of agricultural material such as manure, slurry and other animal and organic waste for biogas production has, in view of the high greenhouse gas emission saving potential, significant environmental advantages in terms of heat and power production and its use as biofuel. Biogas installations can, as a result of their decentralised nature and the regional investment structure, contribute significantly to sustainable development in rural areas and offer farmers new income opportunities.
(13) In the light of the positions taken by the European Parliament, the Council and the Commission, it is appropriate to establish mandatory national targets consistent with a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in transport in Community energy consumption by 2020.
(14) The main purpose of mandatory national targets is to provide certainty for investors and to encourage continuous development of technologies which generate energy from all types of renewable sources. Deferring a decision about whether a target is mandatory until a future event takes place is thus not appropriate.
(15) The starting point, the renewable energy potential and the energy mix of each Member State vary. It is therefore necessary to translate the Community 20 % target into individual targets for each Member State, with due regard to a fair and adequate allocation taking account of Member States’ different starting points and potentials, including the existing level of energy from renewable sources and the energy mix. It is appropriate to do this by sharing the required total increase in the use of energy from renewable sources between Member States on the basis of an equal increase in each Member State’s share weighted by their GDP, modulated to reflect their starting points, and by accounting in terms of gross final consumption of energy, with account being taken of Member States’ past efforts with regard to the use of energy from renewable sources.
(16) By contrast, it is appropriate for the 10 % target for energy from renewable sources in transport to be set at the same level for each Member State in order to ensure consistency in transport fuel specifications and availability. Because transport fuels are traded easily, Member States with low endowments of the relevant resources will easily be able to obtain biofuels from elsewhere. While it would technically be possible for the Community to meet its target for the use of energy from renewable sources in transport solely from domestic production, it is both likely and desirable that the target will in fact be met through a combination of domestic production and imports. To this end, the Commission should monitor the supply of the Community market for biofuels, and should, as appropriate, propose relevant measures to achieve a balanced approach between domestic production and imports, taking into account, inter alia, the development of multilateral and bilateral trade negotiations, environmental, social and economic considerations, and the security of energy supply.
(17) The improvement of energy efficiency is a key objective of the Community, and the aim is to achieve a 20 % improvement in energy efficiency by 2020. That aim, together with existing and future legislation including Directive 2002/91/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2002 on the energy performance of buildings(9), Directive 2005/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 6 July 2005 establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-using products(10), and Directive 2006/32/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2006 on energy end-use efficiency and energy services(11), has a critical role to play in ensuring that the climate and energy objectives are being achieved at least cost, and can also provide new opportunities for the European Union’s economy. Energy efficiency and energy saving policies are some of the most effective methods by which Member States can increase the percentage share of energy from renewable sources, and Member States will thus more easily achieve the overall national and transport targets for energy from renewable sources laid down by this Directive.
(18) It will be incumbent upon Member States to make significant improvements in energy efficiency in all sectors in order more easily to achieve their targets for energy from renewable sources, which are expressed as a percentage of gross final consumption of energy. The need for energy efficiency in the transport sector is imperative because a mandatory percentage target for energy from renewable sources is likely to become increasingly difficult to achieve sustainably if overall demand for energy for transport continues to rise. The mandatory 10 % target for transport to be achieved by all Member States should therefore be defined as that share of final energy consumed in transport which is to be achieved from renewable sources as a whole, and not from biofuels alone.
(19) To ensure that the mandatory national overall targets are achieved, Member States should work towards an indicative trajectory tracing a path towards the achievement of their final mandatory targets. They should establish a national renewable energy action plan including information on sectoral targets, while having in mind that there are different uses of biomass and therefore it is essential to mobilise new biomass resources. In addition, Member States should set out measures to achieve those targets. Each Member State should assess, when evaluating its expected gross final consumption of energy in its national renewable energy action plan, the contribution which energy efficiency and energy saving measures can make to achieving its national targets. Member States should take into account the optimal combination of energy efficiency technologies with energy from renewable sources.
(20) To permit the benefits of technological progress and economies of scale to be reaped, the indicative trajectory should take into account the possibility of a more rapid growth in the use of energy from renewable sources in the future. Thus special attention can be given to sectors that suffer disproportionately from the absence of technological progress and economies of scale and therefore remain under-developed, but which, in future, could significantly contribute to reaching the targets for 2020.
(21) The indicative trajectory should take 2005 as its starting point because that is the latest year for which reliable data on national shares of energy from renewable sources are available.
(22) The achievement of the objectives of this Directive requires that the Community and Member States dedicate a significant amount of financial resources to research and development in relation to renewable energy technologies. In particular, the European Institute of Innovation and Technology should give high priority to the research and development of renewable energy technologies.
(23) Member States may encourage local and regional authorities to set targets in excess of national targets and to involve local and regional authorities in drawing up national renewable energy action plans and in raising awareness of the benefits of energy from renewable sources.
(24) In order to exploit the full potential of biomass, the Community and the Member States should promote greater mobilisation of existing timber reserves and the development of new forestry systems.
(25) Member States have different renewable energy potentials and operate different schemes of support for energy from renewable sources at the national level. The majority of Member States apply support schemes that grant benefits solely to energy from renewable sources that is produced on their territory. For the proper functioning of national support schemes it is vital that Member States can control the effect and costs of their national support schemes according to their different potentials. One important means to achieve the aim of this Directive is to guarantee the proper functioning of national support schemes, as under Directive 2001/77/EC, in order to maintain investor confidence and allow Member States to design effective national measures for target compliance. This Directive aims at facilitating cross-border support of energy from renewable sources without affecting national support schemes. It introduces optional cooperation mechanisms between Member States which allow them to agree on the extent to which one Member State supports the energy production in another and on the extent to which the energy production from renewable sources should count towards the national overall target of one or the other. In order to ensure the effectiveness of both measures of target compliance, i.e. national support schemes and cooperation mechanisms, it is essential that Member States are able to determine if and to what extent their national support schemes apply to energy from renewable sources produced in other Member States and to agree on this by applying the cooperation mechanisms provided for in this Directive.
(26) It is desirable that energy prices reflect external costs of energy production and consumption, including, as appropriate, environmental, social and healthcare costs.
(27) Public support is necessary to reach the Community’s objectives with regard to the expansion of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, in particular for as long as electricity prices in the internal market do not reflect the full environmental and social costs and benefits of energy sources used.
(28) The Community and the Member States should strive to reduce total consumption of energy in transport and increase energy efficiency in transport. The principal means of reducing consumption of energy in transport include transport planning, support for public transport, increasing the share of electric cars in production and producing cars which are more energy efficient and smaller both in size and in engine capacity.
(29) Member States should aim to diversify the mix of energy from renewable sources in all transport sectors. The Commission should present a report to the European Parliament and the Council by 1 June 2015 outlining the potential for increasing the use of energy from renewable sources in each transport sector.
(30) In calculating the contribution of hydropower and wind power for the purposes of this Directive, the effects of climatic variation should be smoothed through the use of a normalisation rule. Further, electricity produced in pumped storage units from water that has previously been pumped uphill should not be considered to be electricity produced from renewable energy sources.
(31) Heat pumps enabling the use of aerothermal, geothermal or hydrothermal heat at a useful temperature level need electricity or other auxiliary energy to function. The energy used to drive heat pumps should therefore be deducted from the total usable heat. Only heat pumps with an output that significantly exceeds the primary energy needed to drive it should be taken into account.
(32) Passive energy systems use building design to harness energy. This is considered to be saved energy. To avoid double counting, energy harnessed in this way should not be taken into account for the purposes of this Directive.
(33) Some Member States have a large share of aviation in their gross final consumption of energy. In view of the current technological and regulatory constraints that prevent the commercial use of biofuels in aviation, it is appropriate to provide a partial exemption for such Member States, by excluding from the calculation of their gross final consumption of energy in national air transport, the amount by which they exceed one-and-a-half times the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005, as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 6,18 %. Cyprus and Malta, due to their insular and peripheral character, rely on aviation as a mode of transport, which is essential for their citizens and their economy. As a result, Cyprus and Malta have a gross final consumption of energy in national air transport which is disproportionally high, i.e. more than three times the Community average in 2005, and are thus disproportionately affected by the current technological and regulatory constraints. For those Member States it is therefore appropriate to provide that the exemption should cover the amount by which they exceed the Community average gross final consumption of energy in aviation in 2005 as assessed by Eurostat, i.e. 4,12 %.
(34) To obtain an energy model that supports energy from renewable sources there is a need to encourage strategic cooperation between Member States, involving, as appropriate, regions and local authorities.
(35) Whilst having due regard to the provisions of this Directive, Member States should be encouraged to pursue all appropriate forms of cooperation in relation to the objectives set out in this Directive. Such cooperation can take place at all levels, bilaterally or multilaterally. Apart from the mechanisms with effect on target calculation and target compliance, which are exclusively provided for in this Directive, namely statistical transfers between Member States, joint projects and joint support schemes, cooperation can also take the form of, for example, exchanges of information and best practices, as provided for, in particular, in the transparency platform established by this Directive, and other voluntary coordination between all types of support schemes.
(36) To create opportunities for reducing the cost of achieving the targets laid down in this Directive, it is appropriate both to facilitate the consumption in Member States of energy produced from renewable sources in other Member States, and to enable Member States to count energy from renewable sources consumed in other Member States towards their own national targets. For this reason, flexibility measures are required, but they remain under Member States’ control in order not to affect their ability to reach their national targets. Those flexibility measures take the form of statistical transfers, joint projects between Member States or joint support schemes.
(37) It should be possible for imported electricity, produced from renewable energy sources outside the Community, to count towards Member States’ targets. However, to avoid a net increase in greenhouse gas emissions through the diversion of existing renewable sources and their complete or partial replacement by conventional energy sources, only electricity produced by renewable energy installations that become operational after the entry into force of this Directive or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date should be eligible to be counted. In order to guarantee an adequate effect of energy from renewable sources replacing conventional energy in the Community as well as in third countries it is appropriate to ensure that such imports can be tracked and accounted for in a reliable way. Agreements with third countries concerning the organisation of such trade in electricity from renewable energy sources will be considered. If, by virtue of a decision taken under the Energy Community Treaty(12)to that effect, the contracting parties to that treaty become bound by the relevant provisions of this Directive, the measures of cooperation between Member States provided for in this Directive will be applicable to them.
(38) When Member States undertake joint projects with one or more third countries regarding the production of electricity from renewable energy sources, it is appropriate that those joint projects relate only to newly constructed installations or to installations with newly increased capacity. This will help ensure that the proportion of energy from renewable sources in the third country’s total energy consumption is not reduced due to the importation of energy from renewable sources into the Community. In addition, the Member States concerned should facilitate the domestic use by the third country concerned of part of the production of electricity by the installations covered by the joint project. Furthermore, the third country concerned should be encouraged by the Commission and Member States to develop a renewable energy policy, including ambitious targets.
(39) Noting that projects of high European interest in third countries, such as the Mediterranean Solar Plan, may need a long lead-time before being fully interconnected to the territory of the Community, it is appropriate to facilitate their development by allowing Member States to take into account in their national targets a limited amount of electricity produced by such projects during the construction of the interconnection.
(40) The procedure used by the administration responsible for supervising the authorisation, certification and licensing of renewable energy plants should be objective, transparent, non-discriminatory and proportionate when applying the rules to specific projects. In particular, it is appropriate to avoid any unnecessary burden that could arise by classifying renewable energy projects under installations which represent a high health risk.
(41) The lack of transparent rules and coordination between the different authorisation bodies has been shown to hinder the deployment of energy from renewable sources. Therefore the specific structure of the renewable energy sector should be taken into account when national, regional and local authorities review their administrative procedures for giving permission to construct and operate plants and associated transmission and distribution network infrastructures for the production of electricity, heating and cooling or transport fuels from renewable energy sources. Administrative approval procedures should be streamlined with transparent timetables for installations using energy from renewable sources. Planning rules and guidelines should be adapted to take into consideration cost-effective and environmentally beneficial renewable heating and cooling and electricity equipment.
(42) For the benefit of rapid deployment of energy from renewable sources and in view of their overall high sustainable and environmental beneficial quality, Member States should, when applying administrative rules, planning structures and legislation which are designed for licensing installations with respect to pollution reduction and control for industrial plants, for combating air pollution and for the prevention or minimisation of the discharge of dangerous substances in the environment, take into account the contribution of renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(43) In order to stimulate the contribution by individual citizens to the objectives set out in this Directive, the relevant authorities should consider the possibility of replacing authorisations by simple notifications to the competent body when installing small decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources.
(44) The coherence between the objectives of this Directive and the Community’s other environmental legislation should be ensured. In particular, during the assessment, planning or licensing procedures for renewable energy installations, Member States should take account of all Community environmental legislation and the contribution made by renewable energy sources towards meeting environmental and climate change objectives, in particular when compared to non-renewable energy installations.
(45) National technical specifications and other requirements falling within the scope of Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 laying down a procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and rules on Information Society services(13), relating for example to levels of quality, testing methods or conditions of use, should not create barriers for trade in renewable energy equipment and systems. Therefore, support schemes for energy from renewable sources should not prescribe national technical specifications which deviate from existing Community standards or require the supported equipment or systems to be certified or tested in a specified location or by a specified entity.
(46) It is appropriate for Member States to consider mechanisms for the promotion of district heating and cooling from energy from renewable sources.
(47) At national and regional level, rules and obligations for minimum requirements for the use of energy from renewable sources in new and renovated buildings have led to considerable increases in the use of energy from renewable sources. Those measures should be encouraged in a wider Community context, while promoting the use of more energy-efficient applications of energy from renewable sources through building regulations and codes.
(48) It may be appropriate for Member States, in order to facilitate and accelerate the setting of minimum levels for the use of energy from renewable sources in buildings, to provide that such levels are achieved by incorporating a factor for energy from renewable sources in meeting minimum energy performance requirements under Directive 2002/91/EC, relating to a cost-optimal reduction of carbon emissions per building.
(49) Information and training gaps, especially in the heating and cooling sector, should be removed in order to encourage the deployment of energy from renewable sources.
(50) In so far as the access or pursuit of the profession of installer is a regulated profession, the preconditions for the recognition of professional qualifications are laid down in Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications(14). This Directive therefore applies without prejudice to Directive 2005/36/EC.
(51) While Directive 2005/36/EC lays down requirements for the mutual recognition of professional qualifications, including for architects, there is a further need to ensure that architects and planners properly consider an optimal combination of renewable energy sources and high-efficiency technologies in their plans and designs. Member States should therefore provide clear guidance in this regard. This should be done without prejudice to the provisions of Directive 2005/36/EC and in particular Articles 46 and 49 thereof.
(52) Guarantees of origin issued for the purpose of this Directive have the sole function of proving to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources. A guarantee of origin can be transferred, independently of the energy to which it relates, from one holder to another. However, with a view to ensuring that a unit of electricity from renewable energy sources is disclosed to a customer only once, double counting and double disclosure of guarantees of origin should be avoided. Energy from renewable sources in relation to which the accompanying guarantee of origin has been sold separately by the producer should not be disclosed or sold to the final customer as energy from renewable sources. It is important to distinguish between green certificates used for support schemes and guarantees of origin.
(53) It is appropriate to allow the emerging consumer market for electricity from renewable energy sources to contribute to the construction of new installations for energy from renewable sources. Member States should therefore be able to require electricity suppliers who disclose their energy mix to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, to include a minimum percentage of guarantees of origin from recently constructed installations producing energy from renewable sources, provided that such a requirement is in conformity with Community law.
(54) It is important to provide information on how the supported electricity is allocated to final customers in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC. In order to improve the quality of that information to consumers, in particular as regards the amount of energy from renewable sources produced by new installations, the Commission should assess the effectiveness of the measures taken by Member States.
(55) Directive 2004/8/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 February 2004 on the promotion of cogeneration based on a useful heat demand in the internal energy market(15)provides for guarantees of origin for proving the origin of electricity produced from high-efficiency cogeneration plants. Such guarantees of origin cannot be used when disclosing the use of energy from renewable sources in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC as this might result in double counting and double disclosure.
(56) Guarantees of origin do not by themselves confer a right to benefit from national support schemes.
(57) There is a need to support the integration of energy from renewable sources into the transmission and distribution grid and the use of energy storage systems for integrated intermittent production of energy from renewable sources.
(58) The development of renewable energy projects, including renewable energy projects of European interest under the Trans-European Network for Energy (TEN-E) programme should be accelerated. To that end, the Commission should also analyse how the financing of such projects can be improved. Particular attention should be paid to renewable energy projects that will contribute to a significant increase in security of energy supply in the Community and neighbouring countries.
(59) Interconnection among countries facilitates integration of electricity from renewable energy sources. Besides smoothing out variability, interconnection can reduce balancing costs, encourage true competition bringing about lower prices, and support the development of networks. Also, the sharing and optimal use of transmission capacity could help avoid excessive need for newly built capacity.
(60) Priority access and guaranteed access for electricity from renewable energy sources are important for integrating renewable energy sources into the internal market in electricity, in line with Article 11(2) and developing further Article 11(3) of Directive 2003/54/EC. Requirements relating to the maintenance of the reliability and safety of the grid and to the dispatching may differ according to the characteristics of the national grid and its secure operation. Priority access to the grid provides an assurance given to connected generators of electricity from renewable energy sources that they will be able to sell and transmit the electricity from renewable energy sources in accordance with connection rules at all times, whenever the source becomes available. In the event that the electricity from renewable energy sources is integrated into the spot market, guaranteed access ensures that all electricity sold and supported obtains access to the grid, allowing the use of a maximum amount of electricity from renewable energy sources from installations connected to the grid. However, this does not imply any obligation on the part of Member States to support or introduce purchase obligations for energy from renewable sources. In other systems, a fixed price is defined for electricity from renewable energy sources, usually in combination with a purchase obligation for the system operator. In such a case, priority access has already been given.
(61) In certain circumstances it is not possible fully to ensure transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. In such circumstances it may be appropriate for financial compensation to be given to those producers. Nevertheless, the objectives of this Directive require a sustained increase in the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources without affecting the reliability or safety of the grid system. To this end, Member States should take appropriate measures in order to allow a higher penetration of electricity from renewable energy sources, inter alia, by taking into account the specificities of variable resources and resources which are not yet storable. To the extent required by the objectives set out in this Directive, the connection of new renewable energy installations should be allowed as soon as possible. In order to accelerate grid connection procedures, Member States may provide for priority connection or reserved connection capacities for new installations producing electricity from renewable energy sources.
(62) The costs of connecting new producers of electricity and gas from renewable energy sources to the electricity and gas grids should be objective, transparent and non-discriminatory and due account should be taken of the benefit that embedded producers of electricity from renewable energy sources and local producers of gas from renewable sources bring to the electricity and gas grids.
(63) Electricity producers who want to exploit the potential of energy from renewable sources in the peripheral regions of the Community, in particular in island regions and regions of low population density, should, whenever feasible, benefit from reasonable connection costs in order to ensure that they are not unfairly disadvantaged in comparison with producers situated in more central, more industrialised and more densely populated areas.
(64) Directive 2001/77/EC lays down the framework for the integration into the grid of electricity from renewable energy sources. However, there is a significant variation between Member States in the degree of integration actually achieved. For this reason it is necessary to strengthen the framework and to review its application periodically at national level.
(65) Biofuel production should be sustainable. Biofuels used for compliance with the targets laid down in this Directive, and those that benefit from national support schemes, should therefore be required to fulfil sustainability criteria.
(66) The Community should take appropriate steps in the context of this Directive, including the promotion of sustainability criteria for biofuels and the development of second and third-generation biofuels in the Community and worldwide, and to strengthen agricultural research and knowledge creation in those areas.
(67) The introduction of sustainability criteria for biofuels will not achieve its objective if those products that do not fulfil the criteria and would otherwise have been used as biofuels are used, instead, as bioliquids in the heating or electricity sectors. For this reason, the sustainability criteria should also apply to bioliquids in general.
(68) The European Council of March 2007 invited the Commission to propose a comprehensive Directive on the use of all renewable energy sources, which could contain criteria and provisions to ensure sustainable provision and use of bioenergy. Such sustainability criteria should form a coherent part of a wider scheme covering all bioliquids and not biofuels alone. Such sustainability criteria should therefore be included in this Directive. In order to ensure a coherent approach between energy and environment policies, and to avoid the additional costs to business and the environmental incoherence that would be associated with an inconsistent approach, it is essential to provide the same sustainability criteria for the use of biofuels for the purposes of this Directive on the one hand, and Directive 98/70/EC on the other. For the same reasons, double reporting should be avoided in this context. Furthermore, the Commission and the competent national authorities should coordinate their activities in the framework of a committee specifically responsible for sustainability aspects. The Commission should, in addition, in 2009, review the possible inclusion of other biomass applications and the modalities relating thereto.
(69) The increasing worldwide demand for biofuels and bioliquids, and the incentives for their use provided for in this Directive, should not have the effect of encouraging the destruction of biodiverse lands. Those finite resources, recognised in various international instruments to be of value to all mankind, should be preserved. Consumers in the Community would, in addition, find it morally unacceptable that their increased use of biofuels and bioliquids could have the effect of destroying biodiverse lands. For these reasons, it is necessary to provide sustainability criteria ensuring that biofuels and bioliquids can qualify for the incentives only when it can be guaranteed that they do not originate in biodiverse areas or, in the case of areas designated for nature protection purposes or for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species, the relevant competent authority demonstrates that the production of the raw material does not interfere with those purposes. The sustainability criteria should consider forest as biodiverse where it is a primary forest in accordance with the definition used by the Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations (FAO) in its Global Forest Resource Assessment, which countries use worldwide to report on the extent of primary forest or where it is protected by national nature protection law. Areas where collection of non-wood forest products occurs should be included, provided the human impact is small. Other types of forests as defined by the FAO, such as modified natural forests, semi-natural forests and plantations, should not be considered as primary forests. Having regard, furthermore, to the highly biodiverse nature of certain grasslands, both temperate and tropical, including highly biodiverse savannahs, steppes, scrublands and prairies, biofuels made from raw materials originating in such lands should not qualify for the incentives provided for by this Directive. The Commission should establish appropriate criteria and geographical ranges to define such highly biodiverse grasslands in accordance with the best available scientific evidence and relevant international standards.
(70) If land with high stocks of carbon in its soil or vegetation is converted for the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels or bioliquids, some of the stored carbon will generally be released into the atmosphere, leading to the formation of carbon dioxide. The resulting negative greenhouse gas impact can offset the positive greenhouse gas impact of the biofuels or bioliquids, in some cases by a wide margin. The full carbon effects of such conversion should therefore be accounted for in calculating the greenhouse gas emission saving of particular biofuels and bioliquids. This is necessary to ensure that the greenhouse gas emission saving calculation takes into account the totality of the carbon effects of the use of biofuels and bioliquids.
(71) In calculating the greenhouse gas impact of land conversion, economic operators should be able to use actual values for the carbon stocks associated with the reference land use and the land use after conversion. They should also be able to use standard values. The work of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change is the appropriate basis for such standard values. That work is not currently expressed in a form that is immediately applicable by economic operators. The Commission should therefore produce guidance drawing on that work to serve as the basis for the calculation of carbon stock changes for the purposes of this Directive, including such changes to forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 to 30 %, savannahs, scrublands and prairies.
(72) It is appropriate for the Commission to develop methodologies with a view to assessing the impact of the drainage of peatlands on greenhouse gas emissions.
(73) Land should not be converted for the production of biofuels if its carbon stock loss upon conversion could not, within a reasonable period, taking into account the urgency of tackling climate change, be compensated by the greenhouse gas emission saving resulting from the production of biofuels or bioliquids. This would prevent unnecessary, burdensome research by economic operators and the conversion of high-carbon-stock land that would prove to be ineligible for producing raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids. Inventories of worldwide carbon stocks indicate that wetlands and continuously forested areas with a canopy cover of more than 30 % should be included in that category. Forested areas with a canopy cover of between 10 and 30 % should also be included, unless there is evidence demonstrating that their carbon stock is sufficiently low to justify their conversion in accordance with the rules laid down in this Directive. The reference to wetlands should take into account the definition laid down in the Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, especially as Waterfowl Habitat, adopted on 2 February 1971 in Ramsar.
(74) The incentives provided for in this Directive will encourage increased production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide. Where biofuels and bioliquids are made from raw material produced within the Community, they should also comply with Community environmental requirements for agriculture, including those concerning the protection of groundwater and surface water quality, and with social requirements. However, there is a concern that production of biofuels and bioliquids in certain third countries might not respect minimum environmental or social requirements. It is therefore appropriate to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that cover key environmental and social considerations, in order to promote the production of biofuels and bioliquids worldwide in a sustainable manner. In the absence of such agreements or schemes, Member States should require economic operators to report on those issues.
(75) The requirements for a sustainability scheme for energy uses of biomass, other than bioliquids and biofuels, should be analysed by the Commission in 2009, taking into account the need for biomass resources to be managed in a sustainable manner.
(76) Sustainability criteria will be effective only if they lead to changes in the behaviour of market actors. Those changes will occur only if biofuels and bioliquids meeting those criteria command a price premium compared to those that do not. According to the mass balance method of verifying compliance, there is a physical link between the production of biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria and the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids in the Community, providing an appropriate balance between supply and demand and ensuring a price premium that is greater than in systems where there is no such link. To ensure that biofuels and bioliquids meeting the sustainability criteria can be sold at a higher price, the mass balance method should therefore be used to verify compliance. This should maintain the integrity of the system while at the same time avoiding the imposition of an unreasonable burden on industry. Other verification methods should, however, be reviewed.
(77) Where appropriate, the Commission should take due account of the Millennium Ecosystem Assessment which contains useful data for the conservation of at least those areas that provide basic ecosystem services in critical situations such as watershed protection and erosion control.
(78) It is appropriate to monitor the impact of biomass cultivation, such as through land-use changes, including displacement, the introduction of invasive alien species and other effects on biodiversity, and effects on food production and local prosperity. The Commission should consider all relevant sources of information, including the FAO hunger map. Biofuels should be promoted in a manner that encourages greater agricultural productivity and the use of degraded land.
(79) It is in the interests of the Community to encourage the development of multilateral and bilateral agreements and voluntary international or national schemes that set standards for the production of sustainable biofuels and bioliquids, and that certify that the production of biofuels and bioliquids meets those standards. For that reason, provision should be made for such agreements or schemes to be recognised as providing reliable evidence and data, provided that they meet adequate standards of reliability, transparency and independent auditing.
(80) It is necessary to lay down clear rules for the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions from biofuels and bioliquids and their fossil fuel comparators.
(81) Co-products from the production and use of fuels should be taken into account in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions. The substitution method is appropriate for the purposes of policy analysis, but not for the regulation of individual economic operators and individual consignments of transport fuels. In those cases the energy allocation method is the most appropriate method, as it is easy to apply, is predictable over time, minimises counter-productive incentives and produces results that are generally comparable with those produced by the substitution method. For the purposes of policy analysis the Commission should also, in its reporting, present results using the substitution method.
(82) In order to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, a list of default values should be laid down for common biofuel production pathways and that list should be updated and expanded when further reliable data is available. Economic operators should always be entitled to claim the level of greenhouse gas emission saving for biofuels and bioliquids established by that list. Where the default value for greenhouse gas emission saving from a production pathway lies below the required minimum level of greenhouse gas emission saving, producers wishing to demonstrate their compliance with this minimum level should be required to show that actual emissions from their production process are lower than those that were assumed in the calculation of the default values.
(83) It is appropriate for the data used in the calculation of the default values to be obtained from independent, scientifically expert sources and to be updated as appropriate as those sources progress their work. The Commission should encourage those sources to address, when they update their work, emissions from cultivation, the effect of regional and climatological conditions, the effects of cultivation using sustainable agricultural and organic farming methods, and the scientific contribution of producers, within the Community and in third countries, and civil society.
(84) In order to avoid encouraging the cultivation of raw materials for biofuels and bioliquids in places where this would lead to high greenhouse gas emissions, the use of default values for cultivation should be limited to regions where such an effect can reliably be ruled out. However, to avoid a disproportionate administrative burden, it is appropriate for Member States to establish national or regional averages for emissions from cultivation, including from fertiliser use.
(85) Global demand for agricultural commodities is growing. Part of that increased demand will be met through an increase in the amount of land devoted to agriculture. The restoration of land that has been severely degraded or heavily contaminated and therefore cannot be used, in its present state, for agricultural purposes is a way of increasing the amount of land available for cultivation. The sustainability scheme should promote the use of restored degraded land because the promotion of biofuels and bioliquids will contribute to the growth in demand for agricultural commodities. Even if biofuels themselves are made using raw materials from land already in arable use, the net increase in demand for crops caused by the promotion of biofuels could lead to a net increase in the cropped area. This could affect high carbon stock land, which would result in damaging carbon stock losses. To alleviate that risk, it is appropriate to introduce accompanying measures to encourage an increased rate of productivity on land already used for crops, the use of degraded land, and the adoption of sustainability requirements, comparable to those laid down in this Directive for Community biofuel consumption, in other biofuel-consuming countries. The Commission should develop a concrete methodology to minimise greenhouse gas emissions caused by indirect land-use changes. To this end, the Commission should analyse, on the basis of best available scientific evidence, in particular, the inclusion of a factor for indirect land-use changes in the calculation of greenhouse gas emissions and the need to incentivise sustainable biofuels which minimise the impacts of land-use change and improve biofuel sustainability with respect to indirect land-use change. In developing that methodology, the Commission should address, inter alia, the potential indirect land-use changes resulting from biofuels produced from non-food cellulosic material and from ligno-cellulosic material.
(86) In order to permit the achievement of an adequate market share of biofuels, it is necessary to ensure the placing on the market of higher blends of biodiesel in diesel than those envisaged by standard EN590/2004.
(87) In order to ensure that biofuels that diversify the range of feedstocks used become commercially viable, those biofuels should receive an extra weighting under national biofuel obligations.
(88) Regular reporting is needed to ensure a continuing focus on progress in the development of energy from renewable sources at national and Community level. It is appropriate to require the use of a harmonised template for national renewable energy action plans which Member States should submit. Such plans could include estimated costs and benefits of the measures envisaged, measures relating to the necessary extension or reinforcement of the existing grid infrastructure, estimated costs and benefits to develop energy from renewable sources in excess of the level required by the indicative trajectory, information on national support schemes and information on their use of energy from renewable sources in new or renovated buildings.
(89) When designing their support systems, Member States may encourage the use of biofuels which give additional benefits, including the benefits of diversification offered by biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material, ligno-cellulosic material and algae, as well as non-irrigated plants grown in arid areas to fight desertification, by taking due account of the different costs of producing energy from traditional biofuels on the one hand and of those biofuels that give additional benefits on the other. Member States may encourage investment in research and development in relation to those and other renewable energy technologies that need time to become competitive.
(90) The implementation of this Directive should reflect, where relevant, the provisions of the Convention on Access to Information, Public Participation in Decision-Making and Access to Justice in Environmental Matters, in particular as implemented through Directive 2003/4/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 28 January 2003 on public access to environmental information(16).
(91) The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission(17).
(92) In particular, the Commission should be empowered to adapt the methodological principles and values necessary for assessing whether sustainability criteria have been fulfilled in relation to biofuels and bioliquids, to adapt the energy content of transport fuels to technical and scientific progress, to establish criteria and geographic ranges for determining highly biodiverse grassland, and to establish detailed definitions for severely degraded or contaminated land. Since those measures are of general scope and are designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, inter alia, by supplementing it with new non-essential elements, they must be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny provided for in Article 5a of Decision 1999/468/EC.
(93) Those provisions of Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC that overlap with the provisions of this Directive should be deleted from the latest possible moment for transposition of this Directive. Those that deal with targets and reporting for 2010 should remain in force until the end of 2011. It is therefore necessary to amend Directive 2001/77/EC and Directive 2003/30/EC accordingly.
(94) Since the measures provided for in Articles 17 to 19 also have an effect on the functioning of the internal market by harmonising the sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids for the target accounting purposes under this Directive, and thus facilitate, in accordance with Article 17(8), trade between Member States in biofuels and bioliquids which comply with those conditions, they are based on Article 95 of the Treaty.
(95) The sustainability scheme should not prevent Member States from taking into account, in their national support schemes, the higher production cost of biofuels and bioliquids that deliver benefits that exceed the minima laid down in the sustainability scheme.
(96) Since the general objectives of this Directive, namely to achieve a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy and a 10 % share of energy from renewable sources in each Member State’s transport energy consumption by 2020, cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, be better achieved at Community level, the Community may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Directive does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(97) In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional agreement on better law-making(18), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interest of the Community, their own tables illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures and to make them public,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Subject matter and scope

This Directive establishes a common framework for the promotion of energy from renewable sources. It sets mandatory national targets for the overall share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy and for the share of energy from renewable sources in transport. It lays down rules relating to statistical transfers between Member States, joint projects between Member States and with third countries, guarantees of origin, administrative procedures, information and training, and access to the electricity grid for energy from renewable sources. It establishes sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids.

Definitions

For the purposes of this Directive, the definitions in Directive 2003/54/EC apply.
The following definitions also apply:
(a)
‘energy from renewable sources’ means energy from renewable non-fossil sources, namely wind, solar, aerothermal, geothermal, hydrothermal and ocean energy, hydropower, biomass, landfill gas, sewage treatment plant gas and biogases;
(b)
‘aerothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in the ambient air;
(c)
‘geothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat beneath the surface of solid earth;
(d)
‘hydrothermal energy’ means energy stored in the form of heat in surface water;
(e)
‘biomass’ means the biodegradable fraction of products, waste and residues from biological origin from agriculture (including vegetal and animal substances), forestry and related industries including fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the biodegradable fraction of industrial and municipal waste;
(f)
‘gross final consumption of energy’ means the energy commodities delivered for energy purposes to industry, transport, households, services including public services, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, including the consumption of electricity and heat by the energy branch for electricity and heat production and including losses of electricity and heat in distribution and transmission;
(g)
‘district heating’ or ‘district cooling’ means the distribution of thermal energy in the form of steam, hot water or chilled liquids, from a central source of production through a network to multiple buildings or sites, for the use of space or process heating or cooling;
(h)
‘bioliquids’ means liquid fuel for energy purposes other than for transport, including electricity and heating and cooling, produced from biomass;
(i)
‘biofuels’ means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport produced from biomass;
(j)
‘guarantee of origin’ means an electronic document which has the sole function of providing proof to a final customer that a given share or quantity of energy was produced from renewable sources as required by Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(k)
‘support scheme’ means any instrument, scheme or mechanism applied by a Member State or a group of Member States, that promotes the use of energy from renewable sources by reducing the cost of that energy, increasing the price at which it can be sold, or increasing, by means of a renewable energy obligation or otherwise, the volume of such energy purchased. This includes, but is not restricted to, investment aid, tax exemptions or reductions, tax refunds, renewable energy obligation support schemes including those using green certificates, and direct price support schemes including feed-in tariffs and premium payments;
(l)
‘renewable energy obligation’ means a national support scheme requiring energy producers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their production, requiring energy suppliers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their supply, or requiring energy consumers to include a given proportion of energy from renewable sources in their consumption. This includes schemes under which such requirements may be fulfilled by using green certificates;
(m)
‘actual value’ means the greenhouse gas emission saving for some or all of the steps of a specific biofuel production process calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V;
(n)
‘typical value’ means an estimate of the representative greenhouse gas emission saving for a particular biofuel production pathway;
(o)
‘default value’ means a value derived from a typical value by the application of pre-determined factors and that may, in circumstances specified in this Directive, be used in place of an actual value.

Mandatory national overall targets and measures for the use of energy from renewable sources

1. Each Member State shall ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources, calculated in accordance with Articles 5 to 11, in gross final consumption of energy in 2020 is at least its national overall target for the share of energy from renewable sources in that year, as set out in the third column of the table in part A of Annex I. Such mandatory national overall targets are consistent with a target of at least a 20 % share of energy from renewable sources in the Community’s gross final consumption of energy in 2020. In order to achieve the targets laid down in this Article more easily, each Member State shall promote and encourage energy efficiency and energy saving.
2. Member States shall introduce measures effectively designed to ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources equals or exceeds that shown in the indicative trajectory set out in part B of Annex I.
3. In order to reach the targets set in paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article Member States may, inter alia, apply the following measures:
(a)
support schemes;
(b)
measures of cooperation between different Member States and with third countries for achieving their national overall targets in accordance with Articles 5 to 11.
Without prejudice to Articles 87 and 88 of the Treaty, Member States shall have the right to decide, in accordance with Articles 5 to 11 of this Directive, to which extent they support energy from renewable sources which is produced in a different Member State.
4. Each Member State shall ensure that the share of energy from renewable sources in all forms of transport in 2020 is at least 10 % of the final consumption of energy in transport in that Member State.
For the purposes of this paragraph, the following provisions shall apply:
(a)
for the calculation of the denominator, that is the total amount of energy consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, only petrol, diesel, biofuels consumed in road and rail transport, and electricity shall be taken into account;
(b)
for the calculation of the numerator, that is the amount of energy from renewable sources consumed in transport for the purposes of the first subparagraph, all types of energy from renewable sources consumed in all forms of transport shall be taken into account;
(c)
for the calculation of the contribution from electricity produced from renewable sources and consumed in all types of electric vehicles for the purpose of points (a) and (b), Member States may choose to use either the average share of electricity from renewable energy sources in the Community or the share of electricity from renewable energy sources in their own country as measured two years before the year in question. Furthermore, for the calculation of the electricity from renewable energy sources consumed by electric road vehicles, that consumption shall be considered to be 2,5 times the energy content of the input of electricity from renewable energy sources.
By 31 December 2011, the Commission shall present, if appropriate, a proposal permitting, subject to certain conditions, the whole amount of the electricity originating from renewable sources used to power all types of electric vehicles to be considered.
By 31 December 2011, the Commission shall also present, if appropriate, a proposal for a methodology for calculating the contribution of hydrogen originating from renewable sources in the total fuel mix.

National renewable energy action plans

1. Each Member State shall adopt a national renewable energy action plan. The national renewable energy action plans shall set out Member States’ national targets for the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in transport, electricity and heating and cooling in 2020, taking into account the effects of other policy measures relating to energy efficiency on final consumption of energy, and adequate measures to be taken to achieve those national overall targets, including cooperation between local, regional and national authorities, planned statistical transfers or joint projects, national policies to develop existing biomass resources and mobilise new biomass resources for different uses, and the measures to be taken to fulfil the requirements of Articles 13 to 19.
By 30 June 2009, the Commission shall adopt a template for the national renewable energy action plans. That template shall comprise the minimum requirements set out in Annex VI. Member States shall comply with that template in the presentation of their national renewable energy action plans.
2. Member States shall notify their national renewable energy action plans to the Commission by 30 June 2010.
3. Each Member State shall publish and notify to the Commission, six months before its national renewable energy action plan is due, a forecast document indicating:
(a)
its estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States in accordance with Articles 6 to 11, as well as its estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020; and
(b)
its estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020.
That information may include elements relating to cost and benefits and financing. That forecast shall be updated in the reports of the Member States as set out in Article 22(1)(l) and (m).
4. A Member State whose share of energy from renewable sources fell below the indicative trajectory in the immediately preceding two-year period set out in part B of Annex I, shall submit an amended national renewable energy action plan to the Commission by 30 June of the following year, setting out adequate and proportionate measures to rejoin, within a reasonable timetable, the indicative trajectory in part B of Annex I.
The Commission may, if the Member State has not met the indicative trajectory by a limited margin, and taking due account of the current and future measures taken by the Member State, adopt a decision to release the Member State from the obligation to submit an amended national renewable energy action plan.
5. The Commission shall evaluate the national renewable energy action plans, notably the adequacy of the measures envisaged by the Member State in accordance with Article 3(2). In response to a national renewable energy action plan or to an amended national renewable energy action plan, the Commission may issue a recommendation.
6. The Commission shall send to the European Parliament the national renewable energy action plans and the forecast documents in the form as made public on the transparency platform as referred to in Article 24(2), as well as any recommendation as referred to in paragraph 5 of this Article.

Calculation of the share of energy from renewable sources

1. The gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources in each Member State shall be calculated as the sum of:
(a)
gross final consumption of electricity from renewable energy sources;
(b)
gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for heating and cooling; and
(c)
final consumption of energy from renewable sources in transport.
Gas, electricity and hydrogen from renewable energy sources shall be considered only once in point (a), (b), or (c) of the first subparagraph, for calculating the share of gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources.
Subject to the second subparagraph of Article 17(1), biofuels and bioliquids that do not fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (6) shall not be taken into account.
2. Where a Member State considers that, due to force majeure, it is impossible for it to meet its share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy in 2020 set out in the third column of the table in Annex I, it shall inform the Commission accordingly as soon as possible. The Commission shall adopt a decision on whether force majeure has been demonstrated. In the event that the Commission decides that force majeure has been demonstrated, it shall determine what adjustment shall be made to the Member State’s gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for the year 2020.
3. For the purposes of paragraph 1(a), gross final consumption of electricity from renewable energy sources shall be calculated as the quantity of electricity produced in a Member State from renewable energy sources, excluding the production of electricity in pumped storage units from water that has previously been pumped uphill.
In multi-fuel plants using renewable and conventional sources, only the part of electricity produced from renewable energy sources shall be taken into account. For the purposes of this calculation, the contribution of each energy source shall be calculated on the basis of its energy content.
The electricity generated by hydropower and wind power shall be accounted for in accordance with the normalisation rules set out in Annex II.
4. For the purposes of paragraph 1(b), the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources for heating and cooling shall be calculated as the quantity of district heating and cooling produced in a Member State from renewable sources, plus the consumption of other energy from renewable sources in industry, households, services, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, for heating, cooling and processing purposes.
In multi-fuel plants using renewable and conventional sources, only the part of heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources shall be taken into account. For the purposes of this calculation, the contribution of each energy source shall be calculated on the basis of its energy content.
Aerothermal, geothermal and hydrothermal heat energy captured by heat pumps shall be taken into account for the purposes of paragraph 1(b) provided that the final energy output significantly exceeds the primary energy input required to drive the heat pumps. The quantity of heat to be considered as energy from renewable sources for the purposes of this Directive shall be calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in Annex VII.
Thermal energy generated by passive energy systems, under which lower energy consumption is achieved passively through building design or from heat generated by energy from non-renewable sources, shall not be taken into account for the purposes of paragraph 1(b).
5. The energy content of the transport fuels listed in Annex III shall be taken to be as set out in that Annex. Annex III may be adapted to technical and scientific progress. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
6. The share of energy from renewable sources shall be calculated as the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources divided by the gross final consumption of energy from all energy sources, expressed as a percentage.
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, the sum referred to in paragraph 1 shall be adjusted in accordance with Articles 6, 8, 10 and 11.
In calculating a Member State’s gross final energy consumption for the purpose of measuring its compliance with the targets and indicative trajectory laid down in this Directive, the amount of energy consumed in aviation shall, as a proportion of that Member State’s gross final consumption of energy, be considered to be no more than 6,18 %. For Cyprus and Malta the amount of energy consumed in aviation shall, as a proportion of those Member States’ gross final consumption of energy, be considered to be no more than 4,12 %.
7. The methodology and definitions used in the calculation of the share of energy from renewable sources shall be those of Regulation (EC) No 1099/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 October 2008 on energy statistics(19).
Member States shall ensure coherence of statistical information used in calculating those sectoral and overall shares and statistical information reported to the Commission under Regulation (EC) No 1099/2008.

Statistical transfers between Member States

1. Member States may agree on and may make arrangements for the statistical transfer of a specified amount of energy from renewable sources from one Member State to another Member State. The transferred quantity shall be:
(a)
deducted from the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by the Member State making the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2); and
(b)
added to the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account in measuring compliance by another Member State accepting the transfer with the requirements of Article 3(1) and (2).
A statistical transfer shall not affect the achievement of the national target of the Member State making the transfer.
2. The arrangements referred to in paragraph 1 may have a duration of one or more years. They shall be notified to the Commission no later than three months after the end of each year in which they have effect. The information sent to the Commission shall include the quantity and price of the energy involved.
3. Transfers shall become effective only after all Member States involved in the transfer have notified the transfer to the Commission.

Joint projects between Member States

1. Two or more Member States may cooperate on all types of joint projects relating to the production of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources. That cooperation may involve private operators.
2. Member States shall notify the Commission of the proportion or amount of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources produced by any joint project in their territory, that became operational after 25 June 2009, or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date, which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of another Member State for the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive.
3. The notification referred to in paragraph 2 shall:
(a)
describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b)
specify the proportion or amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of another Member State;
(c)
identify the Member State in whose favour the notification is being made; and
(d)
specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity or heating or cooling produced by the installation from renewable energy sources is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the other Member State.
4. The period specified under paragraph 3(d) shall not extend beyond 2020. The duration of a joint project may extend beyond 2020.
5. A notification made under this Article shall not be varied or withdrawn without the joint agreement of the Member State making the notification and the Member State identified in accordance with paragraph 3(c).

Effects of joint projects between Member States

1. Within three months of the end of each year falling within the period specified under Article 7(3)(d), the Member State that made the notification under Article 7 shall issue a letter of notification stating:
(a)
the total amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 7; and
(b)
the amount of electricity or heating or cooling produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards the national overall target of another Member State in accordance with the terms of the notification.
2. The notifying Member State shall send the letter of notification to the Member State in whose favour the notification was made and to the Commission.
3. For the purposes of measuring target compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 1(b) shall be:
(a)
deducted from the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State issuing the letter of notification under paragraph 1; and
(b)
added to the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State receiving the letter of notification in accordance with paragraph 2.

Joint projects between Member States and third countries

1. One or more Member States may cooperate with one or more third countries on all types of joint projects regarding the production of electricity from renewable energy sources. Such cooperation may involve private operators.
2. Electricity from renewable energy sources produced in a third country shall be taken into account only for the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets if the following conditions are met:
(a)
the electricity is consumed in the Community, a requirement that is deemed to be met where:
(i)
an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly nominated to the allocated interconnection capacity by all responsible transmission system operators in the country of origin, the country of destination and, if relevant, each third country of transit;
(ii)
an equivalent amount of electricity to the electricity accounted for has been firmly registered in the schedule of balance by the responsible transmission system operator on the Community side of an interconnector; and
(iii)
the nominated capacity and the production of electricity from renewable energy sources by the installation referred to in paragraph 2(b) refer to the same period of time;
(b)
the electricity is produced by a newly constructed installation that became operational after 25 June 2009 or by the increased capacity of an installation that was refurbished after that date, under a joint project as referred to in paragraph 1; and
(c)
the amount of electricity produced and exported has not received support from a support scheme of a third country other than investment aid granted to the installation.
3. Member States may apply to the Commission, for the purposes of Article 5, for account to be taken of electricity from renewable energy sources produced and consumed in a third country, in the context of the construction of an interconnector with a very long lead-time between a Member State and a third country if the following conditions are met:
(a)
construction of the interconnector started by 31 December 2016;
(b)
it is not possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2020;
(c)
it is possible for the interconnector to become operational by 31 December 2022;
(d)
after it becomes operational, the interconnector will be used for the export to the Community, in accordance with paragraph 2, of electricity generated from renewable energy sources;
(e)
the application relates to a joint project that fulfils the criteria in points (b) and (c) of paragraph 2 and that will use the interconnector after it becomes operational, and to a quantity of electricity that is no greater than the quantity that will be exported to the Community after the interconnector becomes operational.
4. The proportion or amount of electricity produced by any installation in the territory of a third country, which is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of one or more Member States for the purposes of measuring compliance with Article 3, shall be notified to the Commission. When more than one Member State is concerned, the distribution between Member States of this proportion or amount shall be notified to the Commission. This proportion or amount shall not exceed the proportion or amount actually exported to, and consumed in, the Community, corresponding to the amount referred to in paragraph 2(a)(i) and (ii) of this Article and meeting the conditions as set out in its paragraph (2)(a). The notification shall be made by each Member State towards whose overall national target the proportion or amount of electricity is to count.
5. The notification referred to in paragraph 4 shall:
(a)
describe the proposed installation or identify the refurbished installation;
(b)
specify the proportion or amount of electricity produced from the installation which is to be regarded as counting towards the national target of a Member State as well as, subject to confidentiality requirements, the corresponding financial arrangements;
(c)
specify the period, in whole calendar years, during which the electricity is to be regarded as counting towards the national overall target of the Member State; and
(d)
include a written acknowledgement of points (b) and (c) by the third country in whose territory the installation is to become operational and the proportion or amount of electricity produced by the installation which will be used domestically by that third country.
6. The period specified under paragraph 5(c) shall not extend beyond 2020. The duration of a joint project may extend beyond 2020.
7. A notification made under this Article may not be varied or withdrawn without the joint agreement of the Member State making the notification and the third country that has acknowledged the joint project in accordance with paragraph 5(d).
8. Member States and the Community shall encourage the relevant bodies of the Energy Community Treaty to take, in conformity with the Energy Community Treaty, the measures which are necessary so that the Contracting Parties to that Treaty can apply the provisions on cooperation laid down in this Directive between Member States.

Effects of joint projects between Member States and third countries

1. Within three months of the end of each year falling within the period specified under Article 9(5)(c), the Member State having made the notification under Article 9 shall issue a letter of notification stating:
(a)
the total amount of electricity produced during that year from renewable energy sources by the installation which was the subject of the notification under Article 9;
(b)
the amount of electricity produced during the year from renewable energy sources by that installation which is to count towards its national overall target in accordance with the terms of the notification under Article 9; and
(c)
proof of compliance with the conditions set out in Article 9(2).
2. The Member State shall send the letter of notification to the third country which has acknowledged the project in accordance with Article 9(5)(d) and to the Commission.
3. For the purposes of measuring target compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity produced from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 1(b) shall be added to the amount of energy from renewable sources that is taken into account, in measuring compliance by the Member State issuing the letter of notification.

Joint support schemes

1. Without prejudice to the obligations of Member States under Article 3, two or more Member States may decide, on a voluntary basis, to join or partly coordinate their national support schemes. In such cases, a certain amount of energy from renewable sources produced in the territory of one participating Member State may count towards the national overall target of another participating Member State if the Member States concerned:
(a)
make a statistical transfer of specified amounts of energy from renewable sources from one Member State to another Member State in accordance with Article 6; or
(b)
set up a distribution rule agreed by participating Member States that allocates amounts of energy from renewable sources between the participating Member States. Such a rule shall be notified to the Commission no later than three months after the end of the first year in which it takes effect.
2. Within three months of the end of each year each Member State having made a notification under paragraph 1(b) shall issue a letter of notification stating the total amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources produced during the year which is to be the subject of the distribution rule.
3. For the purposes of measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national overall targets, the amount of electricity or heating or cooling from renewable energy sources notified in accordance with paragraph 2 shall be reallocated between the concerned Member States in accordance with the notified distribution rule.

Capacity increases

For the purpose of Article 7(2) and Article 9(2)(b), units of energy from renewable sources imputable to an increase in the capacity of an installation shall be treated as if they were produced by a separate installation becoming operational at the moment at which the increase of capacity occurred.

Administrative procedures, regulations and codes

1. Member States shall ensure that any national rules concerning the authorisation, certification and licensing procedures that are applied to plants and associated transmission and distribution network infrastructures for the production of electricity, heating or cooling from renewable energy sources, and to the process of transformation of biomass into biofuels or other energy products, are proportionate and necessary.
Member States shall, in particular, take the appropriate steps to ensure that:
(a)
subject to differences between Member States in their administrative structures and organisation, the respective responsibilities of national, regional and local administrative bodies for authorisation, certification and licensing procedures including spatial planning are clearly coordinated and defined, with transparent timetables for determining planning and building applications;
(b)
comprehensive information on the processing of authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and on available assistance to applicants are made available at the appropriate level;
(c)
administrative procedures are streamlined and expedited at the appropriate administrative level;
(d)
rules governing authorisation, certification and licensing are objective, transparent, proportionate, do not discriminate between applicants and take fully into account the particularities of individual renewable energy technologies;
(e)
administrative charges paid by consumers, planners, architects, builders and equipment and system installers and suppliers are transparent and cost-related; and
(f)
simplified and less burdensome authorisation procedures, including through simple notification if allowed by the applicable regulatory framework, are established for smaller projects and for decentralised devices for producing energy from renewable sources, where appropriate.
2. Member States shall clearly define any technical specifications which must be met by renewable energy equipment and systems in order to benefit from support schemes. Where European standards exist, including eco-labels, energy labels and other technical reference systems established by the European standardisation bodies, such technical specifications shall be expressed in terms of those standards. Such technical specifications shall not prescribe where the equipment and systems are to be certified and should not impede the operation of the internal market.
3. Member States shall recommend to all actors, in particular local and regional administrative bodies to ensure equipment and systems are installed for the use of electricity, heating and cooling from renewable energy sources and for district heating and cooling when planning, designing, building and renovating industrial or residential areas. Member States shall, in particular, encourage local and regional administrative bodies to include heating and cooling from renewable energy sources in the planning of city infrastructure, where appropriate.
4. Member States shall introduce in their building regulations and codes appropriate measures in order to increase the share of all kinds of energy from renewable sources in the building sector.
In establishing such measures or in their regional support schemes, Member States may take into account national measures relating to substantial increases in energy efficiency and relating to cogeneration and to passive, low or zero-energy buildings.
By 31 December 2014, Member States shall, in their building regulations and codes or by other means with equivalent effect, where appropriate, require the use of minimum levels of energy from renewable sources in new buildings and in existing buildings that are subject to major renovation. Member States shall permit those minimum levels to be fulfilled, inter alia, through district heating and cooling produced using a significant proportion of renewable energy sources.
The requirements of the first subparagraph shall apply to the armed forces, only to the extent that its application does not cause any conflict with the nature and primary aim of the activities of the armed forces and with the exception of material used exclusively for military purposes.
5. Member States shall ensure that new public buildings, and existing public buildings that are subject to major renovation, at national, regional and local level fulfil an exemplary role in the context of this Directive from 1 January 2012 onwards. Member States may, inter alia, allow that obligation to be fulfilled by complying with standards for zero energy housing, or by providing that the roofs of public or mixed private-public buildings are used by third parties for installations that produce energy from renewable sources.
6. With respect to their building regulations and codes, Member States shall promote the use of renewable energy heating and cooling systems and equipment that achieve a significant reduction of energy consumption. Member States shall use energy or eco-labels or other appropriate certificates or standards developed at national or Community level, where these exist, as the basis for encouraging such systems and equipment.
In the case of biomass, Member States shall promote conversion technologies that achieve a conversion efficiency of at least 85 % for residential and commercial applications and at least 70 % for industrial applications.
In the case of heat pumps, Member States shall promote those that fulfil the minimum requirements of eco-labelling established in Commission Decision 2007/742/EC of 9 November 2007 establishing the ecological criteria for the award of the Community eco-label to electrically driven, gas driven or gas absorption heat pumps(20).
In the case of solar thermal energy, Member States shall promote certified equipment and systems based on European standards where these exist, including eco-labels, energy labels and other technical reference systems established by the European standardisation bodies.
In assessing the conversion efficiency and input/output ratio of systems and equipment for the purposes of this paragraph, Member States shall use Community or, in their absence, international procedures if such procedures exist.

Information and training

1. Member States shall ensure that information on support measures is made available to all relevant actors, such as consumers, builders, installers, architects, and suppliers of heating, cooling and electricity equipment and systems and of vehicles compatible with the use of energy from renewable sources.
2. Member States shall ensure that information on the net benefits, cost and energy efficiency of equipment and systems for the use of heating, cooling and electricity from renewable energy sources is made available either by the supplier of the equipment or system or by the national competent authorities.
3. Member States shall ensure that certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes become or are available by 31 December 2012 for installers of small-scale biomass boilers and stoves, solar photovoltaic and solar thermal systems, shallow geothermal systems and heat pumps. Those schemes may take into account existing schemes and structures as appropriate, and shall be based on the criteria laid down in Annex IV. Each Member State shall recognise certification awarded by other Member States in accordance with those criteria.
4. Member States shall make available to the public information on certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes as referred to in paragraph 3. Member States may also make available the list of installers who are qualified or certified in accordance with the provisions referred to in paragraph 3.
5. Member States shall ensure that guidance is made available to all relevant actors, notably for planners and architects so that they are able properly to consider the optimal combination of renewable energy sources, of high-efficiency technologies and of district heating and cooling when planning, designing, building and renovating industrial or residential areas.
6. Member States, with the participation of local and regional authorities, shall develop suitable information, awareness-raising, guidance or training programmes in order to inform citizens of the benefits and practicalities of developing and using energy from renewable sources.

Guarantees of origin of electricity, heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources

1. For the purposes of proving to final customers the share or quantity of energy from renewable sources in an energy supplier’s energy mix in accordance with Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, Member States shall ensure that the origin of electricity produced from renewable energy sources can be guaranteed as such within the meaning of this Directive, in accordance with objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
2. To that end, Member States shall ensure that a guarantee of origin is issued in response to a request from a producer of electricity from renewable energy sources. Member States may arrange for guarantees of origin to be issued in response to a request from producers of heating and cooling from renewable energy sources. Such an arrangement may be made subject to a minimum capacity limit. A guarantee of origin shall be of the standard size of 1 MWh. No more than one guarantee of origin shall be issued in respect of each unit of energy produced.
Member States shall ensure that the same unit of energy from renewable sources is taken into account only once.
Member States may provide that no support be granted to a producer when that producer receives a guarantee of origin for the same production of energy from renewable sources.
The guarantee of origin shall have no function in terms of a Member State’s compliance with Article 3. Transfers of guarantees of origin, separately or together with the physical transfer of energy, shall have no effect on the decision of Member States to use statistical transfers, joint projects or joint support schemes for target compliance or on the calculation of the gross final consumption of energy from renewable sources in accordance with Article 5.
3. Any use of a guarantee of origin shall take place within 12 months of production of the corresponding energy unit. A guarantee of origin shall be cancelled once it has been used.
4. Member States or designated competent bodies shall supervise the issuance, transfer and cancellation of guarantees of origin. The designated competent bodies shall have non-overlapping geographical responsibilities, and be independent of production, trade and supply activities.
5. Member States or the designated competent bodies shall put in place appropriate mechanisms to ensure that guarantees of origin shall be issued, transferred and cancelled electronically and are accurate, reliable and fraud-resistant.
6. A guarantee of origin shall specify at least:
(a)
the energy source from which the energy was produced and the start and end dates of production;
(b)
whether it relates to:
(i)
electricity; or
(ii)
heating or cooling;
(c)
the identity, location, type and capacity of the installation where the energy was produced;
(d)
whether and to what extent the installation has benefited from investment support, whether and to what extent the unit of energy has benefited in any other way from a national support scheme, and the type of support scheme;
(e)
the date on which the installation became operational; and
(f)
the date and country of issue and a unique identification number.
7. Where an electricity supplier is required to prove the share or quantity of energy from renewable sources in its energy mix for the purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC, it may do so by using its guarantees of origin.
8. The amount of energy from renewable sources corresponding to guarantees of origin transferred by an electricity supplier to a third party shall be deducted from the share of energy from renewable sources in its energy mix for the purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC.
9. Member States shall recognise guarantees of origin issued by other Member States in accordance with this Directive exclusively as proof of the elements referred to in paragraph 1 and paragraph 6(a) to (f). A Member State may refuse to recognise a guarantee of origin only when it has well-founded doubts about its accuracy, reliability or veracity. The Member State shall notify the Commission of such a refusal and its justification.
10. If the Commission finds that a refusal to recognise a guarantee of origin is unfounded, the Commission may adopt a decision requiring the Member State in question to recognise it.
11. A Member State may introduce, in conformity with Community law, objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria for the use of guarantees of origin in complying with the obligations laid down in Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC.
12. Where energy suppliers market energy from renewable sources to consumers with a reference to environmental or other benefits of energy from renewable sources, Member States may require those energy suppliers to make available, in summary form, information on the amount or share of energy from renewable sources that comes from installations or increased capacity that became operational after 25 June 2009.

Access to and operation of the grids

1. Member States shall take the appropriate steps to develop transmission and distribution grid infrastructure, intelligent networks, storage facilities and the electricity system, in order to allow the secure operation of the electricity system as it accommodates the further development of electricity production from renewable energy sources, including interconnection between Member States and between Member States and third countries. Member States shall also take appropriate steps to accelerate authorisation procedures for grid infrastructure and to coordinate approval of grid infrastructure with administrative and planning procedures.
2. Subject to requirements relating to the maintenance of the reliability and safety of the grid, based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria defined by the competent national authorities:
(a)
Member States shall ensure that transmission system operators and distribution system operators in their territory guarantee the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(b)
Member States shall also provide for either priority access or guaranteed access to the grid-system of electricity produced from renewable energy sources;
(c)
Member States shall ensure that when dispatching electricity generating installations, transmission system operators shall give priority to generating installations using renewable energy sources in so far as the secure operation of the national electricity system permits and based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria. Member States shall ensure that appropriate grid and market-related operational measures are taken in order to minimise the curtailment of electricity produced from renewable energy sources. If significant measures are taken to curtail the renewable energy sources in order to guarantee the security of the national electricity system and security of energy supply, Members States shall ensure that the responsible system operators report to the competent regulatory authority on those measures and indicate which corrective measures they intend to take in order to prevent inappropriate curtailments.
3. Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to set up and make public their standard rules relating to the bearing and sharing of costs of technical adaptations, such as grid connections and grid reinforcements, improved operation of the grid and rules on the non-discriminatory implementation of the grid codes, which are necessary in order to integrate new producers feeding electricity produced from renewable energy sources into the interconnected grid.
Those rules shall be based on objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria taking particular account of all the costs and benefits associated with the connection of those producers to the grid and of the particular circumstances of producers located in peripheral regions and in regions of low population density. Those rules may provide for different types of connection.
4. Where appropriate, Member States may require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to bear, in full or in part, the costs referred to in paragraph 3. Member States shall review and take the necessary measures to improve the frameworks and rules for the bearing and sharing of costs referred to in paragraph 3 by 30 June 2011 and every two years thereafter to ensure the integration of new producers as referred to in that paragraph.
5. Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators to provide any new producer of energy from renewable sources wishing to be connected to the system with the comprehensive and necessary information required, including:
(a)
a comprehensive and detailed estimate of the costs associated with the connection;
(b)
a reasonable and precise timetable for receiving and processing the request for grid connection;
(c)
a reasonable indicative timetable for any proposed grid connection.
Member States may allow producers of electricity from renewable energy sources wishing to be connected to the grid to issue a call for tender for the connection work.
6. The sharing of costs referred in paragraph 3 shall be enforced by a mechanism based on objective, transparent and non-discriminatory criteria taking into account the benefits which initially and subsequently connected producers as well as transmission system operators and distribution system operators derive from the connections.
7. Member States shall ensure that the charging of transmission and distribution tariffs does not discriminate against electricity from renewable energy sources, including in particular electricity from renewable energy sources produced in peripheral regions, such as island regions, and in regions of low population density. Member States shall ensure that the charging of transmission and distribution tariffs does not discriminate against gas from renewable energy sources.
8. Member States shall ensure that tariffs charged by transmission system operators and distribution system operators for the transmission and distribution of electricity from plants using renewable energy sources reflect realisable cost benefits resulting from the plant’s connection to the network. Such cost benefits could arise from the direct use of the low-voltage grid.
9. Where relevant, Member States shall assess the need to extend existing gas network infrastructure to facilitate the integration of gas from renewable energy sources.
10. Where relevant, Member States shall require transmission system operators and distribution system operators in their territory to publish technical rules in line with Article 6 of Directive 2003/55/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2003 concerning the common rules for the internal market in natural gas(21), in particular regarding network connection rules that include gas quality, gas odoration and gas pressure requirements. Member States shall also require transmission and distribution system operators to publish the connection tariffs to connect renewable gas sources based on transparent and non-discriminatory criteria.
11. Member States in their national renewable energy action plans shall assess the necessity to build new infrastructure for district heating and cooling produced from renewable energy sources in order to achieve the 2020 national target referred to in Article 3(1). Subject to that assessment, Member States shall, where relevant, take steps with a view to developing a district heating infrastructure to accommodate the development of heating and cooling production from large biomass, solar and geothermal facilities.

Sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids

1. Irrespective of whether the raw materials were cultivated inside or outside the territory of the Community, energy from biofuels and bioliquids shall be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) only if they fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in paragraphs 2 to 6:
(a)
measuring compliance with the requirements of this Directive concerning national targets;
(b)
measuring compliance with renewable energy obligations;
(c)
eligibility for financial support for the consumption of biofuels and bioliquids.
However, biofuels and bioliquids produced from waste and residues, other than agricultural, aquaculture, fisheries and forestry residues, need only fulfil the sustainability criteria set out in paragraph 2 in order to be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c).
2. The greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be at least 35 %.
With effect from 1 January 2017, the greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be at least 50 %. From 1 January 2018 that greenhouse gas emission saving shall be at least 60 % for biofuels and bioliquids produced in installations in which production started on or after 1 January 2017.
The greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels and bioliquids shall be calculated in accordance with Article 19(1).
In the case of biofuels and bioliquids produced by installations that were in operation on 23 January 2008, the first subparagraph shall apply from 1 April 2013.
3. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land with high biodiversity value, namely land that had one of the following statuses in or after January 2008, whether or not the land continues to have that status:
(a)
primary forest and other wooded land, namely forest and other wooded land of native species, where there is no clearly visible indication of human activity and the ecological processes are not significantly disturbed;
(b)
areas designated:
(i)
by law or by the relevant competent authority for nature protection purposes; or
(ii)
for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, subject to their recognition in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 18(4);
unless evidence is provided that the production of that raw material did not interfere with those nature protection purposes;
(c)
highly biodiverse grassland that is:
(i)
natural, namely grassland that would remain grassland in the absence of human intervention and which maintains the natural species composition and ecological characteristics and processes; or
(ii)
non-natural, namely grassland that would cease to be grassland in the absence of human intervention and which is species-rich and not degraded, unless evidence is provided that the harvesting of the raw material is necessary to preserve its grassland status.
The Commission shall establish the criteria and geographic ranges to determine which grassland shall be covered by point (c) of the first subparagraph. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, by supplementing it shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
4. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land with high carbon stock, namely land that had one of the following statuses in January 2008 and no longer has that status:
(a)
wetlands, namely land that is covered with or saturated by water permanently or for a significant part of the year;
(b)
continuously forested areas, namely land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of more than 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ;
(c)
land spanning more than one hectare with trees higher than five metres and a canopy cover of between 10 % and 30 %, or trees able to reach those thresholds in situ, unless evidence is provided that the carbon stock of the area before and after conversion is such that, when the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V is applied, the conditions laid down in paragraph 2 of this Article would be fulfilled.
The provisions of this paragraph shall not apply if, at the time the raw material was obtained, the land had the same status as it had in January 2008.
5. Biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall not be made from raw material obtained from land that was peatland in January 2008, unless evidence is provided that the cultivation and harvesting of that raw material does not involve drainage of previously undrained soil.
6. Agricultural raw materials cultivated in the Community and used for the production of biofuels and bioliquids taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1 shall be obtained in accordance with the requirements and standards under the provisions referred to under the heading ‘Environment’ in part A and in point 9 of Annex II to Council Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 of 19 January 2009 establishing common rules for direct support schemes for farmers under the common agricultural policy and establishing certain support schemes for farmers(22)and in accordance with the minimum requirements for good agricultural and environmental condition defined pursuant to Article 6(1) of that Regulation.
7. The Commission shall, every two years, report to the European Parliament and the Council, in respect of both third countries and Member States that are a significant source of biofuels or of raw material for biofuels consumed within the Community, on national measures taken to respect the sustainability criteria set out in paragraphs 2 to 5 and for soil, water and air protection. The first report shall be submitted in 2012.
The Commission shall, every two years, report to the European Parliament and the Council on the impact on social sustainability in the Community and in third countries of increased demand for biofuel, on the impact of Community biofuel policy on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices, in particular for people living in developing countries, and wider development issues. Reports shall address the respect of land-use rights. They shall state, both for third countries and Member States that are a significant source of raw material for biofuel consumed within the Community, whether the country has ratified and implemented each of the following Conventions of the International Labour Organisation:
—
Convention concerning Forced or Compulsory Labour (No 29),
—
Convention concerning Freedom of Association and Protection of the Right to Organise (No 87),
—
Convention concerning the Application of the Principles of the Right to Organise and to Bargain Collectively (No 98),
—
Convention concerning Equal Remuneration of Men and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value (No 100),
—
Convention concerning the Abolition of Forced Labour (No 105),
—
Convention concerning Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation (No 111),
—
Convention concerning Minimum Age for Admission to Employment (No 138),
—
Convention concerning the Prohibition and Immediate Action for the Elimination of the Worst Forms of Child Labour (No 182).
Those reports shall state, both for third countries and Member States that are a significant source of raw material for biofuel consumed within the Community, whether the country has ratified and implemented:
—
the Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety,
—
the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora.
The first report shall be submitted in 2012. The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action, in particular if evidence shows that biofuel production has a significant impact on food prices.
8. For the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1, Member States shall not refuse to take into account, on other sustainability grounds, biofuels and bioliquids obtained in compliance with this Article.
9. The Commission shall report on requirements for a sustainability scheme for energy uses of biomass, other than biofuels and bioliquids, by 31 December 2009. That report shall be accompanied, where appropriate, by proposals for a sustainability scheme for other energy uses of biomass, to the European Parliament and the Council. That report and any proposals contained therein shall be based on the best available scientific evidence, taking into account new developments in innovative processes. If the analysis done for that purpose demonstrates that it would be appropriate to introduce amendments, in relation to forest biomass, in the calculation methodology in Annex V or in the sustainability criteria relating to carbon stocks applied to biofuels and bioliquids, the Commission shall, where appropriate, make proposals to the European Parliament and Council at the same time in this regard.

Verification of compliance with the sustainability criteria for biofuels and bioliquids

1. Where biofuels and bioliquids are to be taken into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 17(1), Member States shall require economic operators to show that the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5) have been fulfilled. For that purpose they shall require economic operators to use a mass balance system which:
(a)
allows consignments of raw material or biofuel with differing sustainability characteristics to be mixed;
(b)
requires information about the sustainability characteristics and sizes of the consignments referred to in point (a) to remain assigned to the mixture; and
(c)
provides for the sum of all consignments withdrawn from the mixture to be described as having the same sustainability characteristics, in the same quantities, as the sum of all consignments added to the mixture.
2. The Commission shall report to the European Parliament and the Council in 2010 and 2012 on the operation of the mass balance verification method described in paragraph 1 and on the potential for allowing for other verification methods in relation to some or all types of raw material, biofuel or bioliquids. In its assessment, the Commission shall consider those verification methods in which information about sustainability characteristics need not remain physically assigned to particular consignments or mixtures. The assessment shall take into account the need to maintain the integrity and effectiveness of the verification system while avoiding the imposition of an unreasonable burden on industry. The report shall be accompanied, where appropriate, by proposals to the European Parliament and the Council concerning the use of other verification methods.
3. Member States shall take measures to ensure that economic operators submit reliable information and make available to the Member State, on request, the data that were used to develop the information. Member States shall require economic operators to arrange for an adequate standard of independent auditing of the information submitted, and to provide evidence that this has been done. The auditing shall verify that the systems used by economic operators are accurate, reliable and protected against fraud. It shall evaluate the frequency and methodology of sampling and the robustness of the data.
The information referred to in the first subparagraph shall include in particular information on compliance with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5), appropriate and relevant information on measures taken for soil, water and air protection, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and appropriate and relevant information concerning measures taken in order to take into account the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7).
The Commission shall, in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3), establish the list of appropriate and relevant information referred to in the first two subparagraphs. It shall ensure, in particular, that the provision of that information does not represent an excessive administrative burden for operators in general or for smallholder farmers, producer organisations and cooperatives in particular.
The obligations laid down in this paragraph shall apply whether the biofuels or bioliquids are produced within the Community or imported.
Member States shall submit to the Commission, in aggregated form, the information referred to in the first subparagraph of this paragraph. The Commission shall publish that information on the transparency platform referred to in Article 24 in summary form preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information.
4. The Community shall endeavour to conclude bilateral or multilateral agreements with third countries containing provisions on sustainability criteria that correspond to those of this Directive. Where the Community has concluded agreements containing provisions relating to matters covered by the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5), the Commission may decide that those agreements demonstrate that biofuels and bioliquids produced from raw materials cultivated in those countries comply with the sustainability criteria in question. When those agreements are concluded, due consideration shall be given to measures taken for the conservation of areas that provide, in critical situations, basic ecosystem services (such as watershed protection and erosion control), for soil, water and air protection, indirect land-use changes, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and to the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7).
The Commission may decide that voluntary national or international schemes setting standards for the production of biomass products contain accurate data for the purposes of Article 17(2) or demonstrate that consignments of biofuel comply with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(3) to (5). The Commission may decide that those schemes contain accurate data for the purposes of information on measures taken for the conservation of areas that provide, in critical situations, basic ecosystem services (such as watershed protection and erosion control), for soil, water and air protection, the restoration of degraded land, the avoidance of excessive water consumption in areas where water is scarce and on the issues referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(7). The Commission may also recognise areas for the protection of rare, threatened or endangered ecosystems or species recognised by international agreements or included in lists drawn up by intergovernmental organisations or the International Union for the Conservation of Nature for the purposes of Article 17(3)(b)(ii).
The Commission may decide that voluntary national or international schemes to measure greenhouse gas emission saving contain accurate data for the purposes of Article 17(2).
The Commission may decide that land that falls within the scope of a national or regional recovery programme aimed at improving severely degraded or heavily contaminated land fulfils the criteria referred to in point 9 of part C of Annex V.
5. The Commission shall adopt decisions under paragraph 4 only if the agreement or scheme in question meets adequate standards of reliability, transparency and independent auditing. In the case of schemes to measure greenhouse gas emission saving, such schemes shall also comply with the methodological requirements in Annex V. Lists of areas of high biodiversity value as referred to in Article 17(3)(b)(ii) shall meet adequate standards of objectivity and coherence with internationally recognised standards and provide for appropriate appeal procedures.
6. Decisions under paragraph 4 shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3). Such decisions shall be valid for a period of no more than five years.
7. When an economic operator provides proof or data obtained in accordance with an agreement or scheme that has been the subject of a decision pursuant to paragraph 4, to the extent covered by that decision, a Member State shall not require the supplier to provide further evidence of compliance with the sustainability criteria set out in Article 17(2) to (5) nor information on measures referred to in the second subparagraph of paragraph 3 of this Article.
8. At the request of a Member State or on its own initiative the Commission shall examine the application of Article 17 in relation to a source of biofuel or bioliquid and, within six months of receipt of a request and in accordance with the advisory procedure referred to in Article 25(3), decide whether the Member State concerned may take biofuel or bioliquid from that source into account for the purposes referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 17(1).
9. By 31 December 2012, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and to the Council on:
(a)
the effectiveness of the system in place for the provision of information on sustainability criteria; and
(b)
whether it is feasible and appropriate to introduce mandatory requirements in relation to air, soil or water protection, taking into account the latest scientific evidence and the Community’s international obligations.
The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action.

Calculation of the greenhouse gas impact of biofuels and bioliquids

1. For the purposes of Article 17(2), the greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuel and bioliquids shall be calculated as follows:
(a)
where a default value for greenhouse gas emission saving for the production pathway is laid down in part A or B of Annex V and where theelvalue for those biofuels or bioliquids calculated in accordance with point 7 of part C of Annex V is equal to or less than zero, by using that default value;
(b)
by using an actual value calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V; or
(c)
by using a value calculated as the sum of the factors of the formula referred to in point 1 of part C of Annex V, where disaggregated default values in part D or E of Annex V may be used for some factors, and actual values, calculated in accordance with the methodology laid down in part C of Annex V, for all other factors.
2. By 31 March 2010, Member States shall submit to the Commission a report including a list of those areas on their territory classified as level 2 in the nomenclature of territorial units for statistics (NUTS) or as a more disaggregated NUTS level in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1059/2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 May 2003 on the establishment of a common classification of territorial units for statistics (NUTS)(23)where the typical greenhouse gas emissions from cultivation of agricultural raw materials can be expected to be lower than or equal to the emissions reported under the heading ‘Disaggregated default values for cultivation’ in part D of Annex V to this Directive, accompanied by a description of the method and data used to establish that list. That method shall take into account soil characteristics, climate and expected raw material yields.
3. The default values in part A of Annex V for biofuels, and the disaggregated default values for cultivation in part D of Annex V for biofuels and bioliquids, may be used only when their raw materials are:
(a)
cultivated outside the Community;
(b)
cultivated in the Community in areas included in the lists referred to in paragraph 2; or
(c)
waste or residues other than agricultural, aquaculture and fisheries residues.
For biofuels and bioliquids not falling under points (a), (b) or (c), actual values for cultivation shall be used.
4. By 31 March 2010, the Commission shall submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council on the feasibility of drawing up lists of areas in third countries where the typical greenhouse gas emissions from cultivation of agricultural raw materials can be expected to be lower than or equal to the emissions reported under the heading ‘cultivation’ in part D of Annex V, accompanied if possible by such lists and a description of the method and data used to establish them. The report shall, if appropriate, be accompanied by relevant proposals.
5. The Commission shall report by 31 December 2012, and every two years thereafter, on the estimated typical and default values in parts B and E of Annex V, paying particular attention to emissions from transport and processing, and may, where necessary, decide to correct the values. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
6. The Commission shall, by 31 December 2010, submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council reviewing the impact of indirect land-use change on greenhouse gas emissions and addressing ways to minimise that impact. The report shall, if appropriate, be accompanied, by a proposal, based on the best available scientific evidence, containing a concrete methodology for emissions from carbon stock changes caused by indirect land-use changes, ensuring compliance with this Directive, in particular Article 17(2).
Such a proposal shall include the necessary safeguards to provide certainty for investment undertaken before that methodology is applied. With respect to installations that produced biofuels before the end of 2013, the application of the measures referred to in the first subparagraph shall not, until 31 December 2017, lead to biofuels produced by those installations being deemed to have failed to comply with the sustainability requirements of this Directive if they would otherwise have done so, provided that those biofuels achieve a greenhouse gas emission saving of at least 45 %. This shall apply to the capacities of the installations of biofuels at the end of 2012.
The European Parliament and the Council shall endeavour to decide, by 31 December 2012, on any such proposals submitted by the Commission.
7. Annex V may be adapted to technical and scientific progress, including by the addition of values for further biofuel production pathways for the same or for other raw materials and by modifying the methodology laid down in part C. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive, inter alia, by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).
Regarding the default values and methodology laid down in Annex V, particular consideration shall be given to:
—
the method of accounting for wastes and residues,
—
the method of accounting for co-products,
—
the method of accounting for cogeneration, and
—
the status given to agricultural crop residues as co-products.
The default values for waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel shall be reviewed as soon as possible.
Any adaptation of or addition to the list of default values in Annex V shall comply with the following:
(a)
where the contribution of a factor to overall emissions is small, or where there is limited variation, or where the cost or difficulty of establishing actual values is high, default values must be typical of normal production processes;
(b)
in all other cases default values must be conservative compared to normal production processes.
8. Detailed definitions, including technical specifications required for the categories set out in point 9 of part C of Annex V shall be established. Those measures, designed to amend non-essential elements of this Directive by supplementing it, shall be adopted in accordance with the regulatory procedure with scrutiny referred to in Article 25(4).

Implementing measures

The implementing measures referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(3), the third subparagraph of Article 18(3), Article 18(6), Article 18(8), Article 19(5), the first subparagraph of Article 19(7), and Article 19(8) shall also take full account of the purposes of Article 7a of Directive 98/70/EC.

Specific provisions related to energy from renewable sources in transport

1. Member States shall ensure that information is given to the public on the availability and environmental benefits of all different renewable sources of energy for transport. When the percentages of biofuels, blended in mineral oil derivatives, exceed 10 % by volume, Member States shall require this to be indicated at the sales points.
2. For the purposes of demonstrating compliance with national renewable energy obligations placed on operators and the target for the use of energy from renewable sources in all forms of transport referred to in Article 3(4), the contribution made by biofuels produced from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material shall be considered to be twice that made by other biofuels.

Reporting by the Member States

1. Each Member State shall submit a report to the Commission on progress in the promotion and use of energy from renewable sources by 31 December 2011, and every two years thereafter. The sixth report, to be submitted by 31 December 2021, shall be the last report required.
The report shall detail, in particular:
(a)
the sectoral (electricity, heating and cooling, and transport) and overall shares of energy from renewable sources in the preceding two calendar years and the measures taken or planned at national level to promote the growth of energy from renewable sources taking into account the indicative trajectory in part B of Annex I, in accordance with Article 5;
(b)
the introduction and functioning of support schemes and other measures to promote energy from renewable sources, and any developments in the measures used with respect to those set out in the Member State’s national renewable energy action plan, and information on how supported electricity is allocated to final customers for purposes of Article 3(6) of Directive 2003/54/EC;
(c)
how, where applicable, the Member State has structured its support schemes to take into account renewable energy applications that give additional benefits in relation to other, comparable applications, but may also have higher costs, including biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(d)
the functioning of the system of guarantees of origin for electricity and heating and cooling from renewable energy sources and the measures taken to ensure the reliability and protection against fraud of the system;
(e)
progress made in evaluating and improving administrative procedures to remove regulatory and non-regulatory barriers to the development of energy from renewable sources;
(f)
measures taken to ensure the transmission and distribution of electricity produced from renewable energy sources, and to improve the framework or rules for bearing and sharing of costs referred to in Article 16(3);
(g)
developments in the availability and use of biomass resources for energy purposes;
(h)
changes in commodity prices and land use within the Member State associated with its increased use of biomass and other forms of energy from renewable sources;
(i)
the development and share of biofuels made from wastes, residues, non-food cellulosic material, and ligno-cellulosic material;
(j)
the estimated impact of the production of biofuels and bioliquids on biodiversity, water resources, water quality and soil quality within the Member State;
(k)
the estimated net greenhouse gas emission saving due to the use of energy from renewable sources;
(l)
the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States, as well as the estimated potential for joint projects, until 2020;
(m)
the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production until 2020; and
(n)
information on how the share of biodegradable waste in waste used for producing energy has been estimated, and what steps have been taken to improve and verify such estimates.
2. In estimating net greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels, the Member State may, for the purpose of the reports referred to in paragraph 1, use the typical values given in part A and part B of Annex V.
3. In its first report, the Member State shall outline whether it intends to:
(a)
establish a single administrative body responsible for processing authorisation, certification and licensing applications for renewable energy installations and providing assistance to applicants;
(b)
provide for automatic approval of planning and permit applications for renewable energy installations where the authorising body has not responded within the set time limits; or
(c)
indicate geographical locations suitable for exploitation of energy from renewable sources in land-use planning and for the establishment of district heating and cooling.
4. In each report the Member State may correct the data of the previous reports.

Monitoring and reporting by the Commission

1. The Commission shall monitor the origin of biofuels and bioliquids consumed in the Community and the impact of their production, including impact as a result of displacement, on land use in the Community and the main third countries of supply. Such monitoring shall be based on Member States’ reports, submitted pursuant to Article 22(1), and those of relevant third countries, intergovernmental organisations, scientific studies and any other relevant pieces of information. The Commission shall also monitor the commodity price changes associated with the use of biomass for energy and any associated positive and negative effects on food security. The Commission shall monitor all installations to which Article 19(6) applies.
2. The Commission shall maintain a dialogue and exchange information with third countries and biofuel producers, consumer organisations and civil society concerning the general implementation of the measures in this Directive relating to biofuels and bioliquids. It shall, within that framework, pay particular attention to the impact biofuel production may have on food prices.
3. On the basis of the reports submitted by Member States pursuant to Article 22(1) and the monitoring and analysis referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the Commission shall report every two years to the European Parliament and the Council. The first report shall be submitted in 2012.
4. In reporting on greenhouse gas emission saving from the use of biofuels, the Commission shall use the values reported by Member States and shall evaluate whether and how the estimate would change if co-products were accounted for using the substitution approach.
5. In its reports, the Commission shall, in particular, analyse:
(a)
the relative environmental benefits and costs of different biofuels, the effects of the Community’s import policies thereon, the security of supply implications and the ways of achieving a balanced approach between domestic production and imports;
(b)
the impact of increased demand for biofuel on sustainability in the Community and in third countries, considering economic and environmental impacts, including impacts on biodiversity;
(c)
the scope for identifying, in a scientifically objective manner, geographical areas of high biodiversity value that are not covered in Article 17(3);
(d)
the impact of increased demand for biomass on biomass using sectors;
(e)
the availability of biofuels made from waste, residues, non-food cellulosic material and ligno-cellulosic material; and
(f)
indirect land-use changes in relation to all production pathways.
The Commission shall, if appropriate, propose corrective action.
6. On the basis of the reports submitted by Member States pursuant to Article 22(3), the Commission shall analyse the effectiveness of measures taken by Member States on establishing a single administrative body responsible for processing authorisation, certification and licensing applications and providing assistance to applicants.
7. In order to improve financing and coordination with a view to the achievement of the 20 % target referred to in Article 3(1), the Commission shall, by 31 December 2010, present an analysis and action plan on energy from renewable sources with a view, in particular, to:
(a)
the better use of structural funds and framework programmes;
(b)
the better and increased use of funds from the European Investment Bank and other public finance institutions;
(c)
better access to risk capital notably by analysing the feasibility of a risk sharing facility for investments in energy from renewable sources in the Community similar to the Global Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Fund initiative which is aimed at third countries;
(d)
the better coordination of Community and national funding and other forms of support; and
(e)
the better coordination in support of renewable energy initiatives whose success depends on action by actors in several Member States.
8. By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall present a report, addressing, in particular, the following elements:
(a)
a review of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving thresholds to apply from the dates referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 17(2), on the basis of an impact assessment taking into account, in particular, technological developments, available technologies and the availability of first and second-generation bio-fuels with a high level of greenhouse gas emission saving;
(b)
with respect to the target referred to in Article 3(4), a review of:
(i)
the cost-efficiency of the measures to be implemented to achieve the target;
(ii)
an assessment of the feasibility of reaching the target whilst ensuring the sustainability of biofuels production in the Community and in third countries, and considering economic, environmental and social impacts, including indirect effects and impacts on biodiversity, as well as the commercial availability of second-generation biofuels;
(iii)
the impact of the implementation of the target on the availability of foodstuffs at affordable prices;
(iv)
the commercial availability of electric, hybrid and hydrogen powered vehicles, as well as the methodology chosen to calculate the share of energy from renewable sources consumed in the transport sector;
(v)
the evaluation of specific market conditions, considering, in particular, markets on which transport fuels represent more than half of the final energy consumption, and markets which are fully dependent on imported biofuels;
(c)
an evaluation of the implementation of this Directive, in particular with regard to cooperation mechanisms, in order to ensure that, together with the possibility for the Members States to continue to use national support schemes referred to in Article 3(3), those mechanisms enable Member States to achieve the national targets defined in Annex I on the best cost-benefit basis, of technological developments, and the conclusions to be drawn to achieve the target of 20 % of energy from renewable sources at Community level.
On the basis of that report, the Commission shall submit, if appropriate, proposals to the European Parliament and the Council, addressing the above elements and in particular:
—
for the element contained in point (a), a modification of the minimum greenhouse gas emission saving referred to in that point, and
—
for the element contained in point (c), appropriate adjustments of the cooperation measures provided for in this Directive in order to improve their effectiveness for achieving the target of 20 %. Such proposals shall neither affect the 20 % target nor Member States’ control over national support schemes and cooperation measures.
9. In 2018, the Commission shall present a Renewable Energy Roadmap for the post-2020 period.
That roadmap shall, if appropriate, be accompanied by proposals to the European Parliament and the Council for the period after 2020. The roadmap shall take into account the experience of the implementation of this Directive and technological developments in energy from renewable sources.
10. In 2021, the Commission shall present a report reviewing the application of this Directive. That report shall, in particular, address the role of the following elements in having enabled Member States to achieve the national targets defined in Annex I on the best cost-benefit basis:
(a)
the process of preparing forecasts and national renewable energy action plans;
(b)
the effectiveness of the cooperation mechanisms;
(c)
technological developments in energy from renewable sources, including the development of the use of biofuels in commercial aviation;
(d)
the effectiveness of the national support schemes; and
(e)
the conclusions of the Commission reports referred to in paragraphs 8 and 9.

Transparency platform

1. The Commission shall establish an online public transparency platform. That platform shall serve to increase transparency, and facilitate and promote cooperation between Member States, in particular concerning statistical transfers referred to in Article 6 and joint projects referred to in Articles 7 and 9. In addition, the platform may be used to make public relevant information which the Commission or a Member State deems to be of key importance to this Directive and to the achievement of its objectives.
2. The Commission shall make public on the transparency platform the following information, where appropriate in aggregated form, preserving the confidentiality of commercially sensitive information:
(a)
Member States’ national renewable energy action plans;
(b)
Member States’ forecast documents referred to in Article 4(3), complemented as soon as possible with the Commission’s summary of excess production and estimated import demand;
(c)
Member States’ offers to cooperate on statistical transfers or joint projects, upon request of the Member State concerned;
(d)
the information referred to in Article 6(2) on the statistical transfers between Member States;
(e)
the information referred to in Article 7(2) and (3) and Article 9(4) and (5) on joint projects;
(f)
Member States’ national reports referred to in Article 22;
(g)
the Commission reports referred to in Article 23(3).
However, upon request of the Member State that submitted the information, the Commission shall not make public Member States’ forecast documents referred to in Article 4(3), or the information in Member States’ national reports referred to in Article 22(1)(l) and (m).

Committees

1. Except in the cases referred to in paragraph 2, the Commission shall be assisted by the Committee on Renewable Energy Sources.
2. For matters relating to the sustainability of biofuels and bioliquids, the Commission shall be assisted by the Committee on the Sustainability of Biofuels and Bioliquids.
3. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Articles 3 and 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.
4. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5a(1) to (4) and Article 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.

Amendments and repeal

1. In Directive 2001/77/EC, Article 2, Article 3(2), and Articles 4 to 8 shall be deleted with effect from 1 April 2010.
2. In Directive 2003/30/EC, Article 2, Article 3(2), (3) and (5), and Articles 5 and 6 shall be deleted with effect from 1 April 2010.
3. Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC shall be repealed with effect from 1 January 2012.

Transposition

1. Without prejudice to Article 4(1), (2) and (3), Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 5 December 2010.
When Member States adopt measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such a reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such a reference shall be laid down by the Member States.
2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the text of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Entry into force

This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following its publication in theOfficial Journal of the European Union.

Addressees

This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

A.   National overall targets

ANNEX INational overall targets for the share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy in 2020 (1)
| Share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy, 2005 (S2005) | Target for share of energy from renewable sources in gross final consumption of energy, 2020 (S2020)
Belgium | 2,2 % | 13 %
Bulgaria | 9,4 % | 16 %
Czech Republic | 6,1 % | 13 %
Denmark | 17,0 % | 30 %
Germany | 5,8 % | 18 %
Estonia | 18,0 % | 25 %
Ireland | 3,1 % | 16 %
Greece | 6,9 % | 18 %
Spain | 8,7 % | 20 %
France | 10,3 % | 23 %
Italy | 5,2 % | 17 %
Cyprus | 2,9 % | 13 %
Latvia | 32,6 % | 40 %
Lithuania | 15,0 % | 23 %
Luxembourg | 0,9 % | 11 %
Hungary | 4,3 % | 13 %
Malta | 0,0 % | 10 %
Netherlands | 2,4 % | 14 %
Austria | 23,3 % | 34 %
Poland | 7,2 % | 15 %
Portugal | 20,5 % | 31 %
Romania | 17,8 % | 24 %
Slovenia | 16,0 % | 25 %
Slovak Republic | 6,7 % | 14 %
Finland | 28,5 % | 38 %
Sweden | 39,8 % | 49 %
United Kingdom | 1,3 % | 15 %B. Indicative trajectoryThe indicative trajectory referred to in Article 3(2) shall consist of the following shares of energy from renewable sources:
S2005+ 0,20 (S2020– S2005), as an average for the two-year period 2011 to 2012;
S2005+ 0,30 (S2020– S2005), as an average for the two-year period 2013 to 2014;
S2005+ 0,45 (S2020– S2005), as an average for the two-year period 2015 to 2016; and
S2005+ 0,65 (S2020– S2005), as an average for the two-year period 2017 to 2018,
where
S2005= the share for that Member State in 2005 as indicated in the table in part A,
and
S2020= the share for that Member State in 2020 as indicated in the table in part A.

(1) In order to be able to achieve the national objectives set out in this Annex, it is underlined that the State aid guidelines for environmental protection recognise the continued need for national mechanisms of support for the promotion of energy from renewable sources.

ANNEX IINormalisation rule for accounting for electricity generated from hydropower and wind powerThe following rule shall be applied for the purpose of accounting for electricity generated from hydropower in a given Member State:

where:

N | = | reference year;
QN(norm) | = | normalised electricity generated by all hydropower plants of the Member State in yearN, for accounting purposes;
Qi | = | the quantity of electricity actually generated in yeariby all hydropower plants of the Member State measured in GWh, excluding production from pumped storage units using water that has previously been pumped uphill;
Ci | = | the total installed capacity, net of pumped storage, of all hydropower plants of the Member State at the end of yeari, measured in MW.The following rule shall be applied for the purpose of accounting for electricity generated from wind power in a given Member State:

where:

N | = | reference year;
QN(norm) | = | normalised electricity generated by all wind power plants of the Member State in yearN, for accounting purposes;
Qi | = | the quantity of electricity actually generated in yeariby all wind power plants of the Member State measured in GWh;
Cj | = | the total installed capacity of all the wind power plants of the Member State at the end of yearj, measured in MW;
n | = | 4 or the number of years preceding yearNfor which capacity and production data are available for the Member State in question, whichever is lower.

ANNEX IIIEnergy content of transport fuels
Fuel | Energy content by weight(lower calorific value, MJ/kg) | Energy content by volume(lower calorific value, MJ/l)
Bioethanol (ethanol produced from biomass) | 27 | 21
Bio-ETBE (ethyl-tertio-butyl-ether produced on the basis of bioethanol) | 36 (of which 37 % from renewable sources) | 27 (of which 37 % from renewable sources)
Biomethanol (methanol produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) | 20 | 16
Bio-MTBE (methyl-tertio-butyl-ether produced on the basis of bio-methanol) | 35 (of which 22 % from renewable sources) | 26 (of which 22 % from renewable sources)
Bio-DME (dimethylether produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) | 28 | 19
Bio-TAEE (tertiary-amyl-ethyl-ether produced on the basis of bioethanol) | 38 (of which 29 % from renewable sources) | 29 (of which 29 % from renewable sources)
Biobutanol (butanol produced from biomass, to be used as biofuel) | 33 | 27
Biodiesel (methyl-ester produced from vegetable or animal oil, of diesel quality, to be used as biofuel) | 37 | 33
Fischer-Tropsch diesel (a synthetic hydrocarbon or mixture of synthetic hydrocarbons produced from biomass) | 44 | 34
Hydrotreated vegetable oil (vegetable oil thermochemically treated with hydrogen) | 44 | 34
Pure vegetable oil (oil produced from oil plants through pressing, extraction or comparable procedures, crude or refined but chemically unmodified, when compatible with the type of engines involved and the corresponding emission requirements) | 37 | 34
Biogas (a fuel gas produced from biomass and/or from the biodegradable fraction of waste, that can be purified to natural gas quality, to be used as biofuel, or wood gas) | 50 | —
Petrol | 43 | 32
Diesel | 43 | 36
ANNEX IVCertification of installersThe certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes referred to in Article 14(3) shall be based on the following criteria:

1. | The certification or qualification process shall be transparent and clearly defined by the Member State or the administrative body they appoint.
2. | Biomass, heat pump, shallow geothermal and solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installers shall be certified by an accredited training programme or training provider.
3. | The accreditation of the training programme or provider shall be effected by Member States or administrative bodies they appoint. The accrediting body shall ensure that the training programme offered by the training provider has continuity and regional or national coverage. The training provider shall have adequate technical facilities to provide practical training, including some laboratory equipment or corresponding facilities to provide practical training. The training provider shall also offer in addition to the basic training, shorter refresher courses on topical issues, including on new technologies, to enable life-long learning in installations. The training provider may be the manufacturer of the equipment or system, institutes or associations.
4. | The training leading to installer certification or qualification shall include both theoretical and practical parts. At the end of the training, the installer must have the skills required to install the relevant equipment and systems to meet the performance and reliability needs of the customer, incorporate quality craftsmanship, and comply with all applicable codes and standards, including energy and eco-labelling.
5. | The training course shall end with an examination leading to a certificate or qualification. The examination shall include a practical assessment of successfully installing biomass boilers or stoves, heat pumps, shallow geothermal installations, solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installations.
6. | The certification schemes or equivalent qualification schemes referred to in Article 14(3) shall take due account of the following guidelines:(a)Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.(b)The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law.(c)The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.(d)The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.(e)The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification. | (a) | Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. | (i) | in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite; | (ii) | in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite; | (iii) | in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or | (iv) | a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. | (b) | The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law. | (c) | The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. | (i) | a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF); | (ii) | an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and | (iii) | the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. | (d) | The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. | (i) | the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations; | (ii) | the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration; | (iii) | the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and | (iv) | for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. | (e) | The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification.
(a) | Accredited training programmes should be offered to installers with work experience, who have undergone, or are undergoing, the following types of training:(i)in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;(ii)in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;(iii)in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or(iv)a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning. | (i) | in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite; | (ii) | in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite; | (iii) | in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or | (iv) | a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(i) | in the case of biomass boiler and stove installers: training as a plumber, pipe fitter, heating engineer or technician of sanitary and heating or cooling equipment as a prerequisite;
(ii) | in the case of heat pump installers: training as a plumber or refrigeration engineer and have basic electrical and plumbing skills (cutting pipe, soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, lagging, sealing fittings, testing for leaks and installation of heating or cooling systems) as a prerequisite;
(iii) | in the case of a solar photovoltaic or solar thermal installer: training as a plumber or electrician and have plumbing, electrical and roofing skills, including knowledge of soldering pipe joints, gluing pipe joints, sealing fittings, testing for plumbing leaks, ability to connect wiring, familiar with basic roof materials, flashing and sealing methods as a prerequisite; or
(iv) | a vocational training scheme to provide an installer with adequate skills corresponding to a three years education in the skills referred to in point (a), (b) or (c) including both classroom and workplace learning.
(b) | The theoretical part of the biomass stove and boiler installer training should give an overview of the market situation of biomass and cover ecological aspects, biomass fuels, logistics, fire protection, related subsidies, combustion techniques, firing systems, optimal hydraulic solutions, cost and profitability comparison as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of biomass boilers and stoves. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology and biomass fuels, such as pellets, and biomass related national and Community law.
(c) | The theoretical part of the heat pump installer training should give an overview of the market situation for heat pumps and cover geothermal resources and ground source temperatures of different regions, soil and rock identification for thermal conductivity, regulations on using geothermal resources, feasibility of using heat pumps in buildings and determining the most suitable heat pump system, and knowledge about their technical requirements, safety, air filtering, connection with the heat source and system layout. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for heat pumps, and of relevant national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);(ii)an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and(iii)the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system. | (i) | a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF); | (ii) | an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and | (iii) | the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(i) | a basic understanding of the physical and operation principles of a heat pump, including characteristics of the heat pump circle: context between low temperatures of the heat sink, high temperatures of the heat source, and the efficiency of the system, determination of the coefficient of performance (COP) and seasonal performance factor (SPF);
(ii) | an understanding of the components and their function within a heat pump circle, including the compressor, expansion valve, evaporator, condenser, fixtures and fittings, lubricating oil, refrigerant, superheating and sub-cooling and cooling possibilities with heat pumps; and
(iii) | the ability to choose and size the components in typical installation situations, including determining the typical values of the heat load of different buildings and for hot water production based on energy consumption, determining the capacity of the heat pump on the heat load for hot water production, on the storage mass of the building and on interruptible current supply; determine buffer tank component and its volume and integration of a second heating system.
(d) | The theoretical part of the solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installer training should give an overview of the market situation of solar products and cost and profitability comparisons, and cover ecological aspects, components, characteristics and dimensioning of solar systems, selection of accurate systems and dimensioning of components, determination of the heat demand, fire protection, related subsidies, as well as the design, installation, and maintenance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal installations. The training should also provide good knowledge of any European standards for technology, and certification such as Solar Keymark, and related national and Community law. The installer should demonstrate the following key competences:(i)the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;(ii)the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;(iii)the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and(iv)for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point. | (i) | the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations; | (ii) | the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration; | (iii) | the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and | (iv) | for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(i) | the ability to work safely using the required tools and equipment and implementing safety codes and standards and identify plumbing, electrical and other hazards associated with solar installations;
(ii) | the ability to identify systems and their components specific to active and passive systems, including the mechanical design, and determine the components’ location and system layout and configuration;
(iii) | the ability to determine the required installation area, orientation and tilt for the solar photovoltaic and solar water heater, taking account of shading, solar access, structural integrity, the appropriateness of the installation for the building or the climate and identify different installation methods suitable for roof types and the balance of system equipment required for the installation; and
(iv) | for solar photovoltaic systems in particular, the ability to adapt the electrical design, including determining design currents, selecting appropriate conductor types and ratings for each electrical circuit, determining appropriate size, ratings and locations for all associated equipment and subsystems and selecting an appropriate interconnection point.
(e) | The installer certification should be time restricted, so that a refresher seminar or event would be necessary for continued certification.

A.   Typical and default values for biofuels if produced with no net carbon emissions from land-use change

ANNEX VRules for calculating the greenhouse gas impact of biofuels, bioliquids and their fossil fuel comparators
Biofuel production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emission saving | Default greenhouse gas emission saving
sugar beet ethanol | 61 % | 52 %
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) | 32 % | 16 %
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) | 32 % | 16 %
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) | 45 % | 34 %
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 53 % | 47 %
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) | 69 % | 69 %
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 56 % | 49 %
sugar cane ethanol | 71 % | 71 %
the part from renewable sources of ethyl-tertio-butyl-ether (ETBE) | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of tertiary-amyl-ethyl-ether (TAEE) | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel | 45 % | 38 %
sunflower biodiesel | 58 % | 51 %
soybean biodiesel | 40 % | 31 %
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) | 36 % | 19 %
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 62 % | 56 %
waste vegetable or animal(*1)oil biodiesel | 88 % | 83 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed | 51 % | 47 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower | 65 % | 62 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) | 40 % | 26 %
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 68 % | 65 %
pure vegetable oil from rape seed | 58 % | 57 %
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas | 80 % | 73 %
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas | 84 % | 81 %
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas | 86 % | 82 %B. Estimated typical and default values for future biofuels that were not on the market or were on the market only in negligible quantities in January 2008, if produced with no net carbon emissions from land-use change
Biofuel production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emission saving | Default greenhouse gas emission saving
wheat straw ethanol | 87 % | 85 %
waste wood ethanol | 80 % | 74 %
farmed wood ethanol | 76 % | 70 %
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 95 % | 95 %
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 93 % | 93 %
waste wood dimethylether (DME) | 95 % | 95 %
farmed wood DME | 92 % | 92 %
waste wood methanol | 94 % | 94 %
farmed wood methanol | 91 % | 91 %
the part from renewable sources of methyl-tertio-butyl-ether (MTBE) | Equal to that of the methanol production pathway usedC. Methodology1. Greenhouse gas emissions from the production and use of transport fuels, biofuels and bioliquids shall be calculated as:
E=eec+el+ep+etd+eu–esca–eccs–eccr–eee,
where

E | = | total emissions from the use of the fuel;
eec | = | emissions from the extraction or cultivation of raw materials;
el | = | annualised emissions from carbon stock changes caused by land-use change;
ep | = | emissions from processing;
etd | = | emissions from transport and distribution;
eu | = | emissions from the fuel in use;
esca | = | emission saving from soil carbon accumulation via improved agricultural management;
eccs | = | emission saving from carbon capture and geological storage;
eccr | = | emission saving from carbon capture and replacement; and
eee | = | emission saving from excess electricity from cogeneration.Emissions from the manufacture of machinery and equipment shall not be taken into account.
2. Greenhouse gas emissions from fuels, E, shall be expressed in terms of grams of CO2equivalent per MJ of fuel, gCO2eq/MJ.
3. By derogation from point 2, for transport fuels, values calculated in terms of gCO2eq/MJ may be adjusted to take into account differences between fuels in useful work done, expressed in terms of km/MJ. Such adjustments shall be made only where evidence of the differences in useful work done is provided.
4. Greenhouse gas emission saving from biofuels and bioliquids shall be calculated as:
SAVING= (EF–EB)/EF,
where

EB | = | total emissions from the biofuel or bioliquid; and
EF | = | total emissions from the fossil fuel comparator.5. The greenhouse gases taken into account for the purposes of point 1 shall be CO2, N2O and CH4. For the purpose of calculating CO2equivalence, those gases shall be valued as follows:

CO2 | : | 1
N2O | : | 296
CH4 | : | 236. Emissions from the extraction or cultivation of raw materials, eec, shall include emissions from the extraction or cultivation process itself; from the collection of raw materials; from waste and leakages; and from the production of chemicals or products used in extraction or cultivation. Capture of CO2in the cultivation of raw materials shall be excluded. Certified reductions of greenhouse gas emissions from flaring at oil production sites anywhere in the world shall be deducted. Estimates of emissions from cultivation may be derived from the use of averages calculated for smaller geographical areas than those used in the calculation of the default values, as an alternative to using actual values.
7. Annualised emissions from carbon stock changes caused by land-use change, el, shall be calculated by dividing total emissions equally over 20 years. For the calculation of those emissions the following rule shall be applied:
el= (CSR–CSA) × 3,664 × 1/20 × 1/P–eB(2),
where

el | = | annualised greenhouse gas emissions from carbon stock change due to land-use change (measured as mass of CO2-equivalent per unit biofuel energy);
CSR | = | the carbon stock per unit area associated with the reference land use (measured as mass of carbon per unit area, including both soil and vegetation). The reference land use shall be the land use in January 2008 or 20 years before the raw material was obtained, whichever was the later;
CSA | = | the carbon stock per unit area associated with the actual land use (measured as mass of carbon per unit area, including both soil and vegetation). In cases where the carbon stock accumulates over more than one year, the value attributed toCSAshall be the estimated stock per unit area after 20 years or when the crop reaches maturity, whichever the earlier;
P | = | the productivity of the crop (measured as biofuel or bioliquid energy per unit area per year); and
eB | = | bonus of 29 gCO2eq/MJ biofuel or bioliquid if biomass is obtained from restored degraded land under the conditions provided for in point 8.8. The bonus of 29 gCO2eq/MJ shall be attributed if evidence is provided that the land:

(a) | was not in use for agriculture or any other activity in January 2008; and
(b) | falls into one of the following categories:(i)severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use;(ii)heavily contaminated land. | (i) | severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use; | (ii) | heavily contaminated land.
(i) | severely degraded land, including such land that was formerly in agricultural use;
(ii) | heavily contaminated land.The bonus of 29 gCO2eq/MJ shall apply for a period of up to 10 years from the date of conversion of the land to agricultural use, provided that a steady increase in carbon stocks as well as a sizable reduction in erosion phenomena for land falling under (i) are ensured and that soil contamination for land falling under (ii) is reduced.
9. The categories referred to in point 8(b) are defined as follows:

(a) | ‘severely degraded land’ means land that, for a significant period of time, has either been significantly salinated or presented significantly low organic matter content and has been severely eroded;
(b) | ‘heavily contaminated land’ means land that is unfit for the cultivation of food and feed due to soil contamination.Such land shall include land that has been the subject of a Commission decision in accordance with the fourth subparagraph of Article 18(4).
10. The Commission shall adopt, by 31 December 2009, guidelines for the calculation of land carbon stocks drawing on the 2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories — volume 4. The Commission guidelines shall serve as the basis for the calculation of land carbon stocks for the purposes of this Directive.
11. Emissions from processing,ep, shall include emissions from the processing itself; from waste and leakages; and from the production of chemicals or products used in processing.
In accounting for the consumption of electricity not produced within the fuel production plant, the greenhouse gas emission intensity of the production and distribution of that electricity shall be assumed to be equal to the average emission intensity of the production and distribution of electricity in a defined region. By derogation from this rule, producers may use an average value for an individual electricity production plant for electricity produced by that plant, if that plant is not connected to the electricity grid.
12. Emissions from transport and distribution,etd, shall include emissions from the transport and storage of raw and semi-finished materials and from the storage and distribution of finished materials. Emissions from transport and distribution to be taken into account under point 6 shall not be covered by this point.
13. Emissions from the fuel in use,eu, shall be taken to be zero for biofuels and bioliquids.
14. Emission saving from carbon capture and geological storageeccs, that have not already been accounted for inep, shall be limited to emissions avoided through the capture and sequestration of emitted CO2directly related to the extraction, transport, processing and distribution of fuel.
15. Emission saving from carbon capture and replacement,eccr, shall be limited to emissions avoided through the capture of CO2of which the carbon originates from biomass and which is used to replace fossil-derived CO2used in commercial products and services.
16. Emission saving from excess electricity from cogeneration,eee, shall be taken into account in relation to the excess electricity produced by fuel production systems that use cogeneration except where the fuel used for the cogeneration is a co-product other than an agricultural crop residue. In accounting for that excess electricity, the size of the cogeneration unit shall be assumed to be the minimum necessary for the cogeneration unit to supply the heat that is needed to produce the fuel. The greenhouse gas emission saving associated with that excess electricity shall be taken to be equal to the amount of greenhouse gas that would be emitted when an equal amount of electricity was generated in a power plant using the same fuel as the cogeneration unit.
17. Where a fuel production process produces, in combination, the fuel for which emissions are being calculated and one or more other products (co-products), greenhouse gas emissions shall be divided between the fuel or its intermediate product and the co-products in proportion to their energy content (determined by lower heating value in the case of co-products other than electricity).
18. For the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 17, the emissions to be divided shall beeec+el+ those fractions ofep,etdandeeethat take place up to and including the process step at which a co-product is produced. If any allocation to co-products has taken place at an earlier process step in the life-cycle, the fraction of those emissions assigned in the last such process step to the intermediate fuel product shall be used for this purpose instead of the total of those emissions.
In the case of biofuels and bioliquids, all co-products, including electricity that does not fall under the scope of point 16, shall be taken into account for the purposes of that calculation, except for agricultural crop residues, including straw, bagasse, husks, cobs and nut shells. Co-products that have a negative energy content shall be considered to have an energy content of zero for the purpose of the calculation.
Wastes, agricultural crop residues, including straw, bagasse, husks, cobs and nut shells, and residues from processing, including crude glycerine (glycerine that is not refined), shall be considered to have zero life-cycle greenhouse gas emissions up to the process of collection of those materials.
In the case of fuels produced in refineries, the unit of analysis for the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 17 shall be the refinery.
19. For biofuels, for the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 4, the fossil fuel comparator EFshall be the latest available actual average emissions from the fossil part of petrol and diesel consumed in the Community as reported under Directive 98/70/EC. If no such data are available, the value used shall be 83,8 gCO2eq/MJ.
For bioliquids used for electricity production, for the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 4, the fossil fuel comparator EFshall be 91 gCO2eq/MJ.
For bioliquids used for heat production, for the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 4, the fossil fuel comparator EFshall be 77 gCO2eq/MJ.
For bioliquids used for cogeneration, for the purposes of the calculation referred to in point 4, the fossil fuel comparator EFshall be 85 gCO2eq/MJ.
D. Disaggregated default values for biofuels and bioliquidsDisaggregated default values for cultivation: ‘
eec
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol | 12 | 12
wheat ethanol | 23 | 23
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced | 20 | 20
sugar cane ethanol | 14 | 14
the part from renewable sources of ETBE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel | 29 | 29
sunflower biodiesel | 18 | 18
soybean biodiesel | 19 | 19
palm oil biodiesel | 14 | 14
waste vegetable or animal(*2)oil biodiesel | 0 | 0
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed | 30 | 30
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower | 18 | 18
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil | 15 | 15
pure vegetable oil from rape seed | 30 | 30
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas | 0 | 0
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas | 0 | 0
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas | 0 | 0Disaggregated default values for processing (including excess electricity): ‘
ep
– eee
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol | 19 | 26
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) | 32 | 45
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) | 32 | 45
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) | 21 | 30
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 14 | 19
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) | 1 | 1
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 15 | 21
sugar cane ethanol | 1 | 1
the part from renewable sources of ETBE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel | 16 | 22
sunflower biodiesel | 16 | 22
soybean biodiesel | 18 | 26
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) | 35 | 49
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 13 | 18
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel | 9 | 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed | 10 | 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower | 10 | 13
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) | 30 | 42
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 7 | 9
pure vegetable oil from rape seed | 4 | 5
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas | 14 | 20
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas | 8 | 11
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas | 8 | 11Disaggregated default values for transport and distribution: ‘
etd
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol | 2 | 2
wheat ethanol | 2 | 2
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced | 2 | 2
sugar cane ethanol | 9 | 9
the part from renewable sources of ETBE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel | 1 | 1
sunflower biodiesel | 1 | 1
soybean biodiesel | 13 | 13
palm oil biodiesel | 5 | 5
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel | 1 | 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed | 1 | 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower | 1 | 1
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil | 5 | 5
pure vegetable oil from rape seed | 1 | 1
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas | 3 | 3
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas | 5 | 5
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas | 4 | 4Total for cultivation, processing, transport and distribution
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
sugar beet ethanol | 33 | 40
wheat ethanol (process fuel not specified) | 57 | 70
wheat ethanol (lignite as process fuel in CHP plant) | 57 | 70
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in conventional boiler) | 46 | 55
wheat ethanol (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 39 | 44
wheat ethanol (straw as process fuel in CHP plant) | 26 | 26
corn (maize) ethanol, Community produced (natural gas as process fuel in CHP plant) | 37 | 43
sugar cane ethanol | 24 | 24
the part from renewable sources of ETBE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
the part from renewable sources of TAEE | Equal to that of the ethanol production pathway used
rape seed biodiesel | 46 | 52
sunflower biodiesel | 35 | 41
soybean biodiesel | 50 | 58
palm oil biodiesel (process not specified) | 54 | 68
palm oil biodiesel (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 32 | 37
waste vegetable or animal oil biodiesel | 10 | 14
hydrotreated vegetable oil from rape seed | 41 | 44
hydrotreated vegetable oil from sunflower | 29 | 32
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process not specified) | 50 | 62
hydrotreated vegetable oil from palm oil (process with methane capture at oil mill) | 27 | 29
pure vegetable oil from rape seed | 35 | 36
biogas from municipal organic waste as compressed natural gas | 17 | 23
biogas from wet manure as compressed natural gas | 13 | 16
biogas from dry manure as compressed natural gas | 12 | 15E. Estimated disaggregated default values for future biofuels and bioliquids that were not on the market or were only on the market in negligible quantities in January 2008Disaggregated default values for cultivation: ‘
eec
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol | 3 | 3
waste wood ethanol | 1 | 1
farmed wood ethanol | 6 | 6
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 1 | 1
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 4 | 4
waste wood DME | 1 | 1
farmed wood DME | 5 | 5
waste wood methanol | 1 | 1
farmed wood methanol | 5 | 5
the part from renewable sources of MTBE | Equal to that of the methanol production pathway usedDisaggregated default values for processing (including excess electricity): ‘
ep
– eee
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol | 5 | 7
wood ethanol | 12 | 17
wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 0 | 0
wood DME | 0 | 0
wood methanol | 0 | 0
the part from renewable sources of MTBE | Equal to that of the methanol production pathway usedDisaggregated default values for transport and distribution: ‘
etd
’ as defined in part C of this Annex
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol | 2 | 2
waste wood ethanol | 4 | 4
farmed wood ethanol | 2 | 2
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 3 | 3
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 2 | 2
waste wood DME | 4 | 4
farmed wood DME | 2 | 2
waste wood methanol | 4 | 4
farmed wood methanol | 2 | 2
the part from renewable sources of MTBE | Equal to that of the methanol production pathway usedTotal for cultivation, processing, transport and distribution
Biofuel and bioliquid production pathway | Typical greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ) | Default greenhouse gas emissions(gCO2eq/MJ)
wheat straw ethanol | 11 | 13
waste wood ethanol | 17 | 22
farmed wood ethanol | 20 | 25
waste wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 4 | 4
farmed wood Fischer-Tropsch diesel | 6 | 6
waste wood DME | 5 | 5
farmed wood DME | 7 | 7
waste wood methanol | 5 | 5
farmed wood methanol | 7 | 7
the part from renewable sources of MTBE | Equal to that of the methanol production pathway used
(*1) Not including animal oil produced from animal by-products classified as category 3 material in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1774/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 3 October 2002 laying down health rules on animal by-products not intended for human consumption (1).
(1)
OJ L 273, 10.10.2002, p. 1.
(2) The quotient obtained by dividing the molecular weight of CO2 (44,010 g/mol) by the molecular weight of carbon (12,011 g/mol) is equal to 3,664.
(*2) Not including animal oil produced from animal by-products classified as category 3 material in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1774/2002.

ANNEX VIMinimum requirements for the harmonised template for national renewable energy action plans1. Expected final energy consumption:
Gross final energy consumption in electricity, transport and heating and cooling for 2020 taking into account the effects of energy efficiency policy measures.
2. National sectoral 2020 targets and estimated shares of energy from renewable sources in electricity, heating and cooling and transport:

(a) | target share of energy from renewable sources in electricity in 2020;
(b) | estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in electricity;
(c) | target share of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling in 2020;
(d) | estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling;
(e) | estimated trajectory for the share of energy from renewable sources in transport;
(f) | national indicative trajectory as referred to in Article 3(2) and part B of Annex I.3. Measures for achieving the targets:

(a) | overview of all policies and measures concerning the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources;
(b) | specific measures to fulfil the requirements of Articles 13, 14 and 16, including the need to extend or reinforce existing infrastructure to facilitate the integration of the quantities of energy from renewable sources needed to achieve the 2020 national target, measures to accelerate the authorisation procedures, measures to reduce non-technological barriers and measures concerning Articles 17 to 21;
(c) | support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in electricity applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(d) | support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in heating and cooling applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(e) | support schemes for the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources in transport applied by the Member State or a group of Member States;
(f) | specific measures on the promotion of the use of energy from biomass, especially for new biomass mobilisation taking into account:(i)biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports;(ii)measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors); | (i) | biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports; | (ii) | measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors);
(i) | biomass availability: both domestic potential and imports;
(ii) | measures to increase biomass availability, taking into account other biomass users (agriculture and forest-based sectors);
(g) | planned use of statistical transfers between Member States and planned participation in joint projects with other Member States and third countries:(i)the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States;(ii)the estimated potential for joint projects;(iii)the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production. | (i) | the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States; | (ii) | the estimated potential for joint projects; | (iii) | the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production.
(i) | the estimated excess production of energy from renewable sources compared to the indicative trajectory which could be transferred to other Member States;
(ii) | the estimated potential for joint projects;
(iii) | the estimated demand for energy from renewable sources to be satisfied by means other than domestic production.4. Assessments:

(a) | the total contribution expected of each renewable energy technology to meet the mandatory 2020 targets and the indicative trajectory for the shares of energy from renewable sources in electricity, heating and cooling and transport;
(b) | the total contribution expected of the energy efficiency and energy saving measures to meet the mandatory 2020 targets and the indicative trajectory for the shares of energy from renewable sources in electricity, heating and cooling and transport.

ANNEX VIIAccounting of energy from heat pumpsThe amount of aerothermal, geothermal or hydrothermal energy captured by heat pumps to be considered energy from renewable sources for the purposes of this Directive,ERES, shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:
ERES=Qusable* (1 – 1/SPF)
where

— | Qusable= the estimated total usable heat delivered by heat pumps fulfilling the criteria referred to in Article 5(4), implemented as follows: Only heat pumps for whichSPF > 1,15 * 1/ηshall be taken into account,
— | SPF= the estimated average seasonal performance factor for those heat pumps,
— | ηis the ratio between total gross production of electricity and the primary energy consumption for electricity production and shall be calculated as an EU average based on Eurostat data.By 1 January 2013, the Commission shall establish guidelines on how Member States are to estimate the values ofQusableand SPF for the different heat pump technologies and applications, taking into consideration differences in climatic conditions, especially very cold climates.